Technologie de stockage Intel® Rapid entreprise Linux * logiciel manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels - INTEL INTEL sur FNAC.COM  - Revenir à l'accueil

Technologie de stockage Intel® Rapid entreprise Linux * logiciel manuel de l'utilisateur   RSTe Intel® pour Linux * logiciel manuel de l'utilisateur (PDF) L'objectif de ce document est de permettre à un utilisateur configurer correctement et de configurer un système à l'aide de l'application MDADM Linux * pour Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise. Il explique comment set up et configuration, mais aussi une brève présentation des caractéristiques MDADM Linux. Nom du fichier : Intel® RSTe pour Linux * manuel de l'utilisateur logiciel Taille : 739 Ko Date : Juin 2012 Révision : 1.0 Remarque Les informations contenues dans ce document ne s'applique sur des systèmes intégrant un chipset pris en charge d'Intel, avec un système d'exploitation pris en charge. Vérifiez votre liste de compatibilité système ou la documentation pour déterminer si Linux est pris en charge.   Remarque : les fichiers PDF nécessitent Adobe Acrobat* Reader* Cela s'applique à : Technologie de stockage Intel® Rapid entreprise

 Brochure_journées_ré..> 18-Dec-2011 08:50  1.8M  

 INTEL-All-Wi-Fi-is-N..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58  2.5M  

 INTEL-Aspera-FASP-Sp..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  641K  

 INTEL-CLC-Genomics-W..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  644K  

 INTEL-Education.htm     23-Mar-2015 18:56  646K  

 INTEL-Fiche-produit-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03  1.9M  

 INTEL-Find-the-Best-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  560K  

 INTEL-Finding-an-app..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03  2.0M  

 INTEL-Glossaire.htm     24-Mar-2015 05:59  923K  

 INTEL-Intel-Code-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  629K  

 INTEL-Intel-Edison-G..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57  2.5M  

 INTEL-Intel-Educatio..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02  2.0M  

 INTEL-Intel-Xeon-Pro..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  640K  

 INTEL-LSI-incorpore-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01  2.0M  

 INTEL-Linux-Tutorial..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56  2.5M  

 INTEL-Look-Inside-In..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57  2.5M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56  2.6M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56  2.5M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59  2.3M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00  2.3M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00  2.3M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00  2.3M  

 INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59  2.3M  

 INTEL-Pentium-Proces..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04  1.9M  

 INTEL-Processeur-Int..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  628K  

 INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  670K  

 INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  679K  

 INTEL-Release_Notes_..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02  2.0M  

 INTEL-Ressources-tec..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  628K  

 INTEL-Salesforce-Dis..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  641K  

 INTEL-Telemedicine-S..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  560K  

 INTEL-Texas-Advanced..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  641K  

 INTEL-University-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57  641K  

 INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  712K  

 INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:55  722K  

 INTEL-Xeon-Processor..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  641K  

 INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  679K  

 INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56  712K  

 INTEL-download.intel..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04  1.9M  

 INTEL-intelbxrts2011..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58  2.5M  

 INTEL-intelthermalso..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00  2.3M  

 INTEL-motherboards-s..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01  2.2M  

 INTEL-rts2011ac_ther..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56  2.6M  

 INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03  1.9M  

 INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03  2.0M  

 INTELdocumentation.htm  26-Jan-2012 18:19  7.3M  

 getting_started_ampl..> 18-Dec-2011 08:49  2.1M  

 getting_started_c.pdf   18-Dec-2011 08:50   85K  

 mklman.pdf              18-Dec-2011 08:55   18M  

Imprimantes       Téléphones

      GSM            Informatique

Ordinateurs            Galaxy

    Photo                  TV  

Electroménager 

Samsung Galaxy Gear: A Long Time Coming

Götze joins #GALAXY11

Illustrator Marion Deuchars on the simple joy of Dot, Circle, Box with GALAXY Note 3

Samsung Memory Solutions Forum - Highlights

Samsung Memory Solutions Forum - Opening

Samsung Memory Solutions Forum - Future Technology

Samsung VNAND PR Video

Samsung SSD Solutions - David Lin

Samsung SSD 840 EVO - Jonathan da Silva

Samsung SSD Leadership - Jim Elliott

Redesigning Flash Storage Technology - Keun Soo Jo

Samsung Galaxy Note 3 - Tutoriel S Beam

Samsung CONVERGENCE -- Samsung Link

Samsung Galaxy Note 10.1 Edition 2014 -- Tutoriel Pen Window

Samsung Galaxy Note 10.1 Edition 2014 -- Tutoriel Capture

Samsung Galaxy Note 3 - Tutoriel Comment paramétrer votre Note 3

Samsung Galaxy Gear - Tutoriel Appels et Messages

 Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Air-View-Tutoriel-Video

Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Air Gesture   - Tutoriel - Video

Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Lecteur optique  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung - GALAXY S4 - Smart Scroll  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung GALAXY S4 - ChatOn  - Tutoriel - Video

 Samsung GALAXY S4 - S Translator  - Tutoriel - Video

Samsung Games, les meilleurs jeux optimisés pour votre smartphone ou votre tablette Samsung

 Samsung-TV-3D-TV-LED..> 23-Mar-2015 17:32  1.6M  

 Samsung-Mutiroom_Lin..> 23-Mar-2015 17:31  1.6M  

 Samsung-FRA-NUDVBEUH..> 23-Mar-2015 17:31  2.0M  

 Samsung-ENG-NUDVBEUH..> 23-Mar-2015 17:31  1.1M  

 Samsung-[Mutiroom_Li..> 23-Mar-2015 17:31  1.1M  

 Samsung-[HU7500-XNZF..> 23-Mar-2015 17:31  827K  

 Samsung-TV-3D-TV-LED..> 23-Mar-2015 17:30  1.2M  

 Samsung-FRA-X14DVBEU..> 23-Mar-2015 17:30  1.2M  

 Samsung-ENG-X14DVBEU..> 23-Mar-2015 17:30  1.5M  

 Samsung-Mutiroom_Lin..> 23-Mar-2015 17:30  1.2M  

 Samsung-SM-T800_UM_O..> 23-Mar-2015 17:29  1.7M  

 Samsung- Tablettes-G..> 23-Mar-2015 17:29  1.5M  

 Samsung-SM-T800_QSG_..> 23-Mar-2015 17:29  1.9M  

 Samsung-SM-T800_UM_E..> 23-Mar-2015 17:29  1.9M  

 Samsung-Televisions-..> 20-Mar-2015 18:41  6.8M  

 Samsung-Tablettes-ta..> 20-Mar-2015 18:39  2.7M  

 Samsung-SM-T530_UM_O..> 20-Mar-2015 18:38  2.7M  

 Samsung-SM-T530_UM_E..> 20-Mar-2015 18:38  2.8M  

 Samsung-Tablettes-Ga..> 20-Mar-2015 18:38  2.9M  

 Samsung-SM-T230_UM_E..> 20-Mar-2015 18:37  2.9M  

 Samsung-SM-T230_UM_O..> 20-Mar-2015 18:37  3.0M  

 Samsung-Smartphones-..> 20-Mar-2015 18:36  3.1M  

 Samsung-GT-S7390G_UM..> 20-Mar-2015 18:36  3.1M  

 Samsung-Galaxy-Camer..> 20-Mar-2015 18:35  3.1M  

 Samsung-EK-GC100_UM_..> 20-Mar-2015 18:35  3.3M  

 Samsung-EK-GC100_UM_..> 20-Mar-2015 18:34  3.4M  

 Samsung-Smartphones-..> 20-Mar-2015 18:34  3.4M  

 Samsung-GT-S7390_UM_..> 20-Mar-2015 18:33  3.6M  

 Samsung-GT-S7390_UM_..> 20-Mar-2015 18:32  3.7M  

 Samsung-Smartphones-..> 20-Mar-2015 18:32  3.8M  

 Samsung-Safety_infor..> 20-Mar-2015 18:31  5.0M  

 Samsung-Smartphones-..> 20-Mar-2015 18:30  5.0M  

and keys simultaneously when prompted during the Power-On Self Test (POST). Refer to Figure 2. Figure 2. User Prompt NOTE: The hard drive(s) and hard drive information listed for your system can differ from the following example. 4.3 Version Identification To identify the specific version of the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM integrated into the system BIOS, enter the option ROM user interface. The version number is located in the top right corner with the following format: vX.Y.W.XXXX, where X and Y are the major and minor version numbers. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 27 4.4 RAID Volume Creation Use the following steps to create a RAID volume using the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager user interface: Note: The following procedure should only be used with a newly-built system or if you are reinstalling your operating system. The following procedure should not be used to migrate an existing system to RAID 0. If you wish to create matrix RAID volumes after the operating system software is loaded, they should be created using the MDADM tool in the Linux distribution. 1. Press the and keys simultaneously when the following window appears during POST: 2. Select option 1. Create RAID Volume and press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 28 3. Type in a volume name and press the key, or press the key to accept the default name. 4. Select the RAID level by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the available values, then press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 29 5. Press the key to select the physical disks. A dialog similar to the following will appear: 6. Select the appropriate number of hard drives by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the list of available hard drives. .Press the key to select a drive. When you have finished selecting hard drives, press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 30 7. Unless you have selected RAID 1, select the strip size by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the available values, then press the key. 8. Select the volume capacity and press the key. The default value indicates the maximum volume capacity using the selected disks. If less than the maximum volume capacity is chosen, creation of a second volume is needed to utilize the remaining space (i.e. a matrix RAID configuration). Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 31 9. At the Create Volume prompt, press the key to create the volume. The following prompt will appear: 10. Press the key to confirm volume creation. 11. To exit the option ROM user interface, select option 5. Exit and press the key. 12. Press the key again to confirm exit. Note: To change any of the information before the volume creation has been confirmed, you must exit the Create Volume process and restart it. Press the key to exit the Create Volume process. Volume Creation Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 32 5 Volume Creation RAID volumes can be created using the mdadm command line utility. Mdadm supports the Intel Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM) meta data format when specified with the IMSM meta data option. 5.1 RAID Volume Creation Warning: Creating a RAID volume will permanently delete any existing data on the selected hard drives. Back up all important data before beginning these steps. Below is an example to create a RAID5 volume with 6 disks: 1. First a container of Intel IMSM metadata must be created. mdadm -C /dev/md0 /dev/sd[b-g] –n 6 –e imsm Continue creating array? y mdadm: container /dev/md0 prepared. The command creates a RAID container with Intel® Matrix Storage Manager metadata format. The device node for the container will be /dev/md0. In this example disks sdb, sdc, sdd, sde, sdf, and sdg are used for this RAID set, and the total number of disks is 6. The wildcard expression /dev/sd[b-g] can be used to specify the range of disks. Although individual disks can be used to list out all the disks. i.e. /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde /dev/sdf /dev/sdg 2. Next a RAID 5 volume is created. mdadm -C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 6 –l 5 The command creates a RAID 5 volume /dev/md/Volume0 within the /dev/md0 container. The following command parameters may also be used in conjunction to give finer control for the creation of the RAID volume. -n : Number of active RAID devices to be used in the volume. -x : Specifies the number of spare devices in the initial array. -c : Specifies the chunk (stripe) size in Kilobytes. The default is 512KiB. -l : Specifies the RAID level. The options are 0, 1, 5, 10. -z : Specifies the size (in Kilobytes) of space dedicated on each disk to the RAID volume. This must be a multiple of the chunk size. For example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5 –z $((100*1024*1024)) The command above creates a RAID volume inside the /dev/md0 container with 100GB of disk space used on each disk member. Volume Creation June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 33 5.2 Filesystem Creation on RAID Volume After the RAID volume has been created, a filesystem can be created in order to allow the mounting of the RAID volume. mkfs.ext4 /dev/md/Volume0 Once the filesystem has been created, it can be mounted: mount /dev/md/Volume0 /mnt/myraidvolume 5.3 RAID Volume Creation Examples To create a RAID 0 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 0 To create a RAID 1 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 1 To create a RAID 5 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5 To create a RAID 10 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 4 –l 10 Note: To create multiple RAID volumes in the same container, they MUST span equal number of disks. For example, in order to have a RAID 0 volume and a RAID 5 volume in the same container, four disks must be used for both volumes. Volume Creation Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 34 5.4 Adding a Spare Disk Adding a spare disk allows immediate reconstruction of the RAID volume when a device failure is detected. Mdraid will mark the failed device as “bad” and start reconstruction with the first available spare disk. The spare disk can also be used to grow the RAID volume. The spare disks sit idle during normal operations. When using mdadm with IMSM meta data, the spare disk added to a container is dedicated to that specific container. The following command adds a spare disk to the designated container. mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sde 5.5 Creating RAID Configuration File A configuration file can be created to record the existing RAID volumes. The information can be extracted from the existing RAID setup. The configuration file is typically stored at the default location of /etc/mdadm.conf. This allows a consistent assemble of the appropriate RAID volumes. mdadm -E –s –-config=mdadm.conf > /etc/mdadm.conf 5.6 RAID Volume Initialization / Resync Immediately after a RAID volume has been created, initialization (or resync) commences if the RAID level is 1, 10, or 5. During this time, any data stored on RAID level 5 volumes are not guaranteed to be safe if failure occurs. If a disk failure happens during the initialization time, recovery will not be possible. This scenario is also true during RAID volume rebuilds. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 35 6 Volume Operations mdadm provides various options to assemble, monitor, examine, or stop RAID volumes. 6.1 Erasing RAID Metadata Having incorrect and bad RAID metadata can cause RAID volumes to be assembled incorrectly. The metadata can be erased with the following command to make sure the disk is clean. This operation does not attempt to wipe existing user data. mdadm --zero-superblock /dev/sdb Multiple disks can be specified to clear the superblock at the same time. 6.2 Volume Assemble RAID volumes can be created via OROM user interface or mdadm. Inactive RAID volumes that are created can be activated using the assemble option with mdadm. The following command scans for the mdadm configuration file at /etc/mdadm.conf in order to assemble the RAID volumes. If the configuration file is not found, it scans all available disks for RAID member disks and assembles all the RAID volumes: mdadm –A –s To manually assemble and activate RAID volumes without the configuration file, the following example can be used: mdadm –A /dev/md0 –e imsm /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd mdadm –I /dev/md0 The first command assembles the container with the name /dev/md0 using the provided list of disks. The second command assembles and activates appropriate volumes with the device nodes. Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 36 6.3 Stopping the Volumes To stop all active RAID volumes, the following command can be used. Mdadm will scan for and stop all running RAID volumes and containers. mdadm –S –s However, RAID volume names can be specified to stop the volume directly. mdadm –S /dev/md/Volume0 And to stop a container, the following command can be used. mdadm –S /dev/md0 6.4 Reporting RAID Information Use the following command, to print out details about a RAID container or volume: mdadm –D /dev/md0 /dev/md0: Version : imsm Raid Level : container Total Devices : 5 Working Devices : 5 UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d Member Arrays : Number Major Minor RaidDevice 0 8 32 - /dev/sdc 1 8 48 - /dev/sdd 2 8 80 - /dev/sdf 3 8 96 - /dev/sdg 4 8 16 - /dev/sdb Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 37 To display details about a RAID volume: mdadm –D /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md/Volume0: Container : /dev/md0, member 0 Raid Level : raid5 Array Size : 39999488 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB) Used Dev Size : 9999872 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB) Raid Devices : 5 Total Devices : 5 Update Time : Thu Jun 17 07:40:23 2010 State : clean Active Devices : 5 Working Devices : 5 Failed Devices : 0 Spare Devices : 0 Layout : left-asymmetric Chunk Size : 128K UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945 Number Major Minor RaidDevice State 4 8 96 0 active sync /dev/sdg 3 8 48 1 active sync /dev/sdd 2 8 32 2 active sync /dev/sdc 1 8 16 3 active sync /dev/sdb 0 8 80 4 active sync /dev/sdf Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 38 To print out RAID details about a member disk: mdadm –E /dev/sdb /dev/sdb: Magic : Intel Raid ISM Cfg Sig. Version : 1.2.04 Orig Family : e0935e91 Family : a830104b Generation : 00000037 UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d Checksum : 3ba66395 correct MPB Sectors : 2 Disks : 5 RAID Devices : 1 Disk02 Serial : 9QMCLMDM State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) [vol0]: UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945 RAID Level : 5 Members : 5 Slots : [UUUUU] This Slot : 3 Array Size : 79998976 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB) Per Dev Size : 19999744 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB) Sector Offset : 0 Num Stripes : 19531 Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 39 Chunk Size : 128 KiB Reserved : 0 Migrate State : idle Map State : normal Dirty State : clean Disk00 Serial : 9QMCLYES State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk01 Serial : 9QMCLYB9 State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk03 Serial : 9QMCM7XY State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk04 Serial : 9QMCF38Z State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 40 To get the most current status on all RAID volumes, the file /proc/mdstat can be examined. This file is a special file that is updated continuously to show the status of all the containers, and RAID volumes. In the example below, the status shows that currently available RAID supports are level 4, 5, and 6. md126 is the active RAID volume with RAID level 5 and 128k stripe size. The RAID volume contains 5 disks that are all in normal (UP) status. md127 is the IMSM container for the RAID volume. cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdg[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU] md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdg[3](S) sdf[2](S) sdd[1](S) sdc[0](S) 11285 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Note: When creating containers and volumes, one will notice that in /proc/mdstat the device names will not match up. For example, when /dev/md/Volume0 is created, md127 will be shown in /proc/mdstat and other detail output as well. The /dev/md/Volume0 is created as an alias of /dev/md127 device node. Looking in the /dev/md directory, one will notice that /dev/md/Volume0 is a soft link to /dev/md127. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 41 6.5 To Fail an Active Drive In order to mark an active drive as a failed drive (or set as faulty) manually, the following command can to be issued: mdadm –f /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/sdb 6.6 Remove a Failed Drive To remove a failed drive, the following command needs to be executed. This only works on a container based RAID volume. mdadm –r /dev/md0 /dev/sdb 6.7 Report RAID Details from BIOS To see what Intel® RAID support is provided by the BIOS issue the command: mdadm -–detail-platform Platform : Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Version : 8.9.0.1023 RAID Levels : raid0 raid1 raid10 raid5 Chunk Sizes : 4k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k Max Disks : 6 Max Volumes : 2 I/O Controller : /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1f.2 Port0 : /dev/sda (3MT0585Z) Port1 : - non-disk device (ATAPI DVD D DH16D4S) - Port2 : /dev/sdb (WD-WCANK2850263) Port3 : /dev/sdc (3MT005ML) Port4 : /dev/sdd (WD-WCANK2850441) Port5 : /dev/sde (WD-WCANK2852905) Port6 : - no device attached – Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 42 6.8 Logging Various messages coming from MDRAID subsystem in the kernel are logged. Typically the messages are stored in the log file /var/log/messages in popular Linux distributions with other kernel status, warning, and error outputs. Below is an example snippet of what the log may look like: Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: allocated 5334kB for md126 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 0: w=1 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 1: w=2 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 2: w=3 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 3: w=4 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 4: w=5 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: raid level 5 set md126 active with 5 out of 5 devices, algorithm 0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: RAID5 conf printout: Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: --- rd:5 wd:5 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 0, o:1, dev:sdg Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 1, o:1, dev:sdd Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 2, o:1, dev:sdc Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 3, o:1, dev:sdb Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 4, o:1, dev:sdf Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: detected capacity change from 0 to 40959475712 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: unknown partition table Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md: md127 switched to read-write mode. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 43 6.9 Raid Level Migration The RAID level migration feature allows changing of the RAID volume level without loss of data stored on the volume. It does not require re-installation of the operating system. All applications and data remain intact. The following table shows the available migration support with Intel© IMSM metadata. You must have the number of drives necessary for the level you’re converting to as spare drives. Migration capabilities with IMSM Destination  Source level RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 RAID 5 RAID 0 N/A No Yes Yes RAID 1 Yes N/A No *Yes RAID 10 Yes No N/A *Yes RAID 5 No No No N/A *Migrations from RAID 1 to RAID 5 or from RAID 10 to RAID 5 must be done in two steps. A conversion to RAID 0 first is necessary before converting to RAID 5. During the second step (migration from RAID 0 to RAID 5) the addition of spare drive(s) may be needed. There is an example of migration from RAID 1 to RAID 5 below: 1) A RAID 1 is shown below: cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 [2/2] [UU] md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 44 2) First step is to migrate from RAID 1 to RAID 0 mdadm –G /dev/md127 –l 0 cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sdb[1] 102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: 3) Use Online Capacity Expansion to go from 1-disk RAID 0 to 2-disk RAID 0: # mdadm -G /dev/md0 -n 2 # cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: 4) Adding a spare disk to the container: mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sdc cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 45 5) Migrating from RAID 0 to RAID 5: mdadm -G /dev/md127 -l 5 --layout=left-asymmetric cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdc[3] sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 64k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: ***NOTE: IMSM metadata supports only the left-asymmetric layout of RAID 5. The default layout is left-symmetric, so during migrations the layout for IMSM metadata has to be specified explicitly. Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 46 6.10 Freezing Reshape If a RAID volume is in the process of reshape, the reshape process should be frozen during the initramfs booting phase and resumed when the system is fully up. Starting with mdadm 3.2.5 these features are supported. Distributions from the Operating System Vendors should have taken cared of this in their init script setup utilities, but details are described below for customers that are building their own distribution. The parameters --freeze-reshape is used to pause the reshape operation during system start up initramfs phase. For example: mdadm –As --freeze-reshape When reshape is frozen, the status provided by /proc/mdstat will denote the state with a hypen such as “super external:-md127/0” instead of “super external:/md127/0”: Personalities : [raid5] md127 : active raid5 sda[2] sdb[1] sdc[0] 10485760 blocks super external:-md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] [>....................] reshape = 2.2% (116736/5242880) finish=501934.9min speed=0K/sec md0 : inactive sda[2](S) sdb[1](S) sdc[0](S) 9459 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Once the system is up, the following example with the parameter --continue can be used to resume the reshape process: mdadm –G /dev/md0 --continue or with a volume: mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 --continue Online Capacity Expansion June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 47 7 Online Capacity Expansion The Online Capacity Expansion (OLCE) feature allows the capacity expansion of the RAID volumes. With the “online” feature, the operation can be performed while a filesystem is mounted on top of the RAID volume. This allows avoiding having down time from taking the RAID volume offline for service or loss of data. The size of a RAID volume can be increased by adding additional disks to the RAID container or (only if it is the last volume in the container) by expanding it on existing unused disk space available to the RAID volume. In the first case if two volumes exist in the same container, OLCE is performed automatically on both volumes (one by one) because of the requirement that all volumes must span the same set of disks for IMSM. The following commands can be issued to grow the RAID volume. The first assumes that it is the last volume in the container and we have additional room to grow, and the second assumes that an additional disk has been added to the IMSM container. 1) If there is additional room in the last volume of the container, the volume can be grown to the maximum available capacity. This feature is only available starting with mdadm v3.2.5: mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 –-size=max 2) The example below adds a single disk to the RAID container and then grows the volume(s). Because IMSM volumes inside a container must span the same number of disks, all volumes are expanded. A backup file that MDRAID will store the backup superblock is specified. This file must not reside on any of the active RAID volumes that are being worked on. mdadm –a /dev/md0 /dev/sde mdadm –G /dev/md0 –n 4 --backup-file=/tmp/backup RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 48 8 RAID Monitoring There are two components within the mdadm tools to monitor events for the RAID volumes. Mdadm can be used to monitor general RAID events, and mdmon provides the ability to monitor “metadata event” occurrences such as disk failures, clean-todirty transitions, and etc for external metadata based RAID volumes. The kernel provides the ability to report such actions to the userspace via sysfs, and mdmon takes action accordingly with the monitoring capability. The mdmon polls the sysfs looking for changes in the entries array_state, sync_action, and per disk state attribute files. 8.1 mdmon The mdadm monitor, mdmon, is automatically started when MDRAID volumes are activated by mdadm through creation or assemble. However, the daemon can be started manually: mdmon /dev/md0 The --all parameter can be used in place of the container name to star monitors for all active containers. Mdmon must be started in the initramfs in order to support an external metadata RAID array as the root filesystem. Mdmon needs to be restarted in the new namespace once the final root filesystem has been mounted. mdmon --takeover --all RAID Monitoring June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 49 8.2 Monitoring Using mdadm Mdadm monitoring can be started with the following command line: mdadm --monitor –-scan --daemonise –-syslog The command above runs mdadm as a daemon to monitor all md devices. All events will be reported to syslog. The user can monitor the syslog and filter for specific mdadm events generated. There are additional command line parameters that can be passed to mdmon at startup. Table 5 mdadm monitor Parameters Long form Short form Description --mail -m Provide mail address to email alerts or failures to. --program or --alert -p Provide program to run when an event is detected. --delay -d Seconds of delay between polling state. Default is 60s. --config -c Specify a different config file. --scan -s Find mail-address/program settings in config file. --oneshot -1 Check for degraded arrays and then exit. --test -t Generate a TestMessage event against each array at startup. --syslog -y Cause all events to be reported through ’syslog’. The messages have facility of ’daemon’ and varying priorities. --increment -r Give a percentage increment. mdadm will generate RebuildNN events with the given percentage increment. --daemonise -f Run as background daemon if monitoring. --pid-file -i Write the pid of the daemon process to specified file. --no-sharing N/A This inhibits the functionality for moving spares between arrays. RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 50 The following table presents all the events that are reported by mdadm monitor: Table 6 Monitoring Events Event Name Description DeviceDisappeared An MD array previously configured no longer exists. RebuildStarted An MD array started reconstruction. RebuildNN NN is a 2 digit number that indicates rebuild has passed that many percent of the total. For example, Rebuild50 will trigger an event when 50% of rebuild has completed. RebuildFinished An MD array has completed rebuild. Fail1 An active component of an array has been marked faulty. FailSpare1 A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a faulty device has failed. SpareActive A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a fault device is rebuilt and active. NewArrary A new MD array has been detected in /proc/mdstat. DegradedArray1 A newly discovered array appears to be degraded. MoveSpare A spare drive has been moved from one array in a spare group to another array to replace a failed disk. Both arrays are labeled with the same spare group. SparesMissing1 The spare device(s) does not exist in comparison to the config file when the MD array is first discovered. TestMessage1 Discovered new array while --test flag was used. 1: The events indicated cause email to be sent. RAID Monitoring June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 51 8.3 Configuration File for Monitoring Mdadm will check the mdadm.conf config file to extract the appropriate entries for monitoring. The following entries we can set to pass to mdmon: MAILADDR: This config entry allows an E-mail address to be used for alerts. Only one email address should be used. MAILFROM: This config entry sets the email address to appear from the alert emails. The default from would be the “root” user with no domain. This entry overrides the default. PROGRAM: This config entry sets the program to run when mdmon detects potentially interesting events on any of the arrays it is monitoring. There can be only one PROGRAM line in the config file. RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 52 8.4 Examples of monitored events in syslog In this example we have a RAID5 volume: Personalities : [raid5] md127 : active raid5 sdd[2] sdc[1] sdb[0] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] md0 : inactive sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: In order to monitor all RAID containers a mdadm daemon can be started using the following command: mdadm --monitor --scan --daemonise --syslog All events now will be written to syslog. After a mdadm daemon has been started the following messages can be found in /var/log/messages or the corresponding syslog file the distribution has designated: May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device /dev/md0 When a spare disk has been added: May 15 09:59:07 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md device /dev/md127, component device /dev/sde When an OLCE command is finished: May 15 09:59:16 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md device /dev/md127 When a disk fails: May 15 10:01:04 myhost mdadm[9863]: Fail event detected on md device /dev/md127, component device /dev/sdb When a rebuild finishes: May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md device /dev/md127 When all MD devices are stopped: May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on md device /dev/md0 Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 53 9 Recovery of RAID Volumes Recovery is one of the most important aspects of using RAID. It allows rebuilding of RAID volumes on a system when disk failure occurs without the loss of any data. Recovery is only possible in the case of following RAID levels: 1, 5, and 10. General recovery is possible if no more than one disk fails. However in the case of RAID 10, recovery may be possible even if two out of four disks fail if the two failed disks are members of two different RAID 1S. If both disks of one of the RAID 1 fails, recovery is not possible. 9.1 Removing Failed Disk(s) Below is the output of /proc/mdstat with an active RAID5 volume with IMSM metadata where md127 is the IMSM container and md126 is the RAID 5 volume. The RAID 5 volume contains disks /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd, /dev/sde, /dev/sdf. Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active (read-only) raid5 sde[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU] md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdf[3](S) sde[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdd[0](S) 11285 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: When a disk fails, in this instance /dev/sde, the following is displayed in /proc/mdstat: Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU] md0 : inactive sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 1045 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: The failed disk can be removed from the RAID volume by the following command: mdadm /dev/md/Volume0 --fail detached --remove detached or from the container by the following command: mdadm --remove /dev/md0 /dev/sde Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 54 9.2 Rebuilding At this point, this RAID volume is running in degraded mode. However, it is still operational. If there are spares disks available in the container, rebuild of the RAID volume would automatically commence. A spare can also be manually added to start the rebuild process: mdadm –add /dev/md0 /dev/sdg Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdg[5] sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU] [==>..................] recovery = 11.5% (1154588/9999872) finish=2.6min speed=54980K/sec md0 : inactive sdg[5](S) sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 1254 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 55 9.3 Auto Rebuild Auto-rebuild allows a RAID volume to be automatically rebuilt when a disk fails. There are 3 different scenarios this can happen: 1. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with no spare disk in the container. If one of the disks in the volume fails it enters degraded mode. When a spare disk is added manually to the container, rebuild starts automatically (as referenced in section 9.2 Rebuilding). 2. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with at least one spare disk in the container. If one of the disks in the volume fails, the spare disk is automatically pulled in, and the rebuild starts. 3. There are two containers . One container has a spare disk and the other one does not. If mdadm is running in monitor mode, and the appropriate policy is configured in the mdadm.conf file, a spare disk will be moved automatically from one container to the other if there’s a RAID volume failure that requires a spare disk for rebuild. For scenario number three, an example is presented below: 1. Create container ”md1” with 3 disks: mdadm –C /dev/md1 –e imsm –n3 /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc 2. Create RAID1 volume “Volume1” in container”md1”, disk /dev/sdc remains a spare disk: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume1 –l1 –n2 /dev/sda /dev/sdb 3. Create container “md2” with 2 disks: mdadm –C /dev/md2 –e imsm –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 56 4. Create RAID1 volume “Volume2” in container ”md2”, with no spare disks: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume2 –l1 –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sde[1] sdd[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU] md2 : inactive sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 57 5. Save configuration file: mdadm –Ebs > /etc/mdadm.conf 6. Add the policy with the same domain and the same action for all disks to the configuration file, which allows the spare to move from one container to another for rebuild: echo "POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsm action=spare-sameslot" >> /etc/mdadm.conf The configuration file in /etc/mdadm.conf may look like below: ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88 spares=1 ARRAY /dev/md/Volume2 container=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88 member=0 UUID=76e507f1:fadb9a42:da46d784:2e2166e8 ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7 ARRAY /dev/md/Volume1 container=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7 member=0 UUID=25025077:fba9cfab:e4ad212d:3e5fce11 POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsms action=spare-same-slot 7. Make sure mdadm is in monitor mode: mdadm --monitor --scan –daemonise Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 58 8. Fail one of the disks in volume “Volume2”, the volume without a spare: mdadm --fail /dev/md/Volume2 /dev/sdd The spare disk /dev/sdc should automatically moves from the container “md1” to the container “md2” and the rebuild of “Volume2” starts automatically: Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/1] [_U] [========>............] recovery = 41.2% (432896/1048576) finish=0.0min speed=144298K/sec md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 5363 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 59 When the rebuild has completed: Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU] md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 5363 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: SGPIO Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 60 10 SGPIO Serial General Purpose Input/Output (SGPIO) is a four signal bus used between a storage controller and a backplane. The official name designated to SGPIO is SFF-8485 by the Small Form Factor (SFF) Committee. SGPIO provides the capability of blinking LEDs on disk arrays and storage backplanes to indicate statuses. 10.1 SGPIO Utility Linux uses the utility SGPIO to control the LEDs on a hard disk drive bay enclosure. The following table describes the options the SGPIO utility provides: Table 7 SGPIO Utility Options -h, --help Displays the help text -V, --version Displays the utility version and AHCI SGPIO specification version -d, --disk Disk name of LED location. i.e. sda, sdb, sdc. Can be comma delimited list -p, --port SATA port number of LED location. Can be used when a disk name is no longer valid. i.e. 0, 1, 2, 4. Can be comma delimited list -s, --status The LED status to set to: locate, fault, rebuild, off -f, --freq The frequency of the LED blinking in Hz between 1 and 10. For example, the following command sets sda, sdb, and sdc LEDs to fault with a frequency of 3Hz Flash rate: sgpio –d sda,sdb,sdc –s fault –f 3 SGPIO June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 61 10.2 Ledctl Utility The LEDs can also be manipulated via the ledctl utility. The ledctl utility has been verified to work with Intel® storage controllers such as the AHCI and SCU. Below are some examples on using the ledctl utility: To locate a single block device: ledctl locate=/dev/sda To locate a RAID device ledctl locate=/dev/md127 To set a rebuild pattern for 4 block devices in a RAID: ledctl rebuild={/sys/block/sd[a-d]} To turn off status and failure LED for a given device: ledctl off=/dev/sda,/dev/sdb The ledctl utility has the command format of: ledctl [OPTIONS] pattern_name=list_of_devices The table below shows all the options: Table 8 ledctl options Parameter Usage -c or --config= Specify path to a configuration file or override the global or default config file. (Although the utility currently does not use a config file). -l or --log= Sets the path to a user specified log file. If this option is specified the global log file /var/log/ledctl.log is not used. -h or --help= Prints out help text and exits. --quiet Suppress messages to stdout and stderr, but does not prevent log to file. -v or –version Prints out version and license information and exits. SGPIO Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 62 The table below shows all the “patterns” that can be specified: Pattern Name Usage locate Turns locate LED on for given device(s) or associated empty slot(s). locate_off Turns locate LEDs off. normal Turns status, failure, and locate LEDs off. off Turns status and failure LEDs off. ica or degraded Display “in a critical array” pattern. rebuild or rebuild_p Display “rebuild” pattern. ifa or failed_array Display “in a failed array” pattern. hotspare Display “hotspare” pattern. pfa Display “predicted failure analysis” pattern. failure or disk_failed Display “failure” pattern. SGPIO June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 63 10.3 Ledmon Service Ledmon is a daemon service that monitors the state of MDRAID devices or a block device. The service monitors all RAID volumes. There is no method to specify individual volumes to monitor. Like ledctl, ledmon has only been verified with Intel® storage controllers. Ledmon can be run with the following options listed below: Option Usage -c or --configpath= Sets the configuration file path. This overrides any other configuration files. (Although the utility currently does not use a config file). -l or --log-path Sets the path to a log file. This overrides /var/log/ledmon.log. -t or --interval= Sets the time interval in seconds between scans of the sysfs. A minimum of 5 seconds is set. --quiet, --error, - --warning, --info, --debug, --all Specifies verbosity level of the log - 'quiet' means no logging at all, and 'all' means to log everything. The levels are given in order. If user specifies more than one verbose option the last option comes into effect. -h or --help Prints help text and exits. -v or --version Prints version and license information, then exits. SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 64 11 SAS Management Protocol Utilities smp_utils is a set of command line utilities that are used to invoke SAS Management Protocol (SMP) functions to monitor and manage SAS expanders. More information about smp_utils, package contents and usage examples can be found at: http://sg.danny.cz/sg/smp_utils.html Below are some helpful commands that are described together with usage examples. 11.1 smp_discover smp_discover utility sends the SMP DISCOVER Request to a SMP Target. It may be used to check what devices are attached to the HBA or an expander. 11.1.1 Examples Finding an HBA: ls -l /dev/bsg/sas_host* crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 1 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host6 crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 2 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host7 In this example 2 SAS Hosts were found. Numbers in sas_host* will change for instance when unloading and loading driver module. SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 65 To see what is connected to the sas_host6: smp_discover /dev/bsg/sas_host6 Discover response: phy identifier: 0 attached device type: expander device negotiated logical link rate: phy enabled; 3 Gbps attached initiator: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_host=0 attached sata port selector: 0 attached target: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_device=0 SAS address: 0x5001e6734b8d2000 attached SAS address: 0x50000d166a80e87f attached phy identifier: 0 programmed minimum physical link rate: not programmable hardware minimum physical link rate: not programmable programmed maximum physical link rate: not programmable hardware maximum physical link rate: not programmable phy change count: 0 virtual phy: 0 partial pathway timeout value: 0 us routing attribute: direct SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 66 To probe the PHYs attached to the host controller: smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/sas_host6 Device <5001e6734b8d2000>, expander: phy 0:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 1:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 2:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 3:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps In this example sas_host6 is connected to an expander device with all 4 phys. Such configuration creates a wide port. To see what expander is connected to sas_host6, a simple check in sysfs can be performed: ls /sys/class/bsg/sas_host6/device/port-6:0/ expander-6:0 phy-6:0 phy-6:1 phy-6:2 phy-6:3 power sas_port uevent SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 67 To see what is connected to the expander-6:0: smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 Device <50000d166a80e87f>, expander: phy 0:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 1:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 2:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 3:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 4:T:attached:[5000c50017ae9815:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 5:T:attached:[5000c5000051fe39:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 6:T:attached:[5000c50005f437a9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 7:T:attached:[5000c50005f4373d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 8:T:attached:[5000c50001cd61d1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 9:T:attached:[5000c50023c799a1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 10:T:attached:[5000c50001ab182d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 11:T:attached:[5000c50005fba135:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 12:T:attached:[5000c5000490c705:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 13:T:attached:[5000c5000051fca9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 14:T:attached:[5000c500076a4ab5:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 15:T:attached:[5000c50005fd6cb1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 16:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:02 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 17:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:03 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 18:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:00 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 19:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:01 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 20:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 21:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 22:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 23:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 24:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87e:24 V i(SSP) t(SSP)] 3 Gbps In this example to the expander 12 SAS disks are connected (phy4-15). Phys 16-19 are occupied by wide port (connection to HBA) and Phy24 is a virtual phy. More information about this utility can be found in the smp_discover(8) man page. SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 68 11.2 smp_phy_control smp_phy_control utility sends the PHY CONTROL request to a SMP Target. Using this utility administrator can for instance disable the phy. 11.2.1 Examples To disable phy: smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=di /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 To enable it again: smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=lr /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 More information about this utility can be found in the smp_phy_control(8) man page. 11.3 smp_rep_manufacturer smp_rep_manufacturer utility sends the REPORT MANUFACTURER INFORMATION request to a SMP Target. 11.3.1 Examples smp_rep_manufacturer -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 smp_initiator_open: interface not recognized Report manufacturer information request: 40 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0 send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0 device_status=0, duration=0, info=0 din_resid=0, dout_resid=0 Report manufacturer response: Expander change count: 0 SAS-1.1 format: 0 vendor identification: PMCSIERA product identification: SXP 36x3G product revision level: REVA More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_manufacturer(8) man page. SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 69 11.4 smp_rep_general smp_rep_general utility sends the REPORT GENERAL request to a SMP Target. 11.4.1 Examples mp_rep_general -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 Report general request: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0 send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0 device_status=0, duration=0, info=0 din_resid=0, dout_resid=0 Report general response: expander change count: 547 expander route indexes: 1024 long response: 0 number of phys: 25 table to table supported: 0 zone configuring: 0 self configuring: 0 STP continue AWT: 0 open reject retry supported: 0 configures others: 0 configuring: 0 externally configurable route table: 0 enclosure logical identifier More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_general(8) man page. MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 70 12 MDRAID Sysfs Components Just like the isci driver and libsas, the MDRAID subsystem also has sysfs components that provides information or can be used to tweak behavior and performance. All MDRAID devices present in the system are shown in: /sys/block/ Example: ls -l /sys/block/md* lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md126 -> ../devices/virtual/block/md126 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md127 -> ../devices/virtual/block/md127 Mapping between a device number and its name can be found: ls -l /dev/md/ total 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 imsm0 -> ../md127 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 raid1 -> ../md126 md127 is imsm0 and md126 is raid1. MDRAID Sysfs Components June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 71 Md devices in /sys/block are symbolic links pointing to the /sys/devices/virtual/block. All MD Devices are in the ‘md’ subdirectory in /sys/devices/virtual/block/mdXYZ directory. In the md directory the following contents can be found: ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md total 0 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 array_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:18 bitmap -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 chunk_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 component_size drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 layout -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 max_read_errors -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 reshape_position -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 resync_start -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 safe_mode_delay Since the MD device is a container, the metadata_version file will show: cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md/metadata_version external:imsm The directory contains subdirectories dev-sdb and dev-sdc specifying the disks that the container is assembled from. MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 72 The MD Volume contents look like below: ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/ total 0 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:10 bitmap --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 bitmap_set_bits -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 chunk_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 component_size -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 degraded drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 layout -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 max_read_errors -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 mismatch_cnt --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd0 -> dev-sdb lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd1 -> dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 reshape_position -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 resync_start -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 safe_mode_delay -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_hi -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_lo -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_action -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_completed MDRAID Sysfs Components June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 73 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_force_parallel -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_max -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_min -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_speed -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_max -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_min MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 74 Several new files are present, and they are related to the RAID Volume properties. Base information can be read from files:  Array size cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_size 1048576  Array state cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_state clean  Raid level cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/level raid1  Strip size cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/chunk_size 65536  Metadata cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/metadata_version external:/md127/0 And this is what is shown in mdstat for the example RAID information: cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] md127 : active raid1 sdc[1] sdb[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md127/0 [2/2] [UU] md0 : inactive sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty Installation Notes for the Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 Installation Instructions for the Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหตุ: คู่มือการติดตั้งไม่ได้เป็นส่วนหนึ่งของการรับประกันแบบจํากัดระยะสามปี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronic Information Products (China RoHS declaration) ӗ૱ѝᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘Ⲵ਽〠৺ਜ਼䟿 Hazardous Substances Table 䜘Ԧ਽〠 Component Name ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘ᡆݳ㍐ Hazardous Substance 䫵 Pb ⊎ Hg 䭹 Cd 䬜ԧޝ Cr (VI) ཊⓤ㚄㤟 PBB ཊⓤҼ㤟䟊 PBDE ᮓ✝⡷ Thermal Solution ; ƻƻ ƻ ƻ ƻ 䲔䶎ਖཆ⢩࡛Ⲵḷ⌘↔ḷᘇѪ䪸ሩᡰ⎹৺ӗ૱Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ḷᘇ ḀӋਟᴤᦒⲴ䴦 䜘Ԧਟ㜭Պᴹањн਼Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ֻྲ⭥⊐অݳ⁑ඇ ↔⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ਚ䘲⭘Ҿӗ૱൘ӗ૱᡻޼ѝᡰ㿴ᇊⲴᶑԦлᐕ֌ The Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP) for all enclosed products and their parts are per the symbol shown here, unless otherwise marked. Certain field-replaceable parts may have a different EFUP (for example, battery modules) number. The Environment-Friendly Use Period is valid only when the product is operated under the conditions defined in the product manual. ƻ˖Indicates that this hazardous substance contained in all homogeneous materials of such component is within the limits specified in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572). h˖ Indicates that the content of such hazardous substance in at least a homogeneous material of such component exceeds the limits specified in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572). . This table shows where these substances may be found in the supply chain of our electronic information products, as of the date of sale of the enclosed product. Note that some of the component types listed above may or may not be a part of the enclosed product. ƻ˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘൘䈕䜘Ԧᡰᴹ൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿൷൘ ⧠⭡ ਆԓḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲ԕлDŽ h˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘㠣ቁ൘䈕䜘ԦⲴḀа൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿䎵ࠪ ⧠⭡ ਆԓḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲DŽ ሩ䬰୞ѻᰕⲴᡰ୞ӗ૱ᵜ㺘ᱮ⽪ᡁޜਨ׋ᓄ䬮Ⲵ⭥ᆀؑ᚟ӗ૱ਟ㜭वਜ਼䘉Ӌ⢙䍘DŽ⌘ ᜿˖൘ᡰ୞ӗ૱ѝਟ㜭Պҏਟ㜭нՊਜ਼ᴹᡰᴹᡰࡇⲴ䜘ԦDŽ SJ/T 11363-2006 GB/T 26572 SJ/T 11363-2006 GB/T 26572 LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifikationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especificaciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fin determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EX- CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especificações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fim em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifica della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. H29943-004 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA Marvell. Moving Forward Faster. December 6, 2006 User Guide Marvell RAID Utility For Samsung Use Only No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Marvell. Marvell retains the right to make changes to this document at any time, without notice. Marvell makes no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, with regard to any information contained in this document, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Marvell does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, or other items contained within this document. Marvell products are not designed for use in life-support equipment or applications that would cause a life-threatening situation if any such products failed. Do not use Marvell products in these types of equipment or applications. With respect to the products described herein, the user or recipient, in the absence of appropriate U.S. government authorization, agrees: 1) Not to re-export or release any such information consisting of technology, software or source code controlled for national security reasons by the U.S. Export Control Regulations ("EAR"), to a national of EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2; 2) Not to export the direct product of such technology or such software, to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2, if such technology or software and direct products thereof are controlled for national security reasons by the EAR; and, 3) In the case of technology controlled for national security reasons under the EAR where the direct product of the technology is a complete plant or component of a plant, not to export to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2 the direct product of the plant or major component thereof, if such direct product is controlled for national security reasons by the EAR, or is subject to controls under the U.S. Munitions List ("USML"). At all times hereunder, the recipient of any such information agrees that they shall be deemed to have manually signed this document in connection with their receipt of any such information. Copyright © 2006. Marvell International Ltd. All rights reserved. Marvell, the Marvell logo, Moving Forward Faster, Alaska, Fastwriter, Datacom Systems on Silicon, Libertas, Link Street, NetGX, PHYAdvantage, Prestera, Raising The Technology Bar, The Technology Within, Virtual Cable Tester, and Yukon are registered trademarks of Marvell. Ants, AnyVoltage, Discovery, DSP Switcher, Feroceon, GalNet, GalTis, Horizon, Marvell Makes It All Possible, RADLAN, UniMAC, and VCT are trademarks of Marvell. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ii Marvell RAID Utility User Guide For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide iii CONTENTS 1 GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 System Requirements ....................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 Software Components ....................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels ..................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 SETTING UP THE SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives ................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation ............................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.3 Installing the Software ....................................................................................................... 1-5 2 USING THE SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.1 GUI OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.1.1 Logical Drives .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.1.2 Physical Drives .................................................................................................................. 2-12 2.1.3 Adapters ............................................................................................................................ 2-15 2.1.4 System .............................................................................................................................. 2-16 2.2 VIEWING AND CREATING A LOGICAL DRIVE ......................................................................................... 2-17 2.3 MODIFYING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................. 2-21 2.4 DELETING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................... 2-22 2.5 REBUILDING A LOGICAL DRIVE ........................................................................................................... 2-23 2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild ..................................................................................................................... 2-23 2.5.2 Manual Rebuild ................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.6 INITIALIZING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................ 2-24 2.7 CHECKING THE INTEGRITY OF A LOGICAL DRIVE .................................................................................. 2-25 3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM (BIOS) ........................................ 3-27 3.1 ACCESSING THE BIOS ....................................................................................................................... 3-28 3.2 USING THE BIOS ............................................................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.1 Adapter .............................................................................................................................. 3-30 3.2.2 Create ............................................................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.3 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 3-33 4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 4-35 4.1 RAID 0 (STRIPING) ............................................................................................................................ 4-36 4.2 RAID 1 (MIRRORING) ........................................................................................................................ 4-37 4.3 RAID 10 (MIRRORING AND STRIPING) ................................................................................................ 4-38 4.4 COMPARING RAID LEVELS ................................................................................................................. 4-39 4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping) ................................................................................................................ 4-39 4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring) ............................................................................................................. 4-39 4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping) ....................................................................................... 4-39 4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels .................................................................................................. 4-39 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide iv THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1-1 1 GETTING STARTED This chapter describes how to get started with the Marvell Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) Utility, including how to access and install this utility. The topics included in this chapter are: „ Product Overview „ Setting Up the Software For Samsung Use Only 1-2 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1.1 Product Overview The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) software is a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) tool for the Marvell RAID adapter. The MRU GUI enables you to create and manage logical drives from the physical disk drives installed in your computer. RAID technology allows you to create logical drives based on one or more physical disk drives in combination for fault tolerance and improved performance. For more information about RAID technology and how to determine a RAID level for your logical drive, see Chapter 4, Selecting a RAID Level. Note: The terms adapter and controller are used interchangeably for the purpose of this document. 1.1.1 System Requirements Before you begin, ensure that your computer meets the following requirements: „ Operating systems: Microsoft Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005, Windows XP Professional, Windows 2003, and Windows 2000. „ Hardware: The Marvell RAID Adapter supports one PATA and a maximum of four SATA disk drives. Ensure the SATA and PATA drives are appropriately connected. For instructions on how to connect the SATA and the PATA drives, see Installing the Disk Drives on page 1-4. „ RAID adapter/controller driver „ Web service 1.1.2 Software Components During a full installation, all of the following components, except the CLI, are automatically installed on your computer. A custom installation requires you to select individual components. The MRU software CD includes the following items: „ Driver. The driver is automatically installed on your system during MRU installation. „ Web service. The Apache server is automatically installed on your system during MRU installation. „ Marvell Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI, for only Linux users, is available with custom installation of the software. Note: The Linux operating system will be supported in a future release of the MRU. „ Marvell RAID Utility software. Note: The Marvell BIOS Configuration, a built-in component of the Marvell RAID controller, can create, initialize, and delete the logical drives. For instructions about using the Marvell BIOS Configuration, see Chapter 3, Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS). For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-3 1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels The Marvell RAID controller supports the following RAID levels: „ RAID 0 (striping). In this RAID system, identical drives can read and write data in parallel to increase performance. „ RAID 1 (mirroring). In this RAID system, mirroring increases read performance through load balancing and elevator sorting while creating a complete real-time backup of your files. „ RAID 10 (mirroring/striping). In this nested RAID system, combining mirroring with striping offers both high read/write performance and fault-tolerance. For more information about RAID levels, see Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39. For Samsung Use Only 1-4 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1.2 Setting Up the Software This section describes how to install the disk drives and the MRU. The topics included in this section are: „ Installing the Disk Drives „ Verifying Driver Installation „ Installing the Software 1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives Before installing the MRU, ensure that you have the required number of SATA and PATA disk drives connected to the appropriate ports on your computer’s motherboard. We recommend installing SATA and PATA drives of similar capacity, which enhance performance. To install the SATA and PATA disks 1. Connect one end of each data cable to the individual disk drives and connect the other end of each data cable to the connectors either on the motherboard or on the adapter. 2. Connect power to each of the disk drives. Note: To create the logical drives, use only drives connected to a single adapter. The following table lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level. 1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation To run the MRU, install the driver specific to your operating system. The driver file is automatically installed on your computer during MRU installation. To verify the driver installation 1. On the Desktop, right-click My Computer, and then select Manage. The Computer Management window appears. 2. In the left pane, double-click System Tools, and then double-click Device Manager. The left pane displays a list of devices for your computer. If the driver properly installed during the MRU installation, the right pane displays the Marvell RAID adapter under SCSI and RAID Controllers. RAID Level Number of Drives Required RAID 0 Any number RAID 1 2 only RAID 10 4 only For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-5 1.2.3 Installing the Software This sections describes the MRU Setup Wizard windows. The recommended screen resolution for the MRU GUI is 1024 × 768 pixels. To install the MRU software 1. Insert the MRU CD into your computer’s CD drive. The MRU Setup Wizard starts. Figure 1-1 MRU Setup Wizard: Main Window 2. Click NEXT. The Choose Components window appears, as shown in Figure 1-2, with the Full install option pre-selected. For Samsung Use Only 1-6 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 1-2 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Components 3. Select the options you want for custom installation. Web Service is preselected for both Full and Custom installation. If you deselect this option, the Apache server is not installed if the Web Service is unavailable on your computer. Web Service is required to run the MRU software. 4. Click NEXT. The Choose Install Location window appears, as shown in Figure 1-3, with the default location displayed in the Destination Folder field. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-7 Figure 1-3 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Install Location 5. Click Browse, and then select the installation location. 6. Click Install. The installation window appears for a few seconds, indicating that installation is in progress. Afterwards, the installation wizard appears, indicating that the software installation is now complete, as shown in Figure 1-4. For Samsung Use Only 1-8 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 1-4 MRU Installation Wizard: Last Window 7. Click Finish. A shortcut to the MRU software appears on the Desktop. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2-9 2 USING THE SOFTWARE The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) creates and manages logical drives on your computer by using RAID technology. RAID allows multiple physical drives to be combined together to create a logical drive. Logical drives can continuously protect critical data and improve performance depending on which RAID level you choose. For more information, see Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39. Although most functions pertaining to creating and managing logical drives can be performed using the Marvell BIOS Configuration or the Marvell CLI, the MRU GUI offers additional capabilities. The GUI is an easy-to-use customization tool for managing logical drives. This chapter describes the options available in the MRU for creating and managing logical drives. The topics included in this chapter are: „ GUI Overview „ Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive „ Modifying a Logical Drive „ Deleting a Logical Drive „ Rebuilding a Logical Drive „ Initializing a Logical Drive „ Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive For Samsung Use Only 2-10 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.1 GUI Overview The MRU GUI has a top and bottom pane, as shown in Figure 2-1. The top pane, with four tabs, is the interactive interface. The four tabs in this pane are Logical Drives, Physical Drives, Adapters, and System. Clicking on each tab brings up a window that lets you perform specific tasks and view configuration details specific to that tab. Figure 2-1 MRU Main Window For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-11 The bottom pane displays the status and severity of events in the RAID system. The following table describes the three kinds of events. The following sections describe the items in the top pane and the options available under each tab. 2.1.1 Logical Drives The Logical Drives window, shown in Figure 2-2, lets you perform the following tasks: „ View the existing logical drives and their configurations. „ Create a new RAID. „ View the properties for individual logical drives, as shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-2 MRU Logical Drives Symbol Name Description Info This is for information only. Warning This is to notify that the user may need to take an action. Major This is to notify that an action is urgently required. For Samsung Use Only 2-12 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 2-3 MRU Logical Drive Details The Logical Drive Details window performs the following tasks: Delete, Modify, Restore, Rebuild, Check integrity, and Initialize. 2.1.2 Physical Drives The Physical Drives window displays the SATA and PATA drives on your computer and indicates the status for each physical drive, as shown in Figure 2-4, Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the drive icons. Symbol Name Configured Unconfigured Spare drive For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-13 Figure 2-4 MRU All Physical Drives Click on an individual drive to view the Physical Drive Details window, as shown in Figure 2-5. For Samsung Use Only 2-14 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide The Physical Drive Details window displays the properties for the specific physical drive and the available resources for creating a logical drive. Figure 2-5 MRU Physical Drive Details You can perform the following tasks from this window: „ View the properties for each physical drive connected to the RAID controller. „ Set a physical drive as a spare drive for use while rebuilding a logical drive. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-15 2.1.3 Adapters The Adapters window, as shown in Figure 2-6, provides information about each adapter, including the Driver Version, Vendor Device ID, Sub Vendor Device ID, Port Count, Background Activity Rate, and Auto-Rebuild. Note: Your computer can have a maximum of two adapters. Figure 2-6 MRU Adapters You can perform the following tasks from this window: „ Turn the alarm on or off. „ Set Auto-Rebuild on or off. „ Cancel the changes and restore the configuration. For Samsung Use Only 2-16 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.1.4 System The System window, as shown in Figure 2-7, provides information about the system-level components of the MRU software. Figure 2-7 MRU System For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-17 2.2 Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive You can view details about an existing logical drive and create a new logical drive from the Logical Drives window of the MRU. To view the logical drive details 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, as shown in Figure 2-2, and then click the icon for the individual logical. The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 MRU Logical Drive Details You can determine the status of each logical drive by its icon, which are listed in the following table. Symbol Name Description Functional logical drive This logical drive operates at its optimal strength. Offline logical drive This logical drive is not functional, either due to a disk failure or a disk being unplugged. For Samsung Use Only 2-18 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the logical drive types. To create a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab. 3. At the upper right side of the screen, click Create New RAID. The Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-9. This window displays the physical drives available for creating new logical drives. Figure 2-9 MRU Create Logical Drive Degraded logical drive This logical drive is no longer reliable. Therefore, you must either rebuild the drive or delete it. If you have a degraded logical drive, the alarm goes on. To turn off the alarm, click on the Adapters tab. Symbol Name Description For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-19 4. In the RAID Level box, select a level. Table 2-1 lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level. 5. In the Adapter box, select the appropriate adapter. 6. Click on the specific SATA and PATA drives to create the RAID of your choice. 7. Click NEXT. Note: If the combination of selected drives is not supported by the particular RAID level, an error message appears reminding you to select the appropriate number of drives. The second Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-10, and for setting the properties. Table 2-1 Raid Level RAID Level Number of Drives Required RAID 0 Any number RAID 1 2 only RAID 10 4 only For Samsung Use Only 2-20 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 2-10 MRU Create Logical Drive (second window) 8. Enter the desired value in each field, and then click SUBMIT at the bottom of the screen. Note: You have three options for initializing a logical drive: Quick, Full, and None. You can initialize the logical drive while creating it or afterwards. A window appears with a message about formatting the new logical drive. 9. Click OK. The All Logical Drives window appears, displaying the new logical drive. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-21 2.3 Modifying a Logical Drive You can change the configuration of an existing logical drive to enhance its performance. To modify a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11 MRU Logical Drive Details 3. Change the properties as needed, and then click MODIFY at the top of the screen. Note: To return the editable properties to their original values, click RESTORE. For Samsung Use Only 2-22 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.4 Deleting a Logical Drive If you want to change the size of a logical drive, you must delete that logical drive and create a new one with the desired configuration. To delete a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Logical Drive Details window appears. 3. Click Delete. A message appears confirming the deletion of the logical drive. 4. Click OK. After deleting the logical drive, the additional free space is shown in the space available on the physical drives. Any physical drive that is not used as part of a logical drive is available through the Windows Storage Manager. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-23 2.5 Rebuilding a Logical Drive The MRU can rebuild the logical drive by reconstructing data from a failed drive onto one of its spare physical drives. Rebuilding is available for logical drives created using RAID level 1 and 10, which have the capability of mirroring data. RAID 0 excludes rebuild capabilities. Therefore, the entire stripe is lost if one of the physical drive fails. When a logical drive fails and is degraded, you are notified in two ways: „ Triggering of the alarm. You can turned it off in the Adapters window. „ Displaying the logical drive red icon with a warning symbol next to it. You have the option to rebuild the logical drive either automatically or manually. To use the auto-rebuild process, there must be a spare drive available. Go to the Physical Drive Details window to set a physical drive as a spare. Any physical drive that is fully or partially configured cannot be set as a spare drive. 2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild If the Auto-Rebuild option is on when creating the logical drive, the rebuilding process begins automatically if there is a degraded drive. 2.5.2 Manual Rebuild Follow these steps to manually rebuild a logical drive: 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Physical Drives tab, and then select a physical drive as the target spare drive. 3. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then select the logical drive to rebuild. 4. Click REBUILD. The Event Log pane displays the rebuilding status. For Samsung Use Only 2-24 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.6 Initializing a Logical Drive There are two methods for initializing a logical drive: „ Quick initialization. Use this method if the logical drive consists one or more disk drives. This method erases only the Master Boot Record (MBR) in all of the selected disk drives. „ Full Background initialization. In this method, data synchronization occurs in the background while the operating system continues to have access to the logical drive. Full initialization is available for RAID 1 and RAID 10 logical drives. Note: This option is not available in the Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration. To initialize a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. 3. In the Logical Drive Details window, click INITIALIZE. The Initialize window appears, as shown in Figure 2-12. Figure 2-12 MRU Initialize Window 4. In the Initialize Options box, select an initialization method. 5. Click SUBMIT. The Logical Drive Details window reappears and the Event Log pane displays the status of initialization. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-25 2.7 Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive This feature enables the software to check and fix the data parity in the logical drives using RAID levels 1 and 10. Checking the integrity of data on your logical drive is performed as a housekeeping function. Note: Perform this task when the logical drive you want to check is not performing RAID activities. To check integrity of a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Check Integrity window appears. 3. Click CHECK INTEGRITY. 4. Select one of the following options: „ Check. This option checks and reports data inconsistencies. „ Check and Fix. This option checks, reports, and resolves data inconsistencies. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2-26 Using the Software THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3-27 3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM (BIOS) The Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration, which is built into the Marvell RAID controller, creates logical drives. Note: For extended capabilities in creating and managing logical drives, run the MRU. For information about using the MRU, see Chapter 2, Using the Software. The topics included in this chapter are: „ Accessing the BIOS „ Using the BIOS For Samsung Use Only 3-28 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3.1 Accessing the BIOS The main BIOS configuration screen displays three main functions, a set of keyboard commands, and configuration information about the physical disk drives and the logical drives, if any. The functions are: „ Adapter. Displays the physical drives installed on your computer. „ Create. Lets the user create logical drives. „ Delete. Lets the user delete an existing logical drive. The keyboard commands are: „ Arrow keys. Use the arrow keys to navigate the screens. „ ENTER/SPACE. Use these keys to select an item and execute a command. „ ESC. Use the escape key to go back one screen or exit the program. The configuration information for the physical and logical drives are: „ ID. This displays the identification number assigned to each logical drive by the BIOS. „ Level. This displays the RAID level configuration of the logical drive. „ Size. This displays the data capacity of the logical drive in Megabytes (MB). „ Members. This displays the disks that are included in a logical drive. „ Status. This displays one of the following logical drive conditions: „ Online: The logical drive is functioning at the optimal level. „ Degraded: The logical drive is functional but does not perform fault tolerance. For RAID levels 1 and 10, the logical drive contains a drive that has stopped functioning. If set to auto-rebuild, the logical drive rebuilds itself on the spare drive, if available on your computer. Identify and replace the failed disk drive. „ Offline: The logical drive is not functional and cannot be rebuilt. Therefore, replace the failed drive and create a new logical drive to copy over your data. To access the MRU through the BIOS 1. Reboot your computer. 2. Before Windows starts, press CTRL+M to enter the BIOS, as shown in Figure 3-1. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-29 Figure 3-1 BIOS Main Screen Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is defined? Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 [Adapter] [Create] [Delete] :Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit For Samsung Use Only 3-30 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3.2 Using the BIOS This section describes the menus and related screens for configuring the MRU through the BIOS. 3.2.1 Adapter Figure 3-1 shows the main BIOS menu screen, which displays the physical drives and related information installed on your computer. From the Adapter screen, you can navigate to the Create and Delete screens. 3.2.2 Create Follow these steps to create a logical drive: 1. Start the BIOS. See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28. 2. At the top of the screen, select the Create tab, and then press ENTER. The Create screen appears. This screen lets you select the disk drives for the logical drive. Figure 3-2 Select Disks to Create, Screen 1 Select from disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 NEXT For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-31 3. Select a drive, and then press ENTER. An asterisk appears next to the selected drive. Figure 3-3 Select Disks to Create, Screen 2 4. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER. The Create Array screen appears, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Create Array Screen 5. View the options available by clicking in each field. Select from disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 NEXT * * Create Array Raid level Array Name Disks ID Max Size(MB) Strip Size : : : : : : NEXT * : : Capacity(MB) Init Mode Cache Mode RAID0 1 5 9 13 17 18 987776 987776 64KB No Write Through For Samsung Use Only 3-32 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 6. Enter values for the following logical drive properties: „ RAID Level (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) „ Array Name „ Capacity „ Stripe Size (16K, 32K, 64K, 128K) „ Init Mode (Initialization: None or Quick) „ Cache Mode (Write Through or Write Back) 7. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER. The BIOS main screen appears and displays the new logical drive. Figure 3-5 Logical Drive Display Adapter 1 Arrays Information: Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 [Adapter] [Create] [Delete] :Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members New array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-33 3.2.3 Delete Follow these steps to delete a logical drive: 1. Start the BIOS. See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28. 2. At the top of the screen, select the Delete tab, and then press Enter. The Delete Array screen appears. Figure 3-6 BIOS Delete, Screen 1 3. Select the logical drive to delete. An asterisk appears next to the selected logical drive. Figure 3-7 BIOS Delete, Screen 2 4. Select NEXT, and the press ENTER. A message appears at the bottom of the BIOS screen about deleting the Master Boot Record (MBR). 5. Press Y to delete the MBR. The BIOS main screen appears and the deleted logical drive is no longer displayed. Delete array ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 NEXT Delete array ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 NEXT * For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3-34 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4-35 4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL Redundant array of independent disks (RAID) is a storage technology consisting of one or more disks working in parallel. RAID technology allows an array of physical disks to be combined together to form a logical drive, which appears as a single storage device to the user. You can configure a RAID logical drive in several different ways, with each configuration offering its own benefits. The Marvell RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10. This chapter provides information about the properties of each RAID level and how to choose a suitable RAID level. The topics included in this chapter are: „ RAID 0 (Striping) „ RAID 1 (Mirroring) „ RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping) „ Comparing RAID Levels For Samsung Use Only 4-36 Selecting a RAID Level Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4.1 RAID 0 (Striping) RAID 0 is known as striping because data stripes of equal size on the logical drive are divided among an even number of physical disks, as shown in Figure 4-1. Consequently, the speed at which data is read and written is increased because data stored on multiple drives can be read and written simultaneously. However, it is important to remember that data is divided between multiple disk drives, so data is not recoverable if one of the physical disks fails. Figure 4-1 RAID 0: Striping RAID 0 is ideally suited in situations where all of the physical disk drives have the same capacity. However, you can create a logical drive if the selected disk drives have different capacities, but it will have a maximum capacity equal to the size of the smallest disk multiplied by the total number of disks in the array. For example, a logical drive consisting of two disks, an 80 Gb physical disk and a 100 Gb physical disk, can only create a logical drive up to a maximum of 160 Gb (2 x 80 Gb). Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 = Striping For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Selecting a RAID Level 4-37 4.2 RAID 1 (Mirroring) RAID1 is known as mirroring because the data on the logical drive is written to a pair of physical disks, which ensures that identical data appears on both of the physical disks. See Figure 4-2 for more detail. Figure 4-2 RAID 1: Mirroring RAID 1 can increase Read performance. Data is identical on both of the physical disks, so a read command can be sent to the disk that is not busy, rather than wait for the primary drive to finish an in-process read. However, RAID 1 does incur a slight drop in Write performance because both drives must be written to when sending data to the logical drive. RAID 1 also incorporates fault-tolerance, which allows access to the data even if one physical disk fails. In addition, if you replace the failed disk with a new physical disk, the rebuild begins recreating the mirror set of drives, which can be accomplished while the system continues to function normally. Note: Mirroring is a technique used for redundancy, so it is important to remember that, for example, two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of original data because the remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data. Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 = Mirroring For Samsung Use Only 4-38 Selecting a RAID Level Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4.3 RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping) RAID 10 is a combination of the mirroring (RAID 1) and striping (RAID 0) techniques. At least four physical disks (two pairs) are needed to configure a RAID 10 logical drive. Both pairs of physical disks make separate RAID 0 stripes, and then the first RAID 0 drive is mirrored to the second RAID 0 drive. See Figure 4-3 for more detail. RAID 10 provides the read and write performance of RAID 0, while providing the redundancy protection of RAID 1. Also, in the event of a disk failure, the logical drive can rebuild itself while the system continues to function normally. Figure 4-3 RAID 10: Mirroring and Striping Note: Like RAID 1, RAID 10 uses the mirroring technique for redundancy, so it is important to remember that, for example, two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of original data because the remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data. Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 Striping Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Physical Disk 3 Physical Disk 4 Striping Mirroring = For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Selecting a RAID Level 4-39 4.4 Comparing RAID Levels Each RAID level has features that may or may not be suitable in certain situations, so it is important to carefully consider which RAID level is best suited for a particular purpose. 4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping) RAID 0 is simple to implement and provides increased reading and writing speed by spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID 0 does not provide fault-tolerance, so all of the data is lost if one or more physical disks fail. 4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring) RAID 1 is simple to implement and features automatic fault-tolerance. RAID 1 also provides increased read performance because data can be requested in parallel. However, write performance is decreased because two writes are required for each write command. Also, RAID 1 uses just 50 percent of the total disk capacity. 4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping) RAID 10 features automatic fault-tolerance and provides increased reading and writing speed by spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID 10 uses just 50 percent of the total disk space and scalability is limited at a high inherent cost. 4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels Table 4-1 gives an overview of the features for each RAID level. Table 4-1 RAID Features Features RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 Simple implementation √ √ Improved read speed √√√ Improved write speed √ √ Fault-tolerance √ √ Efficient use of disk capacity √ Scalable √ √ Automatic rebuild √ √ Minimum number of drives 2 2 4 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4-40 Selecting a RAID Level THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Worldwide Corporate Offices Marvell Semiconductor, Inc. 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 Marvell Asia Pte, Ltd. 151 Lorong Chuan, #02-05 New Tech Park, Singapore 556741 Tel: 65.6756.1600 Fax: 65.6756.7600 Marvell Japan K.K. Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F 1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 163-0644, Japan Tel: 81.3.5324.0355 Fax: 81.3.5324.0354 Marvell Semiconductor Israel, Ltd. 6 Hamada Street Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park Yokneam 20692, Israel Tel: 972.4.909.1500 Fax: 972.4.909.1501 Marvell Semiconductor Korea, Ltd. Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Seoul, Korea 135-729 Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079 Fax: 82.2.551.6080 Radlan Computer Communications, Ltd. Atidim Technological Park, Bldg. #4 P O Box 58179 Tel Aviv 61580, Israel Tel: 972.3.645.8555 Fax: 972.3.645.8544 Worldwide Sales Offices Western US Marvell 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 Sales Fax: 1.408.752.9029 Central US Marvell 9600 North MoPac Drive, Suite #215 Austin, TX 78759, USA Tel: 1.512.343.0593 Fax: 1.512.340.9970 Eastern US/Canada Marvell Parlee Office Park 1 Meeting House Road, Suite 1 Chelmsford, MA 01824 , USA Tel: 1.978.250.0588 Fax: 1.978.250.0589 Europe Marvell c/o Harts CA 3 Churchgates Church Lane Berkhamsted Hertfordshire, HP4 2UB United Kingdom Tel: 44.1442.263341 Fax: 44.1442.211543 Israel Marvell 6 Hamada Street Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park Yokneam 20692, Israel Tel: 972.4.909.1500 Fax: 972.4.909.1501 China Marvell 10J, No. 1800, Zhong Shan West Road Shanghai, PRC 200235 Tel: 86.21.6440.1350 Fax: 86.21.6440.1705 Marvell Rm. 1102/1103, Jintai Fudi Mansion #9 An Ning Zhuang West Rd. Qing He, Haidian District Beijing, PRC 100085 Tel: 86.10.8274.3831 Fax: 86.10.8274.3830 Japan Marvell Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F 1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 163-0644, Japan Tel: 81.3.5324.0355 Fax: 81.3.5324.0354 Taiwan Marvell 2Fl., No.1, Alley 20, Lane 407, Sec. 2 Ti-Ding Blvd., Nei Hu District Taipei, Taiwan, 114, R.O.C Tel: 886.2.8177.7071 Fax: 886.2.8752.5707 Korea Marvell Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Seoul, Korea 135-729 Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079 Fax: 82.2.551.6080 Marvell Semiconductor, Inc. 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 www.marvell.com For more information, visit our website at: www.marvell.com 英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器 用户指南 ii 修订记录 修订版 修订记录 日期 -001 《英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南》第一版 2006 年 5 月 如果台式机主板上贴有 FCC 合格声明标志，则适用以下声明： FCC 合格声明 本设备符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分的要求。其操作符合以下两个条件：(1) 本设备不会产生有害干扰；而且， (2) 本设备必须承受任何接收到的干扰，包括可能引起不良操作的干扰。 若您对本产品的电磁兼容性性能有任何疑问，请联络： Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, OR 97124 1-800-628-8686 本设备已经过测试，符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分对 B 类数字设备的限制要求。这些限制旨在提供合理的保护措施， 以防止在居住区安装本设备时可能产生的有害干扰。本设备将产生、使用并可能辐射无线电射频能。如果未按说明安装和使用 本设备，可能会对无线电通信造成有害干扰。然而，在特定条件下的正确安装并不保证不会产生此类干扰。如果本设备确实对 无线电通信或电视接收产生了有害干扰（通过关闭和打开本设备可判定有无干扰产生），用户可采取以下一种或几种措施消除 干扰： • 改变接收天线的方向或位置。 • 增大本设备与接收设备之间的距离。 • 将本设备和接收设备分别连接到归属于不同电路的电源插座中。 • 咨询经销商或经验丰富的无线电／电视技术人员，以寻求帮助。 未经英特尔公司明确许可，若对本设备作出任何修改或改动，用户可能丧失操作本设备的权利。 本设备经测试，符合家用或商用环境下的 FCC 标准。 加拿大通信部 (Canadian Department of Communications) 符合标准声明 本数字设备未超过对无线电噪声辐射的 B 类限制，此限制是加拿大通信部颁布的《无线电干扰规则》(Radio Interference Regulations) 中对数字设备的限制性规定。 Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada. iii 免责声明 本文档提供有关英特尔® 产品的信息。本文档并未授予任何知识产权的许可，并未以明示或暗示，或以禁止反言或其它方式 授予任何知识产权许可。除英特尔在其产品的销售条款和条件中声明的责任之外，英特尔概不承担任何其它责任。并且， 英特尔对英特尔产品的销售和／或使用不作任何明示或暗示的担保，包括对产品的特定用途适用性、适销性或对任何专利权、 版权或其它知识产权的侵权责任等，均不作担保。Intel 产品并非设计用于医疗、救生、维生、关键控制、安全系统或核能 设施等用途。英特尔可能随时对产品规格及产品描述作出修改，恕不另行通知。 本文档所含的所有信息和软件均以其“原始状况”向客户提供。英特尔公司对本文档的使用及其所含的软件和信息不承担任何 明示或暗示担保和责任，并且对本文档或软件可能含有的任何错误亦概不承担任何责任，与此同时，英特尔不承诺对本文档所 含的信息或软件进行更新。英特尔保留随时对本文档或软件进行修订的权利，恕不另行通知。有关特定 Linux* 版本的支持， 请与经销商联系、查询。 英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器随带的某些软件可能是由第三方提供的，而非英特尔（“第三方软件”）。您对第三方软件 的使用权受此类组件随供的许可协议的管辖。英特尔不以任何方式对此类第三方软件作任何担保，并且对您对第三方软件的 使用概不承担任何责任。有关特定支持，请与第三方软件经销商联系、查询。 本文档及其所述软件是经过许可而提供的，因此对它的使用或复制需满足相应的许可条件。本手册所含信息仅供参考，并随时 予以修订，恕不另行通知，因此不得认为是英特尔作出的承诺。英特尔公司对本文档或本文档提及的任何软件可能存在的任何 错误或不准确概不承担任何责任或义务。 除非此类许可允许，否则未经英特尔公司以书面形式表示明确同意，不得以任何方式或通过任何手段对本文档的任何部分进行 复制、在检索系统中存储或传送。 英特尔是英特尔公司或其子公司在美国及其它国家的商标或注册商标。 * 其它名称和品牌分别为其相应所有者的财产。 版权所有 © 2006 年，英特尔公司。保留所有权利。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 iv v 前言 本《用户指南》提供有关英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器的安装、功能与特性、故障诊断与排除及规范要求 等信息。 文档结构 本《用户指南》包括以下各章内容： 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡：提供有关安装本 PCI 电话适配卡的指导 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器：提供有关如何安装本 PCI 电话适配软件的指导 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话：提供有关使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话的指导 4 高级功能：描述 PCI 电话适配器的高级功能 5 故障诊断与排除：提供有关 PCI 电话适配器故障诊断与排除的信息 A 符合标准与规章：提供有关安全规范和 EMC 认证及产品认证等信息 体例 本文档采用如下体例： 注意 注意提醒用户如何避免损坏硬件或丢失数据。 注释 注释提示用户对重要信息引起重视。 术语 下表列出了本指南中常用的一些术语及其说明。 术语 说明 hook flash （转接） 短暂（一秒半）挂断电话的动作。此项操作通常用作执行服务的信号，如转接呼叫。 softphone 允许您从计算机或计算设备拨打互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VoIP) 电话的程序。互联网电话服务提供商通常在其服务中提供 softphone 应用程序。 VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol（互联网语音）的首字母缩写，允许以数字方式在 互联网上发送语音信息。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 vi 系统要求 • 以下英特尔® 台式机主板之一： D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/ D102GGC2/D865GSA • 以下操作系统之一： ⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional ⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home 包装盒内容 • 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 • Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM（英特尔® 快速安装程序光盘） • 半高 PCI 支架 • 注意事项标签 • 《参考指南》 vii 目录 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 .............................................................. 9 电话适配器操作注意事项 ............................................................................................9 安装电话适配器硬件................................................................................................10 将电话适配器连接到电话机上 ....................................................................................11 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 ........................................................... 13 在Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器 ..........................................................13 电话适配器国别／地区设置 .......................................................................................14 在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器 .....................................................................16 卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序........................................................................................16 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话....................................................................... 17 对于 Skype* 用户 .................................................................................................17 4 高级功能.................................................................................................. 19 呼叫方 ID 功能 .....................................................................................................19 按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能 .........................................................................19 5 故障诊断与排除 ......................................................................................... 21 电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中 ............................................................................21 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作 ...........................................21 拨打电话时听不到拨号音 ..........................................................................................21 与 Skype 相关的问题 .............................................................................................22 A 符合标准与规章 ......................................................................................... 25 欧盟符合标准声明 ..................................................................................................25 产品生态声明........................................................................................................26 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章...........................................................................................27 产品认证 .............................................................................................................28 表 1. 无铅卡标志 .....................................................................................................26 2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章....................................................................................27 3. 产品认证标志 ..................................................................................................28 4. 服务提供商认证 ...............................................................................................29 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 viii 9 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 注意 静电放电 (ESD) 会损坏 PCI 电话适配卡组件。请在防静电工作台上安装本 PCI 卡。如果没有防静电工作台 可用，应佩戴防静电腕带或在对卡进行操作前触摸一下防静电包装袋。 电话适配器操作注意事项 本电话适配卡会因静电而被损坏。请遵守以下各项说明，以最大程度地减小电话适配器因静电放电而被损坏的 危险性。 1. 开始操作之前，首先将安装电话适配器所需的各种物品摆放在手边。在房间内来回走动取用工具会导致 静电累加。 2. 对电话适配器进行操作期间，应始终保持身体与计算机的金属部分或其电源系统相接触。触摸一下计算机 可放掉任何累加的静电。 3. 只准握持电话适配卡的顶部边缘和支架部分。切勿触及卡边缘上的连接器或裸露的线路。 4. 切勿将电话适配器放置在任何金属表面上。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 10 安装电话适配器硬件 要安装 PCI 电话适配卡，请： 1. 关闭计算机的电源并拔下交流电源电缆。拆下箱盖。 2. 找到某个尚未占用的 PCI 插槽的位置。 3. 如有必要，拆下该尚未占用插槽上的盖板。将螺丝存放好。 4. 将电话适配卡插入 PCI 插槽。插入卡期间您可能需要用力推压，以确保插接牢固。 5. 重新上好盖板螺丝。 OM19432 安装英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 11 将电话适配器连接到电话机上 注意 切勿将英特尔 600SM 电话适配卡直接连接到墙壁电话插座中。当切断电话适配器与墙壁电话插座的连接且 计算机重新启动后，电话适配器方可正常工作。只当将电话适配器连接到模拟电话机上时，电话适配器方可 正常发挥作用。 OM19433 1. 将普通电话机连接到电话适配卡背面板上的 RJ-11 插孔中，如下图所示。 OM19434 RJ-11 2. 重新连接好计算机的交流电源电缆。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 12 13 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 在 Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器 要安装电话适配器驱动程序，请： 1. 打开计算机电源。 2. 当屏幕上出现 New Hardware Wizard（新硬件向导）窗口时，请单击 Cancel（取消）。 3. 将 Intel Express Installer CD（英特尔快速安装程序光盘）放入计算机的 CD-ROM 驱动器。 4. 当屏幕上出现 Intel Express Installer（英特尔快速安装程序）窗口时，请接受默认设置并单击 Install Now（立即开始安装）。 5. 按屏幕上显示的安装消息执行安装。 6. 当电话适配器驱动程序安装完毕后，计算机将自动重新启动。 7. 当成功完成该软件的安装后，主菜单将显示最终状态 注释 安装程序将自动将您当地的互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VOIP) 服务提供商的图标安装到您的 计算机上。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 14 电话适配器国别／地区设置 要更改您的电话适配器的国别／地区设置，请按以下步骤操作： 1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），然后双击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter （Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），进入 Properties（属性）对话框。 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 15 2. 在 Properties（属性）对话框中，单击 Country/region（国别／地区）选项卡。该选项卡提供对可选 国家名称菜单的访问，此将指示驱动程序采用国家特定的信号规范。选择恰当的国别／地区，然后单击 OK（确定）。 欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 16 在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器 要在 Windows XP 环境中卸载调制解调器，请： 1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），右键单击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter （Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），然后选择 Uninstall（卸载）。 2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。 欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 注释 不安装电话适配器驱动程序，电话适配器将不起作用。 卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序 要卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序，请： 1. 在 Windows Control Panel（控制面板）中，打开 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序） 实用程序，选择 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序），然后单击 Change/Remove （更改／删除）。 2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。 欲获取使用 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 17 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话 要使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话，请： • 参阅您的 softphone 服务提供的说明。取决于您的 softphone 服务，使用电话适配器拨打电话的说明 可能有所不同。 • 确保您的 softphone 应用程序正处于运行状态。 注释 电话适配器不支持拨号调制解调器连接或传真传输。 对于 Skype* 用户 当您首次运行 Skype 时，屏幕上将出现一个请求允许电话适配器使用 Skype 的对话框。 重要说明！您必须 选择 “Allow this program to use Skype”（允许该程序使用 Skype），然后单击 OK（确定）， 以使用电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 18 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）弹出菜单 当您完成电话适配器软件的安装后，系统任务栏上将显示如下 SoftPhone Agent （SoftPhone 代理程序）图标。 右键单击 softphone 代理程序图标，可查看显示 Skype 状态的弹出菜单，借此您可请求 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）是否在系统启动时运行，并允许您退出 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）。 注释 要使用 PCI 电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话，那么 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序） 则必须在系统任务栏上处于运行状态。 拨号说明 • 要在美国拨打本地或长途电话，请拨 1 + 区号 + 七位电话号码 + #。 • 要在美国以外的国家拨打本地或长途电话，请拨国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。 • 要拨打国际电话，您必须按如下方法拨号：国家前缀 + 国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。 要拨打 Skype 对 Skype 电话，只需为 Skype 联系人分配一个两位快速拨号，然后在连接到 PCI 电话适配器 的模拟电话机上拨打该号码即可。 注释 有关最新说明，请查阅 Skype 网站。 19 4 高级功能 英特尔® 600M PCI 电话适配器支持多项高级功能，如呼叫方 ID（I 类和 II 类）、呼叫等待和电话会议 呼叫等。 呼叫方 ID 功能 I 类呼叫方 ID 允许您在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。而 II 类呼叫方 ID 则允许您在通话期间 查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。如果您已使用 softphone 应用程序创建了联系人名单，那么当您接到某个联系人 的呼叫时，您则可在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看该联系人的姓名。 按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能 注释 术语 “hook flash”（转接）是指通过按 “Flash”（闪挂）按钮或电话机的话筒挂叉而短暂（一秒半）挂断 电话。 对于除英国、法国和德国以外的所有国家 基本呼叫等待 要挂起当前的呼叫而接听拨入的呼叫，请： 1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。 2. 要重新接通第一个呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。 基本电话会议 要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫： 1. 请拨打会议的第一部电话。 2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时，全部三部电话均已相互 接通。 4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。 电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待 电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会议 呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。 当完成拨入呼叫的通话后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，则被重新接入原先的电话会议呼叫。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 20 英国、法国和德国 在英国、法国和德国使用高级呼叫功能的动作主要有三种。具体如下： 功能 操作 挂断通话 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 1 转至另一个呼叫 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 2 将呼叫接入会议 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 3 当使用这些功能时，您必须在执行 hook flash（转接）操作后等待拨号音。当听到拨号音后，您可按电话键盘 上相应的呼叫控制数字键。不按呼叫控制数字键将取消该过程。但在某些情况下，执行 hook flash（转接） 操作已足以对呼叫等待事件作出应答或开始一项新的呼叫。如果电话会议呼叫已建立完毕，那么“挂断通话” 和“转至另一个呼叫”功能只可用于其它拨入或拨出的呼叫。 基本呼叫等待 要挂起当前的呼叫而应答拨入的呼叫，请： 1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。 2. 要重新接通原来的电话呼叫，请首先执行 hook flash（转接）操作。然后，当听到拨号音时， 按数字键 2，此时您便重新接通了原来的电话呼叫。执行如上相同的步骤便可接回第二个呼叫方。 3. 要建立包含所有三方的电话会议呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后按数字键 3。 4. 要挂断当前的通话并转至呼叫挂起状态，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后 按数字键 1。 基本电话会议 要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫，请： 1. 拨打会议的第一部电话。 2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 按数字键 3 将第二部电话添加到会议中。此时，全部三部电话均已相互接通。 4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。 电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待 电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通单机电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会 议呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。 一旦接通拨入呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 2 便重新接通电话会议 呼叫，与此同时，拨入的呼叫则被置于挂起状态。如果您希望将该拨入呼叫添加到当前的会议中，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。然后按数字键 3，拨入的呼叫便被添加到会议中。如果您希望挂断 拨入呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 1，拨入的呼叫便被挂断，且您将同时 重新接通电话会议呼叫。 21 5 故障诊断与排除 电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中 如果您将电话适配器连接到了墙壁电话插座上，请执行如下各步： 1. 关闭计算机电源。 2. 从墙壁电话插座上拔下电话适配器并将其连接到普通电话机上（有关详细说明，请参阅第 11 页）。 3. 打开计算机电源。 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作 如果在 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）运行期间试图将计算机置于挂起状态〈例如待机或 睡眠〉，或者如果计算机因不活动超时而进入挂起状态，那么将显示一条挂起将禁用 softphone 服务的 消息，然后问您是否继续。计算机处于挂起状态期间，您将无法使用电话适配器接听或拨打电话。 拨打电话时听不到拨号音 如果 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）未处于运行状态，或者如果 softphone 应用程序未与您的 VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接，那么您的电话适配器则不生成拨号音。如果当您拿起话筒时听不到拨号音， 那么请尝试以下各项故障诊断步骤，期间每完成一步，请检查一次拨号音： 1. 确保 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）以及 softphone 应用程序均处于运行状态。 2. 确保 softphone 应用程序已与您的 VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接。 3. 确保电话适配卡已连接到电话机上。 4. 拔下电话机和电话适配器的电话线，然后再重新插接一次。 5. 在电话适配器和电话机之间换用一条新的电话线（RJ-11 规格电话线）。 6. 检查并确保 PCI 电话适配卡已正确地连接到计算机上且连接牢固。否则，请重新插接 PCI 电话适配卡 （有关详细说明，请参阅第 9 页）。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 22 与 Skype 相关的问题 Skype 不允许 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）使用 Skype 如果出现如下弹出消息：“Request to access Skype was denied. Please check Skype Options and restart the SoftPhone Agent”（请求访问 Skype 被拒绝。请检查 Skype Options（Skype 选项） 并重新启动 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）），那么说明 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）已被 Skype 阻止。请执行如下各步，以从被阻止程序列表中删除 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）： 注释 取决于您所使用的 Skype，以下窗口可能有所不同。 1. 在 Skype 主菜单中，单击 Tools（工具），然后从下拉菜单中选择 Options（选项）。 2. 在 Options（选项）窗口中，单击 Manage other programs' access to Skype（管理其它 程序对 Skype 的访问）。 故障诊断与排除 23 3. 选择 IADAPT32.EXE（如下所示），单击 Change（更改），然后单击 OK（确定）。 4. 当下面的窗口出现时，选择 Allow this program to use Skype（允许本程序使用 Skype）， 然后单击 OK（确定）。 至此，您便可以通过您的电话适配器使用 Skype 了。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 24 25 A 符合标准与规章 本附录包括英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器符合的以下规范、规章和标准信息： • 欧盟符合标准声明 • 产品生态声明 • 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章 • 产品认证 欧盟符合标准声明 我们，即英特尔公司，基于独立承担责任的原则在此声明，本英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器产品符合 获得 CE 标志认证的所有适用标准和基本要求，并符合欧盟委员会规章 89/336/EEC（电磁兼容性规章） 和 73/23/EEC（安全／低电压规章）的要求。 本产品上贴有 CE 标志，表示符合欧盟所有成员国的规章要求，可不受任何限制地在欧盟各国销售。 本产品符合欧盟规章 89/336/EEC 和 73/23/EEC 的规定和要求。 This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC. Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud nõuetele. Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä. Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και 73/23/ΕΟΚ. Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak. Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem. Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas. Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u 73/23/EEC. Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 26 Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej 89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG. Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS. Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar. 产品生态声明 无铅 PCI 卡 本 PCI 卡不含铅成分，而本卡上所采用的某些独立组件却含有少量的铅成分，但这些铅成分是确保组件发挥其 性能和／或可靠性所必需的。本 PCI 卡属于“无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 产品。 本 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI 卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料均不含铅成分。表 1 列出了贴于卡上的各种 “无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 标志及其标识文字。 表 1. 无铅卡标志 说明 标志 无铅二级互连产品：此符号用于 标识 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI 卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料中铅 (Pb) 含量水平不高于其重量的 0.1% (1000 ppm) 的电气和电子 组件及部件。 或 或 符合标准与规章 27 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器若以正确方式安装于兼容的主机系统中，将符合表 2 所列的所有 EMC （电磁兼容性）规章。 表 2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章 规章 标题 FCC B 类 Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15, Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices（联邦规章法案第 47 条第 2 和第 15 部分的 B 子部分，射频设备）。（美国） ICES-003（B 类） Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus （可引起干扰的设备标准，数字设备）。（加拿大） EN55022: 1998 年 （B 类） Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment （对信息技术设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（欧盟） EN55024: 1998 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics Limits and methods of measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性的 限制和测量方法）。（欧盟） AS/NZS CISPR22 （B 类） Australian Communications Authority, Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility（澳大利亚通信管理局电磁兼容性标准）。 （澳大利亚和新西兰） CISPR 22，第 3 版 （B 类） Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment（对信息技术 设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（国际） CISPR 24: 1997 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics – Limits and Methods of Measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性 – 限制和测量方法）。（国际） VCCI（B 类） Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology Equipment（信息技术设备民间干扰控制）。（日本） 日本声明的译文：依照信息技术设备民间干扰控制委员会 (VCCI) 标准，本设备属于 B 类产品。在居住 环境下，如果在无线电或电视接收机附近使用本设备，将可能产生无线电干扰。应按照产品手册中的说明 安装和使用本设备。 韩国 B 类设备声明译文：此设备属于家用设备，经验证符合 EMC（电磁兼容性）的有关要求。您可在居住 环境和其它非居住环境下使用本设备。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 28 产品认证 台式机主板级认证标志 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下产品认证标志： 表 3. 产品认证标志 说明 标志 UL 美国／加拿大共同认可组件标志。包括英特尔台式机主板的相关 UL 文件号：E210882。 B 类设备 FCC 合格声明徽标；包括英特尔名称和 600SM 型号。 CE 标志。声明符合欧盟 (EU) EMC 规章 (89/336/EEC) 和低电压规章 (73/23/EEC)。 澳大利亚通信管理局 (ACA) C 勾号标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔供应商代码 N-232。 日本 VCCI（民间干扰控制委员会）合格标志。 韩国 MIC（信息和通信部）认证标志。包括与其相邻的 MIC 认证编号： CPU-600SM。 有关 MIC 认证的信息，请访问以下站点 http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM 台湾 BSMI（标准计量与检验局）标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔公司代号 D33025。 印刷电路板制造商认可标志。包括独特效果的 UL 认证制造商徽标和易燃性 等级号（位于焊接一侧）。 V-0 符合标准与规章 29 服务提供商认证 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下服务提供商认证标志： 表 4. 服务提供商认证 说明 标志 Skype 认证标志。 英特尔 600SM 电话适配器已取得 Skype 认证* *免责声明：本认证仅适用于英特尔 600SM PCI 电话 适配卡，因此不适用于系统或其它组件的认证。有关详情， 请查阅 http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/ certified_guidelines.html 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 30 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide Order Number: D61185-001US ii Revision History Revision Revision History Date -001 First release of the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide May 2006 If an FCC declaration of conformity marking is present on the board, the following statement applies: FCC Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions related to the EMC performance of this product, contact: Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, OR 97124 1-800-628-8686 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by Intel Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Tested to comply with FCC standards for home or office use. Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada. iii Disclaimer Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel® products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in Intel’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. All information and software contained herein is provided "AS IS" to Intel customers. Intel Corporation disclaims all express or implied warranties and liabilities for the use of this document, the software and the information contained herein, and assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document or the software, nor does Intel make a commitment to update the information or software contained herein. Intel reserves the right to make changes to this document or software at any time, without notice. Please contact the distribution vendor for specific Linux* version support. Some of the software included with the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter may be provided by third parties other than Intel (“Third Party Software”). Your rights to use the Third Party Software are governed by the license agreements that accompany such components. Intel does not warrant such Third Party Software in any way and assumes no liability for your use of the Third Party Software. Please contact the distribution vendor of the Third Party Software for specific support. This document as well as the software described in it are furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the license. The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Intel Corporation. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document or any software that may be provided in association with this document. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written consent of Intel Corporation. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2006. Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide iv v Preface This User’s Guide provides information about installation, features, troubleshooting, and regulatory requirements for the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter. Document Organization The chapters in this User’s Guide are arranged as follows: 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card: instructions on how to install the PCI phone adapter card 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to install the PCI phone adapter software 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to make a call using the PCI phone adapter 4 Advanced Features: description of the advanced features of the PCI phone adapter 5 Troubleshooting: troubleshooting information for the PCI phone adapter A Regulatory Compliance: safety and EMC regulations, and product certification Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual: CAUTION Cautions warn the user about how to prevent damage to hardware or loss of data. NOTE Notes call attention to important information. Terminology The table below gives descriptions of some common terms used in this guide. Term Description hook flash The act of hanging up the telephone for a short period of time (one-half second). This operation is often used as a signal to perform services, such as transferring a call. softphone A program that allows you to make Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) telephone calls from your computer or computing device. Internet telephony providers typically include a softphone application along with their service. VoIP The acronym for Voice over Internet Protocol, which allows voice information to be sent digitally over the Internet. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide vi System Requirements • One of the following Intel® Desktop Boards: D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/ D102GGC2/D865GSA • One of the following operating systems: ⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional ⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home Box Contents • Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card • Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM • Half-height PCI bracket • Caution label • Reference Guide vii Contents 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card Phone Adapter Handling Precautions........................................................................9 Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware ..................................................................10 Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone ..................................................... 11 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in Microsoft Windows XP...................................13 Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings .................................................................14 Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP ......................................................16 Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent ..........................................................................16 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter For Skype* Users ................................................................................................17 4 Advanced Features Caller ID Features ...............................................................................................19 Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale ................................................19 5 Troubleshooting The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack by mistake....................... 21 SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state ...............................................21 No dial tone heard when placing a call ...................................................................21 Skype-related Issues ...........................................................................................22 A Regulatory Compliance European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement ..............................................25 Product Ecology Statement...................................................................................26 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations ....................................................27 Product Certifications...........................................................................................28 Tables 1. Lead-Free Board Markings ..............................................................................26 2. EMC Regulations............................................................................................27 3. Product Certification Markings .........................................................................28 4. Service Provider Certification ..........................................................................28 Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide viii 9 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card CAUTION Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the PCI Phone Adapter Card components. Install the PCI card at an ESD-controlled workstation. If such a workstation is not available, wear an antistatic wrist strap or touch the surface of the antistatic package before handling the card. Phone Adapter Handling Precautions This phone adapter card can be damaged by static electricity. Follow these instructions to minimize the risk of damaging the phone adapter with electrostatic discharge: 1. Place everything you need to install the phone adapter close at hand before starting. Moving around the room to get tools causes static electricity to build up. 2. Stay in physical contact with a metal portion of the computer or the computer's power supply while handling the phone adapter. Touching the computer will discharge any built-up static electricity. 3. Handle the phone adapter card by its top edge and bracket only. Do not touch the edge connectors or the exposed circuitry. 4. Do not place the phone adapter on any metal surface. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 10 Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware To install the PCI Phone Adapter card: 1. Turn off the computer and unplug the AC power cord. Remove the cover. 2. Locate an unused PCI slot. 3. If necessary, remove the coverplate from the open slot. Save the screw. 4. Insert the phone adapter card into the PCI slot. You may have to push firmly to insert the card. 5. Replace the coverplate screw. OM19432 Installing the Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card 11 Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone CAUTION Do not directly connect the Intel 600SM Phone Adapter card to a telephone wall jack. The phone adapter will not function properly until it is disconnected from the telephone wall jack and the computer is rebooted. The phone adapter will only function properly when connected to an analog phone. OM19433 1. Connect a standard telephone to the RJ-11 jack on the back panel of the phone adapter card, as shown below. OM19434 RJ-11 2. Reconnect the computer’s AC power cord. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 12 13 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in Microsoft Windows XP To install your phone adapter drivers: 1. Turn on the computer. 2. When the New Hardware Wizard appears, click Cancel. 3. Place the Intel Express Installer CD into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. 4. When the Intel Express Installer window appears, accept the default settings and click Install Now. 5. Follow the installation messages that appear. 6. The computer will automatically reboot after installing the phone adapter drivers. 7. After successful installation of the software, the main menu shows the final status. NOTE The installation procedure will automatically install icons on your computer for your regional Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) service providers. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 14 Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings To change the country/region settings for your phone adapter, do the following: 1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, and then right-click Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter to access the Properties dialog box. Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter 15 2. From the Properties dialog box, click the Country/region tab. This tab provides access to a menu of selectable country names, which will indicate to the driver to use a country-specific signaling profile. Select the appropriate country/region and click OK. For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 16 Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP To uninstall the modem in Windows XP: 1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, rightclick Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter, and then select Uninstall. 2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear. For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system. NOTE The phone adapter will not function without the phone adapter driver installed. Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent To uninstall the SoftPhone Agent: 1. From the Windows Control Panel, open the Add or Remove Programs utility, select SoftPhone Agent, and then click Change/Remove. 2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear. For help with using Add or Remove Programs, refer to your Windows help system. 17 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter To make a call using the PCI phone adapter: • Refer to the instructions provided by your softphone service. Instructions for making calls using the phone adapter may vary depending on your softphone service. • Make sure that your softphone application is running. NOTE The phone adapter does not support dialup modem connectivity or fax transmission. For Skype* Users When you first run Skype, a dialog box will appear asking permission to allow the phone adapter to use Skype. IMPORTANT! You MUST select “Allow this program to use Skype” and then click OK in order to make Skype calls using the phone adapter. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 18 The SoftPhone Agent Pop-up Menu Once you have installed the phone adapter software, the system tray will display the following icon for the SoftPhone Agent. Right-click the softphone agent icon to view a popup menu which displays the status of Skype, allows you to request whether the SoftPhone Agent will run at startup, and allows you to exit the SoftPhone Agent. NOTE The SoftPhone Agent must be running in the system tray in order make Skype phone calls using the PCI phone adapter. Dialing Instructions • To make a local or long-distance phone call in the U.S.A., dial 1 + area code + seven-digit phone number + #. • To make a local or long-distance phone call outside the U.S.A., dial country code + area code + phone number + #. • To make international phone calls, you must dial the number as follows: 011 or 00 + country code + area code + phone number + #. To make Skype-to-Skype calls, simply assign a two-digit speed-dial number to a Skype contact, and then dial that number on an analog phone connected to the PCI phone adapter. NOTE For the most current instructions, refer to the Skype website. 19 4 Advanced Features The Intel® 600M PCI Phone Adapter supports a number of advanced features including Caller ID (Type I and Type II), Call Waiting, and Conference Calling. Caller ID Features Type I Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call on the Caller ID screen. Type II Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call while you are on an existing call. If you have created a contact list using your softphone application and you receive a call from a contact, then you will be able to view the name of that contact on the Caller ID screen. Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale NOTE The term “hook flash” means to hang up the phone briefly (one-half second) by pressing the “Flash” button or the hook of the phone. For all countries except the United Kingdom, France, and Germany Basic Call Waiting To answer an incoming call while keeping an existing call on hold: 1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the second incoming call. 2. To reconnect to the first call, perform another hook flash. Basic Call Conference To create a conference call between three or more phones: 1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference. 2. Once you are connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. 3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. At this point, all three phones will be in the call. 4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again. Call Waiting while in a Conference Call Call waiting while in a conference call works the same way that it does in a regular phone call. When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once the incoming call is complete, perform another hook flash to be reconnected to the conference call. The United Kingdom, France, and Germany In the United Kingdom, France, and Germany, there are three main actions used for advanced calling features. They are as follows: Feature Action Drop Active Call Hook flash, then press 1 Switch to another call Hook flash, then press 2 Connect calls to a conference Hook flash, then press 3 Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 20 When using these features, you must wait for a dial tone after performing a hook flash. Once you hear a dial tone, you may press the appropriate call control number on your phone keypad. Failure to press a call control number will cancel the process. In some cases, performing a hook flash will be enough to answer a call waiting event or to initiate a new call. If a conference call has been established, the "Drop Active Call" and "Switch to another call" features can only be used on additional incoming or outgoing calls. Basic Call Waiting To answer an incoming call, while keeping an existing call on hold: 1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the second incoming call. 2. To reconnect to the original phone call, first perform a hook flash. Then, once you hear a dial tone, press 2 and you will be reconnected to the original phone call. The same procedure can be used to switch back to the second caller. 3. To establish a conference call involving all three parties, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial tone, and then press 3. 4. To drop the current call and switch to the call on-hold, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial tone, and then press 1. Basic Call Conference To create a conference call between three or more phones: 1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference. 2. Once you’re connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. 3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. Press 3 to add the second phone to the conference. At this point, all three phones will be in the call. 4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again. Call Waiting while in a Conference Call Call waiting while in a conference works the same way that it does in a standard single phone call. When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once connected to the incoming call, perform another hook flash, and listen for the dial tone. Press 2 to be reconnected to the conference call, with the incoming call put on hold. If you’d like to add the incoming call to the current conference, perform a hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Then press 3 and the incoming call will be added to the conference. If you’d like to drop the incoming call, perform a hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Press 1 and the incoming call will be dropped and you will be reconnected to the conference call. 21 5 Troubleshooting The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack by mistake If you connected the phone adapter to a telephone wall jack, do the following: 1. Turn off the computer. 2. Disconnect the phone adapter from the telephone wall jack and connect it to a standard telephone (for detailed instructions, see page 11). 3. Turn on the computer. SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state If you attempt to place your computer into a suspend state, such as standby or hibernate, or if the computer attempts it via an inactivity timeout while the SoftPhone Agent is running, a message will appear indicating that suspending will disable your softphone service, and then ask if you want to continue. You will not be able to receive calls or dial out using your phone adapter while your computer is in a suspend state. No dial tone heard when placing a call If the SoftPhone Agent is not running, or if your softphone application does not have an active connection to your VoIP service provider, then your phone adapter will not generate a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone after picking up the phone, try the following troubleshooting steps, and recheck the dial tone after each step: 1. Ensure that the SoftPhone Agent and your softphone application are running. 2. Ensure that your softphone application has an active connection to your VoIP service provider. 3. Ensure that the phone adapter card is connected to the telephone. 4. Disconnect and reconnect the telephone line to the telephone and to the phone adapter. 5. Install a new telephone line (RJ-11 cable) between the phone adapter and the telephone. 6. Check to make sure the PCI phone adapter card is seated correctly in your computer. If not, reseat the PCI phone adapter card (for detailed instructions, see page 9). Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 22 Skype-related Issues Skype does not allow the SoftPhone Agent to use Skype If you see the following popup message, “Request to access Skype was denied. Please check Skype Options and restart the SoftPhone Agent” then the SoftPhone Agent has been blocked by Skype. Perform the following steps to remove the SoftPhone Agent from the list of blocked programs: NOTE The following windows may differ depending the version of Skype you are using. 1. From the Skype main menu, click Tools, and then select Options from the pull-down menu. 2. From the Options window, click Manage other programs' access to Skype. Troubleshooting 23 3. Select IADAPT32.EXE (as shown below), click Change, and then click OK. 4. When the following window appears, select Allow this program to use Skype, and then click OK. You will now be able to use Skype with your phone adapter. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 24 25 A Regulatory Compliance This appendix contains the following regulatory compliance information for Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter: • European Union Declaration of Conformity statement • Product Ecology statement • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations • Product certifications European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement We, Intel Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the product Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter is in conformity with all applicable essential requirements necessary for CE marking, following the provisions of the European Council Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) and Council Directive 73/23/EEC (Safety/Low Voltage Directive). The product is properly CE marked demonstrating this conformity and is for distribution within all member states of the EU with no restrictions. This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC. Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud nõuetele. Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä. Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και 73/23/ΕΟΚ. Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak. Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem. Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas. Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u 73/23/EEC. Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej 89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 26 Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS. Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar. Product Ecology Statement Lead-Free PCI Card This PCI card is lead-free although certain discrete components used on the board contain a small amount of lead which is necessary for component performance and/or reliability. This PCI card is referred to as “Lead-free second level interconnect.” The PCI card substrate and the solder connections from the PCI card to the components (second-level connections) are all leadfree. Table 1 shows the various forms of the “Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect” mark as it appears on the board and accompanying collateral. Table 1. Lead-Free Board Markings Description Mark Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect: This symbol is used to identify electrical and electronic assemblies and components in which the lead (Pb) concentration level in the PCI card substrate and the solder connections from the PCI card to the components (second-level interconnect) is not greater than 0.1% by weight (1000 ppm). or or Regulatory Compliance 27 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter complies with the EMC regulations stated in Table 2 when correctly installed in a compatible host system. Table 2. EMC Regulations Regulation Title FCC Class B Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15, Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices. (USA) ICES-003 (Class B) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus. (Canada) EN55022: 1998 (Class B) Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. (European Union) EN55024: 1998 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics Limits and methods of measurement. (European Union) AS/NZS CISPR22 (Class B) Australian Communications Authority, Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility. (Australia and New Zealand) CISPR 22, 3rd Edition, (Class B) Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. (International) CISPR 24: 1997 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics – Limits and Methods of Measurement. (International) VCCI (Class B) Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology Equipment (Japan) Japanese Kanji statement translation: This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. Korean Class B statement translation: This is household equipment that is certified to comply with EMC requirements. You may use this equipment in residential environments and other non-residential environments. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 28 Product Certifications Board-Level Certification Markings Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following product certification markings: Table 3. Product Certification Markings Description Mark UL joint US/Canada Recognized Component mark. Includes adjacent UL file number for Intel desktop boards: E210882. FCC Declaration of Conformity logo mark for Class B equipment. Includes Intel name and 600SM model designation. CE mark. Declaring compliance to European Union (EU) EMC directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage directive (73/23/EEC). Australian Communications Authority (ACA) C-tick mark. Includes adjacent Intel supplier code number, N-232. Japan VCCI (Voluntary Control Council for Interference) mark. S. Korea MIC (Ministry of Information and Communication) mark. Includes adjacent MIC certification number: CPU-600SM. For information about MIC certification, go to http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM Taiwan BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspections) mark. Includes adjacent Intel company number, D33025. Printed wiring board manufacturer’s recognition mark. Consists of a unique UL recognized manufacturer’s logo, along with a flammability rating (solder side). V-0 Service Provider Certification Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following service provider certification: Table 4. Service Provider Certification Description Mark Skype certification mark. Intel 600SM Phone Adapter is Skype Certified* *Disclaimer: This certification applies only to the Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter card, and cannot be used to certify a system or other components. For more details, please see http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/ certified_guidelines.html Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili su World Wide Web. Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind. Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web. Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web. http://support.intel.com/support/processors 1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment manufacturer. Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al zócalo del procesador. Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso ao soquete do processador. 2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information. Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações. Open (O) Locked (L) 478-pin micro-FCPGA To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator. Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis. Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite. Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung geöffnet werden. Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador. Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete. 3. Figure A Pin A1 Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor drops completely in. En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement. Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa, girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito. 4. Figure B NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M. Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher in der Fassung sitzt. Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado. Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o processador entre completamente. 5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see http://support.intel.com/support/processors Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador (Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. 6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings. Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects. Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden. Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales. Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes corretos. Notes www.intel.com support.intel.com 1-916-377-7000 07:00-17:00 U.S. Pacific Time Monday–Friday To obtain warranty service in the U.S. and Canada 1-800-628-8686 América Latina 916-377-0114 (en Español) Brazil 916-377-0180 (en Portuguese) Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00 For English and European customers not listed below +44 (0) 870 607 2439 Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29 Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099 Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276 Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET For the latest support offerings, please see support.intel.com Asia-Pacific/English Support Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415 Hours: 0900-1400 India** 000-6517, 830-3634 Hours: 0900-1500 Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Thailand 1-800-6310003 Hours 09:00-1600 Hong Kong 852-2844-4456 Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117 Singapore 65-831-1311 Malaysia 1-800-80-1390 Hours: 0900-1700 Australia 1-800-649-931 Hours: 1000-1700 New Zealand 0-800-444-365 Hours: 1100-1700 Asia-Pacific/Korean Support Korea 822-7672-595 Hours: 0900-1700 Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support PRC 800-820-1100 Taiwan 2-718-9915 Hours: 0900-1700 Japan support.intel.co.jp 0120-868686 Hours: 0900-1700 *IDD Long Distance into the Philippines **Manual toll-free. When dialing from India need to use phone with IDD facility. Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries. Order Number A82732-001 Printed in USA Windows XP Professional x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Home Edition* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition* Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:08:08 PM /18/2012 1:08:08 PM G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM Installation Notes for the Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 27 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G33557-003 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:29:58 PM /18/2012 1:29:58 PM Installation Notes for the Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM Instructions Video at: http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-032999.htm G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration LGA 2011 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration LGA 1155/56, LGA 1366 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration Fan Confi guration B G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 51 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G33559-004 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM Boxed Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. The heatsink may have thermal interface material attached to the bottom as shown in Fig. 1. (Be careful not to damage the thermal interface material.) If not, use the enclosed syringe and apply all of the thermal interface material to the top of the processor as shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 1 mPGA478B Fig. 2 Install the processor retention mechanism (A) following the motherboard manufacturer’s installation instructions. Open the socket handle (B). Install the processor by carefully aligning the pins to the socket (C). Close the socket handle (D). B A C D Connect the processor fan cable connector (H) to the motherboard header. H Align the heatsink and clip assembly with the retention mechanism and place it on the processor. The heatsink is symmetrical. With the clip levers in the up position (E), push down on all four clip frame corners to secure to the retention mechanism hooks (F). Close the clip levers (G) (levers require force to be completely closed). G 1 2 E F Copyright  Intel Corporation 2001 Part Number A66630-001 First Edition August 2001 Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 6/18/2012 2:53:47 PM /18/2012 2:53:47 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP Installation Notes Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is to be attached under the main board prior to installing the motherboard inside the chassis. This UBP will be provided in the box with the thermal solution. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique contenus dans la boîte, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnés dans les notes d’installation disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être fi xée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie dans la boîte avec la solution thermique. Les images fi gurant dans ce manuel ne sont que des illustrations. L’apparence réelle des composants peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor der Installation des Boxed-Kühlers und des Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor dem Einbau der Hauptplatine im Chassis unter der Hauptplatine angebracht werden muss. Diese UBP wird in der Box mit dem Kühler geliefert. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar el procesador y la solución térmica en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas para la instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. La solución térmica del procesador requiere una placa posterior unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes de instalar la placa madre dentro del chasis. Esta UBP se suministra en la caja con la solución G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM térmica. Las imágenes de este manual solo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real del componente puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) esteja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes que a placa mãe seja instalada no gabinete. A UBP é fornecida na caixa junto com a solução térmica. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione di sponibili all’indirizzo http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. La soluzione termica del processore necessita di una Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) collegata sotto la scheda madre prima che questa venga installata nello chassis. L’UBP è inclusa nella confezione della soluzione termica. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed zainstalowaniem dostarczonej w pudełku chłodnicy prosimy uwzględnić kwestie dotyczące integracji opisane w uwagach dostępnych na stronie http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Chłodnica wymaga przymocowania ujednoliconej tylnej płyty (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) pod płytą główną przed zainstalowaniem płyty głównej wewnątrz obudowy. Płyta UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z chłodnicą. Ilustracje zamieszczone w tej instrukcji są przybliżone. Rzeczywisty wygląd komponentów może być odmienny. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой поставляемой в штучной упаковке системы охлаждения и процессора внимательно изучите вопросы интеграции, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM указанные в замечаниях по установке, которые можно найти по адресу http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы унифицированная пластина крепления (UBP) была установлена под материнской платой до установки материнской платы в корпус. UBP будет предоставлена в упаковке вместе с системой охлаждения. Изображения в данном руководстве представлены только в качестве иллюстраций. В действительности внешний вид компонентов может быть иным. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 在安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器之前，請先至此網站 http://support.intel.com/ support/processors 參考安裝注意事項中有關整合的問題。主機板裝入機殼前， 需先使用「一体式背板」(UBP) 將處理器散熱解決方案固定在主機板下方。UBP 隨附於散熱解決方案之外盒中。本手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際組件的樣式可 能有所不同。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 在安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请首先考虑站点 http://support.intel. com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成问题。向机箱内安装主 板之前，要求使用一体式背板 (UBP)，将处理器散热解决方案连接到主板的下 面。UBP 将随包装盒与散热解决方案一起 提供。本手册所含图示仅用于示意目 的。组件的实际外观可能有所不同。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 포장된 서멀 솔루션과 프로세서를 설치하기 전에, http://support.intel.com/ support/processors에서 제공되는 설치 지침을 참조해서 설치 작업의 문제점을 고 려하십시오. 프로세서 서멀 솔루션을 사용하려면 마더보드를 섀시 내부에 설치 하기 전에 메인 보드 하단에Unifi ed Back Plate(UBP)가 장착되어 있어야 합니다. 이 UBP는 서멀 솔루션과 함께 상자에 동봉되어 있습니다. 본 설명서의 그림은 설명 목적으로만 제공되는 것입니다. 실제 부품 모양은 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM ボックス版サーマル・ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール・ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を確認してください。プロセッサー・サーマル・ソリューションの要件とし て、マウントする前にメインボードの下に Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付ける必 要があります。この UBP はサーマル・ソリューションに同梱されています。このマ ニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なものに過ぎず、実際のコンポーネントの外観 は異なる場合があります。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM Make sure the thermal interface material is applied to the top of the CPU Integrated Heat Spreader prior to installation of the heatsink as shown in Step 7. Installation confi gurations may vary. The actual confi guration is defi ned by the chassis design. N'oubliez pas d'appliquer la pâte thermique sur le répartiteur de chaleur intégré au CPU avant d’installer le dissipateur thermique comme indiqué à l'étape 7. Les confi gurations d'installation peuvent différer. La confi guration réelle dépend de la conception du châssis. Stellen Sie sicher, dass vor der Installation des Kühlkörpers, wie in Schritt 7 gezeigt, die Wärmeleitpaste auf das Wärmeverteilblech (Integrated Heat Spreader – IHS) der CPU aufgebracht wird. Die Installationsanordnungen können variieren. Die tatsächliche Anordnung wird durch den Aufbau des Chassis vorgegeben. Antes de instalar el disipador térmico como se muestra en el Paso 7, asegúrese de aplicar el material de interfaz térmica en la parte superior del difusor de calor integrado a la CPU. La manera de realizar la instalación puede variar y dependerá del diseño del chasis. Certifi que-se de que o material de interface térmica seja aplicado na parte superior do Difusor de Calor Integrado da CPU antes de instalar o dissipador de calor conforme mostrado no passo 7. As confi gurações de instalação poderão variar. A confi guração fi nal depende do design do gabinete. Prima dell’installazione del dissipatore di calore integrato (IHS, Integrated Heat Spreader) della CPU assicurarsi che nella parte superiore di questo venga applicata la pasta termoconduttiva, come mostrato nel passaggio 7. Le confi gurazioni di installazione potrebbero variare. La confi gurazione effettiva dipende dalla struttura dello chassis. Przed zainstalowaniem radiatora należy pokryć materiałem termoizolacyjnym górną rozpraszającą ciepło powierzchnię procesora, jak pokazano w czynności 7. Konfi guracja może być rozmaita i zależy od konstrukcji płyty montażowej. Перед установкой радиатора убедитесь в том, что на поверхность интегрированного теплоотвода процессора нанесен специальный теплопроводящий состав, как показано на иллюстрации к Шагу 7. Конфигурация устанавливаемых элементов может отличаться. Конкретная конфигурация определяется конструкцией корпуса. 如步驟 7 所示，安裝處理器散熱器之前，確定先將熱介面材料塗在 CPU 整合 式均熱片的 上方。安裝配置可能視實際情形有所不同。 實際配置應依機殼設 計而調整。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM 请确保在安装散热器之前，事先将热界面材料施加到集成式 CPU 散热片的顶 部，如第 7 步 所示。安装配置可能有所不同。 实际配置由机箱设计决定。 단계 7의 그림과 같이 방열기를 설치하기 전에 CPU 통합형 방열판의 상단 에 열 전달제를 바르십시오. 설치 구성은 다양할 수 있습니다. 실제 구성 은 섀시 설계에 따라 결정됩니다. ステップ 7 に示すようにヒートシンクを取り付ける前に、CPUのインテグレーテッ ド・ヒートスプレッダーの上に必ずサーマル・インターフェース・マテリアルを塗布 してください。構造は異なることがあります。 実際の構造はシャーシの設計に 左右されます。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM http://www.intel.com/go/aio 1 2 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 3 4 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 5 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 6 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 7 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM A. Partially tighten the screws A. Serrez partiellement les vis A. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben leicht an A. Ajuste un poco los tornillos A. Aperte parcialmente os parafusos A. Serrare parzialmente le viti A. Dokręcić śruby do pierwszego oporu A. Наживите винты A. 螺絲稍微鎖緊 A. 略微拧紧螺丝 A. 나사를 약간 조입니다 A. ねじを途中まで締めます G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 8 http://www.intel.com/go/aio M2.5 * 0.45 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM B. Move the heat exchanger to close the gap to the blower B. Déplacez l'échangeur thermique de façon à l’accoler au ventilateur B. Verschieben Sie den Wärmetauscher, um die Lücke zum Lüfter zu schließen B. Mueva el intercambiador de calor para acercarlo al ventilador B. Coloque o trocador de calor em posição adjacente à ventoinha B. Spostare lo scambiatore di calore in modo da colmare lo spazio verso il soffi atore B. Przesunąć wymiennik ciepła, aby zakryć szczelinę do dmuchawy B. Прижмите теплообменник к вентилятору, устранив зазор B. 將散熱模組移近風扇些 B. 移动热交换器，使其靠近鼓风机 B. 열 교환기를 움직여서 송풍기와의 간격을 줄입니다 B. ヒート・エクスチェンジを動かしてブロアーとの隙間をなく すようにします G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 9 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM C. Fully tighten the screws C. Serrez complètement les vis C. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben vollständig fest C. Ajuste completamente los tornillos C. Aperte completamente os parafusos C. Stringere completamente le viti C. Całkowicie dokręcić śruby C. Полностью затяните винты C. 螺絲完全鎖緊 C. 完全拧紧螺丝 C. 나사를 완전히 조입니다 C. ねじを完全に締め付けます G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 10 11 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM D. Plug in the fan cable connector D. Connectez le câble du ventilateur D. Stecken Sie den Steckverbinder des Gebläsekabels ein D. Enchufe el conector del cable del ventilador D. Ligue o conector do cabo do ventilador D. Collegare il connettore del cavo della ventola D. Podłączyć kabel zasilania wentylatora D. Подсоедините разъем кабеля вентилятора D. 連接風扇線電源接頭 D. 插入风扇电缆连接器 D. 팬 케이블 커넥터를 꽂습니다 D. ファンケーブル・コネクターに接続します G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM 12 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 38 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 38 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G36426-002 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 6/18/2012 2:54:50 PM /18/2012 2:54:50 PM 80-00142-01 Rev. A Embedded MegaRAID® Software USER’S GUIDE November 2006 Version 2.0 ii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary information of LSI Logic Corporation. The information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of an officer of LSI Logic Corporation. Document 80-00142-01 Rev. A, Version 2.0 (November 2006) This document describes version 1.0 of LSI Logic Corporation’s Embedded MegaRAID Software and will remain the official reference source for all revisions/releases of this product until rescinded by an update. LSI Logic Corporation reserves the right to make changes to any products herein at any time without notice. LSI Logic does not assume any responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any product described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by LSI Logic; nor does the purchase or use of a product from LSI Logic convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any other of the intellectual property rights of LSI Logic or third parties. Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT LSI Logic, the LSI Logic logo design, MegaRAID, and MegaRAID Storage Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Logic Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective companies. CD To receive product literature, visit us at http://www.lsilogic.com. For a current list of our distributors, sales offices, and design resource centers, view our web page located at http://www.lsilogic.com/contacts/index.html Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide iii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Preface This document explains how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager™ software, the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU), and the MegaCLI utility to configure, monitor, and maintain RAID storage configurations with LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID Software. Audience This document assumes that you are familiar with RAID storage configurations and configuration utilities. The people who benefit from this book are network administrators who need to create storage configurations with LSI Embedded MegaRAID Software. Organization This document has the following chapters and appendixes: • Chapter 1, Overview, provides an overview of Embedded MegaRAID Software features and an overview of RAID levels. • Chapter 2, Driver Installation, explains how to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers for Microsoft Windows and Linux. • Chapter 3, MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility, explains how to use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to create storage configurations. • Chapter 4, MegaCLI Command Tool, explains how to use the MegaCLI command line utility to create storage configurations. • Chapter 5, MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation, introduces the main features of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software and explains how to install it. iv Preface Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Chapter 6, MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus, describes the layout of the Embedded MegaRAID Software window and lists the available menu options. • Chapter 7, Configuration, describes how to use the Embedded MegaRAID Software to create storage configurations, save configurations, and apply saved configurations to a controller. • Chapter 8, Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices, explains how the Embedded MegaRAID Software monitors the status of storage configurations and devices and displays information about them. • Chapter 9, Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations, describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager software maintenance functions for virtual disks and other storage devices. • Appendix A, Events and Messages, provides descriptions of the Embedded MegaRAID Software events. Conventions The following is a list of notational conventions used throughout this manual: Notation Example Meaning and Use Courier typeface .nwk file Names of commands, files, and directories are shown in Courier typeface. Bold typeface fd1sp In a command line, keywords are shown in bold, non-italic typeface. Enter them exactly as shown. Italics module In command lines and names italics indicate user variables. Italicized text must be replaced with appropriate user-specified items. Enter items of the type called for, using lowercase. Italic underscore full_pathname When an underscore appears in an italicized string, enter a user-supplied item of the type called for with no spaces. Initial capital letters Undo Edit Apply Names of menu commands, options, check buttons, text buttons, options buttons, text boxes, list boxes, and so on, are shown in text with initial capital lettering to avoid misreading. These elements may appear on your screen in all lowercase. Brackets [version] You may, but need not, select one item enclosed within brackets. Do not enter the brackets. Bar les | les.out2 You may select one (but not more than one) item from a list separated by bars. Do not enter the bar. Preface v Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: Notes contain supplementary information that can have an effect on system performance. Caution: Cautions are notifications that an action has the potential to adversely affect equipment operation, system performance, or data integrity. Revision History Braces {property | -all} You must select one (but not more than one) item enclosed within braces. Do not enter the braces. Ellipses option... In command formats, elements preceding ellipses may be repeated any number of times. Do not enter the ellipses. In menu items, if an ellipsis appears in an item, clicking that item brings up a dialog box. Semicolon, and other punctuation Use as shown in the text. Notation Example Meaning and Use Document Number Date Revision Remarks 80-00142-01 Rev. A November 2006 Version 2.0 Added RAID 5 information to the document. Updated MegaCLI commands. DB15-000356-00 July 2006 Version 1.0 Initial release of this document. vi Preface Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide vii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-1 1.1.1 Driver Features 1-1 1.1.2 BIOS Features 1-2 1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features 1-3 1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features 1-4 1.2 RAID Overview 1-4 1.2.1 RAID 0 Description 1-6 1.2.2 RAID 1 Description 1-7 1.2.3 RAID 5 Description 1-7 1.2.4 RAID 10 Description 1-9 Chapter 2 Driver Installation 2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation 2-1 2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver 2-2 2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation 2-2 2.2 Linux Driver Installation 2-3 2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File 2-3 2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux 2-3 2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System 2-5 2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic) 2-5 2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver 2-8 viii Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 3 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility 3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration 3-2 3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-2 3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU 3-3 3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration 3-4 3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration 3-5 3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive 3-7 3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives 3-8 3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies 3-10 3.4 Rebuilding a Drive 3-11 3.5 Hot Plug Support 3-12 3.6 Checking Data Consistency 3-13 3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-14 3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties 3-15 3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties 3-16 3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties 3-16 3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline 3-16 3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17 3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive 3-17 3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration 3-17 Chapter 4 MegaCLI Command Tool 4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview 4-2 4.2 Exception Handling 4-2 4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3 4.4 Adapter Commands 4-5 4.4.1 Display Adapter Information 4-5 4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5 4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties 4-6 4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6 4.4.5 Display Adapter Time 4-7 4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults 4-7 4.5 BIOS Commands 4-7 Contents ix Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7 4.5.2 Set BIOS Options 4-8 4.6 Event Log Commands 4-8 4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries 4-8 4.7 Configuration Commands 4-9 4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration 4-9 4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10 4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11 4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12 4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration 4-12 4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12 4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13 4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s) 4-13 4.7.9 Display Free Space 4-13 4.8 Logical Drive Commands 4-14 4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14 4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings 4-14 4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-14 4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check 4-15 4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-15 4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information 4-16 4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17 4.9 Physical Drive Commands 4-17 4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17 4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17 4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18 4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good 4-18 4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares 4-18 4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-18 4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED 4-19 4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild 4-19 4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal 4-20 4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20 4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20 x Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.10 Miscellaneous Commands 4-21 4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21 4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation 5.1 Overview 5-1 5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations 5-1 5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices 5-2 5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations 5-2 5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements 5-2 5.3 Installation 5-3 5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft Windows 5-3 5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux 5-6 5.3.3 Linux Error Messages 5-7 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus 6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-1 6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4 6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel 6-5 6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel 6-6 6.2.3 Event Log Panel 6-6 6.2.4 Menu Bar 6-7 Chapter 7 Configuration 7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-2 7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters 7-3 7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration 7-4 7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration 7-5 7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 7-8 7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 7-10 7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 7-12 7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13 Contents xi Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates 7-14 7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15 7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk 7-15 7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk 7-16 7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller 7-16 7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17 Chapter 8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices 8.1 Monitoring System Events 8-1 8.2 Monitoring Controllers 8-2 8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3 8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5 8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7 Chapter 9 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations 9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk 9-1 9.2 Running a Consistency Check 9-2 9.3 Rebuilding a Drive 9-2 9.4 Making a Drive Offline 9-3 Appendix A Events and Messages Customer Feedback xii Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. xiii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figures 1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives 1-6 1.2 RAID 1 Array 1-7 1.3 RAID 5 Array 1-8 1.4 RAID 10 Array 1-9 3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu 3-3 3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen 3-5 3.3 Logical Drive Submenu 3-9 5.1 Customer Information Screen 5-4 5.2 Setup Type Screen 5-5 6.1 Select Server Window 6-2 6.2 Server Login Window 6-3 6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4 7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen 7-2 7.2 Auto Configuration Screen 7-4 7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen 7-6 7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen 7-7 7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen 7-8 7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk 7-9 7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare 7-11 8.1 Controller Information 8-2 8.2 Physical Drive Information 8-4 8.3 Virtual Disk Properties 8-6 8.4 Group Show Progress Window 8-7 xiv Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. xv Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Tables 4.1 Conventions 4-3 4.2 Display Adapter Information 4-5 4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5 4.4 Set Adapter Properties 4-6 4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6 4.6 Display Adapter Time 4-7 4.7 Set Factory Defaults 4-7 4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7 4.9 Set BIOS Options 4-8 4.10 Event Log Management 4-8 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration 4-9 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11 4.14 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12 4.15 Display Existing Configuration 4-12 4.16 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12 4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13 4.18 Delete Logical Drives 4-13 4.19 Display Free Space 4-13 4.20 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14 4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings 4-14 4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-15 4.23 Manage Consistency Check 4-15 4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-16 4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information 4-16 4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17 4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17 4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17 4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18 4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good 4-18 4.31 Manage Hotspares 4-18 4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-19 4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED 4-19 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild 4-19 4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal 4-20 xvi Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20 4.37 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20 4.38 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21 4.39 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21 A.1 Event Error Levels A-1 A.2 Event Messages A-2 Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 1-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 1 Overview This manual explains the features of the Embedded MegaRAID® Software. It includes instructions for using the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility, the MegaCLI command line utility, and the MegaRAID Storage Manager™ software. You can use these three utilities to create storage configurations on physical disk drives controlled by Embedded MegaRAID Software. The manual also includes instructions for installing the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers in Microsoft Windows and Linux systems. This chapter contains the following sections: • Section 1.1, “Embedded MegaRAID Software Features” • Section 1.2, “RAID Overview” 1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software supports up to eight SAS or SATA ports, depending on the hardware platform. This provides a cost-effective way to achieve higher transfer rates and reliability. The following sections list the features of the driver, BIOS, the Ctrl-M Configuration Utility, and the disk management features. 1.1.1 Driver Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software driver supports the following features: • Support for 48-bit LBA • Support for drive roaming • Support for logical drives larger than 2 terabytes 1-2 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Support for migration path from Embedded MegaRAID Software to MegaRAID SAS/SATA hardware (this requires support from hardware RAID) • Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full initialization, and background initialization • Online mirror rebuilding • Support for auto rebuild • Check Consistency for RAID 1 and RAID 5 • Global hotspare support • Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Support for up to 8 physical drives and eight logical drives • Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only • Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128Mbytes, 1Gbyte • Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal) • Support for array cache setting (a RAID 10 volume is considered as a single array, though it might have 2, 3, or 4 spans) • Support for random deletion of logical drives • Error logging and notification • Support for Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP, Windows 2003, & Windows Vista • Support for Red Hat, SuSE for 2.4 & 2.6 kernels 1.1.2 BIOS Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software BIOS has the following features: • Support for Interrupt 13 and Enhanced Disk Drive Specification • Support for Int19h • Option ROM size of 64 Kbytes • Support for BIOS Boot Specification (BBS) (If available in system BIOS, this allows the user to select the controller from which to boot.) • Support for power-on self test (POST) Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Support for Post Memory Management (PMM): Specification v1.01, November 21, 1997 • Industry-standard EBDA • POST and run-time BIOS support for device insertion and removal • Support for Stop On Error during boot-up The following features are supported by the BIOS and the Ctrl-M Configuration Utility: • Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full initialization, and background initialization (BGI) • Global hotspare support • Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Support for auto rebuild • Support for up to eight physical drives and eight logical drives • Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only • Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128 Mbytes, and 1 Gbyte 1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features The Ctrl-M Configuration Utility supports the following features: • Ability to select a logical drive as boot device (by default, logical drive 0 is the boot drive) • Support to disable/enable BIOS boot support • Hot Auto Rebuild (during a hot plug event or when the user forces the physical drive offline) • Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal) • Support for array cache setting (RAID 10 volume is considered as a single array, though it may have 2, 3, or 4 spans) • Support for >2 terabyte logical drives • Support for random deletion of logical drives 1-4 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features The following features are available to manage the logical and physical disks in the system: • Configuration information display (in MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility and MegaRAID Storage Manager software) • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Online mirror rebuilding • Online consistency checks • Array management software • Error logging and notification • Support for hot device insertion and removal • Automatic resume of rebuilding on restart • Support for manual rebuild • Ability to create up to eight logical drives per configuration • Auto-configuration support of newly added physical drive • Support for global hotspares • Support for disk coercion • Array initialization support (fast and normal) • Logical drive availability immediately after creation • Supported stripe size of 64 Kbytes only 1.2 RAID Overview This section provides a brief overview of the types of RAID configurations that Embedded MegaRAID Software supports. The first step in creating a RAID storage configuration is to configure physical disk drives in arrays. As defined for Embedded MegaRAID Software, an array is a group of one to eight physical disks that is seen by the host computer system as one large disk drive, or logical drive. Only one RAID level can be assigned to each array. • A RAID 0 array consists of one to eight physical drives. RAID Overview 1-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • A RAID 1 array consists of two physical drives. • A RAID 5 array consists of three to eight drives. • A RAID 10 array consists of four, six, or eight drives. Note: Some hardware configurations do not support eight disk drives. So depending on the hardware, the actual maximum number of drives for RAID 0, RAID 5 and RAID 10 arrays can be fewer than eight. Important: LSI recommends that you not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance and decreased Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). You can use either of these three strategies when creating RAID arrays and logical drives: • Maximize Fault Tolerance: You can maximize fault tolerance to protect against loss of data by creating a RAID 1 array with mirroring. All data is written to the primary disk in the array and is also written (mirrored) to a second disk. • Maximize Logical Drive Performance: You can maximize logical drive performance by creating a RAID 0 array with striping. Data is broken into segments and can be simultaneously written to or read from several different stripes on several different disks in the array. RAID 10 arrays combine both striping and mirroring to provide high data transfer rates and data redundancy. • Maximizing Storage Capacity: You can maximize storage capacity when selecting a RAID level. Striping alone (RAID 0) requires less storage space than mirrored data (RAID 1) or distributed parity (RAID 5). RAID 5, which provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire disk drives, requires less space then RAID 1. 1-6 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.1 RAID 0 Description RAID 0 provides disk striping across all disk drives in the array. RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy, but does offer the best performance of any RAID level. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller segments, and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the array. The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe size, which is 64 Kbytes. Note: It is possible to create each disk as a single-drive RAID 0 array. However, spanning across single drive RAID 0 arrays is not supported. By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, Embedded MegaRAID Software can use both SAS/SATA drives to read or write the file faster. This makes RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance. Figure 1.1 shows a RAID 0 array with two disk drives. Figure 1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives Uses Provides high data throughput, especially for large files; any environment that does not require fault tolerance Strong Points Provides increased data throughput for large files; no capacity loss penalty for parity Weak Points Does not provide fault tolerance; all data lost if any drive fails Drives One to eight Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 RAID Overview 1-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.2 RAID 1 Description RAID 1 duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive. RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy, but at the cost of doubling the required data storage capacity. Figure 1.2 shows a RAID 1 array. Figure 1.2 RAID 1 Array 1.2.3 RAID 5 Description Note: If you do not have a MegaRAID SAS 8208ELP RAID controller or a MegaRAID SAS 8208XLP RAID controller, you might need to install a key, either iButton or TSOC, to enable RAID 5. The key you need depends on your supplier. Contact your supplier for more information. RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. Parity is the data’s property of being odd or even, and parity checking is used to detect errors in the data. In RAID 5, the parity information is distributed to all drives. RAID 5 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously. Uses Databases or any other mission critical environment that requires fault tolerance Strong Points Provides complete data redundancy; RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance Weak Points Requires twice as many hard drives; performance is impaired during drive rebuilds Drives Two Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 1 Duplicated Segment 2 Duplicated Segment 3 Duplicated Segment 4 Segment 4 Duplicated 1-8 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I/O operations. Because each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can take place concurrently. Figure 1.3 shows a RAID 5 array with six disk drives. Figure 1.3 RAID 5 Array Uses Provides high data throughput. Use RAID 5 for transaction processing applications because each drive can read and write independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive to recreate all missing information. Use also for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates. Strong Points Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. Provides redundancy with lowest loss of capacity. Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of small writes. Suffers more impact if no drive cache is used (clustering). Disk drive performance will be reduced if a drive is being rebuilt or a background initialization is in progress. Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes. Drives Three to eight Segment 1 Segment 7 Segment 2 Segment 8 Segment 3 Segment 9 Segment 4 Segment 10 Segment 5 Parity (6-10) Parity (11–15) Parity (1-5) Segment 6 Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the array. Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Segment 11 Segment 12 Segment 19 Segment 25 Segment 20 Segment 23 Segment 18 Segment 21 Segment 16 Segment 22 Segment 17 Parity (21-25) Parity (26–30) Parity (16-20) Segment 24 Segment 26 Segment 27 Segment 29 Segment 28 Segment 30 RAID Overview 1-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.4 RAID 10 Description RAID 10, a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, has mirrored drives. It breaks up data into smaller blocks, then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 1 RAID set. Each RAID 1 RAID set then duplicates its data to its other drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which is 64 Kbytes. RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure in each array while maintaining data integrity. Figure 1.4 shows a RAID 10 array with four disk drives. Figure 1.4 RAID 10 Array Uses Works best for data storage that must have 100% redundancy of RAID 1 (mirrored arrays) and that also needs the enhanced I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped arrays); RAID 10 works well for medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity Strong Points Provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy Weak Points Requires twice as many drives Drives Four, six, or eight RAID 1 Disk 1 Disk 4 Disk 2 Disk 3 RAID 1 RAID 0 Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 1-10 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 2-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 2 Driver Installation This chapter explains how to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers for the Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows XP, Red Hat Linux, and SuSE Linux operating systems. Note: No driver installation is required for DOS. The ROM BIOS contains the low-level driver that is required for MS-DOS. The chapter contains the following sections: • Section 2.1, “Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation” • Section 2.2, “Linux Driver Installation” 2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation Perform the following steps to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000, Windows 2003, or Windows XP. 1. Boot the system with the Windows Boot Installation CD or diskette. The following message appears: Setup is inspecting your computers hardware configuration. 2. When the next prompt appears, press F6 to install the RAID/SCSI adapter driver. 3. When installation prompts for a key after copying some files, press S to add the SATA RAID driver. You are prompted for the floppy diskette that contains the LSI Embedded MegaRAID Software driver. 4. Insert the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver diskette and press Enter. 2-2 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 5. Scroll down the list and select the appropriate driver for the Windows version installed on your system, then click OK. 6. Continue with the normal installation procedure. 2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Perform the following steps to update the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP or to install this driver on an existing system booted from a standard IDE drive. 1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager. Device Manager starts. 3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click Properties. 4. On the Driver tab, click Update Driver to open the Update Device Driver wizard, and then follow the wizard instructions to update the driver. 2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation Perform the following steps to confirm that the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP is installed properly. 1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager. Device Manager starts. 3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click Properties. 4. On the Driver tab, click Driver Details and verify that the driver information is correct. Linux Driver Installation 2-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2 Linux Driver Installation This section explains how to make fresh installations of the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3.0 and 4.0 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9. 2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File The Linux driver is offered in the form of a driver update disk. The required file is dud-[driver version].img, which is the driver update disk for the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. You can obtain the latest driver files from the Download Center on the LSI web site at: http://www.lsilogic.com. 2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux This section describes how to prepare the Linux installation disk(s) from the driver image files, using either the Windows or Linux operating systems. 2.2.2.1 Preparing Installation Disks with the Windows Operating System Under Windows, you can use the rawrite floppy image writer utility to create disk images from image files. The image writer can be downloaded from the Internet. Perform the following steps to build installation diskettes. 1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img and the file rawrite.exe to a directory. 2. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory. 3. If necessary, use this command to change the filename of the driver update disk to a name with fewer than eight characters: copy dud-[driver version].img dud.img. 4. Open the DOS Command Prompt and navigate to the directory where rawrite.exe is located. 5. Type the following command to create the installation diskette: rawrite 2-4 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Then press Enter. You are prompted to enter the name of the boot image file. 6. Type the following: dud.img Press Enter. You are prompted for the target drive diskette. 7. Insert a floppy diskette into the floppy drive and type: A: Then press Enter. 8. Press Enter again to start copying the file to the diskette. 9. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED goes out, remove the diskette. 10. Label the diskette with the image name. 2.2.2.2 Preparing Installation Disks with the Linux Operating System Under Red Hat Linux and SuSE Linux, you can use a driver diskette utility to create disk images from image files. Perform the following steps to create the driver update disk: 1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img to a Linux system. 2. Insert a blank floppy diskette into the floppy drive. 3. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory. 4. Create the driver update diskette using the following command: dd if=dud-[driver version].img of=/dev/fd0 5. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED goes out, remove the diskette. 6. Label the diskette with the image name. Linux Driver Installation 2-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System This section describes the fresh installation of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3.0 or 4.0 device driver on systems with the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. After you prepare the installation disks with the driver image, perform the following steps to install the driver on a new system. 1. Boot to CD-ROM (Disk 1). The Red Hat introductory screen appears. 2. Type the following at the boot prompt: linux dd 3. Press Enter. The prompt asks whether you have a driver disk. 4. Use the arrow key to select Yes, then press Enter. 5. Select fd0 to indicate you have a floppy diskette with the driver on it. 6. Insert the floppy diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter. The installer locates and loads the driver for your device. The following message appears: Loading megasr driver... The prompt at the next screen asks whether you have another driver. 7. Follow the Red Hat Linux installation procedure to complete the installation. 8. Reboot the system. 2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic) Perform the following steps to update the Red Hat Linux driver or to install the Red Hat Linux driver in an existing system booted from a standard SAS/SATA drive or systems with the Embedded Software RAID stack. 1. Create a RAID array on the controller using the Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility. 2. Boot the system with the Red Hat Linux Installation CD from the primary controller or disk. The Red Hat introductory screen appears. 2-6 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Mount the driver update diskette (DUD) using the following command: #mount /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy 4. Unzip the modules.cgz file that is on the DUD to get driver images for different Red Hat operating systems: #mkdir -p /home/megasr #cd /home/megasr #cp /mnt/floppy/modules.cgz . #gunizip -S .cgz modules.cgz This generates a new file named modules: #cpio -ivd < modules This provides the following driver images: {,smp, BOOT }/megasr.o 5. Update the Megasr driver module for the required kernels using the following commands: #cd /home/megasr If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is present, use the following command: # cp /megasr.[o/ko] /lib/modules//update/megasr.[o/ko] If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is not present, use the following command: # cp /megasr.[o/ko] /lib/modules/ /kernel/drivers/scsi/megasr.[o/ko] 6. Create a Megasr driver entry in the configuration file. The Red Hat configuration file is /etc/modules.conf. If the Megasr entry is not present in /etc/modules.conf, add the following line: alias scsi_hostadapter megasr If the ahci SCSI driver entry (located on the following paragraph) is present in /etc/modules.conf, remove it. It must be removed because otherwise the ahci driver would take control of the RAID Linux Driver Installation 2-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. controller without checking the subsystem device or Vendor ID. The ahci SCSI driver entry is the following: alias scsi_hostadapter ahci 7. Create a new initrd image for the required kernel. Red Hat installation uses the mk_initrd command to create an initrd image. The following command creates an initrd image for the smp kernel in the boot directory. See the mk_initrd man page for more information. The command is: #mkinitrd /boot/initrdsmp.img.new smp 8. Modify the lilo.conf/grub.conf file by adding newly created initrd(s) as new entries in the /etc/lilo.conf file. The suggested method is to copy an existing lilo entry in the file and paste it as a new one. Then modify its kernel image name, initrd image name, and label name. Sample Lilo Entry image=/boot/vmlinux-smp label=linuxnew initrd=/boot/initrd-smp.img.new read-only appended=root=LABEL=/ ” Sample Grub Entry title Red Hat Linux ( with Megasr driver) root (hd0,0) kernel /vmlinuz- ro root=LABEL=/ initrd /initrd-.img.new 9. Update the boot loader. If the boot loader is Lilo, run the lilo command to update the boot loader. The lilo command is: #lilo 10. Reboot the system to the new boot loader entry. 2-8 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver This section describes the fresh installation of the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 driver on a system with the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. Prepare installation disks with the driver image, then perform the following steps to install the driver. 1. Create a RAID array using the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration utility. (See Chapter 3, “MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility.”) 2. Boot the system using the SLES Disk. 3. When the first screen appears, press F6 and select Installation on the menu. You are prompted for the diskette. 4. Insert the driver update diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter. 5. Press OK. The following message appears: LSI Soft RAID Driver Updates added. 6. At the menu, select the driver update medium and press the Back button. 7. Continue the installation process and complete it. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 3-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 3 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility The MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU) is used to configure disk arrays and logical drives and to do other configuration tasks in a pre-boot environment. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 3.1, “Performing a Quick Configuration” • Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives” • Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies” • Section 3.4, “Rebuilding a Drive” • Section 3.5, “Hot Plug Support” • Section 3.6, “Checking Data Consistency” • Section 3.7, “Viewing and Changing Device Properties” • Section 3.8, “Forcing Drives Online or Offline” • Section 3.9, “Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive” • Section 3.10, “Deleting a Logical Drive” • Section 3.11, “Clearing a Storage Configuration” 3-2 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration This section provides high level instructions for quickly configuring arrays and logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. These instructions are intended for users that are familiar with configuration utilities and tools. Refer to Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives,” for detailed configuration instructions. To ensure the best performance, select the optimal RAID level for the logical drive you create. (For an explanation of RAID levels, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”) Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Perform the following steps to configure arrays and logical drives using the MegaRAID BIOS CU: 1. Boot the system. 2. Start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl+M. 3. Select Configure from the Management Menu. 4. Select a configuration method from the Configuration menu (Easy Configuration, New Configuration, or View/Add Configuration). 5. Create arrays using the available physical drives. 6. Define the logical drive(s) using the space in the arrays. 7. Initialize the new logical drive(s). 3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives This section provides detailed instructions for configuring arrays and logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. LSI recommends that you use drives with the same capacity when you create a storage configuration. If you use drives with different capacities in one array, the CU limits each drive to the capacity of the smallest drive. The number of physical drives in a specific array determines the possible RAID levels that you can implement with the array. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • RAID 0 requires from one to eight physical drives. • RAID 1 requires two physical drives. • RAID 5 required three to eight physical drives. • RAID 10 requires four, six, or eight physical drives. 3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU Follow these steps to start the MegaRAID BIOS CU: 1. During boot-up, wait for the following message to appear on the screen: Press Ctrl-M to run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility 2. When you see this message, hold down the Ctrl key while pressing the M key. The main menu for the Configuration Utility appears, as shown in Figure 3.1. Figure 3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu Note: When you start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl-M the Configuration Manager Module of the BIOS allocates three segments of memory using either PMM or conventional memory: these are the Destination Segment, Scratch Segment, and Read Write Buffer Segment. If the three segments are not available the BIOS hooks INT19h and loads the CU at the fixed segments 5000:0 3-4 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. (Destination Segment), 6000:0 (Scratch Segment) and 7000:0 (Read Write Buffer Segment) after POST. 3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration When you select the Easy Configuration option, the CU creates one or more arrays from the available physical drives and configures each array as a single logical drive. If logical drives have already been configured, the CU does not change their configuration. Follow these steps to create a logical drive using Easy Configuration: 1. Select Configuration→ Easy Configuration from the Management Menu. A list of available (READY) physical drives appears. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the physical drives to include in the array. 3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new array. When you select a physical drive, its status changes from READY to ONLIN A[array number]-[drive number]. For example, ONLIN A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1. 4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu. 5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array, and so on. 6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10. 7. Press the spacebar to select an array. The Logical Drive Configuration screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.2. This screen shows the logical drive number, RAID level, logical drive size, number of stripes in the physical array, stripe size, and state of the logical drive. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen 8. Highlight RAID and press Enter. The available RAID levels for the current logical drive are displayed. 9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter. 10. (Optional) Change the drive’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). 11. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select Accept and press Enter. 12. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return to the Management Menu. 13. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.) 3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration When you select the New Configuration menu option, the CU deletes the existing arrays and logical drives and replaces them with the new configuration that you specify. The View/Add Configuration menu option lets you view the existing configuration or add to the existing configuration, if possible. Caution: If you want to keep the existing data on the storage configuration, use View/Add Configuration instead of New Configuration. 3-6 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Follow these steps to configure a disk array using the New Configuration or View/Add Configuration option: 1. Select Configuration→ New Configuration or Configuration→ View/Add Configuration from the Management Menu. If you selected New Configuration, select Yes to proceed. (This confirms that you are erasing the existing storage configuration.) The CU displays an array selection window. Note: The existing storage configuration will be erased only if you save the newly created configuration at the end of the process. It you do not save the new configuration, the CU will restore the previously existing configuration. 2. Use the arrow keys to select physical drives for the new array. 3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new array. When you select a drive, its status changes from READY to ONLIN A[array number]-[drive number]. For example, ONLIN A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1. 4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the failed drive is SATA, or vice versa. After the rebuild is completed, however, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array, and so on. 6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10. 7. Press the spacebar to select an array, if needed. 8. Highlight RAID and press Enter. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. A list of the available RAID levels for the current logical drive appears. 9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter. 10. (Optional) Set the logical drive size by highlighting Size and pressing Enter. The minimum valid logical drive size is 64 Mbytes. An error message will appear if you try to create a logical drive that is smaller than 64 Mbytes. By default, all the available space in the array is assigned to the current logical drive. For RAID 10 arrays, only one logical drive can be defined for the entire array. 11. (Optional) Change the disks’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). 12. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select Accept and press Enter. 13. Configure additional logical drives on the same array, if desired. If you have created more than one array, configure a logical drive on the second array. 14. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return to the Management Menu. 15. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.) 3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to create global hotspare drives (dedicated hotspare drives are not supported). A hotspare drive can automatically replace a failed drive in a redundant RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 array, to protect against data loss. Important: When you select disk drive for a global hotspare, be sure it is the same type of drive (either SAS or SATA) as the drives in the arrays that it will protect. LSI recommends that you do not combine SAS and SATA drives in the same array. 3-8 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can create a hotspare when you are configuring a new storage configuration, as described in the previous sections. To add a hotspare drive to an existing redundant storage configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select Objects from the Management Menu. 2. Select Physical Drive. A list of physical drives appears. 3. Select an unconfigured drive or Ready drive from the list, and press Enter. 4. When the Physical Drive Property menu appears, select Make Hot Spare and press Enter. 5. Select Yes from the pop-up menu to create the hotspare drive. Note: To remove a hotspare drive, perform steps 1 and 2 above, select the HOTSP disk, press Enter, select Force Offline, and press Enter. The status of the drive changes to READY, and it can then be used in another new array. 3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives Caution: When you initialize a logical drive all existing data on the logical drive is erased. This section explains the two methods of initializing a logical drive with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. If the Fast Init property is enabled, fast initialization will be used. In fast initialization, the MegaRAID BIOS CU quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new logical drive. If the Fast Init property is not enabled, the MegaRAID BIOS CU performs a complete initialization on the logical drive. This may take a long time if the physical disk drives are large. (First Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical drive using the Initialize menu. 1. On the Management Menu, select Initialize. 2. Use the spacebar to highlight the logical drive to initialize. The logical drive name is highlighted in yellow. To deselect it, highlight the logical drive and press the spacebar again. 3. Press F10. 4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter to begin the initialization. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. A graph shows the progress of the initialization until it is complete. 5. After the initialization is complete, press Esc to return to previous menus. If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the following options appear: – Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.) The initialization is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the initialization already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, and if Fast Init is not enabled, the initialization resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. – Continue: The initialization continues normally. – Abort: The initialization is completely aborted. If you restart initialization, it begins at 0 percent. (Second Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical drive using the Objects menu. 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive, as shown in Figure 3.3. A list of configured logical drives appears. Figure 3.3 Logical Drive Submenu 2. Select a logical drive, if there is more than one configured, and press Enter. 3. Select Initialize from the submenu and press Enter. 3-10 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter. The CU displays a bar graph showing the initialization progress. 5. When initialization completes, press Esc to return to the previous menu. If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the Stop, Continue, and Abort options are available, as explained earlier in this section. 3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies You can use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to set the hard disk drive Write Cache and Read Ahead settings. Any read or write cache policy changes apply to all logical drives on an array. In other words, if two logical drives are defined on a single array and you change the Read Ahead setting on one logical drive, the change will also apply to the other logical drive on the array. The Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead policies can be set to On or Off. • When the disk Write Cache is On, a write transaction is considered to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache. When disk Write Cache is Off, the write transaction is complete only when the data has been written to the disk. • When disk Read Ahead is On, extra data is read sequentially ahead of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache. If the additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster from the cache than from the disk directly. Note: When the disk Write Cache is On, there is a danger that data could be lost if the power fails before the cached data is written to disk. Follow these steps to view or change the logical drive Write Cache or Read Ahead settings: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive→ Logical Drive n→ View/Update Parameters. 2. Use the arrow key to move the cursor to Disk WC or Read Ahead and press Enter. Rebuilding a Drive 3-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Use the arrow key to select Off or On for Disk WC (DWC) or Read Ahead. 4. When you see the prompt Change DWC or Change Read Ahead, use the arrow key to select Off or On, then press Enter to change the cache setting. The settings are changed for all logical drives defined on the array. 3.4 Rebuilding a Drive The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to rebuild a drive of a redundant array if the array has a failed drive. If the failed drive is still good (that is, if the drive is physically present and its size is greater than or equal to the defined size of the array) it will be rebuilt. If the drive is small, an error message will appear and the MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow the drive to be rebuilt. A rebuild cannot be started on a failed drive if its size is even 1 byte smaller than the defined size of the array. Follow these steps to rebuild a drive: 1. Select Rebuild from the Management Menu. 2. When the list of drives appears, highlight the FAIL drive that you want to rebuild and press the Spacebar to select it. 3. After selecting the physical drive, press F10 and select Yes at the confirmation prompt. The rebuild process begins, and a graph shows the progress of the rebuild until it is complete. Although the CU changes the disk drive state to Rebuild at this point, the change does not appear on the screen while the rebuild is in progress. If the CU detects a media error on the source drive during rebuild, it initiates a sector read for that block. If the sector read fails, the CU adds entries to the Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) table, writes this table to the target drive, and displays an error message. Additional error messages are displayed if the SBBM table is 80% full or 100% full. If the SBBM table is completely full, the rebuild operation is aborted, and the drive is marked as FAIL. 3-12 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. When rebuild is complete, the CU displays the message: Rebuilding of Drive X Completed Successfully. Press Esc. (X = the ID of the rebuilt drive.) 5. Press Esc to display the Management Menu. The state of the rebuilt disk drive changes from FAIL to ONLIN. If you press Esc while the rebuild is running, the following options display: • Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu -> Objects -> Adapter -> AutoResume.) The rebuild is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the rebuild already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the rebuild resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. • Continue: The rebuild continues normally. • Abort: The rebuild is completely aborted and the disk drive remains in the FAIL state. If you restart the rebuild, it begins at 0 percent. 3.5 Hot Plug Support The MegaRAID BIOS CU supports hot plugging of disk drives. The following hot plug message will appear when you insert or remove a disk drive: A Drive Has Been Inserted/Removed. Configuration Updated. Press ESC... After you press Esc the inserted or removed drive will be reflected in the list of drives that appears in the configuration utility. Obviously, you should not insert or remove a drive while you are defining a new logical drive or while an initialization or other process is running. The following bullets describe how the CU handles hot plugging when various actions occur: • If the Physical Drive window or one of the Configuration windows is open when you insert or remove a drive, the window will close when the hot plug message appears. Checking Data Consistency 3-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • CU menus such as Select Boot Drive, Select Adapter, and Logical Drive menus will completely or partially close when a drive is inserted or removed. • If a Rebuild is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will first display the message Rebuilding Of Drive Not Complete! Press Esc.. followed by the hot plug message. If the Rebuild was not affected by this hot plug event, it will continue to rebuild from where it left off, provided that Auto Resume is enabled; otherwise, Rebuild will start over from the beginning. If the rebuilding array was affected by the hot plug event, the Rebuild will abort and the array status will change based on the hot plug operation. • If an Initialization is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will display the message Initialization of Array Not Complete! Press ESC.. followed by the hot plug message. • If a consistency check is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will display the message CC Not Completed! Press ESC.. followed by the hot plug message. 3.6 Checking Data Consistency The Check Consistency feature can be used on RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 logical drives to verify the consistency of the data on the physical drives. The MegaRAID BIOS CU automatically corrects any differences found in the data when a consistency check is run. Follow these steps to check consistency: 1. On the Management Menu select Check Consistency and press Enter. A list of configured logical drives is displayed. 2. Highlight a logical drive with the arrow keys. 3. Press the spacebar to select the logical drive to check for consistency. Note: If you select a RAID 0 logical drive, a message appears stating that a Check Consistency cannot be performed. To continue, deselect the logical drive, highlight a redundant logical drive, and press the spacebar again. 3-14 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. Press F10. 5. At the prompt, select Yes to start the Check Consistency process and press Enter. A graph shows the progress of the Check Consistency operation until it is complete. If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds any data inconsistencies while comparing the source and target drives, it fixes the inconsistency by writing the source data to the target drive. When this happens, the following message appears at the bottom of the screen: The Data on the Drives is inconsistent. Repair done! If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a media error on the source drive, it pops up a dialog box with this message: Error in Reading Sectors! Proceed Anyway (Y/N)? If you press Y, the program skips the bad block and continues. If you press N, the program aborts the consistency check. The same message appears if the program finds a hard media error on the target drive. If you press Esc while a Check Consistency is running, the following options are displayed: • Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.) The Check Consistency is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the task already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the Check Consistency resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. • Continue: The Check Consistency continues normally. • Abort: The Check Consistency is completely aborted. If you restart it, it begins at 0 percent. 3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to view properties for adapters, logical drives, and physical drives. You can also change some properties for adapters and logical drives. Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties To view or change adapter properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects→ Adapter. 2. Select an adapter from the list. The following list of adapter properties appears: 3. If you want to change the value of a property, highlight it and press Enter. 4. Select or type a different value for the property and press Enter. 5. When you are finished, press Esc until you return to the Management Menu. Property Options Default Rebuild Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 Chk Const Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 FGI Rate (Foreground initialization rate) 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 BGI Rate (Background initialization rate) 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 Disk WC (Disk Write Cache) Off, On Off (Write Through enabled) Read Ahead On, Off On BIOS State Enable, Disable Enable Stop On Error No, Yes No Fast Init Enable, Disable Enable Auto Rebuild On, Off On Auto Resume Enable, Disable When Enabled, you can stop a consistency check, rebuild, or initialization and resume it later where it left off, instead of aborting it and starting over. Enable Disk Coercion1 1. The Disk Coercion property can be accessed only when no configuration is present for the adapter. Otherwise, an error message will appear. None, 128MB, 1GB 1GB 3-16 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties To view or change logical drive properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Logical Drive. 2. Select View/Update Parameters. The only logical drive properties you can change are Disk WC (Disk Write Cache) and Read Ahead (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). The other properties are view-only. 3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties To view physical drive properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive. 2. Highlight a physical drive on the list that appears and press Enter. 3. Select Drive Properties from the menu. The drive properties are Device Type (Disk), Capacity, Product ID, and Revision No. These properties are view-only. 3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to force drives online or offline. You may want to force a drive of a redundant array offline so that a hotspare drive will automatically replace it. An auto rebuild will begin immediately if the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a valid hotspare drive to replace the offline drive. You may need to force a drive online if it has gone offline due to a power failure. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow a drive to be forced online if its size is smaller than the defined size of the array. To force a drive online or offline, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive. 2. Highlight a physical drive that is a member of an array and press Enter. Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Select Force Offline or Force Online from the menu. If the drive was online, its status changes to FAIL. If it was offline, its status changes to ONLIN. 3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive The default boot logical drive is LD 0. If you change the boot drive to another logical drive, the BIOS and the CU will preserve this change. However, if you delete the new boot logical drive, you must be sure to configure another logical drive for booting. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will not automatically select a different boot logical drive. Follow these steps to configure a bootable logical drive: 1. On the Management Menu, select Configure -> Select Boot Drive. 2. Select a logical drive from the list to be the designated boot drive. 3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive Caution: Before you delete a logical drive, be sure to back up all the data you want to keep. The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to delete any single logical drive defined in the configuration (sometimes referred to as random deletion). To delete a specified logical drive, follow these steps: 1. Select Objects -> Logical Drive. 2. Highlight the logical drive that you want to delete and press Delete. 3. Select Yes when the confirmation message appears. 3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration Caution: Before you clear a storage configuration, be sure to back up all the data you want to keep. 3-18 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To clear a storage configuration, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Configure →Clear Configuration. 2. When the message appears, select Yes to confirm. All logical drives are deleted from the configuration. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 4-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 4 MegaCLI Command Tool The MegaCLI Command Tool (CT) is a command line interface application that you can use to configure and maintain storage configurations created with Embedded MegaRAID Software. Note: The MegaCLI CT utility runs in the Microsoft® Windows® and Linux® environments. For DOS, the utility is called MegaDCLI CT and it supports a subset of the full command set. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 4.1, “MegaCLI CT Overview” • Section 4.2, “Exception Handling” • Section 4.3, “Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions” • Section 4.4, “Adapter Commands” • Section 4.5, “BIOS Commands” • Section 4.6, “Event Log Commands” • Section 4.7, “Configuration Commands” • Section 4.8, “Logical Drive Commands” • Section 4.9, “Physical Drive Commands” • Section 4.10, “Miscellaneous Commands” 4-2 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview MegaCLI CT and MegaDCLI CT are command line interface applications you can use to configure and manage storage configurations under Embedded MegaRAID Software. You can use these command tools to perform the following tasks: • Configure logical drives and create configurations on the adapter • Display the configuration on the adapter • Display and change logical drive’s properties on the adapter • Display and change physical drive’s properties on the adapter • Display and change adapter properties • Load a configuration to the adapter from a file • Save an adapter configuration to a file • Start or stop rebuild, consistency check, and initialization • Suspend and display an ongoing background initialization • Display relevant user messages on the console or write them to the log file • Work in silent mode, if selected (no messages are displayed on the console) • Display adapter inventory data in a single command • Customize output strings • Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes • Set some predefined environment variables, such as number of adapters and number of logical drives after the execution of CT • Display help on how to use the command line options of CT 4.2 Exception Handling MegaCLI CT exits with exit code 0 for all successful operations. In case of failure, it exits with exit code 1 to 255, depending on the failure conditions. For example, assume that a rebuild is started on three physical drives. MegaCLI CT successfully starts rebuilding the first drive Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. but fails to start rebuilding the second drive. If this happens, MegaCLI CT will not attempt to start rebuilding the third drive; instead, it will exit with an error exit code. In this case, the error code will be EXIT_ERR_START_RBLD. So even if the command was partially successful, an error code is still generated. Some operations such as GetNumberOfAdapters or GetNumberofLogicaldrives return with the actual number of adapters or logical drives. These return values are special cases and do not reflect any error conditions based on the return code, which in these cases contains meaningful values. 4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions Some commands let you specify multiple values. You can enter commands for a single adapter (-aN), multiple selected adapters (-a0,1,2) or all adapters (-aALL). This is denoted as -aN| -a0,1,2|-aALL in the command line syntax used in this chapter. Table 4.1 lists all of the conventions used in the command line options. Table 4.1 Conventions Convention Description CmdTool Specifies the command line interface used. Type either MegaCLI CT under Microsoft Windows and Linux, or MegaDCLI CT under DOS. | Specifies “or,” meaning you can choose between options. -aN N specifies the adapter number for the command. -a0,1,2 Specifies the command is for adapters 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more adapters in this manner. -aALL Specifies the command is for all adapters. -Lx x specifies the logical drive number for the command. -L0,1,2 Specifies the command is for logical drives 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more logical drives in this manner. -Lall Specifies the command is for all logical drives. { } Indicates that the parameter is optional. 4-4 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can specify the -Silent command line option for all possible functions of the MegaCLI CT. If you enter this option at the command line, no messages are displayed on the screen. Some MegaCLI CT commands that are supported in hardware RAID configurations are not supported under Embedded MegaRAID Software. These include the following: • Adapter Cache Flush (-AdpCacheFlush) • Set Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate, and CoercionMode properties are supported • Get Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate, and CoercionMode properties are supported • Cluster Enable is not supported • Set Adapter Time (-AdpSetTime) • Patrol Read (-AdpPR, -AdpPRSetDelay) • Battery Backup commands (-AdpBbuCmd) • Foreign configuration (-CfgForeign) • Logical Drive Reconstruction (-LDRecon) • Set Logical Drive Properties (-LDSetProp) • Display Enclosure Information (-EncInfo) • Mark Configured Physical Disk Drive as Missing (-PDMarkMissing) • Display List of Missing Physical Disk Drives (-PDGetMissing) • Flashing the firmware (-AdpFWFlash, -AdpM0Flash) • Diagnostics (-AdpDiag, -AdpBatTest, -AdpNVRAM) The following sections describe the MegaCLI CT commands. Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software utility does not support Write Policy, Read Policy, or I/O Policy. Software RAID only support enabling and disabling the hard disk drive’s write cache and read-ahead functions. Note: MegaCLI CT for Embedded MegaRAID Software does not support the concept of disk enclosures, except for a default Enclosure 0 (E0). Some of the commands support an Adapter Commands 4-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. E0:Sn syntax that enables you to specify a disk drive in a particular “slot” in this default enclosure. 4.4 Adapter Commands You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties related to the adapter(s). Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers function as virtual “adapters” or “controllers.” Because the drivers are not actual hardware components, some of the adapter parameters do not apply to them. 4.4.1 Display Adapter Information Use the command in Table 4.2 to display information on adapter parameters such as the number of logical drives and initiator ID. 4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Use the command in Table 4.3 to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the selected adapter(s). If you have configured hotspares and enabled automatic rebuild, the RAID adapter automatically tries to use them to rebuild failed disks. Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild will start when a drive that was part of the array is reinserted. Table 4.2 Display Adapter Information Syntax CmdTool –AdpAllInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays parameters on the selected adapter(s). Displayed information includes initiator ID, current status of auto rebuild, alarm, number of logical drives, rebuild rate, bus number/device number, present RAM, SAS settings, serial number of the board, and SAS address. MegaCLI CT does not support display of the firmware version or BIOS version, as the driver does not support it. Table 4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Syntax CmdTool –AdpAutoRbld -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected adapter(s). The -Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state. 4-6 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties This command sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). For example, for {RebuildRate -val}, you can enter a value between 0 percent and 100 percent. (The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives.) At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity. The default rebuild rate of 30 percent is recommended. Use the command in Table 4.4 to display or set adapter properties. 4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties Use the command in Table 4.5 to display specified properties on the selected adapter(s). Table 4.4 Set Adapter Properties Syntax CmdTool –AdpSetProp {RebuildRate -val} | {BgiRate –val}|{CCRate –val}| {CoercionMode –val} -aN|-a0,1,2| -aALL Description Sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). The possible settings are: • RebuildRate: Rebuild rate. Values: 0 to 100. • BgiRate: Background initilization rate. Values: 0 to 100. • CCRate: Consistency check rate. Values: 0 to 100. • CoercionMode: Drive capacity Coercion mode. Values: 0 = None; 1 = 128 Mbytes; 2 = 1 Gbyte. You can set the Coercion mode only when there is no existing configuration on the adapter. Table 4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetProp RebuildRate | BgiRate | CCRate | CoercionMode -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the properties of the selected adapter(s). BIOS Commands 4-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.4.5 Display Adapter Time Use the command in Table 4.5 to display the current time and date of the selected adapter. 4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults Use the command in Table 4.7 to set the factory defaults on the selected adapter(s). 4.5 BIOS Commands You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BIOS-related options. 4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID Use the command in Table 4.8 to set or display the ID of the bootable logical drive. Note: This option does not write a boot sector to the logical drive. The operating system will not load if the boot sector is incorrect. Table 4.6 Display Adapter Time Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetTime -aN Description Displays the selected adapter’s time in yyyymmdd HH:mm:ss format. Table 4.7 Set Factory Defaults Syntax CmdTool -AdpFacDefSet -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Sets the factory defaults on the selected adapter(s). You cannot set the factory defaults if the adapter already has a configuration defined on it. Table 4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID Syntax CmdTool –AdpBootDrive {-Set –LDID} | -Get -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description • -Set: Sets the logical drive as bootable so that during the next reboot, the BIOS will look for a boot sector in the specified logical drive. • -Get: Displays the bootable logical drive ID. 4-8 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.5.2 Set BIOS Options Use the command in Table 4.9 to set the options for the BIOS status. 4.6 Event Log Commands 4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries Use the command in Table 4.10 to manage the event entries in the event log for the selected adapter(s). Table 4.9 Set BIOS Options Syntax CmdTool –AdpBIOS -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply| SOE | BE -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Sets BIOS options. The following are the settings you can select on a single adapter, multiple adapters, or all adapters: • -Enbl, -Dsbl, -Dsply: Enables, disables or displays the BIOS status on selected adapter(s). • -SOE: Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected adapter(s). When set to -SOE, the BIOS stops in case of a problem with the configuration. This gives you the option to enter the configuration utility to resolve the problem. This is available only when you enable the BIOS status. • -BE: Bypasses BIOS errors during POST. This is available only when you enable the BIOS status. Table 4.10 Event Log Management Syntax CmdTool –AdpEventLog –GetEventlogInfo |{–GetEvents | GetSinceShutdown| GetSinceReboot | IncludeDeleted | {GetLatest } –f } |Clear -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Configuration Commands 4-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7 Configuration Commands You can use the commands in this section to create storage configurations. 4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration Use the command in Table 4.11 to add a RAID level 0, 1, or 5 configuration to the existing configuration on the selected adapter. For RAID level 10, see Section 4.7.3, “Add RAID 10 Configuration.” Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Description The RAID driver maintains a volatile circular list of 100 events, which is deleted at reboot. The following command options are available: • -GetEventlogInfo: Displays overall event information such as total number of events, newest sequence number, oldest sequence number, shutdown sequence number, reboot sequence number, and clear sequence number. • -GetEvents: Gets event log entry details. The information shown consists of the total number of entries available at the firmware side since the last clear and details of each error log entry. Start_entry specifies the initial event log entry when displaying the log. • -GetSinceShutdown: Displays all the events since last adapter shutdown. • -GetSinceReboot: Displays all the events since last adapter reboot. • -IncludeDeleted: Displays all events, including deleted events. • -GetLatest: Displays the latest number of events, if it exists. The event data is written to the file in reverse order. • -Clear: Clears the event log for the selected adapter(s). Table 4.10 Event Log Management (Cont.) Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5[E0:Sn] [ -szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY [...]]] [-strpszM] [-Hsp[E5:S5,...]] [–afterLdX] -aN 4-10 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 Use the command in Table 4.12 to configure each physical disk in Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0. Note: The MegaCLI CT does not support spanning across these single-drive RAID 0 configurations. Description Adds a RAID level 0, 1 or 5 configuration to a specified adapter. Even if no configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter. • –Rx[E0:Sn]: Used to specify RAID level and physical drive enclosure/slot numbers for an array. • –strpszM:: Used (optionally) to specify a stripe size. You can set the stripe size to 64 Kbytes. • –Hsp[Ex:Sx,…]: Used to create a global hotspare, with physical drive enclosure/slot numbers specified. This option cannot be used to create dedicated hotspares. • –szXXXX:: Used to specify the size of a logical drive, where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes. However, the actual size of the logical drive may be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from physical drives in each logical drive to be aligned to the stripe size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array. • -AfterLdX:: Used to specify which free slot should be used (optional). By default, MegaCLI CT uses the first free slot available in the array. This option has no meaning if the array is not already used for configuration. Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration (Cont.) Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 Syntax CmdTool –CfgEachDskRAID0 [{WT | WB }] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct | Cached}] [{-strpszM} -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Configuration Commands 4-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration Use the command in Table 4.13 to add a RAID 10 configuration to the existing configuration on the selected adapter. For RAID levels 0, 1 or 5, see Section 4.7.1, “Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration.” Description Configures each physical disk in Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0 on this controller. The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} must be entered in the sequence that is shown. • WT : Used to select Write-through caching, in which a write transaction is considered to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache. • WB : Used to select Write-back caching, in which the write transaction is complete only when the data has been written to the disk. • NORA : Used to select Normal Read Ahead caching, which specifies that the controller reads only the requested data and does not read ahead for the current logical drive. • RA : Used to select Read Ahead caching, which specifies that data is read sequentially ahead of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache. If the additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster from the cache than from the disk directly. Read-Ahead supplies sequential data faster, but is not as effective when accessing random data. • ADRA : Used to select Adaptive Read Ahead, which specifies that the controller begins using Read Ahead caching if the two most recent disk accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If all read requests are random, the algorithm reverts to No Read Ahead; however, all requests are still evaluated for possible sequential operation. If you select Read Ahead, there is a danger that data could be lost if the power fails before the cached data is written to disk. • Direct : Used to specify that the controller does not buffer reads in cache memory. Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes from cache memory. • Cached : Used to specify that the controller buffers all reads in cache memory. • {-strpszM} : Used to specify the size of the segments written to each drive in the configuration. You can set the stripe size to 64 Kbytes. Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 (Cont.) Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgSpanAdd -R10| –Array0[E0:Sn] –Array1[E0:Sn] [...] [{WT | WB}] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct | Cached}] [{-strpszM}] -aN 4-12 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration Use the command in Table 4.14 to clear the existing storage configuration on the selected adapter(s). 4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration Use the command in Table 4.15 to display the logical drive and physical disk drive information for the configuration on the selected adapter(s). This command also provides information about the remaining unconfigured space. 4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration Use the command in Table 4.16 to save the configuration for the selected adapter(s) to the given filename. Description Creates a RAID level 10 (spanned) configuration from the specified arrays. Even if no configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the adapter. Multiple arrays are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:Sn,...] option. (Note that X starts from 0, not 1.) All the arrays must have the same number of physical drives. At least two arrays must be provided. The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} must be entered in the sequence that is shown. Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration (Cont.) Table 4.14 Clear Existing Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgClr -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Clears the existing storage configuration. Table 4.15 Display Existing Configuration Syntax CmdTool -CfgDsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the existing configuration on the selected adapter(s), which includes the logical drive and component physical drive related details. Table 4.16 Save Adapter Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgSave –fFileName -aN Description Saves the configuration for the selected adapter(s) to the given filename, in binary format. The command also stores the controller properties structure in the file. Configuration Commands 4-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File Use the command in Table 4.17 to read the configuration from the file and load it on the selected adapter(s). You can restore the read/write properties and RAID configuration using hotspares. 4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s) Use the command in Table 4.18 to delete one or more logical drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.7.9 Display Free Space Use the command in Table 4.19 to display the free space that is available to use for configuration on the selected adapter(s). Table 4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File Syntax CmdTool –CfgRestore –fFileName -aN Description Reads the configuration from the file and loads it on the adapter. MegaCLI can store or restore all read and write adapter properties, all read and write properties for logical drives, and the RAID configuration including hotspares. Note the following: The -CfgSave option stores the configuration data and adapter properties in the file. Configuration data has only the device ID and sequence number information of the physical drives used in the configuration. The CfgRestore option will fail if the same device IDs of the physical drives are not present. Table 4.18 Delete Logical Drives Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDDel–Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Deletes one logical drive, multiple logical drives, or all the selected logical drives on selected adapter(s). Table 4.19 Display Free Space Syntax CmdTool –CfgFreeSpaceInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays all the free space available for configuration on the selected adapter(s). The information includes the number of disk groups, the number of spans in each disk group, the number of free space slots in each disk group, the start block, and the size (in both blocks and megabytes) of each free space slot. 4-14 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8 Logical Drive Commands You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the logical drives and to perform actions on them. 4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.20 to display information about logical drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings Use the command in Table 4.21 to display the disk cache settings for the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). 4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization Use the command in Table 4.22 to manage initialization of the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the initialization process when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for initialization. The initialization actually starts when the driver loads. Table 4.20 Display Logical Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –LDInfo –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). This information includes the name, RAID level, RAID level qualifier, size in megabytes, state, stripe size, number of drives, and span depth. Also displays activity progress, if any, including initialization, background initialization, and consistency check. Table 4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings Syntax CmdTool –LDGetProp -DskCache -Lx|-L0,1,2| -Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the disk cache settings of the logical drive(s): -DskCache: Displays physical disk cache policy. Logical Drive Commands 4-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check Use the command in Table 4.23 to manage a data consistency check (CC) on the logical drives for the selected adapter(s). Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the consistency check when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives as needing a consistency check. The consistency check actually starts when the driver loads. 4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization Use the command in Table 4.24 to view ongoing background initialization of the selected logical drives, after the -LDInit command has been issued to start the initialization. This function completes only when all Table 4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization Syntax CmdTool –LDInit –Start [Fast | Full] |-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for logical drive initialization: • -Start: Starts the initialization (writing 0s) on the logical drive(s) and displays the progress (this is optional). The fast initialization option initializes the first 100 Mbytes on the logical drive. The full option allows you to initialize the entire logical drive. • -Abort: Aborts the ongoing initialization on the LD(s). • -ShowProg: Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization, if any. • -ProgDsply: Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed. Table 4.23 Manage Consistency Check Syntax CmdTool –LDCC –Start|-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for a data consistency check: • -Start: Starts a CC on the logical drive(s), then displays the progress (optional) and time remaining. • -Abort: Aborts an ongoing CC on the logical drive(s). • -ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC. • -ProgDsply: Displays ongoing CC progress until at least one CC is completed or a key is pressed. 4-16 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts initializing the logical drives when the -LDInit command is issued. You can then issue this -LDBI command to monitor the initialization progress. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for initialization. The initialization actually starts when the driver loads. 4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.25 to display information about the logical drives and physical disk drives for the selected adapter(s), such as the number of logical drives, RAID level, and physical disk drive size. Table 4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization Syntax CmdTool –LDBI -Enbl|-Dsbl|-GetSetting|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx| -L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays ongoing background initialization of the selected logical drives. This function completes only when all background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. • -Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the background initialization on the given adapter(s). • -ProgDsply: Allows the user to view ongoing background initialization until all background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. • -ShowProg: Displays current progress value. • -GetSetting: Displays current background initialization setting (enabled or disabled). Table 4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –LDPDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) and physical disk drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). Displays information including the number of logical drives, the RAID level of the logical drives, and physical drive size information, which includes raw size, coerced size, uncoerced size, and the SAS address. Physical Drive Commands 4-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives Use the command in Table 4.26 to display the number of logical drives attached to the adapter. 4.9 Physical Drive Commands You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the physical disk drives and perform actions on them. 4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.27 to display information about the physical disk drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online Use the command in Table 4.28 to set the state of a physical disk drive to Online. In an online state, the physical drive is working normally and is a part of a configured logical drive. Table 4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives Syntax CmdTool –LDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the number of logical drives attached to the adapter. The return value is the number of logical drives. Table 4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –PDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] Description Provides information about the physical disk drives connected to the enclosure and adapter slot. The information includes the drive type, drive size, serial number, and firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the SAS address of the drive. Table 4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online Syntax CmdTool –PDOnline -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Online. 4-18 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline Use the command in Table 4.29 to set the state of a physical disk drive to Offline. In the offline state, the logical drive is not available to the adapter. 4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good Use the command in Table 4.30 to set the state of a physical disk drive from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good. 4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares Use the command in Table 4.31 to manage the configuration and assignment of global hotspares. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once the rebuild is completed, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive Use the command in Table 4.32 to start or stop a rebuild on a physical disk drive and display the rebuild progress. When a physical disk in an Table 4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline Syntax CmdTool –PDOffline -PhysDrv[E0:S....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Offline. Table 4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good Syntax CmdTool –PDMakeGood -PhysDrv[E0:Sn...] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good. Table 4.31 Manage Hotspares Syntax CmdTool –PDHSP {–Set} -Rmv -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description • -Set: Changes the physical disk drive state to hotspare for the enclosure. • -Rmv: Changes the physical drive state to ready (removes the hotspare). Physical Drive Commands 4-19 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. array fails, you can rebuild the physical disk by recreating the data that was stored on the physical disk before it failed. Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the rebuild when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for rebuild. The rebuild actually starts when the driver loads. 4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED Use the command in Table 4.33 to locate physical disk drive(s) by flashing the physical disk activity LED. 4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild Use the command in Table 4.34 to replace a configured physical disk drive and start an automatic rebuild of the drive. Table 4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive Syntax CmdTool –PDRbld –Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply –PhysDrv [E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Manages a physical disk rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on one or more adapters. The physical disk must meet the size requirements before it can be rebuilt, and it must be part of an array: • -Start: Starts a rebuild on the selected physical drive(s) and displays the rebuild progress (optional). • -Stop: Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected physical drive(s). • -ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the rebuild. This option is useful for running the application through scripts. • -ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing rebuild progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed. Table 4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED Syntax CmdTool –PDLocate –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Locates the physical disk drive(s) for the selected adapter(s) and flashes the disk activity LED. Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild Syntax CmdTool –PDReplaceMissing –PhysDrv[E0:Sn] –ArrayX –RowY -aN 4-20 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal Use the command in Table 4.35 to prepare an unconfigured physical disk drive(s) for removal from the selected adapter(s). 4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives Use the command in Table 4.36 to display the total number of physical disk drives attached to an adapter. Drives can be attached directly or through enclosures. 4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives Use the command in Table 4.37 to display a list of the physical drives connected to the selected adapter(s). Description Replaces the configured physical disk drives, then starts an automatic rebuild. The specified arrayIndex and row must be a missing drive. Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild (Cont.) Table 4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal Syntax CmdTool –PDPrpRmv [-Undo] –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Prepares unconfigured physical drive(s) for removal. The drive is spun down, and the drive state is set to unaffiliated, which marks it as offline even though it is not a part of configuration. The -Undo option undoes this operation, and the firmware marks this physical disk as Unconfigured-Good. Table 4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives Syntax CmdTool –PDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the total number of physical disk drives attached to an adapter. The return value is the number of physical disk drives. Table 4.37 Display List of Physical Drives Syntax CmdTool –PDList –aN|-a0,1..|-aAll Description Displays information about all physical disk drives connected to the selected adapter(s). This includes information such as the drive type, size, serial number, and firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the SAS address. Miscellaneous Commands 4-21 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.10 Miscellaneous Commands The commands in this section are used to display various information. 4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version Use the command in Table 4.38 to display the version number of the MegaCLI utility. 4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help Use the command in Table 4.39 to display help information for the MegaCLI utility. Table 4.38 Display MegaCLI Version Syntax CmdTool –v Description Displays the version number of the MegaCLI utility. Table 4.39 Display MegaCLI Help Syntax CmdTool –h|–Help|? Description Displays help for the MegaCLI utility. 4-22 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 5-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Manager software is a configuration and monitoring utility used with the Embedded MegaRAID Software. This chapter provides a brief overview of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software and explains how to install it on the supported operating systems. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 5.1, “Overview” • Section 5.2, “Hardware and Software Requirements” • Section 5.3, “Installation” 5.1 Overview MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to configure, monitor, and maintain storage configurations created under Embedded MegaRAID Software. The MegaRAID Storage Manager graphical user interface (GUI) makes it easy for you to create and manage storage configurations. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some MegaRAID Storage Manager software features are not applicable for Embedded MegaRAID Software. 5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily configure the controllers, disk drives, and virtual disks on your workstation or server. The Configuration Wizard greatly simplifies the process of creating arrays and virtual disks. 5-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can use the Configuration Wizard Auto Configuration mode to automatically create the best possible configuration with the available hardware. You can use the Guided Configuration mode, which asks you a few brief questions about the configuration, and then creates it for you. Or you can use the Manual Configuration mode, which gives you complete control over all aspects of the storage configuration. 5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the status of virtual disks, physical disks, and other storage devices on the workstation or server that you are monitoring. System errors and events are recorded in an event log file and are displayed on the screen. Special device icons appear on the screen to notify you of disk failures and other events that require immediate attention. 5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform system maintenance tasks such as running consistency checks on arrays that support redundancy. 5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows: • PC-compatible computer with an IA-32 (32-bit) Intel Architecture processor or an EM64T (64-bit) processor and at least 128 Mbytes of system memory Note: LSI Logic recommends that you use at least 1 Gbyte of system memory. • Hard disk drive with at least 50 Mbytes available free space The supported operating systems for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows: • Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows Server 2003, and Microsoft Windows XP Installation 5-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Red Hat Linux 3.0 or 4.0 • SUSE SLES 9, with latest updates and service packs Refer to your server documentation and to the operating system documentation for more information on hardware and operating system requirements. 5.3 Installation This section explains how to install (or reinstall) MegaRAID Storage Manager software on your workstation or server for the supported operating systems: Microsoft Windows, Red Hat Linux, and SUSE Linux. 5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft Windows Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows Server 2003, or Microsoft Windows XP: 1. Insert the MegaRAID Storage Manager software installation CD in the CD-ROM drive. If necessary, find and double-click the setup.exe file to start the installation program. 2. When the Welcome screen appears, click Next. If MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on this system, the Program Maintenance screen appears. Read the screen text and select Modify, Repair, or Remove. 3. When the next screen appears, read and accept the user license, and click Next. The Customer Information screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.1. 5-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 5.1 Customer Information Screen 4. Enter your user name and organization name. In the bottom part of the screen, select an installation option: – If you select All users, any user with administrative privileges can use this version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software to view or change storage configurations. – If you select Only for current user, the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcuts and associated icons will be available only to the user with this user name. 5. Click Next to continue. 6. On the next screen, accept the default Destination Folder, or click Change to select a different destination folder. Click Next to continue. The Setup Type screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.2. Installation 5-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 5.2 Setup Type Screen 7. Select one of the Setup options. The options are fully explained in the screen text. – Normally, you would select Complete if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a server. – Select Client if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a PC that will be used to view and configure servers over a network. – Select Server to install only those components required for remote server management. – Select StandAlone if you will use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and manage storage configurations on a standalone workstation. 8. Click Next to proceed. 9. Click Install to install the program. 10. Click Finish when the final Configuration Wizard screen appears. If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you 5-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. first edit the startupui.bat file. Specifically, you must add the IP address of the remote server to the end of the startupui.bat file. For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10, add the IP address to the end of startupui.bat as shown in this example: start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10 Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the example. 5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux: 1. Copy the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file to a temporary folder. 2. Untar the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file using the following command: tar -zxvf MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz A new disk directory is created. 3. Go to the new disk directory. 4. In the disk directory, find and read the readme.txt file. 5. To start the installation, enter the following command: ./install.sh If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you first edit the startupui.sh file. Specifically, you must add the IP address of the remote server to the end of the startupui.sh file. For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10, add the IP address to startupui.sh as shown in this example: start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10 Installation 5-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the example. 5.3.3 Linux Error Messages One or more of the following messages may appear while you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Linux system: • More than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software has been installed. This message indicates that the user has installed more than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software. (This can be done by using the rpm-force command to install the rpm file directly, which is not recommended, instead of using the install.sh file.) In such cases, the user must uninstall all the rpm files manually before installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software with the procedure listed previously. • The version is already installed. This message indicates that the version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software you are trying to install is already installed on the system. • The installed version is newer. This message indicates that a version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on the system, and it is a newer version than the version you are trying to install. • Exiting installation. This is the message that appears when the installation is complete. • RPM installation failed. This message indicates that the installation failed for some reason. Additional message text explains the cause of the failure. 5-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 6-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus This chapter explains how to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and menus. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 6.1, “Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software” • Section 6.2, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window” 6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Follow these steps to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and view the main window: 1. Start the program using the method required for your operating system environment: – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Microsoft Windows system, select Start -> Programs -> MegaRAID Storage Manager -> StartupUI, or double-click the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcut on the desktop. Note: If a warning appears stating that Windows Firewall has blocked some features of the program, click Unblock to allow MegaRAID Storage Manager software to start. (The Windows Firewall sometimes blocks the operation of programs that use Java.) – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Red Hat Linux system, select Applications -> System Tools -> MegaRAID Storage Manager StartupUI. – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a SUSE SLES 9 system, select Start -> System -> More Programs -> MegaRAID Storage Manager. 6-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. When the program starts, the Select Server window appears, as shown in Figure 6.1. Figure 6.1 Select Server Window If the circle in the server icon is yellow instead of green, it means that the server is running in a degraded state—for example, because a disk drive used in a virtual disk has failed. If the circle is red, the storage configuration in the server has failed. Note: To access servers on a different subnet, type in the box at the bottom of the screen the IP address of a server in the desired subnet where MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, and click Update. If you check the Connect to remote Framework box, you can also access a standalone installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software, if it has a network connection. 2. Double-click the icon of the server that you want to access. The Server Login window appears, as shown in Figure 6.2. Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 6.2 Server Login Window 3. Select an access mode from the drop-down menu. – Select Full Access if you need to both view the current configuration and change the configuration. – Select View Only if you need to only view and monitor the configuration. 4. Enter your user name and password, and click Login. Note: If the computer is networked, this is the login to the computer itself, not the network login. You must enter the root/administrator user name and password to use Full Access mode. If your user name and password are correct for the Login mode you have chosen, the main MegaRAID Storage Manager window appears. 6-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window This section describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, which is shown in Figure 6.3. Figure 6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window The following topics describe the panels and menu options that appear in this window. MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel The left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays either the Physical view or the Logical view of the system and the devices in it, depending on which tab is selected. • The Physical view shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the system. At the top of the hierarchy is the system itself. One or more controllers are installed in the system. Each controller has one or more ports. Disk drives and other devices are attached to the ports. • The Logical view shows the hierarchy of controllers, virtual disks, and disk groups that are defined on the system. (Physical drives also appear in the Logical view, so you can see which physical drives are used by each virtual disk.) The following icons in the left panel represent the controllers, disk drives, and other devices: • System • Controller • Port • Array • Virtual disk • Physical drive A red circle to the right of an icon indicates that the device has failed. For example, this icon indicates that a physical drive has failed: . A yellow circle to the right of an icon indicates that a device is running in a degraded state. For example, this icon indicates that a virtual disk is running in a degraded state because a disk drive has failed: . 6-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel The right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window has either two or three tabs, depending on what kind of device is selected in the left panel. • The Properties tab displays information about the selected device. For example, if a controller icon is selected in the left panel, the Properties tab lists information such as the controller name and the device port count. For more information, see Section 8.2, “Monitoring Controllers,” Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives,” and Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks.” • The Operations tab lists the operations that can be performed on the device that is selected in the left panel. Some types of devices, such as arrays and ports, do not have operations associated with them. For more information, see Chapter 9, “Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations.” • The Graphical View tab can be selected in the right panel if a physical drive or virtual disk is selected in the left panel. In graphical view, the device’s storage capacity is color coded according to the legend shown on the screen. For example, on a physical drive configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved space is red. For more information, see Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives,” and Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks.” 6.2.3 Event Log Panel The lower part of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays the system event log entries, as shown in Figure 6.3. New event log entries appear during the session. Each entry has a timestamp and date, an error level indicating the severity of the event, and a brief description of the event. For more information about the event log, see Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events.” For more information about the event log entries, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.” MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.4 Menu Bar Here are brief descriptions of the main selections on the MegaRAID Storage Manager menu bar. Specific menu options are described in more detail in Chapters 7, 8, and 9 of this manual. 6.2.4.1 File Menu The File menu has an Exit option for exiting from the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. It also has a Rescan option for updating the display in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. (Rescan is seldom required; the display normally updates automatically.) 6.2.4.2 Operations Menu The Operations menu is available when a controller, physical drive, or logical drive is selected in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. The Operations menu options vary depending on what type of device is selected in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. The options also vary depending on the current state of the selected device. For example, if you select an offline physical drive, the Make Drive Online option appears in the Operations menu. You can also view the Operations selections on the main window on the Operations tab in the right panel. If an operation requires user inputs before it can be executed, it appears in the Operations tab but not in the Operations menu. A device-specific Operations menu pops up if you right-click a device icon in the left panel. An Advanced Operations submenu is also available. This is where you access the Configuration Wizard and other configuration-related commands. To access this menu, select Operations -> Advanced Operations. 6.2.4.3 Group Operations Menu The Group Operations menu options include Check Consistency, Initialize, and Show Progress. 6-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.4.4 Log Menu The Log menu includes options for saving and clearing the message log. For more information, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.” 6.2.4.5 Help Menu On the Help menu you can select Help -> Help to view the MegaRAID Storage Manager software online help file. You can select Help -> About to view version information for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. Note: When you use the MegaRAID Storage Manager software online help, you may see a warning message that Internet Explorer has restricted the file from showing active content. If this warning appears, click on the active content warning bar and enable the active content. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 7-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 7 Configuration You use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and modify storage configurations. RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 storage configurations are supported. Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause unpredictable behavior, decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Note: You cannot create or modify a storage configuration unless you are logged on to a server with administrator privileges. This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform the following configuration tasks: • Section 7.1, “Creating a New Storage Configuration” • Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare Disks” • Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates” • Section 7.4, “Changing Virtual Disk Properties” • Section 7.5, “Deleting a Virtual Disk” • Section 7.6, “Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk” • Section 7.7, “Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller” • Section 7.8, “Adding a Saved Storage Configuration” 7-2 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration You can use the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard to create new storage configurations. To open the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard, select a controller in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and then select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Configuration Wizard. Figure 7.1 shows the first Configuration Wizard screen. Figure 7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen The menu lists three configuration modes: • Auto Configuration automatically creates an optimal configuration from the available disk drives. • Manual Configuration gives you the greatest level of control in creating a new virtual disk. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Guided Configuration asks you a few simple questions about what kind of configuration you want and then automatically creates it from the available disk drives. Note: You can use Auto, Guided, or Manual mode to create a RAID 0, or RAID 1 configuration. To create a RAID 10 configuration, you must use the Manual Configuration mode. The following subsections explain how to use the Configuration Wizard to create storage configurations: • Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters” • Section 7.1.2, “Using Auto Configuration” • Section 7.1.3, “Using Guided Configuration” • Section 7.1.4, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0” • Section 7.1.5, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1” • Section 7.1.6, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10” 7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters This section describes the Virtual Disk Parameters that you can set when you use the Guided Configuration or Manual Configuration modes of the Configuration Wizard. You should change these parameters only if you have a specific reason for doing so. It is usually best to leave them at their default settings. • Stripe Size: A stripe size of 64 Kbytes is supported. • Disk Cache Policy: Select a cache setting for this disk: Unchanged, Enabled, or Disabled. • Init State: – No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized and the existing data on the disks is not overwritten. – Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new virtual disk. – Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large. 7-4 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration Auto Configuration is the quickest and simplest way to create a new storage configuration. When you select Auto Configuration mode on the first Configuration Wizard screen, the Configuration Wizard creates the best configuration possible using the available physical disks. Figure 7.2 shows the Auto Configuration screen. Figure 7.2 Auto Configuration Screen Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Auto Configuration mode: 1. Select a redundancy option from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the Auto Configuration window: – No Redundancy: The new configuration will have no data redundancy (RAID 0). If a physical disk in the configuration fails, all data will be lost. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. – With Redundancy: The new configuration will have data redundancy via mirrored data (RAID 1). If a physical disk fails, data is still protected. 2. Select an initialization option from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the window: – No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized, and the existing data on the disks is not overwritten. – Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new virtual disk. – Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large. 3. (Optional) Click Modify if you want to switch to Manual Configuration mode so you can modify the suggested Auto Configuration. When you click Modify, the Virtual Disk Creation screen appears. Select the new virtual disk, and click Reclaim. Then select the new array from the Arrays with Free Space list, and change the virtual disk parameters as needed. 4. Click Finish. The new storage configuration will be created and initialized (unless you selected No Initialization). 7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration Guided Configuration provides an easy way to create a new storage configuration. Based on the information that is provided, the Configuration Wizard uses the available disk drives to create an optimal storage configuration. Figure 7.3 shows the first screen that appears when you select Guided Configuration. 7-6 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Guided Configuration mode: 1. Select a redundancy option at the top of the Guided Configuration window: – Redundancy Only: Create a configuration only if redundancy (RAID 1) is possible. – Redundancy when possible: Create a redundant configuration if possible. Otherwise, create a non-redundant configuration. – No Redundancy: Create a non-redundant configuration. 2. Choose whether you want to use existing arrays in the new virtual disk. The options are: – Use Existing Arrays Only – Don’t Use Existing Arrays – Use Existing and New Arrays The first and third options are disabled if there are no available existing arrays. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Select a maximum number of virtual disks to be created. The Configuration Wizard may not be able to create as many virtual disks as you want, depending on the current configuration and the number of virtual disks that have already been created. 4. Click Next to continue to the next window, as shown in Figure 7.4. Figure 7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen 5. Change the default volume parameters in this window, if needed. In the top section of the window you can specify the number of virtual disks to create. You can also choose to use less than the full capacity of this array for the virtual disk(s). (You could do this to leave capacity available for other virtual disks that you create later.) To learn about the Stripe Size and other virtual disk parameters, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3. 6. Click Next to continue to the next window. 7. Check the configuration that you have just defined. If it is acceptable, click Finish. If you want to change something, click Back to return to the previous windows. 7-8 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 Follow these steps to create a RAID 0 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard. Figure 7.5 shows the first screen that appears when you select Manual Configuration. Figure 7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, select two or more available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to select the disk drive on which the operating system is installed or any other drives that are already part of a configuration. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 0 array. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: To remove a single drive from a proposed new array, select the drive icon in the right panel and click the Left Arrow button. 3. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. Figure 7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 4. From the Arrays with Free Space menu, select the array to use for the new virtual disk. 5. In the right panel, select RAID 0 as the RAID level. 6. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk. 7. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 7-10 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 9. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 10. Review the configuration shown in the Virtual Disk Summary window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 11. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 Follow these steps to create a RAID 1 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard: 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to select the disk drive on which the operating system is installed or any other drives that are already part of a configuration. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 1 array. 3. To add a hotspare to an array, select an available drive in the left panel. Select the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add Hotspare To, as shown in Figure 7.7. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare 4. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and click Remove HotSpare. 5. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array(s) that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 6. Select the array to use for the new virtual disk. 7. In the right panel, select RAID 1 as the RAID level. 8. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk. 9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. 7-12 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 Follow these steps to create a RAID 10 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard: 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for a new RAID 1 array. 3. Select two more drives for a second RAID 1 array, and click Accept. 4. To add a hotspare, select an available drive in the left panel. Select the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add Hotspare To, as shown in Figure 7.7. 5. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and click Remove HotSpare. 6. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new arrays that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 7. In the left panel, select the two RAID 1 arrays from the menu. 8. In the right panel, select RAID 10 as the RAID level. For a RAID 10 array, the entire capacity of the array is automatically used for the new virtual disk. You cannot define another virtual disk on this array. Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks Hotspares are disk drives that are available to automatically replace failed drives in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk. Only global hotspares are supported for Embedded MegaRAID Software. To add a global hotspare disk, follow these steps: 1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick the icon of any unused disk drive. 2. Select Make Global Hotspare. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once the rebuilt is completed, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 7-14 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates Follow these steps if you need to change the adjustable rates for rebuilds and other system tasks that run in the background: Note: LSI recommends that you leave the adjustable task rates at their default settings to achieve the best system performance. If you raise the task rates above the defaults, foreground tasks will run more slowly and it may seem that the system is not responding. If you lower the task rates below the defaults, rebuilds and other background tasks may run very slowly and may not complete within a reasonable time. If you decide to change the values, record the original default value here so you can restore them later, if necessary: Rebuild Rate: ____________ Background Initialization (BGI) Rate: ____________ Check Consistency Rate: ____________ 1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and select a controller icon. 2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select the Operations tab, and select Set Adjustable Task Rates. The task rates appear in the right panel. 3. Enter changes, as needed, to the task rates for Rebuild Rate, Background Initialization (BGI) Rate (for fast initialization), and Check Consistency Rate (for consistency checks). Each task rate can be set from 0 to 100. The higher the number, the faster the activity will run in the background, possibly impacting other system tasks. 4. Click Go to accept the new task rates. 5. When the warning message appears, click OK to confirm that you want to change the task rates. Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties You can change a virtual disk’s Read Policy, Write Policy, and other properties at any time after the virtual disk is created. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Select a virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. In the right panel, select the Properties tab, and then select Set Virtual Disk Properties. A list of Virtual Disk Properties appears in the right panel. 3. Change the virtual disk properties as needed in the right panel. For information on these properties, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3. Note: Only the Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead functions are supported in Embedded MegaRAID Software. 4. Click Go to accept the changes. 7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk Caution: Be sure to back up the data on the virtual disk before you delete it. Be sure that the operating system is not installed on this virtual disk. You can delete virtual disks to rearrange the storage space. To delete a virtual disk, follow these steps: 1. Back up all user data that is on the virtual disk you intend to delete. 2. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select the Logical tab, and click the icon of the virtual disk you want to delete. 3. In the right panel, select the Operations tab, and select Delete Virtual Disk. 4. Click Go. 5. When the warning message appears, click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the virtual disk. 7-16 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk You can save an existing controller configuration to a file so you can apply it to another controller. To save a configuration file, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Save Configuration. The Save dialog box appears. 3. In the Save dialog box, type a name for the configuration file, or accept the default name (hostname.cfg). 4. Click Save to save the configuration file. 7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller You can use the Add New Configuration option to add a new storage configuration while keeping the existing configuration. Alternatively, you can clear the existing storage configuration from a controller and then create a totally new configuration or load a previously saved configuration file. Caution: Before you clear a configuration, be sure to save any data that you want to keep. Clearing a configuration deletes all data from the disks of the existing configuration. Be sure that the operating system is not installed on this configuration. To clear a configuration from a controller, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Clear Configuration. A Warning message appears. 3. Click Yes to clear the configuration or No to cancel the operation. Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration When you replace a controller, or when you want to duplicate an existing storage configuration on a new controller, you can add a saved configuration to the controller. Caution: When you add a saved configuration to a replacement controller, be sure that the number and size of the physical disks connected to the controller are exactly the same as when the configuration was saved. To add a saved configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Add Saved Configuration. A Warning message appears. 3. Click Yes. 4. When the Open dialog box appears, select the configuration file, and click Open. 5. View the configuration detail, then select Apply. 6. Confirm the new configuration when prompted. 7-18 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 8-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices The MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to monitor the status of disk drives, virtual disks, and other storage devices. This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform the following monitoring tasks: • Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events” • Section 8.2, “Monitoring Controllers” • Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives” • Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks” • Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” 8.1 Monitoring System Events MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the system and the storage devices connected to them. When an event occurs (such as the creation of a new virtual disk or the removal of a physical drive) an event message appears in the log displayed at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. Each event in the log includes an error level (Information, Warning, Caution, Fatal, or Dead) a date and timestamp, and a brief description. (For a list of all events, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”) The Log menu has three options: • Save Log: Saves the current log to a file. • Clear Log: Clears the current log information. • Load Log: Enables you to load a different log file. 8-2 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 8.2 Monitoring Controllers Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers act as virtual “controllers.” Because these are not actual hardware storage controllers installed in the computer system, some of the controller properties shown in the screen below do not apply to them. When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all controllers in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. If the controller is operating normally, the controller icon looks like this: . If the controller has failed, a small red circle appears to the right of the icon. (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.) To display complete controller information, click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.1 shows the Controller Information window. Figure 8.1 Controller Information Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Most of the information on this screen is self-explanatory. Note the following: • The Rebuild Rate, Consistency Check Rate, and BGI Rate (background initialization) are all user selectable. For more information, see Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates,” page 7-14. • The BBU Present field indicates whether a battery backup unit is installed. The Alarm Present and Alarm Enabled fields indicate whether the controller has an alarm to alert the user with an audible tone when there is an error or problem on the controller. There are options on the controller Properties tab for silencing or disabling the alarm. 8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all physical disk drives in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. If the disk drive is operating normally, its icon looks like this: . If the disk drive has failed, a small red circle appears to the right of the icon, like this: . (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.) To display complete disk drive information, click a disk drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.2 shows the Properties panel for a physical drive. 8-4 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 8.2 Physical Drive Information The information on this panel is self-explanatory. There are no userselectable properties for physical devices. Icons for other storage devices such as CD-ROM drives and DAT drives may also appear in the left panel. The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to identify which physical drive is represented by a disk icon on the left by blinking the drive’s LED. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk enclosure.) The procedure for doing this is as follows: 1. Click the physical disk icon in the left panel. 2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel. 3. Select Locate Physical Drive, and click Go. The LED on the physical disk drive in the enclosure starts blinking to show its location. 4. To stop the disk drive light from blinking, select Stop Locating Physical Drive, and click Go. Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To display a graphical view of a disk drive, click on a drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the drive’s storage capacity is color coded according to the legend shown on the screen: configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved space is red. When you select a virtual disk from the drop-down menu, the disk space used by that virtual disk is displayed in green. 8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all virtual disks. If a virtual disk is operating normally, the icon looks like this: . If the virtual disk is running in Degraded mode (for example, if a physical disk has failed) a small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon: . When the Logical tab is selected, the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window shows which physical disks are used by each virtual disk. The same physical disk can be used by multiple virtual disks. To display complete virtual disk information, click the Logical tab in the left panel, click on a virtual disk icon in the left panel, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.3 shows the Properties panel for a virtual disk. 8-6 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 8.3 Virtual Disk Properties The RAID level, stripe size, and access policy of the virtual disk are set when it is configured. Note: You can change the read policy, write policy, and other virtual disk properties by selecting Operations->Set Virtual Disk Properties. The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to identify which physical drives are used in a virtual disk by blinking the drive LEDs. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk enclosure.) The procedure for doing this is as follows: 1. Click the virtual disk icon in the left panel. 2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel. 3. Select Locate Virtual Disk, and click Go. The LEDs on the physical disk drives in the virtual disk start blinking (except for hotspare drives). 4. To stop the LEDs from blinking, select Stop Locating Virtual Disk, and click Go. Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To display a graphical view of a virtual disk, click on a virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the disk group (array) used for this virtual disk is shaded blue to show how much of the disk group capacity is used by this virtual disk. If part of the disk group is shaded white, this indicates that some of the capacity is used by another virtual disk. In a RAID 10 configuration, two disk groups are used by one virtual disk. 8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to monitor the progress of rebuilds and other lengthy processes in the Group Show Progress window. Open this window, shown in Figure 8.4 by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress on the menu bar. Figure 8.4 Group Show Progress Window 8-8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Operations on virtual disks appear in the left panel of the Group Show Progress window, and operations on physical drives appear in the right panel. The following operations appear in this window: • Background or foreground initialization of a virtual disk • Rebuild (see Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive”) • Consistency check (see Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check”) To abort an ongoing process, click the Abort button next to the status indicator. Click Abort All to abort all ongoing processes. Click Close to close the window. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 9-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 9 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations This section explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to maintain and manage storage configurations. This chapter explains how to perform the following tasks: • Section 9.1, “Initializing a Virtual Disk” • Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check” • Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive” • Section 9.4, “Making a Drive Offline” 9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk To initialize a virtual disk after completing the configuration process, follow these steps: 1. Select the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the icon of the virtual disk that you want to initialize. 2. Select Group Operations->Initialize. The Group Initialize dialog box appears. 3. Select the virtual disk(s) to initialize. Caution: Initialization erases all data on the virtual disk. Be sure to back up any data you want to keep before you initialize. Be sure the operating system is not installed on the virtual disk you are initializing. 4. Select the Fast Initialization check box if you want to use this option. If you leave the box unchecked, MegaRAID Storage Manager software will run a Full Initialization on the virtual disk. (For more 9-2 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.”) 5. Click Start to begin the initialization. You can monitor the progress of the initialization. See Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information. 9.2 Running a Consistency Check You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual disks. It is especially important to do this if you suspect that the virtual disk consistency data may be corrupted. Be sure to back up the data before running a consistency check, if you think the consistency data may be corrupted. To run a consistency check, follow these steps: 1. Select Group Operations->Check Consistency. The Group Consistency Check window appears. 2. Select the virtual disks that you want to check, or click Select All to select all virtual disks. 3. Click Start to begin. You can monitor the progress of the consistency check. See Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information. Note: You can also run a consistency check by selecting the virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and selecting the option on the Operation tab in the right panel. 9.3 Rebuilding a Drive If a single drive in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk fails, the system is protected from data loss. The failed drive must be replaced, and the drive’s data must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system to fault tolerance. (You can choose to rebuild the data on the failed drive Making a Drive Offline 9-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. if the drive is still operational.) If hotspare disks are available, the failed drive is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention. If a drive has failed, a red circle appears to the right of the disk drive icon: . A small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon of the virtual disk that uses this physical disk: . This indicates that the virtual disk is in a degraded state; the data is still safe, but data could be lost if another drive fails. Follow these steps if you need to rebuild a physical drive: 1. Right-click the icon of the failed drive, and select Rebuild. 2. Click Yes when the warning message appears. If the drive is still good, a rebuild will start. You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress. If the drive cannot be rebuilt, an error message appears. Continue with the next step. 3. Shut down the system, disconnect the power cord, and open the computer case. 4. Replace the failed disk drive with a new drive of equal capacity. 5. Close the computer case, reconnect the power cord, and restart the computer. 6. Restart the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. When the new drive spins up, the drive icon changes back to normal status, and the rebuild process begins automatically. You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress. 9.4 Making a Drive Offline If a disk drive is currently part of a redundant configuration and you want to use it in another configuration, you can use MegaRAID Storage Manager commands to remove the disk drive from the first configuration. When you do this, all data on that drive is lost. 9-4 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To remove the disk drive from the configuration without harming the data on the virtual disk, follow these steps: 1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick the icon of a disk drive in a redundant virtual disk. 2. Select Make drive offline from the pop-up menu. The disk drive status changes to Offline. 3. Select File->Rescan. The disk drive status remains as Offline. At this point, the data on this disk drive is no longer valid. 4. If necessary, create a hotspare disk for the virtual disk from which you removed the disk drive. (See Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare Disks.”) When a hotspare is available, the data on the virtual disk will be rebuilt. You can now use the removed disk for another configuration. Caution: If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects that a disk drive in a virtual disk has failed, it makes the drive Offline. If this happens, you must remove the disk drive and replace it. You cannot make the drive usable for another configuration by using the Rescan command. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide A-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Appendix A Events and Messages This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager software events that may appear in the event log. MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the workstation and the devices attached to them. When an event occurs, such as the start of an initialization, an event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some of the events and messages listed in this appendix are not applicable to Embedded MegaRAID Software. Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that indicates the severity of the event, as shown in Table A.1. Table A.2 lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software event messages. The event message descriptions include placeholders for specific values that are determined when the event is generated. Some of the error messages are relevant only for hardware RAID. Table A.1 Event Error Levels Error Level Meaning Information Informational message; no user action is necessary. Warning Some component may be close to a failure point. Caution A component has failed, but the system has not lost data. Fatal A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will occur. Dead A catastrophic error has occurred, and the controller has died. This event is seen only after the controller has been restarted. A-2 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Table A.2 Event Messages Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text 0x0000 0 Information Firmware initialization started (PCI ID %04x/%04x/%04x/%04x) 0x0001 1 Information Firmware version %s 0x0002 2 Fatal Unable to recover cache data from TBBU 0x0003 3 Information Cache data recovered from TBBU successfully 0x0004 4 Information Configuration cleared 0x0005 5 Warning Cluster down; communication with peer lost 0x0006 6 Information %s ownership changed from %02x to %02x 0x0007 7 Information Alarm disabled by user 0x0008 8 Information Alarm enabled by user 0x0009 9 Information Background initialization rate changed to %d%% 0x000a 10 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to memory/battery problems 0x000b 11 Fatal Unable to recover cache data due to configuration mismatch 0x000c 12 Information Cache data recovered successfully 0x000d 13 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to firmware version incompatibility 0x000e 14 Information Consistency Check rate changed to %d%% 0x000f 15 Dead Fatal firmware error: %s 0x0010 16 Information Factory defaults restored 0x0011 17 Information Flash downloaded image corrupt 0x0012 18 Caution Flash erase error 0x0013 19 Caution Flash timeout during erase 0x0014 20 Caution Flash error 0x0015 21 Information Flashing image: %s 0x0016 22 Information Flash of new firmware image(s) complete 0x0017 23 Caution Flash programming error 0x0018 24 Caution Flash timeout during programming 0x0019 25 Caution Flash chip type unknown 0x001a 26 Caution Flash command set unknown 0x001b 27 Caution Flash verify failure 0x001c 28 Information Flush rate changed to %d seconds 0x001d 29 Information Hibernate command received from host (Sheet 1 of 9) A-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x001e 30 Information Event log cleared 0x001f 31 Information Event log wrapped 0x0020 32 Dead Multi-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s) 0x0021 33 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s) 0x0022 34 Dead Not enough controller memory 0x0023 35 Information Patrol Read complete 0x0024 36 Information Patrol Read paused 0x0025 37 Information Patrol Read Rate changed to %d%% 0x0026 38 Information Patrol Read resumed 0x0027 39 Information Patrol Read started 0x0028 40 Information Rebuild rate changed to %d%% 0x0029 41 Information Reconstruction rate changed to %d%% 0x002a 42 Information Shutdown command received from host 0x002b 43 Information Test event: %s 0x002c 44 Information Time established as %s; (%d seconds since power on) 0x002d 45 Information User entered firmware debugger 0x002e 46 Warning Background Initialization aborted on %s 0x002f 47 Warning Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx 0x0030 48 Information Background Initialization completed on %s 0x0031 49 Fatal Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at %lx) 0x0032 50 Fatal Background Initialization detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s) 0x0033 51 Caution Background Initialization failed on %s 0x0034 52 Progress Background Initialization progress on %s is %s 0x0035 53 Information Background Initialization started on %s 0x0036 54 Information Policy change on %s from %s to %s 0x0038 56 Warning Consistency Check aborted on %s 0x0039 57 Warning Consistency Check corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at %lx) 0x003a 58 Information Consistency Check done on %s 0x003b 59 Information Consistency Check done with corrections on %s, (corrections=%d) Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 2 of 9) A-4 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x003c 60 Fatal Consistency Check detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s) 0x003d 61 Caution Consistency Check failed on %s 0x003e 62 Fatal Consistency Check failed with uncorrectable data on %s 0x003f 63 Warning Consistency Check found inconsistent parity on %s at strip %lx 0x0040 64 Warning Consistency Check inconsistency logging disabled on %s (too many inconsistencies) 0x0041 65 Progress Consistency Check progress on %s is %s 0x0042 66 Information Consistency Check started on %s 0x0043 67 Warning Initialization aborted on %s 0x0044 68 Caution Initialization failed on %s 0x0045 69 Progress Initialization progress on %s is %s 0x0046 70 Information Fast initialization started on %s 0x0047 71 Information Full initialization started on %s 0x0048 72 Information Initialization complete on %s 0x0049 73 Information Properties updated to %s (from %s) 0x004a 74 Information Reconstruction complete on %s 0x004b 75 Fatal Reconstruction of %s stopped due to unrecoverable errors 0x004c 76 Fatal Reconstruct detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s at %lx) 0x004d 77 Progress Reconstruction progress on %s is %s 0x004e 78 Information Reconstruction resumed on %s 0x004f 79 Fatal Reconstruction resume of %s failed due to configuration mismatch 0x0050 80 Information Reconstructing started on %s 0x0051 81 Information State change on %s from %s to %s 0x0052 82 Information Clear aborted on %s 0x0053 83 Caution Clear failed on %s (Error %02x) 0x0054 84 Progress Clear progress on %s is %s 0x0055 85 Information Clear started on %s 0x0056 86 Information Clear completed on %s 0x0057 87 Warning Error on %s (Error %02x) Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 3 of 9) A-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0058 88 Information Format complete on %s 0x0059 89 Information Format started on %s 0x005a 90 Caution Hot Spare SMART polling failed on %s (Error %02x) 0x005b 91 Information Inserted: %s 0x005c 92 Warning %s is not supported 0x005d 93 Warning Patrol Read corrected medium error on %s at %lx 0x005e 94 Progress Patrol Read progress on %s is %s 0x005f 95 Fatal Patrol Read found an uncorrectable medium error on %s at %lx 0x0060 96 Caution Predictive failure: %s 0x0061 97 Fatal Puncturing bad block on %s at %lx 0x0062 98 Information Rebuild aborted by user on %s 0x0063 99 Information Rebuild complete on %s 0x0064 100 Information Rebuild complete on %s 0x0065 101 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to source drive error 0x0066 102 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to target drive error 0x0067 103 Progress Rebuild progress on %s is %s 0x0068 104 Information Rebuild resumed on %s 0x0069 105 Information Rebuild started on %s 0x006a 106 Information Rebuild automatically started on %s 0x006b 107 Caution Rebuild stopped on %s due to loss of cluster ownership 0x006c 108 Fatal Reassign write operation failed on %s at %lx 0x006d 109 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during rebuild on %s at %lx 0x006e 110 Information Corrected medium error during recovery on %s at %lx 0x006f 111 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during recovery on %s at %lx 0x0070 112 Information Removed: %s 0x0071 113 Warning Unexpected sense: %s, CDB%s, Sense: %s 0x0072 114 Information State change on %s from %s to %s 0x0073 115 Information State change by user on %s from %s to %s 0x0074 116 Warning Redundant path to %s broken 0x0075 117 Information Redundant path to %s restored Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 4 of 9) A-6 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0076 118 Information Dedicated Hot Spare PD %s no longer useful due to deleted array 0x0077 119 Caution SAS topology error: Loop detected 0x0078 120 Caution SAS topology error: Unaddressable device 0x0079 121 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple ports to the same SAS address 0x007a 122 Caution SAS topology error: Expander error 0x007b 123 Caution SAS topology error: SMP timeout 0x007c 124 Caution SAS topology error: Out of route entries 0x007d 125 Caution SAS topology error: Index not found 0x007e 126 Caution SAS topology error: SMP function failed 0x007f 127 Caution SAS topology error: SMP CRC error 0x0080 128 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple subtractive 0x0081 129 Caution SAS topology error: Table to table 0x0082 130 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple paths 0x0083 131 Fatal Unable to access device %s 0x0084 132 Information Dedicated Hot Spare created on %s (%s) 0x0085 133 Information Dedicated Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled 0x0086 134 Caution Dedicated Hot Spare %s no longer useful for all arrays 0x0087 135 Information Global Hot Spare created on %s (%s) 0x0088 136 Information Global Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled 0x0089 137 Caution Global Hot Spare %s does not cover all arrays 0x008a 138 Information Created %s 0x008b 139 Information Deleted %s 0x008c 140 Information Marking %s inconsistent due to active writes at shutdown 0x008d 141 Information Battery Present 0x008e 142 Warning Battery Not Present 0x008f 143 Information New Battery Detected 0x0090 144 Information Battery has been replaced 0x0091 145 Caution Battery temperature is high 0x0092 146 Warning Battery voltage low 0x0093 147 Information Battery started charging Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 5 of 9) A-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0094 148 Information Battery is discharging 0x0095 149 Information Battery temperature is normal 0x0096 150 Fatal Battery needs replacement - SOH Bad 0x0097 151 Information Battery relearn started 0x0098 152 Information Battery relearn in progress 0x0099 153 Information Battery relearn completed 0x009a 154 Caution Battery relearn timed out 0x009b 155 Information Battery relearn pending: Battery is under charge 0x009c 156 Information Battery relearn postponed 0x009d 157 Information Battery relearn will start in 4 days 0x009e 158 Information Battery relearn will start in 2 day 0x009f 159 Information Battery relearn will start in 1 day 0x00a0 160 Information Battery relearn will start in 5 hours 0x00a1 161 Information Battery removed 0x00a2 162 Information Current capacity of the battery is below threshold 0x00a3 163 Information Current capacity of the battery is above threshold 0x00a4 164 Information Enclosure (SES) discovered on %s 0x00a5 165 Information Enclosure (SAFTE) discovered on %s 0x00a6 166 Caution Enclosure %s communication lost 0x00a7 167 Information Enclosure %s communication restored 0x00a8 168 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d failed 0x00a9 169 Information Enclosure %s fan %d inserted 0x00aa 170 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d removed 0x00ab 171 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d failed 0x00ac 172 Information Enclosure %s power supply %d inserted 0x00ad 173 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d removed 0x00ae 174 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d failed 0x00af 175 Information Enclosure %s EMM %d inserted 0x00b0 176 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d removed 0x00b1 177 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below warning threshold Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 6 of 9) A-8 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00b2 178 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below error threshold 0x00b3 179 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above warning threshold 0x00b4 180 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above error threshold 0x00b5 181 Caution Enclosure %s shutdown 0x00b6 182 Warning Enclosure %s not supported; too many enclosures connected to port 0x00b7 183 Caution Enclosure %s firmware mismatch (EMM %d) 0x00b8 184 Warning Enclosure %s sensor %d bad 0x00b9 185 Caution Enclosure %s phy bad for slot %d 0x00ba 186 Caution Enclosure %s is unstable 0x00bb 187 Caution Enclosure %s hardware error 0x00bc 188 Caution Enclosure %s not responding 0x00bd 189 Information SAS/SATA mixing not supported in enclosure; %s disabled 0x00be 190 Information Enclosure (SES) hotplug on %s was detected, but is not supported 0x00bf 191 Information Clustering enabled 0x00c0 192 Information Clustering disabled 0x00c1 193 Information PD too small to be used for auto-rebuild on %s 0x00c2 194 Information BBU enabled; changing WT virtual disks to WB 0x00c3 195 Warning BBU disabled; changing WB virtual disks to WT 0x00c4 196 Warning Bad block table on %s is 80% full 0x00c5 197 Fatal Bad block table on %s is full; unable to log block %lx 0x00c6 198 Information Consistency Check Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on %s 0x00c7 199 Information Background Initialization (BGI) Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on %s 0x00c8 200 Caution Battery/charger problems detected; SOH Bad 0x00c9 201 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); warning threshold exceeded 0x00ca 202 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); critical threshold exceeded 0x00cb 203 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); further reporting disabled 0x00cc 204 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched off Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 7 of 9) A-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00cd 205 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched on 0x00ce 206 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable removed 0x00cf 207 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable inserted 0x00d0 208 Information Enclosure %s Fan %d returned to normal 0x00d1 209 Information BBU Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d2 210 Information BBU Retention test passed 0x00d3 211 Caution BBU Retention test failed! 0x00d4 212 Information NVRAM Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d5 213 Information NVRAM Retention test passed 0x00d6 214 Caution NVRAM Retention test failed! 0x00d7 215 Information %s test completed %d passes successfully 0x00d8 216 Caution %s test FAILED on %d pass. Fail data: errorOffset=%x goodData=%x badData=%x 0x00d9 217 Information Self check diagnostics completed 0x00da 218 Information Foreign Configuration Detected 0x00db 219 Information Foreign Configuration Imported 0x00dc 220 Information Foreign Configuration Cleared 0x00dd 221 Warning NVRAM is corrupt; reinitializing 0x00de 222 Warning NVRAM mismatch occurred 0x00df 223 Warning SAS wide port %d lost link on PHY %d 0x00e0 224 Information SAS wide port %d restored link on PHY %d 0x00e1 225 Warning SAS port %d, PHY %d has exceeded the allowed error rate 0x00e2 226 Warning Bad block reassigned on %s at %lx to %lx 0x00e3 227 Information Controller Hot Plug detected 0x00e4 228 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d differential detected 0x00e5 229 Information Disk test cannot start. No qualifying disks found 0x00e6 230 Information Time duration provided by host is not sufficient for self check 0x00e7 231 Information Marked Missing for %s on array %d row %d 0x00e8 232 Information Replaced Missing as %s on array %d row %d 0x00e9 233 Information Enclosure %s Temperature %d returned to normal 0x00ea 234 Information Enclosure %s Firmware download in progress Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 8 of 9) A-10 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00eb 235 Warning Enclosure %s Firmware download failed 0x00ec 236 Warning %s is not a certified drive 0x00ed 237 Information Dirty cache data discarded by user 0x00ee 238 Information PDs missing from configuration at boot 0x00ef 239 Information VDs missing drives and will go offline at boot: %s 0x00f0 240 Information VDs missing at boot: %s 0x00f1 241 Information Previous configuration completely missing at boot 0x00f2 242 Information Battery charge complete 0x00f3 243 Information Enclosure %s fan %d speed changed 0x00f4 244 Information Dedicated spare %s imported as global due to missing arrays 0x00f5 245 Information %s rebuild not possible as SAS/SATA is not supported in an array 0x00f6 246 Information SEP %s has been rebooted as a part of enclosure firmware download. SEP will be unavailable until this process completes. 0x00f7 247 Information Inserted: %s Info: %s 0x00f8 248 Information Removed: %s Info: %s 0x00f9 249 Information %s is now OPTIMAL 0x00fa 250 Warning %s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED 0x00fb 251 Caution %s is now DEGRADED 0x00fc 252 Fatal %s is now OFFLINE 0x00fd 253 Warning Battery requires reconditioning; please initiate a LEARN cycle 0x00fe 254 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-5 is not supported by this RAID key 0x00ff 255 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-6 is not supported by this controller 0x0100 256 Warning VD %s disabled because SAS drives are not supported by this RAID key Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 9 of 9) Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Customer Feedback We would appreciate your feedback on this document. Please copy the following page, add your comments, and fax it to us at the number shown. If appropriate, please also fax copies of any marked-up pages from this document. Important: Please include your name, phone number, fax number, and company address so that we may contact you directly for clarification or additional information. Thank you for your help in improving the quality of our documents. Reader’s Comments Fax your comments to: LSI Logic Corporation Technical Publications M/S AF-198 Fax: 408.433.4333 Please tell us how you rate this document: Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide. Place a check mark in the appropriate blank for each category. What could we do to improve this document? If you found errors in this document, please specify the error and page number. If appropriate, please fax a marked-up copy of the page(s). Please complete the information below so that we may contact you directly for clarification or additional information. Excellent Good Average Fair Poor Completeness of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Clarity of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Ease of finding information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Technical content ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Usefulness of examples and illustrations ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Overall manual ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Name Date Telephone Title Company Name Street City, State, Zip Department Mail Stop Fax Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 1 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 12 August 2014 Table of Contents 1 Introduction............................................................................................................................3 1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition)...........................................................................................4 1.2 Product Contents............................................................................................................4 1.3 System Requirements ....................................................................................................5 1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported .....................................................................6 1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported...............................................................................6 1.4 Documentation ...............................................................................................................6 1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web ..................6 1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows Server* 2012..........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Optimization Notice ........................................................................................................7 1.6 Samples..........................................................................................................................7 1.7 Japanese Language Support .........................................................................................7 1.8 Technical Support...........................................................................................................8 2 Installation..............................................................................................................................8 2.1 Pre-Installation Steps .....................................................................................................8 2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software....................................................................................8 2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS)........................8 2.3 Online Installer................................................................................................................9 2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content .............................................................9 2.4 Installation ......................................................................................................................9 2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended ........................................................................9 2.4.2 Cluster Installation.................................................................................................10 2.4.3 Using a License Server .........................................................................................10 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 2 2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010*........10 2.5 Intel® Software Manager..............................................................................................10 2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product ..........................................................10 2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall ............................................................................................11 2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation.....................................................11 2.8 Installation Folders .......................................................................................................12 2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes .......................................................................13 3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler.............................................................................................13 3.1 Compatibility .................................................................................................................14 3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0) .....14 3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided ......................14 3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator................................................................................14 3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features .........................................................................15 3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003 ..................................................................................15 3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008 ..................................................................................15 3.2.3 Features from OpenMP* .......................................................................................15 3.2.4 New and Changed Directives................................................................................16 3.2.5 Other Features ......................................................................................................16 3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0) .....................................................................................................17 3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1) ..............................17 3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1) ..............................................................17 3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated ....................................................................18 3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers ..............................18 3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options ...........................................................................18 3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*.............................................................................................................................18 3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes ...............................................................................20 3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0) ........................................................20 3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1) ...................................................................................21 3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE .........................21 3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE.21 3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio* ..................................21 3.5 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................21 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 3 3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters .........21 3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed ...21 3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work .......................22 3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010 projects 22 3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet fully implemented.................................................................................................................23 3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes....................................................23 3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries 23 3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies ...........................................................................24 3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server* 2012 and Windows Server* 2008 ........................................................................................25 3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary.......................................................25 4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)................................................................................................................................26 4.1 Features .......................................................................................................................26 4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension ..........................................................................26 4.3 Documentation .............................................................................................................26 4.4 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................26 5 Intel® Math Kernel Library ...................................................................................................28 5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2.......................................................................................28 5.2 Notes ............................................................................................................................31 5.3 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................32 5.4 Attributions....................................................................................................................32 6 Disclaimer and Legal Information ........................................................................................32 1 Introduction This document describes how to install the product, provides a summary of new and changed product features and includes notes about features and problems not described in the product documentation. For the most current update to these release notes, see the release notes posted at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center where you downloaded this product. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 4 Due to the nature of this comprehensive integrated software development tools solution, different Intel® Parallel Studio XE Composer Edition components may be covered by different licenses. Please see the licenses included in the distribution as well as the Disclaimer and Legal Information section of these release notes for details. 1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition)  Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler updated to version 15.0 o New Optimization Report interface, structure, and options (users of existing options /Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report are strongly encouraged to consult the Intel Compiler User’s Guide for additional details)  New IDE integration for optimization reports showing report information integrated with source with hyperlinking to relevant areas. See the User’s Guide for details.  Additional OpenMP* 4.0 support  Create custom install packages with the online installer  Enable threadsafe profile generation with PGO  New INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX environment variable to add custom prefix to PGO .dyn filenames  Static Analysis is deprecated  Windows XP* not supported  Microsoft Visual Studio 2008* not supported  Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® MIC Architecture updated to version 7.7-8.0  Intel® Math Kernel Library updated to version 11.2  Corrections to reported problems 1.2 Product Contents Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* initial release includes the following components:  Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler XE 15.0 for building applications that run on IA-32 and Intel® 64 architecture systems  Intel® Math Kernel Library 11.2  Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)  Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) for debugging Fortran applications with Microsoft Visual Studio*  Integration into Microsoft* development environments  Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Shell and Libraries (not included with Evaluation licenses)  Sample programs  On-disk documentation Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 5 1.3 System Requirements For an explanation of architecture names, see Intel® Architecture Platform Terminology  A PC based on an IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture processor supporting the Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 2 (Intel® SSE2) instructions (Intel® Pentium® 4 processor or later, or compatible non-Intel processor o For the best experience, a multi-core or multi-processor system is recommended  2GB RAM (4GB recommended)  4GB free disk space required for all product features and all architectures  For Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) development/testing: o Intel® Xeon Phi™ processor o Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS) o Debugging of offload code requires Microsoft Visual Studio* 2012 or 2013  Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8*, Microsoft Windows 8.1*, Microsoft Windows Server 2012*, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2* (IA-32 only), Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (R2 SP1) or Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008* (embedded editions not supported) o Microsoft Windows Server 2008 or Windows HPC Server 2008 requires Microsoft Visual Studio 2013* or Visual Studio 2012* or Visual Studio 2010* or Visual Studio 2010* Shell. o On Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 8.1, and Microsoft Windows Server 2012, the product installs into the “Desktop” environment. Development of “Windows 8* UI” applications is not supported.  To use the Microsoft Visual Studio development environment or command-line tools to build IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio 2013* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell (included with some license types of Intel® Fortran Compiler) [1]  To use command-line tools only to build IA-32 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual C++ 2010* Express Edition [2]  To use command-line tools only to build Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8.1* o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8*  To read the on-disk documentation, Adobe Reader* 7.0 or later Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 6 Notes: 1. Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Shell is included with Academic and Commercial licenses for Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. It is not included with Evaluation licenses. This development environment provides everything necessary to edit, build and debug Fortran applications. Some features of the full Visual Studio product are not included, such as:  Resource Editor (see ResEdit* (http://www.resedit.net/), a third-party tool, for a substitute)  Automated conversion of Compaq* Visual Fortran projects  Microsoft language tools such as Visual C++* or Visual Basic* 2. Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition will coexist with the Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2015 installation of Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell. Note that the C++ and Fortran development environments will be separate. 3. The default for Intel® Visual Fortran is to build IA-32 architecture applications that require a processor supporting the Intel® SSE2 instructions. A compiler option is available to generate code that will run on any IA-32 architecture processor. Note, however, that applications calling Intel® MKL require a processor supporting the Intel® SSE2 instructions. 4. Applications can be run on the same Windows versions as specified above for development. Applications may also run on non-embedded 32-bit versions of Microsoft Windows earlier than Windows 7, though Intel does not test these for compatibility. Your application may depend on a Windows API routine not present in older versions of Windows. You are responsible for testing application compatibility. You may need to copy certain run-time DLLs onto the target system to run your application. 1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported Support has been removed for installation and use with Visual Studio 2008. Intel recommends migrating to a newer version of Visual Studio*. 1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported Support has been removed for installation and use on Windows XP. Intel recommends migrating to a newer version of these operating systems. 1.4 Documentation Product documentation can be found in the Documentation folder as shown under Installation Folders. 1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web Documentation on using QuickWin, dialogs and the Windows API is available from the Intel Software Documentation Library: See Using Intel® Visual Fortran to Create and Build Windows*-based Applications (PDF) Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 7 1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows Server* 2012 If on Windows Server 2012 you find that you cannot display help or documentation from within Internet Explorer 10, modifying a security setting for Microsoft Internet Explorer usually corrects the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, add “about:internet” to the list of trusted sites. Optionally, you can remove “about:internet” from the list of trusted sites after you finish viewing the documentation. 1.5 Optimization Notice Optimization Notice Intel’s compilers may or may not optimize to the same degree for non-Intel microprocessors for optimizations that are not unique to Intel microprocessors. These optimizations include SSE2, SSE3, and SSSE3 instruction sets and other optimizations. Intel does not guarantee the availability, functionality, or effectiveness of any optimization on microprocessors not manufactured by Intel. Microprocessor-dependent optimizations in this product are intended for use with Intel microprocessors. Certain optimizations not specific to Intel microarchitecture are reserved for Intel microprocessors. Please refer to the applicable product User and Reference Guides for more information regarding the specific instruction sets covered by this notice. Notice revision #20110804 1.6 Samples Samples for each product component can be found in the Samples folder as shown under Installation Folders. 1.7 Japanese Language Support Intel compilers provide support for Japanese language users when the combined JapaneseEnglish installation is used. Error messages, visual development environment dialogs and some documentation are provided in Japanese in addition to English. By default, the language of error messages and dialogs matches that of your operating system language selection. Japaneselanguage documentation can be found in the ja_JP subdirectory for documentation and samples. Japanese language support will be available in an update on or after the release of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows. If you wish to use Japanese-language support on an English-language operating system, or English-language support on a Japanese-language operating system, you will find instructions at Changing Language Setting to see English on a Japanese OS Environment or Vice Versa on Windows. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 8 1.8 Technical Support If you did not register your compiler during installation, please do so at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center. Registration entitles you to free technical support, product updates and upgrades for the duration of the support term. For information about how to find Technical Support, Product Updates, User Forums, FAQs, tips and tricks, and other support information, please visit http://www.intel.com/software/products/support/ Note: If your distributor provides technical support for this product, please contact them for support rather than Intel. 2 Installation 2.1 Pre-Installation Steps 2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software If you will be installing the included Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell, additional Microsoft software may be required to be installed before beginning the installation of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. Microsoft .NET 4.0 Framework* is required. If you do not already have this installed, you can download the installer:  .NET 4.0 Framework 32-bit and 64-bit If you are installing on Windows 8.1*, Windows 8*, Windows 7* or Windows Server 2008, the installation of the Shell will attempt to download and install .NET Framework 4.0 automatically if it is not already present. If this fails, the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* install will fail with a message that may not indicate the exact problem. If you find that the installation of the Shell fails, please download .NET 4.0 Framework from the above link and try again. If you are installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* from the full product downloadable that includes Visual Studio 2010 Shell, it will try to install Visual Studio 2010 Shell if you do not already have Visual Studio 2010 installed. If you do not want Visual Studio 2010 Shell to install, you can choose a Custom install and deselect it, or choose the “_novsshell.exe” downloadable installer. 2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS) The Intel® Manycore Platform System Software (Intel® MPSS) should be installed only if you plan to build applications that target an Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor. Intel® MPSS may be installed before or after installing the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* product. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 9 Using the latest version of Intel® MPSS available is recommended. It is available from the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center at http://registrationcenter.intel.com as part of your Intel® Parallel Studio XE for Windows* registration. Refer to the Intel® MPSS documentation for the necessary steps to install the user space and kernel drivers. 2.3 Online Installer The default electronic installation package now consists of a smaller installation package that dynamically downloads and then installs packages selected to be installed. This requires a working internet connection and potentially a proxy setting if you are behind an internet proxy. Full packages are provided alongside where you download this online install package if a working internet connection is not available. The online installer may be downloaded and saved as an executable file which can then be launched from the command line. 2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content The online installer stores the downloaded content in the form-factor of the standard install package which can then be copied and reused offline on other systems. The default download location is \intel\downloads. This location may be changed with the online installer command line option “--download-dir [FOLDER]”. The online installer also supports a download only mode which allows the user to create a package without installation. This mode is enabled with the “--download-only” command line option. 2.4 Installation The installation of the product requires a valid license file or serial number. If you are evaluating the product, you can also choose the “Evaluate this product (no serial number required)” option during installation. After downloading the product, double-click on the executable file (.EXE) to begin installation. Note that there are several different downloadable files available, each providing different combinations of components. Please read the download web page carefully to determine which file is appropriate for you. You do not need to uninstall previous versions or updates before installing a newer version – the new version will coexist with the older versions. If you want to remove older versions, you may do so before or after installing the newer one. Register your serial number at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center for access to product updates and previous versions. 2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended Installation of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* adds to the system PATH environment variable the folders containing the compiler run-time DLLs (but not those of Intel® Math Kernel Library). On some systems, if the length of the PATH value is between 2048 and 4096 characters, command line operations may fail until the system is rebooted. Intel recommends a reboot after the first install of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 10 2.4.2 Cluster Installation If Microsoft Compute Cluster Pack* is present, and the installation detects that the installing system is a member of a cluster, the product will be installed on all visible nodes of the cluster when a “Full” installation is requested. If a “Custom” installation is requested, you will be given the option to install on the current node only. 2.4.3 Using a License Server If you have purchased a “floating” license, see Licensing: Setting Up the Client for a Floating License. This article also provides a source for the Intel® License Manager for FLEXlm* product that can be installed on any of a wide variety of systems. 2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* When installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* on a system with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 for the first time, you will be asked to initialize the “Local Store” for documentation for Visual Studio 2010 if it was not done before. The "Help Library Manager" will register the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* help documentation within Visual Studio 2010. Please follow the instructions of the "Help Library Manager" installation wizard to install the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* help documentation for Visual Studio 2010. This step is only needed once. When you install Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* updates in the future, you will not be required to re-register the documentation through the “Help Library Manager”. For more information, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/enus/subscriptions/dd264831(v=vs.100).aspx or search on microsoft.com for “Help Library Manager”. 2.5 Intel® Software Manager The installation provides the Intel® Software Manager to provide a simplified delivery mechanism for product updates and provide current license status and news on all installed Intel® software products. You can also volunteer to provide Intel anonymous usage information about these products to help guide future product design. This option, the Intel® Software Improvement Program, is not enabled by default – you can opt-in during installation or at a later time, and may opt-out at any time. For more information please see Intel® Software Improvement Program. 2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product Use the Windows Control Panel “Add or Remove Products” or “Programs and Features” applet to change which product components are installed or to remove the product. Depending on which product you installed, the entry will be one of the following:  Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*  Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Windows*  Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Windows* Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 11  Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Fortran Windows* If you also installed Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell as part of the compiler install, the following additional entries may be present:  Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell (Integrated) - ENU  Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Files for Intel Visual Fortran  Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Remote Debugger – ENU The entries for Visual Studio Shell, Files and Remote Debugger should not be removed unless you want to completely remove the product. When installing an updated version of the product, you do not need to remove the older version first. The first time you install an update, you will have the choice to replace the older version or to keep both the older and newer versions on the system. This choice is remembered for future updates. In Microsoft Visual Studio you can select which specific compiler version to use through the Tools > Options > Intel Composer XE > Visual Fortran Compiler dialog. Compiler versions older than 13.0 (Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2011) are not available to be selected through Visual Studio. All installed versions can be used from the command line. If you remove a newer version of the product you may have to reinstall the integrations into Microsoft Visual Studio from the older version. 2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall For information on how to install and uninstall the compiler in an automated fashion, please see Intel® Compilers for Windows* Silent Installation Guide. 2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 supports the saving of user install choices during an ‘interactive’ install in a configuration file that can then be used for silent installs. This configuration file is created when the following option is used from the command line install:  --duplicate=config_file_name: it specifies the configuration file name. If the full path name is specified, “--download-dir” is ignored and the installable package will be created under the same directory as the configuration file.  --download-dir=dir_name: optional, it specifies where the configuration file will be created. If this option is omitted, the installation package and the configuration file will be created under the default download directory: %Program Files%\Intel\Download\ For example: w_fcompxe_online_2015.0.0XX.exe --duplicate=ic15_install_config.ini  --download-dir "C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15" Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 12 The configuration file and installable package will be created under “C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15”. 2.8 Installation Folders The installation folder arrangement is shown in the diagram below. Not all folders will be present in a given installation. The system environment variable IFORT_COMPILER15 can be used to locate the most recently installed Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*.  C:\Program Files\Intel\Composer XE 2015 o bin  ia32  ia32_intel64  intel64  intel64_mic  sourcechecker o compiler  include  ia32  intel64  mic  lib  ia32  intel64  mic o debugger o Documentation o mkl  benchmarks  bin  examples  include  interfaces  lib  tests  tools o redist o Samples Where the folders under bin, include and lib are used as follows:  ia32: Files used to build applications that run on IA-32 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 13  intel64: Files used to build applications that run on Intel® 64  ia32_intel64: Compilers that run on IA-32 to build applications that run on Intel®64 If you are installing on a system with a non-English language version of Windows, the name of the Program Files folder may be different. On Intel® 64 architecture systems, the folder name is Program Files (X86) or the equivalent. By default, updates of a given version will replace the existing directory contents. When the first update is installed, the user is given the option of having the new update installed alongside the previous installation, keeping both on the system. If this is done, the top-level folder name for the older update is changed to Composer XE 2015.nnn where nnn is the update number. 2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes  Remote offline activation via a code has been removed. Use of a license file or a license manager remain as options for alternative activation.  When installing “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*” on a system which has “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2” installed you may get the following error in Visual Studio: “Could not load file or assembly ‘Intel.Misc.Utilities’ or one of its dependencies. The system cannot find the file specified.”. This is due to an issue in “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2”, which was fixed in subsequent releases. This can be resolved by installing “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 3” or “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for C++ Windows*”. 3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about the Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 14 3.1 Compatibility In general, object code and modules compiled with earlier versions of Intel Fortran Compiler (8.0 and later) may be used in a build with version 15.0. Exceptions include:  Sources that use the CLASS keyword to declare polymorphic variables and which were built with a compiler version earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled.  Objects built with the multi-file interprocedural optimization (/Qipo) option must be recompiled.  Objects that use the REAL(16) , REAL*16, COMPLEX(16) or COMPLEX*32 datatypes and which were compiled with versions earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled.  Objects built for the Intel® 64 architecture with a compiler version earlier than 10.0 and that have module variables must be recompiled. If non-Fortran sources reference these variables, the external names may need to be changed to remove an incorrect leading underscore.  Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive outside of a derived type declaration and were compiled with versions earlier than 11.0 must be recompiled. The compiler will notify you if this issue is encountered.  Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive inside a derived type declaration cannot be used by compilers older than 13.0.1. 3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0) In previous releases, when a REAL(16) or COMPLEX(16) (REAL*16 or COMPLEX*32) item was passed by value, the stack address was aligned at 4 bytes. For improved performance, compiler versions 12.0 and later align such items at 16 bytes and expect received arguments to be aligned on 16-byte boundaries. This change primarily affects compiler-generated calls to library routines that do computations on REAL(16) values, including intrinsics. If you have code compiled with earlier versions and link it with the version 13 libraries, or have an application linked to the shared version of the Intel run-time libraries, it may give incorrect results. In order to avoid errors, you must recompile all Fortran sources that use the REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) datatypes. 3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided The static form of the Intel® OpenMP* library, libiomp5mt.lib, is no longer provided, and the /Qopenmp-link:static command line option is no longer supported. Please replace all references to libiomp5mt.lib with libiomp5md.lib, the DLL import library. This change also implies that applications using OpenMP will need to have the Intel® compiler redistributables installed if deployed on a system where an Intel® compiler is not also present. See Redistributable Libraries for Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE for more information. 3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* that is installed with Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler. It extends the standard debugger in Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE by handling Fortran expressions. There is no other change in usability. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 15 3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features Some language features may not yet be described in the compiler documentation. Please refer to the Fortran 2003 Standard (PDF)) and Fortran 2008 Standard (PDF) if necessary. 3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003  Parameterized Derived Types 3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008  BLOCK construct  intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE 3.2.3 Features from OpenMP* The following directives, clauses and procedures, from OpenMP 4.0, are supported by the compiler. Some of these features were supported in Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 Update 3 based on a preliminary specification, some keywords supported earlier (DECLARE TARGET MIRROR, DECLARE TARGET LINKABLE, MAPTO, MAPFROM, SCRATCH) are no longer supported, and some syntax has changed its meaning since the earlier specification. For more information, see the compiler documentation or the link to the OpenMP Specification above. SIMD Directives:  OMP SIMD  OMP DECLARE SIMD  OMP DO SIMD  OMP PARALLEL DO SIMD Coprocessor Directives:  OMP TARGET DATA  OMP TARGET  OMP TARGET UPDATE  OMP DECLARE TARGET Other Directives:  OMP PARALLEL PROC_BIND  OMP TASKGROUP  OMP CANCEL  OMP CANCELLATION POINT Clauses:  MAP  DEPEND Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 16 Procedures:  OMP_GET_DEVICE_NUM  OMP_GET_PROC_BIND  OMP_SET_DEVICE_NUM 3.2.3.1 KMP_PLACE_THREADS Environment Variable (13.1.0) This environment variable allows the user to simplify the specification of the number of cores and threads per core used by an OpenMP application, as an alternative to writing explicit affinity settings or a process affinity mask. 3.2.3.2 KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE Environment Variable Support for “asat” Deprecated Support for “asat” (automatic self-allocating threads) by the environment variable KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE is now deprecated, and will be removed in a future release. 3.2.4 New and Changed Directives The following compiler directives are new or changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition– please see the documentation for details:  ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-TOTAL-SIZE=N  ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-PER-ROUTINE=N 3.2.4.1 ATTRIBUTES STDCALL now allowed with BIND(C) As of compiler version 15.0, the ATTRIBUTES STDCALL directive may be specified for an interoperable procedure (a procedure whose declaration includes the BIND(C) language binding attribute.) This combination has the following effects for Windows* applications targeting IA-32 architecture:  The calling mechanism is changed to STDCALL, which affects how the stack is cleaned up on procedure exit  The external name from the BIND attribute is suffixed with “@n”, where n is the number of bytes to be removed from the stack on return. No other effects from STDCALL, such as pass-by-value, are provided. The Fortran standard VALUE attribute (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE) may be used if desired. For all other platforms, specifying STDCALL with BIND(C) has no effect. 3.2.5 Other Features For information on these features, please see the compiler documentation.  New environment variable INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX. Allows the user to have some control over the naming PGO generated “.dyn” files to make it easy to distinguish files from different runs. By setting this environment variable to the desired character string prior to starting the instrumented application, the string will be included as prefix to the .dyn file names. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 17  New intrinsic __intel_simd_lane() that represents the ‘lane id’ within a SIMD vector. This feature supports writing short-vector hyperobject reducer implementation. It also enables the performing of reduction operations inside SIMD-enabled functions. 3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0) No special procedure is necessary to run a program that uses coarrays in a shared-memory environment; you simply run the executable file. The underlying parallelization implementation is Intel® MPI. Installation of the compiler automatically installs the necessary Intel® MPI run-time libraries to run on shared memory. A license for Intel® Parallel Studio XE Cluster Edition must be present in order to use the /coarray:distributed option. For details on how to run a distributed coarray application on Windows, please see Building and Running a Distributed Coarray Application on Windows. Use of coarray applications with any MPI implementation other than Intel® MPI, or with OpenMP*, is not supported at this time. By default, the number of images created is equal to the number of execution units on the current system. You can override that by specifying the option /Qcoarray-num-images: on the ifort command that compiles the main program. You can also specify the number of images in an environment variable FOR_COARRAY_NUM_IMAGES. 3.2.6.1 Coarrays and Intel® MPI Library compatibility Coarrays with Intel® Fortran Compiler 14 is incompatible with Intel® MPI Library 5.0. If using coarrays, ensure that either Intel® Fortran Compiler 15 or higher is used, or use a 4.x version of Intel® MPI Library. 3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1) As of compiler version 13.0.1, the ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive may be specified for an ALLOCATABLE or POINTER component of a derived type. The directive must be placed within the derived type declaration, and if it is an extended type, the directive must not name a component in a parent type. If this is specified, the compiler will apply the indicated alignment when the component is allocated, either through an explicit ALLOCATE or, for ALLOCATABLE components, through implicit allocation according to Fortran language rules. A module containing an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive for a derived type component cannot be used with a compiler earlier than version 13.0.1. 3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1) In product versions prior to Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 (compiler version 13.0), the Fortran Runtime Library buffered all input when reading variable length, unformatted sequential file records. This default buffering was accomplished by the Fortran Runtime Library allocating an internal buffer large enough to hold any sized, variable length record in memory. For extremely large records this could result in an excessive use of memory, and in the worst cases could result in available memory being exhausted. The user had no ability to change this Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 18 default buffering behavior on such READs. There was always the ability to request or deny buffering of these records when writing them, but not when reading them. This default buffering behavior was changed with the release of Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013. Beginning with this version, all such records are not buffered by default, but rather read directly from disk to the user program’s variables. This change helped programs that needed to conserve memory, but could in fact result in a performance degradation when reading records that are made of many small components. Some users have reported this performance degradation. The Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 Update 2 (compiler version 13.1) release of the Fortran Runtime Library now provides a method for a user to choose whether or not to buffer these variable length, unformatted records. The default behavior remains as it was in 13.0; these records are not buffered by default. If you experience performance degradation when using 13.1 with this type of I/O, you can enable buffering of the input the same way that you choose whether to enable buffering of the output of these records – one of the following:  specifying BUFFERED=”YES” on the file's OPEN statement  specifying the environment variable FORT_BUFFERED to be YES, TRUE or an integer value greater than 0  specifying -assume buffered_io on the compiler command line In the past, these mechanisms applied only when issuing a WRITE of variable length, unformatted, sequential files. They can now be used to request that the Fortran Runtime Library buffer all input records from such files, regardless of the size of the records in the file. Using these mechanisms returns the READing of such records to the pre-13.0 behavior. 3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated Static analysis is deprecated. It may be removed in a future major release. If you have concerns or feedback, please comment. 3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers  FOR_IFCORE_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran run-time library (ifcore).  FOR_IFPORT_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran portability library (ifport). 3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options Please refer to the compiler documentation for details. 3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*  /assume:[no]std_value  /assume:ieee_fpe_flags  /fast  /Qeliminate-unused-debug-types[-]  /Qinit:snan Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 19  /Qopt-dynamic-align[-]  /Qopt-report  /Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe For a list of deprecated compiler options, see the Compiler Options section of the documentation. 3.3.1.1 /assume:std_value is now the default As of compiler version 15.0, the Fortran standard VALUE attribute, (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE), when specified for a dummy argument of a non-interoperable procedure (a procedure whose declaration does not include the BIND(C) language binding attribute), applies Fortran standard semantics by default. The standard specifies that for a non-interoperable procedure, VALUE causes a temporary, redefinable copy of the actual argument to be passed using the default passing mechanism. In earlier compiler versions, VALUE always caused the actual argument to be passed by value. Compiler version 14.0 introduced /assume:std_value to specify the standard-conforming semantics and this was enabled if /standard-semantics was specified. 3.3.1.2 /assume:ieee_fpe_flags enabled with /standard-semantics and /fp:strict or /fp:except As of compiler version 15.0, if /standard-semantics and one of /fp:strict or /fp:except is specified, /assume:ieee_fpe_flags is also enabled. This option causes the state of floating point exceptions to be saved on entry to a procedure and restored on exit. The save and restore operation has a significant performance penalty so it should be used only by applications that manipulate or query the floating point exception environment. Note that Intel Fortran requires that you specify /fp:strict if you are using the Fortran standard intrinsic modules IEEE_ARITHMETIC, IEEE_EXCEPTIONS and/or IEEE_FEATURES. 3.3.1.3 Change to /fast option /fp:fast=2 has been added to the /fast option. This option makes it easier to tune for performance. 3.3.1.4 New /Qinit:snan Compiler Option A new command line option to help find a class of uninitialized variables at run-time by initializing floating-point variables to signaling NaNs which can then be trapped if their values are fetched before being set. 3.3.1.5 New /Qopt-dynamic-align[-] Compiler Option When this option is set the compiler implements conditional optimizations based on dynamic alignment of the input data for maximum performance of vectorized code especially for long trip count loops. This, however, may result in different bitwise results for aligned and unaligned data with the same values. When unset the compiler will not perform these optimizations providing bitwise reproducibility. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 20 3.3.1.6 New Optimization Report interface, report structure, and options in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition The four kinds of optimization reports (/Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qparreport) have been consolidated under one /Qopt-report interface in this version of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition. This consolidated optimization report has been rewritten to improve the presentation, content, and precision of the information provided so that users better understand what optimizations were performed by the compiler and how they may be tuned to yield the best performance. The output of this report no longer defaults to stderr due to issues with parallel builds. Instead, by default an output file (extension .optrpt) containing the report for each corresponding source file is created in the target directory of the compilation process (i.e. the same directory where object files would be generated). /Qopt-report-file (for example: /Qopt-report-file:stderr) can be used to change this behavior. The /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report options have been deprecated, but they remain and map to corresponding values of the /Qopt-report option. However, the report information and formatting, and the default to reporting to a file, will follow the new opt-report model. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation for full details. See the Intel Compiler User’s Guide under Compiler Reference->Compiler Option Categories and Descriptions->Optimization Report Options. 3.3.1.7 New mode for PGO instrumentation /Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe This change adds a mode to the PGO instrumentation that allows for the collection of PGO data on applications that use a high level of parallelism, such as from OpenMP 3.1. This functionality improves PGO usage for the IA-32 and Intel® 64 architectures, as well as enables the support of PGO with the native Intel® MIC Architecture programming model. 3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes 3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0) New Fortran projects, created after Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*has been installed, have the project properties set so that the DLL form of the runtime libraries is used. This is consistent with Microsoft Visual C++, but is a change from previous versions of Intel® Visual Fortran. If you wish to use the static libraries, you can change the project property Fortran > Libraries > Use Runtime Library. Note that the OpenMP* library, libiomp5md.dll, is provided in DLL form only and will be used no matter which setting you select, should your application use OpenMP. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 21 3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1) An enhancement to the Visual Studio build environment has been added which allows for parallel builds of sources without unresolved dependencies on multicore or multiprocessor systems. This can reduce the total time needed to build larger projects. To enable this, open the project property page Fortran > General and set the property “Multiprocessor compilation” to Yes. 3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE The Visual Studio IDE now provides a “tree-view” for easy module/procedure navigation (similar to the Solution explorer view). For more information, see the compiler documentation. 3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE Optimization Diagnostic Level, Optimization Diagnostic Phase, Vectorizer Diagnostic Level, OpenMP Diagnostic Level, Auto-Parallelizer diagnostic Level project properties’ values (Configuration Properties->Fortran->Diagnostics) were updated in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. If you are using these properties, you may need to update their values, using project property pages dialog in Visual Studio. If you change your settings to use older compiler, you may need to update these properties’ values again. 3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio* The online help format is now browser-based. When you view Intel documentation from the Microsoft Visual Studio Help menu, or when you view context-sensitive help using F1 or a help button in a dialog box or other GUI element, your default browser shows the corresponding help topic. You may encounter some minor functionality issues depending on your default browser. Known issues include:  When Set Help Preference is set to Launch in Browser and you hit F1 in Tools>Options>F# Tools or Tools>Options>Intellitrace, the browser appears twice.  Chrome*: When arriving at a topic from Search or Index, the Table of Contents (TOC) does not sync, nor does the Sync TOC link work.  Firefox*: The TOC loses context easily. Search is case sensitive  Safari*: Response on Windows is slow. 3.5 Known Issues 3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters The filename in compiler diagnostics for filenames containing Japanese characters may be displayed incorrectly when compiled within a Windows command shell using the native Intel® 64 architecture compiler. It is not a problem when using Visual Studio or when using the Intel® 64 architecture cross-compiler or IA-32 architecture compiler. 3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed On Microsoft Windows* systems with only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013* installed debugging of Fortran applications might fail. Some symptoms might be failing watches (expression evaluations) or conditional breakpoints. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 22 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* provides a debugger extension called Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) to enable debugging of Fortran applications. For some FEE functionality the Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* libraries are required. One solution is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* in addition to Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013*. An alternative is to install the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package (x86) found here. 3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work To enable debugging Fortran code called from a .NET managed code application in Visual Studio 2012 or later, unset the following configuration: Menu Tools ->Options, under section Debugging->General, clear the Managed C++ Compatibility Mode check box For any managed code application, one must also check the project property Debug > Enable unmanaged code debugging. 3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010 projects A Microsoft Windows Update for .NET Framework 4.5.1, or installing Visual Studio 2012, installs a new version of a DLL used in the linking process, causing the original Visual Studio 2010 linker to give the error “LNK1123: failure during conversion to COFF: file invalid or corrupt”. The fix for this issue is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Service Pack 1* which can be found here. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 23 3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet fully implemented The following uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types (PDTs) are not yet fully implemented:  PDT parameter constants with length type parameters  %RE and %IM are not yet implemented  There is a syntax error in the FEE displaying extended types that are parameterized 3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 brings several changes that primarily affect building of mixedlanguage applications where the main program is in C or C++. These changes were carried forward into Visual Studio 2012/ 2013. 3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries In previous releases, one used the Tools > Options > Projects and Solutions > VC++ Directories dialog to make the Intel Fortran LIB folder available to C/C++ projects. In Visual Studio 2010, the method of doing this is very different. 1. In Visual Studio, with a solution open that contains a C++ project, select View > Property Manager. If you do not see Property Manager under the View menu, you will find it under View > Additional Windows. The Property Manager window will appear. Note that this is not Properties Window or Properties Pages. 2. Click on the triangles or + signs to expand the property tree under the Debug|Win32 configuration 3. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.Win32.user 4. Select VC++ Directories 5. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories" 6. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select 7. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert 8. In the new field that appears, type: $(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\ia32 9. Click OK, OK 10. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All If you will be building Intel® 64 (x64) configurations: 1. Back in the Property Manager, expand the Debug|x64 configuration 2. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user 3. Select VC++ Directories 4. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories" 5. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select 6. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 24 7. In the new field that appears, type: $(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\intel64 8. Click OK, OK 9. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All Click on the Solution Explorer tab, or press Ctrl-Alt-L, to make it visible again. If you do not see the Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user property page listed for the x64 configuration, right click on Debug|x64 and select Add Existing property Sheet. Browse to the location which contains the MsBuild 4.0 property pages. On Windows XP, this is typically: C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\M icrosoft\MSBuild\v4.0 On Windows 7 and Windows 8, it is typically: C:\Users\\AppData\Local\Microsoft\MSBuild\v4.0 You may need to enable viewing of hidden files and folders to see these paths. Select Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user.props and click Open. Now follow the steps above. 3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies If you are converting a project from an earlier version of Visual Studio and had established Project Dependencies, these are converted to References by Visual Studio 2010/2012/2013. A Fortran project that is referenced by a C/C++ project will prevent the C/C++ project from building, with an MSB4075 error. To solve this: 1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select References. 2. If any Fortran project is shown as a reference, click Remove Reference. Repeat this for all Fortran projects shown as a reference. Click OK. 3. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project Now you have to reestablish project dependencies. 1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select Project Dependencies. (For Visual Studio 2013 select Build Dependencies > Project Dependencies). 2. Check the box for each project that is a dependent of this project. 3. Click OK. 4. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project that has dependencies. Unlike earlier versions of Visual Studio, Visual Studio 2010/2012 does not automatically link in the output library of dependent projects, so you will need to add those libraries explicitly to the parent project under Linker > Additional Dependencies. You can use the Visual Studio macros $(ConfigurationName) and $(PlatformName) as required to qualify the path. For example: ..\FLIB\$(ConfigurationName)\FLIB.lib Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 25 Where $(ConfigurationName) will expand to Release or Debug, as appropriate. Similarly, $(PlatformName) will expand to Win32 or x64 as appropriate. 3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server* 2012 and Windows Server* 2008 If on Windows Server 2012* and Windows Server* 2008 you find that you cannot display help or documentation from within Visual Studio 2012, correcting a security setting for Microsoft Internet Explorer* usually corrects the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, change the settings for Internet Zone to allow “MIME Sniffing” and “Active Scripting”. 3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary The Intel Fortran Compiler supports all features from the Fortran 2003 standard. The Intel® Fortran Compiler also supports many features from the Fortran 2008 standard. Additional features will be supported in future releases. Fortran 2008 features supported by the current version include:  Maximum array rank has been raised to 31 dimensions (Fortran 2008 specifies 15)  Coarrays o CODIMENSION attribute o SYNC ALL statement o SYNC IMAGES statement o SYNC MEMORY statement o CRITICAL and END CRITICAL statements o LOCK and UNLOCK statements o ERROR STOP statement o ALLOCATE and DEALLOCATE may specify coarrays o Intrinsic procedures ATOMIC_DEFINE, ATOMIC_REF, IMAGE_INDEX, LCOBOUND, NUM_IMAGES, THIS_IMAGE, UCOBOUND  CONTIGUOUS attribute  MOLD keyword in ALLOCATE  DO CONCURRENT  NEWUNIT keyword in OPEN  G0 and G0.d format edit descriptor  Unlimited format item repeat count specifier  A CONTAINS section may be empty  Intrinsic procedures BESSEL_J0, BESSEL_J1, BESSEL_JN, BESSEL_YN, BGE, BGT, BLE, BLT, DSHIFTL, DSHIFTR, ERF, ERFC, ERFC_SCALED, GAMMA, HYPOT, IALL, IANY, IPARITY, IS_CONTIGUOUS, LEADZ, LOG_GAMMA, MASKL, MASKR, MERGE_BITS, NORM2, PARITY, POPCNT, POPPAR, SHIFTA, SHIFTL, SHIFTR, STORAGE_SIZE, TRAILZ,  Additions to intrinsic module ISO_FORTRAN_ENV: ATOMIC_INT_KIND, ATOMIC_LOGICAL_KIND, CHARACTER_KINDS, INTEGER_KINDS, INT8, INT16, INT32, INT64, LOCK_TYPE, LOGICAL_KINDS, REAL_KINDS, REAL32, REAL64, REAL128, STAT_LOCKED, STAT_LOCKED_OTHER_IMAGE, STAT_UNLOCKED Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 26  An OPTIONAL dummy argument that does not have the ALLOCATABLE or POINTER attribute, and which corresponds to an actual argument that: has the ALLOCATABLE attribute and is not allocated, or has the POINTER attribute and is disassociated, or is a reference to the NULL() intrinsic function, is considered not present  A dummy argument that is a procedure pointer may be associated with an actual argument that is a valid target for the dummy pointer, or is a reference to the intrinsic function NULL. If the actual argument is not a pointer, the dummy argument shall have the INTENT(IN) attribute.  BLOCK construct  intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE 4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) This section summarizes new features and changes, usage and known issues related to the Intel® Debugger Extension. This debugger extension only supports code targeting Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture). 4.1 Features • Support for both native coprocessor applications and host applications with offload extensions • Debug multiple coprocessor cards at the same time (with offload extension) 4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension The Intel® Debugger Extension is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE. It transparently enables debugging of projects defined by that IDE. Applications for Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessors can be either loaded and executed or attached to. Instructions on how to use Intel® Debugger Extension can be found in the documentation 4.3 Documentation The full documentation for the Intel® Debugger Extension can be found here: \Documentation\en_US|ja_JP]\debugger\  mic\gdb_quickstart_win.pdf 4.4 Known Issues  Offload debugging is only supported in Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* and Microsoft Visual Studio 2013*.  Disassembly window cannot be scrolled outside of 1024 bytes from the starting address within an offload section.  Handling of exceptions from the Intel® MIC Architecture application is not supported.  Changing breakpoints while the application is running does not work. The changes will appear to be in effect but they are not applied. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 27  Starting an Intel® MIC Architecture native application is not supported. You can attach to a currently running application, though.  The Thread Window in Microsoft Visual Studio* offers context menu actions to Freeze, Thaw and Rename threads. These context menu actions are not functional when the thread is on a coprocessor.  Setting a breakpoint right before an offload section sets a breakpoint at the first statement of the offload section. This only is true if there is no statement for the host between set breakpoint and offload section. This is normal Microsoft Visual Studio* breakpoint behavior but might become more visible with interweaved code from host and coprocessor. The superfluous breakpoint for the offload section can be manually disabled (or removed) if desired.  Only Intel® 64 applications containing offload sections can be debugged with the Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture.  Stepping out of an offload section does not step back into the host code. It rather continues execution without stopping (unless another event occurs). This is intended behavior.  The functionality “Set Next Statement” is not working within an offload section.  If breakpoints have been set for an offload section in a project already, starting the debugger might show bound breakpoints without addresses. Those do not have an impact on functionality.  For offload sections, using breakpoints with the following conditions of hit counts do not work: “break when the hit count is equal to” and “break when the hit count is a multiple of”.  The following options in the Disassembly window do not work within offload sections: “Show Line Numbers”, “Show Symbol Names” and “Show Source Code”  Evaluating variables declared outside the offload section shows wrong values.  Please consult the Output (Debug) window for detailed reporting. It will name unimplemented features (see above) or provide additional information required to configuration problems in a debugging session. You can open the window in Microsoft Visual Studio* via menu Debug->Windows->Output.  When debugging an offload enabled application, the debugger does not evaluate expressions that contain assignments which read memory locations before writing to them (e.g. x = x + 1). Please do not use such assignments when evaluating expressions (e.g. Immediate Window, Watch Window, …)  Using conditional breakpoints for offload sections might stall the debugger. If a conditional breakpoint is created within an offload section, the debugger might hang when hitting it and evaluating the condition. This is currently analyzed and will be fixed with a future version of the product.  Depending on the debugger extensions provided by Intel the behavior (e.g. run control) and output (e.g. disassembly) could differ to what is known from the Microsoft Visual Studio debugger. This is because of different debugging technologies used underneath. It is intended and does not have any disproportional impact on debugging experience. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 28 5 Intel® Math Kernel Library This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about this version of the Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL). Bug fixes can be found here. 5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2  Intel MKL now provides optimizations for all Intel® Atom™ processors that support Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.1 (Intel® SSE4.1) and Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.2 (Intel® SSE4.2) instruction sets  Introduced support for Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 512 (Intel® AVX-512) instruction set with limited optimizations in BLAS, DFT and VML  Introduced Verbose support for BLAS and LAPACK domains, which enables users to capture the input parameters to Intel MKL function calls  Introduced support for Intel® MPI Library 5.0  Introduced the Intel Math Kernel Library Cookbook (http://software.intel.com/enus/mkl_cookbook) , a new document that describes how to use Intel MKL routines to solve certain complex problems  Introduced the MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ compilation feature that provides ?GEMM small matrix performance improvements for all processors (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details)  Added the ability to link a Single Dynamic Library (mkl_rt) on Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)  Added a customizable error handler. See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference Manual description of mkl_set_exit_handler() for further details  Extended the Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor Automatic Offload feature with a resource sharing mechanism.See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference Manual for the description of mkl_mic_set_resource_limit() function and the MKL_MIC_RESOURCE_LIMIT environment variable for further details  Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters: o Introduced Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters, a distributed memory version of Intel MKL PARDISO direct sparse solver o Improved performance of the matrix gather step for distributed matrices o Enabled reuse of reordering information on multiple factorization steps o Added distributed CSR format, support of distributed matrices, RHS, and distributed solutions o Added support of solving of systems with multiple right hand sides o Added cluster support of factorization and solving steps o Added support for pure MPI mode and support for single OpenMP thread in hybrid configurations  BLAS: o Improved threaded performance of ?GEMM for all 64-bit architectures supporting Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 2 (Intel® AVX2) Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 29 o Optimized ?GEMM, ?TRSM, DTRMM for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance of ?GEMM for outer product [large m, large n, small k] and tall skinny matrices [large m, medium n, small k] on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of ?TRSM and ?SYMM in Automatic Offload mode on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of Level 3 BLAS functions for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX2 o Improved ?GEMM performance on small matrices for all processors when MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ is defined during compilation (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User’s Guide for more details ) o Improved performance of DGER and DGEMM for the beta=1, k=1 case for 64-bit processors supporting Intel SSE4.2, Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions (Intel® AVX), and Intel AVX2 instruction sets o Optimized (D/Z)AXPY for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Optimized ?COPY for Intel AVX2 and AVX512 instruction sets o Optimized DGEMV for Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance of SSYR2K for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 o Improved threaded performance of ?AXPBY for all Intel processors o Improved DTRMM performance for the side=R, uplo={U,L}, transa=N, diag={N,U} cases for Intel AVX-512  LINPACK: o Improved performance of matrix generation in the heterogeneous Intel® Optimized MP LINPACK Benchmark for Clusters o Intel MIC Architecture offload option of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK Benchmark for Clusters package now supports Intel AVX2 hosts o Improved performance of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK for Clusters package for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX2  LAPACK: o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)RDB o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)EV when eigenvectors are needed o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?GELQF,?GELS and ?GELSS for underdetermined case (M less than N) o Improved performance of ?GEHRD,?GEEV and ?GEES o Improved performance of NaN checkers in LAPACKE interfaces o Improved performance of ?GELSX, ?GGSVP Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 30 o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?GETRF o Improved performance of (S/D)GE(SVD/SDD) when M>=N and singular vectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?POTRF UPLO=U in Automatic Offload mode on Intel MIC Architecture o Added Automatic Offload for ?SYRDB on Intel MIC Architecture, which speeds up ?SY(EV/EVD/EVR) when eigenvectors are not needed  PBLAS and ScaLAPACK: o Enabled Automatic Offload in P?GEMM routines for large distribution blocking factors  Sparse BLAS: o Optimized SpMV kernels for Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Added release example for diagonal format use in Sparse BLAS o Improved Sparse BLAS level 2 and 3 performance for systems supporting Intel SSE4.2, Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 instruction sets  Intel MKL PARDISO: o Added the ability to store Intel MKL PARDISO handle to the disk for future use at any solver stage o Added pivot control support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core mode o Added diagonal extraction support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core mode o Added example demonstrating use of Intel MKL PARDISO as iterative solver for non-linear systems o Added capability to free memory taken by original matrix after factorization stage if iterative refinement is disabled o Improved memory estimation of out-of-core (OOC) portion size for reordering algorithm leading to improved factorization-solve performance in OOC mode o Improved message output from Intel MKL PARDISO o Added support of zero pivot during factorization for structurally symmetric cases  Poisson library: o Added example demonstrating use of the Intel MKL Poisson library as a preconditioner for linear systems solves  Extended Eigensolver: o Improved message output o Improved examples o Added input and output iparm parameters in predefined interfaces for solving sparse problems Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 31  FFT: o Optimized FFTs for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance for non-power-of-2 length on Intel® MIC Architecture  VML: Added v[d|s]Frac function computing fractional part for each vector element  VSL RNG: o Added support of ntrial=0 in Binomial Random Number Generator o Improved performance of MRG32K3A and MT2203 BRNGs on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of MT2203 BRNG on CPUs supporting Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 instruction sets  VSL Summary Statistics: o Added support for group/pooled mean estimates (VSL_SS_GROUP_MEAN/VSL_SS_POOLED_MEAN)  Data Fitting: Fixed incorrect behavior of the natural cubic spline construction function when number of breakpoints is 2 or 3  Introduced an Intel MKL mode that ignores all settings specified by Intel MKL environment variables o User can set up the mode by calling mkl_set_env_mode() routine which directs Intel MKL to ignore all environment settings specific to Intel MKL so that all Intel MKL related environment variables such as MKL_NUM_THREADS, MKL_DYNAMIC, MKL_MIC_ENABLE and others are ignored; users can instead set needed parameters via Intel MKL service routines such as mkl_set_num_threads() and mkl_mic_enable() 5.2 Notes  Intel MKL now provides a choice of components to install. Components necessary for PGI compiler, Compaq Visual Fortran Compiler, SP2DP interface, BLAS95 and LAPACK95 interfaces, Cluster support (ScaLAPACK and Cluster DFT) and Intel MIC Architecture support are not installed unless explicitly selected during installation  Unaligned CNR is not available for MKL Cluster components (ScaLAPACK and Cluster DFT)  Examples for using Intel MKL with BOOST/uBLAS and Java have been removed from the product distribution and placed in the following articles: o How to use Intel® MKL with Java* o How to use BOOST* uBLAS with Intel® MKL  API symbols, order of arguments and link line have changed since Intel MKL 11.2 Beta Update 2. (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details)  Important deprecations are listed in Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL) 11.2 Deprecations Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 32 5.3 Known Issues  Automatic Offload on Windows with large matrices may cause data corruption or crash. There is a problem in COI: HSD4868293 (critical). COI Cannot allocate a buffer with >= 2**32 bytes and 2M pages on Windows Workaround: Set MKL_MIC_MAX_MEMORY=3G. Note: This issue is resolved in Intel® MPSS 3.3 A full list of the known limitations can be found in the Intel® MKL Article List at Intel® Developer Zone 5.4 Attributions As referenced in the End User License Agreement, attribution requires, at a minimum, prominently displaying the full Intel product name (e.g. "Intel® Math Kernel Library") and providing a link/URL to the Intel® MKL homepage (www.intel.com/software/products/mkl) in both the product documentation and website. The original versions of the BLAS from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/blas/index.html. The original versions of LAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/lapack/index.html. The authors of LAPACK are E. Anderson, Z. Bai, C. Bischof, S. Blackford, J. Demmel, J. Dongarra, J. Du Croz, A. Greenbaum, S. Hammarling, A. McKenney, and D. Sorensen. Our FORTRAN 90/95 interfaces to LAPACK are similar to those in the LAPACK95 package at http://www.netlib.org/lapack95/index.html. All interfaces are provided for pure procedures. The original versions of ScaLAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/scalapack/index.html. The authors of ScaLAPACK are L. S. Blackford, J. Choi, A. Cleary, E. D'Azevedo, J. Demmel, I. Dhillon, J. Dongarra, S. Hammarling, G. Henry, A. Petitet, K. Stanley, D. Walker, and R. C. Whaley. PARDISO in Intel® MKL is compliant with the 3.2 release of PARDISO that is freely distributed by the University of Basel. It can be obtained at http://www.pardiso-project.org. Some FFT functions in this release of Intel® MKL have been generated by the SPIRAL software generation system (http://www.spiral.net/) under license from Carnegie Mellon University. The Authors of SPIRAL are Markus Puschel, Jose Moura, Jeremy Johnson, David Padua, Manuela Veloso, Bryan Singer, Jianxin Xiong, Franz Franchetti, Aca Gacic, Yevgen Voronenko, Kang Chen, Robert W. Johnson, and Nick Rizzolo. The Intel® MKL Extended Eigensolver functionality is based on the Feast Eigenvalue Solver 2.0 (http://www.ecs.umass.edu/~polizzi/feast/) 6 Disclaimer and Legal Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL(R) PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 33 ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED NOR INTENDED FOR ANY APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information. The products described in this document may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or go to: http://www.intel.com/design/literature.htm Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor family, not across different processor families. Go to: http://www.intel.com/products/processor_number/ for details. The Visual Intel® Fortran Compiler and Intel® Math Kernel Library are provided under Intel Corporation’s End User License Agreement (EULA). The GNU* Project Debugger, GDB is provided under the General GNU Public License, GPL V3. Celeron, Centrino, Intel, Intel logo, Intel386, Intel486, Intel Atom, Intel Core, Itanium, MMX, Pentium, VTune, Xeon and Xeon Phi are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 34 Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Product Brief Intel® High-Performance SATA Solid-State Drive Product Line NAND Storage Solutions from Intel Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives Extreme Performance and Reliability for Servers, Storage, and Workstations The Intel® Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives (SSDs) offers outstanding performance and reliability for servers, storage, and high-end workstations. Reduce Your Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) Enterprise applications place a premium on performance, reliability, power consumption, and space. Unlike traditional hard disk drives, Intel® Solid-State Drives have no moving parts, resulting in a quiet, cool storage solution that also offers significantly higher performance than traditional server drives. Imagine replacing up to 50 high-RPM hard disk drives with one Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive in your servers—handling the same server workload in less space, with no cooling requirements and lower power consumption. That space and power savings, for the same server workload, will translate into a tangible reduction in your TCO. Better by Design Drawing from decades of memory engineering experience, the Intel X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive is designed to deliver outstanding performance and reliability, featuring the latest generation native SATA interface with an advanced architecture employing 10 parallel NAND Flash channels equipped with single-level cell NAND Flash memory for even greater overall performance and reliability. With powerful Native Command Queuing to enable up to 32 concurrent operations, these Intel SSDs deliver higher input/output per second and throughput performance than other SSDs on the market today—and drastically outperform traditional hard disk drives. These Intel drives also feature low write amplification and a unique wear-leveling design for higher reliability, meaning Intel drives not only perform better—they last longer. Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive 1. Active power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes with queue depth 1. INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life-saving, or lifesustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Copyright © 2008 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Printed in the United States. 0808/SD/HBD/PDF 319660-001US www.intel.com For more information, visit www.intel.com/go/ssd. Technical Specifications Model Name Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive Capacity 32 GB and 64 GB NAND Flash Components Intel® Single-Level Cell (SLC) NAND Flash Memory 10 Parallel Channel Architecture with 50nm SLC ONFI 1.0 NAND Bandwidth Sustained sequential read: up to 250 MB/s Sustained sequential write: up to 170 MB/s Read Latency 75 microseconds I/O Per Second (IOPS) Random 4 KB reads: >35,000 IOPS Random 4 KB writes: >3,300 IOPS Interface SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3.0 Gb/s Form Factor 2.5¨ industry standard hard drive form factor Compatibility SATA revision 2.6 compliant. Compatible with SATA 3 Gb/s with Native Command Queuing and SATA 1.5 Gb/s interface rates Life Expectancy 2 million hours Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF) Power Consumption Active: 2.4 W typical (server workload1 Order Number: 319984-003US January 2009 Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive SSDSA2SH032G1, SSDSA2SH064G1 Product Manual „ Available in 2.5” Form Factor „ Capacity: 32 GB, 64 GB „ Uses Intel NAND flash memory Single Level Cell (SLC) components „ Bandwidth Performance Specifications — Sustained Sequential Read: up to 250 MB/s — Sustained Sequential Write: up to 170 MB/s „ Read and Write IOPS Specifications (IOmeter Queue Depth 32) — Random 4 KB Reads: 35 K IOPS — Random 4 KB Writes: 3.3 K IOPS „ Compatibility — Intel® Matrix Storage Manager — SATA Revision 2.6 compliant, compatible with SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3 Gb/s interface rates — ATA/ATAPI-7 Compliant — SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set — Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command „ Compliance — UL* — CE* — C-Tick* — BSMI* — MIC* — Microsoft* WHQL — RoHS* „ Power Management — 5 V SATA Supply Rail — Supports ATA Power Management and Advanced Power Management Specifications — SATA Interface Power Management — OS-Aware Hot Plug/Removal „ Power Specifications — Active: 2.4/2.6 W (32 GB/64 GB) TYP — Idle: .060 W TYP „ Temperature — Operating: 0o C to 70o C — Non-Operating: -55o C to 95o C „ Reliability — Bit Error Rate (BER): 1 sector per 1015 bits read — Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) 2,000,000 Hours — Write Endurance: 1 petabyte of random writes „ Shock — Operating and Non-operating: 1,000G/0.5 msec „ Vibration — Operating: 2.17 G (7-800 Hz) — Non-operating 3.13 G (10-500 Hz) „ Weight: — 80 +/- 2 grams (32 GB) — 90 +/- 2 grams (64 GB) (2.5” 7 mm Form Factors) Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 2 Order Number: 319984-003US Legal Lines and Disclaimers Ordering Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Intel Corporation may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights that relate to the presented subject matter. The furnishing of documents and other materials and information does not provide any license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any such patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written consent of Intel Corporation. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725 or by visiting Intel's website at http://www.intel.com. Intel and Intel logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.Copyright © 2009, Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Decoder Intel High Performance Solid State Drive Ordering Information Part Number MM # Device Nomenclature Packaging SSDSA2SH032G101 896432 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit SSDSA2SH032G1C5 900342 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 unit SSDSA2SH032G1 896474 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 unit SSDSA2SH064G101 899386 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit SSDSA2SH064G1C5 901316 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 units SSDSA2SH064G1 899387 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 units Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US Intel Confidential 3 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Contents 1.0 Introduction ..............................................................................................................5 1.1 Product Overview ................................................................................................5 1.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................6 1.3 Architecture........................................................................................................6 2.0 Certifications and Compliance ...................................................................................7 3.0 Product Specifications ...............................................................................................7 3.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................7 3.2 Performance .......................................................................................................7 3.3 Electrical Characteristics.......................................................................................8 3.3.1 Supply Voltage.........................................................................................8 3.3.2 Power Consumption ..................................................................................8 3.4 Environmental Conditions .....................................................................................9 3.4.1 Temperature............................................................................................9 3.4.2 Altitude...................................................................................................9 3.4.3 Shock and Vibration..................................................................................9 3.4.4 Acoustics .............................................................................................. 10 3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity....................................................................... 10 3.5 Reliability ......................................................................................................... 10 3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors .................................................................... 11 3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure ..................................................................... 11 3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles ............................................................................... 11 3.5.4 Write Endurance .................................................................................... 11 4.0 Mechanical Information........................................................................................... 12 5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 13 5.1 Pin Locations .................................................................................................... 13 5.2 Signal Description Table ..................................................................................... 13 5.3 Hot Plug Support ............................................................................................... 14 6.0 Command Sets ........................................................................................................ 15 6.1 ATA Commands ................................................................................................ 15 6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set .......................................................... 15 6.1.2 Power Management Command Set............................................................ 18 6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set....................................................................... 18 6.1.4 SMART Command Set ............................................................................. 19 6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set ........................................................... 19 6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set .................................................................. 19 6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set .............................................. 19 6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set .......................................................... 20 6.2 SATA Commands............................................................................................... 20 6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation................................................................. 20 6.2.2 Native Command Queuing ....................................................................... 20 7.0 References .............................................................................................................. 21 8.0 Glossary .................................................................................................................. 22 9.0 Revision History ...................................................................................................... 23 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 4 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 5 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 1.0 Introduction The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive (SSD) delivers ultimate performance in an industry standard 2.5” form factor while simultaneously improving system responsiveness over standard rotating media or hard disk drives (HDD) in some of the most demanding applications. By combining Intel’s leading NAND flash memory technology with our innovative controller, Intel delivers an SSD for Native Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) hard disk drive drop-in replacement with enhanced performance, reliability, ruggedness and power savings. Since there are no rotating platters, moving heads, fragile actuaters, unnecessary spinup time or positional seek time that can significantly slow down the storage subsystem, the Intel X25-E SATA SSD enables fast read/write access times and significant I/O, as well as performance improvement when compared to rotating media. This document describes the specifications of the Intel X25-E SATA SSD in the 2.5” form factor. 1.1 Product Overview The Intel X25-E SATA SSD primarily targets high-end workstations, desktops, gaming and various server/storage applications. Key attributes include extremely high performance, low power, enhanced reliability and improved ruggedness as compared to standard 10,000 and 15,000 RPM SATA hard drives. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD is available in an industry standard 2.5” form factor that is electronically, mechanically, and software compatible with existing SATA and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) slots and cables. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 6 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 1.2 Block Diagram 1.3 Architecture The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drives utilize a cost effective System on a Chip (SOC) design to manage a full SATA 3 Gb/s bandwidth with the host while managing multiple flash memory devices on multiple channels internally. Figure 1. Block Diagram Intel System On A Chip (SOC) SATA Interface Flash Memory Channel 0 Flash Memory Channel ... Flash Memory Channel n NAND Flash Memory NAND Flash Memory NAND Flash Memory Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 7 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 2.0 Certifications and Compliance 3.0 Product Specifications 3.1 Capacity Notes: 1. 1 GB = 1,000,000,000 Byte and not all of the memory can be used for data storage. 2. 1 Sector = 512 Byte. 3.2 Performance Notes: 1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32. 2. Write Cache enabled. Table 1. Device Certifications Certification/Compliance Description CE Compliant Indicate conformity with the essential health and safety requirements set out in European Directives Low Voltage Directive and EMC directive. UL Certified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Component Recognition UL60950-1. C-Tick Compliant Compliance with EN 55022:2006 and the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework requirements of the Australian Communication Authority (ACA). BSMI Compliant Compliance to the Taiwan EMC standard “Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment, CNS 13438 Class B.” MIC Certified Compliance with paragraph 1 of Article 11 of the Electromagnetic Compatibility control Regulation and meet the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework requirements of the Radio Research Laboratory (RRL) Ministry of Information and Communication Republic of Korea. Microsoft WHQL Certified Microsoft Windows Hardware Quality Labs RoHS Compliant Restriction of Hazardous Substance Directive Table 2. User Addressable Sectors Unformatted Capacity Total User Addressable Sectors in LBA Mode 32 GB 62,500,000 64 GB 125,045,424 Table 3. Maximum Sustained Read and Write Bandwidth Access Type MB/s Sequential Read up to 250 Sequential Write up to 170 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 8 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32. 2. Write Cache enabled. 3. Random IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full drive (all LBAs have valid content). Notes: 1. Write Cache enabled. 2. Device measured using IOmeter*. 3. Power On to Ready (POR) time assumes proper shutdown (power removal preceded by STANDBY command). 4. Read/Write latency measured on 4 k transfers. 5. Queue depth set to 1. 6. Sequential IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full drive (all LBAs have valid content). 3.3 Electrical Characteristics 3.3.1 Supply Voltage 3.3.2 Power Consumption Table 4. Random Read and Write Input/Output Operations per Second (IOPS) Access Type IOPS 4K Read 35,000 4K Write 3,300 Table 5. Latency Specifications Type Average Latency Read 75 µs (TYP) Write 85 µs (TYP) Power On to Ready 1 s Table 6. Operating Voltage Description Min Max Unit Operating Voltage for 5 V (+/- 5%) 4.75 5.25 V Table 7. Typical Power Consumption Mode Typ Unit Active 2.4 (32 GB) 2.6 (64 GB) W Idle 0.06 W Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 9 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Drive will transition to idle power level once idle for 25 ms whether or not sleep or standby command is received. Standby power levels assume DIPM enabled. Active power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes with queue depth 1. 3.4 Environmental Conditions 3.4.1 Temperature Note: Measured without condensation. 3.4.2 Altitude The drive is not sensitive to changes in altitude because it has no moving parts. Drive tested between -1K and 40K feet. 3.4.3 Shock and Vibration Notes: 1. Shock specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis. 2. Vibration specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis. 3. Sine wave sweeping 1 oct/min. Table 8. Temperature Related Specifications Mode Min Typ Max Unit Ambient Temperature Operating 0 70 oC Non-Operating -55 95 oC Temperature Gradient Operating 20 oC/hr * Non-Operating 30 oC/hr * Humidity Operating 5 95 % Non-Operating 5 95 % Table 9. Shock and Vibration Specifications Mode Timing Max Unit Shock1 Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G Non-Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G Vibration2 Operating 2.17 G 7-800 Hz Non-Operating 3.13 G 10-500 Hz3 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 10 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3.4.4 Acoustics The drive has no moving or noise-emitting parts; therefore, it produces negligible sound (0 dB) in all modes of operation. 3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity Electromagnetic Immunity tests assume the SSD is properly installed in the representative host system. The drive will operate properly without errors or degradation in performance when subjected to radio frequency (RF) environments defined in the following table: Notes: 1. Performance Criteria A = The device shall continue to operate as intended, i.e., normal unit operation with no degradation of performance. 2. Performance Criteria B = The device shall continue to operate as intended after completion of the test. However, during the test, some degradation of performance is allowed as long as there is no data loss operator intervention to restore device function. 3. Performance Criteria C = temporary loss of function is allowed. Operator intervention is acceptable to restore device function. 4. Electrostatic Discharge applied to drive enclosure. 3.5 Reliability Table 10. Electromagnetic Immunity Specifications Test Description Performance Criteria Reference Standard Electrostatic discharge Contact, HCP, VCP: ±8 kV; Air: ± 15 kV B EN 61000-4-2: 1995 Radiated RF immunity 80 to 1,000 MHz, 3 V/m, 80% AM with 1 kHz sine 900 MHz, 3 V/m, 50% pulse modulation at 200 Hz A EN 61000-4-3: 1996 ENV 50204: 1995 Electrical fast transient ± 1 kV on AC mains, ± 0.5 kV on external I/O B EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Surge immunity ± 1 kV differential, ± 2 kV common, AC mains B EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Conducted RF immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 3 Vrms, 80% AM with 1 kHz sine A EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Voltage dips, interrupts 0% open, 5 seconds 0% short, 5 seconds 40%, 0.10 seconds 70%, 0.01 seconds C C C B EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Table 11. Reliability Specifications Parameter Value Nonrecoverable read errors (BER) 1 sector in 1015 bits read, max Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) 2,000,000 hours Power On/Off Cycles 50,000 cycles Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 11 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors The nonrecoverable read error rate will not exceed one sector in the specified number of bits read. In the extremely unlikely event of a nonrecoverable read error, the drive will report it as a read failure to the host; the sector in error is considered corrupt and is not returned to the host. 3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) is calculated based on a Part Stress Analysis. It assumes nominal voltage, with all other parameters within specified range. 3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles Defined as power being removed from the drive, and then restored. Note that host systems and drive enclosures may remove power from the drive for reasons other than a system shutdown. 3.5.4 Write Endurance The drive supports 1 petabyte of lifetime random writes. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 12 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 4.0 Mechanical Information Note: All dimensions are in millimeters. Figure 2. Dimensions Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 13 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions This section identifies the pin locations and signal descriptions of the Intel High Performance SSDs. 5.1 Pin Locations 5.2 Signal Description Table Note: Key and spacing separate signal and power segments. Figure 3. Layout of Signal and Power Segment Pins Signal Segment S1 Power Segment P1 Table 12. Serial ATA Connector Pin Signal Definitions Pin Function Definition S1 Ground 2nd mate S2 A+ Differential signal pair A S3 AS4 Ground 2nd mate S5 BDifferential signal pair B S6 B+ S7 Ground 2nd mate Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 14 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. All pins are in a single row, with a 1.27 mm (0.050”) pitch. 2. Pins P1, P2 and P3 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put 3.3 V on these pins. 3. The mating sequence is: • the ground pins P4-P6, P10, P12 and the 5v power pin P7. • the signal pins and the rest of the 5V power pins P8-P9. 4. Ground connectors P4 and P12 may contact before the other 1st mate pins in both the power and signal connectors to discharge ESD in a suitably configured backplane connector. 5. Power pins P7, P8,and P9 are internally connected to one another within the device. 6. The host may ground P11 if it is not used for Device Activity Signal (DAS). 7. Pins P13, P14 and P15 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put 12 V on these pins. 5.3 Hot Plug Support Hot Plug insertion and removal are supported in the presence of a proper connector and appropriate operating system (OS) support as described in the SATA 2.6 specification. This product supports Asynchronous Signal Recovery and will issue an unsolicited COMINIT when first mated with a powered connector to guarantee reliable detection by a host system without hardware device detection. Table 13. Serial ATA Power Pin Definitions Pin1 Function Definition Mating Order P1 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate P2 Not connected2. 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate P3 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 1st Mate P4 Ground3, 4 1st Mate P5 Ground3 1st Mate P6 Ground3 1st Mate P7 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 1st Mate P8 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate P9 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate P10 Ground3 1st Mate P11 DAS6 Device Activity Signal6 2nd Mate P12 Ground3, 4 1st Mate P13 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate P14 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate P15 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 15 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.0 Command Sets 6.1 ATA Commands The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports all the mandatory ATA commands defined in the ATA/ATAPI-7 specification. 6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the ATA General Feature command set (nonPACKET), which consists of • EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC • FLUSH CACHE • IDENTIFY DEVICE • READ DMA • READ SECTOR(S) • READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) • SEEK • SET FEATURES • WRITE DMA • WRITE SECTOR(S) • READ MULTIPLE • SET MULTIPLE MODE • WRITE MULTIPLE The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands: • READ BUFFER • WRITE BUFFER • NOP • DOWNLOAD MICROCODE 6.1.1.1 IDENTIFY DEVICE Data The following table details the sector data returned after issuing an IDENTIFY DEVICE command. Table 14. Returned Sector Data Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description 0 F 0040h General configuration bit-significant information 1 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383) 2 V C837h Specific configuration Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 16 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16) 4-5 X 0h Retired 6 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63) 7-8 V 0h Reserved for assignment by the CompactFlash Association 9 X 0h Retired 10-19 F Varies Serial number (20 ASCII characters) 20-21 X 0h Retired 22 X 0h Obsolete 23-26 F Varies Firmware revision (8 ASCII characters) 27-46 F Varies Model number (Intel Solid State Drive) 47 F 8010h 7:0—Maximum number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE commands 48 F 0h Reserved 49 F 2F00h Capabilities 50 F 4000h Capabilities 51-52 X 0h Obsolete 53 F 0007h Words 88 and 70:64 Valid 54 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383) 55 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16) 56 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63) 57-58 X 00FBFC10h Obsolete 59 F 0101h Number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE commands 60-61 F 03B9ACA0h (32 GB) 07740AB0h (64 GB) Total number of user addressable sectors 62 X 0h Obsolete 63 F 0007h Multi-word DMA modes supported/selected 64 F 0003h PIO modes supported 65 F 0078h Minimum Multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word 66 F 0078h Manufacturer’s recommended Multiword DMA transfer cycle time 67 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without flow control 68 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control 69-70 F 0h Reserved (for future command overlap and queuing) 71-74 F 0h Reserved for the IDENTIFY PACKET DEVICE command. 75 F 001Eh Queue depth 76 F 0106h Serial ATA capabilities 77 F 0h Reserved for future Serial ATA definition 78 F 0048h Serial ATA features supported 79 V 0040h Serial ATA features enabled Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 17 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 80 F 00FCh Major Version Number 81 F 001Ah Minor Version Number 82 F 746Bh Command set supported. 83 F 7C01h Command sets supported. 84 F 6123h Command set/feature supported extension. 85 V 7469h Command set/feature enabled. 86 V BC01h Command set/feature enabled. 87 V 6123h Command set/feature default. 88 V 407Fh Ultra DMA Modes 89 F 0001h Time required for security erase unit completion 90 F 0001h Time required for Enhanced security erase completion 91 V 0h Current advanced power management value 92 V FFFEh Master Password Revision Code 93 F 0h Hardware reset result. The contents of bits (12:0) of this word shall change only during the execution of a hardware reset. 94 V 0h Vendor’s recommended and actual acoustic management value. 95 F 0h Stream Minimum Request Size 96 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - DMA 97 V 0h Streaming Access Latency - DMA and PIO 98-99 F 0h Streaming Performance Granularity 100-103 V 03B9ACA0h (32 GB) 07740AB0h (64 GB) Maximum user LBA for 48-bit Address feature set. 104 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - PIO 105 F 0h Reserved 106 F 4000h Physical sector size / logical sector size 107 F 0h Inter-seek delay for ISO-7779 acoustic testing in microseconds 108-111 F Varies Unique ID 112-115 F 0h Reserved for world wide name extension to 128 bits 116 V 0h Reserved for technical report 117-118 F 0h Words per Logical Sector 119 F 401Ch Supported Settings 120 F 401Ch Command Set/Feature Enabled/Supported 121-126 F 0h Reserved 127 F 0h Removable Media Status Notification feature set support 128 V 0021h Security status 129-159 X 0h Vendor specific 160 F 0h CompactFlash Association (CFA) power mode 1 161-175 X 0h Reserved for assignment by the CFA Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 18 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. F = Fixed. The content of the word is fixed and does not change. For removable media devices, these values may change when media is removed or changed. 2. V = Variable. The state of at least one bit in a word is variable and may change depending on the state of the device or the commands executed by the device. 3. X = F or V. The content of the word may be fixed or variable. 6.1.2 Power Management Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Power Management command set, which consists of • CHECK POWER MODE • IDLE • IDLE IMMEDIATE • SLEEP • STANDBY • STANDBY IMMEDIATE 6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Security Mode command set, which consists of • SECURITY SET PASSWORD • SECURITY UNLOCK • SECURITY ERASE PREPARE • SECURITY ERASE UNIT • SECURITY FREEZE LOCK • SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD 176-205 V 0h Current media serial number 206-216 F 0h Reserved 217 F 0001h Non-rotating media device 218-221 F 0h Reserved 222 F 101Fh Reserved 223-233 F 0h Reserved 234 F 0001h Reserved 235 F 02A0h Reserved 255 X Varies Integrity word (Checksum and Signature) Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 19 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.1.4 SMART Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SMART command set, please refer to Intel® High Performance SATA Solid State Drive S.M.A.R.T Features User Guide Order Number 320520-002US. 6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Host Protected Area command set, which consists of • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS • SET MAX ADDRESS • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT • SET MAX ADDRESS EXT The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands: • SET MAX SET PASSWORD • SET MAX LOCK • SET MAX FREEZE LOCK • SET MAX UNLOCK 6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the 48-bit Address command set, which consists of • FLUSH CACHE EXT • READ DMA EXT • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT • READ SECTOR(S) EXT • READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT • SET MAX ADDRESS EXT • WRITE DMA EXT • WRITE MULTIPLE EXT • WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT 6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Device Configuration Overlay command set, which consists of • DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK • DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTITY • DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE • DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 20 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the General Purpose Log command set, which consists of • READ LOG EXT • WRITE LOG EXT 6.2 SATA Commands The SATA 2.6 specification is a super set of the ATA/ATAPI-7 specification with regard to supported commands. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the following features that are unique to the SATA specification. 6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SET FEATURES parameter to enable/disable the preservation of software settings. 6.2.2 Native Command Queuing The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command set, which consists of • READ FPDMA QUEUED • WRITE FPDMA QUEUED Notes: With a maximum queue depth equal to 31. Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 21 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 7.0 References This document references standards defined by a variety of organizations. Use the following list to identify the location of an organization’s standards information. Table 15. Standards References Date or Rev. # Title Location July 2007 RoHS Search for material data declaration sheets at http:// intel.pcnalert.com July 2007 SFF-8144, 1.8” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org June 2007 Intel Matrix Storage Manager http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/imsm/ February 2007 Serial ATA Revision 2.6 http://www.sata-io.org May 2006 SFF-8223, 2.5" Drive w/Serial Attachment Connector http://www.sffcommittee.org May 2005 SFF-8201, 2.5” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org April 2004 ATA-6 spec http://www.t13.org/project/d1410r3b-ATA-ATAPI-6.pdf April 2004 ATA-7 Volume 1 http://www.t13.org/Documents/UploadedDocuments/ docs2007/D1532v1r4b-AT_Attachment_with_Packet_ Interface_-_7_Volume_1.pdf 1995 1996 1995 1995 1996 1994 International Electrotechnical Commission EN 61000- 4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 2: Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test 4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 3: Radiated, Radio Frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test 4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 4: Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test 4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 5: Surge Immunity Test 4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 6: Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced by Radio-Frequency Fields 4-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 11: Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity Tests http://www.iec.ch Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 22 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 8.0 Glossary This document incorporates many industry- and device-specific words. Use the following list to define a variety of terms and acronyms. Table 16. Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Term Definition ATA Advanced Technology Attachment ATAPI Advanced Technology Attachment Packet Interface BER Bit error rate, or percentage of bits that have errors relative to the total number of bits received DIPM Device Initiated Link Power Management. The ability of the device to request SATA link power state changes. DMA Direct Memory Access EXT Extended FP First Party GB Giga-byte defined as 1x109 bytes HDD Hard Disk Drive Hot Plug A term used to describe the removal or insertion of a SATA hard drive when the system is powered on. iMSM The Intel Matrix Storage Manager device driver and associated system software. IOPS Input output operations per second LBA Logical Block Address MB Mega-bytes defined as 1x106 bytes MTBF Mean time between failures NCQ Native Command Queuing. The ability of the SATA hard drive to queue and re-order commands to maximize execution efficiency. NOP No Operation OS Operating System Port The point at which a SATA drive physically connects to the SATA controller. RMS Root Mean Squared RPM Revolutions Per Minute SAS Serial Attached SCSI SATA Serial ATA SFF Small Form Factor SMART Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology: an open standard for developing hard drives and software systems that automatically monitors a hard drive’s health and reports potential problems. SSD Solid State Drive Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 23 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 9.0 Revision History Date Revision Description January 2009 003 Added new capacity of 64 GB to the datasheet. Added power numbers and weight for 64 GB on page 1 and page 8. Added weight information for 64 GB on page 1. Updated reliability information on write endurance on page 1 and page 11. Added user addressable sectors on page 7. Modified Random IOPs table on page 8. Modified latency specification notes on page 8. Updated Identify Device ID words 59, 60, 84, 85, 87, 100 and 106 on page 15. Added a reference to 6.1.4 on page 19. July 2008 002 Updated the power number on page 1 and Table 7 on page 8. Updated standby shock spec on page 1 and Table 9 on page 9. Modified weight numbers on page 1. Updated Device decoder on page 2. Updated Random Write Speed on Table 4 on page 8. Update Sustained Sequential Read spec on page 1 and Table 3 on page 7. Changed maximum queue depth to 31 on 6.2.2. Updated Identify device information on 6.1.1.1. Added extra info on altitude in 3.4.2. RoHS link updated on Table 15 on page 21. June 2008 001 Initial Release. Earlier information released as Intel® Extreme Performance Solid State Drive Advance Product Manual - 318776-003US. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 24 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD ) Idle (DIPM): 0.06 W typical Operating Shock 1,000 G/0.5 ms Voltage 5V SATA supply rail Operating Temperature 0°C to +70°C RoHS Compliance Meets the requirements of EU RoHS Compliance Directives Product Health Monitoring Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) commands, plus additional SSD monitoring Validated and Tested by Intel, on Intel All Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives are tested and validated on the latest Intel-based server and workstation platforms, for your peace of mind. Copyright © 1997 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this guide, nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information herein. *Other brands and names are the property of their respective owners. Check your computer's owner's manual ......................................... 4 Installation steps ............................................................................. 4 Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 14 Getting help .................................................................................. 21 Registration .................................................................................. 22 Three-year limited warranty ......................................................... 23 First Edition January 1997 Second Edition March 1997 Third Edition August 1997 Part number: 669409-003 Contents This symbol indicates a CAUTION or WARNING. It identifies operations or situations that may be harmful or dangerous to you or your equipment. For your safety and to protect your equipment, read and observe all cautions and warnings. Explanation of symbols used in this guide: This symbol indicates a NOTE. It identifies items of special interest that pertain to the section or procedure you are reading. Notes typically clarify or expand the material in the text. 4 Step 1—Check your computer's BIOS. Caution: Failure to update an incompatible BIOS will cause your computer to lock up after installation. The system control program (BIOS) in some computers doesn't support the higher speed of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. You must update an incompatible BIOS before installing the processor. Failure to update your incompatible BIOS will cause your computer to lock up after installation. This lock-up may occur every time you start your computer or only after you install new hardware such as graphics or audio cards. Follow these steps to determine whether your computer's BIOS must be updated. 1. Insert the OverDrive Processor Diagnostic diskette in drive A. 2. Choose File (for Windows* 3.1 or Windows NT*) or Start (Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0). 3. Choose Run. 4. Type a:\diag, click OK, then choose Run Diagnostics from the menu. If your computer's BIOS is incompatible with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, you must update the BIOS before installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology (see "BIOS update needed" on page 17). A successful result indicates that the likelihood of encountering a problem due to a BIOS incompatibility is low. Please continue the installation with Step 2. This diagnostic is limited to certain BIOS tests only; it does not test for other possible incompatibilities between the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and a particular PC hardware configuration. If you experience problems after installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, contact Intel customer support for more information. (See "Getting Help" on page 21.) First check your computer owner's manual to see if it has a section on installing computer upgrade hardware such as the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. If it does, follow the owner's manual procedure. Otherwise, use this manual. Check your computer's owner's manual 5 Step 3—Unplug computer and remove cover. Step 2—Ground yourself. To prevent damaging the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and your computer with a static discharge, ground yourself by touching the metal back or side panel of your computer’s system unit. Warning: Danger to equipment! The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology can be damaged by static discharge. Before handling the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, be sure to ground yourself by touching the metal on your computer. Limiting your movements during installation reduces static electricity. Warning: Don't burn yourself! Many components can become hot enough to cause mild skin burns. Wait at least 15 minutes after turning off the power before handling any parts. Turn off the computer and any attached equipment (such as a monitor or printer), unplug the power cord, and remove the cover. OFF ON 6 Step 4—Find the computer's Pentium processor. Find the Pentium processor in the computer. The Pentium processor in most computers looks like the following: Some computers have a power cable attached to the Pentium processor's fan or have a passive heat sink (which may be attached with a clip) on top of the Pentium processor . Pentium processor Your computer's owner's manual may show the location of the processor. If you can't locate your computer's original processor, contact your dealer or your computer manufacturer for assistance. Some computers have an empty second socket next to the processor. For more information on the installation process for these computers, see page 15. PC-3785 PC-3786 Clip Fan power cable OverDrive processor socket 7 After locating the processor, examine the socket to determine the socket type. Most Pentium processor-based computers use a socket with a handle that locks and unlocks, called a zero insertion force (ZIF) socket. If the socket in your computer doesn't have a handle, Intel strongly recommends that you have a qualified professional install the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology rather than installing it yourself. Typical LIF socket (no handle) Typical ZIF socket (with handle) Some computers use a socket without a handle, called a low insertion force (LIF) socket. • If your computer has either a power cable attached to the Pentium processor's heat sink or a heat sink attached with a clip, go to step 5. • If your computer doesn't have a power cable attached to the heat sink and doesn't have a heat sink attached with a clip, skip step 5 and go to step 6. Handle 8 The heat sink on your computer's original processor is either clipped to the socket or fastened directly to the top of the processor. If the heat sink is fastened directly to the processor without a clip and doesn't have a fan cable, go to step 6 now. You do not need the fan, fan cable, or clip to install the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. After removing these parts, store them with your original processor. Step 5—Unplug the fan power cable or unfasten the heat sink clip. Unplug the fan power cable Some computers have a power cable attached to the fan. Carefully unplug the fan power cable from the power source. After unplugging the fan power cable, carefully fold the power source cable out of the way so it doesn't touch any computer components. After unplugging the fan power cable from the computer power source, fold the computer power source cable out of the way. PC-3252 System power source cable Fan power cable 9 PC-3312 Removing the heat sink clip If the heat sink is clipped to the socket, remove the clip by pressing down and unfastening it from the tab on the socket. Be sure to hold your hand over the clip while unfastening it to prevent it from flying loose. Heat sink fins Heat sink clips to socket tab Heat sink fan Socket Typical fan heat sink clip Heat sink clip surrounds fan and hooks to socket tabs. Remove heat sink fan and fins as one piece. PC-2822 Heat sink clips to socket tab Press down on tab to release heat sink clip Typical passive heat sink clip Some heat sinks clamp tightly over the socket tab and require a tool such as a screwdriver to loosen the clip enough to slide over the tab. Carefully insert the tool between the heat sink and the socket, just above the socket tab, and gently pry outward to allow the heat sink to slip over the tab. You should then be able to completely release the heat sink from all the other socket tabs. Use screwdriver to loosen clip while pressing down Fan Processor Socket 10 Step 6—Open the socket handle and remove the existing processor from the socket. Push the handle slightly sideways to slide it over the lever lock tab, then move the handle to a 90-degree, upright position. Be sure the socket is completely open. Don't use excessive force. Your computer’s motherboard should not bend or flex while you are opening the socket. Once the socket is open, remove the processor. Be sure the socket is completely open. PC-2833 Some manufacturers use thermal grease to attach the heat sink to the processor. Thermal grease is a conductive material and can damage your computer if it gets on socket pin holes, processor pins, or other components. Avoid getting thermal grease residue on your hands or the computer when you remove the heat sink from the processor. Save the original processor in case you need it later. Store it in a safe place, such as in the box that the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology came in. 11 Step 7—Insert the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology into the socket. Correctly orienting your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in the socket is crucial to the success of your installation. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fits in the socket only one way. Incorrectly aligning your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology can damage the processor and your computer. Orient the notch on one corner of the OverDrive processor with MMX technology to the notch on one corner of the socket. Place the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology on the socket and align the pins with the pin holes. Notch Notch Once the pins and pin holes are properly aligned, gently insert the processor into the socket. Don't use force to insert the processor in the socket. Don't apply pressure to the center of the fan. PODP5V 109X4405H6J05 DC 5V 0.14A SANYO DENKI 12 Step 8—Close the socket handle. Close the socket handle to lock the OverDrive processor with MMX technology in place. Once it is locked in place, the OverDrive processor with MMX technology should fit snugly in the socket. Step 9—Replace the cover, plug in the computer, and turn it on. Put the cover back on the computer. Reconnect all the cables and cords, and plug the power cord into the wall outlet. Turn on your computer. If your computer requires it, run the computer’s setup or configuration program. Refer to your computer's owner’s manual. If you have problems with your computer after installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, turn to the "Troubleshooting" section. If your computer requires setting jumpers or switches, refer to your computer's owner's manual or the "Troubleshooting" section. 13 Installation of your Intel Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology is complete. When you ran the diagnostics in step 1, the program stored information about your old processor. Run the diagnostics again to see how much faster your computer performs with your new Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The disk also contains the following diagnostics to test your installation: Processor Instruction Test Tests various processor functions to see whether they are working properly. Floating Point Tests the processor's floating-point unit by Conformance Test comparing the value the floating-point unit calculates to the value established by the IEEE standard. MMX Instruction Test Tests the various MMX technology instructions to see whether they are working properly. MMX Technology Checks whether your computer is Video Test compatible with the MMX technology instructions. In addition, you can test your installation by running software programs you use frequently and experiencing the increased performance. If you don't see increased performance, or if you have difficulty getting the computer to run successfully, see the "Troubleshooting" section to determine possible problems. If you still need help, contact your dealer. Step 10—Test the installation of the Pentium OverDrive Processor with MMX Technology. 14 Troubleshooting Read through the symptoms below. If you find one that resembles the problem you’re having, try the corresponding possible solutions. The computer doesn’t power on when you turn on the switch, or the operating system prompt doesn’t appear on the screen. • Be sure: • The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet. • The cables and cords are attached correctly. • Any cards you removed are reinstalled properly. • The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and the socket are correctly aligned. • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer owner's manual? For further information on jumpers and switches, see page 20. • Your computer may need an updated control program (BIOS). Contact the technical support department at your computer vendor or dealer for BIOS information. • If you have access to another Pentium processor-based computer, remove your Pentium OverDrive processor and install it in the second computer. Your application programs don’t run any faster with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology installed. • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer's owner’s manual? For further information on jumpers and switches, see page 20. • Does your computer require you to run its setup program? Check your computer's owner's manual or contact your dealer to verify. • If your computer appears to be functioning normally and you have eliminated jumper settings and setup requirements as the problem, but you still don't see a speed improvement, see the "Getting Help" section on page 21. Some of the pins on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology are bent. • Carefully straighten any bent pins with needlenose pliers or tweezers before inserting the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in the socket. 15 Your computer has an extra processor socket. • Some computers have two processor sockets that can be used for dual processing as well as for single processing. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology does not support dual processing. However, if you use your two-socket computer in single-processing mode, you can upgrade your computer with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. To install: 1. Remove the original processor from the socket. Refer to installation steps 4 through 6 for more information on removing the original processor. 2. Align and seat the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in an upgrade socket. (Usually this is the same socket that contained the original processor. Refer to your computer's owner's manual for information on locating the upgrade socket.) Refer to installation step 7 for more information on aligning and seating the OverDrive processor with MMX technology. 3. Continue with installation step 8. Motherboard with two processor sockets Caution: After operating for several hours, many chips in your computer, including the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, can become hot enough to cause mild skin burns if handled. Let the computer cool off before handling the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology feels hot. • It is normal for the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology to generate heat while operating. PC-3787 16 Your computer powers on and runs normally for a few minutes then hangs up or shuts down. • Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology socket handle fully locked? • Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fully inserted? • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer's owner's manual? • Check to see if your fan is functioning properly. Warning: When your computer is plugged in, the power is on, and the cover is off, don't touch your computer or the fan. Exercise extreme care, as injury may occur from moving parts or death may occur from electrocution. If uncertain, seek expert technical assistance. 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Check that nothing is blocking the airflow from the fan. Are there cables, cards, or other components that prevent good airflow to the vents in the chassis? 3. Observe the fan on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The fan blades should be turning. If the fan works, turn off and unplug your computer, then replace the cover. Note: There must be adequate clearance between the top of the fan and the nearest object to ensure proper airflow. After unplugging your computer, you can measure the space above the fan. It should be at least 0.4 inch, or about the thickness of your finger. • Your computer may not be providing enough airflow to adequately cool the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Call your computer manufacturer for information about evaluating a possible thermal condition in your computer. 17 BIOS update needed Here's what to do when the Intel diagnostic tells you to update your computer's BIOS before installing the OverDrive processor with MMX technology. 1. Collect this information: BIOS serial number. The BIOS serial number is usually displayed on the initial power-on screen. Most computers can be halted at this screen by pressing the Pause key. Press the Enter key to continue. Motherboard model number. Check your computer's owner's manual. Computer name, model, and serial number. Check your computer's owner's manual and the back of the computer. 2. Determine the proper BIOS update for your computer. With the information you collected in the previous step, the motherboard's or computer manufacturer's customer support can help determine the BIOS update you need. Intel supplies information on contacting many manufacturers of motherboards and computers: on the World Wide Web, www.intel.com/overdrive/bios; on the Intel Bulletin Board Service (BBS), (503) 264-7999 (ask for the BIOS update document on the OverDrive area of the BBS); and by FaxBack, (800) 525-3019 (ask for FaxBack document 1522). 3. Obtain the proper BIOS update file for your computer. Either download a file containing the new BIOS from the motherboard or computer manufacturer's web site or BBS (see the Intel web site at www.intel.com/overdrive/bios for links to many manufacturers) or get a disk directly from the manufacturer. The BIOS file or disk typically contains two parts: a flash update utility program and a BIOS data file. Most Pentium processor-based motherboards store the system BIOS in a flash memory component, which lets the BIOS be easily updated through a flash update utility program. This program is provided by most manufacturers and provides the capability to save, verify, and update the system BIOS. The BIOS file(s) is specific to your computer. Some manufacturers distribute the utility program and the data file in a single compressed file (such as NEW_BIOS.ZIP) that you must uncompress. 18 4. Install the new BIOS on your computer. The procedure for updating the BIOS is different for every model of computer. Read and follow your motherboard's or computer manufacturer's instructions exactly. The following is just an outline of the BIOS update procedure. Use your motherboard or computer manufacturer's instructions. a) Record the current BIOS settings. Most computers prompt you during power-up to press a specific key (such as F1) to view the setup screens. b) Create a DOS-bootable diskette. Most BIOS update utilities require that they be run from a disk from which the computer is started. This requires the computer to run in a basic mode without memory managers or drivers in memory. Refer to your operating system's manual for instructions on creating a DOS-bootable disk. c) Update the BIOS. Before starting the update, be sure you read and understand the manufacturer's instructions. Often the instructions are in a README file on the disk. In general, you'll copy the BIOS utility and data files to the bootable disk you created earlier and restart your computer from the disk. Then run the BIOS update utility, following the manufacturer's instructions. If the utility allows it, save your old BIOS. Do not turn off the computer while the BIOS update utility is running. An interruption in power can corrupt the BIOS code, making your computer non-functional. d) After the update, verify the BIOS settings against the settings you recorded in step a. If updating the BIOS sounds risky, have a qualified technician update the BIOS for you. If you update the BIOS yourself, follow the manufacturer's instructions exactly. Your computer's BIOS or CMOS setup program doesn't identify the new Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, but the Intel diagnostic program indicates that it is working correctly. The BIOS in many older computers cannot identify the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology; however, those systems might still operate correctly with the new processor. If the processor passes the Intel diagnostic program and the system seems to be operating correctly with satisfactory performance, then the fact that the BIOS does not correctly display the name of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology probably will not affect the system's or the processor's operation, and it probably is not worth the effort to update the BIOS. 19 Your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fan is not working. • Is the fan fully seated? The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fan is powered from three power connections on the processor top. To ensure your fan is fully seated: 1. Ground yourself by touching the metal on your computer, then unplug your computer. Limiting your movements during installation reduces static electricity, which can damage the part and your computer. 2. Release the corner of the fan assembly by gently squeezing together the two retaining clips. 3. While keeping the clips squeezed together, slowly lift up the corner, pivoting it against the opposite corner. 4. When the fan assembly is at an approximately 45-degree angle, gently lift straight up from the processor. 5. Hold the fan at an approximately 45-degree angle, and align the fan assembly over the base unit, starting with the corner opposite the retaining clip. Take special care to align the contact pins on the fan assembly to the three pads on the base unit. 6. Carefully lower the fan onto the base. 7. Secure the fan assembly to the base unit by ensuring that the retaining clips have snapped into place. If the fan still does not work properly after reseating, see the "Getting Help" section. Retaining Clips Base unit contact pads Lift 45o Contact pins 20 You need to set jumpers or switches to configure your computer for the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. • In most computers, the jumper and switch settings for the original Pentium processor and the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology are the same. In some cases, however, you may need to specifically configure your system for a Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Your computer's owner's manual or your computer manufacturer should have the correct settings for your computer. Intel also has information about some computers. See the "Getting Help" section for how to get this information. Jumpers are very small pins fastened to the motherboard. If you look closely, you can see that each jumper is labelled with a number or letter that typically is printed on the motherboard, as shown below. The pins are connected (ON) when a tiny plastic connector covers two pins. The connector has a metal piece embedded in the plastic that allows current to pass between the pins. To turn the connection OFF, remove the jumper connector from the pins. You can also place the connector over only one of the pins for safekeeping as shown. To turn the connection ON, place the connector over the two indicated pins. Note that while some jumpers appear in pairs, others may appear in sets of four or more, as shown. PC-2913 J1 JP1 1 2 3 4 5 J 1 JP1 21 Getting Help Intel Customer Support on the World Wide Web Support information for Intel Brand products is available on the Internet for downloading by anonymous FTP and for viewing or downloading on the World Wide Web. Try Intel’s newsgroup forum for answers to common questions or post your question to be answered. Intel web site http://www.intel.com Customer support web site http://support.intel.com Intel FTP hostname ftp.intel.com Customer support files ftp.intel.com/pub/support Intel Internet newsgroup news://cs.intel.com or http://cs.intel.com Intel Customer Support FaxBack* Service Have documents sent to your fax machine or fax/modem. For information about Intel support services options, order FaxBack document #8549. For information about support for discontinued Intel products, order FaxBack document #8715. In North America (Oregon, USA) 800-525-3019 In Europe (Swindon, UK) +44-1793-432-509 Intel Customer Support Technicians If you are unable to find the information you need on one of our electronic services, you may need to call a customer support technician. Country Customer Support Hours (Local Time) Telephone Number Monday through Friday U.S. and Canada 1-800-321-4044 07:00-17:00 Swindon, UK English +44-1793-404-900 08:00-24:00 French +44-1793-404-988 08:00-17:00 German +44-1793-404-777 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00) Italian +44-1793-404-141 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00) Japan 03-5350-0860 09:00-17:00 Asia-Pacific Australia (Sydney) +1-800-649-931 05:00-15:00 Hong Kong +852-2-844-4456 05:00-15:00 Korea +822-767-2595 05:00-15:00 Singapore +65-831-1311 05:00-15:00 Taiwan +886-2-718-9915 05:00-15:00 From anywhere in the world, contact your local dealer or distributor, or call the North American Service Center at +1-916-377-7000 (hours are 07:00-15:00, Pacific Time). 22 Registration Please take a few moments to fill out your OverDrive processor registration card. Returning this card allows us to send you important OverDrive processor announcements and new product information. Three Year Limited Warranty Intel warrants that the OverDrive® processor, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel's publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the OverDrive processor was purchased. If the OverDrive processor which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the OverDrive processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the OverDrive processor with another OverDrive processor; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the OverDrive processor, REFUND the then-current value of the OverDrive processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your OverDrive processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata for Pentium OverDrive processors are available upon request. This limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any OverDrive processor that is soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system's motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. If you do not wish to install the OverDrive processor yourself, you should have the vendor from whom you purchased the product install it. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service, you must return the OverDrive processor to the vendor from whom you purchased it, or, with proof of purchase, to Intel. Before returning the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must contact Intel Customer Support at 916- 377-7000 or toll free in the U.S., 1-800-321-4044. 23 If you obtain warranty service from Intel, upon Intel's verification that the OverDrive processor is or may be defective, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (RMA). When you return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned OverDrive processor that has no RMA number on the package.If you return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must assume the risk of damage or loss during shipping. You must use the original packaging or the equivalent, and you must pay the postage. Intel may require you to verify that you are the original end user purchaser of the OverDrive processor. Intel may elect to replace or repair the OverDrive processor with either a new or reconditioned product. The returned product shall become Intel's property on receipt by Intel. The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL'S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T230 2 À propos de ce mode d’emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 5 Table des matières Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil 8 Touches 9 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 12 Insérer une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Manipuler l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 15 Régler le volume 15 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 16 Icônes d’informations 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres 26 Notifications 27 Écran d’accueil 29 Liste des applications 31 Utiliser les applications 31 Aide 32 Saisir du texte 34 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi 35 Créer un compte 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs 36 Transférer des fichiers 37 Protéger l’appareil 38 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 40 Contacts 44 Email 46 Google Mail 48 Hangouts 48 Google+ 49 Google+ Photos Web et réseau 50 Internet 51 Chrome 52 Bluetooth Multimédia 54 Musique 56 Appareil photo 61 Galerie 65 Vidéo 66 YouTube Table des matières 6 Géolocalisation 85 Maps Paramètres 86 Accéder au menu des paramètres 86 Connexions 89 Appareil 94 Contrôle 97 Général 101 Paramètres Google Dépannage Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 67 Play Store 68 Samsung Apps 68 Play Livres 69 Play Films 69 Play Musique 69 Play Jeux 69 Play Kiosque Utilitaires 70 Mémo 71 S Planner 73 Mode Enfant 74 Dropbox 74 Cloud 75 Google Drive 75 Hancom Office Viewer 78 Alarme 79 Horloge mondiale 80 Calculatrice 80 S Voice 81 Recherche Google 82 Recherche vocale 82 Mes fichiers 7 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Applications récentes Touche Accueil Écran tactile Objectif avant Connecteur à fonctions Touche Retour multiples Touche de volume Compartiment pour carte mémoire Microphone Touche Marche/Arrêt Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Démarrage 8 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran tactile s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 9 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 10 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Démarrage 11 Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Démarrage 12 Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Insérer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte apparaît dans le dossier SD card du menu Mes fichiers. Démarrage 13 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment. 3 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Démarrage 14 Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Démarrage 15 Manipuler l’appareil Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil alors que l’écran est désactivé, appuyez ensuite sur l’écran, puis faites-y glisser votre doigt. Régler le volume Pour régler le volume de la musique ou des vidéos, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. Activer le profil Discret Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Maintenez la touche de volume Bas enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé. • Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet. • Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son. 16 Fonctions de base Icônes d’informations Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Fonction Écran intelligent activée Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. Mouvements Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Maintenir appuyé Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelle, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et faites-le glisser sur l’écran. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Pincer Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples. Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contrôle → Mouvement de paume, puis faites glisser le curseur Mouvement de paume vers la droite. Si l’appareil est soumis à des secousses ou à des chocs excessifs, cela peut entraîner un comportement imprévu. Veillez à contrôler vos gestes. Pivoter l’écran De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation. Pour empêcher l’écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez l’option Rotation écran. • Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. • Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple, pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage. Fonctions de base 21 Balayer Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Recouvrir Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu multimédia. Fonctions de base 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être exécutées. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite. Utiliser un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter des applications sur un écran partagé. Lancer des applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres 1 Placez votre doigt sur le côté droit de l'écran et faites-le glisser vers le milieu de l’écran. Vous pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur . Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté droit de l’écran. Volet Multi-fenêtres Fonctions de base 23 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faitesla glisser vers l’écran. Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Fonctions de base 24 Partager du contenu entre applications Vous pouvez facilement partager du contenu entre des applications comme Email et Internet par un mouvement de glisser-déposer. Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction. 1 Lancez les applications Email et Internet sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. Accéder aux options Multi-fenêtres 2 Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application, puis appuyez sur . Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application pour accéder aux options suivantes : • : passer d’une application Fenêtres multiples à l’autre. • : partager facilement des éléments comme des images, du texte ou des liens entre les fenêtres d'application en réalisant un mouvement de glisser-déposer. • : agrandir la fenêtre. • : fermer l’application. Fonctions de base 25 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre Internet et faites-le glisser vers un emplacement dans la fenêtre E-mail. Fonctions de base 26 Notifications Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet, faites-le glisser de bas en haut. Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet des raccourcis. Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas, puis appuyez sur pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. • Position : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Son : activer ou désactiver le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth. • Fenêtres multiples : activer ou désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications. • Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay. • Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie. • Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Blocage. • Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne. La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour redisposer les options dans le volet des raccourcis, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur → , puis maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 27 Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil Ajouter une icône d’application Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis faites-la glisser sur l’aperçu d’un volet. Déplacer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément. Fonctions de base 28 Organiser les volets de widgets Ajouter un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, puis appuyez sur . Déplacer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez un des éléments suivants : • Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez téléchargées depuis Internet. • Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. • Photos : images de l'application Google Photos. • Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. Sélectionnez une image, redimensionnez le cadre si nécessaire, puis définissez-la comme fond d’écran. Fonctions de base 29 Utiliser les widgets Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des widgets sur l’écran d’accueil. • Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Placezle à l’endroit souhaité, redimensionnez-le en étirant son cadre, puis, le cas échéant, appuyez à un endroit quelconque de l’écran pour valider le nouvel emplacement du widget. Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les applications Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode d’affichage Grille personnalisable. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Fonctions de base 30 Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l'option Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Sauveg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle configuration. Installer des applications Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des applications. Désinstaller des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désinstaller. Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil. Désactiver des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désactiver. Pour activer de nouveau des applications depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Afficher les applications désactivées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. • Les applications téléchargées et certaines des applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil ne peuvent pas être désactivées. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, les applications désactivées disparaissent de la liste des applications, mais restent enregistrées dans l’appareil. Fonctions de base 31 Utiliser les applications Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet. Ouvrir une application Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Certaines applications sont regroupées dans des dossiers. Appuyez sur un dossier, puis sur une application pour l’ouvrir. Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées Appuyer sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Fermer une application Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et optimiser les performances de l’appareil. Appuyez sur → Gest. tâches, puis sur Fin à côté de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur → Tout fermer. Aide Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer des paramètres importants. Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez une catégorie. Pour trier les catégories par ordre alphabétique, appuyez sur . Pour rechercher des mots-clés, appuyez sur . Fonctions de base 32 Saisir du texte Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Utiliser le clavier Samsung Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Accéder aux paramètres du clavier Samsung. Insérer un espace. Saisir des majuscules. Ajouter un élément du presse-papier. Mots-clés suggérés Saisir des majuscules Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier le type de clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant. Sur le clavier flottant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 33 Modifier la langue du clavier Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser la barre d’espace vers la gauche ou la droite pour modifier la langue du clavier. Écrire de façon manuscrite Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , appuyez ensuite sur , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide du doigt. Les mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion. Utilisez les gestes de saisie manuscrite pour effectuer des opérations, comme la modification ou la suppression de caractères, et l’insertion d’espaces. Pour afficher les didacticiels, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur → Aide → Utiliser les gestes de saisie manuscrite. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Dicter du texte Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que vous venez de dire. Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît. Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue actuellement prise en charge. Fonctions de base 34 Copier et coller du texte Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, placez le curseur à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte, puis appuyez sur → Coller. Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 86). Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet. Activer ou désactiver un réseau Wi-Fi Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite. Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible. Fonctions de base 35 Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier. Créer un compte Les applications Google, comme Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil. Ajouter des comptes Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes Google sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, sélectionnez un nom de compte sous l’option MES COMPTES, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer le compte. Fonctions de base 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs Configurez des profils utilisateurs, puis sélectionnez-en un lorsque vous déverrouillez l’appareil pour utiliser des paramètres personnalisés. En configurant plusieurs profils utilisateurs, plusieurs utilisateurs peuvent partager l’appareil sans affecter les paramètres personnels des autres, tels que les comptes de messagerie électronique ou les préférences de fond d’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Utilisateurs → → OK, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un nouveau profil utilisateur. Pour accéder à l’appareil avec un profil utilisateur, sélectionnez un profil en haut à droite de l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Transférer des fichiers Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. Fonctions de base 37 Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Protéger l’appareil Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Déverrouillage par modèle Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Modèle. Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Fonctions de base 38 Déverrouillage par code PIN Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Code PIN. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouillage par mot de passe Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Mot de passe. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouiller l’appareil Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le code ou dessinez le modèle de déverrouillage. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble de USB. • Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Fonctions de base 39 Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant. 40 Communication Contacts Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses e-mail, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications. Gérer les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Créer un contact Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations d’un contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. Modifier un contact Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer un contact Appuyez sur . Communication 41 Rechercher des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Afficher les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle les contacts doivent être affichés. Synchroniser des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google. Les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône . Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung. Les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône . Communication 42 Importer et exporter des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Importer des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation. Exporter des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’exportation. Partager des contacts Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Plusieurs contacts, sélectionnez les contacts à partager, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Contacts favoris Appuyez sur Favoris. Appuyez sur pour ajouter des contacts à vos favoris. Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris. • Affichage Liste / Affichage Grille : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Communication 43 Groupes de contacts Appuyez sur Groupes. Créer un groupe Appuyez sur , configurez les détails du groupe, ajoutez des contacts, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Gérer les groupes Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des groupes : sélectionner des groupes auxquels vous avez ajouté des contacts, puis appuyer sur OK. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut. • Modifier le groupe : modifier les paramètres du groupe. • Ajouter membre : ajouter des membres au groupe. • Supprimer du groupe : retirer un membre du groupe. • Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe. • Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis appuyez sur OK. Communication 44 Carte de visite Appuyez sur Contacts. Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts. En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur, sélectionnez la carte de visite, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier. Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Contact sélectionné, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Email Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails. Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications. Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur  ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Envoyer des e-mails Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans votre liste de contacts, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur +Moi pour vous ajouter comme destinataire. Pour ajouter davantage de destinataires, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc. Appuyez sur → pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations de localisation et bien plus encore. Communication 45 Envoyer des e-mails programmés Lorsque vous rédigez un e-mail, appuyez sur → Envoi programmé. Cochez la case Envoi programmé, définissez une heure et une date, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à l’heure et à la date indiquées. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que l’heure et la date soient incorrectes. Lire des e-mails Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Supprimer le message. Rédiger un message. Répondre au message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir ou sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer. Communication 46 Google Mail Utilisez cette application pour accéder directement au service Google Mail. Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Envoyer des e-mails Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le brouillon. Pour joindre des photos, des vidéos, de la musique et d’autres fichiers, appuyez sur → Joindre un fichier. Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer. Appuyez sur → Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de Google Mail. Appuyez sur → Envoyer des commentaires pour indiquer votre opinion sur le développement de l’application. Appuyez sur → Aide pour accéder aux informations d’aide à propos de Google Mail. Communication 47 Lire des e-mails Afficher la pièce jointe. Supprimer le message. Archiver le message. Répondre au message. Identifier le message comme non lu. Déplacer le message vers une autre messagerie. Répondre à tous les destinataires ou imprimer le message. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Libellés Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les messages du libellé Boîte de réception. Appuyez sur → Actualiser pour récupérer manuellement les nouveaux messages. Pour afficher des messages portant d’autres libellés, appuyez sur . Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur → Modifier les libellés, puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer. Communication 48 Hangouts Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec vos amis. Appuyez sur Hangouts depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste ou saisissez des critères de recherche et sélectionnez un ami dans les résultats pour commencer à discuter. Google+ Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre entourage via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Appuyez sur Tous pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis. Communication 49 Google+ Photos Utilisez cette application pour afficher et partager des images ou des vidéos via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Photos depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • TOUT : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos prises ou téléchargées sur l’appareil. • SÉLECTION : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos regroupées par date ou par album. Appuyez sur pour afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos du groupe. Sélectionnez ensuite une photo ou une vidéo. En mode affichage d'une photo ou d'une vidéo, utilisez l’une des icônes suivantes : • : modifier la photo ou la vidéo. • : partager la photo ou la vidéo avec d’autres personnes. • : supprimer la photo ou la vidéo. 50 Web et réseau Internet Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur Internet. Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Appuyez sur pour accéder à des options complémentaires lors de l’affichage d’une page Web. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près de l’adresse Web. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur → , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Web et réseau 51 Historique Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur . Pages enregistrées Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Pages enreg. Liens Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d’une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page, l’enregistrer ou le copier. Pour afficher les liens enregistrés, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mes fichiers → Historique des téléchargements. Partager des pages Web Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis appuyez sur Partager via. Chrome Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Web et réseau 52 Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris, puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google. Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils. Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir. Pour afficher les favoris, appuyez sur FAVORIS. Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour la copie pirate de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite. Web et réseau 53 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth → Analyser pour afficher la liste des appareils détectés. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux appareils pour confirmer l’opération. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez l’application Galerie, sélectionnez une image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie des données, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth émanant de cet autre appareil. Les fichiers reçus sont enregistrés dans le dossier Download. Si vous recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à votre liste de contacts. 54 Multimédia Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique. Appuyez sur Musique depuis la liste des applications. Écouter de la musique Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour afficher le lecteur MP3 en plein écran. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Modifier le mode de répétition. Redémarrer le morceau en cours de lecture ou revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Multimédia 55 Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Volume intelligent. Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives. Volume intelligent peut ne pas être activée pour certains fichiers. Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée. Définir un morceau comme sonnerie d’alarme Pour utiliser le morceau de musique en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur → Définir comme tonalité d’alarme. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Appuyez sur Listes lect., puis sur → Créer une liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez les morceaux à inclure dans la liste de lecture, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Aj. liste lecture. Écouter de la musique par catégorie Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de lecture. Appuyez sur → Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran. Multimédia 56 Appareil photo Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour visionner les photos et des vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 61). Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Prendre des photos Prendre une photo Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . Afficher le mode en cours. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Afficher davantage d’options. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Multimédia 57 Mode de capture Il existe plusieurs effets de photo. Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. • Auto : ce mode permet à l’appareil photo d’évaluer l’environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. • Beauté : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images plus douces. • Son & prise : ce mode permet de prendre une photo et d'enregistrer le son de la scène. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu audio après la prise de vue. Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. • Panorama : ce mode permet de prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : – Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. – Maintenez l’objectif, de l’appareil photo dans le cadre de guidage. – Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. • Sports : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de sujets en action. • Nuit : ce mode permet de prendre des photos dans l’obscurité. Photos panoramiques Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés. Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama. Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Lorsque les deux cadres de prise de vue sont alignés, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur . Si l’objectif n’est plus aligné, la prise de vue s’interrompt. Multimédia 58 Appliquer des effets de filtre Utilisez les effets de filtre pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos uniques. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un effet de filtre. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode sélectionné. Enregistrer des vidéos Enregistrer une vidéo Faites glisser le curseur vers l’icône de caméscope, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . La mise au point manuelle n’est pas disponible en mode caméscope. Mode d’enregistrement Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Afficher davantage d’options. Afficher le mode en cours. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Multimédia 59 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Utilisez la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Partager des photos Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme libellé. Multimédia 60 Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. • Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Balise de localisation : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Luminosité : modifier la luminosité. Multimédia 61 • Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. • Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des balises contextuelles. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les tags contexuels dans la Galerie. • Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez l’objectif avant. • Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide pour utiliser l’appareil photo. Raccourcis Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur et maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de raccourci. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de l’écran. Galerie Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des photos ou des vidéos. Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des images Lorsque vous lancez l’application, la Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en plein écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante. Multimédia 62 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Lire des vidéos Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur . Découper les segments d’une vidéo Sélectionnez une vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis enregistrez la vidéo. Modifier des photos En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Favoris : ajouter à votre liste de favoris. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Photo frame. • Note photo : écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur . • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers. Multimédia 63 • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Détails : afficher les détails d’une image. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Mes photos favorites En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Favoris pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de favoris. Supprimer des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur . • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur . Partager des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur pour l'envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. Multimédia 64 Définir une image comme fond d’écran En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact. Libellés de portraits En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas. Utiliser les tags contextuels Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, localisation, date et nom de la personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image. Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez copier ou déplacer des fichiers d’un dossier à un autre. Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, appuyez sur OK, puis cochez les images ou les vidéos à intégrer au nouveau dossier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou sur Déplacer pour déplacer. Multimédia 65 Vidéo Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo. Appuyez sur Vidéo depuis la liste des applications. Lire des vidéos Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la gauche. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Redémarrer la vidéo en cours de lecture ou revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Régler le volume. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Passer en mode d’écran flottant. Modifier le format d’écran. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la droite. Supprimer des vidéos Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Multimédia 66 Partager des vidéos Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur OK, puis choisissez une méthode de partage. Utiliser le lecteur contextuel Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochezles. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. YouTube Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube. Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Visionner des vidéos Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour visionner la vidéo correspondante. Appuyez sur l’écran, puis sur et faites pivoter ensuite l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la vidéo en plein écran. Partager une vidéo Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mettre une vidéo en ligne Appuyez sur → Vidéos ajoutées → , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la vidéo, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. 67 Boutiques d’applications et multimédia Play Store Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications et des jeux, gratuits ou payants, pouvant s’exécuter sur votre appareil. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Désinstaller des applications Désinstallez les applications téléchargées sur Play Store. Appuyez sur → Mes applications, sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des applications installées, puis appuyez sur DÉSINSTALLER. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 68 Samsung Apps Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications Samsung, gratuites ou payantes. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site apps.samsung.com. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur CATÉGORIES pour sélectionner une catégorie. Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de recherche. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Gratuit. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Play Livres Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des fichiers de livre. Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 69 Play Films Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV. Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée sur le service Cloud de Google. Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Jeux Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des jeux et y jouer. Appuyez sur Play Jeux depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Kiosque Utilisez cette application pour lire les articles les plus récents. Appuyez sur Play Kiosque depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 70 Utilitaires Mémo Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter ultérieurement. Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications. Ajouter et gérer des catégories Créez des catégories afin de trier et gérer vos mémos. Pour ajouter une catégorie, appuyez sur → Ajouter une catégorie, saisissez le nom d’une catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour supprimer une catégorie, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis sur près de la catégorie concernée. Pour renommer une catégorie, sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur → Renommer une catégorie, nommez la catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier l’ordre des catégories, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis appuyez sur près de la catégorie concernée et faite-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas, vers une nouvelle position. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lors de la rédaction d’un mémo, utilisez les options suivantes : • : créer ou définir une catégorie. • : insérer des images. • : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer. Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Enreg. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur le contenu du mémo. Utilitaires 71 Naviguer parmi les mémos Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un mémo, puis appuyez sur . Pour imprimer les mémos en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Afficher un mémo Appuyez sur la miniature d’un mémo pour l’ouvrir. Pour supprimer le mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Pour imprimer le mémo en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Créer un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Événement : saisir un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option. • Tâche : saisir une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option. Utilitaires 72 Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date. Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation. Appuyez ensuite sur Modif. détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné. Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans la zone Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts. Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement, appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la carte qui apparaît. Synchroniser avec Google Agenda Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Google sous Mes comptes, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier. Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner → → Synchroniser depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches synchronisés, appuyez sur → Calendriers, puis cochez le compte Google. Utilitaires 73 Modifier le type de calendrier En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types de calendrier incluant l’année, le mois, la semaine, etc. Rechercher un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut de l’écran. Supprimer un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, puis appuyez sur → Supprimer. Partager un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mode Enfant Utilisez ce widget pour offrir à vos enfants un environnement ludique et sécurisé en les empêchant d’accéder à certaines applications ou certains contenus. Avant d’utiliser ce widget, vous devez le télécharger et l’installer. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Mode Enfant → Installer. Une fois installé, le widget apparaît sur l’écran d’accueil et dans la liste des applications. Pour démarrer le mode Enfants, appuyez sur Mode Enfant depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Lorsque vous lancez ce widget pour la première fois, appuyez sur Définir un code PIN au bas de l’écran. Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l’écran. • Si le widget Mode Enfant est accidentellement désinstallé, vous pouvez le réinstaller. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Widgets, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le widget Mode Enfant. Faites glisser le widget sur l’écran d’accueil et appuyez sur Mode Enfant pour le réinstaller. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 74 Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Connectez-vous à votre compte Dropbox. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Dropbox. Une fois la Dropbox activée, appuyez sur Activer Chargements appareil photo pour télécharger automatiquement sur Dropbox les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo de l’appareil. Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier. En mode affichage d’une image ou d’une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste des favoris. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Pour afficher les notifications, appuyez sur . Cloud Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Cloud. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync. Utilitaires 75 Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarder ou Restaurer. Synchroniser avec la Dropbox Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications. Google Drive Utilisez cette application pour créer et modifier des documents et les partager avec d’autres personnes via le service de stockage Google Drive. Lorsque vous créez des documents ou téléchargez des fichiers dans Google Drive, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel Google Drive est installé. Accédez à vos fichiers sans transfert ou téléchargement. Appuyez sur Drive depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Hancom Office Viewer Cette application permet de consulter des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 76 Rechercher des documents Appuyez sur Ouvrir pour parcourir un document. Lorsque vous parcourez un document, utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : créer un dossier. • : récupérer de nouveaux documents. • : trier des documents et des dossiers. • : modifier le mode d’affichage. • : sélectionner des documents ou des dossiers. Pour rechercher des documents récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Documents récents. Lire des documents Appuyez sur un document dans Documents récents ou dans un dossier. Appuyez sur ou sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Traitement de texte • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 77 Présentation • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la première page. • À partir de la diapositive active : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la page en cours. • Mode Présentateur : afficher les outils de présentation sur l’appareil lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un moniteur externe. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Feuille de calcul • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques. • Afficher les formules : afficher les formules à l’intérieur des cellules à la place des résultats. • Figer les volets : garder la ligne sélectionnée en place. • Quadrillage : afficher ou masquer les grilles de ligne. • Afficher tous les commentaires : afficher ou masquer des mémos sur le document. • Zone d’impression : sélectionner une zone à imprimer. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 78 PDF • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Propriétés : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Masquer les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document. • Défilement vertical / Affichage en continu / Défilement horizontal : modifier le mode d’affichage. • Mode lecture : afficher le contenu du document uniquement, sans les marges. • Atteindre la page : accéder à une page indiquée. • Signets : afficher des signets sur le document. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Alarme Utilisez cette application pour définir des alarmes pour les événements importants. Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications. Activer ou désactiver cette alarme. Utilitaires 79 Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d’activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. • Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous trouvez à l’endroit indiqué. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK. Horloge mondiale Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de nombreuses grandes villes dans le monde. Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez une horloge, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Utilitaires 80 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander vocalement l’appareil pour qu’il exécute différentes fonctions. Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application n’est pas prise en charge dans certaines langues. Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales : • Ouvrir le lecteur MP3 • Lancer la calculatrice • Vérifier le calendrier Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale : • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits tranquilles. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Utilitaires 81 Recherche Google Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans les applications et le contenu de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur , puis énoncer un mot-clé. Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de recherche. Étendre la recherche Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants. Google Now Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien plus encore. Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier les paramètres de Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres, puis faites glisser le curseur Google Now vers la gauche ou la droite. Utilitaires 82 Recherche vocale Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement. Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Quand l’instruction Parlez maintenant apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression. Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Visionner des fichiers Les fichiers enregistrés dans l’appareil sont triés par critères. Depuis le volet gauche de l’écran, sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • Date : afficher les fichiers regroupés par date. • Dossiers Favoris : afficher les raccourcis vers les dossiers. • Dossiers : afficher les fichiers enregistrés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire, ainsi que les raccourcis vers les serveurs FTP. • Catégories : afficher les fichiers triés selon leurs types. • Applications : afficher les fichiers enregistrés ou créés dans des applications spécifiques. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis un fichier ou un dossier à ouvrir. Utilitaires 83 Sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers. • Trier par : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. • Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers. Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier, puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : envoyer des fichiers à d’autres contacts ou les partager. • : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • → Accéder au dossier : accéder au dossier où se trouve le fichier sélectionné. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • → Zip : compresser des fichiers ou des dossiers pour créer un fichier zip. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Rechercher un fichier Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un critère de recherche. Afficher les informations de mémoire Appuyez sur pour afficher les informations de mémoire relatives à l’appareil et à la carte mémoire. Utilitaires 84 Modifier le mode d’affichage Appuyez sur pour modifier le mode d’affichage. Créer un dossier Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter des raccourcis à des dossiers Ajoutez un raccourci aux dossiers fréquemment utilisés dans Dossiers Favoris. Sélectionnez un dossier et appuyez sur → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris. Ajouter des raccourcis de serveur FTP à l’appareil Ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. Appuyez sur → Ajouter FTP, saisissez les informations sur le serveur FTP, puis appuyez sur OK. 85 Géolocalisation Maps Utilisez cette application pour repérer la position de votre appareil, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir un itinéraire. Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Rechercher des lieux Recherchez des lieux en saisissant une adresse ou un mot-clé. Une fois le lieu trouvé, sélectionnez-le afin d’afficher des informations détaillées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide. Obtenir un itinéraire Appuyez sur pour définir une adresse de départ et une adresse de destination, et choisir un mode de transport. L’appareil affiche l’itinéraire à suivre pour arriver à destination. 86 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Connexions Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres 87 Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité. Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d'expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Renommer le périphérique : changez le nom de l’appareil. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Bluetooth. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Paramètres 88 Utilisation des données Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées. • Cycle d’util. des données : indiquez la date à laquelle effectuer la vérification mensuelle des données. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Général → Comptes. • Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles Wi-Fi afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Position Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation. • DEMANDES DE LOCALISATION RÉCENTES : affichez les applications qui requièrent votre position et la batterie qu'elles consomment. • SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Plus de réseaux Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux. Impression Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud. Paramètres 89 VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Appareils à proximité • NOM DE L’APPAREIL : affichez le nom de l’appareil. • Contenus partagés : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Téléch. depuis autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Appareil Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. • Volume : réglez le volume de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les notifications, telles que les messages entrants. • Sélections audibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application. • Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique. Paramètres 90 Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Fenêtres multiples Activez la fonction Multi-fenêtres pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Ouvrir en vue Multi-fenêtre : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il active la fonction Fenêtres multiples lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers dans Mes fichiers ou Vidéo. De même, l’appareil désactive cette fonction lorsque vous affichez les pièces jointes des messages. Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Options du widget Horloge : configurez les paramètres pour le widget horloge. – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Paramètres 91 • Message personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour afficher un message personnel sur l’écran verrouillé. – Modifier un massage personnel : modifiez le message personnel. • Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître sur l'écran verrouillé. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. Fond d’écran Modifiez les paramètres du fond d’écran. • Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. • Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. • Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et de l’écran de verrouillage. Police Modifiez les paramètres de la police. • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. Volet des raccourcis Personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis. • Luminosité et volume : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les barres de réglage de la luminosité et du volume dans le volet des raccourcis. • Applications recommandées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la liste des applications recommandées dans le volet des raccourcis en fonction de vos actions, par exemple lorsque vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil. • Déf. bout. config. rapide : réorganisez les touches de paramétrage rapide dans le volet des raccourcis. Paramètres 92 Accessibilité Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité à l’appareil. • Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Énoncer les mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute. • Mode appui unique : paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. • Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité ou TalkBack dans le menu rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. • Gérer l’accessibilité : exportez ou importez les paramètres d’accessibilité afin de les partager avec d’autres appareils. – Exporter : exportez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Mise à jour : importez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Partager via : envoyez le fichier des paramètres d’accessibilité à d’autres personnes. • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Gestes d’agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière à l’aide des doigts. • Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité. • Réglage des couleurs : définissez une zone de l’écran dans laquelle la saisie tactile est inopérante. • Rappel de notification : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne lorsque vous avez des notifications et définissez un intervalle pour la répétition de l’alerte. • Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer TalkBack lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran. Paramètres 93 • Options synthèse vocale : – MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. – État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. • Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette. • Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette. • Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil. • Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Sous-titres Samsung (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Samsung et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Menu assistant : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher l’icône d’assistance qui vous permettra d’accéder aux fonctions prises en charge par les touches externes ou les options du volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez également modifier le menu de l’icône de raccourci. – Main dominante : sélectionnez la main gauche ou droite pour une utilisation aisée du menu d’assistance. – Modif. : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant sur le menu d’assistance. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Contrôle interaction : activez le mode Contrôle par interaction afin d’éviter que l'appareil réagisse aux saisies malencontreuses qui pourraient se produire dans une application. Mode Blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Paramètres 94 Contrôle Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace ou un signe de ponctuation. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. • Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. Paramètres 95 • Contrôle du curseur : activez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Outil reconnais. vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale. Recherche vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • Réveil vocal : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. Paramètres 96 • Événements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements manqués lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur. • Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. • Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. • Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter pour l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance vocale lorsque vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la recherche vocale avec un casque Bluetooth lorsque ce dernier est connecté à l’appareil. Options synthèse vocale • MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. Paramètres 97 Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil. Mouvement de paume Activez la fonction des mouvements de la main pour contrôler l’appareil par un simple contact avec l’écran tactile. • Capture d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Muet/Pause : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. Smart Screen • Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque vous consultez l’écran. Général Comptes Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Paramètres 98 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Accessoires Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. • Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez à une station d’accueil ou l’en déconnectez. • Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté. Paramètres 99 Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Applications par défaut Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications. Utilisateurs Paramétrez et gérez les profils utilisateurs pour des réglages personnalisés. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Mode Éco. d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. • Performances du CPU : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources système de l’appareil. • Sortie d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir diminuer la luminosité de l’écran. • En savoir plus : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Paramètres 100 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – ENREGISTREMENT DU COMPTE : enregistrez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : parametrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant de sources inconnues. • Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour permettre à Google de vérifier que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. Paramètres 101 • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. À propos de l’appareil Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le logiciel de l’appareil. Paramètres Google Utilisez cette application pour configurer certaines fonctions proposées par Google. Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications. 102 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, il est possible qu’elle n’ait pas été correctement insérée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez-la. Dépannage 103 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications, ou éteindre l’appareil et le rallumer. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 secondes afin de le redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 104 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctionnalités, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable et sa charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 105 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 106 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 107 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. www.samsung.com French. 07/2014. Rev.1.1 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. www.samsung.com User Manual SM-G530FZ English (EU). 01/2015. Rev.1.0 2 Table of Contents Read me first Getting started 6 Package contents 7 Device layout 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery 14 Using a memory card 16 Turning the device on and off 16 Locking and unlocking the screen Basics 17 Using the touch screen 20 Home screen layout 24 Notifications panel 26 Opening apps 26 Installing or uninstalling apps 28 Entering text 30 Screen capture 31 My Files 32 Power saving feature Network connectivity 33 Mobile data 33 Wi-Fi 34 Tethering and Mobile hotspot Personalising 36 Managing the Home and Apps screens 38 Setting wallpaper and ringtones 39 Changing the screen lock method 40 Transferring data from your previous device 41 Setting up accounts Phone 42 Making calls 43 Receiving calls 44 Options during calls Contacts 45 Adding contacts 45 Importing and exporting contacts 46 Searching for contacts Table of Contents 3 Connecting with other devices 69 Bluetooth 71 Wi-Fi Direct 73 NFC 75 Screen Mirroring 77 Mobile printing Device & data manager 78 Upgrading the device 79 Transferring files between the device and a computer 80 Backing up and restoring data 80 Performing a data reset Settings 81 About Settings 81 CONNECTIONS 85 DEVICE 88 PERSONAL 90 SYSTEM Troubleshooting Messages & email 47 Messages 48 Email Camera 51 Basic shooting 53 Shooting modes 56 Camera settings Gallery 58 Viewing content on the device 59 Editing photos Useful apps and features 60 S Planner 61 Internet 62 Video 62 Calculator 63 Clock 64 Memo 65 Radio 66 Voice Recorder 67 Google apps 4 Read me first Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or device’s software. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Apps related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by apps supplied by providers other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or apps to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services depending on your data plan. For large data transfers, it is recommended to use the Wi-Fi feature. • Default apps that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an app provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed apps, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Read me first 5 Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information 6 Getting started Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Battery • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Using unapproved accessories may cause the performance problems and malfunctions that are not covered by the warranty. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Getting started 7 Device layout Microphone Touch screen Front camera Proximity sensor Multipurpose jack Home button Recent apps button Power button Earpiece Back button Volume button Speaker Headset jack GPS antenna Back cover Main antenna Rear camera Flash NFC antenna (on the battery) Getting started 8 • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Using a Samsung-approved screen protector is recommended. Unapproved screen protectors may cause the sensors to malfunction. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press to turn on or lock the screen. Recent apps • Tap to open the list of recent apps. • Tap and hold to access additional options for the current screen. Home • Press to turn on the screen while the screen is locked. • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to launch Google. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. • Only microSIM cards work with the device. • Some LTE services may not be available depending on the service provider. For more information about service availability, contact your service provider. 1 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover. Getting started 10 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to remove the memory card. • Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards. 3 Insert the battery with the battery’s gold-coloured contacts properly aligned with the device’s contacts. 2 1 Getting started 11 4 Replace the back cover. • Ensure that the back cover is closed tightly. • Use only Samsung-approved back covers and accessories with the device. Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the battery. 3 Pull out the SIM or USIM card. Getting started 12 Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. A computer can be also used to charge the battery by connecting them via the USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. • If you use multiple apps at once, network apps, or apps that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these apps after fully charging the battery. Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into the multipurpose jack. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. Getting started 13 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket and easily accessible while charging. Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save the battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary apps using the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of apps. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the screen brightness. Getting started 14 Using a memory card Installing a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the My Files → SD card folder. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing upwards. 3 Replace the back cover. Getting started 15 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the memory card. 3 Replace the back cover. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or can damage the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Getting started 16 Turning the device on and off Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. When you turn on your device for the first time or after performing a data reset, follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. Locking and unlocking the screen Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and locks it. Also, the screen turns off and automatically locks if the device is not used for a specified period. To unlock the screen, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area. You can change the unlock code to unlock the screen. Refer to Changing the screen lock method for more information. 17 Basics Using the touch screen • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which are outside of the touch input area. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. • It is recommended to use fingers when you use the touch screen. Tapping To open an app, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the keyboard on the screen, tap it with a finger. Basics 18 Tapping and holding Tap and hold an item or the screen for more than 2 seconds to access available options. Dragging To move an item, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in. Double-tap again to return. Basics 19 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Apps screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list of items, such as contacts. Spreading and pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 20 Home screen layout Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of the device’s features. It displays widgets, shortcuts to apps, and more. Widgets are small apps that launch specific app functions to provide information and convenient access on your Home screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or tap one of the screen indicators at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Home screen, refer to Managing the Home screen. An app A folder A screen indicator Favourite apps A widget Basics 21 Home screen options On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, or pinch your fingers together to access the available options. Basics 22 Apps screen The Apps screen displays icons for all apps, including newly installed apps. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Apps screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or select a screen indicator at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Apps screen, refer to Managing the Apps screen. Access additional options. An app Screen indicators Basics 23 Indicator icons Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen. The icons listed in the table below are most common. The status bar may not appear at the top of the screen in some apps. To display the status bar, drag down from the top of the screen. Icon Meaning No signal Signal strength Roaming (outside of normal service area) GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected HSPA+ network connected / LTE network connected Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Call in progress Missed call Synced with the web Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message Alarm activated Mute mode activated Vibration mode activated Basics 24 Icon Meaning Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Notifications panel Using the notifications panel When you receive new notifications, such as messages or missed calls, indicator icons appear on the status bar. To see more information about the icons, open the notifications panel and view the details. To open the notifications panel, drag the status bar downwards. To close the notifications panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards. Basics 25 You can use the following functions on the notifications panel. Launch Settings. Tap a notification and perform various actions. Clear all notifications. Adjust the brightness. Activate or deactivate options. Tap and hold a button to view more detailed settings. Using the quick setting buttons You can activate or deactivate some features on the notifications panel. Tap the following options to activate or deactivate them. You can view more detailed settings if you tap and hold a button. • Wi-Fi: Refer to Wi-Fi for more information. • Location: Refer to Location for more information. • Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Select a sound mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. Some apps do not allow screen rotation. Basics 26 • Bluetooth: Refer to Bluetooth for more information. • Mobile data: Refer to Data usage or Mobile networks for more information. • U. power saving: Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. • Mobile hotspot: Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. • Screen Mirroring: Refer to Screen Mirroring for more information. • NFC: Refer to NFC for more information. • Sync: When you activate this feature, the device automatically syncs apps, such as calendar or email. • Flight mode: Refer to Flight mode for more information. Opening apps On the Home screen or the Apps screen, select an app icon to open it. To open the list of recently-used apps, tap and select an app icon to open. Closing an app Tap and drag an app icon to the left or right to close it. To close all running apps, tap → . Installing or uninstalling apps Samsung GALAXY Apps Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap GALAXY Apps on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Basics 27 Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap Install. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the button that shows the app’s price. To change the auto update settings, tap → Settings → Auto update apps, and then select an option. Play Store Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap Play Store on the Apps screen. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap INSTALL. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the price and follow the on-screen instructions. To change the auto update settings, tap → SETTINGS → Auto-update apps, and then select an option. Managing apps Uninstalling or disabling apps To disable default apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Uninstall/disable apps. appears on the apps that you can disable. Select an app and tap OK. To uninstall downloaded apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Downloaded apps → → Uninstall. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, select an app, and then tap Uninstall. Basics 28 Enabling apps On the Apps screen, tap → Show disabled apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED, select an app, and then tap Enable. • Hiding apps: Hide apps in the Apps screen only. You can continue to use hidden apps. • Disabling apps: Disable selected default apps that cannot be uninstalled from the device. You cannot use disabled apps. • Uninstalling apps: Uninstall downloaded apps. Entering text Keyboard layout A keyboard appears automatically when you enter text to send messages, create memos, and more. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. For all caps, tap it twice. Change the keyboard settings. Enter a space. Basics 29 Changing the input language Tap → Select input languages, and then select the languages to use. If you select two or more languages, you can switch between the input languages by sliding the space key left or right. Changing the keyboard layout Tap , select a language under INPUT LANGUAGES, and then select a keyboard layout to use. On 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap the corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears. Using additional keyboard functions Tap and hold to use various functions. Other icons may appear instead of depending on the last function that was used. • : Enter text by voice. Change the language. Open the keyboard. Start or pause entering text by voice. • : Change the keyboard settings. • : Enter emoticons. Basics 30 Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. If default keyboards do not appear in the list of available keyboards or you install new keyboards, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Language and input, and then tick a keyboard. Copying and pasting 1 Tap and hold over text. 2 Drag or to select the desired text, or tap Select all to select all text. 3 Tap Copy or Cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. 4 Tap and hold at the point where the text is to be inserted and tap Paste. Screen capture Capture a screenshot while using the device. Press and hold the Home button and the Power button simultaneously. The image is saved in the Gallery → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and share it with others. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps. Basics 31 My Files About My Files Use this app to access various files stored in the device. Tap My Files on the Apps screen. Access additional options. Search for files or folders. View files by categories. View the download history. View files stored in the device. Basics 32 Power saving feature Ultra power saving mode Use this mode to extend the device’s battery power. In ultra power saving mode, the device performs the following: • Restricts the available apps to essential and selected apps only. • Deactivates the mobile data connection when the screen turns off. • Deactivates the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth features. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Ultra power saving mode, and tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. To add an app to the Home screen, tap and select an app. To change the settings for ultra power saving mode, such as network connectivity or sound, tap → Settings. To deactivate ultra power saving mode, tap → Disable ultra power saving mode. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. 33 Network connectivity Mobile data Connect the device to a mobile network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Data usage for additional options. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Data usage, and then tick Mobile data. Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap Mobile data to activate it. Wi-Fi Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Wi-Fi for additional options. Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Select a network from the Wi-Fi networks list. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. 3 Tap Connect. Once the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will reconnect to that network each time it is available without requiring a password. To prevent the device connecting to the network automatically, select it from the list of networks and tap Forget. Network connectivity 34 Tethering and Mobile hotspot About tethering and mobile hotspots Use this feature to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers and other devices if an Internet connection is unavailable. Connections can be made via Wi-Fi, USB, or Bluetooth. You may incur additional charges when using this feature. Using the mobile hotspot Use your device as a mobile hotspot to share your device’s mobile data connection with other devices. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 2 Tick Mobile hotspot. • appears on the status bar. Other devices can find your device in the Wi-Fi networks list. • To set a password for the mobile hotspot, tap → Configure hotspot and select the level of security. Then, enter a password and tap Save. 3 On the other device’s screen, search for and select your device from the Wi-Fi networks list. 4 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. Network connectivity 35 Using USB tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via a USB cable. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 2 Connect your device to the computer via the USB cable. 3 Tick USB tethering. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 4 On the computer, use your device’s mobile data connection. Using Bluetooth tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via Bluetooth. Ensure that the computer that you connect to supports the Bluetooth feature. 1 Pair your device with the other device via Bluetooth. Refer to Pairing with other Bluetooth devices for more information. 2 On the Apps screen of your device, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 3 Tick Bluetooth tethering. 4 On the connected device, open the Bluetooth settings screen, tap → Internet access. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 5 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. The connection methods may vary depending on the connected devices. 36 Personalising Managing the Home and Apps screens Managing the Home screen Adding items Tap and hold an app from the Apps screen, and then drag it to the Home screen. To add widgets, open the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and hold a widget, and then drag it to the Home screen. Moving and removing an item Tap and hold an item on the Home screen, and then drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. You can also move frequently-used apps to the shortcuts area at the bottom of the Home screen. To remove an item, tap and hold the item. Then, drag it to Remove that appears at the top of the screen. Creating a folder 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to Create folder that appears at the top of the screen. 2 Enter a folder name. 3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done. Personalising 37 Managing panels On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area to add, move, or remove a panel. To add a panel, scroll left to the last panel, and then tap . To move a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. To remove a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to Remove at the top of the screen. To set a panel as the main Home screen, tap . Managing the Apps screen Changing the sorting method On the Apps screen, tap → View as and select a sorting method. Hiding apps Hide apps that you do not want to see on the Apps screen. On the Apps screen, tap → Hide apps, select apps, and then tap Done. To display hidden apps, tap → Show hidden apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Moving items On the Apps screen, tap → Edit. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. To move an item to a new panel, drag it to Create page that appears at the top of the screen. Personalising 38 Setting wallpaper and ringtones Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen or the locked screen. 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, and then tap Wallpapers. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Display → Wallpaper. 2 Select a screen to change or apply wallpaper to. 3 Scroll left or right and select from images displayed at the bottom of the screen. To select photos taken by the device’s camera or other images, tap From Gallery. 4 Tap Set as wallpaper or Done. Changing ringtones Change ringtones for incoming calls and notifications. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Sound. To set a ringtone for incoming calls, tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and then tap Done. To use a song stored in the device or in your account as a ringtone, tap Add. To set a ringtone for notifications, tap Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap Done. Personalising 39 Changing the screen lock method You can change the way that you lock the screen to prevent others from accessing your personal information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock, and then select a screen lock method. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Pattern Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. PIN A PIN consists of numbers only. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Password A password consists of characters and numbers. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Personalising 40 Transferring data from your previous device Using backup accounts You can transfer backup data from your previous device to your new device using your Google account. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. Using Samsung Smart Switch You can transfer data of the previous device to a new device via Smart Switch. Visit www.samsung.com/smartswitch for more information. Samsung Smart Switch is not supported on some devices or computers. Using Smart Switch with computers Use this feature to import a backup of your data (from selected manufacturer’s mobile devices) from a computer to your device. You can download the app from www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Back up data from a previous device to the computer. For more information, contact the device’s manufacturer. 2 On the computer, launch Smart Switch. 3 Connect your current device to the computer using the USB cable. 4 On the computer, click the manufacturer of the previous device and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer data to your device. Personalising 41 Using Samsung Kies Import a backup of your data from your computer via Samsung Kies to restore data on your device. You can also back up data to the computer via Samsung Kies. Refer to Connecting with Samsung Kies for more information. Setting up accounts Adding accounts Some apps used on your device require a registered account. Create accounts to have the best experience with your device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts → Add account and select an account service. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. To sync content with your accounts, select an account and tick items to sync. Removing accounts On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, select an account, and then tap → Remove account. 42 Phone Making calls Tap Phone on the Apps screen. Tap Keypad, enter a phone number, and then tap to make a voice call, or tap to make a video call. You can also make calls to phone numbers listed in Logs, Favourites, and Contacts. Add the number to the contacts Access additional options. list. Preview the phone number. View favourite contacts. Delete a preceding character. View the contacts list. View call and message logs. Enter the number using the keypad. Making calls from call logs or contacts list Tap Logs or Contacts, select a contact or a phone number, and then tap or . Phone 43 Making an international call Tap Keypad. Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap . To block outgoing international calls, tap → Settings → Call → Additional settings → Call barring → a voice call or video call. Then, tick International calls, enter password, and then tap OK. Receiving calls Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. Rejecting a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, drag the reject message bar upwards. To create various rejection messages, open the Apps screen and tap Phone → → Settings → Call → Set up call reject messages → . Missed calls If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of missed calls. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Phone → Logs to view missed calls. Phone 44 Options during calls During a voice call The following actions are available: • Add call: Dial a second call. • Keypad: Open the keypad. • End call: End the current call. • Speaker: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • Bluetooth: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. Tap to view more options. During a video call The following actions are available: • → Hide me: Hide your image from the other party. • → Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party. • → Capture image: Capture the other party’s image. • → Record video: Record a video of the other party’s images. • → Memo: Create a memo. • → Messages: Send a message. • → Keypad: Open the keypad. • → Speaker off / Speaker on: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • → Switch to headset / Switch to phone: Switch sound output to a connected Bluetooth headset or back to the device’s speaker. Tap the screen to use the following options: • Switch: Switch between the front and rear cameras. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • End call: End the current call. 45 Contacts Adding contacts Moving contacts from other devices You can move contacts from other devices to your device. Refer to Transferring data from your previous device for more information. Creating contacts manually 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. 3 Tap Save. To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, tap Keypad, enter the number, and then tap Add to contacts. Importing and exporting contacts Import contacts from storage services to your device or export contacts from the device to storage services. On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Tap → Settings → Contacts → Import/export, and then select an import or export option. Contacts 46 Searching for contacts On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • / : Make a voice or video call. • : Compose a message. • : Compose an email. Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Home screen Add shortcuts to contacts that you frequently communicate with on the Home screen. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Select a contact. 3 Tap → Add shortcut to home screen. 47 Messages & email Messages Sending messages Send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS). You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. 1 Tap Messages on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . 3 Add recipients and enter a message. Access additional options. Enter a message. Attach files. Select contacts from the contacts list. Enter recipients. Send the message. 4 Tap to send the message. Messages & email 48 Viewing incoming messages Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view the person’s messages. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. While viewing a message, tap to view more options. Email Setting up email accounts Tap Email on the Apps screen. Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Manage accounts → . If you have more than one email account, you can set one as the default account. Tap → Manage accounts, select an account, and then tick Default account. Messages & email 49 Sending emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap at the bottom of the screen to compose a message. Add recipients. Add a CC or BCC. Add recipients from the contacts Enter a message. list. Enter a subject. Send the message. Access additional options. Attach images, videos and others. Save the message for later delivery. Discard the message. Messages & email 50 Reading emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap , select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list or view other options. Reply to all recipients. Forward the message. Go to the previous or next message. Delete the message. Open attachments. Access additional options. Mark the message as a reminder. 51 Camera Basic shooting Taking photos or recording videos 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. 3 Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . View photos and videos you have captured. Start recording a video. Take a photo. Change camera settings. Switch between the front and rear cameras. Display current mode. Change the shooting mode. Camera 52 • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. • The front camera lens is suitable for taking wide-angle photos. Minor distortion may occur in wide-angle photos and does not indicate device performance problems. Launching Camera on the locked screen To quickly take photos of special moments, launch Camera on the locked screen. On the locked screen, drag outside the large circle. If is not shown, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Camera shortcut. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or record videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or record videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or record videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Camera 53 Shooting modes Auto Use this mode to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Auto. Selfie Use this mode to take a self-portrait using the front camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera. 2 Tap to use the front camera. 3 Tap → Selfie. 4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself. Wide selfie Use this mode to take a wide self-portrait using the front camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera. 2 Tap to use the front camera. 3 Tap → Wide selfie. Camera 54 4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself. 5 Slowly rotate the device left and then right to take a panoramic photo. The device combines the photos into a single panoramic image. • Make sure to keep the blue frame inside the viewfinder window. • The subjects should remain still while taking wide self-portraits. • The resolution of a photo may be affected by lighting conditions. • The top and bottom parts of the image displayed on the preview screen may be cut out of the photo depending on the shooting conditions. Beauty face Use this mode to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Beauty face. Panorama Use this mode to take a photo composed of many photos strung together. The device identifies the photo with in Gallery. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Panorama. To get the best shot, follow these tips: • Move the camera slowly in one direction. • Keep the image within the frame on the camera’s viewfinder. • Avoid taking photos of indistinct backgrounds, such as an empty sky or a plain wall. Camera 55 Rear-cam selfie Use this mode to allow the camera to detect and focus your face automatically when you take a self-portrait using the rear camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Rear-cam selfie. 2 Move the frame to the position where your face will appear and adjust the frame size. 3 Position the device so the rear camera is aimed at your face. When the face is detected, the device beeps. Then, the device automatically takes the photo after 2 seconds. Continuous shot Use this mode to take a series of photos of moving subjects. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Continuous shot. Tap and hold to take several photos continuously. HDR (Rich tone) Use this mode to take photos with rich colours and reproduce details even in bright and dark areas. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → HDR (Rich tone). Without effect With effect Camera 56 Night Use this mode to take a photo in low-light conditions, without using the flash. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Night. Animated GIF Use this mode to create an animated photo from a series of photos. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Animated GIF. Camera settings On the Apps screen, tap Camera → . Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. • : Activate or deactivate the flash. • : Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene, when taking photos with the front camera. • : Use this for delayed-time shots. • : Select a filter effect to use when taking photos or recording videos. • / : Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. To use more options, tap . • Palm selfie: Set the device to detect your palm, so you can use it to take self-portraits. • Beauty face: Set the device to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. Camera 57 • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Tap to take pics: Tap the image on the preview screen to take photos. • Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Recording mode: Change the recording mode. • Location tags: Set the device to attach the location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • When you share a photo with the location tag attached, the location information may be exposed to others. • Storage location: Select the memory location for storage. • Grid lines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Voice control: Set the device to take photos with voice commands. • The volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Reset settings: Reset the camera settings. The available options vary depending on the mode used. 58 Gallery Viewing content on the device On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video. Video files show the icon on the preview thumbnail. To hide or show the menu bar and the preview thumbnails, tap the screen. Access additional options. Delete the image. Modify the image. Move to the previous screen. Send the image to others. Image and video preview thumbnails Gallery 59 Editing photos Edit images by applying various effects. Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. While viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Rotate: Rotate the image. • Crop: Crop the image. • Colour: Adjust the saturation or brightness of the image. • Effect: Apply effects to the image. • Portrait: Correct red-eye, adjust and retouch faces, or make background blurry. • Sticker: Attach stickers. • Drawing: Draw on the image. • Frame: Apply frames to the image. When you are finished editing the image, tap . 60 Useful apps and features S Planner Creating events or tasks 1 Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . Alternatively, select a date with no events or tasks in it and tap the date again. If the date already has saved events or tasks in it, tap the date and tap . 3 Select either event or task and enter details. • Add event: Set a start and end date for an event. You can set an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Add a task to do on a specific date. You can set an optional priority setting. Enter a title. Add more details. Select a calendar to use or sync with. Select an item. Set a start and end date for the event. 4 Tap Save to save the event or task. Useful apps and features 61 Syncing events and tasks with your accounts Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To sync events and tasks with your accounts, tap → Sync. To add accounts to sync with, tap → Calendars → Add account. Then, select an account to sync with and sign in. When an account is added, a green circle is displayed next to the account name. To change an account’s syncing option, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, and then select an account service. Internet 1 Tap Internet on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the address field. To change the search engine, tap the search engine icon next to the web address field. 3 Enter the web address or a keyword, and then tap Go. To view the toolbars, drag your finger downwards slightly on the screen. Read an article in reading mode. Bookmark the current webpage. Open the homepage. Move to the previously-visited page. View your bookmarks and recent Internet history. Access additional options. Open the webpage window manager. Refresh the current webpage. Useful apps and features 62 Video Playing videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Select a video to play. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change screen ratio. Skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Access additional options. Pause and resume playback. Rotate the screen's orientation. Adjust the volume. Calculator Use this app for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Apps screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator. Useful apps and features 63 Clock Alarm On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Alarm. Setting alarms Tap in the alarms list, set an alarm time, select the days on which the alarm will repeat, set other various alarm options, and then tap Save. To activate or deactivate alarms, tap next to the alarm in the alarms list. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time and tone for the smart alarm. A smart alarm starts at a low volume a few minutes before a preset alarm is scheduled to sound. The volume of the smart alarm increases gradually until you turn it off or the preset alarm sounds. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. If you have previously enabled the snooze option, drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap → Select, select alarms, and then tap . World clock On the Apps screen, tap Clock → World clock. Creating clocks Tap and enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. Deleting clocks Tap → Select, select clocks, and then tap . Useful apps and features 64 Stopwatch On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Stopwatch. Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times. Tap Stop to stop timing. To clear lap times, tap Reset. Timer On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Timer. Set the duration, and then tap Start. Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off. Memo Use this app to create memos and organise them by category. Tap Memo on the Apps screen. Composing memos Tap on the memos list and enter a memo. While composing a memo, use the following options: • : Create or set a category. • : Insert images. • : Make a voice recording to insert. To save the memo, tap Save. To edit a memo, tap a memo, and then tap the content of the memo. Searching for memos Tap on the memos list and enter a keyword to search for memos that include the keyword. Useful apps and features 65 Radio Listening to the FM radio Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Before you use this app, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the first time. Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. View the list of favourite stations. Access additional options. Turn the FM radio on or off. Adjust the volume. Add the current radio station to the favourites list. Fine-tune the frequency. View the list of available stations. Record a song from the FM radio. Enter radio station frequency manually. Search for an available radio station. Scanning radio stations Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Tap → Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. Useful apps and features 66 Voice Recorder Recording voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone. Tap to pause recording. To cancel recording, tap . Tap to finish recording. Display the list of voice memos. Access additional options. Start recording. Recording elapsed time Playing voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap and select a voice memo to play. • / : Pause or resume playback. • / : Skip to the previous or next voice memo. Useful apps and features 67 Google apps Google provides entertainment, social network, and business apps. You may require a Google account to access some apps. Refer to Setting up accounts for more information. To view more app information, open the each app’s main screen and tap → Help. Some apps may not be available or may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Chrome Search for information and browse webpages. Drive Store your content on the cloud, access it from anywhere, and share it with others. Gmail Send or receive emails via the Google Mail service. Google Search quickly for items on the Internet or your device. Google Settings Configure settings for some features provided by Google. Google+ Share your news and follow updates that your family, friends, and others share. You can also back up your photos and videos, and more. Hangouts Chat with your friends individually or in groups and use images, emoticons, and video calls while you are chatting. Useful apps and features 68 Maps Find your location on the map, search for locations, and view location information for various places. Photos Manage photos, albums, and videos that you have saved on the device and uploaded to Google+. Play Books Download various books from Play Store and read them. Play Games Download games from Play Store and play them with others. Play Movies & TV Watch videos stored on your device and download various content to watch from Play Store. Play Music Discover, listen to, and share music on your device. Play Newsstand Read news and magazines that interest you in one convenient location. Voice Search Search quickly for items by saying a keyword or phrase. YouTube Watch or create videos and share them with others. 69 Connecting with other devices Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via Bluetooth. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. Connecting with other devices 70 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it, and then tap Scan. The detected devices are listed. To set the device as visible to other devices, tap the device name. 2 Select a device to pair with. If your device has paired with the device before, tap the device name without confirming the auto-generated passkey. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. 3 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many apps support data transfer via Bluetooth. You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other Bluetooth devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Bluetooth, and then select a device to transfer the image to. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. Or, set your device as visible to other devices. 4 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device. Connecting with other devices 71 Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Unpairing Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth. The device displays the paired devices in the list. 2 Tap next to the device’s name to unpair. 3 Tap Unpair. Wi-Fi Direct About Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Connecting to other devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The detected devices are listed. 3 Select a device to connect to. To connect to multiple devices, tap → Multi-connect. To change the device name, tap → Rename device. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device to confirm. Connecting with other devices 72 Sending and receiving data You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct, select a device to transfer the image to, and then tap Done. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device. Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Ending the device connection 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The device displays the connected devices in the list. 3 Tap End connection → OK to disconnect the devices. Connecting with other devices 73 NFC About NFC Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for transportation or events after downloading the required apps. The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid damaging the NFC antenna. Using the NFC feature Use the NFC feature to send images or contacts to other devices, and read product information from NFC tags. If you insert a SIM or USIM card that has a payment feature, you can use the device to make payments conveniently. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. Place the NFC antenna area on the back of your device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag appears. Ensure that the device’s screen is unlocked. Otherwise, the device will not read NFC tags or receive data. Connecting with other devices 74 Making a purchase with the NFC feature Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile payment service. To register or get more information about the service, contact your service provider. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. Touch the NFC antenna area on the back of your device to the NFC card reader. To set the default payment app, tap Tap and pay and select an app. The payment services list may not include all available payment apps. Sending data Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. 2 Tap Android Beam and tap the Android Beam switch to activate it. 3 Select an item and touch the other device’s NFC antenna to your device’s NFC antenna. 4 When Touch to beam. appears on the screen, tap your device’s screen to send the item. Connecting with other devices 75 Screen Mirroring About Screen Mirroring Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature. Screen mirroring -enabled devices (AllShare Cast dongle, HomeSync and Wi-Fi Miracast devices) • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP 2.X) may not be compatible with this feature. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be detected or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience. Connecting with other devices 76 Viewing content on a TV Before you connect your device to a TV, connect the TV and the screen mirroring-enabled device. To set up the connection, refer to the device’s user manual. The following actions are an example of viewing content on a TV connected via an AllShare Cast dongle. 1 Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the TV using an HDMI cable. 2 On the TV, select a connection mode, such as HDMI mode, to connect an external device. 3 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Screen Mirroring. The detected devices are listed. 4 Select a device to connect to. Your device’s screen appears on the TV screen. If you connect the device for the first time, tap and hold the dongle’s name in the list and enter the PIN shown on the TV screen. 5 Open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. Connecting with other devices 77 Mobile printing Connect the device to a printer via Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct, and print images or documents. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. Adding printer plug-ins Add printer plug-ins for printers you want to connect the device to. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing → Add printer, and search for a printer plug-in in Play Store. Select a printer plug-in and install it. Connecting to a printer On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing, select a printer plug-in, and then tap the switch at the top right of the screen to activate it. The device searches for printers that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your device. Select a printer to use as the default printer. To add printers manually, select a printer plug-in, tap → Add printer → , enter details, and then tap OK. To change print settings, select a printer plug-in and tap → Printing settings. Printing content While viewing content, such as images or documents, tap → Print, and then select a printer. 78 Device & data manager Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information about how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Device & data manager 79 Transferring files between the device and a computer Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the device when you are transferring files. Doing so may cause data loss or device damage. • Do not disconnect the device from the computer when you play files saved in the device on the connected computer. After you finish playing the file, disconnect the device from the computer. • The devices may not connect properly if they are connected via a USB hub. Directly connect the device to the computer’s USB port. Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer app that manages media contents and personal information with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Device & data manager 80 Backing up and restoring data Keep your personal information, app data, and settings safe on your device. You can back up your sensitive information to a backup account and access it later. 1 Tap Settings on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Backup and reset and tick Back up my data. 3 Tap Backup account and select an account as the backup account. To restore data, you must sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard. You can launch and open the setup wizard by performing a factory data reset on the device. If you do not sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard, you cannot restore the backup data. Performing a data reset Delete all settings and data on the device. Before performing a factory data reset, ensure you back up all important data stored on the device. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. The device automatically restarts. 81 Settings About Settings Use this app to configure the device, set app options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Apps screen. CONNECTIONS Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. To use options, tap . • Scan: Search for available networks. • Wi-Fi Direct: Activate Wi-Fi Direct and connect devices directly via Wi-Fi to share files. • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy Tap → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. When the screen is turned off, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses mobile networks if it is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid additional charges, set this option to Always. Settings 82 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. On the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth, and then tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via Bluetooth. Tethering and Mobile hotspot Use the device as a mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices. Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Tethering and Mobile hotspot. • Mobile hotspot: Use the mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. You can use this feature when the network connection is not available. • USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless modem for the computer. • Bluetooth tethering: Use Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices via Bluetooth. Settings 83 Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. On the Settings screen, tap Flight mode. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount and customise the settings for the limitation. On the Settings screen, tap Data usage. • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for mobile data usage. • Data usage cycle: Set a monthly reset date to monitor data usage between periods. To use more options, tap . • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Restrict background data: Set the device to disable sync in the background while using a mobile network. • Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email. You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → Accounts. • Show Wi-Fi usage: Set the device to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. • Mobile hotspots: Select mobile hotspots to prevent apps that are running in the background from using them. Location Change settings for location information permissions. On the Settings screen, tap Location, and then tap the Location switch to activate it. • Mode: Select a method to collect your location data. • RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS: View which apps request your current location information and their battery usage. • LOCATION SERVICES: View the location services your device is using. Settings 84 NFC Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information. On the Settings screen, tap NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. • Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. • Tap and pay: Set the default payment app for mobile payments. The payment services list may not include all available payment apps. Screen Mirroring Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others. On the Settings screen, tap Screen Mirroring. Printing Download a printer app to print files. On the Settings screen, tap Printing. More networks Customise settings to control networks. On the Settings screen, tap More networks. Default messaging app Select the default app to use for messaging. Mobile networks • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network mode: Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and manually register a network. Settings 85 VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). DEVICE Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. On the Settings screen, tap Sound. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. • Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages and missed calls. • Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. • Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when you tap the buttons on the keypad. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an app or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen. Display Change the display settings. On the Settings screen, tap Display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screen: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. Settings 86 • Notification panel: – Application notifications: Change the notification method for each app. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Auto rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is charging. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. Lock screen Change settings for the locked screen. On the Settings screen, tap Lock screen. • Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock method selected. • Dual clock: Set the device to show the dual clock. • Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. • Camera shortcut: Set the device to show the camera shortcut on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. • Unlock effect: Select an effect that you see when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. Settings 87 Call Customise the settings for calling features. On the Settings screen, tap Call. • Set up call reject messages: Add or edit the message sent when you reject a call. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button. • Additional settings: – Caller ID: Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls. – Call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number. – Auto area code: Set the device to automatically insert a prefix (area or country code) before a phone number. – Call barring: Block incoming or outgoing calls. – Call waiting: Allow incoming call alerts when a call is in progress. – Fixed Dialling Numbers: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers in the FDN list. Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card. • Ringtones and keypad tones: – Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. – Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. – Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when buttons on the keypad are tapped. • Hide my video: Select an image to be shown to the other party. • Voicemail service: Select your voicemail service provider. • Voicemail settings: Enter the number to access the voicemail service. Obtain this number from the service provider. Application manager View and manage the apps on your device. On the Settings screen, tap Application manager. Settings 88 PERSONAL Accounts Add email or SNS accounts. On the Settings screen, tap Accounts. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. On the Settings screen, tap Backup and reset. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and app data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and app data when the apps are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Accessibility Use this feature to improve accessibility to the device. On the Settings screen, tap Accessibility. • Direct access: Set the device to open selected accessibility menus when you press the Home button three times quickly. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when you press the Power button. • Single tap mode: Set the device to control incoming calls or notifications by tapping the button instead of dragging it. • SERVICES: Select an accessibility app to use. Settings 89 • TalkBack: Activate TalkBack, which provides voice feedback. To view help information to learn how to use this feature, tap Settings → Launch “Explore by touch” tutorial. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read the password aloud when you enter the password while TalkBack is activated. • Font size: Change the font size. • Magnification gestures: Set the device to magnify the screen and to zoom in on a specific area. • Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate TalkBack when you press and hold the Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers. • Text-to-speech options: – PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select an engine for the text-to-speech feature. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Default language status: View the status of the current language set for the text-to speech feature. • Flash notification: Set the flash to blink when you have incoming calls, new messages, or notifications. • Turn off all sounds: Set the device to mute all device sounds, such as media sounds, and the caller’s voice during a call. • Google subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by Google and to change the closed caption settings. • Mono audio: Set the device to switch the sound output from stereo to mono when a headset is connected. • Sound balance: Set the device to adjust the sound balance when using a headset. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Interaction control: Activate interaction control mode to restrict the device’s reaction to inputs while using apps. Settings 90 SYSTEM Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. On the Settings screen, tap Language and input. Language Select a display language for all menus and apps. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • English(UK): Select a default keyboard layout. • Select input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by tapping the space bar or punctuation mark. • Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. • Keyboard swipe: – None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature. – Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. Settings 91 • Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Voice search • Language: Select a language for voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • “Ok Google” Detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the wake-up command while using the search app. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow voice input of search keywords via the Bluetooth headset microphone when a Bluetooth headset is connected. Text-to-speech options • PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech feature. Settings 92 Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. On the Settings screen, tap Date and time. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Automatic time zone: Set the device to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Ultra power saving mode Extend standby time and reduce battery consumption by displaying a simpler layout and allowing limited access to an app. Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Ultra power saving mode, and then tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Settings 93 Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. On the Settings screen, tap Battery. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. On the Settings screen, tap Storage. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default apps occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device. Security Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card. On the Settings screen, tap Security. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Set the device to allow the installation of apps from unknown sources. • Verify apps: Set the device to check the apps for harmful content before installing them. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. Settings 94 • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. • SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate the device when lost or stolen. • Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device from the Find my mobile website. • Set up SIM card lock: – Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. – Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Make passwords visible: Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Security policy updates: Set the device to check and download security updates. • Send security reports: Set the device to automatically send the updated security reports to Samsung. • Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various apps. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. About device Access device information, edit the device name, or update device software. On the Settings screen, tap About device. 95 Troubleshooting Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some situations may not apply to your device. When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device does not turn on • When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Fully charge the battery before turning on the device. • The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again. • Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again. Troubleshooting 96 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly • If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch screen may not function properly. • If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen, or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may malfunction. • The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or turn off the device and turn it on again. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button and the Volume button down simultaneously for more than 7 seconds to restart it. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Calls are not connected • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Troubleshooting 97 Sound echoes during a call Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area. A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station. Move to another area and try again. • When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to issues with the service provider’s network. The battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Charge the battery. The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved chargers) • Ensure that the charger is connected properly. • If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again. The battery depletes faster than when first purchased • When you expose the device or the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the useful charge may be reduced. • Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some apps, such as games or the Internet. • The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time. Troubleshooting 98 Your device is hot to the touch When you use apps that require more power or use apps on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera app. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera app after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Photo quality is poorer than the preview • The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the photography techniques you use. • If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images may be out of focus. Error messages appear when opening multimedia files If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported, such as DivX or AC3, install an app that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your device supports, visit www.samsung.com. Troubleshooting 99 • Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos captured by other devices may not work properly. • Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet, such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly. Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Your device cannot find your current location GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations. Troubleshooting 100 Data stored in the device has been lost Always make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. Otherwise, you cannot restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored in the device. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. Copyright Copyright © 2015 Samsung Electronics This manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. Présentation de l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Touche Accueil Touche Retour Touche Marche/ Arrêt Touche de volume Touche Applications récentes Connecteur à fonctions multiples Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Seules les cartes microSIM sont compatibles avec cet appareil. 2 1 Charger la batterie Avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois, vous devez charger la batterie. Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Élimination correcte Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur l’appareil et la mise au rebut de la batterie, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Ce symbole apposé sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. Ce symbole apposé sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Déclaration de conformité Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux dispositions applicables de la Directive 1999/5/CE. Rendez-vous sur www.samsung.com/mobile_doc pour afficher la Déclaration de conformité. Consulter le mode d'emploi Sur votre appareil, ouvrez le navigateur Web et sélectionnez le favori correspondant au mode d’emploi dans la liste des favoris. Vous pouvez également vous rendre sur le site www.samsung.com pour consulter des informations sur l'appareil, le mode d'emploi, etc. • En fonction de votre navigateur ou de votre opérateur, le mode d’emploi peut ne pas être disponible dans les favoris. • L’accès au Web peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. SM-G530FZ Guide de prise en main rapide Respectez les avertissements ci-dessous, afin d’éviter de blesser autrui ou d’endommager l’appareil • Ne laissez pas les jeunes enfants ou les animaux de compagnie mordiller ou lécher l’appareil. • N’enfoncez pas l’appareil dans les yeux, les oreilles ou toute autre partie du corps, et ne l’introduisez pas dans la bouche. • Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash, ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux. • N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser votre appareil à des températures comprises entre 5°C et 35°C. • Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine ou de conteneurs à haute pression. • Conservez votre appareil au sec. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil en extérieur pendant un orage. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule. Pour protéger votre ouïe lorsque vous utilisez un casque audio, n’écoutez pas à des volumes élevés pendant trop longtemps. Pour afficher la totalité des consignes de sécurité, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Consignes de sécurité Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes de sécurité, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. Avertissement Suivez les avertissements indiqués cidessous, afin d’éviter tout accident comme un incendie ou une explosion • Évitez de heurter ou d’endommager votre appareil. - Ne placez pas l’appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à la ceinture. - Rangez les batteries de rechange dans un étui de protection approprié. • Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des fournitures homologué(e)s. • Évitez que le connecteur à fonction multiple et les bornes de la batterie n’entrent en contact avec des éléments conducteurs, tels que du métal ou des liquides. • Ne touchez pas l’appareil avec des mains humides. De même, n’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des environnements humides, tels que des toilettes, ou lors d’activités aquatiques, telles que la nage. • Si une partie quelconque de l’appareil est fissurée ou brisée, ou si l’appareil chauffe, cessez immédiatement de l’utiliser et apportez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. • N’allumez pas l’appareil et ne l’utilisez pas si le compartiment de la batterie est exposé à l’air libre. Printed in Korea GH68-43006B Rev.1.0 French. 12/2014 Le contenu de ce guide de prise en main rapide peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Informations sur la certification DAS Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur la certification DAS, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES Votre appareil mobile a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé. La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 W/kg. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP : Valeurs DAS pour les pays de l’Union européenne : les valeurs DAS indiquées ci-dessous sont valables uniquement pour les appareils destinés à être utilisés au sein de l’Union européenne. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle DAS au niveau de la tête 0,464 W/kg DAS au niveau du corps 0,351 W/kg Des essais DAS ont été réalisés avec ce produit porté à une distance de 1,5 cm du corps. Afin de respecter les exigences en matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences, cet appareil doit être positionné au moins à cette distance du corps. www.sar-tick.com Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile est faible. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de quelconques précautions spéciales. Cependant, des organismes tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant minimiser leur exposition aux radiofréquences de réduire la durée d'utilisation de l'appareil ou d’utiliser autant que possible un kit mains-libres permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et de leur corps durant son utilisation. Conformément à la législation française en vigueur, nous sommes tenus de vous informer qu’il est recommandé dans ce cas d’éloigner le téléphone du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des adolescents. Valeurs DAS pour les autres pays : pour connaître les valeurs DAS spécifiques à votre appareil, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com/sar où vous pourrez effectuer une recherche en fonction de votre zone géographique et de la référence de votre modèle. Pour transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel appareil : visitez www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en savoir plus. www.samsung.com Mode d'emploi SM-G530FZ French. 02/2015. Rev.1.0 2 Table des matières À lire avant utilisation Démarrage 6 Contenu du coffret 7 Présentation de l’appareil 9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie 14 Utiliser une carte mémoire 16 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 16 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Disposition de l'écran d’accueil 24 Volet des raccourcis 26 Ouvrir des applications 26 Installer ou désinstaller des applications 28 Saisir du texte 30 Capture d'écran 31 Mes fichiers 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie Connectivité réseau 33 Données mobiles 33 Wi-Fi 34 Modem et point d'accès mobile Personnaliser votre appareil 36 Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications 38 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries 39 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran 40 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil 41 Paramétrer des comptes Téléphone 42 Passer des appels 43 Recevoir des appels 44 Options en cours d’appel Contacts 45 Ajouter des contacts 45 Importer et exporter des contacts 46 Rechercher des contacts Table des matières 3 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 69 Bluetooth 71 Wi-Fi Direct 73 NFC 75 Screen Mirroring 77 Fonction d’impression mobile Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 78 Mettre l’appareil à jour 79 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et un ordinateur 80 Sauvegarder et restaurer des données 80 Réinitialiser les données Paramètres 81 Accéder au menu des paramètres 81 CONNEXIONS 85 APPAREIL 88 PERSONNEL 90 SYSTÈME Dépannage Messages et e-mails 47 Messages 48 Email Appareil photo 51 Prise de vue de base 53 Modes de prise de vue 56 Paramètres de l'appareil photo Galerie 58 Afficher les photos et les vidéos de l’appareil 59 Modifier des photos Applications et fonctions utiles 60 S Planner 61 Internet 62 Vidéo 62 Calculatrice 63 Horloge 64 Mémo 65 Radio 66 Enregistreur vocal 67 Applications Google 4 À lire avant utilisation Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • En fonction de votre zone géographique, de votre opérateur ou de la version logicielle, certains contenus peuvent différer par rapport à votre appareil. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des prestataires autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. • Les services de données tels que l’envoi ou la réception de messages, le téléchargement ou le chargement de données, la synchronisation automatique ou l’utilisation de services de localisation peuvent occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre à laquelle vous avez souscrit dans le cadre de votre forfait. Pour les transferts de données volumineux, il est recommandé d’utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi. • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. À lire avant utilisation 5 Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires 6 Démarrage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Batterie • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation d’accessoires non homologués peut entraîner des problèmes de performances, ainsi que des dysfonctionnements non couverts par la garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil Microphone Écran tactile Objectif avant Capteur de proximité Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Accueil Touche Applications récentes Touche Marche/Arrêt Écouteur Touche Retour Touche de volume Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Antenne GPS Cache arrière Antenne principale Objectif arrière Flash Antenne NFC (sur la batterie) Démarrage 8 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Appuyez sur cette touche pour activer ou verrouiller l'écran. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour accéder à des options supplémentaires dans l’écran actuel. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour allumer l’écran lorsqu’il est verrouillé. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer la fonction de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM fournie par votre opérateur, ainsi que la batterie. • Seules les cartes microSIM sont compatibles avec cet appareil. • La disponibilité de certains services 4G dépend de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus sur la disponibilité des services, contactez votre opérateur. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache arrière. Évitez de plier ou de déformer excessivement le cache arrière. Vous risqueriez de l’endommager. Démarrage 10 2 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas. • N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM. Si une carte mémoire venait à se coincer dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire retirer. • Veillez à ne pas perdre ou à ne pas laisser d’autres personnes utiliser votre carte SIM ou USIM. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de dommage ou désagrément résultant d’une perte ou d’un vol de carte. 3 Insérez la batterie en alignant correctement ses bornes avec celles de l'appareil. 2 1 Démarrage 11 4 Remettez le cache arrière en place. • Assurez-vous que le cache arrière est bien fermé. • Avec cet appareil, utilisez uniquement des caches arrières et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Retirer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Retirez la batterie. 3 Retirez la carte SIM/USIM. Démarrage 12 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez également charger la batterie à l’aide d’un ordinateur en les connectant via le câble USB. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. Démarrage 13 • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l’appareil. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d'une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise lors du chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du Gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Démarrage 14 Utiliser une carte mémoire Installer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 64 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier Mes fichiers → Carte SD. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le haut. 3 Remettez le cache arrière en place. Démarrage 15 Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Retirez la carte mémoire. 3 Remettez le cache arrière en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela peut occasionner une perte ou une corruption des données ou des dommages au niveau de la carte mémoire ou du périphérique. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Démarrage 16 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois ou après avoir réinitialisé les paramètres, suivez les instructions à l'écran pour configurer votre appareil. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille. De même, si vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un certain temps, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l’écran dans le sens de votre choix. Vous pouvez changer le code permettant de déverrouiller l'écran. Pour plus d’informations, reportezvous à la section Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran. 17 Fonctions de base Utiliser l’écran tactile • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser l’écran tactile avec les doigts. Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une touche à l’écran ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier à l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Maintenir appuyé Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d'options contextuelle, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément ou l'écran pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Pour annuler le zoom, appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises sur l'écran. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste d'éléments, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Écarter et rapprocher les doigts Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Disposition de l'écran d’accueil Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. Les widgets sont de petits outils qui permettent d’obtenir des informations comme la météo ou l’actualité par exemple. Pour afficher d'autres volets, faites défiler l'écran vers la gauche ou la droite, ou sélectionnez l'icône d'un type de volet en bas de l'écran. Pour personnaliser l’écran d’accueil, reportez-vous à la section Gérer l’écran d’accueil. Application Dossier Volet d'écran d'accueil Applications favorites Widget Fonctions de base 21 Options de l’écran d’accueil Pour accéder aux options disponibles, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran d'accueil ou rapprochez-y deux doigts. Fonctions de base 22 Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher d’autres volets, faites défiler la liste des applications vers la gauche ou la droite ou appuyez sur le point d'un volet d’applications en bas de l’écran. Pour plus d’informations sur la personnalisation de la liste des applications, reportez-vous à la section Gérer la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Application Volets d’applications Fonctions de base 23 Icônes d’informations Des icônes d'informations sont susceptibles de s'afficher dans la barre d'état en haut de l'écran. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Il se peut que la barre d’état ne s’affiche pas en haut de l’écran dans certaines applications. Pour afficher la barre d’état, faites glisser le doigt du haut de l’écran vers le bas. Icône Signification Aucun signal Puissance du signal Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau UMTS connecté Réseau HSDPA connecté Réseau HSPA+ connecté / Réseau LTE (4G) connecté Connecté au réseau Wi-Fi Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Appel en cours Appel manqué Synchronisation avec le Web Connecté à un ordinateur Carte SIM ou USIM absente Nouveau SMS ou MMS Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Vibreur activé Fonctions de base 24 Icône Signification Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Volet des raccourcis Utiliser le volet des raccourcis Lorsque vous recevez de nouvelles notifications, telles que des messages ou des appels manqués, des icônes d’information apparaissent en haut de votre écran. Pour en savoir plus sur les icônes, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et consultez les détails. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glisser vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glissser de bas en haut. Fonctions de base 25 Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrir les Paramètres. Appuyer sur une notification et exécuter différentes actions. Effacer toutes les notifications. Régler la luminosité. Activer ou désactiver des options. Maintenir le doigt appuyé sur une touche pour afficher les paramètres détaillés. Utiliser les touches de paramétrage rapide Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver certaines fonctions du volet des raccourcis. Appuyez sur les options suivantes pour les activer ou les désactiver. Vous pouvez afficher des paramètres plus détaillés en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur une option. • Wi-Fi : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Wi-Fi. • Position : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Localisation. • Son / Vibreur / Muet : activer ou désactiver le son de votre appareil ou le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. Fonctions de base 26 • Bluetooth : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Bluetooth. • Données mobiles : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections Utilisation des données ou Réseaux mobiles. • Ultra éco énergie : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Ultra économie d’énergie. • Pt accès mobile : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Modem et point d'accès mobile. • Screen Mirroring : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Screen Mirroring. • NFC : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section NFC. • Synchro. : activer cette fonction permet à l'appareil de synchroniser automatiquement les applications, comme le calendrier ou la messagerie électronique. • Mode Hors-ligne : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Hors-ligne. Ouvrir des applications Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez l’icône d’une application à ouvrir. Fermer une application Appuyez sur et faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l'icône d'une application pour la fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur → . Installer ou désinstaller des applications Applications Samsung GALAXY Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur GALAXY Apps. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Fonctions de base 27 Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur Installer. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur la touche qui indique le prix de l’application. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Mettre à jour les applications automatiquement, puis sélectionnez une option. Play Store Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → PARAMÈTRES → Mise à jour automatique des applis, puis sélectionnez une option. Gérer les applications Désinstaller ou désactiver des applications Pour désactiver les applications par défaut, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications. L'icône apparaît en haut à droite de chaque application qu’il est possible de désactiver. Sélectionnez une application, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour désinstaller des applications téléchargées, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur → Applications téléchargées → → Désinstaller. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer, depuis la liste des applications, sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, à sélectionner une application, puis à appuyer sur Désinstaller. Fonctions de base 28 Activer les applications désactivées Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Aff. applis désact., sélectionnez des applications à activer de nouveau, puis appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications, appuyer sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, faire défiler jusqu'à l'onglet DÉSACTIVÉ, sélectionner une application, puis appuyer sur Activer. • Masquer des applications : masquer des applications uniquement dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez continuer à utiliser les applications masquées. • Désactiver des applications : désactiver les applications fournies par défaut et ne pouvant pas être désinstallées de l’appareil. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les applications désactivées. • Désinstaller des applications : désinstaller des applications téléchargées. Saisir du texte Disposition du clavier Un clavier apparaît automatiquement lorsque vous saisissez du texte pour envoyer des messages, créer des mémos, etc. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier les paramètres du clavier. Insérer un espace. Fonctions de base 29 Modifier la langue de saisie Appuyez sur → Sélectionner langue de saisie, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Si vous sélectionnez au moins deux langues, vous pouvez passer d'une langue de saisie à l’autre en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la barre d'espace vers la gauche ou la droite. Modifier la disposition du clavier Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une langue sous LANGUES DE SAISIE, puis sélectionnez la disposition de clavier à utiliser. Sur le Clavier 3x4, une touche correspond à trois ou quatre caractères. Pour saisir un caractère, appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur la touche correspondante jusqu’à ce que le caractère souhaité s’affiche. Utiliser les fonctions supplémentaires du clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche pour utiliser diverses fonctions. Suivant la dernière fonction utilisée, d’autres icônes peuvent apparaître à la place de l'icône . •  : saisir du texte en le dictant. Changer de langue. Ouvrir le clavier. Démarrer ou interrompre la saisie orale de texte. •  : modifier les paramètres du clavier. •  : insérer des émoticônes. Fonctions de base 30 Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Si les claviers par défaut n'apparaissent pas dans la liste des claviers disponibles ou que vous installez de nouveaux claviers, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Langue et saisie, puis cochez un clavier. Copier et coller du texte 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte. 2 Faites glisser l'icône ou pour sélectionner le texte voulu, ou appuyez sur Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner l’intégralité du texte. 3 Appuyez sur Copier ou sur Couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. 4 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’emplacement où le texte doit être inséré et appuyez sur Coller. Capture d'écran Vous pouvez effectuer une capure d'écran lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil. Maintenez les touches Accueil et Marche/Arrêt simultanément enfoncées. L'image est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Screenshots. Après avoir réalisé une capture d'écran, vous pouvez modifier l'image et la partager avec d'autres personnes. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Fonctions de base 31 Mes fichiers À propos de Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à divers fichiers enregistrés sur l'appareil. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Rechercher des fichiers ou des dossiers. Afficher les fichiers par catégories. Afficher l'historique de téléchargement. Afficher les fichiers stockés sur l'appareil. Fonctions de base 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie Mode Ultra économie d'énergie Utilisez cette fonction pour prolonger l’autonomie de la batterie. En mode Ultra économie d’énergie, l’appareil se comporte comme suit : • Il limite le nombre d’applications disponibles à l’essentiel et affiche uniquement les applications sélectionnées. • Il désactive la connexion de données mobiles quand l’écran s’éteint. • Il désactive les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Mode Ultra économie d'énergie, puis appuyez sur le curseur Mode Ultra économie d'énergie pour activer la fonction. Pour ajouter une application à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une application. Pour modifier les paramètres du mode Ultra économie d’énergie, par exemple la connectivité réseau ou le son, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Pour désactiver le mode Ultra économie énergie, appuyez sur → Désact. Ultra économie énergie. Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. 33 Connectivité réseau Données mobiles Connectez l’appareil à un réseau mobile pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils. Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation des données ». Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Utilisation des données, puis cochez la case Données mobiles. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, puis à appuyer sur Données mobiles pour activer la fonction. Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section « Wi-Fi ». Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur Wi-Fi pour activer la fonction. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône en forme de verrou. 3 Appuyez sur Connexion. Une fois l’appareil connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, il se reconnecte automatiquement à ce réseau à chaque fois qu’il est disponible sans nécessiter de mot de passe. Pour éviter la connexion automatique de l’appareil au réseau, sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste de réseaux et appuyez sur Oublier. Connectivité réseau 34 Modem et point d'accès mobile À propos de la fonction Point d’accès mobile et modem En l’absence de connexion Internet, utilisez cette fonction pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs et d’autres appareils. Les connexions peuvent être effectuées via la fonction Wi-Fi, USB ou Bluetooth. L’utilisation de cette fonction peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Utiliser le point d’accès mobile Utilisez votre appareil comme point d’accès mobile pour partager sa connexion de données avec d’autres appareils. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 2 Cochez la case Point d'accès mobile. • L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état. Les autres appareils peuvent détecter le vôtre dans la liste de réseaux Wi-Fi. • Pour définir un mot de passe pour le point d’accès mobile, appuyez sur → Configurer le point d'accès, puis sélectionnez le type de sécurité. Saisissez ensuite un mot de passe, puis appuyez sur Enreg. 3 Sur l’écran de l’autre appareil, recherchez et sélectionnez votre appareil dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi. 4 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder à Internet. Connectivité réseau 35 Utiliser le modem USB Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via un câble USB. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 2 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Cochez la case Modem USB. L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, utilisez la connexion de données de votre appareil. Utiliser le modem Bluetooth Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via la fonction Bluetooth. Assurez-vous que l’ordinateur auquel vous vous connectez prend en charge la fonction Bluetooth. 1 Associez les deux appareils via la fonction Bluetooth. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth. 2 Depuis la liste des applications de votre appareil, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 3 Cochez la case Modem Bluetooth. 4 Sur l’appareil connecté, ouvrez l’écran des paramètres Bluetooth, puis appuyez sur → Accès Internet. L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés. 5 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder à Internet. Les modes de connexion peuvent varier en fonction des appareils connectés. 36 Personnaliser votre appareil Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications Gérer l’écran d’accueil Ajouter des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’écran d’accueil. Pour ajouter des widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran d'acceuil, appuyez sur Widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un widget, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran d’accueil. Déplacer et supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément depuis l’écran d’accueil, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Vous pouvez également déplacer les applications fréquemment utilisées vers la zone de raccourcis située en bas de l’écran d’accueil. Pour supprimer un élément, maintenez le doigt appuyé dessus. Faites-le ensuite glisser vers l’option Supprimer qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Créer un dossier 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’option Créer dossier qui apparaît en haut de l’écran. 2 Saisissez un nom de dossier. 3 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les applications à déplacer vers le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser votre appareil 37 Gérer les volets Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide pour ajouter, déplacer ou supprimer un volet. Pour ajouter un volet, faites défiler l'icône l’écran vers la gauche jusqu’au dernier volet, puis appuyez sur . Pour déplacer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser vers l’option Supprimer en haut de l’écran. Pour définir un volet comme écran d’accueil principal, appuyez sur . Gérer la liste des applications Changer le mode d'affichage Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Type d'affichage et sélectionnez un mode d'affichage. Masquer des applications Vous pouvez masquer les applications que vous ne voulez pas retrouver dans la liste des applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Masquer les applications, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour afficher les applications masquées, appuyez sur → Afficher apps masquées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Déplacer des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Modifier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Pour déplacer un élément vers un tout nouveau volet, faites-le glisser vers l’option Créer une page qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Personnaliser votre appareil 38 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond de l’écran d’accueil ou de verrouillage. 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, puis appuyez sur Fonds d'écran. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur Paramètres → Affichage → Fond d'écran dans la liste des applications. 2 Sélectionnez un écran à modifier ou auquel appliquer un fond d’écran. 3 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite, puis sélectionnez une image parmi celles affichées en bas de l’écran. Pour sélectionner les photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou d’autres images, appuyez sur Depuis Galerie. 4 Appuyez sur Définir comme fond d'écran ou sur OK. Modifier les sonneries Modifiez les sonneries des appels entrants et des notifications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Son. Pour définir une sonnerie pour les appels entrants, appuyez sur Sonneries, sélectionnez une sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour utiliser un morceau de musique stocké sur l’appareil ou sur l’un de vos comptes, comme une sonnerie, appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour définir une sonnerie pour les notifications, appuyez sur Notifications, sélectionnez une sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser votre appareil 39 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran Vous pouvez définir une méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran pour empêcher l’accès à vos informations personnelles par autrui. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran, puis sélectionnez une méthode de déverrouillage. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Modèle Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Code PIN Un code PIN se compose uniquement de chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Mot de passe Un mot de passe comprend des caractères et des chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Personnaliser votre appareil 40 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil Utiliser un compte de sauvegarde Vous pouvez transférer des données de sauvegarde depuis votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel appareil à l'aide de votre compte Google. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Sauvegarder et restaurer des données. Utiliser Samsung Smart Switch Vous pouvez transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers un nouvel appareil via Smart Switch. Visitez www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en savoir plus. Samsung Smart Switch n’est pas pris en charge sur certains appareils ou ordinateurs. Utiliser Smart Switch avec un ordinateur Utilisez cette fonction pour importer une sauvegarde de vos données (depuis des appareils mobiles d'un fabricant sélectionné) depuis un ordinateur vers votre appareil. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Sauvegardez les données d'un ancien appareil sur un ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, contactez le fabricant de l’appareil. 2 Sur l’ordinateur, lancez Smart Switch. 3 Connectez votre ancien appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide d'un câble USB. 4 Sur l'ordinateur, sélectionnez le fabricant de l'ancien appareil, puis suivez les instructions à l'écran pour transférer les données vers votre appareil. Personnaliser votre appareil 41 Utiliser Samsung Kies Importez un fichier de sauvegarde de vos données depuis votre ordinateur via Samsung Kies pour restaurer les données sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez également sauvegarder les données sur l'ordinateur via Samsung Kies. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies. Paramétrer des comptes Ajouter des comptes Certaines applications utilisées sur l’appareil nécessitent un compte enregistré. Afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil, créez des comptes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes → Ajouter compte et sélectionnez un service de compte. Ensuite, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour synchroniser du contenu avec vos comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez les éléments à synchroniser. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis appuyez sur → Supp. compte. 42 Téléphone Passer des appels Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Téléphone. Appuyez sur Clavier, composez un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur pour passer un appel vocal ou sur pour réaliser un appel visio. Vous pouvez également passer des appels aux numéros de téléphone répertoriés dans les menus Journal, Favoris et Contacts. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ajouter le numéro à la liste de contacts. Afficher un aperçu du numéro de téléphone. Afficher les contacts favoris. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Afficher la liste de contacts. Afficher les journaux d’appels et de messages. Composer un numéro à l’aide du clavier. Passer des appels depuis le journal d’appels ou la liste de contacts Appuyez sur Journal ou Contacts, sélectionnez un contact ou un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur ou . Téléphone 43 Appeler un numéro à l’étranger Appuyez sur Clavier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche 0 jusqu’à ce que le signe + apparaisse. Composez l’indicatif du pays, l’indicatif régional et le numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur . Pour interdire les appels passés à l’étranger, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appel → Paramètres supplémentaires → Restriction d'appel → pour les appels vocaux ou les appels visio. Ensuite, cochez la case Appels internationaux, saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. Recevoir des appels Répondre à un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejetez un appel entrant, faites glisser la barre des messages de rejet située en bas de l’écran vers le haut. Pour créer des messages de rejet, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → → Paramètres → Appel → Définir les messages de rejet → . Appels manqués Si vous manquez un appel, l’icône apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis pour afficher la liste des appels manqués. Une autre solution consiste, depuis la liste des applications, à appuyer sur Téléphone → Journal pour afficher les messages manqués. Téléphone 44 Options en cours d’appel Options au cours d’un appel vocal Les options suivantes sont disponibles : • Ajouter : passer un autre appel. • Clavier : ouvrir le clavier. • Fin : terminer l'appel en cours. • HP : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur. Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez l’appareil de vos oreilles. • Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre. • Bluetooth : sélectionner un casque Bluetooth, à condition qu’il soit connecté à l’appareil. Appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options. Options au cours d’un appel visio Les options suivantes sont disponibles : • → Masquer mon image : masquer votre image à l'interlocuteur. • → Image sortante : sélectionner l'image à afficher à votre correspondant. • → Capturer une image : capturer l’image de votre correspondant. • → Enregistrer une vidéo : enregistrer une vidéo de votre correspondant. • → Mémo : créer un mémo. • → Messages : envoyer un message. • → Clavier : ouvrir le clavier. • → Désactiver haut-parleur / Activer haut-parleur : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur. Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez l’appareil de vos oreilles. • → Basculer sur le casque / Basculer sur le téléphone : basculer la sortie audio entre le casque Bluetooth connecté ou le haut-parleur de l’appareil. Appuyez sur l’écran pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Objectif : basculer entre l'objectif avant et arrière, et inversement. • Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre. • Fin : terminer l'appel en cours. 45 Contacts Ajouter des contacts Transférer des contacts depuis d’autres appareils Vous pouvez transférer des contacts depuis d'autres appareils sur votre appareil. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil. Créer manuellement des contacts 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations du contact. •  : ajouter une image. • /  : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d'information. 3 Appuyez sur Enreg. Pour ajouter un numéro de téléphone à la liste de contacts à partir du clavier, appuyez sur Clavier, composez le numéro, puis appuyez sur Ajouter aux contacts. Importer et exporter des contacts Importez des contacts depuis des services de stockage ou exportez-les vers ces services. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation ou d’exportation. Contacts 46 Rechercher des contacts Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : •  : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • /  : passer un appel vocal ou visio. •  : rédiger un message. •  : rédiger un e-mail. Ajouter des raccourcis vers des contacts à l’écran d’accueil Ajoutez des raccourcis vers les contacts avec lesquels vous communiquez fréquemment sur l’écran d’accueil. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Appuyez sur → Ajouter un raccourci à l'écran d'accueil. 47 Messages et e-mails Messages Envoyer des messages Envoyez des messages texte (SMS) ou des messages multimédia (MMS). L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Messages. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Ajoutez des destinataires, puis saisissez un message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Insérer un message. Joindre des fichiers. Sélectionner des contacts depuis votre liste de contacts. Saisir les destinataires. Envoyer le message. 4 Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Messages et e-mails 48 Lire les messages entrants Les messages entrants sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact. Pour afficher les messages d’un contact, sélectionnez ce dernier. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires. En mode affichage d'un message, appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options. Email Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Appuyez sur Suivant s’il s’agit d’un compte de messagerie électronique privé ou sur Configuration manuelle s’il s’agit d’un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Gérer les comptes → . Si vous disposez de plus d’un compte de messagerie électronique, vous pouvez définir l’un d’eux comme compte par défaut. Appuyez sur → Gérer les comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez la case Compte par défaut. Messages et e-mails 49 Envoyer des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Appuyez sur l'icône en bas de l’écran pour rédiger un message. Ajouter des destinataires. Ajouter un destinataire en copie ou copie cachée. Ajouter des destinataires depuis la liste de contacts. Insérer un message. Entrer un objet. Envoyer le message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Joindre des images, des vidéos et autres. Enregistrer le message pour l'envoyer ultérieurement. Ignorer le message. Messages et e-mails 50 Lire des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique à utiliser. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Répondre au message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts ou afficher d'autres options. Répondre à tous les destinataires. Transférer le message. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Supprimer le message. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Identifier le message comme favori. 51 Appareil photo Prise de vue de base Prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo ou sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. • Pour capturer une image de la vidéo en cours d’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Enregistrer une vidéo. Prendre une photo. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Basculer entre l'objectif avant et arrière, et inversement. Afficher le mode en cours. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Appareil photo 52 • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. • L’objectif avant est adapté à la prise de photos grand-angle. Il se peut qu’une distorsion mineure se produise dans les photos grand-angle ; cela ne traduit pas un problème de performances de l’appareil. Ouvrir l’appareil photo depuis l’écran verrouillé Pour prendre rapidement des photos de moments particuliers, depuis l’écran de verrouillage, démarrez l’application Appareil photo. Depuis l’écran verrouillé, faites glisser votre doigt sur l'icône . Si l’icône ne s’affiche pas, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case Raccourci Appareil photo. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Appareil photo 53 Modes de prise de vue Auto. Ce mode permet à l'appareil photo d'évaluer l'environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Auto. Selfie Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait avec l'objectif avant. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant. 3 Appuyez sur → Selfie. 4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait. Selfie panorama Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait grand-angle avec l'objectif avant. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant. 3 Appuyez sur → Selfie panorama. Appareil photo 54 4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait. 5 Tournez lentement l'appareil vers la gauche, puis vers la droite pour prendre une photo panoramique. L'appareil combine les photos en une seule image panoramique. • Veillez à ce que le cadre bleu reste à l'intérieur du cadre de prise de vue. • Les sujets ne doivent pas bouger pendant la prise de vue d'autoportraits grand-angle. • Les conditions d'éclairage peuvent affecter la résolution d'une photo. • Les parties supérieures et inférieures de l'image affichée sur l'écran d'aperçu peuvent être coupées de la photo selon les conditions de prise de vue. Beauté Ce mode permet de photographier des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des images plus douces. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Beauté. Panorama Ce mode permet de prendre une photo composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. L’appareil identifie la photo à l’aide de l’icône dans la Galerie. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Panorama. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : • Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. • Maintenez l’image à l’intérieur du cadre de prise de vue de l’appareil photo. • Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. Appareil photo 55 Selfie arrière Utilisez ce mode pour permettre à l'appareil photo de détecter votre visage et d'effectuer la mise au point dessus automatiquement lorsque vous faites un autoportrait à l'aide de l'objectif arrière. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Selfie arrière. 2 Déplacez le cadre jusqu'à votre visage et ajustez la taille du cadre. 3 Positionnez l'appareil de manière à ce que l'objectif arrière soit dirigé vers votre visage. Lorsque le visage est détecté, l'appareil émet un bip. L'appareil prend alors automatiquement la photo après 2 secondes. Rafale Ce mode permet de prendre une série de photos de sujets en mouvement. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Rafale. Maintenez le doigt enfoncé sur la touche pour prendre plusieurs photos en continu. HDR (Ton riche) Ce mode vous permet de prendre des photos riches en couleurs et de reproduire chacun des détails, même dans des conditions de luminosité extrêmes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → HDR (Ton riche). Sans effet Avec effet Appareil photo 56 Nuit Ce mode permet de prendre une photo dans des conditions de faible éclairage, sans utiliser le flash. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Nuit. GIF animé Ce mode permet de créer une photo animée à partir d'une série de photos. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → GIF animé. Paramètres de l'appareil photo Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope) ou l'un ou l'autre des modes. •  : activer ou de désactiver le flash. •  : inverser l'image pour créer une image miroir de la scène originale, lorsque vous prenez des photos avec l'objectif avant. •  : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'appareil doit prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo. •  : sélectionner un effet de filtre à utiliser lorsque vous prenez des photos ou enregistrez des vidéos. • /  : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Selfie paume : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il détecte votre paume et que vous puissiez ainsi l'utiliser pour prendre des autoportraits. • Beauté : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il photographie des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des images plus douces. • Valeur d'expos. : modifier la valeur d'exposition. Ce paramètre détermine la quantité de lumière reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus élevée. • ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés. Appareil photo 57 • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Modes de mesure : sélectionner un mode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrièreplan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la lumière à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Photo par appui : appuyer sur l'image à l'écran pour prendre une photo. • Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mode enregistr. : modifier le mode d’enregistrement. • Tags de localis. : paramétrer l'appareil pour qu'il joigne la balise de localisation à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Lorsque vous partagez une photo comprenant une balise de localisation, il se peut les informations de localisation soient exposées à des tiers. • Emplac. de stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et des vidéos. • Grille : afficher des lignes directrices sur l'écran d'aperçu. • Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes vocales. • Touche de volume : utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Réinit. les paramètres : réinitialiser les paramètres de l'appareil. Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. 58 Galerie Afficher les photos et les vidéos de l’appareil Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie et sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo. Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône dans l'aperçu miniature. Pour masquer ou afficher la barre de menus et les miniatures, appuyez sur l'écran. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Supprimer l’image. Modifier la photo. Revenir à l’écran précédent. Envoyer l’image à d’autres personnes. Miniatures d'aperçu des photos et des vidéos Galerie 59 Modifier des photos Modifiez vos images en leur appliquant différents effets. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l'application requise. En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Pivoter : pivoter l’image. • Rogner : rogner l’image. • Couleur : ajuster la saturation ou la luminosité de l’image. • Effet : appliquer des effets à l’image. • Portrait : corriger les yeux rouges, ajuster ou retoucher les visages, ou appliquer un effet de flou à l’arrière-plan. • Autocollant : appliquer des autocollants à l’image. • Dessin : dessiner sur l’image. • Cadre : appliquer des cadres à l’image. Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur . 60 Applications et fonctions utiles S Planner Créer un événement ou une tâche 1 Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur . Vous pouvez également sélectionner une date ne comportant aucun événement ou tâche, et appuyer à deux reprise dessus. Si la date comporte déjà des événements ou tâches, appuyez sur la date et sur . 3 Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, et saisissez les détails. • Ajouter événement : définir la date de début et de fin d’un événement. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de répétition. • Ajouter une tâche : ajouter une tâche à faire à une date spécifique. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de priorité. Saisir un titre. Ajouter des détails. Sélectionner un calendrier à utiliser ou à synchroniser. Sélectionner un élément. Définir une date de début et de fin pour l’événement. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder l’événement ou la tâche. Applications et fonctions utiles 61 Synchroniser les événements et les tâches avec vos comptes Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Pour synchroniser des événements et des tâches avec vos comptes, appuyez sur → Synchroniser. Pour ajouter des comptes avec lesquels effectuer la synchronisation, appuyez sur → Calendriers → Ajouter compte. Sélectionnez ensuite un compte avec lequel effectuer la synchronisation et ouvrez une session. Une fois le compte ajouté, un cercle vert apparaît près du nom du compte. Pour modifier l’option de synchronisation d'un compte, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes, puis sélectionnez un service de compte. Internet 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près du champ d’adresse Web. 3 Saisissez une adresse Web ou un mot-clé, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Pour afficher la barre de navigation, faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas de l’écran. Lire un article en mode Lecture. Enregistrer la page Web en cours dans les favoris. Ouvrir la page d'accueil. Revenir à la page précédente. Afficher vos favoris et votre historique Internet récent. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ouvrir le gestionnaire de fenêtres de page Web. Actualiser la page Web en cours. Applications et fonctions utiles 62 Vidéo Lire une vidéo Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Modifier le format d’écran. Revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Changer l'orientation de l'écran. Régler le volume. Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Calculatrice. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l'option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Applications et fonctions utiles 63 Horloge Alarme Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Alarme. Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , réglez l’heure de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition, paramétrez diverses autres options d’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Pour activer ou désactiver les alarmes, appuyez sur près de l'alarme concernée dans la liste des alarmes. • Répéter : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'alarme doit sonner de nouveau et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : définir la tonalité de l’alarme intelligente et combien de temps avant l'alarme principe elle doit sonner. Une alarme intelligente démarre à faible volume quelques minutes avant l’heure prédéfinie de l’alarme. Le volume de l’alarme intelligente augmente graduellement jusqu’à ce que vous l’éteigniez ou que vous désactiviez l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Si vous avez précédemment activé l'option de répétition, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône pour répéter l'alarme à l'issue d'une période de répétition prédéfinie. Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Horloge mondiale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Horloge mondiale. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Applications et fonctions utiles 64 Chronomètre Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Chronomètre. Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer. Pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires, appuyez sur Tour. Appuyez sur Arrêter pour arrêter le chronométrage. Pour effacer les temps intermédiaires, appuyez sur Réinitialiser. Minuteur Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Minuteur. Définissez la durée, puis appuyez sur Début. Lorsque la durée du minuteur est écoulée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Mémo Cette application permet de créer des mémos et de les organiser par catégorie. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mémo. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lorsque vous rédigez un mémo, utilisez les options suivantes : •  : créer ou définir une catégorie. •  : insérer des images. •  : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer. Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Sauveg. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur son contenu. Rechercher des mémos Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos, puis saisissez un mot-clé à rechercher dans les mémos. Applications et fonctions utiles 65 Radio Écouter la radio FM Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications. Avant d'utiliser cette application, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d’antenne radio. Lorsque vous démarrez la radio FM pour la première fois, elle recherche et enregistre automatiquement les stations disponibles. Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. Afficher la liste des stations favorites. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM. Régler le volume. Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à la liste des favoris. Régler précisément la fréquence. Afficher la liste des stations disponibles. Enregistrer un morceau depuis la radio FM. Entrer manuellement la fréquence radio. Rechercher manuellement les stations de radio disponibles. Rechercher des stations radio Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications. Appuyez sur → Analyser, puis sélectionnez une option de balayage. L’appareil recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations de radio FM disponibles. Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. Applications et fonctions utiles 66 Enregistreur vocal Enregistrer des mémos vocaux Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Enreg. vocal. Pour commencer l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Parlez dans le microphone. Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour annuler l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour terminer l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Afficher la liste des mémos vocaux. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Démarrer l’enregistrement. Durée enregistrée Écouter des mémos vocaux Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Enreg. vocal. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mémo vocal à lire. • /  : mettre en pause ou reprendre la lecture. • /  : revenir au mémo vocal précédent ou passer au mémo vocal suivant. Applications et fonctions utiles 67 Applications Google Google propose des applications de divertissement, de réseaux sociaux et d'activités économiques. Il se peut que vous ayez besoin d'un compte Google pour accéder à certaines applications. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Paramétrer des comptes. Pour afficher des informations supplémentaires concernant les applications, ouvrez l’écran principal des applications et appuyez sur → Aide. Certaines applications peuvent ne pas être disponibles ou peuvent être accessibles différemment en fonction de la zone géographique ou de l'opérateur. Chrome Rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Drive Stocker des contenus sur le Cloud, y accéder où que vous soyez et les partager avec d'autres personnes. Gmail Envoyer ou recevoir des e-mails via le service Google Mail. Google Lancer des recherches rapides sur Internet ou sur votre appareil. Paramètres Google Configurer les paramètres pour certaines fonctions fournies par Google. Google+ Partager vos nouvelles et suivre les mises à jour partagées par votre famille, vos amis et autres personnes. Vous pouvez également sauvegarder vos photos et vos vidéos, et plus encore. Hangouts Discuter avec vos amis en tête-à-tête ou en groupes, et utiliser des images, des émoticônes et des appels visio pendant vos conversations. Applications et fonctions utiles 68 Maps Rechercher votre emplacement sur la carte, rechercher des lieux et afficher des informations de localisation pour différents endroits. Photos Gérer les photos, les albums et les vidéos enregistré(e)s sur l’appareil et téléchargé(e)s sur Google+. Play Livres Télécharger des livres depuis Play Store et les lire. Play Jeux Télécharger des jeux depuis Play Store et jouer avec d'autres personnes. Play Films Visionner des vidéos enregistrées sur votre appareil et télécharger divers contenus à visionner depuis Play Store. Play Musique Découvrir, écouter et partager de la musique sur votre appareil. Play Kiosque Lire les actualités et les magazines qui vous intéressent depuis un emplacement pratique. Recherche vocale Lancer des recherches rapides en prononçant un mot clé ou une phrase. YouTube Visionner ou créer des vidéos et les partager avec d'autres personnes. 69 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth À propos de Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour le piratage de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 70 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth, appuyez sur le curseur Bluetooth pour activer la fonction, puis appuyez sur Analyser. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. Pour définir l’appareil comme visible aux autres appareils, appuyez sur son nom. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous associer. Si votre appareil a été appairé par le passé avec un appareil, appuyez sur son nom sans confirmer le mot de passe. Si l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous associer ne figure pas dans la liste, demandez à ce que l’appareil active son option de visibilité. 3 Pour confirmer, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur les deux appareils. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. Vous pouvez partager des données, comme des contacts ou des fichiers multimédia, avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth. Vous pouvez, par exemple, envoyer une image à un autre appareil. Envoyer une image 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil vers lequel transférer l'image. Si l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous associer ne figure pas dans la liste, demandez à ce que l’appareil active son option de visibilité ou définissez votre appareil comme visible aux autres appareils. 4 Acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 71 Recevoir une image Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie une image, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth. L’image reçue est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Download. Dissocier des appareils Bluetooth 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth. Le périphérique affiche les périphériques associés dans la liste. 2 Appuyez sur près du nom de l’appareil à dissocier. 3 Appuyez sur Dissocier. Wi-Fi Direct À propos de Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre des appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Établir une connexion à d’autres appareils 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur Wi-Fi pour activer la fonction. 2 Appuyez sur → Wi-Fi Direct. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à plusieurs appareils, appuyez sur → Connexion multiple. Pour modifier le nom de l'appareil, appuyez sur → Renommer le périphérique. 4 Acceptez la demande d'autorisation Wi-Fi Direct sur l'autre appareil pour confirmer. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 72 Envoyer et recevoir des données Vous pouvez partager des données, comme des contacts ou des fichiers multimédia, avec d’autres appareils. Vous pouvez, par exemple, envoyer une image à un autre appareil. Envoyer une image 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur → Wi-Fi Direct, sélectionnez un appareil vers lequel transférer l'image, puis appuyez sur OK. 4 Acceptez la demande d'autorisation Wi-Fi Direct sur l'autre appareil. Recevoir une image Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie une image, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Wi-Fi Direct. L’image reçue est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Download. Déconnecter les appareils 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi. 2 Appuyez sur → Wi-Fi Direct. L’appareil affiche la liste des appareils connectés. 3 Appuyez sur Terminer la connexion → OK pour déconnecter les appareils. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 73 NFC À propos de NFC Votre appareil est équipé d’une fonction qui permet de lire les tags NFC (Near Field Communication) contenant des informations relatives aux produits. Grâce à cette fonction, vous pouvez également effectuer des paiements et acheter des tickets de transport ou de spectacle après avoir téléchargé les applications correspondantes. La batterie comporte une antenne NFC intégrée. Manipulez l'appareil avec précaution afin de ne pas endommager l’antenne NFC. Utiliser la fonction NFC Utilisez la fonction NFC pour envoyer des images ou des contacts à d’autres appareils et lire des informations produit. Si vous insérez une carte SIM ou USIM comportant une fonction de paiement, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil pour effectuer facilement des paiements. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → NFC, puis appuyez sur le curseur NFC pour activer la fonction. Rapprochez l’antenne NFC, située à l’arrière de votre appareil, d'un tag NFC. Les informations figurant sur le tag s’affichent. Assurez-vous que l’écran de l’appareil est déverrouillé. Sinon, l’appareil ne pourra pas lire les tags NFC ou recevoir des données. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 74 Effectuer un achat à l’aide de la fonction NFC Pour pouvoir effectuer des paiements à l’aide de la fonction NFC, vous devez d’abord vous inscrire à un service de paiement mobile. Pour vous inscrire ou pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant le service, contactez votre opérateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → NFC, puis appuyez sur le curseur NFC pour activer la fonction. Rapprochez l’antenne NFC, située à l’arrière de votre appareil, du lecteur de carte NFC. Pour définir l’application de paiement par défaut, appuyez sur Paiement NFC et sélectionnez une application. La liste des services peut ne pas inclure toutes les applications de paiement disponibles. Envoyer des données Utilisez la fonction Android Beam pour envoyer des données, telles que des pages Web ou des contacts, à des appareils compatibles NFC. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → NFC, puis appuyez sur le curseur NFC pour activer la fonction. 2 Appuyez sur Android Beam, puis appuyez sur le curseur Android Beam pour activer la fonction. 3 Sélectionnez un élément et connectez l’antenne NFC de l’autre appareil avec l’antenne NFC de votre appareil. 4 Lorsque l’option Appuyez ici pour transférer apparaît à l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran de l’appareil pour envoyer l’élément. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 75 Screen Mirroring À propos de Screen Mirroring Utilisez cette fonction pour connecter votre appareil à un grand écran avec le routeur AllShare Cast ou HomeSync, puis partagez vos contenus. Vous pouvez également utiliser cette fonction avec d’autres appareils prenant en charge la fonction Miracast Wi-Fi. Appareils compatibles avec Screen Mirroring (appareils avec routeur AllShare Cast, HomeSync et Wi-Fi) • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette fonction peut ne pas fonctionner sur les appareils compatibles Miracast ne prenant pas en charge le protocole HDCP 2.X (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. • Pour économiser votre batterie, désactivez cette fonction lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. • Si vous indiquez une bande de fréquence Wi-Fi, il se peut que les routeurs AllShare Cast ou HomeSync ne soient pas détectés ou connectés. • Si vous lisez des vidéos ou jouez à des jeux sur un téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode TV approprié afin d’obtenir un résultat optimal. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 76 Afficher du contenu sur un téléviseur Connectez le téléviseur à l'appareil possédant la fonction Screen Mirroring. Pour configurer la connexion, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l’appareil. Vous pouvez, par exemple, afficher du contenu sur un téléviseur connecté via un routeur AllShare Cast. 1 Connectez le routeur AllShare Cast au téléviseur via un câble HDMI. 2 Sur le téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode de connexion, comme le mode HDMI, pour permettre la connexion à un appareil externe. 3 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Screen Mirroring. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous connecter. L’écran de votre appareil apparaît sur l’écran du téléviseur. Si vous connectez l’appareil pour la première fois, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le nom du routeur figurant dans la liste et saisissez le code PIN indiqué sur l’écran du téléviseur. 5 Ouvrez ou lisez un fichier, puis commandez l’affichage à l’aide des touches de votre appareil. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 77 Fonction d’impression mobile Connectez l'appareil à une imprimante via Wi-Fi ou Wi-Fi Direct, et imprimez des images ou des documents. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Ajout de modules d’extension d’imprimante Ajoutez des modules d’extension d’imprimante pour les imprimantes auxquelles vous souhaitez connecter l'appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Impression → Ajouter une imprimante, et recherchez le module d’extension d’imprimante dans le Play Store. Sélectionnez le module d’extension d’imprimante et installez-le. Connecter l’appareil à une imprimante Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Impression, sélectionnez un module d’extension d’imprimante, puis appuyez sur le curseur situé en haut à droite de l’écran pour activer la fonction. L’appareil recherche les imprimantes connectées au même réseau Wi-Fi que lui. Sélectionnez une imprimante à utiliser comme imprimante par défaut. Pour ajouter des imprimantes manuellement, sélectionnez un module d’extension d’imprimante, appuyez sur → Ajouter une imprimante → , saisissez les détails, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier les paramètres d'impression, sélectionnez un module d’extension d’imprimante et appuyez sur → Paramètres d'impression. Imprimer du contenu En mode affichage d’une image ou d’un document par exemple, appuyez sur → Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 78 Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → À propos de l'appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. Démarrez Samsung Kies et connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche de mise à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble USB. • Ne connectez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 79 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et un ordinateur Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Ne débranchez pas le câble USB de l’appareil lorsqu’un transfert de fichiers est en cours. Cela risquerait d’entraîner une perte de données ou d’endommager l’appareil. • Ne débranchez pas l’appareil de l’ordinateur lorsque vous lisez des fichiers enregistrés sur l’appareil sur l’ordinateur raccordé. Une fois que vous avez terminé de lire le fichier, débranchez l’appareil de l’ordinateur. • Il se peut que les appareils ne se connectent pas correctement s’ils le sont via un concentrateur USB. Branchez directement l’appareil sur le port USB de l’ordinateur. Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 80 Sauvegarder et restaurer des données Conservez vos informations personnelles, données d’applications et paramètres en toute sécurité sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez effectuer une sauvegarde de vos informations importantes sur un compte de sauvegarde et y accéder ultérieurement. 1 Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur Sauvegarder et réinitialiser et cochez la case Sauvegarder mes données. 3 Appuyez sur Compte de sauvegarde et sélectionnez un compte de sauvegarde. Pour restaurer les données, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Google via l’assistant de configuration. Vous pouvez lancer et ouvrir l’assistant de configuration en effectuant une réinitialisation des données par défaut sur l’appareil. Si vous ne vous connectez pas à votre compte Google via l’assistant de configuration, vous ne pouvez pas restaurer les données de sauvegarde. Réinitialiser les données Vous pouvez supprimer tous les paramètres et toutes les données de l’appareil. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut, assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données importantes stockées sur l’appareil. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Sauvegarder et restaurer des données. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. L’appareil redémarre automatiquement. 81 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. CONNEXIONS Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur Wi-Fi pour activer la fonction. Pour utiliser des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Analyser : recherchez les réseaux disponibles. • Wi-Fi Direct : activez l’option Wi-Fi Direct et connectez directement les périphériques via Wi-Fi pour partager des fichiers. • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l'aide d'une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l'aide d'un code PIN WPS. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Appuyez sur → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Lorsque l’écran est éteint, l’appareil désactive automatiquement les connexions Wi-Fi. Lorsque cela se produit, l’appareil accède automatiquement aux réseaux mobiles s’il a été configuré pour utiliser ces réseaux. Cela peut entraîner des frais de transfert de données. Pour éviter des frais supplémentaires, définissez cette option sur Toujours. Paramètres 82 Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre des appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Appuyez sur → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Bluetooth, puis appuyez sur le curseur Bluetooth pour activer la fonction. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d'expiration de la visibilité : définissez une durée pendant laquelle l'appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via Bluetooth. Modem et point d'accès mobile Utilisez l’appareil comme point d’accès mobile pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec d’autres appareils. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Modem et point d'accès mobile. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Modem et point d'accès mobile. • Point d'accès mobile : utilisez le point d’accès mobile pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs ou d’autres appareils via le réseau Wi-Fi. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction lorsque la connexion réseau n’est pas disponible. • Modem USB : utilisez le modem USB pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec un ordinateur via le mode USB. Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur, l’appareil sert de modem sans fil. • Modem Bluetooth : utilisez le modem Bluetooth pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec un ordinateur ou d’autres appareils via la fonction Bluetooth. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions d'appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Paramètres 83 Utilisation des données Effectuez un suivi de la quantité de données utilisées et personnalisez les paramètres de limite d’utilisation des données. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Utilisation des données. • Données mobiles : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il utilise les connexions de données sur n'importe quel réseau mobile. • Définir limite données mobiles : configurez une limite d’utilisation des données mobiles. • Cycle utilisation données : indiquez la date de réinitialisation mensuelle à laquelle effectuer la vérification de l’utilisation des données entre deux périodes. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Itinérance : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il utilise les connexions de données lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture. • Restr. données arrière-plan : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il désactive la synchronisation en arrière-plan lorsque vous utilisez un réseau mobile. • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications, comme le calendrier ou la messagerie électronique. Vous pouvez choisir les informations devant être synchronisées pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Comptes. • Afficher utilisation Wi-Fi : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il affiche l'utilisation de données via une connexion Wi-Fi. • Points d'accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Localisation Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Localisation, puis appuyez sur le curseur Localisation pour activer la fonction. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour collecter vos données de localisation. • DEMANDES LOCAL. RÉCENTES : affichez les applications qui requièrent vos informations de localisation actuelles et la batterie consommée à cet effet. • SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation utilisés par votre appareil. Paramètres 84 NFC Activez la fonction NFC pour lire ou écrire des tags NFC contenant des informations. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur NFC, puis appuyez sur le curseur NFC pour activer la fonction. • Android Beam : activez la fonction Android Beam pour envoyer des données, telles que des pages Web ou des contacts, à des appareils compatibles NFC. • Paiement NFC : définissez l’application de paiement mobile par défaut. La liste des services peut ne pas inclure toutes les applications de paiement disponibles. Screen Mirroring Activez cette fonction pour partager votre écran avec d’autres personnes. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Screen Mirroring. Impression Téléchargez une application d'impression pour pouvoir imprimer des fichiers. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Impression. Plus de réseaux Personnalisez les paramètres réseaux. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Plus de réseaux. Application de messagerie par défaut Sélectionnez l’application par défaut à utiliser pour la messagerie. Réseaux mobiles • Données mobiles : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il utilise les connexions de données sur n'importe quel réseau mobile. • Itinérance : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il utilise les connexions de données lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture. • Nom des points d'accès : configurez des noms de point d'accès (APN). • Mode réseau : sélectionnez un type de réseau. • Opérateurs réseau : recherchez des réseaux disponibles et enregistrez un réseau manuellement. Paramètres 85 VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. APPAREIL Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Son. • Volume : réglez le volume des sonneries d’appel, des musiques et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Sonneries : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les appels entrants. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour notifications, comme les messages entrants et les appels manqués. • Vibreur et sonnerie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre et émette une sonnerie à chaque appel entrant. • Son des touches : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier. • Sélections audibles : réglez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d'affichage. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Affichage. • Fond d'écran : – Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l'image d'arrière-plan de l'écran d'accueil. – Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. – Écrans d'accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l'image d'arrière-plan de l'écran d'accueil et de l'écran de verrouillage. Paramètres 86 • Volet des raccourcis : – Notifications d'appli. : modifiez la méthode de notification pour chaque application. • Luminosité : réglez la luminosité de l'écran. • Rotation auto. écran : indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l'écran : définissez le délai à l'issue duquel l'écran doit s'éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l'appareil pour activer un économiseur d'écran lorsque l'appareil est en cours de chargement. • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l'écran : définissez la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la méthode de verrouillage de l’écran sélectionnée. • Double horloge : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il affiche deux horloges. • Afficher la date : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il affiche la date et l'heure. • Raccourci Appareil photo : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu’il affiche le raccourci vers l’appareil photo sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître sur l'écran verrouillé. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d'aide : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il affiche un texte d'aide à l'utilisation sur l'écran verrouillé. Appels Personnalisez les paramètres d’appel. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appels. • Définir les messages de rejet : ajoutez ou modifiez le message envoyé lorsque vous rejetez un appel. Paramètres 87 • Début/Fin d'appel : – App. sur touche d'accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir répondre aux appels en appuyant sur la touche Accueil. – App. sur la touche Marche : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Paramètres supplémentaires : – Identité de l'appelant : affichez votre identité à vos correspondants lorsque vous passez un appel. – Transfert d'appel : transférez les appels entrants vers un autre numéro. – Code région auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il insère automatiquement un préfixe (code régional ou national) avant un numéro de téléphone. – Restriction d'appel : bloquez les appels entrants ou sortants. – Signal d'appel : autorisez les appels entrants en cours d’appel. – Numérotation fixe : activez ou désactivez le mode de numérotation fixe pour limiter les appels aux numéros de la liste FDN. Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. • Sonneries et son clavier : – Sonneries : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les appels entrants. – Vibreur et sonnerie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre et émette une sonnerie à chaque appel entrant. – Son des touches : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier. • Masquer ma vidéo : sélectionnez une image autre que la vôtre à afficher à votre correspondant. • Service de messagerie vocale : sélectionnez votre opérateur de messagerie vocale. • Param. messagerie vocale : indiquez le numéro de votre service de messagerie vocale. Vous pouvez obtenir ce numéro auprès de votre opérateur. Gestionnaire d'applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Gestionnaire d'applications. Paramètres 88 PERSONNEL Comptes Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Comptes. Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Sauvegarder et réinitialiser. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Accessibilité Utilisez cette fonction pour améliorer l'accessibilité de l'appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Accessibilité. • Accès direct : paramétrez l'appareil de manière à ouvrir les menus d’accessibilité sélectionnés lorsque vous appuyez à trois reprises rapprochées sur la touche Accueil. • Début/Fin d'appel : – App. sur touche d'accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir répondre aux appels en appuyant sur la touche Accueil. – App. sur la touche Marche : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Mode pression unique : paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. • SERVICES : sélectionnez une application d'accessibilité que vous souhaitez utiliser. Paramètres 89 • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. Pour afficher les informations d'aide expliquant l'utilisation de cette fonction, appuyez sur Paramètres → Lancer le didacticiel "Explorer au toucher". • Énoncer mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lise le mot de passe à haute voix lorsque vous saisissez le mot de passe lorsque TalkBack est activé. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Gestes d'agrandissement : paramétrez l'appareil de manière à grossir l’écran et à effectuer un zoom avant sur une zone spécifique. • Raccourci d'accessibilité : paramétrez l'appareil pour pouvoir activer TalkBack lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur l'écran avec deux doigts. • Options synthèse vocale : – MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur pour la fonction de diction de la synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d'élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez le texte prononcé à titre d'exemple. – État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. • Notification par flash : configurez le flash pour qu’il clignote lorsque vous recevez des appels entrants, de nouveaux messages ou des notifications. • Désactiver tous les sons : paramétrez l'appareil pour que tous les sons, tels que les sons multimédia, et la voix du correspondant soient mis en sourdine lors d’un appel. • Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Audio mono : paramétrez l'appareil de manière à ce que la sortie son passe du stéréo au mono lorsqu'un casque est connecté. • Balance audio : configurez l’appareil pour pouvoir régler la balance audio lorsque vous utilisez un casque. • Durée de l'appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Contrôle par interaction : activez le mode contrôle par interaction pour limiter les réactions de l’appareil aux saisies lorsque vous utilisez des applications. Paramètres 90 SYSTÈME Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Langue et saisie. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Français : sélectionnez une présentation de clavier par défaut. • Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues pour la saisie de texte. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l'appareil pour pouvoir corriger les mots erronés et incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d'espace ou un signe de ponctuation. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il mette automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Glissement du clavier : – Aucun(e) : paramétrez l'appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. – Saisie en continu : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il autorise la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d'une lettre à l'autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. Paramètres 91 • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues pour la saisie de texte. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors ligne. Recherche vocale • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Détection du mot clé "Ok Google" : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance vocale lorsque vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors ligne. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour autoriser la saisie vocale de mots-clés via le microphone du casque et/ou des écouteurs Bluetooth si ceux-ci sont connectés. Options synthèse vocale • MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d'élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez le texte prononcé à titre d'exemple. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. Paramètres 92 Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connecté(e) à l’appareil. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Date et heure. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Date et heure automatiques : mettez automatiquement à jour la date et l'heure lorsque vous changez de fuseau horaire. • Définir la date : réglez la date manuellement. • Définir l'heure : réglez l'heure manuellement. • Fuseau horaire auto : paramétrez l'appareil pour pouvoir recevoir des informations sur l'heure depuis le réseau lorsque vous changez de fuseau horaire. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : réglez le fuseau horaire de votre domicile. • Format 24 heures : affichez l'heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez un format de date. Mode Ultra économie d'énergie Paramétrez l’appareil pour prolonger le temps de veille et réduire la consommation de la batterie en affichant une présentation simplifiée et en autorisant un accès limité à une application. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Ultra économie d’énergie. Dans l'écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Mode Ultra économie d'énergie, puis appuyez sur le curseur Mode Ultra économie d'énergie pour activer la fonction. Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. Paramètres 93 Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Batterie. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il affiche l'autonomie restante de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de mémoire disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Stockage. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil et de la carte SIM ou USIM. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Sécurité. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : paramétrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant de sources inconnues. • Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il vérifie que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • Crypter l'appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l'appareil pour crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez lorsque ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. Paramètres 94 • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l'appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. • Alerte changement de SIM : activez ou désactivez la fonction de Traçage du mobile qui vous aide à localiser votre appareil en cas de perte ou de vol. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web permettant de localiser votre mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Configurer blocage SIM : – Verrouiller carte SIM : activez ou désactivez la fonction de verrouillage par code PIN de l'appareil. Si vous activez ce paramètre, un code PIN vous sera demandé à chaque fois que vous allumez l'appareil. – Modifier code PIN SIM : modifiez le code PIN utilisé pour accéder aux données SIM ou USIM. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • MàJ de politique sécurité : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il vérifie et télécharge automatiquement les mises à jour de sécurité. • Envoyer des rapports de sécurité : paramétrez l'appareil pour qu'il envoie automatiquement les rapports de sécurité à Samsung. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d'identification. • Infos d'ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. • Installer depuis l'espace de stockage : installez des certificats cryptés sur le stockage USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. À propos de l'appareil Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le logiciel de l’appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur À propos de l'appareil. 95 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque la demande de code PIN est activée, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Il est possible que la batterie ne soit pas correctement installée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez la batterie. Dépannage 96 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil se bloque, il se peut que vous deviez fermer les applications ou éteindre l'appareil, puis le rallumer. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez simultanément la touche Marche/Arrêt et la touche Volume enfoncées pendant plus de 7 secondes afin de redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 97 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Chargez la batterie. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Si vous exposez l'appareil ou la batterie à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctions, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable dont la charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 98 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent avec l’appareil photo, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Si un format de fichier n’est pas pris en charge, tel que DivX ou AC3, installez une application le prenant en charge. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 99 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 100 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2015 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. www.samsung.com SM-T310 Consultez le mode d’emploi complet de votre appareil pour obtenir davantage d’informations. Pour savoir comment accéder au mode d’emploi, reportez-vous à la section « Consulter le mode d’emploi » du présent Guide de prise en main rapide. Guide de prise en main rapide 2 www.sar-tick.com Ce produit est conforme aux limites nationales DAS (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique = Specific Absorption Rate SAR) fixées à une valeur maximale de 2,0 W/kg. La valeur DAS maximale est indiquée à la section Informations sur la certification DAS de ce guide de prise en main rapide. Lorsque vous transportez ce produit ou lorsque vous l’utilisez près du corps, portez-le à une distance d’au moins 0,5 cm de votre corps afin de respecter les exigences en matière de radiofréquences. Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. • Le contenu de ce guide de prise en main rapide peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 3 • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de votre appareil ou de ses applications. 4 Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. 5 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store et Google Talk™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 6 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Accueil Écran tactile Touche Retour Capteur de luminosité Objectif avant Touche de volume Microphone Témoin lumineux Touche Marche/Arrêt 7 Démarrage Haut-parleur Haut-parleur Compartiment pour carte mémoire Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Prise audio 3,5 mm Ne couvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela pourrait entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. 8 Démarrage Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous ne l’avez pas utilisé depuis un certain temps. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles de connexion PC homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. Raccordez le câble USB à l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis branchez la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l'appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. 9 Démarrage Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé 10 Démarrage Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer et éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Consulter le mode d’emploi Le mode d’emploi vous fournit des informations complètes sur le fonctionnement de votre appareil. L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. 11 Démarrage À partir de votre appareil 1 Ouvrez l’application Internet. 2 Appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des favoris. 3 Sélectionnez le favori correspondant au mode d’emploi. Pour accéder plus facilement au mode d’emploi, placez un raccourci ou un widget pour le mode d’emploi sur l’écran d’accueil. En fonction de votre navigateur ou de votre opérateur, le mode d’emploi peut ne pas être disponible dans les favoris. À partir de l’ordinateur Accédez au site www.samsung.com, puis recherchez le mode d’emploi à l’aide du nom de modèle de votre appareil. 12 Consignes de sécurité Ces consignes de sécurité concernent l’ensemble des appareils mobiles. Il est possible qu’elles ne soient pas toutes applicables à votre appareil, en fonction du type d’appareil mobile. Avant d’utiliser votre appareil, lisez les consignes de sécurité afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui, ou d’endommager l’appareil. Avertissement Le non-respect des consignes de sécurité peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire la mort N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal fixées Les branchements non sécurisés engendrent un risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie. Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées et ne déconnectez pas le chargeur en tirant sur le cordon Vous risquez de vous électrocuter. Ne tordez et n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation Vous risquez de vous électrocuter ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez pas l’appareil avec les mains mouillées ou lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement Vous risquez de vous électrocuter. Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou l’appareil Vous risquez de vous électrocuter ou de provoquer un incendie, même un dysfonctionnement de la batterie ou son explosion. 13 Consignes de sécurité N’utilisez pas votre appareil en extérieur pendant un orage Vous risquez de vous électrocuter ou de provoquer un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des fournitures homologué(e)s • L’utilisation d’une batterie ou d’un chargeur générique peut réduire la durée de vie de votre appareil ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements. Cela peut également entraîner une explosion de la batterie. • Utilisez exclusivement une batterie et un chargeur homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. L’utilisation d’une batterie et d’un chargeur incompatible peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre appareil. • Samsung ne peut pas être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celui-ci utilise des accessoires non homologués par Samsung. Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou l’appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs Manipulez l’appareil et le chargeur avec précaution, même lorsque vous devez vous en séparer • Ne jetez jamais la batterie ou l’appareil au feu. Ne posez jamais la batterie ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, ils risquent d’exploser. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant la mise au rebut des batteries ou des appareils usagé(e)s. • N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais l’appareil. • Évitez d’exposer l’appareil à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe. Protégez l’appareil, la batterie et le chargeur de tout dommage • Évitez d’exposer l’appareil et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées. • Ne soumettez pas l’appareil à des températures extrêmes, car cela peut l’endommager ou réduire la capacité de chargement et la durée de vie de l’appareil et de la batterie. 14 Consignes de sécurité • Évitez que la batterie entrent en contact avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e). Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression • La batterie peut fuir. • Votre appareil peut surchauffer et causer un incendie. Cet appareil ne doit pas être utilisé ou stocké dans des zones où règne une forte concentration en poussières ou microparticules en suspension La poussière ou les microparticules peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’appareil et entraîner des incendies ou des décharges électriques. Ne mordez et ne portez pas à la bouche l’appareil ou la batterie • Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil ou de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. • Surveillez les enfants ou les animaux qui pourraient s’étrangler avec des pièces de dimension réduite. • Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent l’appareil de façon appropriée s’ils doivent l’utiliser. N’introduisez pas l’appareil ou ses accessoires dans les yeux, les oreilles ou la bouche Vous risquez de vous étouffer ou de vous blesser gravement. Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) si celle-ci fuit ou est endommagée Pour une mise au rebut en toute sécurité de la batterie Li-Ion, contactez le centre de service après-vente le plus proche de chez vous. 15 Consignes de sécurité Attention Le non-respect des consignes de sécurité peut entraîner des blessures, voire des dommages matériels N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques • La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre appareil cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. • L’utilisation d’une connexion de données LTE peut provoquer des interférences avec d’autres appareils, tels que les équipements audio et les téléphones. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un hôpital, un avion ou un équipement automobile en raison des radiofréquences qui peuvent produire des interférences • Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre appareil et un stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. • Pour minimiser les risques d’interférence avec un stimulateur cardiaque, utilisez l’appareil sur le côté opposé à l’implant. • Si vous utilisez un équipement médical, contactez son fabricant avant d’utiliser votre appareil afin de vous assurer que votre équipement ne sera pas affecté par les radiofréquences émises par l’appareil. • En avion, les dispositifs électroniques peuvent interférer avec les instruments de navigation. Assurez-vous d’éteindre votre appareil au moment du décollage et de l’atterrissage. Après le décollage, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil en mode Hors-ligne, si le personnel naviguant l’autorise. • Les équipements électroniques à bord de votre véhicule peuvent présenter des dysfonctionnements en raison des interférences radio émises par votre appareil. Contactez le constructeur pour obtenir plus d’informations. 16 Consignes de sécurité N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans un environnement fortement enfumé Vous risquez d’endommager les pièces externes de l’appareil ou de provoquer des dysfonctionnements. Si vous utilisez une prothèse auditive, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences Les radiofréquences émises par votre appareil peuvent causer des interférences avec certaines prothèses auditives. Avant d’utiliser votre appareil, contactez le fabricant de la prothèse afin de vous assurer que son fonctionnement ne sera pas altéré par les radiofréquences émises par l’appareil. N’utilisez votre appareil à proximité d’équipements qui émettent des radiofréquences, tels que les chaînes Hi-Fi ou les pylônes radio Les radiofréquences peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’appareil. Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant les risques d’explosion • Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion. Ne vous limitez pas à retirer la batterie. • Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation dans un environnement où existent des risques d’explosion. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans des zones de ravitaillement en carburant (station-service), à proximité d’usines chimiques ou dans des zones de dynamitage. • Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que l’appareil, ses composants ou ses accessoires. Si vous remarquez une odeur ou des sons inhabituels au niveau de l’appareil ou de la batterie, ou en cas d’émission de fumée ou d’une fuite de liquide, interrompez immédiatement l’utilisation de l’appareil et confiez-le à un service après-vente Samsung Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner un incendie ou une explosion. 17 Consignes de sécurité Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule sans prendre de risques. N’utilisez jamais votre appareil au volant. Pour votre propre sécurité et celle d’autrui, faites preuve de bon sens et gardez à l’esprit les conseils suivants : • Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre appareil, comme par exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique. Ces fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré lorsque vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre appareil. • Gardez votre appareil à portée de main. Assurez-vous de pouvoir atteindre votre appareil mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un appel entrant à un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale répondre à votre place. • Interrompez tout appel en cas d’embouteillages ou de conditions météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie, la neige, le verglas et une circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux. • Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone. Noter une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire détourne votre attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à conduire sans prendre de risques. • Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l’état de la circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobilisé ou avant de vous insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de préférence lorsque votre véhicule est stationné. • Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles susceptibles de vous distraire. Informez votre interlocuteur que vous êtes au volant et interrompez toute conversation susceptible de réduire votre attention sur la route. 18 Consignes de sécurité Utilisez et entretenez votre appareil mobile avec soin Conservez votre appareil au sec • L’humidité et les liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits électroniques de votre appareil. • N’allumez pas votre appareil s’il présente des marques d’humidité. Si votre appareil est déjà allumé, éteignez-le, puis retirez immédiatement la batterie (si vous n’arrivez pas à l’éteindre ou à retirer la batterie, laissez votre appareil tel quel). Essuyez-le ensuite à l’aide d’une serviette et confiez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. • Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur de l’appareil a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre appareil et entraîne l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Posez toujours votre appareil sur des surfaces planes Si votre appareil tombe, il peut être endommagé. N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser cet appareil dans une plage de températures comprises entre 5 °C et 35 °C • N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en plein été. Vous risquez de provoquer un dysfonctionnement de l’écran, une explosion de la batterie et risquez d’endommager l’appareil. • N’exposez pas votre appareil à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture). • Entreposez la batterie à des températures comprises entre 0 °C et 45 °C. N’entreposez pas votre appareil à proximité d’objets métalliques, comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers • L’appareil peut se rayer ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Les bornes de la batterie peuvent provoquer un incendie si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques. 19 Consignes de sécurité Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité de champs magnétiques • Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre appareil peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger. • Les cartes à piste, comme les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par les champs magnétiques. En cas de surchauffe de l’appareil, n’utilisez pas ce dernier ainsi que ses applications pendant quelque temps Un contact prolongé de la peau avec un appareil en surchauffe peut entraîner de faibles brûlures, tels que des points rouges et une pigmentation. N’utilisez pas l’appareil si le cache de la batterie n’est pas en place La batterie risque de tomber, ce qui peut entraîner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements. Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash, ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue. Prenez des précautions lorsque vous êtes exposé aux lumières artificielles • Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, ne laissez pas la pièce dans laquelle vous vous trouvez dans l’obscurité et ne rapprochez pas trop l’écran des yeux. • L’exposition à la luminosité de l’écran lors du visionnage prolongé de vidéos ou de jeux peut entraîner des malaises. En cas de sensations d’inconfort, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil. • Si vous avez connaissance de personnes ayant souffert de malaises suite à l’utilisation d’un appareil similaire, consultez un médecin avant de vous servir de votre appareil. • En cas de sensations d’inconfort ou de douleurs musculaires, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. • Pour éviter toute fatigue oculaire, faites des pauses fréquentes lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil. 20 Consignes de sécurité Réduisez les risques de lésions musculaires dus aux mouvements répétitifs Lorsque vous effectuez des actions répétitives, comme taper sur les touches, dessiner des caractères sur un écran tactile ou jouer à des jeux, vous pouvez ressentir une sensation d’inconfort au niveau des mains, de la nuque, des épaules ou de toute autre partie du corps. Si vous utilisez votre appareil sur des périodes prolongées, tenez-le sans trop le serrer, appuyez doucement sur les touches et faites des pauses fréquentes. En cas de sensations d’inconfort, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. Protégez votre oreille lorsque vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive à un volume sonore élevé lorsque vous marchez peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d’entendre votre conversation ou la musique. • Dans les environnements secs, les casques et écouteurs sont propices à la formation d’électricité statique. Évitez alors d’utiliser votre casque ou vos écouteurs et touchez un objet métallique pour vous décharger de toute électricité statique avant de brancher le casque/les écouteurs sur l’appareil. • Lorsque vous conduisez ou à vélo, n’utilisez pas de casque ou des écouteurs. Votre attention pourrait être détournée, ce qui peut provoquer un accident et être contraire à la loi dans certaines zones géographiques. Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil en marchant ou en vous déplaçant • Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. • Assurez-vous de ne pas accrocher le cordon de votre casque avec des objets à proximité. 21 Consignes de sécurité Ne placez pas l’appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à la ceinture Vous risquez de vous blesser ou d’endommager l’appareil en cas de chute. Ne peignez jamais votre appareil et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants • La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles de l’appareil et perturber son fonctionnement. • Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques de l’appareil, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d’eczéma ou de toute autre réaction cutanée. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. N’utilisez pas l’appareil si son écran est fissuré ou cassé Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer. Installez l’appareil et ses accessoires avec précaution • Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre appareil mobile et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. • Évitez de placer votre appareil ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone de déploiement des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves. Ne laissez pas tomber votre appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs • L’appareil peut être endommagé ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Votre appareil peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez. Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur • Évitez de laisser l’appareil en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire la durée de vie de la batterie. • Lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé pendant une durée prolongée, votre appareil se décharge progressivement et devra être rechargé avant toute utilisation. • Débranchez le chargeur de la prise secteur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. • Utilisez uniquement la batterie dans le cadre de l’utilisation prévue. 22 Consignes de sécurité • Si vous n’utilisez pas la batterie pendant un certain temps, cela peut réduire sa durée de vie et ses performances. Cela peut également entraîner des dysfonctionnements ou une explosion de la batterie, ou provoquer un incendie. • Respectez toutes les instructions de ce mode d’emploi pour prolonger la durée de vie de l’appareil et de la batterie. Tout dommage ou défaut de performance dû au non-respect des avertissements et des instructions de ce mode d’emploi peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. • Votre appareil peut faire l’objet d’usures avec le temps. Certaines pièces et réparations sont couvertes par la garantie pendant la période de validité, contrairement aux dommages ou dysfonctionnements provoqués par l’utilisation d’accessoires non homologués. Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil, respectez les consignes suivantes : • Tenez l’appareil droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone traditionnel. • Parlez directement dans le microphone. • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre appareil • Toute modification ou tout changement effectué sur votre appareil peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Si votre appareil doit être réparé, confiez-le à un service après-vente Samsung. • Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie. • Éteignez l’appareil avant de retirer la batterie. Si vous retirez la batterie alors que l’appareil est allumé, celui-ci risque de subir des dysfonctionnements. Lorsque vous nettoyez l’appareil, respectez les consignes suivantes : • Essuyez votre appareil ou le chargeur avec un chiffon doux et propre. • Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec du coton ou un chiffon doux et propre. 23 Consignes de sécurité • N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents. Cela peut entraîner une décoloration ou une corrosion des pièces externes de l’appareil, ou provoquer une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Utilisez votre appareil uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné Votre appareil peut subir des dysfonctionnements. Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil dans un lieu public Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant. Manipulez les cartes SIM, les cartes mémoire et les câbles avec soin • Lorsque vous insérez une carte ou connectez un câble sur l’appareil, assurez-vous que la carte est correctement positionnée ou que le câble est branché du bon côté. • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risquez de perdre des données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou l’appareil lui-même. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres appareils. • Ne touchez pas les fiches dorées de la carte avec les doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux. • Forcer l’insertion d’une carte ou la connexion d’un câble peut endommager le connecteur à fonctions multiples ou d’autres pièces de l’appareil. Assurez l’accès aux services d’urgence Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de joindre les numéros d’urgence avec votre appareil. Avant de vous rendre dans des régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les services d’urgence. 24 Consignes de sécurité Protégez vos données personnelles et évitez toute fuite ou tout usage abusif des informations sensibles • Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos données importantes. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte de données. • Lors de la mise au rebut de votre appareil, sauvegardez l’ensemble de vos données, puis réinitialisez votre appareil afin d’éviter tout usage abusif de vos données personnelles. • Veuillez lire attentivement les conditions d’utilisation lors du téléchargement d’applications. Soyez particulièrement vigilant lors de l’utilisation d’applications ayant accès à de nombreuses fonctions ou à un volume important de données personnelles. • Vérifiez régulièrement vos comptes afin de détecter toute utilisation non autorisée ou suspecte. Si vous identifiez des signes indiquant un usage abusif de vos informations personnelles, contactez votre opérateur pour supprimer ou modifier les informations relatives à votre compte. • Si vous avez égaré votre appareil ou s’il vous a été volé, modifiez les mots de passe de vos comptes afin de protéger vos informations personnelles. • Évitez d’utiliser des applications provenant de sources inconnues et verrouillez votre appareil à l’aide d’un modèle, d’un mot de passe ou d’un code PIN. Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur. 25 Consignes de sécurité Logiciels malveillants et virus Pour protéger votre appareil contre les logiciels malveillants et les virus, suivez les consignes d’utilisation ci-après. Le non-respect de ces consignes peut entraîner des dommages et des pertes de données qui peuvent ne pas être couverts par le service de garantie • Ne téléchargez pas des applications inconnues. • Visitez uniquement des sites Web de confiance. • Supprimez les messages ou e-mails suspects provenant d’expéditeurs inconnus. • Définissez un mot de passe et modifiez-le régulièrement. • Désactivez les fonctions sans fil, comme le Bluetooth, lorsque vous ne les utilisez pas. • En cas de comportement anormal de votre appareil, exécutez un programme antivirus pour empêcher toute infection. • Exécutez un programme antivirus sur votre appareil avant de lancer des applications et fichiers récemment téléchargés. • Installez des programmes antivirus sur votre ordinateur et exécutez-les régulièrement pour empêcher toute infection. • Ne modifiez pas les paramètres de registre ou le système d’exploitation de l’appareil. Informations sur la certification DAS CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES Cet appareil mobile est un émetteur-récepteur radio. Il a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé. 26 Consignes de sécurité La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 watts par kilogramme (W/Kg). Le DAS est mesuré en utilisant l’appareil mobile dans des conditions de fonctionnement standard et en balayant l’ensemble des fréquences. Valeur DAS maximale pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP : Valeur DAS maximale pour ce modèle DAS au niveau du corps 0,548 W/Kg Lorsque l’appareil est en fonctionnement, le niveau de DAS réel de cet appareil est généralement beaucoup plus faible que la valeur indiquée ci-dessus. En effet, pour des raisons d’efficacité du système et pour réduire les interférences au niveau du réseau, la puissance utile de votre appareil mobile est automatiquement réduite lorsque la transmission du signal ne nécessite pas une pleine puissance. Des essais DAS ont été réalisés avec ce produit porté à une distance de 0,5 cm du corps. Afin de respecter les exigences en matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences, cet appareil doit être positionné à une distance de 0,5 cm du corps. Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile est faible. Des organismes tels que l'Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant réduire leur exposition aux radiofréquences d'utiliser un mains-libres libres permettant d'éloigner l'appareil mobile de leur corps durant son utilisation, ou de réduire le temps d'utilisation de l'appareil. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site www.samsung.com/sar et recherchez votre appareil à l’aide du numéro de modèle. 27 Consignes de sécurité Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Ce symbole apposé sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Élimination de la batterie de ce produit (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Ce synmbole apposé sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie contenue dans ce produit ne doit pas être mise au rebut avec les déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. La batterie contenue dans ce produit ne peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour obtenir des informations concernant son remplacement, veuillez contacter votre fournisseur de services. N’essayez pas de retirer la batterie ou de la jeter au feu. Ne démontez pas, n’écrasez pas ou ne percez pas la batterie. Si vous envisagez de jeter ce produit, votre site de collecte des déchets prendra les mesures adéquates concernant le recyclage et le traitement du produit et de sa batterie. 28 Consignes de sécurité Limitation de responsabilité Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil ou d’en créer des dérivés. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS « EN L’ÉTAT ». DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT, DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES. 29 Consignes de sécurité Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil. Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés. Déclaration de conformité Informations détaillées Pour le produit suivant Produit : Appareil mobile BT/Wi-Fi Modèle(s) : SM-T310 Déclaration et normes applicables Nous déclarons par la présente que le produit ci-dessus est conforme aux exigences essentielles de la directive R&TTE (1999/5/CE) en application des normes suivantes : Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A12 : 2011 DAS EN 62479 : 2010 EN 62311 : 2008 EN 62209-2 : 2010 CEM EN 301 489-01 V1.9.2 (09-2011) EN 55022 : 2010 / AC : 2011 EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1 (09-2012) EN 55024 : 2010 Radio EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1 (08-2010) EN 301 893 V1.6.1 (11-2011) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1 (08-2010) et de la directive (2011/65/UE) sur la restriction d’utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans un équipement électrique et électronique. La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise à l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme suivant : TÜV SÜD BABT, Octagon House, Concorde Way, Fareham, Hampshire, PO15 5RL, UK* Numéro d’identification : 0168 Représentant pour l’union européenne Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK 2013.05.06 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur de laboratoire (lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité) * Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse ou le numéro de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit. Printed in Korea GH68-38989B French. 06/2013. Rev. 1.1 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. À propos de Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer et de synchroniser vos bibliothèques multimédia et vos contacts avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies) et installez-la sur votre ordinateur. www.samsung.com User Manual SM-T310 2 About this manual This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail the device’s functions and features. • Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Applications related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. About this manual 3 • Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information Copyright Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. About this manual 4 Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • The Android logo, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store, and Google Talk™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 5 Table of Contents Getting started 8 Device layout 9 Buttons 10 Package contents 10 Charging the battery 13 Inserting a memory card 14 Turning the device on and off 15 Holding the device 15 Locking and unlocking the device 15 Adjusting the volume 15 Switching to silent mode Basics 16 Indicator icons 17 Using the touch screen 20 Control motions 22 Activating Multi Window 23 Notifications 23 Quick setting panel 24 Home screen 27 Locked screen 28 Using applications 28 Applications screen 29 Help 30 Entering text 32 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 33 Setting up accounts 34 Transferring files 35 Securing the device 37 Upgrading the device Communication 38 Contacts 41 Email 43 Google Mail 44 Talk (Hangouts) 44 Google+ 45 Messenger 45 ChatON Web & network 46 Internet 47 Chrome 48 Bluetooth 49 Screen Mirroring 50 Samsung Link 51 Group Play 52 WatchON 53 Smart Remote Table of Contents 6 84 Calculator 84 S Translator 85 S Voice 86 Google 87 Voice Search 87 My Files 88 Downloads 88 TripAdvisor Travel & local 89 Maps 90 Local 91 Navigation Settings 92 About Settings 92 Wi-Fi 93 Bluetooth 93 Data usage 93 More settings 94 Blocking mode 94 Driving mode 95 Sound 95 Display 96 Storage 97 Power saving mode 97 Battery 97 Application manager 97 Location services Media 54 Music Player 55 Camera 61 Gallery 64 Story Album 66 Paper Artist 67 Video Player 68 YouTube 69 Flipboard Application & media stores 70 Play Store 71 Samsung Apps 71 Game Hub 72 Music Hub 73 Play Books 73 Play Movies 73 Play Music 74 Readers Hub 74 Learning Hub Utilities 75 Memo 76 S Planner 78 Dropbox 79 Cloud 80 Polaris Office 82 Alarm 83 World Clock Table of Contents 7 98 Lock screen 99 Security 100 Language and input 103 Cloud 103 Backup and reset 103 Add account 103 Motion 104 Voice control 104 Accessory 104 Date and time 105 Accessibility 106 About device 106 Google Settings Troubleshooting 8 Getting started Device layout Menu button Multipurpose jack Home button Touch screen Back button Light sensor Front camera Volume button Microphone IrLED Power button Speaker Speaker GPS antenna Rear camera Headset jack Memory card slot Getting started 9 • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes. • Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock mode when the touch screen turns off. Menu • Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen. • Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search. Home • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to open the list of recent applications. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 10 Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the device emits a warning tone and displays a low battery power message. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. Getting started 11 Charging with the charger Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into the multipurpose jack. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. Getting started 12 After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket while charging. Checking the battery charge status When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charge status: Charging Fully charged Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary applications with the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the brightness of the display. Getting started 13 Inserting a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the SD memory card folder under the internal memory. 1 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 2 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place. Getting started 14 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card. Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Turning the device on and off When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. Getting started 15 • Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. • Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless features. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Holding the device Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. Locking and unlocking the device When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked if it is not used for a specified period. To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area at the lower part of the screen. Adjusting the volume Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound volume when playing music or video. Switching to silent mode Use one of the following methods: • Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode. • Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute. • Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound. 16 Basics Indicator icons The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are most common. Icon Meaning Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Synced with the web Connected to computer Alarm activated Silent mode activated Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Basics 17 Using the touch screen Use only fingers to use the touch screen. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • Do not allow the touch screen to contact water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. Finger gestures Tapping To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger. Basics 18 Dragging To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return. Basics 19 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts. Pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 20 Control motions Simple motions allow easy control of the device. Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Motion, and then drag the switch at the top right of the screen to the right. Rotating the screen Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation. To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect Screen rotation. • Some applications do not allow screen rotation. • Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape. Basics 21 Sweeping Sweep your hand across the screen to capture a screenshot. The image is saved in Gallery → Screenshots. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications. Covering Cover the screen with a palm to pause media playback. Basics 22 Activating Multi Window Use this feature to run two applications on the screen at the same time. • Only applications on the Multi Window panel can run. • When launching applications that contain multimedia files, such as music or videos, sound from both files will be played. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To use Multi Window, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Display, and then tick Multi window. Using the Multi Window panel To activate the Multi Window panel, tap and hold . The Multi Window panel appears at the left side of the screen. Select one application, and then drag another application to a new location. To deactivate the Multi Window panel, tap and hold again. Drag the bar between the application panels up or down to adjust the size of the panels. Tap the panel handle to hide or show the panel. Tap and hold the handle and drag it to the left or right edge of the screen to move the panel. When a panel is hidden, tap and hold the handle and drag it up or down to move the handle. Basics 23 Using Multi Window applications While using Multi Window applications, tap or and use one of the following: • : Switch locations between Multi Window applications. • : Maximise the window to fit the screen. • : Close the application. Notifications Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report new messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel, drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen. Quick setting panel From the quick setting panel, you can view your device’s current settings. Drag down from the status bar, tap to open the quick setting panel, and then use the following options: • Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. • Reading mode: Activate or deactivate reading mode. In reading mode, the device helps protect your eyes when reading at night. To select which applications will be used for, tap Settings → Display → Reading mode. • Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. • Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature. Basics 24 • Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings → Blocking mode. • Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode. • Screen Mirroring: Activate or deactivate the screen mirroring feature. • Multi window: Set to use Multi Window. • Driving mode: Activate or deactivate driving mode. • Smart stay: Activate or deactivate the smart stay feature. • Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Flight mode: Activate or deactivate flight mode. The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. To rearrange the options on the quick setting panel, open the quick setting panel, tap , and then tap and drag an item to another location. Home screen The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others. The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging items Adding an application icon On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel preview. Basics 25 Adding an item Customise the Home screen by adding widgets, folders, or panels. Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following categories: • Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen. • Folder: Create a new folder. • Page: Add a new panel to the Home screen. Moving an item Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Removing an item Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release the item. Rearranging panels Adding a new panel Tap → Edit page → . Moving a panel Tap → Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Tap → Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the top of the screen. Basics 26 Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen. On the Home screen, tap → Set wallpaper → Home screen, and then select one of the following: • Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the Internet. • Live wallpapers: See animated images. • Wallpapers: See wallpaper images. Then, select an image and tap Set wallpaper. Or, select an image, resize it by dragging the frame, and then tap Done. Using widgets Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your Home screen. To use them, add widgets from the widgets panel to the Home screen. • Some widgets connect to web services. Using a web-based widget may result in additional charges. • The widgets available may vary depending on the region or service provider. Adding widgets to the Home screen On the Home screen, tap Apps → Widgets. Scroll left or right on the widgets panel, and then tap and hold a widget to add it to the Home screen. Using the setting shortcut widget On the Home screen, tap Apps → Widgets, and then tap and hold Settings Shortcut to open a list of setting options. Select a setting option to add it to the Home screen as a shortcut. Basics 27 Locked screen The locked screen prevents the device from unwanted operation when not in use and also allows you to add convenient widgets. Adding widgets To use widgets when the screen is locked, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Multiple widgets. You cannot use widgets on the locked screen when the security features are activated. Tap the widgets panel area at the upper part of the screen. Scroll right to the last page, tap , and then select a widget to add to the locked screen. Rearranging panels Moving a panel Scroll left or right on the widgets panel area, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Scroll left or right on the widgets panel area, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the top of the screen. Basics 28 Using applications This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet applications. Opening an application On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it. Opening from recently-used applications Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications. Select an application icon to open. Closing an application Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance. Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it. To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button, and then tap . Applications screen The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications installed. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging applications Tap → Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Basics 29 Organising with folders Put related applications together in a folder for convenience. Tap → Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save to save the arrangement. Rearranging panels Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Installing applications Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications. Uninstalling applications Tap → Uninstall, and then select an application to uninstall it. Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled. Sharing applications Share downloaded applications with other users via email, Bluetooth, or other methods. Tap → Share app, select applications, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. The next steps vary depending on the method selected. Help Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure important settings. Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select an item to view tips. Basics 30 Entering text Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. Using the Samsung keyboard Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. Switch to handwriting mode. Enter a space. Enter uppercase. Add an item from the clipboard. Entering uppercase Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice. Changing the keyboard type Tap and hold , and then tap to change the keyboard type. Tap and hold and move the floating keyboard to another location. To switch to the fixed keyboard, tap . Basics 31 Changing language keyboards Add languages on the keyboard, and then slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards. Handwriting Tap , and then write a word with a finger. Suggested words appear as characters are entered. Select a suggested word. Entering text by voice Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays what you speak. If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list. To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language. Copying and pasting Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap Copy to copy or Cut to cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. To paste it into a text entry field, tap and hold at the point where it should be inserted, and then tap Paste. Basics 32 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. (p. 92) Ensure that the Wi-Fi connection is active before using Internet applications. Turning Wi-Fi on and off Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. • Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. • Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. Joining Wi-Fi networks On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right. Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available. Adding Wi-Fi networks If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Connect. Basics 33 Forgetting Wi-Fi networks Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then tap Forget. Setting up accounts Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best experience with the device. Adding accounts Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to set up a Google account. To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Add account → Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be used on the device. Set up a Samsung account as well. Removing accounts On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the account to remove, and then tap Remove account. Basics 34 Transferring files Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. The following file formats are supported by some applications. Some file formats are not supported depending on the version of the device’s software or the computer operating system. • Music: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, and flac • Image: bmp, gif, jpg, and png • Video: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, asf, and mkv • Document: doc, docx, dot, dotx, xls, xlsx, xlt, xltx, csv, ppt, pptx, pps, ppsx, pot, potx, pdf, hwp, txt, asc, rtf, and zip Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media libraries, contacts, and calendars, and syncs them with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Basics 35 Connecting with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open Windows Media Player and sync music files. Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Securing the device Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. Setting a face unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Face unlock. Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face unlock fails. Basics 36 Setting a face and voice unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Face and voice. Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails. Setting a pattern On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Pattern. Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. Setting a PIN On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → PIN. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Setting a password On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Password. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Basics 37 Unlocking the device Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock code. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update. 38 Communication Contacts Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and others. Tap Contacts on the Applications screen. Managing contacts Creating a contact Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. Editing a contact Select a contact to edit, and then tap . Deleting a contact Tap . Searching for contacts Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Use the index at the left side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger along it. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Communication 39 Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • : Compose an email. Displaying contacts By default, the device shows all saved contacts on the device or another account. Tap → Contacts to display, and then select a location where contacts are saved. Moving contacts Moving contacts to Google Tap → Merge accounts → Merge with Google. Contacts moved to Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list. Moving contacts to Samsung Tap → Merge accounts → Merge with Samsung. Contacts moved to Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list. Importing and exporting contacts Importing contacts Tap → Import/Export → Import from SD card or Import from USB storage. Exporting contacts Tap → Import/Export → Export to SD card or Export to USB storage. Sharing contacts Tap → Import/Export → Share namecard via, select contacts, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Communication 40 Favourite contacts Tap Contacts → Favourites. Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Add to favourites: Add contacts to favourites. • Remove from favourites: Remove contacts from favourites. • Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form. • Help: Access help information about using contacts. Contact groups Tap Contacts → Groups. Adding contacts to a group Select a group, and then tap → Add member. Select contacts to add, and then tap Done. Managing groups Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Edit: Change the group settings. • Add member: Add members to the group. • Remove member: Remove members from the group. • Send email: Send an email to a group’s members. • Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another position, and then tap Done. • Help: Access help information about using contacts. Deleting groups Tap , select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be deleted. Communication 41 Sending an email to a group’s members Select a group, tap → Send email, select members, and then tap Done. Business card Create a business card and send it to others. Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device, select the business card in ME, and then tap to edit. Tap → Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method. Email Use this application to send or view email messages. Tap Email on the Applications screen. Setting up email accounts Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Add account. Sending messages Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients, subject, and message, and then tap Send. Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list. Tap +Cc/Bcc to add more recipients. Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others. Tap to insert images, events, contacts, location information, and others into the message. Communication 42 Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap . Tick Schedule sending, set a time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information. Reading messages Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Open attachments. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list. Delete the message. Mark the message as a reminder. Compose a message. Forward the message. Go to the previous or next message. Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap Save to save it. Communication 43 Google Mail Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service. Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Sending messages In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap SEND. Tap +CC/BCC to add more recipients. Tap to attach images. Tap → Save draft to save the message for later delivery. Tap → Attach video to attach videos. Tap → Discard to start over. Reading messages Mark the message as unread. Add a label to this message. Preview attachment. Keep this message for long-term storage. Mark the message as a reminder. Delete this message. Reply to this message. Reply to all recipients. Add this email address to the contacts list. Forward this message to others. Communication 44 Labels Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox. To add a label to a message, select the message, tap , and then select the label to assign. Talk (Hangouts) Use this application to chat with others. Tap Talk (Hangouts) on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a friend from the friends list or enter data to search and select a friend from the results to start chatting. Google+ Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service. Tap Google+ on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Tap All Circles to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your circles. Tap to use other social network features. Communication 45 Messenger Use this application to chat with others via Google+ instant messaging service. Tap Messenger on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen, and then tap . ChatON Use this application to chat with any device. To use this application, you must sign in to your Samsung account. Tap ChatON on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Create the buddies list by entering phone numbers or email addresses of Samsung accounts, or selecting buddies from the list of suggestions. Select a buddy to start chatting. To sync contacts on the device with ChatON, tap More → Settings → Contact sync. 46 Web & network Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Tap Internet on the Applications screen. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go. Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage. Opening a new page Tap . To go to another webpage, scroll left or right on the title field, and tap the page to select it. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap . To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one. Web & network 47 History Tap → History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap → Clear history. Tap → History → Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages. Saved pages To view saved webpages, tap → Saved pages. Links Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new page, save, or copy. To view saved webpages, tap → Downloads. Sharing webpages To share a webpage address with others, tap → Share page. To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap Share. Chrome Use this application to search for information and browse webpages. Tap Chrome on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, and then enter a web address or search criteria. Opening a new page Tap → New tab. To go to another webpage, scroll left or right on the title field, and tap the page to select it. Web & network 48 Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. Syncing with other devices Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device, when you are logged in with the same Google account. To view open tabs on other devices, tap → Other devices. Select a webpage to open. To view bookmarks, tap → Bookmarks. Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, and then drag the Bluetooth switch to the right. Web & network 49 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth → Scan, and detected devices are listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery, select an image, tap → Bluetooth, and then select one of the Bluetooth devices. After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the image. The transferred file is saved in the Bluetooth folder. If a contact is received, it is added to the contacts list automatically. Screen Mirroring Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) may not be compatible with this feature. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be discovered or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → More settings → Screen Mirroring, and then drag the Screen Mirroring switch to the right. Select a device, open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. To connect to a device using a PIN, tap and hold the device name to enter the PIN. Web & network 50 Samsung Link Use this application to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play and send multimedia files on your device to another device or web storage service. To use this application, you must sign in to your Samsung account and register two or more devices. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. To get more details, tap → Help. Tap Samsung Link on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When opening this application, recent contents from all your registered devices will appear. You can browse and play them. To start sharing files, scroll to DEVICES & STORAGE and select an option. Sending files Send files to other devices or upload them to web storage services. Select your device, tap , select files, tap Done, and then select a device or web storage. Sharing files Select a device or web storage, tap , select files, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Playing files on a remote device Select a device or web storage, tap , select a file, and then select a device. • Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media player. • Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. Web & network 51 Managing contents on a web storage service Select a web storage service, and then view and manage your files. To download files from a web storage service, tap , select files, and then tap Done. To register web storage services to the device, tap → Settings → Registered storage → , and then select a web storage service. Group Play Use this application to share screens with multiple devices. Create or join a Group Play session, and then share images, documents, or music. Tap Group Play on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Creating a group for Group Play Tap Create group, set a password, and then use the following features: • Share music: Select music files to share. You can connect two or more devices and use them to achieve a surround sound effect. • Share pictures: Select images to share. • Share documents: Select documents to share. • Play games: Play online games with friends. Tap and write a note or draw on the screen. All participants can see what you create. Tap to view all shared images in mosaic layout. Tap or to select more images or documents. Tap to view the group participants. Web & network 52 Joining Group Play Tap Join group, select a Group Play session to join, and then enter the password for the group. Select a media category and the content that is currently being shared will appear on the device. WatchON Use this application to connect to a TV to watch your favourite shows and movies. Tap WatchON on the Applications screen. You must first connect the device to a network and ensure that the device’s infrared port is facing the TV. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Connecting to a TV Connect to a TV to display the device’s screen onto a large surface and control the TV remotely with the device. Tap → Continue, and then follow the on-screen instructions to register the TV to the device. The steps vary depending on the options you choose. Watching TV Select from the TV programme suggestions or select a category at the bottom of the screen. Select a TV programme and then tap Watch on TV or Watch now. The selected programme will show up on the connected TV. Tap and open the control panel to control the TV. Setting programme reminders Tap Timeline at the bottom of the screen and select a time for a TV programme you want to watch. Select a programme, and then tap Set reminder. The reminder for the selected programme is added to S Planner. Web & network 53 Smart Remote Use this application to use the device as a remote control for TVs and entertainment systems. Tap Smart Remote on the Applications screen. You must first connect the device to a Wi-Fi network and ensure that the device’s infrared port is facing the TV. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Setting the device as a remote control for a TV Tap Choose Your Country or Region, select a country or a region, and then follow on-screen instructions to complete the setup process. To open the remote control panel, tap the panel handle at the bottom right edge of the screen. To add another room, tap → Add New Room. Customising remote control settings Tap and use the following options: • Edit Channels: Edit channels displayed on the device’s screen. • Rooms & Devices: Change connection settings. • Profile: Enter a user profile so that Peel can find top picks. • Favorite Programs: View favourite programmes. • Cut Programs: Restore previously hidden programmes. • Genres: Hide or change the order of genres. • Sports: Hide or change the order of sports. • Send Feedback: Report your opinions for application development. • Notifications: Set the device to remind you of various upcoming TV programmes. • Reset Peel: Reset the connection settings. 54 Media Music Player Use this application to listen to music. Tap Music Player on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software version. • Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding method used. Playing music Select a music category, and then select a song to play. Tap the album image at the bottom of the screen to open the music player screen. Skip to the next song. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Pause and resume playback. Adjust the volume. Change the repeat mode. Restart the currently-playing song or skip to the previous song. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Turn on shue. Scan DLNA-enabled devices. Set the le as your favourite song. View file details. Hide the music player screen. Open the playlist. Media 55 To set a personalised sound while listening to songs with a headset, tap → Settings → Advanced → Adapt Sound → On. When you turn the volume up to level 14 or higher, the adapt sound option is not applied to music playback. If you turn the volume down to level 13 or lower, the option is reapplied. Creating playlists Make an own selection of songs. Tap → Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Select songs to include, and then tap Done. To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap → Add to playlist. Playing music by mood Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new song is added, tap Music square → . Tap Music square and select a cell of mood. Or select multiple cells by dragging your finger. Camera Use this application to take photos or videos. Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 61) Tap Camera on the Applications screen. • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Media 56 Taking photos Taking a photo Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo. View more options. Change the shooting mode. Indicates which shooting mode is in use. Switch between the front and rear camera. Open Gallery to view photos and videos. Start taking a video. Select among various effects that are available. Shooting mode Several photo effects are available. Tap MODE, and then scroll up or down the screen at the right side of the screen. • Auto: Use this to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. • Beauty face: Take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. • Sound & shot: Use this to take a photo with sound. Tap to take a photo. The device records a few seconds of audio after taking a photo. While taking photos in this mode, sound is recorded by the internal microphone. Media 57 • Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together. To get the best shot, follow these tips. – Move the camera slowly in one direction. – Keep the camera’s viewfinder within the guidelines. – Avoid taking photos of a subject in front of unrecognisable backgrounds, such as empty skies or plain walls. • Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects. • Night: Use this setting for images taken in darker conditions. Panoramic photos A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots. Tap MODE → Panorama. Tap and move the camera in any direction. When two panorama guide frames are aligned, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, tap . Taking videos Taking a video Tap . To pause recording, tap . To stop recording, tap . The zoom function may not be available when recording at the highest resolution. Media 58 Recording mode Tap → to change recording mode. • Normal: Use this mode for normal quality. • Limit for Email: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via email. Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods: • Use the Volume button to zoom in or out. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • The zoom function may not be available when shooting at the highest resolution. • The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting video. Media 59 Share shot Tap → , and then select one of the following: • Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. • Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged in a photo and send it to that person. • ChatON photo share: Send a photo to another device via ChatON. • Remote viewfinder: Set a device to control the camera remotely. Controlling the camera remotely Set a device as a viewfinder to control the camera remotely. Tap → → Remote viewfinder, and then connect the device and the camera using Wi-Fi Direct. Tap to take a photo remotely using the device as a viewfinder. Configuring settings for Camera Tap → to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode used. • Photo size / Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Metering: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. Media 60 • Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very close objects. • GPS tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo. Activate this feature when taking photos to create albums in Story Album. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. • Review: Briefly display photos taken. • Volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Voice control: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands. • Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags. Activate this to use Tag Buddy in Gallery and Story Album. • Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene. • Storage: Select the memory location for storage. • Reset: Reset the camera settings. Media 61 Shortcuts Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options. Tap → Edit quick settings. Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the top of the screen. The other icons can be moved within the list by tapping and dragging them. Gallery Use this application to view images and videos. Tap Gallery on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software installed on the device. • Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding method used. Viewing images Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves an image, the Download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open it. In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image. Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image: • Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. • Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to return. Media 62 Playing videos Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap . Editing images When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Favourite: Add the image to favourites. • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder. • Photo frame: Use this to add a frame and a note to an image. The edited image is saved in the Photo frame folder. • Photo note: Use this to write a note on the back of the image. Tap to edit the note. • Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard. • Print: Print the image via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. • Rename: Rename the file. • Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image. • Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise. • Rotate right: Rotate clockwise. • Crop: Resize the blue frame to crop and save the image in it. • Scan for nearby devices: Search for devices that have media sharing activated. • Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image. • Details: View image details. • Settings: Change the Gallery settings. Favourite images When viewing an image, tap → Favourite to add the image to the favourites list. Media 63 Deleting images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap → Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap . • When viewing an image, tap . Sharing images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap → Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap to send them to others. • When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services. Setting as wallpaper When viewing an image, tap → Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact. Tagging faces Tap → Settings → Tags, and then tick Face tag. A yellow frame appears around the recognised face on an image. Tap the face, tap Add name, and then select or add a contact. When the face tag appears on an image, tap the face tag and use available options, such as sending messages. Face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. Using Tag Buddy Tap → Settings → Tags → Tag buddy, and then drag the Tag buddy switch to the right to display a contextual tag (weather, location, date, and person’s name) when opening an image. Media 64 Organising with folders Create a folder to organise images or videos stored in the device. You can copy or move files from one folder to another. To create a new folder, tap . Enter a name for the folder, tap OK, and then tick images or videos. Tap and hold any selected image or video, drag it to the new folder, and then tap Done. Tap Copy to copy or Move to move. Story Album Use this application to create your own digital album to keep your stories by organising the images neatly and automatically. Tap Story Album on the Applications screen. Creating story albums Tap Create album → By tag information to create a story album automatically. Select criteria, and then tap Find pictures. Enter a title for the album, select a theme, and then tap Create album. To create it manually, tap Create album → From the Gallery. Creating recommended albums When you take photos at one location, the device automatically sorts your photos into albums based on your specified criteria and suggests making the new albums. Tap → Settings → Suggestions → Home city, and then set a method for recognising your location. Select an album type and set a minimum number of photos. When you take photos that meet the criteria you set, the device will suggest making an album. Tap Create album → From suggestions. Select an album, enter a title for the album, and then tap Done → OK. The device will recommend making story albums when you surpass the preset number of photos in a single day. Media 65 Viewing story albums Select a story album. The cover image appears on the first page. Scroll left or right to view images in the story album. When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Add content: Add more content to the current page. • Remove content: Delete content on the current page. • Change theme: Change the theme for the page layout. • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current album. • Share via: Send the album to others. • Print: Print the album via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. • Order photo book: Place an order for a printed album. • Export Album: Export the album to other storage locations. • Delete album: Delete the album. Editing images Tap the image of the page in an album. To add a caption, tap . To send the image to others, tap . To delete the image, tap . To apply effects to the image, tap . To start a slideshow, tap → Slideshow → Start slideshow. To set the image as an album cover image, tap → Set as cover. To rotate the image anticlockwise, tap → Rotate left. To rotate the image clockwise, tap → Rotate right. Media 66 Paper Artist Use this application to make images look like illustrations with fun effects or frames. Tap Paper Artist on the Applications screen. Use artistic tools to edit an image. The edited image is saved in the Gallery → Paper Pictures folder. Select an existing image. Share the image. Apply effects to the image. Draw with a pen. Tap to change the pen thickness. Take a photo. Draw with a brush. Tap to change the brush thickness. Save the image. Apply frames to the image. Erase the drawings. Tap to change the eraser size. Access additional options. Media 67 Video Player Use this application to play video files. Tap Video Player on the Applications screen. • Avoid locking the device’s screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand. Each time you lock the screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand, one of your available rental counts is lost. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device's software. • Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding method used. Playing videos Select a video to play. Change screen ratio. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Restart the current video or skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Adjust the volume. Reduce the size of the video screen. Pause and resume playback. Select a mode for Dolby sound system. Scan DLNA-enabled devices. Deleting videos Tap → Delete, select videos by ticking, and then tap Delete. Media 68 Sharing videos Tap → Share via, select a sharing method, select videos by ticking, and then tap Share. Using Popup Video player Use this feature to use other applications without closing the video player. While watching videos, tap to use the pop-up player. Spread two fingers apart on the screen to enlarge the player or pinch to reduce it. To move the player, drag the player to another location. YouTube Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website. Tap YouTube on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Watching videos Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen. Pause or resume playback. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change display quality. Add the video to the playlist. Send the URL to others. Search for videos. Media 69 Sharing videos Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method. Uploading videos Select your account, tap , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap UPLOAD. Flipboard Use this application to access your personalised magazines. Tap Flipboard on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To start your Flipboard, flick left on the greeting page, select news topics, and then tap Build Your Flipboard. Select a cover story or a topic, flick through the Flipboard pages, and then select an article to read. While reading an article, use the following icons: • : Go to the previous page. • : View others’ comments about the article. • : Share the article via Twitter. • : Share the article with others. • : Set the article as your likes in Facebook. • : Add the article to the favourites list in Twitter. • : Add the article to your Flipboard magazine. 70 Application & media stores Play Store Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run on the device. Tap Play Store on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Install. If there is a charge for the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase process. • When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. • To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Security → Unknown sources. Uninstalling applications Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store. Tap , select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and then tap Uninstall. Application & media stores 71 Samsung Apps Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more information, visit www.samsungapps.com. Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category. Tap to select a category. To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the search field. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Get or Buy. When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. Game Hub Use this application to access games. Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps. Application & media stores 72 Music Hub Use this application to play music and purchase songs or albums from the Music Hub catalogue. Subscribe to the Music Hub premium service to enjoy customised recommendations, unlimited song streaming, personal radio stations, and cloud storage service for all your music. To get more details, tap → Help or visit the Music Hub website. Tap Music Hub on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Some features may be labelled differently depending on the subscription terms. • Some features including streaming services may not be available depending on the region or service provider. MY MUSIC Play music stored on the device and in the cloud storage server. All your music stays automatically synced with your computer. STORE Enjoy unlimited song streaming. Stream songs or download them to listen without network coverage. Add songs to playlists and share them with friends. RADIO Listen to music on radio stations or create your own one. You can personalise your station based on an artist you like. The station will play music similar to the songs of your favourite artist. You can also receive customised recommendations from Music Hub. Application & media stores 73 Play Books Use this application to read and download book files. Tap Play Books on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play Movies Use this application to watch, download, and rent movies or TV shows. Tap Play Movies on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play Music Use this application to listen to music from the device or stream music from the Google cloud service. Tap Play Music on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Application & media stores 74 Readers Hub Use this application to download and read book files. Tap Readers Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a book to read. To download book files, go to the Readers Hub Store. Learning Hub Use this application to access learning material. Tap Learning Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, and then select a video lecture or book. 75 Utilities Memo Use this application to record important information to save and view at a later date. Tap Memo on the Applications screen. Composing memos Tap , enter a memo, and then tap Save. To change the background colour, tap → Colour. To lock the memo so that others cannot view it, tap → Lock. Browsing memos Browse memo thumbnails by scrolling up or down. To edit the memo, tap the memo. To search for a memo, tap . To change the view mode, tap . To delete memos, tap . To sort memos by date, tap → Sort by. To send the text in memos to others, tap → Share text via. To send memos to others, tap → Share via. To print memos via a USB or Wi-Fi connection, tap → Print. To import memos from Google Docs, tap → Import. To export memos to other storage locations, tap → Export. To change the memo settings, tap → Settings. Utilities 76 Viewing a memo Tap the memo thumbnail to open it. Scroll left or right to see more memos. Tap and use the following: • Delete: Delete the memo. • Colour: Change the background colour. • Lock: Lock the memo so that others cannot view it. • Print: Print the memo via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. • Share text via: Send the text in the memo to others. • Share via: Send the memo to others. S Planner Use this application to manage events and tasks. Tap S Planner on the Applications screen. Creating events or tasks Tap , and then use one of the following methods: • Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting. • Add memo: Create a handwritten memo to attach to the date. To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again. Utilities 77 Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an advance alert, or where it takes place. Invite others to the event by sending an email. Enter the email address to the Participants field, or tap to open the contacts list. Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the map that appears. Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images. Syncing with Google Calendar On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Google under Accounts, select the Google account, and then tick Sync Calendar. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S Planner → → Sync. To display synced event or task, tap → Settings → View settings → Calendars → Display, select the Google account, and then tap OK. Changing calendar type Tap the top left of the screen, and then select one from among different types of calendars including month, week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change yearly calendar back to monthly calendar. Searching for events Tap , and then enter a keyword to search for. To view today’s events, tap Today at the top of the screen. Utilities 78 Deleting events Select a date, and then tap → Delete. Sharing events Select an event, tap → Share via, and then select a sharing method. Dropbox Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other computers that have Dropbox installed. Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When running Dropbox for the first time, tap Start to activate it. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. Once Dropbox is activated, photos and videos taken with the device’s camera are uploaded to Dropbox automatically. To view the uploaded photos or videos, tap . To share or delete files or create albums, tap , and then select files. To upload files to Dropbox, tap → → Upload here → Photos or videos or Other files. To open files in Dropbox, select a file. While viewing images or videos, tap to add it to the favourites list. To open files in the favourites list, tap . Utilities 79 Cloud Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung account or Dropbox. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Cloud. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with the Samsung account Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files. Backing up or restoring data Tap Backup to back up or restore data with your Samsung account. Syncing with Dropbox Tap Link Dropbox account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever you make some changes. Utilities 80 Polaris Office Use this application to edit documents in various formats, including spreadsheets and presentations. Tap Polaris Office on the Applications screen. Some functions may not be available, depending on the file type. Create a document. View favourite documents. Scroll left or right to view recent documents. View and manage documents online. Browse folders. Browse by document formats. Creating documents Tap , and then select a document type. Use the editing toolbar at the top of the screen to edit the document. To finish, tap → Save, enter a filename, select a folder to save to, and then tap Save. Reading documents Tap a file. Or tap Browser, Clouds, Form type, or Favourites, and then select a file to open. To start a slideshow, tap → Slide Show. To search for a text string in the document, tap . Tap , and then use one of the following functions: Utilities 81 Document • Save as: Save the document with a different name. • PDF export: Save the document as a PDF file. • Find & Replace: Search for or replace text. • Page layout: Change the layout of pages. • Full width view: View the document contents only, without margins. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Reflow text: Rearrange the text to fit the screen. • View Comment: View comments in the document. • TTS: Read the document via the text-to-speech feature. • Print: Print the document via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. Presentation • Slide Show: Start a slideshow. • Save as: Save the document with a different name. • PDF export: Save the document as a PDF file. • Find & Replace: Search for or replace text. • Single slide view: View slides one by one. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Print: Print the document via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. Utilities 82 Spreadsheet • Save as: Save the document with a different name. • Find & Replace: Search for or replace text. • Protect worksheet: Lock the sheet so that others cannot edit it. • Freeze frame: Keep the selected row in place. • Recalculation: Recalculate the functions on the sheet. • Sort: Sort cells by specific criteria. • Filter: View cells filtered by specific criteria. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Print: Print the document via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. Text • Save as: Save the document with a different name. • TTS: Read the document via the text-to-speech feature. • Print: Print the document via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. Alarm Use this application to set wake-up calls and alarms for important events. Tap Alarm on the Applications screen. Turn this alarm on or off. Utilities 83 Setting alarms Tap , set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and then tap Save. • Location alarm: Set a location. The alarm goes off only when you are in the location. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete. World Clock Use this application to check the time in any location in the world. Tap World Clock on the Applications screen. Creating clocks Tap , enter a city name or select a city from the globe, and then tap . To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings. Deleting clocks Tap , select clocks, and then tap Delete. Utilities 84 Calculator Use this application for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Applications screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator. To see the calculation history, tap to hide the keypad. To clear the history, tap → Clear history. To change the character size for the history, tap → Text size. S Translator Use this application to translate text into other languages. Tap S Translator on the Applications screen. Using S Translator Set the source and target languages, enter text in the input field, and then tap . To add a language pair to your favourites list, tap . To send a language pair to others, tap . Starting a conversation with the translator Tap the buttons at the bottom of the screen to communicate with another person via spoken translation. Tap Speak for your language, and then speak into the microphone. The device will translate what you say. Tap in the target language field to let the device read the translation out loud. Then, tap Speak for the language of the person you are talking with and let the person reply in their language. The device will translate what they say. Tap in the source language field to let the device read it back to you. Utilities 85 S Voice Use this application to command the device by voice to send a message, write a memo, and more. Tap S Voice on the Applications screen. Alternatively, press the Home button twice. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Here are several examples of spoken commands: • Open music • Launch calculator • Check schedule Tips for better voice recognition • Speak clearly. • Speak in quiet places. • Do not use offensive or slang words. • Avoid speaking in dialectal accents. The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands depending on your surroundings or how you speak. Utilities 86 Google Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents on the device as well. Tap Google on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Searching the device Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , and then speak a keyword. If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the search results. Searching with images To search with an image, tap → Search with camera. Aim the camera at an image, and then tap . This feature is available only for English. Search scope To select what applications to search, tap → Settings → Tablet search, and then tick the items to search for. Google Now Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it. Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now settings, tap → Settings → Google Now. Utilities 87 Voice Search Use this application to search webpages by speaking. Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. My Files Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos, songs, and sound clips. Tap My Files on the Applications screen. Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root directory, tap . In a folder, use one of the following functions: • : Search for files. • : Change the view mode. • : Create a folder. • Time: Sort files or folders. Select a file or folder by ticking, and then use one of the following functions: • : Copy files or folders to another folder. • : Move files or folders to another folder. • : Delete files or folders. • : Send files to others. • → Rename: Rename a file or folder. • → Details: View file or folder details. Utilities 88 Downloads Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications. Tap Downloads on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email. Select a file to open it with an appropriate application. To sort the files by size, tap Sort by size. To sort the files by date, tap Sort by date. TripAdvisor Use this application to get travel information such as destination or hotel. You can also book for a room and share your reviews with others. Tap TripAdvisor on the Applications screen. 89 Travel & local Maps Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions. Tap Maps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Searching for locations Tap Search Maps, enter an address, and then tap . Select a location to view the detailed location information. To search for nearby locations, tap → Local. Once the location is found, tap and use one of the following functions: • Clear Map: Clear the map. • Make available offline: Save the map of a specified area to view it offline. • Local: Search for nearby locations. • Layers: Overlay multiple layers including satellite images, traffic information, and more. • Latitude: Share location information with friends. • My Places: View offline maps, starred places, recent places, and more. • Settings: Change the map settings. • Help: View information about using the map. To view current location, tap . To zoom in or out the map, spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. Travel & local 90 Getting directions for a destination 1 Tap . 2 Tap , and then select a method to enter starting and ending locations: • My current location: Use current location for starting location. • Contacts: Select from the contacts list. • Point on map: Pinpoint by tapping on the map. • My Places: Select from the list of favourite places. 3 Select a travel method, such as driving, public transit, or walking, and then tap Go. 4 Select one of the routes that appear. Local Use this application to search for nearby restaurants, banks, bus stops, and more. Tap Local on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a place category, and then select a place from the list of search results. • Map: Pinpoint the place on the map. • Directions: Search for a route to the place. To add a place category, tap → Add a search on the category list, enter a keyword to search into the text field. Travel & local 91 Navigation Use this application to search for a route to a destination. Tap Navigation on the Applications screen. • Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving. Follow all safety warnings and regulations while driving. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Specify the destination by using various methods, such as speaking or entering the destination address. Once a route is found, follow the on-screen instructions to navigate to the destination. 92 Settings About Settings Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Applications screen. Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. To use options, tap . • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. • Help: Access help information for Wi-Fi. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. Setting Network notification The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify when available. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → → Advanced and tick Network notification to activate this feature. Settings 93 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects two devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via the Bluetooth feature. • Help: Access help information for Bluetooth. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount. More settings Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks. Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). Settings 94 Nearby devices • File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA-enabled devices to access media files on your device. • Shared contents: Set the device to share your content with other devices. • Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device. • Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. • Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files. • Upload from other devices: Set the device to accept uploads from other devices. Screen Mirroring Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others. Kies via Wi-Fi Connect the device to Samsung Kies via a Wi-Fi network. Blocking mode Select which notifications will be blocked and how long to block them. Driving mode Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in driving mode. Settings 95 Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Default notification sound: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen. • Adapt Sound: Personalise the sound for the ear you use most while listening to music. Display Change the settings for the display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. • Notification panel: Customise the items that appear on the notifications panel. • Multi window: Set the device to use Multi Window. • Screen mode: – Adapt display: Use this mode for optimising the display according to the display settings. – Dynamic: Use this mode to make the display tone more vivid. – Standard: Use this mode for normal surroundings. – Movie: Use this mode for dim surroundings, such as in a dark room. • Reading mode: Select which applications will use reading mode. In reading mode, the device helps protect your eyes when reading at night. Settings 96 • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when your device is connected to a desktop dock or charging. • Smart screen: – Smart stay: Set the device to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. – Smart rotation: Set the interface not to rotate according to the orientation of your face. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. • Increase legibility: Sharpen the text to make it easier to read. • Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory. Settings 97 Power saving mode Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode. • CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage. • Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display. • Learn about Power saving mode: Discover how to reduce battery consumption. Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. Application manager View and manage the applications on your device. Location services Change settings for location information permissions. • Access to my location: Set the device to allow applications to use your current location information. • Use GPS satellites: Set the device to use the GPS satellite for finding the current location. • Use wireless networks: Set the device to allow location data collection or to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi. • My places: Set up profiles that will be used for specific locations when you use GPS, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth features to find your current location. Settings 98 Lock screen Change settings for the locked screen. • Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock feature selected. • Multiple widgets: Set the device to allow use of widgets on the locked screen. • Lock screen widgets: – Clock or personal message: Set the device to show a clock or personal message on the locked screen. The following options may vary, depending on your selection. For a clock: – Clock size: Change the size of the clock. – Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. – Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. For a personal message: – Edit personal message: Edit the personal message. • Shortcuts: Set the device to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Unlock effect: Select an effect when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. • Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. • Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. Settings 99 Security Change settings for securing the device. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. – Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account. – Use wireless networks: Set the device to allow location data collection or to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi. • Find my mobile web page: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the Find my mobile website. • Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Choose to install applications from any source. If not chosen, download applications only from Play Store. • Verify apps: Set this to allow Google to check the application for harmful behaviour before installing it. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. Settings 100 Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. Language Select a display language for all menus and applications. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • Input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. • Cursor control: Enable or disable the smart keyboard navigation feature to move the cursor by scrolling the keyboard. Settings 101 • Handwriting: Customise settings for handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen thickness, or pen colour. • Advanced: – Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. – Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. – Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. – Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. – Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Help: Access help information for using the Samsung keyboard. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Voice recogniser Select a voice recognition engine. This feature appears once you use a voice recognition application. Voice search For Samsung voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Open via the home key: Set the device to launch S Voice by pressing the Home button twice. • Use location data: Set the device to use location information for voice search results. • Hide offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Help: Access help information for S Voice. • About: View version information. • Voice control: Control applications by voice commands. Settings 102 • Wake up command: Set the device to start voice recognition by saying a wake up command while using S Voice. • Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. • Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. • Check missed events: Set the device to check messages, or events when S Voice is launched by pressing the headset button. • Home address: Enter your home address to use location information with the voice command feature. • Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information to use Facebook with S Voice. • Log in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information to use Twitter with S Voice. For Google voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow a voice search with a Bluetooth headset, when it is connected to the device. Text-to-speech options • Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. Settings 103 Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Cloud Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud storage. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and application data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Add account Add email or SNS accounts. Motion Activate the motion recognition feature and change the settings that control motion recognition on your device. • Palm swipe to capture: Set the device to capture an image of the screen when you sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen. • Palm touch to mute/pause: Set the device to pause media playback when you touch the screen with your palm. • Learn about hand motions: View the tutorial for controlling hand motions. Settings 104 Voice control Change settings to control options by voice commands. Accessory Change the accessory settings. • Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or removed from a desktop dock. • Audio output mode: Set the device to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a desktop dock. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Settings 105 Accessibility Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device. • Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback. • Show shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears when you press and hold the Power button. • Manage accessibility: Export or import the accessibility settings to share them with other devices. • TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback. • Font size: Change the font size. • Magnification gestures: Set the device to zoom in and out with finger gestures. • Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. • Colour adjustment: Adjust the colour scheme for the screen when the device determines that you are colour blind or having difficulty reading content. • Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate Talkback when you press and hold the Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers. • Text-to-speech options: – Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web content more accessible. • Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset. Settings 106 • Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud. • Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds. • Assistant menu: Set the device to show the assistive shortcut icon that helps you access functions supported by external buttons or features on the notifications panel. You can also edit the menu on the shortcut icon. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Interaction control: Set an area of the screen to be excluded from touch inputs. About device Access device information and update device software. Google Settings Use this application to configure settings for some features provided by Google. Tap Google Settings on the Applications screen. 107 Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details. The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: • Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. • Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for 8-10 seconds. The device reboots automatically. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Troubleshooting 108 The device beeps and the battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device. The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off The battery in the device is not user replaceable. If you have problems with the battery or need it replaced, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre. Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your Samsung device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your Samsung device for a variety of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that your device supports the file type. Troubleshooting 109 Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. English (EU). 06/2013. Rev.1.2 Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or software version, and is subject to change without prior notice. www.samsung.com www.samsung.com User Manual SM-T310 2 About this manual This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail the device’s functions and features. • Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Applications related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. About this manual 3 • Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information Copyright Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. About this manual 4 Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 5 Table of Contents Getting started 8 Device layout 9 Buttons 10 Package contents 10 Charging the battery 13 Inserting a memory card 15 Turning the device on and off 15 Holding the device 16 Locking and unlocking the device 16 Adjusting the volume 16 Switching to silent mode Basics 17 Indicator icons 18 Using the touch screen 21 Control motions 23 Using Multi Window 27 Notifications 28 Home screen 30 Locked screen 31 Applications screen 33 Using applications 33 Help 34 Entering text 36 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 37 Setting up accounts 38 Transferring files 39 Securing the device 41 Upgrading the device Communication 42 Contacts 46 Email 47 Google Mail 49 Hangouts 49 Google+ 50 Photos 50 Twitter Web & network 51 Internet 52 Chrome 53 Bluetooth 54 Screen Mirroring 55 Samsung Link 56 Group Play 58 WatchON Table of Contents 6 93 Calculator 93 S Translator 94 S Voice 95 Google 96 Voice Search 96 My Files 97 Downloads 97 TripAdvisor Travel & local 98 Maps Settings 99 About Settings 99 Wi-Fi 100 Bluetooth 100 Data usage 101 More settings 102 Blocking mode 102 Hands-free mode 102 Sound 103 Display 104 Storage 104 Power saving mode 105 Battery 105 Application manager 105 Default applications 105 Location 106 Lock screen 107 Security 108 Language and input 111 Cloud Media 59 Music 61 Camera 66 Gallery 70 Story Album 74 Paper Artist 75 Video 76 YouTube 77 Flipboard Application & media stores 78 Play Store 79 Samsung Apps 79 Game Hub 80 Music Hub 81 Play Books 81 Play Movies 81 Play Music 81 Play Games 82 Play Newsstand 82 Readers Hub 82 Video Hub Utilities 83 Memo 84 S Planner 87 Dropbox 88 Cloud 88 Drive 89 POLARIS Office 5 91 Alarm 92 World Clock Table of Contents 7 111 Backup and reset 112 Add account 112 Motion 112 Voice control 112 Accessories 113 Date and time 113 Accessibility 114 About device 114 Google Settings Troubleshooting 8 Getting started Device layout Menu button Multipurpose jack Home button Touch screen Back button Light sensor Front camera Volume button Microphone IrLED Power button Speaker Speaker GPS antenna Rear camera Headset jack Memory card slot Getting started 9 • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes. • Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock mode when the touch screen turns off. Menu • Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen. • Tap and hold to launch Google search. Home • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to open the list of recent applications. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 10 Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. Getting started 11 Charging with the charger Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into the multipurpose jack. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. Getting started 12 After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket and easily accessible while charging. Checking the battery charge status When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charge status: Charging Fully charged Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary applications with the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the brightness of the display. Getting started 13 Inserting a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the SD memory card folder. 1 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 2 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place. Getting started 14 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card. Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Getting started 15 Turning the device on and off When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. • Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. • Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless features. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Holding the device Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. Getting started 16 Locking and unlocking the device When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked if it is not used for a specified period. To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area at the lower part of the screen. Adjusting the volume Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound volume when playing music or video. Switching to silent mode Use one of the following methods: • Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode. • Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute. • Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound. 17 Basics Indicator icons The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are most common. Icon Meaning Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Synced with the web Connected to computer Alarm activated Mute mode activated Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Basics 18 Using the touch screen Use only fingers to use the touch screen. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which are outside of the touch input area. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. Finger gestures Tapping To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger. Basics 19 Dragging To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return. Basics 20 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts. Pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 21 Control motions Simple motions allow easy control of the device. Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Motion, and then drag the switch at the top right of the screen to the right. Rotating the screen Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation. To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect Screen rotation. • Some applications do not allow screen rotation. • Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape. Basics 22 Sweeping Sweep your hand across the screen to capture a screenshot. The image is saved in Gallery → Screenshots. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications. Covering Cover the screen with a palm to pause media playback. Basics 23 Using Multi Window Use this feature to run multiple applications on the screen at the same time. • Only applications on the Multi Window tray can run. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To use Multi Window, on the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Display, and then tick Multi window. Using a split screen Multi Window Use this feature to run applications in a split screen. Launching applications in a split screen Multi Window 1 Drag your finger from the right edge of the screen towards the middle of the screen. Alternatively, tap and hold . The Multi Window tray appears at the right side of the screen. Multi Window tray Basics 24 2 Tap and hold an application icon on the Multi Window tray, and then drag it to the screen. Release the application icon when the screen turns blue. 3 Tap and hold another application icon on the Multi Window tray, and then drag it to a new location. Basics 25 Sharing content between applications You can easily share content between applications, such as Email and Internet, by dragging and dropping them. Some applications may not support this feature. 1 Launch Email and Internet in a split screen Multi Window. Access the Multi Window options 2 Tap the circle between the application windows, and then tap . Tap the circle between application windows to access the following options: • : Switch locations between Multi Window applications. • : Share items, such as images, text, or links, between application windows by dragging and dropping them. • : Maximise the window. • : Close the application. Basics 26 3 Tap and hold an item in the Internet window and drag it to a location in the Email window. Creating a Multi Window combination Use this feature to save currently-running Multi Window applications as a combination. 1 Launch multiple applications in a split screen Multi Window. 2 Open the Multi Window tray and tap → Create. 3 Enter a title and tap OK. The currently-running Multi Window combination is added to the Multi Window tray. To launch applications using a saved combination, select the combination from the Multi Window tray. Basics 27 Notifications Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report new messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel, drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen. From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current settings. Drag down from the status bar, and then tap to use the following options: • Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Location: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. • Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. • Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Reading mode: Activate or deactivate reading mode. In reading mode, the device helps protect your eyes when reading at night. To select which applications will be used for, tap Settings → Display → Reading mode. • Multi window: Set to use Multi Window. • Screen Mirroring: Activate or deactivate the screen mirroring feature. • Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Smart stay: Activate or deactivate the smart stay feature. • Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode. • Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings → Blocking mode. • Flight mode: Activate or deactivate flight mode. • Hands-free mode: Activate or deactivate hands-free mode. The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. To rearrange the options on the notifications panel, open the notifications panel, tap → , tap and hold an item, and then drag the item to another location. Basics 28 Home screen The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others. The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging items Adding an application icon On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel preview. Adding an item Customise the Home screen by adding widgets, folders, or panels. Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following categories: • Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen. • Folder: Create a new folder. • Page: Add a new panel to the Home screen. Moving an item Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Removing an item Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release the item. Basics 29 Rearranging panels Adding a new panel Tap → Edit page → . Moving a panel Tap → Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Tap → Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the top of the screen. Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen. On the Home screen, tap → Set wallpaper → Home screen, and then select one of the following: • Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the Internet. • Live wallpapers: See animated images. • Photos: See images in Photos. • Wallpapers: See wallpaper images. Select an image, resize the frame if necessary, and then set it as wallpaper. Basics 30 Using widgets Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your Home screen. To use them, add widgets from the widgets panel to the Home screen. • Some widgets connect to web services. Using a web-based widget may result in additional charges. • The widgets available may vary depending on the region or service provider. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Widgets. Scroll left or right on the widgets panel, and then tap and hold a widget to add it to the Home screen. Put it on a location you want, resize it by dragging the frame if necessary, and then tap anywhere on the screen to save the location of the widget. Locked screen The locked screen prevents the device from unwanted operation when not in use and also allows you to add convenient widgets. Adding widgets To use widgets when the screen is locked, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Multiple widgets. You cannot use widgets on the locked screen when the security features are activated. Tap the widgets panel area at the upper part of the screen. Scroll right to the last page, tap , and then select a widget to add to the locked screen. Basics 31 Rearranging panels Moving a panel Scroll left or right on the widgets panel area, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Scroll left or right on the widgets panel area, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the top of the screen. Applications screen The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications installed. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging applications This feature is available only in the customisable grid view. Tap → Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Organising with folders Put related applications together in a folder for convenience. Tap → Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save to save the arrangement. Basics 32 Rearranging panels Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Installing applications Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications. Uninstalling applications Tap → Uninstall/disable apps, and then select an application to uninstall it. Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled. Disabling applications Tap → Uninstall/disable apps, and then select an application to disable it. To enable the application, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED, select the application, and then tap Enable. • Downloaded applications and some default applications that come with the device cannot be disabled. • When you use this feature, disabled applications disappear from the Applications screen but are still stored in the device. Basics 33 Using applications This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet applications. Opening an application On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it. Some applications are grouped into folders. Tap a folder, and then tap an application to open it. Opening from recently-used applications Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications. Select an application icon to open. Closing an application Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance. Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it. To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button, and then tap . Help Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure important settings. Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select a category to view tips. To sort categories by an alphabetical order, tap . To search for keywords, tap . Basics 34 Entering text Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. Using the Samsung keyboard Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. Set options for the Samsung keyboard. Enter a space. Enter uppercase. Add an item from the clipboard. Entering uppercase Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice. Changing the keyboard type Tap and hold , and then tap to change the keyboard type. On the floating keyboard, tap and hold and move the floating keyboard to another location. Changing language keyboards Add languages on the keyboard, and then slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards. Basics 35 Handwriting Tap and hold → , and then write a word with a finger. Suggested words appear as characters are entered. Select a suggested word. Use handwriting gestures to perform actions, such as editing or deleting characters and inserting spaces. To view the gesture guides, tap and hold , and then tap → Help → Using handwriting gestures. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Entering text by voice Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays what you speak. If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list. To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language. Copying and pasting Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap Copy to copy or Cut to cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. To paste it into a text entry field, tap and hold at the point where it should be inserted, and then tap Paste. Basics 36 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. (p. 99) Ensure that the Wi-Fi connection is active before using Internet applications. Turning Wi-Fi on and off Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. • Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. • Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. Joining Wi-Fi networks On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right. Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available. Adding Wi-Fi networks If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Connect. Basics 37 Forgetting Wi-Fi networks Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then tap Forget. Setting up accounts Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best experience with the device. Adding accounts Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to set up a Google account. To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Add account → Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be used on the device. Set up a Samsung account as well. Removing accounts On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the account to remove, and then tap Remove account. Basics 38 Transferring files Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media contents and personal information with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Connecting with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open Windows Media Player and sync music files. Basics 39 Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Securing the device Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. Setting a face unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Face unlock. Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face unlock fails. Setting a face and voice unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Face and voice. Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails. Basics 40 Setting a pattern On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Pattern. Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. Setting a PIN On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → PIN. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Setting a password On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock → Password. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Basics 41 Unlocking the device Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock code. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update now. 42 Communication Contacts Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and others. Tap Contacts on the Applications screen. Managing contacts Creating a contact Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. Editing a contact Select a contact to edit, and then tap . Deleting a contact Tap . Communication 43 Searching for contacts Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Use the index at the left side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger along it. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • : Compose an email. Displaying contacts By default, the device shows all saved contacts. Tap → Contacts to display, and then select a location where contacts are saved. Moving contacts Moving contacts to Google Tap → Merge accounts → Merge with Google. Contacts moved to Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list. Moving contacts to Samsung Tap → Merge accounts → Merge with Samsung. Contacts moved to Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list. Communication 44 Importing and exporting contacts Importing contacts Tap → Import/Export, and then select an import option. Exporting contacts Tap → Import/Export, and then select an export option. Sharing contacts Tap → Share namecard via → Multiple contacts, select contacts, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Favourite contacts Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Add to Favourites: Add contacts to favourites. • Remove from Favourites: Remove contacts from favourites. • Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form. • Help: Access help information about using contacts. Contact groups Adding contacts to a group Select a group, and then tap . Select contacts to add, and then tap Done. Communication 45 Managing groups Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Edit group: Change the group settings. • Create: Make a new group. • Remove from group: Remove members from the group. • Send email: Send an email to a group’s members. • Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another position, and then tap Done. • Help: Access help information about using contacts. Deleting groups Tap , select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be deleted. Sending an email to a group’s members Select a group, tap → Send email, select members, and then tap Done. Business card Create a business card and send it to others. Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device, select the business card, and then tap to edit. Tap → Share namecard via → Selected contact, and then select a sharing method. Communication 46 Email Use this application to send or view email messages. Tap Email on the Applications screen. Setting up email accounts Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap for a private email account, such as Google Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Add account. Sending messages Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients, subject, and message, and then tap . Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list. Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others. Tap → to insert images, events, contacts, location information, and others into the message. Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap → Schedule sending. Set a time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information. Communication 47 Reading messages Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Open attachments. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list. Delete the message. Mark the message as a reminder. Compose a message. Forward the message. Go to the previous or next message. Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap Save to save it. Google Mail Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service. Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Communication 48 Sending messages In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap SEND. Tap +CC/BCC to add more recipients. Tap → Attach file to attach images, videos, music, and others. Tap → Discard to start over. Tap → Settings to change the Google Mail settings. Tap → Send feedback to report your opinions for application development. Tap → Help to access help information for the Google Mail. Reading messages Move the message to another mailbox. Mark the message as unread. Preview attachment. Keep this message for long-term storage. Mark the message as a reminder. Delete this message. Reply to this message. Forward this message to others. Add this email address to the contacts list. Reply to all recipients or print the message. Communication 49 Labels Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox. Select a label in ALL LABELS to view messages in other labels. To add a label to a message, select the message, tap → Change labels, and then select the label to assign. Hangouts Use this application to chat with others. Tap Hangouts on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a friend from the friends list or enter data to search and select a friend from the results to start chatting. Google+ Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service. Tap Google+ on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Tap All to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your circles. Communication 50 Photos Use this application to view and share images or videos via Google’s social network services. Tap Photos on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select one of the following categories: • ALL: View all the images or videos that are taken or downloaded to the device. • HIGHLIGHTS: View images or videos grouped by date or album. Tap to view all of the images or videos in the group. Then, select an image or video. While viewing it, use one of the following icons: • : Modify the image. • : Share the image or video with others. • : Delete the image or video. Twitter Use this application to stay connected with your social network on Twitter. Tap Twitter on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Enter the Twitter account and password. View or share feeds. 51 Web & network Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Tap Internet on the Applications screen. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go. Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage. Opening a new page Tap . To go to another webpage, scroll left or right on the title field, and then tap the title to select it. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap . To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one. Web & network 52 History Tap → History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap → Clear history. Tap → History → Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages. Saved pages To view saved webpages, tap → Saved pages. Links Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new page, save, or copy. To view saved webpages, tap → Downloads. Sharing webpages To share a webpage address with others, tap → Share via. To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap Share via. Chrome Use this application to search for information and browse webpages. Tap Chrome on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, and then enter a web address or search criteria. Opening a new page Tap → New tab. To go to another webpage, scroll left or right on the title field, and tap the title to select it. Web & network 53 Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. Syncing with other devices Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device, when you are logged in with the same Google account. To view open tabs on other devices, tap → Other devices. Select a webpage to open. To view bookmarks, tap → Bookmarks. Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, and then drag the Bluetooth switch to the right. Web & network 54 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth → Scan, and detected devices are listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery, select an image, tap → Bluetooth, and then select one of the Bluetooth devices. After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the image. The transferred file is saved in the Download folder. If a contact is received, it is added to the contacts list automatically. Screen Mirroring Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) may not be compatible with this feature. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be discovered or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → More settings → Screen Mirroring, and then drag the Screen Mirroring switch to the right. Select a device, open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. To connect to a device using a PIN, tap and hold the device name to enter the PIN. Web & network 55 Samsung Link Use this application to play content saved on remotely-located devices or web storage services over the Internet. You can play and send multimedia files on your device to another device or web storage service. To use this application, you must sign in to your Samsung account and register two or more devices. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. Tap Samsung Link on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When opening this application, all the content from your registered devices and storage services will appear. You can browse and play them. Sending files Send files to other devices or upload them to web storage services. Tap to select a device or web storage and scroll left or right to select a media category. Then, tap , select files, and then tap . Sharing files Tap to select a device or web storage and scroll left or right to select a media category. Then tap , select files, tap , and then select a sharing method. Playing files on a remote device Tap to select a device or web storage and scroll left or right to select a media category. Then tap , select files, tap , and then select a device. • Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media player. • Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. Web & network 56 Managing contents on a web storage service Select a web storage service, and then view and manage your files. To transfer files between your device and a web storage service, tap , select files, and then tap . To register web storage services to the device, tap → Add storage, and then select a web storage service. Group Play Use this application to enjoy moments with your friends by sharing and playing content. Create or join a Group Play session, and then share content, such as images or music. Tap Group Play on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • While using this application, you cannot access the Internet through the Wi-Fi network. Join a Group Play session. Set whether or not to require a group password. Create a Group Play session. Web & network 57 Creating a group for Group Play When you create a Group Play session, other devices can join the session and share the content. When you use a password for a Group Play session, other devices must enter the password to join the session. To use a password, tick Set group password. Tap Create group, set a password, and then use the following features: • Share music: Connect two or more devices and use them to achieve a surround sound effect when sharing music. • Share images: Select images to share. • Share documents: Select documents to share. • Play games and more: Play online games with friends. Joining Group Play Join a Group Play session created by another device. Tap Join group, select a Group Play session to join, and then enter the password for the group if necessary. Select a media category and the content that is currently being shared will appear on the device. Using additional features in a Group Play session While sharing content with other devices, use the following features: • : Change the speaker settings for each connected device. • → : Adjust the volume. • → : Set the device to use all connected devices as stereo speakers. • : Write a note or draw on the screen. All participants can see what you create. • : View all shared images in mosaic layout. This feature is available when you selected more than two images. • / : Select more images or documents. • : View the group participants. Web & network 58 WatchON Use this application to connect to a TV to watch your favourite shows and movies. Tap WatchON on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. You must first connect the device to a network and ensure that the device’s infrared port is facing the TV. Connecting to a TV Connect to a TV to display the device’s screen onto a large surface and control the TV remotely with the device. Tap Set up WatchON, select a region and broadcast service, and then tap Next. Watching TV Select from the TV programme suggestions or select a category at the bottom of the screen. Select a TV programme and then tap Watch on TV or Watch now. The selected programme will show up on the connected TV. Setting programme reminders Tap Timeline at the bottom of the screen and select a time for a TV programme you want to watch. Select a programme, and then tap . The reminder for the selected programme is added to S Planner. 59 Media Music Use this application to listen to music. Tap Music on the Applications screen. Playing music Select a music category, and then select a song to play. Tap the album image at the bottom of the screen to open the music player screen. Skip to the next song. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Pause and resume playback. Adjust the volume. Change the repeat mode. Restart the currently-playing song or skip to the previous song. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Turn on shue. Search for other devices to play the le. Set the le as your favourite song. View file details. Hide the music player screen. Open the playlist. Media 60 To listen to songs at equal volume levels, tap → Settings → Advanced → Smart volume. When Smart volume is activated, the volume may end up louder than the device volume level. Use caution to avoid long-term exposure to loud sounds to prevent damage to your hearing. Smart volume may not be activated for some files. To set a personalised sound while listening to songs with a headset, tap → Settings → Advanced → Adapt Sound → On. When you turn the volume up to level 14 or higher, the adapt sound option is not applied to music playback. If you turn the volume down to level 13 or lower, the option is reapplied. Setting a song as alarm ringtone To use the currently-playing song as alarm ringtone, tap → Set as alarm tone. Creating playlists Make an own selection of songs. Tap . Enter a title and tap OK. Select songs to include, and then tap Done. To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap → Add to playlist. Playing music by mood Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new song is added, tap Music square → . Tap Music square and select a cell of mood. Or select multiple cells by dragging your finger. Media 61 Camera Use this application to take photos or videos. Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 66) Tap Camera on the Applications screen. • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Taking photos Taking a photo Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo. View more options. Change the shooting mode. Indicates which shooting mode is in use. Switch between the front and rear camera. Open Gallery to view photos and videos. Start taking a video. Select among various effects that are available. Media 62 Shooting mode Several photo effects are available. Tap MODE, and then scroll up or down the screen at the right side of the screen. • Auto: Use this to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. • Beauty face: Take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. • Sound & shot: Use this to take a photo with sound. Tap to take a photo. The device records a few seconds of audio after taking a photo. While taking photos in this mode, sound is recorded by the internal microphone. • Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together. To get the best shot, follow these tips. – Move the camera slowly in one direction. – Keep the camera’s viewfinder within the guide frame. – Avoid taking photos of a subject in front of unrecognisable backgrounds, such as empty skies or plain walls. • Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects. • Night: Use this setting for images taken in darker conditions. Panoramic photos A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots. Tap MODE → Panorama. Tap and move the camera in one direction. When two panorama guide frames are aligned, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, tap . If the viewfinder is out of the direction, the device stops shooting. Media 63 Taking videos Taking a video Tap to take a video. To pause recording, tap . To stop recording, tap . Recording mode Tap → to change the recording mode. • Normal: Use this mode for normal quality. • Limit for email: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via email. Media 64 Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods: • Use the Volume button to zoom in or out. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting video. Share shot Tap → , and then select one of the following: • Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. • Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged in a photo and send it to that person. • Remote viewfinder: Set a device to control the camera remotely. Controlling the camera remotely Set a device as a viewfinder to control the camera remotely. Tap → → Remote viewfinder, and then connect the device and the camera using Wi-Fi Direct. Tap to take a photo remotely using the device as a viewfinder. Media 65 Configuring settings for Camera Tap → to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode used. • Photo size / Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very close objects. • Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. • Location tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo. Activate this feature when taking photos to create albums in Story Album. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. • Review pics/videos: Set the device to show photos or videos after taking them. • Volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. Media 66 • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Voice control: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands. • Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags. Activate this to use Tag Buddy in Gallery and Story Album. • Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene. • Storage: Select the memory location for storage. • Reset: Reset the camera settings. Shortcuts Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options. Tap → Edit quick settings. Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the top of the screen. Gallery Use this application to view images and videos. Tap Gallery on the Applications screen. Viewing images Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves an image, the Download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open it. In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image. Media 67 Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image: • Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. • Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to return. Playing videos Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap . Trimming segments of a video Select a video and tap . Move the start bracket to the desired starting point, move the end bracket to the desired ending point, and then save the video. Editing images When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Favourite: Add the image to favourites. • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder. • Photo frame: Use this to add a frame and a note to an image. The edited image is saved in the Photo frame folder. • Photo note: Use this to write a note on the back of the image. Tap to edit the note. • Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard. • Print: Print the image by connecting the device to a printer. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. • Rename: Rename the file. • Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image. • Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise. Media 68 • Rotate right: Rotate clockwise. • Crop: Resize the blue frame to crop and save the image in it. • Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image. • Details: View image details. • Settings: Change the Gallery settings. Modifying images When viewing an image, tap → Photo Editor or Paper Artist. Favourite images When viewing an image, tap → Favourite to add the image to the favourites list. Deleting images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap → Select item, select images, and then tap . • When viewing an image, tap . Sharing images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap → Select item, select images, and then tap to send them to others. • When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services. Media 69 Setting as wallpaper When viewing an image, tap → Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact. Tagging faces Tap → Settings → Tags, and then tick Face tag. A yellow frame appears around the recognised face on an image. Tap the face, tap Add name, and then select or add a contact. When the face tag appears on an image, tap the face tag and use available options, such as sending messages. Face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. Using Tag Buddy Tap → Settings → Tags → Tag buddy, and then drag the Tag buddy switch to the right to display a contextual tag (weather, location, date, and person’s name) when opening an image. Organising with folders Create a folder to organise images or videos stored in the device. You can copy or move files from one folder to another. To create a new folder, tap . Enter a name for the folder, tap OK, and then tick images or videos. Tap and hold any selected image or video, drag it to the new folder, and then tap Done. Tap Copy to copy or Move to move. Media 70 Story Album Use this application to create your own digital album to keep your stories by organising the images neatly and automatically. Tap Story Album on the Applications screen. Creating story albums Create story albums by selecting images from Gallery or images sorted by tag information. Tap , and then select an option. Select images from Gallery. Select images by tag information. Creating albums from Gallery Tap From Gallery, select a folder, select images, and then tap Done. Enter a title for the album, select a theme and a cover image, and then tap Create album. Media 71 Creating albums by tag information Create albums by sorting photos by tag information, such as the location where an image was taken, subjects, or time. Tap By tag information, and then set the following tag options: • Location: Specify a location. The device sorts images from the location. To use location tags, activate the GPS tag setting in Camera before taking photos. (p. 65) • People: Select people from tagged images. The device sorts images taken with the people. To use people tags, add tags to images in Gallery. (p. 69) • Time: Specify a period of time. The device sorts images taken during the period you set. After the setting is finished, tap Find pictures. Enter a title for the album, select a theme and a cover image, and then tap Create album. Viewing story albums Select a story album. The cover image appears on the first page. Scroll left or right to view images in the story album. On a page of the album, tap and use the following functions. The available options vary depending on the page. • Edit title: Rename the album. • Add content: Add more content to the current page. • Remove content: Delete content on the current page. • Edit: Change the layout of the current page. • Change theme: Change the theme for the page layout. • Change cover image: Change the cover image of the album. • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current album. Media 72 • Share via: Send the album to others. • Print: Print the album by connecting the device to a printer. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. • Order photo book: Place an order for a printed album. • Export Album: Export the album to other storage locations. • Delete page: Delete the page. Editing images Tap the image of the page in an album. Select among various eects that are available. Add a caption. Send the image to others. Delete the image. Tap , and then use the following functions: • Slideshow: Start a slideshow or change the slideshow settings. • Set as cover: Set the image as an album cover image. • Rotate left: Rotate the image anticlockwise. • Rotate right: Rotate the image clockwise. Media 73 Creating albums with recommended photos When you take multiple photos in a location, the device suggests creating a new album based on the location. This feature helps you create photo albums conveniently when you have daily events or travel. Setting your home city Set your home city to let the device recognise whether you at home or travelling. The device suggests creating event or travel albums based on your location. For example, when taking photos outside of the home city, the device suggests creating a travel album. Tap → Settings → Home city, select a setting method, and then tap Save. Setting a minimum number of photos Tap → Settings, and then drag the switch next to an album type to the right. Select the album type, and then set the minimum number of photos. When you take photos that meet the criteria you set, the device will suggest creating an album. The device will recommend creating story albums when you surpass the preset specified number of photos in a single day. Creating an event or travel album Tap → From suggestions. Select an album, enter a title for the album, and then tap Done. Media 74 Paper Artist Use this application to make images look like illustrations with fun effects or frames. Tap Paper Artist on the Applications screen. Use artistic tools to edit an image. The edited image is saved in the Gallery → Paper Pictures folder. Select an existing image. Share the image. Apply effects to the image. Draw with a pen. Tap to change the pen thickness. Take a photo. Draw with a brush. Tap to change the brush thickness. Save the image. Apply frames to the image. Erase the drawings. Tap to change the eraser size. Access additional options. Media 75 Video Use this application to play video files. Tap Video on the Applications screen. Avoid locking the device’s screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand. Each time you lock the screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand, one of your available rental counts is lost. Playing videos Select a video to play. Change screen ratio. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Restart the current video or skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Adjust the volume. Switch to oating screen mode. Pause and resume playback. Open the playlist. Search for other devices to play the file. Move the control panel to the left. Move the control panel to the right. Deleting videos Tap → Delete, select videos, and then tap Delete. Media 76 Sharing videos Tap → Share via, select a sharing method, select videos, and then tap Done. Using Popup Video player Use this feature to use other applications without closing the video player. While watching videos, tap to use the pop-up player. Spread two fingers apart on the screen to enlarge the player or pinch to reduce it. To move the player, drag the player to another location. YouTube Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website. Tap YouTube on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Watching videos Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen. Sharing videos Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method. Uploading videos Tap → Uploads → , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap . Media 77 Flipboard Use this application to access your personalised magazines. Tap Flipboard on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To start your Flipboard, flick left on the greeting page, select news topics, and then tap Build Your Flipboard. Select a cover story or a topic, flick through the Flipboard pages, and then select an article to read. 78 Application & media stores Play Store Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run on the device. Tap Play Store on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap INSTALL. If there is a charge for the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase process. • When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. • To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Security → Unknown sources. Uninstalling applications Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store. Tap → My apps, select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and then tap UNINSTALLED. Application & media stores 79 Samsung Apps Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more information, visit apps.samsung.com. Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category. Tap CATEGORY to select a category. To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the search field. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Free. If there is a charge for the application, tap the price, and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the purchase process. When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. Game Hub Use this application to access games. Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps. Application & media stores 80 Music Hub Use this application to play music and purchase songs or albums from the Music Hub catalogue. Subscribe to the Music Hub premium service to enjoy customised recommendations, unlimited song streaming, personal radio stations, and cloud storage service for all your music. To get more details, tap → Help or visit the Music Hub website. Tap Music Hub on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Some features may be labelled differently depending on the subscription terms. • Some features including streaming services may not be available depending on the region or service provider. MY MUSIC Play music stored on the device and in the cloud storage server. All your music stays automatically synced with your computer. CATALOGUE Enjoy unlimited song streaming. Stream songs or download them to listen without network coverage. Add songs to playlists and share them with friends. RADIO Listen to music on radio stations or create your own one. You can personalise your station based on an artist you like. The station will play music similar to the songs of your favourite artist. You can also receive customised recommendations from Music Hub. Application & media stores 81 Play Books Use this application to read and download book files. Tap Play Books on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play Movies Use this application to watch, download, and rent movies or TV shows. Tap Play Movies on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play Music Use this application to listen to music from the device or stream music from the Google cloud service. Tap Play Music on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play Games Use this application to download and play games. Tap Play Games on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Application & media stores 82 Play Newsstand Use this application to read the latest news articles. Tap Play Newsstand on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Readers Hub Use this application to download and read book files. Tap Readers Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a book to read. To download book files, go to the Readers Hub Store. Video Hub Use this application to access and purchase videos. Tap Video Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, and then select a video. 83 Utilities Memo Use this application to record important information to save and view at a later date. Tap Memo on the Applications screen. Composing memos Tap , enter a memo, and then tap Save. To change the background colour, tap → Colour. To lock the memo so that others cannot view it, tap → Lock. Browsing memos Browse memo thumbnails by scrolling up or down. To edit the memo, tap the memo. To search for a memo, tap . To change the view mode, tap . To delete memos, tap . To sort memos by date, tap → Sort by. To send the text in memos to others, tap → Share text via. To send memos to others, tap → Share via. To print memos by connecting the device to a printer, tap → Print. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. Utilities 84 To import memos from Google Docs, tap → Import. To export memos to other storage locations, tap → Export. To change the memo settings, tap → Settings. Viewing a memo Tap the memo thumbnail to open it. Scroll left or right to see more memos. Tap and use the following: • Delete: Delete the memo. • Colour: Change the background colour. • Lock: Lock the memo so that others cannot view it. • Print: Print the image by connecting the device to a printer. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. • Share text via: Send the text in the memo to others. • Share via: Send the memo to others. S Planner Use this application to manage events and tasks. Tap S Planner on the Applications screen. Creating events or tasks Tap , and then use one of the following methods: • Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting. • Add memo: Create a handwritten memo to attach to the date. Utilities 85 To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again. Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an advance alert, or where it takes place. Invite others to the event by sending an email. Enter the email address to the Participants field, or tap to open the contacts list. Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the map that appears. Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images. Utilities 86 Attaching memos to a date Tap and hold a date to select it and the memo pad appears. Syncing with Google Calendar On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Google under Accounts, select the Google account, and then tick Sync Calendar. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S Planner → → Sync. To display synced events or tasks, tap → Settings → View settings → Calendars → Display, select the Google account, and then tap OK. Changing calendar type Tap the top left of the screen, and then select one from among different types of calendars including month, week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change yearly calendar back to monthly calendar. Utilities 87 Searching for events or tasks Tap , and then enter a keyword to search for. To view today’s events or tasks, tap Today at the top of the screen. Deleting events Tap → Delete, select events, and then tap Delete. Sharing events or tasks Select an event or task, tap → Share via, and then select a sharing method. Dropbox Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other computers that have Dropbox installed. Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Sign in to your Dropbox account. If you do not have it, create a Dropbox account. Once Dropbox is activated, photos and videos taken with the device’s camera are uploaded to Dropbox automatically. To view the uploaded photos or videos, tap . To share or delete files or create albums, tap , and then select files. To upload files to Dropbox, tap → → Upload here → Photos or videos or Other files. To open files in Dropbox, select a file. While viewing images or videos, tap to add it to the favourites list. To open files in the favourites list, tap . Utilities 88 Cloud Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung account or Dropbox. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Cloud. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with the Samsung account Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files. Backing up or restoring data Tap Backup or Restore to back up or restore data with your Samsung account. Syncing with Dropbox Tap Link Dropbox account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever you make some changes. Drive Use this application to create and edit documents and share them with others via Google Drive storage. When you create documents or upload files to Google Drive, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other computer with Google Drive installed. Access your files without transferring or downloading. Tap Drive on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Utilities 89 POLARIS Office 5 Use this application to edit documents in various formats, including spreadsheets and presentations. Tap POLARIS Office 5 on the Applications screen. Some functions may not be available, depending on the file type. Create a document. View favourite documents. Share documents with others. View recent documents. Browse folders. Browse by document formats. Creating documents Tap , and then select a document type. Use the editing toolbar at the top of the screen to edit the document. To finish, tap the document icon at the top left of the screen, tap Save, enter a filename, select a folder to save to, and then tap Save. Utilities 90 Reading documents Tap a file. Or tap File Browser, Form type, or Favorites, and then select a file to open. To start a slideshow, tap . To draw on the document, tap . To search for a text string in the document, tap . Tap , and then use one of the following functions: Document • Switch to Edit Mode: Open the editing toolbar. • Bookmark: Open the Bookmark panel. Select a label to go to bookmarks point. • View Settings: Change the view mode settings. • Screen capture: Capture the selected area. • View Information: View the document details. • Help: Access help information for using the POLARIS Office. Presentation • Switch to Edit Mode: Open the editing toolbar. • Single slide view: View slides one by one. • Slide note: View memos on slides. • Screen capture: Capture the selected area. • View Information: View the document details. • Help: Access help information for using the POLARIS Office. Utilities 91 Spreadsheet • Switch to Edit Mode: Open the editing toolbar. • Freeze frame: Keep the selected row in place. • Screen capture: Capture the selected area. • View Information: View the document details. • Help: Access help information for using the POLARIS Office. Text • Read All: Read the document via the text-to-speech feature. • Screen capture: Capture the selected area. • View Information: View the document details. • Help: Access help information for using the POLARIS Office. Alarm Use this application to set wake-up calls and alarms for important events. Tap Alarm on the Applications screen. Turn this alarm on or off. Utilities 92 Setting alarms Tap , set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and then tap Save. • Location alarm: Set a location. The alarm goes off only when you are in the location. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete. World Clock Use this application to check the time of many major cities in the world. Tap World Clock on the Applications screen. Creating clocks Tap , enter a city name or select a city from the globe, and then tap . To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings. Deleting clocks Tap , select clocks, and then tap Delete. Utilities 93 Calculator Use this application for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Applications screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator. To see the calculation history, tap to hide the keypad. To clear the history, tap → Clear history. S Translator Use this application to translate text into other languages. Tap S Translator on the Applications screen. Using S Translator Set the source and target languages, enter text in the input field, and then tap . To add a language pair to your favourites list, tap . To send a language pair to others, tap . Starting a conversation with the translator Tap the buttons at the bottom of the screen to communicate with another person via spoken translation. Tap Speak for your language, and then speak into the microphone. The device will translate what you say. Tap in the target language field to let the device read the translation out loud. Then, tap Speak for the language of the person you are talking with and let the person reply in their language. The device will translate what they say. Tap in the source language field to let the device read it back to you. Utilities 94 S Voice Use this application to command the device by voice to send a message, write a memo, and more. Tap S Voice on the Applications screen. Alternatively, press the Home button twice. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This application is not supported in some languages. Here are several examples of spoken commands: • Open music • Launch calculator • Check schedule Tips for better voice recognition • Speak clearly. • Speak in quiet places. • Do not use offensive or slang words. • Avoid speaking in dialectal accents. The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands depending on your surroundings or how you speak. Hands-free mode In hands-free mode, the device will read content aloud when you have incoming calls, messages, and notifications so you can use the device without hands while driving. For example, the device will read aloud the caller’s name or phone number when a call comes in. To activate hands-free mode, say “Hands-free mode on.” Waking up the device with voice When the screen is turned off, you can launch S Voice with a voice command. Say “Hi Galaxy” to the device to launch S Voice. To activate this feature, tap → Settings → Wake up command. Utilities 95 Using wake-up commands on the locked screen On the locked screen, you can use various functions with preset wake-up commands. To activate this feature, on the Applications screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Wake up in lock screen. Tap Set wake-up command, and then set functions and voice commands. Google Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents on the device as well. Tap Google on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Searching the device Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , and then speak a keyword. If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the search results. Search scope To select what applications to search, tap → Settings → Tablet search, and then tick the items to search for. Google Now Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it. Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now settings, tap → Settings → Google Now. Utilities 96 Voice Search Use this application to search webpages by speaking. Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. My Files Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos, songs, and sound clips. Tap My Files on the Applications screen. Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root directory, tap . In a folder, use one of the following functions: • : Search for files. • : Change the view mode. • : Create a folder. • Time: Sort files or folders. Select a file or folder by ticking, and then use one of the following functions: • : Copy files or folders to another folder. • : Move files or folders to another folder. • : Delete files or folders. • : Send files to others. • → Rename: Rename a file or folder. • → Details: View file or folder details. Utilities 97 Downloads Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications. Tap Downloads on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email. Select a file to open it with an appropriate application. To sort the files by size, tap Sort by size. To sort the files by date, tap Sort by date. TripAdvisor Use this application to get travel information such as destination or hotel. You can also book for a room and share your reviews with others. Tap TripAdvisor on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. 98 Travel & local Maps Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions. Tap Maps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Searching for locations Search for locations by entering an address or a keyword. Once the location is found, select a location to view the detailed information. Refer to the help for more information. Getting directions for a destination Tap to set starting and ending locations, and then select a travel method. The device shows the routes to get to the destination. 99 Settings About Settings Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Applications screen. Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. To use options, tap . • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. • Help: Access help information for Wi-Fi. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. Setting Network notification The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify when available. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → → Advanced and tick Network notification to activate this feature. Settings 100 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects two devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via the Bluetooth feature. • Rename device: Set a Bluetooth name for the device. • Help: Access help information for Bluetooth. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount. • Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage. To use more options, tap . • Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications. You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → Accounts. • Mobile hotspots: Select Wi-Fi hotspots to prevent applications that are running in the background from using them. Settings 101 More settings Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks. Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. Printing Configure settings for printer plug-ins installed on the device. You can search for available printers or add one manually to print files via Wi-Fi or cloud services. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). Nearby devices • Device name: View the device name. • Content to share: Set the device to share your content with other devices. • Allowed devices: View the list of devices that can access your device. • Denied devices: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. • Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files. • Download from other devices: Set the device to accept uploads from other devices. Screen Mirroring Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others. Settings 102 Blocking mode Select which notifications will be blocked and how long to block them. Hands-free mode Set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in hands-free mode. Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen. • Samsung applications: Change the notification settings for each application. • Sound when tapped: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting. • Adapt Sound: Personalise the sound for the ear you use most while listening to music. Settings 103 Display Change the settings for the display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. • Notification panel: Customise the items that appear on the notifications panel. • Multi window: Set the device to use Multi Window. • Screen mode: – Adapt Display: Use this mode for optimising the display according to the display settings. – Dynamic: Use this mode to make the display tone more vivid. – Standard: Use this mode for normal surroundings. – Professional photo: Use this mode to make the display tone look like real colours. – Cinema: Use this mode for dim surroundings, such as in a dark room. • Reading mode: Select which applications will use reading mode. In reading mode, the device helps protect your eyes when reading at night. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when your device is connected to a desktop dock or charging. • Smart screen: – Smart stay: Set the device to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. – Smart rotation: Set the interface not to rotate according to the orientation of your face. Settings 104 • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. • Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. • Auto adjust screen tone: Set the device to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device. Power saving mode Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode. • CPU performance: Set the device to limit some system resource usage. • Screen output: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display. • Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour of email and Internet. • Learn about Power saving: Discover how to reduce battery consumption. Settings 105 Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. Application manager View and manage the applications on your device. Default applications Select a default setting for using applications. • Home: Select a default Home screen mode. Location Change settings for location information permissions. • Mode: Select a method to collect your location data. • Recent location requests: Set the device to display which applications use your current location information and their battery usage. • Location services: View the location services your device is using. • My places: Set up profiles that will be used for specific locations when you use GPS, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth features to find your current location. Settings 106 Lock screen Change settings for the locked screen. • Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock feature selected. • Multiple widgets: Set the device to allow use of widgets on the locked screen. • Lock screen widgets: – Clock or personal message: Set the device to show a clock or personal message on the locked screen. The following options may vary, depending on your selection. For a clock: – Clock size: Change the size of the clock. – Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. – Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. For a personal message: – Edit personal information: Edit the personal message. • Shortcuts: Set the device to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Unlock effect: Select an effect when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. • Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. • Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. Settings 107 Security Change settings for securing the device. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. – Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account. – Use wireless networks: Set the device to allow location data collection or to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi. • Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the Find my mobile website. • Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Choose to install applications from any source. If not chosen, download applications only from Play Store. • Verify apps: Set this to allow Google to check the application for harmful behaviour before installing it. • Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. Settings 108 Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. Language Select a display language for all menus and applications. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • Input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by tapping the space bar or punctuation mark. • Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. • None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature. Settings 109 • Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. • Cursor control: Enable or disable the smart keyboard navigation feature to move the cursor by scrolling the keyboard. • Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. • Help: Access help information for using the Samsung keyboard. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Voice recogniser Select a voice recognition engine. This feature appears once you use a voice recognition application. Voice search For Samsung voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Open via the home key: Set the device to launch S Voice by pressing the Home button twice. • Use location data: Set the device to use location information for voice search results. Settings 110 • Hide offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Help: Access help information for S Voice. • About: View version information. • Wake up command: Set the device to start voice recognition by saying a wake up command while using S Voice. • Check missed events: Set the device to check messages, or events when S Voice is launched by pressing the headset button. • Home address: Enter your home address to use location information with the voice command feature. • Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information to use Facebook with S Voice. • Log in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information to use Twitter with S Voice. For Google voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • “Ok Google” hotword detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the wake up command while using the search application. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Personalised recognition: Set the device to use information from your Google dashboard to improve speech recognition accuracy. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow a voice search with a Bluetooth headset, when it is connected to the device. Settings 111 Text-to-speech options • Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech feature. Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Cloud Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud storage. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and application data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Settings 112 Add account Add email or SNS accounts. Motion Activate the motion recognition feature and change the settings that control motion recognition on your device. • Palm swipe to capture: Set the device to capture an image of the screen when you sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen. • Palm touch to mute/pause: Set the device to pause media playback when you touch the screen with your palm. • Learn about hand motions: View the tutorial for controlling hand motions. Voice control Change settings to control options by voice commands. Accessories Change the accessory settings. • Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or removed from a desktop dock. • Audio output mode: Set the device to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a desktop dock. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting. Settings 113 Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Accessibility Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device. • Auto rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback. • Show shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears when you press and hold the Power button. • TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback. • Font size: Change the font size. • Magnification gestures: Set the device to zoom in and out with finger gestures. • Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. Settings 114 • Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate Talkback when you press and hold the Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers. • Text-to-speech options: – Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-tospeech feature. • Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset. • Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud. • Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Google subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by Google and to change the closed caption settings. • Samsung subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by Samsung and to change the closed caption settings. About device Access device information and update device software. Google Settings Use this application to configure settings for some features provided by Google. Tap Google Settings on the Applications screen. 115 Troubleshooting Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some situations may not apply to your device. When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details. Your device does not turn on • When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Charge the battery completely before turning on the device. • The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again. • Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again. Troubleshooting 116 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly • If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch screen may not function properly. • If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen, or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may malfunction. • The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close applications or reinsert the battery and turn on the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for 8-10 seconds to reboot. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Calls are not connected • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Troubleshooting 117 Sound echoes during a call Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area. A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station. Move to another area and try again. • When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to issues with the service provider’s network. The battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery. The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved chargers) • Ensure that the charger is connected properly. • If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again. • The batteries in some devices are not user-replaceable. To have the battery replaced, visit a Samsung Service Centre. The battery depletes faster than when first purchased • When you expose the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the useful charge may be reduced. • Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some applications, such as games or the Internet. • The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time. Troubleshooting 118 Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Photo quality is poorer than the preview • The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the photography techniques you use. • If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images may be out of focus. Error messages appear when opening multimedia files If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported, such as DivX or AC3, install an application that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your device supports, visit www.samsung.com. Troubleshooting 119 • Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos captured by other devices may not work properly. • Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet, such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly. Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Your device cannot find your current location GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations. Troubleshooting 120 Data stored on the device has been lost Always make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. Otherwise, you cannot restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored on the device. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. English (EU). 08/2014. Rev.1.0 Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or software version, and is subject to change without prior notice. www.samsung.com www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T310 2 À propos de ce mode d'emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d'emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e) s avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. À propos de ce mode d'emploi 3 • Les applications par défaut fournies avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. À propos de ce mode d'emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store et Google Talk™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos associés sont des marques commerciales de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales, et sont utilisés sous licence. À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Cet appareil est officiellement homologué DivX Certified®, ce qui signifie qu’il a subi des tests rigoureux pour certifier qu’il est en mesure de lire des vidéos DivX. Visitez le site www.divx.com pour plus d’informations et pour obtenir des outils logiciels capables de convertir vos fichiers au format DivX. À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD ou vidéo à la demande). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendez-vous ensuite sur le site vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement. Cet appareil DivX Certified® peut lire des vidéos DivX® d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 720 p HD, y compris du contenu Premium. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus et le symbole double-D sont des marques commerciales de Dolby Laboratories. 5 Table des matières Démarrage 8 Présentation de l’appareil 9 Touches 10 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 13 Insérer une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Manipuler l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 15 Régler le volume 15 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 16 Icônes d’informations 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements 22 Activer la fonction Multi-fenêtres 23 Notifications 23 Volet de paramétrage rapide 24 Écran d’accueil 27 Écran de verrouillage 28 Utiliser les applications 28 Liste des applications 29 Aide 30 Saisir du texte 32 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi 33 Créer un compte 34 Transférer des fichiers 35 Protéger l’appareil 37 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 38 Contacts 41 E-mail 43 Google Mail 44 Talk (Hangouts) 44 Google+ 45 Chat + 45 ChatON Web et réseau 46 Internet 47 Chrome 48 Bluetooth 49 Screen Mirroring 50 Samsung Link 51 Group Play 52 WatchON Table des matières 6 83 Calculatrice 83 S Translator 84 S Voice 85 Google 86 Recherche vocale 86 Mes fichiers 87 Téléchargements 87 TripAdvisor Géolocalisation 88 Maps 89 Local 90 Navigation Paramètres 91 Accéder au menu des paramètres 91 Wi-Fi 92 Bluetooth 92 Utilisation des données 92 Paramètres supplémentaires 93 Mode blocage 93 Profil Voiture 94 Son 94 Affichage 95 Stockage 96 Mode économie d’énergie 96 Batterie 96 Gestionnaire d’applications 96 Services de localisation Multimédia 53 Lecteur MP3 54 Appareil photo 60 Galerie 63 Story Album 65 Paper Artist 66 Lecteur vidéo 67 YouTube 68 Flipboard Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 69 Play Store 70 Samsung Apps 70 Game Hub 71 Music Hub 72 Play Livres 72 Play Films 72 Play Musique 73 Readers Hub 73 Learning Hub Utilitaires 74 Mémo 75 S Planner 77 Dropbox 78 Cloud 78 Polaris Office 81 Alarme 82 Horloge mondiale Table des matières 7 97 Écran de verrouillage 98 Sécurité 99 Langue et saisie 102 Cloud 102 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser 102 Ajouter compte 102 Mouvement 103 Contrôle vocal 103 Accessoire 103 Date et heure 104 Accessibilité 105 À propos de l’appareil 105 Paramètres Google Dépannage 8 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Accueil Écran tactile Touche Retour Capteur de luminosité Objectif avant Touche de volume Microphone Témoin lumineux Touche Marche/Arrêt Haut-parleur Haut-parleur Compartiment pour carte mémoire Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Prise audio 3,5 mm Démarrage 9 • Ne couvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela pourrait entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas de protection d’écran. Cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement du capteur. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 à 10 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Menu • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des options disponibles dans l’écran actuel. • Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de recherche Google. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 10 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Charger la batterie Utilisez le chargeur pour recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles USB homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, l’appareil émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. Démarrage 11 Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l'appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Démarrage 12 Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant des applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Démarrage 13 Insérer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 64 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte apparaît dans le dossier SD memory card du menu Mes fichiers. 1 Insérez la carte memoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 2 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. Démarrage 14 Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la dégager, puis sortez-la du compartiment. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Démarrage 15 • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Horsligne. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Manipuler l’appareil Ne couvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela pourrait entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou la touche Accueil, et faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran, dans le sens de votre choix. Régler le volume Pour régler le volume de la sonnerie d’appel ou des sons multimédia, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. Activer le profil Discret Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Maintenez la touche de volume enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé. • Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet. • Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son. 16 Fonctions de base Icônes d’informations Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Synchronisation avec le Web Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive du bout des doigts. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. Mouvement Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et faites-le glisser sur l’écran. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom, appuyez deux fois sur une page Web, une carte ou une image. Appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Pincer Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples. Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Mouvement, puis faites glisser le curseur situé en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite. Pivoter l’écran De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation. Pour empêcher l'écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez l’option Rotation écran. • Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. • Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple, pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage. Fonctions de base 21 Balayer Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Recouvrir Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu multimédia. Fonctions de base 22 Activer la fonction Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter deux applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être exécutées. • Lorsque vous lancez des applications contenant des fichiers multimédia (musique ou vidéos), le son des deux fichiers est lu. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Affichage, puis cochez la case Fenêtres multiples. Utiliser le volet Multi-fenêtres Pour activer la fonction Multi-fenêtres, maintenez la touche enfoncée. Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté gauche de l’écran. Lancez une application, appuyez sur le volet Multi-fenêtres et faites glisser l’icône de l’application que vous souhaitez utiliser en parallèle sur le même écran. Pour désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres, maintenez de nouveau la touche enfoncée. Sur l’écran partagé, faites glisser la barre vers le haut ou le bas pour ajuster la taille des volets. Appuyez sur l’icône du volet pour afficher ou masquer le volet. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le volet et faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l'écran pour le déplacer. Lorsque le volet Multi-fenêtres est masqué, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur l’icône du volet et faites-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran pour déplacer le volet. Fonctions de base 23 Utiliser les applications en mode Multi-fenêtres Lorsque vous utilisez des applications en mode Multi-fenêtres, appuyez sur ou , puis sur l'une des touches suivantes : • : passer d’une application Multi-fenêtres à l’autre. • : agrandir la fenêtre pour l’adapter à l’écran. • : fermer l’application. Notifications Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour le fermer, faites glisser le volet situé dans le bas de l’écran vers le haut. Volet de paramétrage rapide Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet de paramétrage rapide. Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis de haut en bas, appuyez sur pour ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis utilisez les options suivantes : • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. • GPS : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Mode lecture : activer ou désactiver le mode lecture. En mode lecture, l’appareil protège vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. Pour sélectionner les applications à utiliser en mode lecture, appuyez sur Paramètres → Affichage → Mode lecture. • Son : activer ou désactiver le son ou le vibreur de l’appareil. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth. Fonctions de base 24 • Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres → Mode blocage. • Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie. • Screen Mirroring : activer ou désactiver la fonction de Screen Mirroring qui permet de répliquer votre écran sur l'écran d'un autre appareil. • Multi fenêtres : paramétrer l’appareil pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Profil Voiture : activer ou désactiver le Profil Voiture. • Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay. • Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications. • Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne. La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour réorganiser les options dans le volet de paramétrage rapide, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil Ajouter une icône d’application Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’aperçu d’un volet d’écran d’accueil. Fonctions de base 25 Ajouter un élément Personnalisez l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des widgets, des dossiers ou des volets. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • Applications et widgets : ajouter des widgets ou des applications à l’écran d’accueil. • Dossier : créer un nouveau dossier. • Page : ajouter un volet à l’écran d’accueil. Déplacer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément. Organiser les volets d’écran d’accueil Ajouter un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page → . Déplacer un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faitesle glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faitesle glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Fonctions de base 26 Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez l’une des options ci-dessous : • Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez téléchargées depuis Internet. • Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. • Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. Sélectionnez ensuite une image et appuyez sur Déf. fond écran. Vous pouvez également sélectionner une image, la redimensionner en faisant glisser le cadre et en appuyant sur OK. Utiliser les widgets Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des widgets sur l’écran d’accueil. • Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Ajouter des widgets à l’écran d’accueil Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Utiliser le widget Raccourci des paramètres Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Widgets, faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre le widget Raccourcis Paramètres et ouvrir une liste d’options de paramétrage. Sélectionnez une option de paramétrage pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil comme raccourci. Fonctions de base 27 Écran de verrouillage Le verrouillage de l’écran empêche le fonctionnement intempestif de l’appareil et facilite également l’ajout de widgets. Ajouter des widgets Pour utiliser les widgets lorsque l’écran est verrouillé, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case Plusieurs widgets. Lorsque les fonctionnalités de sécurité sont activées, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les widgets sur l’écran verrouillé. Appuyez sur la zone des widgets dans la partie supérieure de l’écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la droite afin d’accéder à la dernière page, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un widget afin de l’ajouter à l’écran de verrouillage. Organiser les volets d’écran d’accueil Déplacer un volet Faites défiler la zone des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Faites défiler la zone des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Fonctions de base 28 Utiliser les applications Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet. Ouvrir une application Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées Maintenez la touche Accueil appuyée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Fermer une application Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et gérer les performances de l’appareil. Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée, puis appuyez sur et sur Fin près de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Tout fermer près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également maintenir la touche Accueil appuyée et appuyer sur . Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les applications Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Fonctions de base 29 Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Enreg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle configuration. Organiser les volets d’écran d’accueil Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Installer des applications Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des applications. Désinstaller des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller, puis sélectionnez l’application à désinstaller. Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil. Partager des applications Partagez des applications téléchargées avec d’autres utilisateurs par e-mail, Bluetooth ou toute autre méthode. Appuyez sur → Partager applications, sélectionnez des applications, appuyez sur OK, puis choisissez une méthode de partage. Les prochaines étapes dépendent de la méthode de partage sélectionnée. Aide Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer des paramètres importants. Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez un élément. Fonctions de base 30 Saisir du texte Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Utiliser le clavier Samsung Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Basculer en mode de saisie manuscrite. Insérer un espace. Saisir des majuscules. Ajouter un élément du presse-papier. Saisir des majuscules Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier le type de clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre emplacement. Pour basculer sur le clavier fixe, appuyez sur . Fonctions de base 31 Modifier la langue du clavier Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur la barre d’espace vers la droite ou la gauche pour modifier la langue du clavier. Écrire de façon manuscrite Appuyez sur , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide de votre doigt. Les mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion. Dicter du texte Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que vous venez de dire. Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît. Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue actuellement prise en charge. Copier et coller du texte Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, maintenez le doigt appuyé à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte, puis appuyez sur Coller. Fonctions de base 32 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 91). Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet. Activer ou désactiver le réseau Wi-Fi Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite. Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible. Ajouter des réseaux Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Fonctions de base 33 Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier. Créer un compte Les applications Google, telles que Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil. Ajouter des comptes Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes Google sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez un nom sous l’option Comptes, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supp. compte. Fonctions de base 34 Transférer des fichiers Vous pouvez déplacer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers l’ordinateur, et inversement. Les formats de fichiers suivants sont pris en charge par certaines applications. En fonction de la version logicielle de l’appareil ou du système d’exploitation de l’ordinateur, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. • Musique : mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac et flac • Image : bmp, gif, jpg et png • Vidéo : 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, asf et mkv • Document : doc, docx, dot, dotx, xls, xlsx, xlt, xltx, csv, ppt, pptx, pps, ppsx, pot, potx, pdf, hwp, txt, asc, rtf et zip Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos bibliothèques multimédia, vos contacts et vos agendas, et de les synchroniser avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Fonctions de base 35 Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Raccordez l’appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Protéger l’appareil Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Déverrouillage à l’aide de la reconnaissance faciale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Déverrouillage visage. Positionnez votre visage dans le cadre de mise au point. Définissez ensuite le code PIN ou le modèle de déverrouillage de secours à utiliser si la procédure de déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale échoue. Fonctions de base 36 Déverrouillage à l’aide de la reconnaissance faciale et vocale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Déverrouillage visage et voix. Positionnez votre visage dans le cadre de mise au point et définissez une commande vocale. Définissez ensuite un code PIN ou un modèle de déverrouillage de secours à utiliser si la procédure de déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale et vocale échoue. Déverrouillage par modèle Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Modèle. Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Déverrouillage par code PIN Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Code PIN. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouillage par mot de passe Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Mot de passe. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Fonctions de base 37 Déverrouiller l’appareil Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le code de déverrouillage. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à l’ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à niveau, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble USB. • Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour. 38 Communication Contacts Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses e-mail, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications. Gérer les contacts Créer un contact Appuyez sur , puis saisissez les informations d’un contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. Modifier un contact Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer un contact Appuyer sur . Rechercher des contacts Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Communication 39 Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Afficher les contacts Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés sur l’appareil ou tout autre compte. Appuyez sur → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la mémoire dont les contacts doivent être affichés. Synchroniser des contacts Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google. Les contacts de la liste déplacés dans les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône . Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung. Les contacts de la liste déplacés dans les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône . Importer et exporter des contacts Importer des contacts Appuyez sur → Importer/Exporter → Importer depuis la carte SD ou Importer depuis stockage USB. Exporter des contacts Appuyez sur → Importer/Exporter → Exporter vers la carte SD ou Exporter vers le stockage USB. Partager des contacts Appuyez sur → Importer/Exporter → Partager carte de visite via, sélectionnez des contacts, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Communication 40 Contacts favoris Appuyez sur l'onglet Favoris. Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Ajouter aux favoris : ajouter des contacts aux favoris. • Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris. • Affichage : Grille / Affichage : Liste : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Groupes de contacts Appuyez sur l'onglet Groupes. Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Dans l'onglet des groupes, sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Gérer les groupes Dans l’onglet des groupes, appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Modifier : modifier les paramètres du groupe. • Ajouter membre : ajouter des membres au groupe. • Supprimer le membre : retirer un membre du groupe. • Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe. • Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Supprimer des groupes Appuyez sur , sélectionnez des groupes que vous avez ajoutés, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut. Communication 41 Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis appuyez sur OK. Carte de visite Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts. En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur, sélectionnez la carte de visite dans MOI, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier. Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. E-mail Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails. Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications. Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur Suivant ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config. manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un autre compte de messagerie électronique, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Envoyer des messages Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur Envoyer. Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans la liste de contacts, appuyez sur . Pour ajouter d’autres destinataires, appuyez sur Cc/Cci. Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc. Appuyez sur pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations de localisation et d’autres encore. Communication 42 Envoyer des messages programmés Lorsque vous rédigez un message, appuyez sur . Définissez une heure et une date, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à l’heure et à la date indiquées. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que l’heure et la date soient incorrectes. Lire des e-mails Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement des messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un e-mail pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Répondre au message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à la liste de contacts. Supprimer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Rédiger un message. Transférer le message. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir, puis appuyez sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer. Communication 43 Google Mail Utilisez cette application pour accéder rapidement et directement au service Google Mail. Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Envoyer des messages Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Pour ajouter d’autres destinataires, appuyez sur +CC/CCI. Pour joindre des photos, appuyez sur . Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le brouillon. Pour ajouter des vidéos en pièce jointe, appuyez sur → Joindre une vidéo. Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer. Lire des e-mails Identifier le message comme non lu. Ajouter un libellé à ce message. Afficher la pièce jointe. Archiver ce message. Identifier le message comme favori. Supprimer ce message. Répondre à ce message. Répondre à tous les destinataires. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à la liste de contacts. Faire suivre ce message à d’autres. Communication 44 Libellés Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les messages du libellé Boîte de réception. Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer. Talk (Hangouts) Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec d’autres personnes. Appuyez sur Talk (Hangouts) depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste de vos amis ou lancez une recherche et sélectionnez un ami parmi les résultats de cette recherche pour commencer à discuter. Google+ Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté avec d’autres personnes via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Appuyez sur Tous les cercles pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis. Appuyez sur pour utiliser d’autres fonctionnalités des réseaux sociaux. Communication 45 Chat + Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec d’autres personnes via le service de messagerie instantanée Chat+. Appuyez sur Chat + depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste, saisissez un message dans le champ au bas de l’écran, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer votre message. ChatON Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec d’autres appareils. Pour utiliser cette application, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Créez votre liste d’amis en saisissant un numéro de téléphone ou une adresse électronique ou encore en sélectionnant les contacts dans la liste de suggestions. Sélectionnez un ami et bavardez en ligne avec lui. Pour synchroniser les contacts de votre appareil avec ChatON, appuyez sur Plus → Paramètres → Synchro. des contacts. 46 Web et réseau Internet Utilisez cette application pour parcourir Internet. Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Pour partager, enregistrer ou imprimer une page Web, appuyez sur . Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre Appuyer sur . Pour passer d'une fenêtre à une autre, appuyez sur l'onglet correspondant en haut de l'écran. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Favoris Pour définir la page Web en tant que favori, appuyez sur . Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Web et réseau 47 Historique Pour ouvrir une page Web figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. Pour ouvrir une page Web figurant dans la liste des pages les plus souvent consultées, appuyez sur → Historique → Les plus visités. Pages enregistrées Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Pages enregistrées. Liens Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d'une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page, l’enregistrer ou le copier. Pour afficher les fichiers que vous avez téléchargés depuis le Web, appuyez sur → Téléchargements. Partager des pages Web Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager page. Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis appuyez sur Partager. Chrome Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche. Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'une fenêtre à une autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur la page pour la sélectionner. Web et réseau 48 Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google. Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils. Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir. Pour afficher des favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris. Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour la copie pirate de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite. Web et réseau 49 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth → Analyser et une liste des appareils détectés apparaît à l’écran. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux appareils pour confirmer l’opération. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez Galerie, sélectionnez une image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez l’un des appareils Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Le fichier transféré est enregistré dans le dossier Bluetooth du menu Mes fichiers. Si vous recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à la liste de contacts. Screen Mirroring Utilisez cette fonction pour connecter votre appareil à un grand écran avec le routeur AllShare Cast ou HomeSync, puis partagez vos contenus. Vous pouvez également utiliser cette fonction avec d’autres appareils prenant en charge la fonction Miracast Wi-Fi. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette fonction peut ne pas fonctionner sur les appareils compatibles Miracast ne prenant pas en charge le protocole HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. • Pour économiser de l’énergie, désactivez cette fonction lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. • Si vous indiquez une bande de fréquence Wi-Fi, il se peut que les routeurs AllShare Cast ou HomeSync ne soient pas détectés. • Si vous lisez des vidéos ou jouez à des jeux sur un téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode TV approprié afin d’obtenir un résultat optimal. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Paramètres supplémentaires → Screen Mirroring, puis faites glisser le curseur Screen Mirroring vers la droite. Sélectionnez un appareil, ouvrez ou lisez un fichier, puis contrôlez l’affichage à l’aide des touches de votre appareil. Pour établir une connexion avec un appareil à l’aide d’un code PIN, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur son nom, puis saisissez votre code PIN. Web et réseau 50 Samsung Link Utilisez cette application pour lire du contenu enregistré sur différents appareils depuis Internet. Vous pouvez lire et envoyer des fichiers multimédia stocké sur votre appareil vers un autre appareil ou service de stockage Web. Pour utiliser cette application, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung et enregistrer au moins deux appareils. La méthode d’enregistrement peut varier en fonction du type d’appareil. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements, appuyez sur → Réglages → Service client. Appuyez sur Samsung Link depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Lorsque vous ouvrez cette application, le contenu récent de l’ensemble de vos appareils enregistrés s’affiche. Vous pouvez les parcourir et les écouter. Pour commencer à partager des fichiers, appuyez sur PÉRIPHÉRIQUES ET STOCKAGE, puis sélectionnez une option. Envoyer des fichiers Envoyez des fichiers vers d’autres appareils ou téléchargez-les sur des services de stockage Web. Sélectionnez votre appareil, appuyez sur , choisissez vos fichiers, appuyez sur Terminé, puis sélectionnez une méthode de partage. Partager des fichiers Sélectionnez un appareil ou un stockage Web, appuyez sur , choisissez vos fichiers, appuyez sur Terminé, puis sélectionnez une méthode de partage. Lire des fichiers sur un appareil distant Sélectionnez un appareil ou un stockage Web, appuyez sur , choisissez vos fichiers, puis sélectionnez un appareil. • Les formats de fichiers pris en charge peuvent différer selon les appareils connectés en tant que lecteurs multimédia. • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. Web et réseau 51 Gérer le contenu sur un service de stockage Web Sélectionnez un service de stockage Web, puis affichez et gérez vos fichiers. Pour télécharger des fichiers depuis un service de stockage Web, appuyez sur , sélectionnez les fichiers, puis appuyez sur Terminé. Pour enregistrer un service de stockage Web sur l’appareil, appuyez sur → Réglages → Stockage enregistrés → , puis sélectionnez un service de stockage Web. Group Play Utilisez cette application pour partager l'écran de plusieurs appareils. Créez ou rejoignez une session Group Play, puis partagez vos images, documents ou musiques. Appuyez sur Group Play depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Créer un Group Play Appuyez sur Créer un groupe, définissez un mot de passe, puis utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Partager de la musique : sélectionner les musiques à partager. Vous pouvez connecter un ou plusieurs appareils, et les utiliser pour obtenir un effet ambiophonique. • Partager des images : sélectionner les images à partager. • Partager des documents : sélectionner les documents à partager. • Jouer à des jeux : jouer en ligne avec vos amis. Appuyez sur et écrivez une note ou tracez un dessin à l’écran. Tous les participants peuvent voir ce que vous faites. Appuyez sur pour afficher toutes les images partagées sous forme de mosaïque. Appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner davantage d’images ou de documents. Appuyez sur pour afficher les participants du groupe. Web et réseau 52 Rejoindre un Group Play Appuyez sur Rejoindre groupe, sélectionnez une session Group Play à rejoindre, puis saisissez le mot de passe du groupe. Sélectionnez une catégorie multimédia. Le contenu disponible au partage s’affiche alors sur votre appareil. WatchON Utilisez cette application pour connecter un téléviseur et regarder vos émissions et films préférés. Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. Vous devez commencer par connecter l’appareil à un réseau et vérifier que le port infrarouge de l’appareil est en face du téléviseur. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Connecter l’appareil à un téléviseur Connectez un téléviseur afin d’afficher l’écran de l’appareil sur une large surface et commander le téléviseur à distance à l’aide de l’appareil. Appuyez sur → Continuer, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour enregistrer le téléviseur sur l’appareil. Les étapes peuvent différer selon les options choisies. Regarder la télévision Sélectionnez un programme TV dans les suggestions ou sélectionnez une catégorie en bas de l’écran. Sélectionnez un programme TV, puis appuyez sur Regarder sur la TV ou Regarder. Le programme sélectionné apparaît sur le téléviseur connecté. Appuyez sur et ouvrez le volet de contrôle pour commander le téléviseur. Paramétrer des rappels de programmes Dans la rubrique A venir en bas de l'écran, sélectionnez un programme que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur Déf. rappel. Le rappel du programme sélectionné est ajouté à S Planner. 53 Multimédia Lecteur MP3 Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique. Appuyez sur Lecteur MP3 depuis la liste des applications. • Selon la version logicielle de votre appareil, certains formats de fichiers ne sont pas compatibles. • Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus correctement en fonction de la méthode d’encodage utilisée. Écouter de la musique Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour ouvrir le lecteur MP3. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause ou reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Modifier le mode de répétition. Redémarrer le morceau en cours de lecture ou revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Rechercher des appareils compatibles DLNA. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Afficher les détails du fichier. Masquer l’écran du lecteur. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Multimédia 54 Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Paramètres avancés → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est réappliquée. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Appuyez sur → Créer liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Sélectionnez les morceaux à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Ajouter à liste de lecture. Écouter de la musique par catégorie Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de lecture. Lorsque vous ajoutez un morceau de musique, appuyez sur Coin musique → . Appuyez sur Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran. Appareil photo Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour visionner des photos et des vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 60). Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications. • Lorsque vous n'utilisez plus l'appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Multimédia 55 Prendre des photos Prendre une photo Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point. Une fois la mise au point terminée, le cadre de mise au point devient vert. Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur . Afficher davantage d’options. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Indique le mode de prise de vue utilisé. Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Ouvrir la Galerie pour afficher des photos et des vidéos. Enregistrer une vidéo. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Mode de capture Il existe plusieurs effets de photo. Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l'écran vers le haut ou le bas. • Auto : autoriser l’appareil photo à évaluer l’environnement et à déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. • Beauté : prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images plus douces. • Son & prise : prendre une photo et enregistrer le son de la scène. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu audio après la prise de vue. Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. Multimédia 56 • Panorama : prendre une photo composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils. – Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. – Maintenez l'objectif de l’appareil photo en position à l’aide du guide. – Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. • Sports : utiliser ce paramètre pour prendre des photos de sujets en action. • Nuit : utiliser ce paramètre pour prendre des photos dans l’obscurité. Photos panoramiques Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés. Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama. Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Suivez le guide de prise de vue en alignant le cadre bleu et l'appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur . Enregistrer des vidéos Enregistrer une vidéo Appuyer sur . Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Il est possible que la fonction zoom ne soit pas disponible lors d’un enregistrement avec une résolution élevée. Multimédia 57 Mode d’enregistrement Pour modifier le mode d’enregistrement, appuyez sur → . • Normal : utiliser ce mode pour obtenir une qualité standard. • Limite pour e-mail : utiliser ce mode pour réduire la qualité et pouvoir envoyer la vidéo via e-mail. Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. • Il est possible que la fonction zoom ne soit pas disponible lorsque vous filmez avec une résolution élevée. • La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Multimédia 58 Partager des photos Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct. • Partage de photo d’ami : paramétrer l’appareil pour envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme libellé. • Partage photos ChatON : envoyer une photo à un autre appareil via ChatON. • Viseur à distance : paramétrer l’appareil pour commander l’appareil photo à distance. Commander l’appareil photo à distance Paramétrez l’appareil comme un viseur afin de commander l’appareil photo à distance. Appuyez sur → → Viseur à distance, puis établissez une connexion Wi-Fi Direct entre cet appareil et l’appareil photo. Pour prendre une photo à distance en vous servant de l’appareil comme viseur, appuyez sur . Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur → . Les options suivantes sont disponibles soit pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope) ou tantôt pour le mode appareil photo, tantôt pour le mode caméscope. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode utilisé. • Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés. Multimédia 59 • Mode focus : sélectionner un mode de mise au point. Auto focus est une mise au point automatique effectuée par l’appareil photo. Macro permet de faire une mise au point sur des sujets très proches, en gros plan. • Balise GPS : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. Activez cette fonction lorsque vous prenez des photos afin de créer des albums dans Story Album. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. • Compte-rendu : afficher brièvement les photos prises. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils professionnels. • Valeur d’exposition : modifier la valeur d’exposition. Cela détermine la quantité de lumière reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus élevée. • Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. • Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes vocales. • Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des balises contextuelles. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser l’Assistant balise avec les options Galerie et Story Album. • Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. • Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope. Multimédia 60 Raccourcis Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur → Modifier les paramètres rapides. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de l’écran. Vous pouvez déplacer les autres icônes de la liste en appuyant dessus, puis en les faisant glisser. Galerie Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des photos ou des vidéos. Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications. • Selon la version logicielle de votre appareil, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. • Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus correctement en fonction de la méthode d’encodage utilisée. Afficher des images Lorsque vous lancez l’application, Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en plein écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante. Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Multimédia 61 Visionner des vidéos Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur . Modifier des images En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Favori : ajouter l’image aux favoris. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Photo frame. • Note photo : utiliser cette fonction pour écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur . • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers. • Imprimer : imprimer l’image via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter l’image dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Détails : afficher les détails d’une image. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Mes photos En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Favori pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de favoris. Multimédia 62 Supprimer des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez des images en les cochant, puis appuyez sur . • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur . Partager des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, appuyez sur les images pour les sélectionner, puis appuyez sur pour les envoyer à des contacts. • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. Sélectionner une image comme fond d’écran En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact. Libellés de portraits Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié sur une image. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas. Utiliser l’assistant balises Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, position, date et nom de la personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image. Multimédia 63 Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l'appareil. Vous pouvez copier ou déplacer des fichiers d'un dossier à un autre. Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK, puis cochez les images ou les vidéos. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyer sur Copier pour copier ou Déplacer pour déplacer. Story Album Utilisez cette application pour créer votre propre album numérique et conserver les scènes de votre vie en disposant vos photos comme bon vous semble. Appuyez sur Story Album depuis la liste des applications. Créer un Story Album Pour créer automatiquement un album, appuyez sur Créer un album → Par marquage d’information. Sélectionnez un critère, puis appuyez sur Rechercher images. Attribuez un titre à l’album, sélectionnez un thème, puis appuyez sur Créer un album. Pour le créer manuellement, appuyez sur Créer un album → Depuis la galerie. Créer un album recommandé Lorsque vous prenez plusieurs photos au même endroit, l’appareil trie automatiquement vos photos dans des albums selon vos critères spécifiques et suggère la création de nouveaux albums. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Suggestions → Ville de résidence, puis définissez une méthode pour identifier l’endroit où vous vous trouvez. Sélectionnez un type d’album et définissez le nombre minimal de photos. Lorsque vous prenez des photos qui répondent aux critères définis, l’appareil suggère de créer un album. Appuyez sur Créer un album → Suggestions. Sélectionnez un album, attribuez-lui un titre, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. L’appareil recommandera la création d’un Story Album si vous dépassez en un jour le nombre prédéfini de photos. Multimédia 64 Afficher un Story Album Sélectionnez un album. La photo de couverture apparaît sur la première page. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher les images de l’album. En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Ajouter du contenu : ajouter davantage de contenus à la page actuelle. • Supprimer du contenu : supprimer du contenu de la page actuelle. • Modif. thème : modifier le thème de la mise en page. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos de l’album ouvert. • Partager via : envoyer l’album à d’autres personnes. • Imprimer : imprimer l’album via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. • Commander un album photo : commander un album imprimé. • Exporter album : exporter l’album vers un autre emplacement de stockage. • Supprimer album : supprimer l’album. Modifier des photos Appuyez sur la photo de la page d’un album. Pour ajouter une légende, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur . Pour appliquer des effets à la photo, appuyez sur . Pour démarrer un diaporama, appuyez sur → Diaporama → Lancer le diaporama. Pour définir une photo comme photo de couverture, appuyez sur → Déf. comme couv. Pour faire pivoter la photo dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre, appuyez sur → Rotation à gauche. Pour faire pivoter la photo dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre, appuyez sur → Rotation à droite. Multimédia 65 Paper Artist Utilisez cette application pour faire ressembler vos images à des illustrations avec des effets ou des cadres amusants. Appuyez sur Paper Artist depuis la liste des applications. Pour modifier une image, utilisez les outils artistiques. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Paper Pictures. Sélectionner une image existante. Partager l’image. Appliquer des effets à l’image. Dessiner avec un crayon. Appuyer pour modifier l’épaisseur du crayon. Prendre une photo. Dessiner avec un pinceau. Appuyer pour modifier l’épaisseur du pinceau. Enregistrer l’image. Appliquer des cadres à l’image. Effacer les dessins. Appuyer pour modifier la taille de la gomme. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Multimédia 66 Lecteur vidéo Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo. Appuyez sur Lecteur vidéo depuis la liste des applications. • Évitez de verrouiller l’écran de l’appareil lorsque vous visionnez une vidéo DivX à la demande. Chaque fois que vous verrouillez l’écran pendant la lecture d’une vidéo DivX à la demande, le nombre de locations disponibles diminue. • Selon la version logicielle de votre appareil, certains formats de fichiers ne sont pas compatibles. • Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus correctement en fonction de leur encodage. Visionner des vidéos Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Modifier le format d’écran. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Redémarrer la vidéo en cours de lecture ou revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Régler le volume. Réduire le format de l’écran vidéo. Mettre en pause ou reprendre la lecture. Sélectionner un mode pour le système audio Dolby. Rechercher des appareils compatibles DLNA. Supprimer des vidéos Appuyez sur → Supprimer, appuyez sur les vidéos pour les sélectionner, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Multimédia 67 Partager des vidéos Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez un mode de partage, sélectionnez des vidéos en les cochant, puis appuyez sur Partager. Utiliser le lecteur contextuel Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochezles. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. YouTube Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube. Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Visionner des vidéos Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour visionner la vidéo correspondante. Pivotez l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la vidéo en mode Paysage. Mettre en pause ou reprendre la lecture. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Modifier la qualité d’affichage. Ajouter la vidéo à la liste de lecture. Envoyer l’adresse URL à d’autres personnes. Rechercher des vidéos. Multimédia 68 Partager des vidéos Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mettre des vidéos en ligne Sélectionnez votre compte, appuyez sur , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la vidéo, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Flipboard Utilisez cette application pour accéder à vos magazines personnalisés. Appuyez sur Flipboard depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour démarrer Flipboard, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche sur la page d’accueil, sélectionnez des thèmes d’actualité, puis appuyez sur Construisez votre Flipboard. Sélectionnez un article de couverture ou un thème, parcourez les pages Flipboard, puis sélectionnez un article à lire. Lorsque vous lisez un article, utilisez les icônes suivantes : • : accéder à la page précédente. • : afficher les commentaires des autres personnes sur l’article. • : partager l’article via Twitter. • : partager l’article avec d’autres personnes. • : ajouter à l’article la mention J’aime de Facebook. • : ajouter l’article à la liste des favoris dans Twitter. • : ajouter l’article au magazine Flipboard. 69 Boutiques d’applications et multimédia Play Store Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications et des jeux pouvant s’exécuter sur votre appareil. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Installer. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. • Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. • Pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant d’autres sources, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sécurité → Sources inconnues depuis la liste des applications. Désinstaller des applications Désinstallez les applications achetées sur Play Store. Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des applications installées, puis appuyez sur Désinstaller. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 70 Samsung Apps Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications Samsung. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site www.samsungapps.com. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur pour sélectionner une catégorie. Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de recherche. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Télécharger ou Acheter. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Game Hub Utilisez cette application pour accéder à des jeux. Appuyez sur Game Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner un jeu à télécharger depuis Samsung Apps. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 71 Music Hub Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique et acheter des morceaux ou des albums du catalogue Music Hub. Abonnez-vous au service premium Music Hub pour bénéficier de recommandations personnalisées, de diffusions continues illimitées, de stations de radio personnelles et d’un service de stockage sur le cloud pour l’ensemble de vos morceaux. Pour plus de détails, appuyez sur → Aide ou consultez le site Web de Music Hub. Appuyez sur Music Hub depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Certaines fonctions peuvent s’intituler différemment selon votre abonnement. • Selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur, certaines fonctions, dont les services d’écoute en continu, peuvent ne pas être disponibles. MA MUSIQUE Écoutez la musique enregistrées sur votre appareil ou sur le serveur de stockage hébergé sur le cloud. Votre musique est automatiquement synchronisée avec votre ordinateur. STORE Bénéficiez d’une diffusion de musique illimitée. Écoutez les morceaux du catalogue en continu ou téléchargez-les pour en profiter même sans couverture réseau. Ajoutez des morceaux de musique à vos listes de lecture et partagez-les avec vos amis. RADIOS Écoutez de la musique sur les stations de radio ou créez votre propre station. Vous pouvez personnaliser votre station en fonction de votre artiste préféré. Cette station diffusera les musiques similaires à celles composées par votre artiste préféré. Vous pouvez également recevoir des recommandations personnalisées depuis Music Hub. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 72 Play Livres Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des fichiers de livre. Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Films Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV. Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée sur le service Google Cloud. Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 73 Readers Hub Utilisez cette application pour télécharger et lire des livres électroniques. Appuyez sur Readers Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un livre. Pour télécharger des fichiers de livres, rendez-vous sur le Readers Hub Store. Learning Hub Utilisez cette application pour accéder à des documents d’apprentissage. Appuyez sur Learning Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis sélectionnez un cours vidéo ou un livre. 74 Utilitaires Mémo Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter ultérieurement. Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur , saisissez un mémo, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. Pour modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan, appuyez sur → Coul. Pour verrouiller le mémo afin que les autres utilisateurs ne puissent pas le voir, appuyez sur → Verrouiller. Naviguer parmi les mémos Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo. Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur . Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur . Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur . Pour trier les mémos par date, appuyez sur → Trier par. Pour envoyer le texte sous formes de mémos à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager du texte via. Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour imprimer des mémos via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi, appuyez sur → Imprimer. Pour importer des mémos depuis Google Docs, appuyez sur → Importer. Pour exporter des mémos vers un autre emplacement de stockage, appuyez sur → Exporter. Pour modifier les paramètres des mémos, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Utilitaires 75 Afficher un mémo Appuyez sur la miniature du mémo pour l’ouvrir. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de mémos. Appuyez sur et utilisez les options suivantes : • Supprimer : supprimer le mémo. • Coul. : modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan. • Verrouiller : verrouiller le mémo afin que les autres ne puissent pas le consulter. • Imprimer : imprimer le mémo via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. • Partager du texte via : envoyer du texte dans mémos à d’autres personnes. • Partager via : envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes. S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Créer des événements ou des tâches Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Ajouter un événement : entrer un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option. • Ajouter une tâche : entrer une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option. • Ajouter mémo : créer un mémo manuscrit à joindre à la date. Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date. Utilitaires 76 Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation. Appuyez ensuite sur Modif. détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné. Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans le champ Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts. Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement, appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la carte qui apparaît. Joignez une image. Appuyez sur Images, puis prenez une photo ou sélectionnez-en une parmi les images existantes. Synchroniser avec Google Agenda Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Google sous Comptes, sélectionnez un compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier. Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner → → Synchroniser. Pour afficher un événement ou un tâche synchronisé, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Affichage → Calendriers → Affichage, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis appuyez sur OK. Modifier le type de calendrier En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types de calendrier incluant le mois, la semaine, etc. Pour modifier le type de calendrier, vous pouvez rapprocher deux doigts sur l’écran. Par exemple, pour passer du calendrier mensuel au calendrier annuel, rapprochez deux doigts sur l’écran ; pour passer du calendrier annuel au calendrier mensuel, écartez-les. Rechercher des événements Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche. Pour afficher les événements de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut de l’écran. Utilitaires 77 Supprimer des événements Sélectionnez une date, puis appuyez sur → Supprimer. Partager des événements Sélectionnez un événement, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Lorsque vous ouvrez la Dropbox pour la première fois, appuyez sur Démarrer pour activer le service. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Une fois la Dropbox activée, les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo sont automatiquement importées dans Dropbox. Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier. En mode affichage d'une image ou d'une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste de favoris. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Utilitaires 78 Cloud Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers ou sauvegarder vos paramètres et les données de vos applications avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Cloud. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync. Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarde. Synchroniser avec la Dropbox Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications. Polaris Office Cette application permet de modifier des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur Polaris Office depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de certaines fonctions dépend du type de fichier. Utilitaires 79 Créer un document. Afficher les documents favoris. Faire défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher les documents récents. Afficher et gérer les documents en ligne. Naviguer dans les dossiers. Naviguer par formats de document. Créer des documents Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un type de document. Utilisez la barre d’outil d'édition en haut de l’écran pour modifier le document. Pour terminer, appuyez sur → Enreg. sous, saisissez un nom de fichier, sélectionnez un dossier de destination, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. Lire des documents Sélectionnez un fichier ou appuyez sur Navigateur, Clouds, Type de formulaire ou Favoris, puis sélectionnez un fichier à ouvrir. Pour démarrer un diaporama, appuyez sur → Diaporama. Pour rechercher un texte dans le document, appuyez sur . Utilitaires 80 Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Document • Enreg. sous : enregistrer le document sous un autre nom. • Exportation PDF : enregistrer le document au format de fichier PDF. • Rechercher et Remplacer : rechercher ou remplacer du texte. • Mise en page : modifier la mise en page. • Vue pleine largeur : afficher uniquement le contenu du document, sans les marges. • Zoom avant/arrière : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Redistribution de texte : organiser le texte pour qu’il s’adapte à l’écran. • Mémo activé : afficher les commentaires dans le document. • TTS : lire le document à l’aide de la fonction synthèse vocale. • Imprimer : imprimer le document via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. Présentation • Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama. • Enreg. sous : enregistrer le document sous un autre nom. • Exportation PDF : enregistrer le document au format de fichier PDF. • Rechercher et Remplacer : rechercher ou remplacer du texte. • Mode diapositive simple : afficher les diapositives une par une. • Zoom avant/arrière : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Imprimer : imprimer le document via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. Utilitaires 81 Feuille de calcul • Enreg. sous : enregistrer le document sous un autre nom. • Rechercher et Remplacer : rechercher ou remplacer du texte. • Protéger la feuille : verrouiller la feuille afin que les autres ne puissent pas la modifier. • Geler : figer la rangée sélectionnée. • Recalculer : recalculer les fonctions de la feuille. • Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques. • Filtre : afficher les cellules filtrées selon des critères spécifiques. • Zoom avant/arrière : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Imprimer : imprimer le document via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. Texte • Enregistrer sous : enregistrer le document sous un autre nom. • TTS : lire le document à l’aide de la fonction synthèse vocale. • Imprimer : imprimer le document via une connexion USB ou Wi-Fi. Alarme Utilisez cette application pour définir des heures de réveil et des alarmes pour les événements importants. Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications. Activer ou désactiver cette alarme. Utilitaires 82 Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d'activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. • Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous trouvez à l’endroit indiqué. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Supprimer des alarmes Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Horloge mondiale Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de n’importe quelle ville dans le monde. Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications. Créer des horloges Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom d’une ville, puis appuyez sur . Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur Heure d’été. Supprimer des horloges Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Utilitaires 83 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour les calculs simples ou complexes. Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. Pour modifier la taille des caractères de l’historique, appuyez sur → Taille du texte. S Translator Utilisez cette application pour traduire du texte dans d’autres langues. Appuyez sur S Translator depuis la liste des applications. Utiliser S Translator Définissez la langue source et la langue cible, saisissez le texte dans le champ de saisie, puis appuyez sur . Pour ajouter une combinaison linguistique à votre liste de favoris, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer une combinaison linguistique à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Démarrer une conversation avec S Translator Appuyez sur les touches au bas de l’écran pour communiquer avec d’autres personnes via la traduction parlée. Appuyez sur Expression pour votre langue, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil traduira ce que vous dites. Appuyez sur dans le champ de la langue cible pour laisser l’appareil lire à votre correspondant la traduction de ce que vous venez de dire. Appuyez sur Speak pour la langue de votre correspondant et laissez-le répondre dans sa langue. L’appareil traduira ce qu’il dit. Appuyez sur dans le champ de la langue source pour laisser l’appareil vous lire la traduction de ce que vient de dire votre correspondant. Utilitaires 84 S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander l’appareil vocalement afin d’envoyer un message, d’écrire un mémo, et bien plus encore. Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales : • Ouvrir le lecteur MP3 • Lancer la calculatrice • Vérifier le calendrier Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits tranquilles. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Utilitaires 85 Google Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans les applications et le contenu de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur , puis énoncer un mot-clé. Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de recherche. Effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’images Pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’une image, appuyez sur → Search with camera. Pointez l’objectif sur une image, puis appuyez sur . Cette fonctionnalité est disponible uniquement en anglais. Étendre la recherche Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants. Google Now Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien plus encore. Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier les paramètres Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Google Now. Utilitaires 86 Recherche vocale Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement. Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Quand l’instruction Vous pouvez parler apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression. Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Pour revenir au dossier supérieur, appuyez sur . Pour revenir au répertoire principal, appuyez sur . Dans un dossier, utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : •  : rechercher des fichiers. •  : modifier le mode d’affichage. •  : créer un dossier. • Date : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. Sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier en le cochant, puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : •  : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. •  : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. •  : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. •  : partager des fichiers avec d'autres personnes. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Utilitaires 87 Téléchargements Utilisez cette application pour voir les fichiers téléchargés depuis des applications. Appuyez sur Téléchargements depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour afficher les fichiers téléchargés depuis Internet, appuyez sur Téléch. Internet ; pour afficher les fichiers téléchargés depuis d’autres applications, comme l’application Email, appuyez sur Autres télécharg. Sélectionnez un fichier et ouvrez-le dans l'application correspondante. Pour trier les fichiers par taille, appuyez sur Trier par taille. Pour trier les fichiers par date, appuyez sur Trier par date. TripAdvisor Utilisez cette application pour obtenir des informations de voyage, notamment sur vos destinations, vols ou hôtels. Vous pouvez également réserver une chambre d’hôtel et partager vos commentaires avec d’autres personnes. Appuyez sur TripAdvisor depuis la liste des applications. 88 Géolocalisation Maps Utilisez cette application pour marquer votre position, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir un itinéraire. Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Rechercher des lieux Appuyez sur Rechercher, saisissez une adresse, puis appuyez sur . Sélectionnez un lieu pour en afficher les informations détaillées. Pour rechercher des adresses à proximité de votre position, appuyez sur → Local. Une fois le lieu trouvé, appuyez sur et utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • Effacer résultats : effacer les résultats de votre recherche. • Disponible hors connexion : enregistrer un endroit spécifique pour pouvoir l’afficher hors-ligne. • Local : rechercher des adresses à proximité. • Calques : superposer plusieurs couches de données, dont les images satellite, les informations sur la circulation et d’autres encore. • Latitude : partager des informations de localisation avec des amis. • Mes adresses : afficher des cartes en mode hors ligne, vos lieux favoris, les adresses récemment visitées, et bien plus encore. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres des cartes. • Aide : afficher des informations sur l’utilisation de la carte. Pour afficher votre position actuelle, appuyez sur . Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les ou rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Géolocalisation 89 Obtenir un itinéraire 1 Appuyer sur . 2 Appuyez sur , puis choisissez une méthode pour saisir le point de départ et le point d’arrivée : • Ma position actuelle : utiliser la position actuelle comme point de départ. • Contacts : sélectionner une adresse depuis votre liste de contacts. • Point sur la carte : localiser un endroit en appuyant sur la carte. • Mes adresses : sélectionner une adresse dans votre liste de lieux favoris. 3 Sélectionnez un moyen de transport (voiture, transport en commun ou à pied), puis appuyez sur OK. 4 Sélectionnez l’un des itinéraires proposés. Local Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des restaurants, banques, arrêts de bus, etc. à proximité de votre position. Appuyez sur Local depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez une catégorie de lieux, puis un lieu dans la liste des résultats de recherche. • Plan : localiser le lieu sur la carte. • Itinéraire : rechercher un itinéraire pour se rendre à cette adresse. Pour ajouter une catégorie de lieux, appuyez sur → Ajouter une recherche dans la liste des catégories, saisissez un mot-clé dans la zone de texte pour lancer la recherche. Géolocalisation 90 Navigation Utilisez cette application pour obtenir des instructions vocales qui vous guideront vers votre destination. Appuyez sur Navigation depuis la liste des applications. • Les cartes, votre position actuelle et autres données de navigation peuvent différer des informations de localisation réelles. Soyez attentif aux conditions de trafic, à l’état de la route et à tous les autres facteurs qui pourraient affecter votre conduite. Respectez le code de la route et les consignes de sécurité en vigueur. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Précisez votre destination de différentes façons, en parlant à voix haute ou en saisissant l’adresse de destination. Une fois l’itinéraire trouvé, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour vous rendre à destination. 91 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les options d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d'une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité. Paramètres 92 Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d’expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Bluetooth. Utilisation des données Suivez le volume de données utilisées. Paramètres supplémentaires Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Paramètres 93 AllShare • Partage de fichiers : activez le partage multimédia pour permettre à d’autres appareils certifiés DLNA d’accéder aux fichiers multimédia enregistrés sur votre appareil. • Contenus partagés : paramétrez l’appareil pour partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Liste des appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Liste des périphériques non autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Télécharger sur : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Charger depuis d’autres périphériques : paramétrez l’appareil pour autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Screen Mirroring Activez cette fonction pour partager votre écran avec d’autres personnes. Kies via Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à Samsung Kies via un réseau Wi-Fi. Mode blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Profil Voiture Paramétrez l’appareil afin qu’il lise tout haut les contenus et spécifiez les applications à utiliser dans ce mode. Paramètres 94 Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. • Volume : réglez le niveau sonore de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements, tels que les messages entrants. • Tonalité des touches : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique. Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Fond d’écran : – Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. – Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. – Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et de l’écran de verrouillage. • Volet des raccourcis : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant sur le volet des raccourcis. • Fenêtres multiples : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Mode d’écran : – Optimiser l’affichage : utilisez ce mode pour pouvoir optimiser l’affichage selon les paramètres de l’écran. – Dynamique : utilisez ce mode pour accentuer les tonalités de l’affichage. – Standard : utilisez ce mode pour obtenir un arrière-plan de qualité standard. – Vidéo : utilisez ce mode pour obtenir un arrière-plan sombre, comme dans une pièce peu éclairée. • Mode lecture : sélectionnez les applications qui utiliseront le mode lecture. En mode lecture, l’appareil protège vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. Paramètres 95 • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Smart Screen : – Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque vous consultez l’écran. – Rotation intelligente : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote selon l’orientation de votre visage. • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Améliorer la lisibilité : rendez le texte plus net pour qu'il soit plus facile à lire. • Durée de l’éclairage des touches : réglez la durée du rétroéclairage des touches. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. Paramètres 96 Mode économie d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. • Éco. d’énergie UC : paramétrez l’appareil pour limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources système de l’appareil. • Éco. d’énergie écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour diminuer la luminosité de l’écran. • En savoir plus sur le mode économie d’énergie : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie. Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Services de localisation Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. • Accéder à ma position : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise les applications à utiliser vos informations de localisation actuelles. • Utiliser les satellites GPS : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise les satellites GPS pour localiser votre position. • Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol, ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Paramètres 97 Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Plusieurs widgets : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise l’utilisation des widgets sur l’écran verrouillé. • Widgets écran verrouill. : – Horloge ou msg personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il affiche une horloge ou un message personnel sur l’écran verrouillé. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon votre sélection. Pour une horloge : – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. – Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître avec l’horloge. Pour un message personnel : – Modifier un message personnel : modifiez le message personnel. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il affiche un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. • Commande de réveil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse votre commande d’activation même lorsque l’écran est verrouillé. • Définir commande réveil : définissez une commande de réveil permettant de lancer l’application S Voice ou d’exécuter une fonction spécifique. Paramètres 98 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – Enregistrement du compte : ajoutez ou affichez vos comptes Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol, ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Page Traçage du mobile : accédez au site Web de la fonction de traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : pour des raisons de sécurité, l’appareil masque par défaut vos mots de passe. Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : choisissez d’installer des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Dans le cas contraire, vous pourrez télécharger des applications uniquement depuis Play Store. • Vérifier les applications : autorisez Google à vérifier que les applications ne présentent pas des comportement anormaux avant de les installer. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. Paramètres 99 Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Langues de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. • Contrôle du curseur : activer ou désactivez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. • Saisie manuscrite : personnalisez les paramètres pour la saisie manuscrite, comme la durée de reconnaissance, l’épaisseur du crayon ou la couleur du crayon. • Paramètres avancés : – Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il mette automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). – Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. – Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. Paramètres 100 – Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. – Son touches : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Outil reconnais. vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale. Recherche vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • Utiliser données localis. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise vos informations de localisation lors de la recherche vocale. • Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide de la fonction S Voice. • A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Contrôle vocal : contrôlez les applications à l’aide des commandes vocales. • Commande de réveil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. Paramètres 101 • Déverrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse votre commande d’activation même lorsque l’écran est verrouillé. • Définir commande de réveil : définissez une commande de réveil permettant de lancer l’application S Voice ou d’exécuter une fonction spécifique. • Evénements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur. • Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. • Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. • Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter à l’aide de l’application S Voice. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Casques Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la recherche vocale lorsqu’un casque Bluetooth est connecté. Options de synthèse vocale • Moteur TTS favori : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. Paramètres 102 Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connecté à l’appareil. Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il sauvegarde vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il restaure vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Ajouter compte Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Mouvement Activez la fonction de détection des mouvements et modifiez les paramètres permettant de contrôler la détection des mouvements de votre appareil. • Balayer pour capturer : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Recouvrir pour désactiver le son : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. • En savoir plus : affichez le didacticiel de contrôle des mouvements de main. Paramètres 103 Contrôle vocal Modifiez les paramètres des commandes vocales. Accessoire Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. • Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez à une station d'accueil ou l'en déconnectez. • Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il utilise le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté. • Sortie audio : sélectionnez le format de sortie audio à utiliser lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à des périphériques HDMI. Certains appareils peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les paramètres de son Surround. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, la date et l’heure sont alors réinitialisées. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Paramètres 104 Accessibilité Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité de l’appareil. • Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai de à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Énoncer les mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute. • Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité dans le menu rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. • Gérer l’accessibilité : exportez ou importez les paramètres d’accessibilité afin de les partager avec d’autres appareils. • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière à l’aide des doigts. • Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité. • Réglage des couleurs : réglez le modèle de couleurs de l’écran lorsque l’appareil détermine que vous souffrez de daltonisme ou de difficultés oculaires. • Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer Talkback lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran. • Options synthèse vocale : – Moteur TTS favori : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • Améliorer l’accessibilité Web : configurez les applications pour installer des scripts Web qui rendent les contenus Web plus accessibles. • Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette. Paramètres 105 • Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette. • Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil. • Menu assistant : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher l’icône d’assistance vous permettant d’accéder aux fonctions prises en charge par les touches externes ou les options du volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez également modifier le menu de l’icône de raccourci. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Contrôle par interaction : définissez une zone de l’écran non sensible tactilement. À propos de l’appareil Accédez à des informations d’aide sur votre téléphone et mettez à jour sa version logicielle. Paramètres Google Utilisez cette application pour configurer les paramètres de certaines fonctions proposées par Google. Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications. 106 Dépannage Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile Si votre appareil dispose d’un écran tactile et que cet écran réagit de manière erronée, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Retirez les éventuelles protections de l’écran tactile. Les films de protection peuvent empêcher l’appareil de reconnaître vos saisies et ne sont pas recommandés pour les appareils à écran tactile. • Vos mains doivent être propres et sèches lorsque vous touchez l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, confiez votre appareil à un centre de service aprèsvente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond pas ou se bloque, vous devez éventuellement fermer les applications ou le réinitialiser pour qu’il retrouve un fonctionnement correct. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 à 10 secondes. L’appareil redémarre automatiquement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre ce problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Dépannage 107 L’appareil émet un bip sonore et l’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Pour continuer à utiliser l’appareil, rechargez ou remplacez la batterie. Problème pour recharger la batterie ou extinction de l’appareil La batterie de l’appareil ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Si la batterie est défectueuse ou si elle doit être remplacée, rapportez l’appareil à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’activation de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil Samsung doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’activation de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers audio Certains fichiers audio risquent de ne pas fonctionner sur votre appareil Samsung pour plusieurs raisons. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de fichiers audio, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si c’est le cas, pour lire le fichier, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé. • Vérifiez que votre appareil prend en charge le type du fichier audio. Dépannage 108 Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’autre appareil, le cas échéant. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que les pilotes nécessaires sont bien installés sur votre ordinateur et qu’ils sont actualisés. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que vous possédez la version Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou ultérieure sur votre ordinateur. • Vérifiez que vous disposez bien de Samsung Kies 2.0 ou Windows Media Player 10 ou une version ultérieure sur votre ordinateur. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. www.samsung.com French. 08/2013. Rev. 1.0 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T310 2 À propos de ce mode d’emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos associés sont des marques commerciales de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales, et sont utilisés sous licence. À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Cet appareil est officiellement homologué DivX Certified®, ce qui signifie qu’il a subi des tests rigoureux pour certifier qu’il est en mesure de lire des vidéos DivX. Visitez le site www.divx.com pour plus d’informations et pour obtenir des outils logiciels capables de convertir vos fichiers au format DivX. À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD ou vidéo à la demande). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendez-vous ensuite sur le site vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement. Cet appareil DivX Certified® peut lire des vidéos DivX® d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 720 p HD, y compris du contenu Premium. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Digital Plus et le symbole double-D sont des marques commerciales de Dolby Laboratories. 5 Table des matières Démarrage 8 Présentation de l’appareil 9 Touches 10 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 13 Insérer une carte mémoire 15 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Manipuler l’appareil 16 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 16 Régler le volume 16 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 17 Icônes d’informations 18 Utiliser l’écran tactile 21 Reconnaissance des mouvements 23 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres 27 Notifications 28 Écran d’accueil 30 Écran de verrouillage 31 Liste des applications 33 Utiliser les applications 33 Aide 34 Saisir du texte 36 Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi 37 Créer un compte 38 Transférer des fichiers 39 Protéger l’appareil 41 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 42 Contacts 46 Email 47 Google Mail 49 Hangouts 49 Google+ 50 Google+ Photos 50 Twitter Web et réseau 51 Internet 52 Chrome 53 Bluetooth 54 Screen Mirroring 55 Samsung Link 56 Group Play 58 WatchON Table des matières 6 93 Calculatrice 93 S Translator 94 S Voice 95 Recherche Google 96 Recherche vocale 96 Mes fichiers 97 Téléchargements 97 TripAdvisor Géolocalisation 98 Maps Paramètres 99 Accéder au menu des paramètres 99 Wi-Fi 100 Bluetooth 100 Utilisation des données 101 Paramètres supplémentaires 102 Mode Blocage 102 Mode mains-libres 102 Son 103 Affichage 104 Stockage 104 Mode Éco. d’énergie 105 Batterie 105 Gestionnaire d’applications 105 Applications par défaut 105 Position 106 Écran de verrouillage 107 Sécurité 108 Langue et saisie 111 Cloud Multimédia 59 Musique 61 Appareil photo 66 Galerie 70 Story Album 74 Paper Artist 75 Vidéo 76 YouTube 77 Flipboard Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 78 Play Store 79 Samsung Apps 79 Game Hub 80 Music Hub 81 Play Livres 81 Play Films 81 Play Musique 81 Play Jeux 82 Play Kiosque 82 Readers Hub 82 Video Hub Utilitaires 83 Mémo 84 S Planner 87 Dropbox 88 Cloud 88 Google Drive 89 POLARIS Office 5 91 Alarme 92 Horloge mondiale Table des matières 7 111 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser 112 Ajouter compte 112 Mouvement 112 Contrôle vocal 112 Accessoires 113 Date et heure 113 Accessibilité 114 À propos de l’appareil 114 Paramètres Google Dépannage 8 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Accueil Écran tactile Touche Retour Capteur de luminosité Objectif avant Touche de volume Microphone Témoin lumineux Touche Marche/Arrêt Haut-parleur Haut-parleur Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Prise audio 3,5 mm Compartiment pour carte mémoire Démarrage 9 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas de protection d’écran. Cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement du capteur. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 à 10 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran tactile s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Menu • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des options disponibles dans l’écran actuel. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l'application de recherche Google. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 10 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. Démarrage 11 Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Démarrage 12 Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Démarrage 13 Insérer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 64 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte apparaît dans le dossier SD memory card du menu Mes fichiers. 1 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 2 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. Démarrage 14 Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Démarrage 15 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Manipuler l’appareil Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Démarrage 16 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l’écran, dans le sens de votre choix. Régler le volume Pour régler le volume des sons multimédia, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. Activer le profil Discret Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Maintenez la touche de volume Bas enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé. • Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet. • Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son. 17 Fonctions de base Icônes d’informations Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Synchronisation avec le Web Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 18 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. Mouvements Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 19 Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et faites-le glisser sur l’écran. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 20 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Pincer Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 21 Reconnaissance des mouvements Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples. Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Mouvement, puis faites glisser le curseur situé en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite. Pivoter l’écran De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation. Pour empêcher l’écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez l’option Rotation écran. • Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. • Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple, pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage. Fonctions de base 22 Balayer Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Recouvrir Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu multimédia. Fonctions de base 23 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être exécutées. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Affichage, puis cochez la case Fenêtres multiples. Utiliser un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter des applications sur un écran partagé. Lancer des applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres 1 Placez votre doigt sur le côté droit de l'écran et faites-le glisser vers le milieu de l’écran. Vous pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur . Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté droit de l’écran. Volet Multi-fenêtres Fonctions de base 24 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faitesla glisser vers l’écran. Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Fonctions de base 25 Partager du contenu entre applications Vous pouvez facilement partager du contenu entre des applications telles que Email et Internet par un mouvement de glisser-déposer. Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction. 1 Lancez Email et Internet sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. Accéder aux options Multi-fenêtres 2 Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application, puis appuyez sur . Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application pour accéder aux options suivantes : • : passer d’une application Multi-fenêtres à l’autre. • : partager facilement des éléments comme des images, du texte ou des liens entre les fenêtres d'application en réalisant un mouvement de glisser-déposer. • : agrandir la fenêtre. • : fermer l’application. Fonctions de base 26 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre Internet et faites-le glisser vers un emplacement dans la fenêtre E-mail. Créer une combinaison Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour enregistrer les applications Multi-fenêtres en cours d’exécution sous forme de combinaison. 1 Lancez plusieurs applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. 2 Ouvrez le volet Multi-fenêtres et appuyez sur → Créer. 3 Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. La combinaison Multi-fenêtres en cours d’exécution est ajoutée au volet Multi-fenêtres. Pour lancer des applications sur la base d'une combinaison enregistrée, sélectionnez la combinaison dans le volet Multi-fenêtres. Fonctions de base 27 Notifications Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour le fermer, faites glisser votre doigt de bas en haut sur le volet. Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet des raccourcis. Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas, puis appuyez sur pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. • Position : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Son : activer ou désactiver le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth. • Mode lecture : activer ou désactiver le mode lecture. En mode lecture, l’appareil protège vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. Pour sélectionner les applications à utiliser en mode lecture, appuyez sur Paramètres → Affichage → Mode lecture. • Fenêtres multiples : activer ou désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Screen Mirroring : activer ou désactiver la fonction Screen Mirroring qui permet de répliquer votre écran sur l’écran d’un autre appareil. • Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications. • Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay. • Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie. • Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres → Mode Blocage. • Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne. • Mode mains-lib. : activer ou désactiver le mode mains-libres. La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour redisposer les options dans le volet des raccourcis, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur → , puis maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 28 Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil Ajouter une icône d’application Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’aperçu d’un volet d’écran d’accueil. Ajouter un élément Personnalisez l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des widgets, des dossiers ou des volets. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • Applications et widgets : ajouter des widgets ou des applications à l’écran d’accueil. • Dossier : créer un nouveau dossier. • Page : ajouter un volet à l’écran d’accueil. Déplacer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément. Fonctions de base 29 Organiser les volets d'écran d'accueil Ajouter un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page → . Déplacer un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faitesle glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Appuyez sur → Modifier la page, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faitesle glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez l’une des options ci-dessous : • Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez téléchargées depuis Internet. • Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. • Photos : images de l'application Google Photos. • Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. Sélectionnez une image, redimensionnez le cadre si nécessaire, puis définissez-la comme fond d’écran. Fonctions de base 30 Utiliser les widgets Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des widgets sur l’écran d’accueil. • Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Placez-le à l’endroit souhaité, redimensionnez-le en étirant son cadre, puis, le cas échéant, appuyez à un endroit quelconque de l’écran pour valider le nouvel emplacement du widget. Écran de verrouillage Le verrouillage de l’écran empêche le fonctionnement intempestif de l’appareil et facilite également l’ajout de widgets. Ajouter des widgets Pour utiliser les widgets lorsque l’écran est verrouillé, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case Plusieurs widgets. Lorsque les fonctionnalités de sécurité sont activées, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les widgets sur l’écran verrouillé. Appuyez sur la zone des widgets dans la partie supérieure de l’écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la droite afin d’accéder à la dernière page, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un widget afin de l’ajouter à l’écran de verrouillage. Fonctions de base 31 Organiser les volets de widgets Déplacer un volet Faites défiler la zone des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Faites défiler la zone des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les applications Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode d’affichage Grille personnalisable. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l'option Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Sauveg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle configuration. Fonctions de base 32 Organiser les volets d'applications Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Installer des applications Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des applications. Désinstaller des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désinstaller. Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil. Désactiver des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désactiver. Pour activer de nouveau l’application, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d’applications, faites défiler l'écran jusqu'à l’option DÉSACTIVÉ, sélectionnez l’application, puis appuyez sur Activer. • Les applications téléchargées et certaines des applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil ne peuvent pas être désactivées. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, les applications désactivées disparaissent de la liste des applications, mais restent enregistrées dans l’appareil. Fonctions de base 33 Utiliser les applications Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet. Ouvrir une application Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Certaines applications sont regroupées dans des dossiers. Appuyez sur un dossier, puis sur une application pour l’ouvrir. Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Fermer une application Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et optimiser les performances de l’appareil. Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée, puis appuyez sur et sur Fin près de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également maintenir la touche Accueil enfoncée et appuyer sur . Aide Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer des paramètres importants. Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez une catégorie. Pour trier les catégories par ordre alphabétique, appuyez sur . Pour rechercher des mots-clés, appuyez sur . Fonctions de base 34 Saisir du texte Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Utiliser le clavier Samsung Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Accéder aux paramètres du clavier Samsung. Insérer un espace. Saisir des majuscules. Ajouter un élément du presse-papier. Saisir des majuscules Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier le type de clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant. Sur le clavier flottant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre emplacement. Modifier la langue du clavier Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur la barre d’espace vers la droite ou la gauche pour modifier la langue du clavier. Fonctions de base 35 Écrire de façon manuscrite Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur → , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide du doigt. Les mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion. Utilisez les gestes de saisie manuscrite pour effectuer des opérations, comme la modification ou la suppression de caractères, et l’insertion d’espaces. Pour afficher le didacticiel, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur → Aide → Utiliser les gestes de saisie manuscrite. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Dicter du texte Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que vous venez de dire. Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît. Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue actuellement prise en charge. Copier et coller du texte Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, maintenez le doigt appuyé à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte, puis appuyez sur Coller. Fonctions de base 36 Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 99). Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet. Activer ou désactiver un réseau Wi-Fi Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite. Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible. Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Fonctions de base 37 Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier. Créer un compte Les applications Google, comme Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil. Ajouter des comptes Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes Google sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez un nom sous l’option Comptes, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer le compte. Fonctions de base 38 Transférer des fichiers Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. Fonctions de base 39 Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Protéger l’appareil Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Déverrouillage visage. Positionnez votre visage dans le cadre de mise au point. Définissez ensuite un code PIN ou un modèle de déverrouillage de secours à utiliser si la procédure de déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale échoue. Déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale et vocale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Déverrouillage visage et voix. Positionnez votre visage dans le cadre de mise au point et définissez une commande vocale. Définissez ensuite un code PIN ou un modèle de déverrouillage de secours à utiliser si la procédure de déverrouillage par reconnaissance faciale et vocale échoue. Fonctions de base 40 Déverrouillage par modèle Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Modèle. Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Déverrouillage par code PIN Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Code PIN. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouillage par mot de passe Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Mot de passe. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Fonctions de base 41 Déverrouiller l’appareil Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le code ou dessinez le modèle de déverrouillage. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble USB. • Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant. 42 Communication Contacts Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses e-mail, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications. Gérer les contacts Créer un contact Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage et saisissez les informations d’un contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. Modifier un contact Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer un contact Appuyez sur . Communication 43 Rechercher des contacts Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Afficher les contacts Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés. Appuyez sur → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle les contacts doivent être affichés. Synchroniser des contacts Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google. Les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône . Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung. Les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône . Communication 44 Importer et exporter des contacts Importer des contacts Appuyez sur → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation. Exporter des contacts Appuyez sur → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’exportation. Partager des contacts Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Plusieurs contacts, sélectionnez les contacts à partager, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Contacts favoris Dans l’onglet des favoris, appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Ajouter aux favoris : ajouter des contacts aux favoris. • Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris. • Affichage Grille / Affichage Liste : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Groupes de contacts Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Dans l’onglet des groupes, sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur . Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Communication 45 Gérer les groupes Dans l’onglet des groupes, appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Modifier le groupe : modifier les paramètres du groupe. • Créer : créer un groupe. • Supprimer du groupe : retirer un membre du groupe. • Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe. • Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Supprimer des groupes Appuyez sur , sélectionnez des groupes que vous avez ajoutés, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut. Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis appuyez sur OK. Carte de visite Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts. En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur, sélectionnez la carte de visite, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier. Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Contact sélectionné, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Communication 46 Email Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails. Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications. Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur  ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Envoyer des e-mails Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans votre liste de contacts, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc. Appuyez sur → pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations de localisation et bien plus encore. Envoyer des e-mails programmés Lorsque vous rédigez un e-mail, appuyez sur → Envoi programmé. Définissez la date et l’heure, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à l’heure et à la date indiquées. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que l’heure et la date soient incorrectes. Communication 47 Lire des e-mails Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Répondre au message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts. Supprimer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Rédiger un message. Transférer le message. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir ou sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer. Google Mail Utilisez cette application pour accéder directement au service Google Mail. Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Communication 48 Envoyer des e-mails Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Pour ajouter d’autres destinataires, appuyez sur + CC/CCI. Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le brouillon. Pour joindre des photos, des vidéos, de la musique et d’autres fichiers, appuyez sur → Joindre un fichier. Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer. Appuyez sur → Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de Google Mail. Appuyez sur → Envoyer des commentaires pour indiquer votre opinion sur le développement de l’application. Appuyez sur → Aide pour accéder aux informations d’aide à propos de Google Mail. Lire des e-mails Déplacer le message vers une autre messagerie. Identifier le message comme non lu. Afficher la pièce jointe. Archiver ce message. Identifier le message comme favori. Supprimer ce message. Répondre à ce message. Transférer le message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts. Répondre à tous les destinataires ou imprimer le message. Communication 49 Libellés Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les messages du libellé Boîte de réception. Sélectionnez un libellé dans la rubrique TOUS LES LIBELLÉS pour afficher les messages des autres libellés. Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur → Modifier les libellés, puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer. Hangouts Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec vos amis. Appuyez sur Hangouts depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste ou saisissez des critères de recherche et sélectionnez un ami dans les résultats pour commencer à discuter. Google+ Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre entourage via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Appuyez sur Tous pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis. Communication 50 Google+ Photos Utilisez cette application pour afficher et partager des images ou des vidéos via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Photos depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • TOUT : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos prises ou téléchargées sur l’appareil. • SÉLECTION : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos regroupées par date ou par album. Appuyez sur pour afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos du groupe. Sélectionnez ensuite une photo ou une vidéo. En mode affichage d'une photo ou d'une vidéo, utilisez l’une des icônes suivantes : • : modifier la photo ou la vidéo. • : partager la photo ou la vidéo avec d’autres personnes. • : supprimer la photo ou la vidéo. Twitter Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre réseau social sur Twitter. Appuyez sur Twitter depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Saisissez votre nom d'utilisateur Twitter et votre mot de passe. Consultez ou partagez de brefs messages. 51 Web et réseau Internet Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur Internet. Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Pour partager, enregistrer ou imprimer une page Web, appuyez sur . Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur . Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur . Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Web et réseau 52 Historique Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. Pour ouvrir une page Web figurant dans la liste des pages les plus souvent consultées, appuyez sur → Historique → Les plus visités. Pages enregistrées Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Pages enregistrées. Liens Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d’une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page, l’enregistrer ou le copier. Pour afficher les fichiers que vous avez téléchargés depuis le Web, appuyez sur → Téléchargements. Partager des pages Web Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis appuyez sur Partager via. Chrome Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Web et réseau 53 Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google. Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils. Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir. Pour afficher les favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris. Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour le piratage de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite. Web et réseau 54 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Bluetooth → Analyser pour afficher la liste des appareils détectés. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux appareils pour confirmer l’opération. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez l’application Galerie, sélectionnez une image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Le fichier transféré est enregistré dans le dossier Download. Si vous recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à votre liste de contacts. Screen Mirroring Utilisez cette fonction pour connecter votre appareil à un grand écran avec le routeur AllShare Cast ou HomeSync, puis partagez vos contenus. Vous pouvez également utiliser cette fonction avec d’autres appareils prenant en charge la fonction Miracast Wi-Fi. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette fonction peut ne pas fonctionner sur les appareils compatibles Miracast ne prenant pas en charge le protocole HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. • Pour économiser votre batterie, désactivez cette fonction lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. • Si vous indiquez une bande de fréquence Wi-Fi, il se peut que les routeurs AllShare Cast ou HomeSync ne soient pas détectés. • Si vous lisez des vidéos ou jouez à des jeux sur un téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode TV approprié afin d’obtenir un résultat optimal. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Paramètres supplémentaires → Screen Mirroring, puis faites glisser le curseur Screen Mirroring vers la droite. Sélectionnez un appareil, ouvrez un fichier, puis contrôlez l’écran à l’aide des touches de votre appareil. Pour établir une connexion avec un appareil à l’aide d’un code PIN, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur son nom, puis saisissez votre code PIN. Web et réseau 55 Samsung Link Utilisez cette application pour lire du contenu enregistré sur des appareils distants ou des services de stockage Web sur Internet. Vous pouvez lire et envoyer des fichiers multimédia stocké sur votre appareil vers un autre appareil ou service de stockage Web. Pour utiliser cette application, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung et enregistrer au moins deux appareils. La méthode d’enregistrement peut varier en fonction du type d’appareil. Appuyez sur Samsung Link depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Lorsque vous ouvrez cette application, tous les contenus de vos appareils enregistrés et des services de stockage s’affichent. Vous pouvez parcourir vos données et les écouter vos fichiers audio. Envoyer des fichiers Envoyez des fichiers vers d’autres appareils ou téléchargez-les sur des services de stockage Web. Appuyez sur pour sélectionner un appareil ou un stockage Web et faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner une catégorie de média. Ensuite, appuyez sur , sélectionnez les fichiers, puis appuyez sur . Partager des fichiers Appuyez sur pour sélectionner un appareil ou un stockage Web et faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner une catégorie de média. Ensuite, appuyez sur , sélectionnez les fichiers, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Lire des fichiers sur un appareil distant Appuyez sur pour sélectionner un appareil ou un stockage Web et faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner une catégorie de média. Ensuite, appuyez sur , sélectionnez les fichiers, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un appareil. • Les formats de fichiers pris en charge peuvent différer selon les appareils connectés en tant que lecteurs multimédia. • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. Web et réseau 56 Gérer le contenu sur un service de stockage Web Sélectionnez un service de stockage Web, puis affichez et gérez vos fichiers. Pour transférer des fichiers entre votre appareil et un service de stockage Web, appuyez sur , sélectionnez les fichiers, puis appuyez sur . Pour enregistrer un service de stockage Web sur l’appareil, appuyez sur → Ajouter un service de stockage, puis sélectionnez un service de stockage Web. Group Play Utilisez cette application pour profiter des moments avec vos amis en partageant des contenus et en jouant avec. Créez ou rejoignez une session Group Play, puis partagez vos contenus, par exemple images ou musiques. Appuyez sur Group Play depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette application, il ne vous est plus possible d’accéder à Internet via le réseau Wi-Fi. Rejoindre une session Group Play. Définir l’utilisation ou non d’un mot de passe pour le groupe. Créer une session Group Play. Web et réseau 57 Créer un Group Play Lorsque vous créez une session Group Play, d’autres appareils peuvent rejoindre la session et partager le contenu. Si vous utilisez un mot de passe pour une session Group Play, les autres appareils doivent saisir le mot de passe pour rejoindre la session. Pour utiliser un mot de passe, cochez la case Définir MDP groupe. Appuyez sur Créer un groupe, définissez un mot de passe et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Partager de la musique : connecter deux ou plusieurs appareils, et les utiliser pour obtenir un effet ambiophonique lors du partage de musique. • Partager des images : sélectionner les images à partager. • Partager des documents : sélectionner les documents à partager. • Jouer à des jeux : jouer en ligne avec vos amis. Rejoindre un Group Play Rejoignez une session Group Play créée par un autre appareil. Appuyez sur Rejoindre groupe, sélectionnez une session Group Play à rejoindre, puis, le cas échéant, saisissez le mot de passe du groupe. Sélectionnez une catégorie multimédia. Le contenu disponible au partage s’affiche alors sur votre appareil. Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires dans une session Group Play Lorsque vous partagez des contenus avec d’autres appareils, utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • : modifier les paramètres du haut-parleur pour chaque appareil connecté. • → : régler le volume. • → : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser tous les appareils connectés comme des haut-parleurs stéréo. • : écrire une note ou dessiner à l’écran. Tous les participants peuvent voir ce que vous faites. • : afficher toutes les images partagées sous forme de mosaïque. Cette fonction est disponible lorsque vous avez sélectionné plus de deux images. • / : sélectionner davantage d’images ou de documents. • : afficher les participants du groupe. Web et réseau 58 WatchON Utilisez cette application pour connecter un téléviseur et regarder vos émissions et films préférés. Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Vous devez commencer par connecter l’appareil à un réseau et vérifier que le port infrarouge de l’appareil est en face du téléviseur. Établir une connexion avec un téléviseur Connectez un téléviseur afin d’afficher l’écran de l’appareil sur un grand écran et commander le téléviseur à distance à l’aide de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Configurer WatchON, sélectionnez une région et un service de radiodiffusion, puis appuyez sur Suivant. Regarder la télévision Sélectionnez un programme TV dans les suggestions ou sélectionnez une catégorie en bas de l’écran. Sélectionnez un programme TV, puis appuyez sur Regarder sur la TV ou Regarder. Le programme sélectionné apparaît sur le téléviseur connecté. Définir un rappel de programme Appuyez sur la rubrique Date en bas de l’écran, sélectionnez un programme TV que vous souhaitez regarder. Sélectionnez un programme, puis appuyez sur . Le rappel du programme sélectionné est ajouté à S Planner. 59 Multimédia Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique. Appuyez sur Musique depuis la liste des applications. Écouter de la musique Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour afficher le lecteur MP3 en plein écran. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Modifier le mode de répétition. Redémarrer le morceau en cours de lecture ou revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Rechercher d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Afficher les détails du fichier. Masquer l’écran du lecteur de Ouvrir la liste de lecture. musique. Multimédia 60 Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Paramètres avancés → Volume intelligent. Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives. La fonction Volume intelligent ne peut pas être appliquée pour certains fichiers. Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Paramètres avancés → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée. Définir un morceau comme sonnerie d’alarme Pour utiliser le morceau de musique en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur → Définir comme tonalité d’alarme. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Appuyez sur . Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Sélectionnez les morceaux à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Ajouter à liste de lecture. Écouter de la musique par catégorie Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de lecture. Lorsque vous ajoutez un morceau de musique, appuyez sur Coin musique → . Appuyez sur Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran. Multimédia 61 Appareil photo Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour visionner les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 66). Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Prendre des photos Prendre une photo Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point. Une fois la mise au point terminée, le cadre de mise au point devient vert. Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur . Afficher davantage d’options. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Indique le mode de prise de vue utilisé. Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Ouvrir la Galerie pour afficher les photos et les vidéos prises. Enregistrer une vidéo. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Multimédia 62 Mode de capture Il existe plusieurs effets de photo. Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. • Auto : ce mode permet à l’appareil photo d’évaluer l’environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. • Beauté : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images plus douces. • Son & prise : ce mode permet de prendre une photo et d’enregistrer le son de la scène. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu audio après la prise de vue. Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. • Panorama : ce mode permet de prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : – Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. – Maintenez l’objectif, de l’appareil photo dans le cadre de guidage. – Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. • Sports : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de sujets en action. • Nuit : ce mode permet de prendre des photos dans l’obscurité. Photos panoramiques Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés. Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama. Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Lorsque les deux cadres de prise de vue sont alignés, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur . Si l’objectif n’est plus aligné, la prise de vue s’interrompt. Multimédia 63 Enregistrer des vidéos Enregistrer une vidéo Pour enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur . Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Mode d’enregistrement Pour modifier le mode d’enregistrement, appuyez sur → . • Normal : ce mode permet d’obtenir une qualité standard. • Limite pour e-mail : ce mode permet de réduire la qualité d’enregistrement pour pouvoir envoyer la vidéo via un e-mail. Multimédia 64 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Utilisez la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Partager des photos Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme libellé. • Partage photos ChatON : envoyer une photo à un autre appareil via ChatON. • Viseur à distance : commander l’appareil photo à distance. Commander l’appareil photo à distance Paramétrez l’appareil comme un viseur afin de commander l’appareil photo à distance. Appuyez sur → → Viseur à distance, puis établissez une connexion Wi-Fi Direct entre cet appareil et l’appareil photo. Pour prendre une photo à distance en vous servant de l’appareil comme viseur, appuyez sur . Multimédia 65 Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur → . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. • Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mode focus : sélectionner un mode de mise au point. Auto focus est une mise au point automatique effectuée par l’appareil photo. Macro permet de faire une mise au point sur des sujets très proches, en gros plan. • Modes de mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés. • Balise de localisation : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. Activez cette fonction lorsque vous prenez des photos afin de créer des albums dans Story Album. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. • Éval. phot./vid. : paramétrer l’appareil pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos après les avoir prises. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. Multimédia 66 • Valeur d’exposition : modifier la valeur d’exposition. Cela détermine la quantité de lumière reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus élevée. • Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. • Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes vocales. • Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des tags contextuels. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les tags contexuels dans les applications Galerie et Story Album. • Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. • Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope. Raccourcis Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur → Modifier les paramètres rapides. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de l’écran. Galerie Utilisez cette application pour visionner des photos ou des vidéos. Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des images Lorsque vous lancez l’application, la Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en plein écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante. Multimédia 67 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Lire des vidéos Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur . Découper les segments d’une vidéo Sélectionnez une vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis enregistrez la vidéo. Modifier des photos En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Favoris : ajouter l’image aux favoris. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Photo frame. • Note photo : écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur . • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers. • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter l'image dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. Multimédia 68 • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Détails : afficher les détails d’une image. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Retoucher des images En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Editeur de photos ou Paper Artist. Mes photos favorites En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Favoris pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de favoris. Supprimer des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur . • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur . Partager des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez des images, puis appuyez sur pour les envoyer à des contacts. • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. Multimédia 69 Définir une image comme fond d’écran En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact. Ajouter des libellés de portraits Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié sur une image. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas. Utiliser les tags contextuels Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, localisation, date et nom de la personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image. Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez copier ou déplacer des fichiers d’un dossier à un autre. Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, appuyez sur OK, puis cochez les images ou les vidéos à intégrer au nouveau dossier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou sur Déplacer pour déplacer. Multimédia 70 Story Album Utilisez cette application pour créer votre propre album numérique et conserver les scènes de votre vie en disposant vos photos comme bon vous semble. Appuyez sur Story Album depuis la liste des applications. Créer un Story Album Créez des Story Albums en sélectionnant des images dans Galerie ou des images classées par informations de tags. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une option. Sélectionner des images de la Galerie. Sélectionner des images par les informations des balises. Créer des albums depuis la Galerie Appuyez sur Depuis la galerie, sélectionnez un dossier, sélectionnez des images, puis appuyez sur OK. Attribuez un titre à l’album, sélectionnez un thème et une photo de couverture, puis appuyez sur Créer un album. Multimédia 71 Créer des albums par marquage d'information Créez des albums en classant les photos selon certains critères, comme l’endroit où la photo a été prise, les sujets ou l’heure. Appuyez sur Par marquage d’information, puis paramétrez les options suivantes : • Emplacement : spécifiez une localisation. L’appareil classe les images selon leur localisation. Pour utiliser les balises de localisation, activez le paramètre de balise GPS dans Appareil photo avant de prendre des photos (p. 65). • Personnes : sélectionnez les personnes dans les images comportant un libellé de portrait. L’appareil classe les images prises avec ces personnes. Pour utiliser des libellés de personnes, ajoutez des libellés de portrait aux images dans l'application Galerie (p. 69). • Période : précisez une période de temps. L’appareil classe les images prises pendant la période de temps définie. Une fois le paramétrage terminé, appuyez sur Rechercher images. Attribuez un titre à l’album, sélectionnez un thème et une photo de couverture, puis appuyez sur Créer un album. Afficher un Story Album Sélectionnez un album. La photo de couverture apparaît sur la première page. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher les photos de l’album. Sur une page de l’album, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes. Les options disponibles varient selon la page. • Modifier le titre : renommer l’album. • Ajouter du contenu : ajouter davantage de contenus à la page actuelle. • Supprimer du contenu : supprimer du contenu de la page actuelle. • Modif. : modifier la disposition sur la page actuelle. • Modif. thème : modifier le thème de la mise en page. • Modifier image couverture : changer l’image de la couverture de l’album. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos de l’album ouvert. Multimédia 72 • Partager via : envoyer l’album à d’autres personnes. • Imprimer : imprimer l’album en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Commander un album photo : commander l'album en version imprimée. • Exporter album : exporter l’album vers un autre emplacement de stockage. • Supprimer la page : supprimer la page. Modifier des photos Appuyez sur la photo de la page d’un album. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Ajouter une légende. Envoyer l’image à d’autres personnes. Supprimer l’image. Appuyez sur , puis utilisez les options suivantes : • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama ou modifier les paramètres du diaporama. • Déf. comme couv. : définir l’image comme photo de couverture de l'album. • Pivoter gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Pivoter droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. Multimédia 73 Créer des albums avec des photos recommandées Lorsque vous prenez plusieurs photos à un endroit, l’appareil vous suggère de créer un nouvel album basé sur cet endroit. Cette fonction vous aide à créer facilement des albums photos pour des événements quotidiens ou lorsque vous voyagez. Définir votre ville de résidence Définissez votre ville de résidence pour permettre à l’appareil de reconnaître si vous êtes chez vous ou en voyage. L’appareil suggère de créer des albums par événement ou par voyage, selon votre localisation. Par exemple, lorsque vous prenez des photos en dehors de votre ville d’origine, l’appareil suggère de créer un album de voyage. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ville de résidence, sélectionnez une méthode de paramétrage, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Définir un nombre minimal de photos Appuyez sur → Paramètres, puis faites glisser le curseur situé près d’un type d’album vers la droite. Sélectionnez un type d’album, puis définissez le nombre minimal de photos. Lorsque vous prenez des photos qui répondent aux critères définis, l’appareil suggère de créer un album. L’appareil recommandera la création d’un Story Album si vous dépassez en un jour le nombre prédéfini de photos. Créer un album d’événement ou de voyage Appuyez sur → Suggestions. Sélectionnez un album, attribuez-lui un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Multimédia 74 Paper Artist Utilisez cette application pour faire de vos images de véritables illustrations avec des effets ou des cadres amusants. Appuyez sur Paper Artist depuis la liste des applications. Pour modifier une image, utilisez les outils artistiques. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Paper Pictures. Sélectionner une image existante. Partager l’image. Appliquer des effets à l’image. Dessiner avec un crayon. Appuyer pour modifier l’épaisseur du crayon. Prendre une photo. Dessiner avec un pinceau. Appuyer pour modifier l’épaisseur du pinceau. Enregistrer l’image. Appliquer des cadres à l’image. Effacer les dessins. Appuyer pour modifier la taille de la gomme. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Multimédia 75 Vidéo Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo. Appuyez sur Vidéo depuis la liste des applications. Évitez de verrouiller l’écran de l’appareil lorsque vous visionnez une vidéo DivX à la demande. Chaque fois que vous verrouillez l’écran pendant la lecture d’une vidéo DivX à la demande, le nombre de locations disponibles diminue. Lire des vidéos Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Modifier le format d’écran. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Redémarrer la vidéo en cours de lecture ou revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Régler le volume. Passer en mode d’écran flottant. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Rechercher d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la gauche. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la droite. Supprimer des vidéos Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Multimédia 76 Partager des vidéos Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez un mode de partage, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur OK. Utiliser le lecteur contextuel Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochez-les. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez le doigt appuyé dessus, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. YouTube Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube. Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Visionner une vidéo Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour visionner la vidéo correspondante. Pivotez l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la vidéo en mode Paysage. Partager une vidéo Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mettre une vidéo en ligne Appuyez sur → Vidéos ajoutées → , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Multimédia 77 Flipboard Utilisez cette application pour accéder à vos magazines personnalisés. Appuyez sur Flipboard depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour démarrer Flipboard, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche sur la page d’accueil, sélectionnez des thèmes d’actualité, puis appuyez sur Construis ton Flipboard. Sélectionnez un article à la une ou un thème, parcourez les pages Flipboard, puis sélectionnez un article à lire. 78 Boutiques d’applications et multimédia Play Store Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications et des jeux, gratuits ou payants, pouvant s’exécuter sur votre appareil. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. • Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. • Pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant d’autres sources, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sécurité → Sources inconnues depuis la liste des applications. Désinstaller des applications Désinstallez les applications téléchargées sur Play Store. Appuyez sur → Mes applications, sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des applications installées, puis appuyez sur DÉSINSTALLER. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 79 Samsung Apps Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications Samsung, gratuites ou payantes. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site apps.samsung.com. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur CATÉGORIES pour sélectionner une catégorie. Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de recherche. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Installer. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Game Hub Utilisez cette application pour accéder à des jeux. Appuyez sur Game Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner un jeu à télécharger depuis Samsung Apps. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 80 Music Hub Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique et acheter des morceaux ou des albums du catalogue Music Hub. Abonnez-vous au service premium Music Hub pour bénéficier de recommandations personnalisées, de diffusions continues illimitées, de stations de radio personnelles et d’un service de stockage sur le cloud pour l’ensemble de vos morceaux. Pour plus de détails, appuyez sur → Aide ou consultez le site Web de Music Hub. Appuyez sur Music Hub depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Certaines fonctions peuvent s’intituler différemment selon votre abonnement. • Selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur, certaines fonctions, dont les services d’écoute en continu, peuvent ne pas être disponibles. MA MUSIQUE Écoutez la musique enregistrées sur votre appareil ou sur le serveur de stockage hébergé sur le cloud. Votre musique est automatiquement synchronisée avec votre ordinateur. STORE Bénéficiez d’une diffusion de musique illimitée. Écoutez les morceaux du catalogue en continu ou téléchargez-les pour en profiter même sans couverture réseau. Ajoutez des morceaux de musique à vos listes de lecture et partagez-les avec vos amis. RADIOS Écoutez de la musique sur les stations de radio ou créez votre propre station. Vous pouvez personnaliser votre station en fonction de votre artiste préféré. Cette station diffusera les musiques similaires à celles composées par votre artiste préféré. Vous pouvez également recevoir des recommandations personnalisées depuis Music Hub. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 81 Play Livres Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des fichiers de livre. Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Films Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV. Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée sur le service Cloud de Google. Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Jeux Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des jeux et y jouer. Appuyez sur Play Jeux depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 82 Play Kiosque Utilisez cette application pour lire les articles les plus récents. Appuyez sur Play Kiosque depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Readers Hub Utilisez cette application pour télécharger et lire des livres électroniques. Appuyez sur Readers Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un livre. Pour télécharger des fichiers de livres, rendez-vous sur le Readers Hub Store. Video Hub Utilisez cette application pour accéder à des vidéos et les acheter. Appuyez sur Video Hub depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis sélectionnez une vidéo. 83 Utilitaires Mémo Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter ultérieurement. Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur , saisissez un mémo, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. Pour modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan, appuyez sur → Coul. Pour verrouiller le mémo afin que les autres utilisateurs ne puissent pas le consulter, appuyez sur → Verrouiller. Naviguer parmi les mémos Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo. Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur . Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur . Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur . Pour trier les mémos par date, appuyez sur → Trier par. Pour envoyer le texte sous formes de mémos à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager fichier texte via. Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour imprimer des mémos en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur → Imprimer. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Utilitaires 84 Pour importer des mémos depuis Google Docs, appuyez sur → Importer. Pour exporter des mémos vers un autre emplacement de stockage, appuyez sur → Exporter. Pour modifier les paramètres des mémos, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Afficher un mémo Appuyez sur la miniature du mémo pour l’ouvrir. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de mémos. Appuyez sur et utilisez les options suivantes : • Supprimer : supprimer le mémo. • Coul. : modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan. • Verrouiller : verrouiller le mémo afin que les autres ne puissent pas le consulter. • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Partager fichier texte via : envoyer du texte dans mémos à d’autres personnes. • Partager via : envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes. S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Créer un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Ajouter événement : entrer un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option. • Ajouter une tâche : entrer une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option. • Ajouter mémo : créer un mémo manuscrit à joindre à la date. Utilitaires 85 Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date. Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation. Appuyez ensuite sur Modifier détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné. Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans la zone Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts. Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement, appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la carte qui apparaît. Joignez une image. Appuyez sur Images, puis prenez une photo ou sélectionnez-en une parmi les images existantes. Utilitaires 86 Associer des mémos à une date Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une date pour la sélectionner et afficher le carnet de mémos. Synchroniser avec Google Agenda Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Google sous Comptes, sélectionnez un compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier. Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner → → Synchroniser depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher un événement ou une tâche synchronisé, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Affichage → Calendriers → Affichage, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis appuyez sur OK. Modifier le type de calendrier En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types de calendrier incluant le mois, la semaine, etc. Pour modifier le type de calendrier, vous pouvez rapprocher deux doigts sur l’écran. Par exemple, pour passer du calendrier mensuel au calendrier annuel, rapprochez deux doigts sur l’écran ; pour passer du calendrier annuel au calendrier mensuel, écartez-les. Utilitaires 87 Rechercher un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut de l’écran. Supprimer un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des événements, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Partager un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Connectez-vous à votre compte Dropbox. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Dropbox. Une fois la Dropbox activée, les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil sont automatiquement importées dans Dropbox. Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier. En mode affichage d’une image ou d’une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste des favoris. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Utilitaires 88 Cloud Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers ou sauvegarder vos paramètres et les données de vos applications avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Cloud. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync. Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarder ou Restaurer. Synchroniser avec la Dropbox Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications. Google Drive Utilisez cette application pour créer et modifier des documents et les partager avec d’autres personnes via le service de stockage Google Drive. Lorsque vous créez des documents ou téléchargez des fichiers dans Google Drive, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel Google Drive est installé. Accédez à vos fichiers sans transfert ou téléchargement. Appuyez sur Drive depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 89 POLARIS Office 5 Cette application permet de modifier des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur POLARIS Office 5 depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de certaines fonctions dépend du type de fichier. Créer un document. Afficher les documents favoris. Partager des documents avec d’autres personnes. Afficher les documents récents. Naviguer dans les dossiers. Naviguer par formats de document. Créer des documents Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un type de document. Utilisez la barre d’outil d’édition en haut de l’écran pour modifier le document. Pour finir, appuyez sur l’icône du document en haut à gauche de l’écran, appuyez sur Enregistrer, saisissez un nom de fichier, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel l’enregistrer, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. Utilitaires 90 Lire des documents Sélectionnez un fichier, ou appuyez sur Explorateur de fichiers, Type de formulaire ou Favoris, puis sélectionnez un fichier à ouvrir. Pour démarrer un diaporama, appuyez sur . Pour dessiner sur un document, appuyez sur . Pour rechercher un texte dans le document, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Document • Passer en mode Édition : ouvrir la barre d’outils d’édition. • Favori : ouvrir le volet des signets. Sélectionnez un libellé pour accéder aux signets. • Préférences : modifier les paramètres d’affichage. • Capture d’écran : effectuer une copie d’écran de la zone sélectionnée. • Afficher les informations : consulter les détails du document. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide pour utiliser POLARIS Office. Présentation • Passer en mode Édition : ouvrir la barre d’outils d’édition. • Mode diapositive simple : afficher les diapositives une par une. • Note diapositive : afficher les commentaires des diapositives. • Capture d’écran : effectuer une copie d’écran de la zone sélectionnée. • Afficher les informations : consulter les détails du document. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide pour utiliser POLARIS Office. Utilitaires 91 Feuille de calcul • Passer en mode Édition : ouvrir la barre d’outils d’édition. • Image figée : garder la rangée sélectionnée en place. • Capture d’écran : effectuer une copie d’écran de la zone sélectionnée. • Afficher les informations : consulter les détails du document. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide pour utiliser POLARIS Office. Texte • Lire tout : lire le document à l’aide de la fonction de synthèse vocale. • Capture d’écran : effectuer une copie d’écran de la zone sélectionnée. • Afficher les informations : consulter les détails du document. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide pour utiliser POLARIS Office. Alarme Utilisez cette application pour définir des heures de réveil et des alarmes pour les événements importants. Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications. Activer ou désactiver cette alarme. Utilitaires 92 Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d’activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. • Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous trouvez à l’endroit indiqué. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Supprimer une alarme Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Horloge mondiale Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de nombreuses grandes villes dans le monde. Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom d’une ville, puis appuyez sur . Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur Heure d’été. Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Utilitaires 93 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications. Faites pivoter l’appareil pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. S Translator Utilisez cette application pour traduire du texte dans d’autres langues. Appuyez sur S Translator depuis la liste des applications. Utiliser S Translator Définissez la langue source et la langue cible, saisissez le texte dans le champ de saisie, puis appuyez sur . Pour ajouter une combinaison linguistique à votre liste de favoris, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer une combinaison linguistique à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Démarrer une conversation S Translator Appuyez sur les touches en bas de l’écran pour communiquer avec d’autres personnes via la traduction parlée. Appuyez sur Parler dans votre langue, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil traduira ce que vous dites. Appuyez sur dans le champ de la langue cible pour laisser l’appareil lire à votre correspondant la traduction de ce que vous venez de dire. Appuyez sur Speak dans la langue de votre correspondant et laissez-le répondre dans sa langue. L’appareil traduira ce qu’il dit. Appuyez sur dans le champ de la langue source pour laisser l’appareil vous lire la traduction de ce que vient de dire votre correspondant. Utilitaires 94 S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander l’appareil vocalement afin d’envoyer un message, d’écrire un mémo, et bien plus encore. Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application n’est pas prise en charge dans certaines langues. Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales : • Ouvrir le lecteur MP3 • Lancer la calculatrice • Vérifier le calendrier Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale : • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits calmes. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Mode mains-libres Lorsque le mode mains-libres est activé, la synthèse vocale de l’appareil lit à voix haute le contenu des messages et des notifications, afin que vous puissiez utiliser l’appareil en mode mains-libres lorsque vous conduisez. Pour activer le mode mains-libres, dites « Mode mains-libres activé ». Activer vocalement l’appareil Lorsque l’écran est verrouillé, vous pouvez lancer S Voice par une commande vocale. Dites « Bonjour, Galaxy » à l’appareil pour lancer S Voice. Pour activer cette fonction, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Commande de réveil. Utilitaires 95 Utiliser des commandes de réveil sur l’écran verrouillé Sur l’écran verrouillé, vous pouvez utiliser différentes fonctions avec des commandes d’activation prédéfinies. Pour activer cette fonction, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case Commande de réveil. Appuyez sur Définir commande réveil, puis configurez les fonctions et les commandes vocales. Recherche Google Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans les applications et le contenu de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur , puis énoncer un mot-clé. Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de recherche. Étendre la recherche Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants. Google Now Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien plus encore. Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier les paramètres Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Google Now. Utilitaires 96 Recherche vocale Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement. Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Quand l’instruction Parlez maintenant apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression. Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Pour revenir au dossier supérieur, appuyez sur . Pour revenir au répertoire principal, appuyez sur . Dans un dossier, utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : •  : rechercher des fichiers. • : modifier le mode d’affichage. • : créer un dossier. • Date : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. Sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier en le cochant, puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : • : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • : partager des fichiers avec d'autres personnes. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Utilitaires 97 Téléchargements Utilisez cette application pour voir les fichiers téléchargés depuis des applications. Appuyez sur Téléchargements depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour afficher les fichiers téléchargés depuis Internet, appuyez sur Téléch. Internet pour afficher les fichiers téléchargés depuis d’autres applications, comme l’application Email, appuyez sur Autres télécharg. Sélectionnez un fichier et ouvrez-le dans l’application correspondante. Pour trier les fichiers par taille, appuyez sur Trier par taille. Pour trier les fichiers par date, appuyez sur Trier par date. TripAdvisor Utilisez cette application pour obtenir des informations de voyage, notamment sur vos destinations, vols ou hôtels. Vous pouvez également réserver une chambre d’hôtel et partager vos commentaires avec d’autres personnes. Appuyez sur TripAdvisor depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 98 Géolocalisation Maps Utilisez cette application pour repérer la position de votre appareil, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir un itinéraire. Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Rechercher des lieux Recherchez des lieux en saisissant une adresse ou un mot-clé. Une fois le lieu trouvé, sélectionnez-le afin d’afficher des informations détaillées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide. Obtenir un itinéraire Appuyez sur pour définir une adresse de départ et une adresse de destination, et choisir un mode de transport. L’appareil affiche l’itinéraire à suivre pour arriver à destination. 99 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité. Paramètres 100 Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d’expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Renommer le périphérique : définissez un nom Bluetooth pour l’appareil. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos de la fonction Bluetooth. Utilisation des données Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées. • Cycle utilisation données : indiquez la date à laquelle effectuer la vérification mensuelle des données. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Comptes. • Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles Wi-Fi afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Paramètres 101 Paramètres supplémentaires Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Impression Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud. VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Appareils à proximité • Nom de l’appareil : affichez le nom de l’appareil. • Contenu à partager : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Téléch. depuis autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Screen Mirroring Activez cette fonction pour partager votre écran avec d’autres personnes. Paramètres 102 Mode Blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Mode mains-libres Paramétrez l’appareil afin qu’il lise tout haut les contenus et spécifiez les applications à utiliser en mode mains-libres. Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. • Volume : réglez le niveau sonore de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements, tels que les messages entrants. • Sélections audibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Applications Samsung : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application. • Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Sortie audio : sélectionnez le format de sortie audio à utiliser lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à des périphériques HDMI. Certains appareils peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les paramètres de son Surround. • Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique. Paramètres 103 Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Fond d’écran : – Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. – Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. – Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et de l’écran de verrouillage. • Volet des raccourcis : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis. • Fenêtres multiples : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Mode d’écran : – Adapter l’affichage : utilisez ce mode pour optimiser l’affichage selon les paramètres de l’écran. – Dynamique : utilisez ce mode pour accentuer les tonalités de l’affichage. – Standard : utilisez ce mode pour obtenir un arrière-plan de qualité standard. – Cinéma : utilisez ce mode pour obtenir un arrière-plan sombre, comme dans une pièce peu éclairée. • Mode lecture : sélectionnez les applications qui utiliseront le mode lecture. En mode lecture, l’appareil protège vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Smart Screen : – Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque vous consultez l’écran. – Smart Rotation : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote selon l’orientation de votre visage. Paramètres 104 • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifier la taille de la police. • Durée de l’éclairage des touches : réglez la durée du rétroéclairage des touches. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Mode Éco. d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. • Performances du CPU : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources système de l’appareil. • Sortie d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir diminuer la luminosité de l’écran. • En savoir plus : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie. Paramètres 105 Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Applications par défaut Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications. • Accueil : sélectionnez un mode d’écran d’accueil par défaut. Position Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation. • Demandes de localisation récentes : affichez les applications qui requièrent votre position et la batterie consommée à cet effet. • Services de localisation : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Paramètres 106 Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Plusieurs widgets : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser l’utilisation des widgets sur l’écran verrouillé. • Widgets écran verrouill. : – Horloge ou msg personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher une horloge ou un message personnel sur l’écran verrouillé. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon votre sélection. Pour une horloge : – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. – Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître avec l’horloge. Pour un message personnel : – Modifier un message personnel : modifiez le message personnel. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. • Commande de réveil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse votre commande de réveil même lorsque l’écran est verrouillé. • Définir commande réveil : définissez une commande de réveil permettant de lancer l’application S Voice ou d’exécuter une fonction spécifique. Paramètres 107 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – Enregistrement du compte : affichez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : pour des raisons de sécurité, l’appareil masque par défaut vos mots de passe. Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : choisissez d’installer des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Dans le cas contraire, vous pourrez télécharger des applications uniquement depuis Play Store. • Vérifier les applications : autorisez Google à vérifier que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. Paramètres 108 Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Langues de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace ou un signe de ponctuation. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. Paramètres 109 • Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. • Contrôle du curseur : activer ou désactivez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Outil reconnais. vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale. Recherche vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • Utiliser données localis. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise vos informations de localisation lors de la recherche vocale. Paramètres 110 • Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide de la fonction S Voice. • A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Commande de réveil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. • Evénements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur. • Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. • Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. • Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter pour l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il commence la reconnaissance vocale dès que vous prononcez la commande de réactivation lors de l’utilisation de l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil qu'il autoriser la recherche vocale lorsqu’un casque Bluetooth est connecté. Paramètres 111 Options synthèse vocale • Moteur TTS favori : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil. Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Paramètres 112 Ajouter compte Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Mouvement Activez la fonction de détection des mouvements et modifiez les paramètres permettant de contrôler la détection de mouvement de votre appareil. • Balayer pour capturer : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Recouvrir pour désactiver le son : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. • En savoir plus : affichez le didacticiel de contrôle des mouvements de main. Contrôle vocal Modifiez les paramètres des commandes vocales. Accessoires Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. • Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez à une station d’accueil ou l’en déconnectez. • Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté. • Sortie audio : sélectionnez le format de sortie audio à utiliser lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à des périphériques HDMI. Certains appareils peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les paramètres de son Surround. Paramètres 113 Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Date et heure automatiques : mettez automatiquement à jour l’heure et la date lorsque vous changez de fuseau horaire. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Accessibilité Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité à l’appareil. • Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Énoncer mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute. • Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité dans le menu rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Gestes d’agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière à l’aide des doigts. • Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité. Paramètres 114 • Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer Talkback lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran. • Options synthèse vocale : – Moteur TTS favori : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. – État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. • Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette. • Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette. • Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil. • Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Sous-titres Samsung (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Samsung et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. À propos de l’appareil Accédez aux informations d’aide de votre appareil et mettez à jour sa version logicielle. Paramètres Google Utilisez cette application pour configurer certaines fonctions proposées par Google. Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications. 115 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Il est possible que la batterie ne soit pas correctement installée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez la batterie. Dépannage 116 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications ou réinsérer la batterie et réinitialiser votre appareil pour qu’il retrouve un fonctionnement correct. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt appuyée pendant 8 à 10 secondes afin de le redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 117 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez ou remplacez la batterie. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctionnalités, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable dont la charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 118 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Si un format de fichier n’est pas pris en charge, tel que DivX ou AC3, installez une application le prenant en charge. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 119 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 120 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. www.samsung.com French. 08/2014. Rev.1.0 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T230 2 À propos de ce mode d’emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 5 Table des matières Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil 8 Touches 9 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 12 Insérer une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Manipuler l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 15 Régler le volume 15 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 16 Icônes d’informations 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres 26 Notifications 27 Écran d’accueil 29 Liste des applications 31 Utiliser les applications 31 Aide 32 Saisir du texte 34 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi 35 Créer un compte 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs 36 Transférer des fichiers 37 Protéger l’appareil 38 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 40 Contacts 44 Email 46 Google Mail 48 Hangouts 48 Google+ 49 Google+ Photos Web et réseau 50 Internet 51 Chrome 52 Bluetooth Multimédia 54 Musique 56 Appareil photo 61 Galerie 65 Vidéo 66 YouTube Table des matières 6 Géolocalisation 85 Maps Paramètres 86 Accéder au menu des paramètres 86 Connexions 89 Appareil 94 Contrôle 97 Général 101 Paramètres Google Dépannage Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 67 Play Store 68 Samsung Apps 68 Play Livres 69 Play Films 69 Play Musique 69 Play Jeux 69 Play Kiosque Utilitaires 70 Mémo 71 S Planner 73 Mode Enfant 74 Dropbox 74 Cloud 75 Google Drive 75 Hancom Office Viewer 78 Alarme 79 Horloge mondiale 80 Calculatrice 80 S Voice 81 Recherche Google 82 Recherche vocale 82 Mes fichiers 7 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Applications récentes Touche Accueil Écran tactile Objectif avant Connecteur à fonctions Touche Retour multiples Touche de volume Compartiment pour carte mémoire Microphone Touche Marche/Arrêt Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Démarrage 8 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran tactile s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 9 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 10 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Démarrage 11 Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Démarrage 12 Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Insérer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte apparaît dans le dossier SD card du menu Mes fichiers. Démarrage 13 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment. 3 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Démarrage 14 Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Démarrage 15 Manipuler l’appareil Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil alors que l’écran est désactivé, appuyez ensuite sur l’écran, puis faites-y glisser votre doigt. Régler le volume Pour régler le volume de la musique ou des vidéos, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. Activer le profil Discret Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Maintenez la touche de volume Bas enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé. • Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet. • Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son. 16 Fonctions de base Icônes d’informations Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Fonction Écran intelligent activée Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. Mouvements Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Maintenir appuyé Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelle, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et faites-le glisser sur l’écran. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Pincer Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples. Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contrôle → Mouvement de paume, puis faites glisser le curseur Mouvement de paume vers la droite. Si l’appareil est soumis à des secousses ou à des chocs excessifs, cela peut entraîner un comportement imprévu. Veillez à contrôler vos gestes. Pivoter l’écran De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation. Pour empêcher l’écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez l’option Rotation écran. • Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. • Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple, pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage. Fonctions de base 21 Balayer Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Recouvrir Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu multimédia. Fonctions de base 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être exécutées. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite. Utiliser un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter des applications sur un écran partagé. Lancer des applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres 1 Placez votre doigt sur le côté droit de l'écran et faites-le glisser vers le milieu de l’écran. Vous pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur . Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté droit de l’écran. Volet Multi-fenêtres Fonctions de base 23 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faitesla glisser vers l’écran. Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Fonctions de base 24 Partager du contenu entre applications Vous pouvez facilement partager du contenu entre des applications comme Email et Internet par un mouvement de glisser-déposer. Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction. 1 Lancez les applications Email et Internet sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. Accéder aux options Multi-fenêtres 2 Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application, puis appuyez sur . Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application pour accéder aux options suivantes : • : passer d’une application Fenêtres multiples à l’autre. • : partager facilement des éléments comme des images, du texte ou des liens entre les fenêtres d'application en réalisant un mouvement de glisser-déposer. • : agrandir la fenêtre. • : fermer l’application. Fonctions de base 25 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre Internet et faites-le glisser vers un emplacement dans la fenêtre E-mail. Fonctions de base 26 Notifications Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet, faites-le glisser de bas en haut. Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet des raccourcis. Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas, puis appuyez sur pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. • Position : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Son : activer ou désactiver le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth. • Fenêtres multiples : activer ou désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications. • Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay. • Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie. • Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Blocage. • Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne. La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour redisposer les options dans le volet des raccourcis, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur → , puis maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 27 Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil Ajouter une icône d’application Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis faites-la glisser sur l’aperçu d’un volet. Déplacer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément. Fonctions de base 28 Organiser les volets de widgets Ajouter un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, puis appuyez sur . Déplacer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez un des éléments suivants : • Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez téléchargées depuis Internet. • Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. • Photos : images de l'application Google Photos. • Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. Sélectionnez une image, redimensionnez le cadre si nécessaire, puis définissez-la comme fond d’écran. Fonctions de base 29 Utiliser les widgets Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des widgets sur l’écran d’accueil. • Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Placezle à l’endroit souhaité, redimensionnez-le en étirant son cadre, puis, le cas échéant, appuyez à un endroit quelconque de l’écran pour valider le nouvel emplacement du widget. Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les applications Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode d’affichage Grille personnalisable. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Fonctions de base 30 Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l'option Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Sauveg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle configuration. Installer des applications Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des applications. Désinstaller des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désinstaller. Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil. Désactiver des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désactiver. Pour activer de nouveau des applications depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Afficher les applications désactivées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. • Les applications téléchargées et certaines des applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil ne peuvent pas être désactivées. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, les applications désactivées disparaissent de la liste des applications, mais restent enregistrées dans l’appareil. Fonctions de base 31 Utiliser les applications Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet. Ouvrir une application Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Certaines applications sont regroupées dans des dossiers. Appuyez sur un dossier, puis sur une application pour l’ouvrir. Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées Appuyer sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Fermer une application Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et optimiser les performances de l’appareil. Appuyez sur → Gest. tâches, puis sur Fin à côté de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur → Tout fermer. Aide Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer des paramètres importants. Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez une catégorie. Pour trier les catégories par ordre alphabétique, appuyez sur . Pour rechercher des mots-clés, appuyez sur . Fonctions de base 32 Saisir du texte Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Utiliser le clavier Samsung Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Accéder aux paramètres du clavier Samsung. Insérer un espace. Saisir des majuscules. Ajouter un élément du presse-papier. Mots-clés suggérés Saisir des majuscules Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier le type de clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant. Sur le clavier flottant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 33 Modifier la langue du clavier Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser la barre d’espace vers la gauche ou la droite pour modifier la langue du clavier. Écrire de façon manuscrite Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , appuyez ensuite sur , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide du doigt. Les mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion. Utilisez les gestes de saisie manuscrite pour effectuer des opérations, comme la modification ou la suppression de caractères, et l’insertion d’espaces. Pour afficher les didacticiels, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur → Aide → Utiliser les gestes de saisie manuscrite. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Dicter du texte Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que vous venez de dire. Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît. Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue actuellement prise en charge. Fonctions de base 34 Copier et coller du texte Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, placez le curseur à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte, puis appuyez sur → Coller. Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 86). Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet. Activer ou désactiver un réseau Wi-Fi Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite. Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible. Fonctions de base 35 Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier. Créer un compte Les applications Google, comme Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil. Ajouter des comptes Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes Google sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, sélectionnez un nom de compte sous l’option MES COMPTES, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer le compte. Fonctions de base 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs Configurez des profils utilisateurs, puis sélectionnez-en un lorsque vous déverrouillez l’appareil pour utiliser des paramètres personnalisés. En configurant plusieurs profils utilisateurs, plusieurs utilisateurs peuvent partager l’appareil sans affecter les paramètres personnels des autres, tels que les comptes de messagerie électronique ou les préférences de fond d’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Utilisateurs → → OK, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un nouveau profil utilisateur. Pour accéder à l’appareil avec un profil utilisateur, sélectionnez un profil en haut à droite de l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Transférer des fichiers Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. Fonctions de base 37 Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Protéger l’appareil Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Déverrouillage par modèle Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Modèle. Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Fonctions de base 38 Déverrouillage par code PIN Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Code PIN. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouillage par mot de passe Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Mot de passe. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouiller l’appareil Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le code ou dessinez le modèle de déverrouillage. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble de USB. • Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Fonctions de base 39 Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant. 40 Communication Contacts Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses e-mail, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications. Gérer les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Créer un contact Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations d’un contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. Modifier un contact Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer un contact Appuyez sur . Communication 41 Rechercher des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Afficher les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle les contacts doivent être affichés. Synchroniser des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google. Les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône . Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung. Les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône . Communication 42 Importer et exporter des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Importer des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation. Exporter des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’exportation. Partager des contacts Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Plusieurs contacts, sélectionnez les contacts à partager, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Contacts favoris Appuyez sur Favoris. Appuyez sur pour ajouter des contacts à vos favoris. Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris. • Affichage Liste / Affichage Grille : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Communication 43 Groupes de contacts Appuyez sur Groupes. Créer un groupe Appuyez sur , configurez les détails du groupe, ajoutez des contacts, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Gérer les groupes Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des groupes : sélectionner des groupes auxquels vous avez ajouté des contacts, puis appuyer sur OK. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut. • Modifier le groupe : modifier les paramètres du groupe. • Ajouter membre : ajouter des membres au groupe. • Supprimer du groupe : retirer un membre du groupe. • Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe. • Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis appuyez sur OK. Communication 44 Carte de visite Appuyez sur Contacts. Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts. En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur, sélectionnez la carte de visite, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier. Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Contact sélectionné, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Email Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails. Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications. Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur  ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Envoyer des e-mails Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans votre liste de contacts, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur +Moi pour vous ajouter comme destinataire. Pour ajouter davantage de destinataires, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc. Appuyez sur → pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations de localisation et bien plus encore. Communication 45 Envoyer des e-mails programmés Lorsque vous rédigez un e-mail, appuyez sur → Envoi programmé. Cochez la case Envoi programmé, définissez une heure et une date, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à l’heure et à la date indiquées. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que l’heure et la date soient incorrectes. Lire des e-mails Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Supprimer le message. Rédiger un message. Répondre au message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir ou sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer. Communication 46 Google Mail Utilisez cette application pour accéder directement au service Google Mail. Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Envoyer des e-mails Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le brouillon. Pour joindre des photos, des vidéos, de la musique et d’autres fichiers, appuyez sur → Joindre un fichier. Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer. Appuyez sur → Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de Google Mail. Appuyez sur → Envoyer des commentaires pour indiquer votre opinion sur le développement de l’application. Appuyez sur → Aide pour accéder aux informations d’aide à propos de Google Mail. Communication 47 Lire des e-mails Afficher la pièce jointe. Supprimer le message. Archiver le message. Répondre au message. Identifier le message comme non lu. Déplacer le message vers une autre messagerie. Répondre à tous les destinataires ou imprimer le message. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Libellés Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les messages du libellé Boîte de réception. Appuyez sur → Actualiser pour récupérer manuellement les nouveaux messages. Pour afficher des messages portant d’autres libellés, appuyez sur . Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur → Modifier les libellés, puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer. Communication 48 Hangouts Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec vos amis. Appuyez sur Hangouts depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste ou saisissez des critères de recherche et sélectionnez un ami dans les résultats pour commencer à discuter. Google+ Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre entourage via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Appuyez sur Tous pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis. Communication 49 Google+ Photos Utilisez cette application pour afficher et partager des images ou des vidéos via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Photos depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • TOUT : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos prises ou téléchargées sur l’appareil. • SÉLECTION : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos regroupées par date ou par album. Appuyez sur pour afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos du groupe. Sélectionnez ensuite une photo ou une vidéo. En mode affichage d'une photo ou d'une vidéo, utilisez l’une des icônes suivantes : • : modifier la photo ou la vidéo. • : partager la photo ou la vidéo avec d’autres personnes. • : supprimer la photo ou la vidéo. 50 Web et réseau Internet Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur Internet. Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Appuyez sur pour accéder à des options complémentaires lors de l’affichage d’une page Web. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près de l’adresse Web. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur → , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Web et réseau 51 Historique Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur . Pages enregistrées Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Pages enreg. Liens Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d’une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page, l’enregistrer ou le copier. Pour afficher les liens enregistrés, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mes fichiers → Historique des téléchargements. Partager des pages Web Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis appuyez sur Partager via. Chrome Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Web et réseau 52 Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris, puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google. Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils. Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir. Pour afficher les favoris, appuyez sur FAVORIS. Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour la copie pirate de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite. Web et réseau 53 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth → Analyser pour afficher la liste des appareils détectés. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux appareils pour confirmer l’opération. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez l’application Galerie, sélectionnez une image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie des données, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth émanant de cet autre appareil. Les fichiers reçus sont enregistrés dans le dossier Download. Si vous recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à votre liste de contacts. 54 Multimédia Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique. Appuyez sur Musique depuis la liste des applications. Écouter de la musique Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour afficher le lecteur MP3 en plein écran. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Modifier le mode de répétition. Redémarrer le morceau en cours de lecture ou revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Multimédia 55 Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Volume intelligent. Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives. Volume intelligent peut ne pas être activée pour certains fichiers. Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée. Définir un morceau comme sonnerie d’alarme Pour utiliser le morceau de musique en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur → Définir comme tonalité d’alarme. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Appuyez sur Listes lect., puis sur → Créer une liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez les morceaux à inclure dans la liste de lecture, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Aj. liste lecture. Écouter de la musique par catégorie Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de lecture. Appuyez sur → Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran. Multimédia 56 Appareil photo Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour visionner les photos et des vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 61). Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Prendre des photos Prendre une photo Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . Afficher le mode en cours. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Afficher davantage d’options. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Multimédia 57 Mode de capture Il existe plusieurs effets de photo. Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. • Auto : ce mode permet à l’appareil photo d’évaluer l’environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. • Beauté : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images plus douces. • Son & prise : ce mode permet de prendre une photo et d'enregistrer le son de la scène. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu audio après la prise de vue. Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. • Panorama : ce mode permet de prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : – Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. – Maintenez l’objectif, de l’appareil photo dans le cadre de guidage. – Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. • Sports : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de sujets en action. • Nuit : ce mode permet de prendre des photos dans l’obscurité. Photos panoramiques Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés. Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama. Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Lorsque les deux cadres de prise de vue sont alignés, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur . Si l’objectif n’est plus aligné, la prise de vue s’interrompt. Multimédia 58 Appliquer des effets de filtre Utilisez les effets de filtre pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos uniques. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un effet de filtre. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode sélectionné. Enregistrer des vidéos Enregistrer une vidéo Faites glisser le curseur vers l’icône de caméscope, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . La mise au point manuelle n’est pas disponible en mode caméscope. Mode d’enregistrement Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Afficher davantage d’options. Afficher le mode en cours. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Multimédia 59 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Utilisez la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Partager des photos Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme libellé. Multimédia 60 Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. • Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Balise de localisation : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Luminosité : modifier la luminosité. Multimédia 61 • Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. • Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des balises contextuelles. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les tags contexuels dans la Galerie. • Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez l’objectif avant. • Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide pour utiliser l’appareil photo. Raccourcis Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur et maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de raccourci. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de l’écran. Galerie Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des photos ou des vidéos. Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des images Lorsque vous lancez l’application, la Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en plein écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante. Multimédia 62 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Lire des vidéos Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur . Découper les segments d’une vidéo Sélectionnez une vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis enregistrez la vidéo. Modifier des photos En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Favoris : ajouter à votre liste de favoris. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Photo frame. • Note photo : écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur . • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers. Multimédia 63 • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Détails : afficher les détails d’une image. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Mes photos favorites En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Favoris pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de favoris. Supprimer des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur . • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur . Partager des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur pour l'envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. Multimédia 64 Définir une image comme fond d’écran En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact. Libellés de portraits En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas. Utiliser les tags contextuels Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, localisation, date et nom de la personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image. Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez copier ou déplacer des fichiers d’un dossier à un autre. Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, appuyez sur OK, puis cochez les images ou les vidéos à intégrer au nouveau dossier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou sur Déplacer pour déplacer. Multimédia 65 Vidéo Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo. Appuyez sur Vidéo depuis la liste des applications. Lire des vidéos Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la gauche. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Redémarrer la vidéo en cours de lecture ou revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Régler le volume. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Passer en mode d’écran flottant. Modifier le format d’écran. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la droite. Supprimer des vidéos Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Multimédia 66 Partager des vidéos Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur OK, puis choisissez une méthode de partage. Utiliser le lecteur contextuel Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochezles. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. YouTube Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube. Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Visionner des vidéos Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour visionner la vidéo correspondante. Appuyez sur l’écran, puis sur et faites pivoter ensuite l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la vidéo en plein écran. Partager une vidéo Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mettre une vidéo en ligne Appuyez sur → Vidéos ajoutées → , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la vidéo, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. 67 Boutiques d’applications et multimédia Play Store Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications et des jeux, gratuits ou payants, pouvant s’exécuter sur votre appareil. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Désinstaller des applications Désinstallez les applications téléchargées sur Play Store. Appuyez sur → Mes applications, sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des applications installées, puis appuyez sur DÉSINSTALLER. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 68 Samsung Apps Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications Samsung, gratuites ou payantes. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site apps.samsung.com. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur CATÉGORIES pour sélectionner une catégorie. Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de recherche. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Gratuit. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Play Livres Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des fichiers de livre. Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 69 Play Films Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV. Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée sur le service Cloud de Google. Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Jeux Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des jeux et y jouer. Appuyez sur Play Jeux depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Kiosque Utilisez cette application pour lire les articles les plus récents. Appuyez sur Play Kiosque depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 70 Utilitaires Mémo Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter ultérieurement. Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications. Ajouter et gérer des catégories Créez des catégories afin de trier et gérer vos mémos. Pour ajouter une catégorie, appuyez sur → Ajouter une catégorie, saisissez le nom d’une catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour supprimer une catégorie, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis sur près de la catégorie concernée. Pour renommer une catégorie, sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur → Renommer une catégorie, nommez la catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier l’ordre des catégories, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis appuyez sur près de la catégorie concernée et faite-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas, vers une nouvelle position. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lors de la rédaction d’un mémo, utilisez les options suivantes : • : créer ou définir une catégorie. • : insérer des images. • : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer. Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Enreg. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur le contenu du mémo. Utilitaires 71 Naviguer parmi les mémos Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un mémo, puis appuyez sur . Pour imprimer les mémos en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Afficher un mémo Appuyez sur la miniature d’un mémo pour l’ouvrir. Pour supprimer le mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Pour imprimer le mémo en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Créer un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Événement : saisir un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option. • Tâche : saisir une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option. Utilitaires 72 Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date. Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation. Appuyez ensuite sur Modif. détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné. Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans la zone Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts. Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement, appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la carte qui apparaît. Synchroniser avec Google Agenda Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Google sous Mes comptes, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier. Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner → → Synchroniser depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches synchronisés, appuyez sur → Calendriers, puis cochez le compte Google. Utilitaires 73 Modifier le type de calendrier En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types de calendrier incluant l’année, le mois, la semaine, etc. Rechercher un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut de l’écran. Supprimer un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, puis appuyez sur → Supprimer. Partager un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mode Enfant Utilisez ce widget pour offrir à vos enfants un environnement ludique et sécurisé en les empêchant d’accéder à certaines applications ou certains contenus. Avant d’utiliser ce widget, vous devez le télécharger et l’installer. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Mode Enfant → Installer. Une fois installé, le widget apparaît sur l’écran d’accueil et dans la liste des applications. Pour démarrer le mode Enfants, appuyez sur Mode Enfant depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Lorsque vous lancez ce widget pour la première fois, appuyez sur Définir un code PIN au bas de l’écran. Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l’écran. • Si le widget Mode Enfant est accidentellement désinstallé, vous pouvez le réinstaller. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Widgets, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le widget Mode Enfant. Faites glisser le widget sur l’écran d’accueil et appuyez sur Mode Enfant pour le réinstaller. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 74 Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Connectez-vous à votre compte Dropbox. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Dropbox. Une fois la Dropbox activée, appuyez sur Activer Chargements appareil photo pour télécharger automatiquement sur Dropbox les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo de l’appareil. Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier. En mode affichage d’une image ou d’une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste des favoris. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Pour afficher les notifications, appuyez sur . Cloud Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Cloud. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync. Utilitaires 75 Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarder ou Restaurer. Synchroniser avec la Dropbox Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications. Google Drive Utilisez cette application pour créer et modifier des documents et les partager avec d’autres personnes via le service de stockage Google Drive. Lorsque vous créez des documents ou téléchargez des fichiers dans Google Drive, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel Google Drive est installé. Accédez à vos fichiers sans transfert ou téléchargement. Appuyez sur Drive depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Hancom Office Viewer Cette application permet de consulter des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 76 Rechercher des documents Appuyez sur Ouvrir pour parcourir un document. Lorsque vous parcourez un document, utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : créer un dossier. • : récupérer de nouveaux documents. • : trier des documents et des dossiers. • : modifier le mode d’affichage. • : sélectionner des documents ou des dossiers. Pour rechercher des documents récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Documents récents. Lire des documents Appuyez sur un document dans Documents récents ou dans un dossier. Appuyez sur ou sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Traitement de texte • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 77 Présentation • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la première page. • À partir de la diapositive active : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la page en cours. • Mode Présentateur : afficher les outils de présentation sur l’appareil lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un moniteur externe. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Feuille de calcul • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques. • Afficher les formules : afficher les formules à l’intérieur des cellules à la place des résultats. • Figer les volets : garder la ligne sélectionnée en place. • Quadrillage : afficher ou masquer les grilles de ligne. • Afficher tous les commentaires : afficher ou masquer des mémos sur le document. • Zone d’impression : sélectionner une zone à imprimer. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 78 PDF • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Propriétés : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Masquer les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document. • Défilement vertical / Affichage en continu / Défilement horizontal : modifier le mode d’affichage. • Mode lecture : afficher le contenu du document uniquement, sans les marges. • Atteindre la page : accéder à une page indiquée. • Signets : afficher des signets sur le document. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Alarme Utilisez cette application pour définir des alarmes pour les événements importants. Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications. Activer ou désactiver cette alarme. Utilitaires 79 Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d’activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. • Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous trouvez à l’endroit indiqué. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK. Horloge mondiale Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de nombreuses grandes villes dans le monde. Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez une horloge, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Utilitaires 80 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander vocalement l’appareil pour qu’il exécute différentes fonctions. Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application n’est pas prise en charge dans certaines langues. Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales : • Ouvrir le lecteur MP3 • Lancer la calculatrice • Vérifier le calendrier Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale : • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits tranquilles. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Utilitaires 81 Recherche Google Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans les applications et le contenu de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur , puis énoncer un mot-clé. Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de recherche. Étendre la recherche Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants. Google Now Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien plus encore. Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier les paramètres de Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres, puis faites glisser le curseur Google Now vers la gauche ou la droite. Utilitaires 82 Recherche vocale Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement. Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Quand l’instruction Parlez maintenant apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression. Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Visionner des fichiers Les fichiers enregistrés dans l’appareil sont triés par critères. Depuis le volet gauche de l’écran, sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • Date : afficher les fichiers regroupés par date. • Dossiers Favoris : afficher les raccourcis vers les dossiers. • Dossiers : afficher les fichiers enregistrés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire, ainsi que les raccourcis vers les serveurs FTP. • Catégories : afficher les fichiers triés selon leurs types. • Applications : afficher les fichiers enregistrés ou créés dans des applications spécifiques. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis un fichier ou un dossier à ouvrir. Utilitaires 83 Sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers. • Trier par : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. • Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers. Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier, puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : envoyer des fichiers à d’autres contacts ou les partager. • : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • → Accéder au dossier : accéder au dossier où se trouve le fichier sélectionné. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • → Zip : compresser des fichiers ou des dossiers pour créer un fichier zip. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Rechercher un fichier Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un critère de recherche. Afficher les informations de mémoire Appuyez sur pour afficher les informations de mémoire relatives à l’appareil et à la carte mémoire. Utilitaires 84 Modifier le mode d’affichage Appuyez sur pour modifier le mode d’affichage. Créer un dossier Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter des raccourcis à des dossiers Ajoutez un raccourci aux dossiers fréquemment utilisés dans Dossiers Favoris. Sélectionnez un dossier et appuyez sur → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris. Ajouter des raccourcis de serveur FTP à l’appareil Ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. Appuyez sur → Ajouter FTP, saisissez les informations sur le serveur FTP, puis appuyez sur OK. 85 Géolocalisation Maps Utilisez cette application pour repérer la position de votre appareil, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir un itinéraire. Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Rechercher des lieux Recherchez des lieux en saisissant une adresse ou un mot-clé. Une fois le lieu trouvé, sélectionnez-le afin d’afficher des informations détaillées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide. Obtenir un itinéraire Appuyez sur pour définir une adresse de départ et une adresse de destination, et choisir un mode de transport. L’appareil affiche l’itinéraire à suivre pour arriver à destination. 86 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Connexions Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres 87 Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité. Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d'expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Renommer le périphérique : changez le nom de l’appareil. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Bluetooth. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Paramètres 88 Utilisation des données Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées. • Cycle d’util. des données : indiquez la date à laquelle effectuer la vérification mensuelle des données. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Général → Comptes. • Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles Wi-Fi afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Position Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation. • DEMANDES DE LOCALISATION RÉCENTES : affichez les applications qui requièrent votre position et la batterie qu'elles consomment. • SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Plus de réseaux Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux. Impression Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud. Paramètres 89 VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Appareils à proximité • NOM DE L’APPAREIL : affichez le nom de l’appareil. • Contenus partagés : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Téléch. depuis autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Appareil Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. • Volume : réglez le volume de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les notifications, telles que les messages entrants. • Sélections audibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application. • Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique. Paramètres 90 Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Fenêtres multiples Activez la fonction Multi-fenêtres pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Ouvrir en vue Multi-fenêtre : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il active la fonction Fenêtres multiples lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers dans Mes fichiers ou Vidéo. De même, l’appareil désactive cette fonction lorsque vous affichez les pièces jointes des messages. Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Options du widget Horloge : configurez les paramètres pour le widget horloge. – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Paramètres 91 • Message personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour afficher un message personnel sur l’écran verrouillé. – Modifier un massage personnel : modifiez le message personnel. • Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître sur l'écran verrouillé. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. Fond d’écran Modifiez les paramètres du fond d’écran. • Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. • Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. • Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et de l’écran de verrouillage. Police Modifiez les paramètres de la police. • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. Volet des raccourcis Personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis. • Luminosité et volume : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les barres de réglage de la luminosité et du volume dans le volet des raccourcis. • Applications recommandées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la liste des applications recommandées dans le volet des raccourcis en fonction de vos actions, par exemple lorsque vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil. • Déf. bout. config. rapide : réorganisez les touches de paramétrage rapide dans le volet des raccourcis. Paramètres 92 Accessibilité Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité à l’appareil. • Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Énoncer les mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute. • Mode appui unique : paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. • Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité ou TalkBack dans le menu rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. • Gérer l’accessibilité : exportez ou importez les paramètres d’accessibilité afin de les partager avec d’autres appareils. – Exporter : exportez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Mise à jour : importez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Partager via : envoyez le fichier des paramètres d’accessibilité à d’autres personnes. • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Gestes d’agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière à l’aide des doigts. • Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité. • Réglage des couleurs : définissez une zone de l’écran dans laquelle la saisie tactile est inopérante. • Rappel de notification : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne lorsque vous avez des notifications et définissez un intervalle pour la répétition de l’alerte. • Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer TalkBack lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran. Paramètres 93 • Options synthèse vocale : – MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. – État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. • Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette. • Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette. • Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil. • Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Sous-titres Samsung (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Samsung et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Menu assistant : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher l’icône d’assistance qui vous permettra d’accéder aux fonctions prises en charge par les touches externes ou les options du volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez également modifier le menu de l’icône de raccourci. – Main dominante : sélectionnez la main gauche ou droite pour une utilisation aisée du menu d’assistance. – Modif. : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant sur le menu d’assistance. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Contrôle interaction : activez le mode Contrôle par interaction afin d’éviter que l'appareil réagisse aux saisies malencontreuses qui pourraient se produire dans une application. Mode Blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Paramètres 94 Contrôle Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace ou un signe de ponctuation. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. • Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. Paramètres 95 • Contrôle du curseur : activez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Outil reconnais. vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale. Recherche vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • Réveil vocal : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. Paramètres 96 • Événements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements manqués lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur. • Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. • Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. • Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter pour l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance vocale lorsque vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la recherche vocale avec un casque Bluetooth lorsque ce dernier est connecté à l’appareil. Options synthèse vocale • MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. Paramètres 97 Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil. Mouvement de paume Activez la fonction des mouvements de la main pour contrôler l’appareil par un simple contact avec l’écran tactile. • Capture d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Muet/Pause : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. Smart Screen • Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque vous consultez l’écran. Général Comptes Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Paramètres 98 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Accessoires Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. • Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez à une station d’accueil ou l’en déconnectez. • Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté. Paramètres 99 Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Applications par défaut Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications. Utilisateurs Paramétrez et gérez les profils utilisateurs pour des réglages personnalisés. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Mode Éco. d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. • Performances du CPU : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources système de l’appareil. • Sortie d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir diminuer la luminosité de l’écran. • En savoir plus : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Paramètres 100 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – ENREGISTREMENT DU COMPTE : enregistrez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : parametrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant de sources inconnues. • Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour permettre à Google de vérifier que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. Paramètres 101 • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. À propos de l’appareil Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le logiciel de l’appareil. Paramètres Google Utilisez cette application pour configurer certaines fonctions proposées par Google. Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications. 102 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, il est possible qu’elle n’ait pas été correctement insérée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez-la. Dépannage 103 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications, ou éteindre l’appareil et le rallumer. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 secondes afin de le redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 104 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctionnalités, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable et sa charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 105 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 106 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 107 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. www.samsung.com French. 07/2014. Rev.1.1 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Présentation de l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Marche/ Arrêt Touche de volume Touche Accueil Touche Retour Touche Applications récentes Charger la batterie Avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois, vous devez charger la batterie. • L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Élimination correcte Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur l’appareil et la mise au rebut de la batterie, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Ce symbole apposé sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. Ce symbole apposé sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Consignes de sécurité Afin de prévenir toute blessure, incendie ou explosion, veuillez prendre connaissance de toutes les consignes de sécurité avant d’utiliser l’appareil et respectez-les scrupuleusement. Pour afficher la totalité des informations de sécurité, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Avertissement • Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des fournitures homologué(e)s. • Évitez de heurter ou d’endommager votre appareil. • Évitez que le connecteur à fonction multiple et les bornes de la batterie n’entrent en contact avec des éléments conducteurs, tels que du métal ou des liquides. • N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser votre appareil à des températures comprises entre 5 °C et 35 °C. • Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine ou de conteneurs à haute pression. • Ne touchez pas l’appareil avec des mains humides. De même, n’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des environnements humides, tels que des toilettes, ou lors d’activités aquatiques, telles que la nage. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil en extérieur pendant un orage. • Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule. Consulter le mode d'emploi Sur votre appareil, ouvrez le navigateur Web et sélectionnez le favori correspondant au mode d’emploi dans la liste des favoris. Vous pouvez également vous rendre sur le site www.samsung.com pour afficher des informations sur l’appareil, le mode d’emploi et plus encore. En fonction de votre navigateur ou de votre opérateur, le guide de prise en main rapide peut ne pas être disponible dans les favoris. SM-T800 Guide de prise en main rapide Valeur DAS pour les autres pays : pour connaître les valeurs DAS spécifiques à votre appareil, rendezvous sur le site www.samsung.com/sar où vous pourrez effectuer une recherche en fonction de votre zone géographique et de la référence de votre modèle. Déclaration de conformité Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux dispositions applicables de la Directive 1999/5/ CE. Rendez-vous à la page www.samsung.com/mobile_doc pour afficher la Déclaration de conformité. Valeur DAS pour les pays de l’Union européenne : la valeur DAS indiquée ci-dessous est valable uniquement pour les appareils destinés à être utilisés au sein de l’Union européenne. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle DAS au niveau du corps 0,197 W/kg Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile est faible. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de quelconques précautions spéciales. Cependant, des organismes tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant minimiser leur exposition aux radiofréquences de réduire la durée d'utilisation de l'appareil ou d’utiliser autant que possible un kit mains-libres permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et de leur corps durant son utilisation. Conformément à la législation française en vigueur, nous sommes tenus de vous informer qu’il est recommandé dans ce cas d’éloigner le téléphone du ventre pour les femmes enceintes et du bas ventre pour les adolescents. Informations sur la certification DAS Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur la certification DAS de l’appareil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES Votre appareil mobile a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé. La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 W/kg. Valeur DAS maximale pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP : www.sar-tick.com Consignes de sécurité (suite) • Si l’appareil est fissuré ou brisé, ou s’il chauffe, cessez immédiatement de l’utiliser et apportez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. • Ne laissez pas les jeunes enfants ou les animaux de compagnie mordiller ou lécher l’appareil. • N’enfoncez pas l’appareil dans les yeux, les oreilles ou toute autre partie du corps, et ne l’introduisez pas dans la bouche. • Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash, ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux. Pour protéger votre ouïe lorsque vous utilisez un casque audio, n’écoutez pas à des volumes élevés pendant trop longtemps. Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. Printed in Korea GH68-41524B Rev.1.0 French. 05/2014 Le contenu de ce guide de prise en main rapide peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201406/20140612165607904/SM-T800_QSG_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_140507.pdf www.samsung.com User Manual SM-T800 English (EU). 07/2014. Rev.1.1 2 Table of Contents Read me first Getting started 7 Package contents 8 Device layout 10 Charging the battery 12 Using a memory card 14 Turning the device on and off 15 Locking and unlocking the screen Basics 16 Using the touch screen 19 Home screen layout 22 Notifications and quick setting panels 25 Opening apps 25 Installing or uninstalling apps 27 Entering text 30 Screen capture 30 My Files 32 Power saving feature 33 Viewing help information Network connectivity 34 Wi-Fi 35 Internet Motions & usability features 37 Motions 39 Multi window 44 Toolbox 44 Increasing touch screen sensitivity Personalising 45 Managing the Home and Apps screens 50 Setting wallpaper and ringtones 51 Changing the screen lock method 52 Finger Scanner 55 Private mode 57 Multiple users 59 Transferring data from your previous device 60 Setting up accounts Contacts 61 Adding contacts 62 Managing contacts Table of Contents 3 116 Hancom Office Viewer 120 NYTimes 121 Google apps Connecting with other devices 123 Bluetooth 125 Wi-Fi Direct 127 Quick Connect 129 SideSync 3.0 135 Remote PC 140 Screen Mirroring 142 Mobile printing Device & data manager 143 Upgrading the device 144 Transferring files between the device and a computer 145 Backing up and restoring data 146 Performing a data reset Settings 147 About Settings 147 Connections 151 Device 156 General 163 Applications Camera 65 Basic shooting 68 Shooting modes 71 Camera settings Gallery 74 Viewing photos or videos 76 Editing photos or videos 81 Gallery settings Multimedia 82 Music 85 Video Useful apps and features 88 Kids Mode 91 S Finder 92 S Planner 95 S Voice 97 Email 99 Calculator 99 Clock 100 WatchON 103 WebEx 112 Businessweek+ 113 Dropbox 114 Evernote 115 Flipboard Table of Contents 4 Accessibility 168 About Accessibility 169 Using the Home button to open accessibility menus 169 Voice feedback (TalkBack) 180 Changing the font size 180 Magnifying the screen 180 Setting notification reminders 181 Reversing the display colours 181 Colour adjustment 182 Setting flash notification 182 Turning off all sounds 182 Caption settings 183 Adjusting the sound balance 183 Mono audio 184 Assistant menu 186 Setting tap and hold delay options 186 Interaction control 187 Using single tap mode 187 Managing accessibility settings 188 Using other useful features Troubleshooting 5 Read me first Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or device’s software. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Apps related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by apps supplied by providers other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or apps to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • Default apps that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an app provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed apps, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Read me first 6 Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information 7 Getting started Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Getting started 8 Device layout Back button Recent apps button Home button IrLED Touch screen Front camera Speaker Light sensor Multipurpose jack Memory card slot Volume button Power button Headset jack Rear camera Flash Push clip GPS antenna Push clip Speaker Microphone • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Using a Samsung-approved screen protector is recommended. Unapproved screen protectors may cause the sensors to malfunction. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Getting started 9 Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press to turn on or lock the screen. Recent apps • Tap to open the list of recent apps. • Tap and hold to access additional options for the current screen. Home • Press to turn on the screen while the screen is locked. • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press twice to launch S Voice. • Press and hold to launch Google. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 10 Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. • If you use multiple apps at once, network apps, or apps that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these apps after fully charging the battery. Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into the multipurpose jack. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. Getting started 11 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket and easily accessible while charging. Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save the battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary apps using the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of apps. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the screen brightness. Getting started 12 Using a memory card Installing a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 128 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the My Files → SD card folder. 1 Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 3 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place. 4 Close the cover of the memory card slot. Getting started 13 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap → Settings → General → Storage → Unmount SD card. 1 Open the cover of the memory card slot. 2 Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out. 3 Close the cover of the memory card slot. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or can damage to the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap → Settings → General → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Getting started 14 Turning the device on and off Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. When you turn on your device for the first time or after performing a data reset, follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. Getting started 15 Locking and unlocking the screen Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and locks it. Also, the screen turns off and automatically locks if the device is not used for a specified period. To unlock the screen, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area. You can change the unlock code to unlock the screen. Refer to Changing the screen lock method for more information. 16 Basics Using the touch screen • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which are outside of the touch input area. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. • It is recommended to use fingers when you use the touch screen. Tapping To open an app, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the keyboard on the screen, tap it with a finger. Basics 17 Tapping and holding Tap and hold an item or the screen for more than 2 seconds to access available options. Dragging To move an item, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in. Double-tap again to return. Basics 18 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Apps screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list of items, such as contacts. Spreading and pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 19 Home screen layout Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of the device’s features. The Home screen has two different kinds of panels. The Classic Home screen panel displays widgets, shortcuts to apps, and more, and the Content Home screen panel displays Content widgets. Widgets are small apps that launch specific app functions to provide information and convenient access on your Home screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or tap one of the screen indicators at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Home screen, refer to Managing the Classic Home screen or Managing the Content Home screen. Basics 20 Apps screen The Apps screen displays icons for all apps, including newly installed apps. On the Home screen, tap to open the Apps screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or select a screen indicator at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Apps screen, refer to Managing the Apps screen. Access additional options. An app Screen indicators Basics 21 Indicator icons Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen. The icons listed in the table below are most common. The status bar may not appear at the top of the screen in some apps. To display the status bar, drag down from the top of the screen. Icon Meaning Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Smart stay or smart pause feature activated Synced with the web Connected to computer Alarm activated Mute mode activated Vibration mode activated Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Basics 22 Notifications and quick setting panels Using the notifications panel When you receive new notifications, such as messages, indicator icons appear on the status bar. To see more information about the icons, open the notifications panel and view the details. To open the notifications panel, drag the status bar downwards. To close the notifications panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards. You can use the following functions on the notifications panel. Launch Settings. Launch S Finder. Adjust the volume. Tap a notification and perform various actions. Clear all notifications. Adjust the brightness. View all quick setting buttons. Activate or deactivate options. Tap and hold options to view more detailed settings. Launch Quick connect. Basics 23 Rearranging quick setting buttons To rearrange quick setting buttons on the notifications panel, tap → , tap and hold an item, and then drag the item to another location. Using the quick setting panel You can activate or deactivate some features on the notifications panel. To activate or deactivate more features, open the quick setting panel. To open the quick setting panel, drag the status bar downwards with two fingers. Alternatively, tap on the notifications panel. To close the quick setting panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards. Tap the following options to activate or deactivate them. You can view more detailed settings if you tap and hold a button. • Wi-Fi: Refer to Wi-Fi for more information. • Location: Refer to Location for more information. • Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Select a sound mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. Some apps do not allow screen rotation. Basics 24 • Bluetooth: Refer to Bluetooth for more information. • Adapt display: When you activate this feature, the display is automatically optimised for various apps. • U. power saving: Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. • Multi window: Refer to Multi window for more information. • Toolbox: Refer to Toolbox for more information. • Screen Mirroring: Refer to Screen Mirroring for more information. • Sync: When you activated this feature, the device automatically sync apps, such as calendar or email. • Smart stay: When you activate this feature, the screen stays on as long as you look at it. • Smart pause: When you activate this feature, playback pauses when you look away from the screen. • Power saving: Refer to Power saving feature for more information. • Blocking mode: Refer to Blocking mode for more information. • Flight mode: Refer to Flight mode for more information. • Private mode: Refer to Private mode for more information. • Touch sensitivity: Refer to Increasing touch screen sensitivity for more information. Basics 25 Opening apps On the Home screen or the Apps screen, select an app icon to open it. To open the list of recently-used apps, tap and select an app icon to open. Closing an app Tap → Task manager, and then tap End next to an app to close it. To close all running apps, tap End all. Alternatively, tap → Close all. Installing or uninstalling apps Samsung Apps Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap Samsung Apps on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap Free. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the button that shows the app’s price. To change the auto update settings, tap → Settings → Auto update apps, and then select an option. Basics 26 Play Store Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap Play Store on the Apps screen. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap INSTALL. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the price and follow the on-screen instructions. To change the auto update settings, tap → SETTINGS → Auto-update apps, and then select an option. Downloading suggested apps You can view and download dedicated Galaxy device apps. On the Classic Home screen, tap the GALAXY Essentials widget or the GALAXY Gifts widget, and then tap next to an app. To download all apps in the list, tap Download all. Managing apps Uninstalling or disabling apps To disable default apps, open the Apps screen, tap → Uninstall/Disable apps. appears on the apps that you can disable. Select an app and tap Disable. To uninstall downloaded apps, open the Apps screen, tap → Downloaded apps → Uninstall. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Applications → Application manager, select an app, and then tap Uninstall. Basics 27 Enabling apps On the Apps screen, tap → Show disabled apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Applications → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED, select an app, and then tap Enable. • Hiding apps: Hide apps in the Apps screen only. You can continue to use hidden apps. • Disabling apps: Disable selected default apps that cannot be uninstalled from the device. You cannot use disabled apps. • Uninstalling apps: Uninstall downloaded apps. Entering text Keyboard layout A keyboard appears automatically when you enter text to send messages, create memos, and more. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Break to the next line. Suggested keywords Delete a preceding character. Change the keyboard settings. Enter uppercase. For all caps, tap it twice. Enter punctuation marks. Move the cursor. Enter a space. Basics 28 Changing the input language Tap → Select input languages, and then select the languages to use. If you select two or more languages, you can switch between the input languages by sliding the space key left or right. Using additional keyboard functions Tap and hold to use various functions. Other icons may appear instead of depending on the last function that was used. • : Enter text by voice. Change the language. Open the keyboard. Start or pause entering text by voice. • : Switch to handwriting mode. Switch between number mode and character mode. Switch to the standard keyboard. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Basics 29 • : Add an item from the clipboard. • : Change the keyboard settings. • : Change the keyboard type. You can move the keyboard to another location by dragging . Switch to the standard keyboard. Copying and pasting 1 Tap and hold over text. 2 Drag or to select the desired text, or tap Select all to select all text. 3 Tap Copy or Cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. 4 Place the cursor where the text is to be inserted and tap → Paste. To paste text that you have previously copied, tap → Clipboard and select the text. Basics 30 Screen capture Capture a screenshot while using the device. Press and hold the Home button and the Power button simultaneously. The image is saved in the Gallery → → Album → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and share it with others. You can also capture screenshots using other methods. Refer to Palm swipe to capture for more information. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps. My Files About My Files Use this app to access various files stored in the device or in other locations, such as cloud storage services. Tap My Files on the Apps screen. Alternatively, tap on the Classic Home screen. Access additional options. View files that are grouped by date. View files stored in the device. Change the view mode. View storage information. Search for files or folders. View the download history. View shortcuts to folders. View files by categories. Basics 31 Tap and use the following options: • Select: Select files or folders to apply options. • Delete: Delete files or folders. • Add FTP: Add an FTP server shortcut in FOLDERS. • Scan for Nearby Devices: Search for devices that have media sharing activated. • Display options: Change the file display options. Viewing files Tap My Files on the Apps screen. Select a folder, tap , and then use one of the following options: • Select: Select files or folders to apply options. • Sort by: Sort files or folders. • Add to favourite folders: Add a shortcut to a folder in FAVOURITE FOLDERS. • Delete: Delete files or folders. • Add shortcut to home: Add a shortcut to a file or a folder on the Classic Home screen. • Add FTP: Add an FTP server shortcut in FOLDERS. • Scan for Nearby Devices: Search for devices that have media sharing activated. • Display options: Change the file display options. Tap and hold a file or folder, and then use the following options: • : Share files with others. • : Delete files or folders. • : Move files or folders to another folder. • : Copy files or folders to another folder. • → Rename: Rename a file or folder. • → Add to favourite folders: Add a shortcut to a folder in FAVOURITE FOLDERS. • → Add shortcut to home: Add a shortcut to a file or a folder on the Classic Home screen. • → Zip: Compress files or folders to create a zip file. • → Details: View file or folder details. Basics 32 Power saving feature Power saving mode Save the battery power by limiting the device’s functions. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Power saving, and then tap the Power saving mode switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Power saving to activate it. Select from the following options: • Restrict performance: Limit various options, such as turning off the backlight for the Recent apps button and the Back button. • Greyscale mode: Display colours on the screen as grey tones. Ultra power saving mode Use this mode to extend the device’s battery power. In ultra power saving mode, the device performs the following: • Displays colours on the screen as grey tones. • Restricts the available apps to essential and selected apps only. • Deactivates the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth features. Basics 33 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Power saving, and tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap U. power saving to activate it. Add more apps to use. Remaining battery power Essential apps Access additional options. Estimated maximum standby time To add an app to the Home screen, tap and select an app. To remove an app from the Home screen, tap → Remove, select an app with , and then tap Done. To change the settings for ultra power saving mode, such as network connectivity or sound, tap → Settings. To deactivate ultra power saving mode, tap → Disable ultra power saving mode. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Viewing help information To view help information to learn how to use the device and apps, open the Apps screen, tap Help. To view help information for an app while you are using the app, tap → Help. Some apps may not include help information. 34 Network connectivity Wi-Fi Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Wi-Fi for additional options. • Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. • Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Select a network from the Wi-Fi networks list. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. 3 Tap Connect. Once the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will reconnect to that network each time it is available without requiring a password. To prevent the device connecting to the network automatically, select it from the list of networks and tap Forget. Network connectivity 35 Adding Wi-Fi networks If the desired network does not appear in the Wi-Fi networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the bottom of the list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Connect. Activating Wi-Fi Passpoint Wi-Fi Passpoint enables the device to search for and connect to a certified Wi-Fi network. You can use the Passpoint feature to connect to public Wi-Fi networks that support automated authentication. When you move to a new location, it will search for and connect to another certified Wi-Fi network. This feature may not be available depending on the region. Tap → Advanced, and then tick Passpoint. Internet Browsing webpages 1 Tap Internet on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the address field. To change the search engine, tap the search engine icon next to the web address field. 3 Enter the web address or a keyword, and then tap Go. To search the web by voice, tap . Network connectivity 36 To view the toolbars, drag your finger downwards slightly on the screen. Open the homepage. Close the tab. Move to the previously-visited page. Bookmark the current webpage. Open a new tab. Read an article in reading mode. Access additional options. View your bookmarks, saved pages, and recent Internet history. Refresh the current webpage. Setting the homepage Tap Internet on the Apps screen. Tap → Settings → Set homepage, and then select one of the following: • Default page: Set the device’s default webpage as your homepage. • Current page: Set the current webpage as your homepage. • Most visited sites: Set the list of most-visited webpages as your homepage. • Other: Set a preset webpage as your homepage. While viewing a webpage, tap to open the homepage. Managing the webpage history Tap Internet on the Apps screen. Tap → History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap Edit → . To delete webpages, tap Edit, tap and hold a webpage, select webpages to delete, and then tap . 37 Motions & usability features Motions Excessive shaking or impact on the device may result in unintended inputs. Control motions properly. Mute/Pause On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Motions, and then tap the Mute/Pause switch to activate it. Covering screen with hand Cover the screen with your palm to mute alarms or to pause media playback. Tap Mute/Pause → Covering screen with hand. Motions & usability features 38 Smart pause Playback pauses automatically when you look away from the screen. It resumes when you look at the screen again. Tap Mute/Pause → Smart pause. Palm swipe to capture On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Motions, and then tap the Palm swipe to capture switch to activate it. Place the side of your hand on the screen and sweep it across the screen from the right to the left or vice versa to capture a screenshot. The image is saved in the Gallery → → Album → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and share it with others. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps. Motions & usability features 39 Multi window About Multi window Use this feature to run two apps on the screen at the same time. You can use this feature to view emails or use the Internet while you play a video simultaneously. Launching Multi window 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Multi window, and then tap the Multi window switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Multi window to activate it. 2 Drag your finger from the right edge of the screen towards the middle of the screen to open the Multi window tray. Alternatively, tap and hold . Multi Window tray Motions & usability features 40 3 Tap and hold an app icon to launch from the Multi window tray, and then drag it to the screen. Release the app icon when the screen turns blue. 4 Tap and hold another app icon on the Multi window tray, and then drag it to a new location. App icons marked with can be launched in separate windows on the screen at the same time. Creating a Multi window combination Use this feature to save the combination of the currently-running Multi window apps. 1 Launch two apps in a split-screen Multi window. 2 Open the Multi window tray and tap → Create. The Multi window combination is added at the top of the Multi window tray. To delete Multi window combinations, open the Multi window tray, tap → Edit, select a Multi window combination, and then tap OK. Motions & usability features 41 Adjusting the window size Drag the circle between the app windows left or right to adjust the size of the windows. Using Multi window options When you use Multi window apps, select the app window and a blue frame will appear around it. Tap the circle between the app windows to access the following options: Motions & usability features 42 • : Open a list of recently-used apps in the selected window. • : Switch locations between Multi window apps. • : Drag and drop text or copied images from one window to another. Tap and hold an item in the selected window and drag it to a location in another window. Some apps may not support this feature. • : Maximise the window. • : Close the app. Motions & usability features 43 Rearranging apps on the Multi window tray You can rearrange the apps on the Multi window tray. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Multi window, and then tap the Multi window switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Multi window to activate it. 2 Open the Multi window tray and tap → Edit. The device displays the available apps that you can use on the Multi window tray. 3 Tap and hold an app and drag it to the Multi window tray. 4 Tap Done. Motions & usability features 44 Toolbox You can easily launch various apps from the toolbox while using other apps. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Toolbox, and then tap the Toolbox switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Toolbox to activate it. appears on the screen. To launch an app, tap and select an app. To move the toolbox, tap and drag it to another location. To change the apps in the toolbox, tap and hold , and then drag it to Edit. To hide the toolbox, tap and hold , and then drag it to Remove. Increasing touch screen sensitivity Use this feature to operate the screen while wearing gloves. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Display, and then tick Increase touch sensitivity. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Touch sensitivity to activate it. • Use leather gloves for better recognition while touching the screen. Other types of material may not be recognised. • For best results, tap the screen firmly while wearing gloves. 45 Personalising Managing the Home and Apps screens Managing the Classic Home screen Adding items Tap and hold an app or a folder from the Apps screen, and then drag it to the Classic Home screen. To add widgets, open the Classic Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and hold a widget, and then drag it to the Classic Home screen. Moving and removing an item Tap and hold an item on the Classic Home screen, and then drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. You can also move frequently-used apps to the shortcuts area at the bottom of the Classic Home screen. To remove an item, tap and hold the item. Then, drag it to Remove that appears at the top of the screen. Creating a folder 1 On the Classic Home screen, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to Create folder that appears at the top of the screen. 2 Enter a folder name. 3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done. Personalising 46 Managing folders To rename a folder, select a folder, and then tap the existing folder name. Enter a new name for the folder and tap Done. To change the colour of a folder, select a folder, tap , and then select a colour. To move more apps to a folder, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to the folder. To move an app from a folder, select a folder, tap and hold the app, and then drag it to a new location. Managing panels On the Classic Home screen, tap and hold an empty area to add, move, or remove a panel. To add a panel, scroll left to the last panel, and then tap . To move a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. To remove a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to Remove at the top of the screen. To set a panel as the main Classic Home screen, tap . Managing the Content Home screen The Content Home screen displays Content widgets. You can access an app directly by selecting a Content widget on the Content Home screen. Personalising 47 Adding a widget or panel 1 Pinch your fingers together on the Content Home screen. 2 On the Widgets screen, select a panel to edit or tap to create a new panel ( 1 ). Select widgets to add to the panel from the bottom pane of the screen ( 2 ). Scroll left or right on the bottom pane of the screen to view more widgets. 3 Tap Done. Adjusting widget size 1 On the Content Home screen, tap and hold a widget you want to resize. 2 Adjust the size of the widget by dragging the frame around it. 3 Tap to save the change. Personalising 48 Moving a widget 1 On the Content Home screen, tap and hold a widget. 2 Tap and hold a widget and then drag it to a new location. To arrange the widgets on the current panel in random locations, tap Change layout. Removing a panel 1 Pinch your fingers together on the Content Home screen. 2 On the Widgets screen, tap and hold the panel to remove. 3 Drag the panel to Remove that appears at the top of the screen. At least one panel must remain on the Content Home screen. Managing the Apps screen Changing view mode On the Apps screen, tap → View as and select a sorting method. Hiding apps Hide apps that you do not want to see on the Apps screen. On the Apps screen, tap → Hide apps, select apps, and then tap Done. To display hidden apps, tap → Show hidden apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Personalising 49 Moving items On the Apps screen, tap → Edit. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. To move an item to a new panel, drag it to Create page that appears at the top of the screen. You can move folders only in the folder panel. Creating folders 1 On the Apps screen, tap → Create folder. 2 Enter a folder name. 3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done. The new folder is added to the folder panel of the Apps screen. Managing folders To rename a folder, select a folder and tap the existing folder name. Enter a new name for the folder and tap Done. To change the colour of a folder, select a folder, tap , and then select a colour. To move more apps to a folder, tap → Edit, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to the folder. To move an app from a folder, tap → Edit, select a folder, tap and hold the app, and then drag it to an app panel. If you move the app from the folder to the folder panel, a new folder is created. Personalising 50 Setting wallpaper and ringtones Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Classic Home screen or the locked screen. 1 On the Classic Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, and then tap Wallpapers. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Wallpaper. 2 Select a screen to change or apply wallpaper to. 3 Scroll left or right and select from images displayed at the bottom of the screen. To select photos taken by the device’s camera or other images, tap More images. 4 Tap Set wallpaper or Done. Changing ringtones Change ringtones for notifications. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Sound → Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap OK. Personalising 51 Changing the screen lock method You can change the way that you lock the screen to prevent others from accessing your personal information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Lock screen → Screen lock, and then select a screen lock method. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Pattern Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. Fingerprint Register your fingerprints to unlock the screen. Refer to Finger Scanner for more information. PIN A PIN consists of numbers only. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Personalising 52 Password A password consists of characters and numbers. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Finger Scanner For better fingerprint recognition When you scan your fingerprints on the device, be aware of the following conditions that may affect the feature’s performance: • The Home button contains a fingerprint recognition sensor. Ensure that the Home button is not scratched or damaged by metal objects, such as coins, keys, and necklaces. • The screen protector supplied with the device may cause the fingerprint recognition sensor to malfunction. Remove the screen protector to improve fingerprint sensitivity. • Ensure that the fingerprint recognition area and your fingers are clean and dry. • The device may not recognise fingerprints that are affected by wrinkles or scars. • The device may not recognise fingerprints from small or thin fingers. • To improve recognition performance, register fingerprints of the hand used most often to perform tasks on the device. • Do not drag your finger too quickly or slowly. Drag your finger at a moderate speed to allow the device to recognise it. • In dry environments, static electricity can build up in the device. Avoid using this feature in dry environments or before using the feature, discharge static electricity by touching a metal object. Personalising 53 Registering fingerprints 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Fingerprint manager. 2 If you are registering more fingerprints, a fingerprint recognition pop-up window appears. Scan a registered fingerprint on the device and tap . 3 Place your finger on the fingerprint area at the bottom centre of the screen. 4 Tap and hold the screen in the fingerprint area, and then drag your finger downwards over the Home button. Repeat this action using the same finger until the fingerprint is registered. If you bend your finger or use a fingertip, the device may not recognise your fingerprints. 5 If a pop-up window appears requesting a password, enter the alternative password, tap Continue, enter the alternative password again to verify it, and then tap OK. You can use the alternative password instead of scanning your fingerprints. 6 If a fingerprint lock pop-up window appears, tap OK. You can use your fingerprints to unlock the screen. Personalising 54 Managing registered fingerprints You can delete or rename your registered fingerprints. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Fingerprint manager. To delete fingerprints, tap → Deregister, select fingerprints, and then tap → OK. To rename a fingerprint, tap and hold a fingerprint, tap , and then enter a new name, and then tap OK. Changing the alternative password You can change the password that you use as an alternative to scanning your fingerprints. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Change alternative password. 2 Scan a registered fingerprint or tap Alternative password. 3 Enter a new password and tap Continue. 4 Enter the password again and tap OK. Unlocking the screen with fingerprints You can unlock the screen with the registered fingerprints. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Screen lock → Fingerprint. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Lock screen → Screen lock → Fingerprint. Verifying the Samsung account password Use fingerprints to verify your Samsung account password. You can use a fingerprint instead of entering your password, for example, when you purchase content from Samsung Apps. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Verify Samsung account, and then tap the switch at the top right of the screen to activate it. Enter your Samsung account password and tap Done. Personalising 55 Using fingerprints for purchases via PayPal You can make purchases by scanning your fingerprints. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Finger Scanner → Pay with PayPal. 2 Tap Install under FIDO Ready™ support. 3 Tap Link under PayPal account. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to sign in to the PayPal website and register your fingerprints. Private mode About private mode Use this mode to prevent others from using or accessing specific content, such as images and documents, stored on the device. You can save content to a specific location and deactivate private mode to hide items securely. Hiding content 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Private mode, and then tap the Private mode switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Private mode to activate it. When you activate private mode for the first time, set an unlock code and a backup PIN. 2 Enter the private mode unlock code. When this mode is activated, appears at the top of the screen. Personalising 56 3 To select items to hide, tap and hold an item in the list, tick items to select, and then tap → Move to Private. Items that are moved to private mode appear with on them. 4 When you have selected the items to hide, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Private mode, and then tap the Private mode switch to deactivate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Private mode to deactivate it. The selected items will disappear from the screen. Ensure that all files are saved or moved properly before deactivating private mode. Viewing hidden content You can only view hidden items when private mode is activated. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Private mode, and then tap the Private mode switch to activate it. Alternatively, open the quick setting panel and tap Private mode to activate it. 2 Enter the private mode unlock code. 3 On the Apps screen, tap My Files → Private. All items moved in private mode appear on the screen. Personalising 57 Multiple users Set up additional user accounts for other users to use the device with personalised settings, such as email accounts, wallpaper preferences, and more. Following types of user accounts are available. • Owner: The owner account is created only when setting up the device for the first time, and cannot be created more than one. This account has full control of the device including user account management. • User: This account allows users to access their own apps and content, and customise the device settings that affect all accounts. • Restricted profile: A restricted account can only access the apps and content allowed by the owner account, and cannot use the services that require logging in. Adding users 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Users. 2 Tap → User → OK → Set up now. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. Adding restricted profiles 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Users. 2 Tap → Restricted profile. 3 Set an unlock code, and then select the apps and content that restricted users are allowed to access. Personalising 58 Switching users Tap at the top of the locked screen. Select the account to switch to, and then unlock the device. A user account Managing users When using the owner account, you can delete accounts or change the account settings. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Users. 2 Select an account under USERS & PROFILES. Then, select or deselect apps and content to allow or restrict the account’s access to them. To delete the account, tap . Personalising 59 Transferring data from your previous device Using backup accounts You can transfer backup data from your previous device to your new device using your Google or Samsung account. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. Using Samsung Smart Switch You can transfer data of the previous device to a new device via Smart Switch (for mobiles and computers). Visit www.samsung.com/smartswitch for more information. Samsung Smart Switch is not supported on some devices or computers. Using Smart Switch Mobile Use this app to transfer data from your previous iPhone or Android device to your new device. You can download the app from Samsung Apps or Play Store. 1 On your device, tap Smart Switch Mobile. 2 On your device, select an option depending on the previous device type and follow the on-screen instructions. If the previous device is an Android device, ensure that the Smart Switch Mobile app is installed on the device. Refer to the help for more information. Personalising 60 Using Smart Switch with computers Use this feature to import a backup of your data (from selected manufacturer’s mobile devices) from a computer to your device. You can download the app from www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Back up data from a previous device to the computer. For more information, contact the device’s manufacturer. 2 On the computer, launch Smart Switch. 3 Connect your current device to the computer using the USB cable. 4 On the computer, click the manufacturer of the previous device and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer data to your device. Using Samsung Kies Import a backup of your data from your computer via Samsung Kies to restore data on your device. You can also back up data to the computer via Samsung Kies. Refer to Connecting with Samsung Kies for more information. Setting up accounts Adding accounts Some apps used on your device require a registered account. Create accounts to have the best experience with your device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Accounts → Add account and select an account service. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. To sync content with your accounts, select an account and tick items to sync. Removing accounts On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Accounts, select an account, and then tap Remove account. 61 Contacts Adding contacts Moving contacts from other devices You can move contacts from other devices to your device. Refer to Transferring data from your previous device for more information. Creating contacts manually 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. 3 Tap Save. Creating contacts from business cards Take a photo of a business card and extract contact information from it. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Tap → Business cards → . To select or add languages to recognise, tap → Target language. Contacts 62 3 Place a business card on the flat surface. 4 Adjust the device to fit the card inside the frames on the screen. When the frames turn green, the device automatically takes a photo. The device also reads the contact information from the business card and converts it to a contact entry. • If the device does not take the photo automatically, tap . • To take photos of business cards manually, tap → Auto capture → Off. • To extract text from a stored image, tap → Load image. 5 Edit or add more information and tap Save. Managing contacts Editing a contact 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Select a contact to edit and tap . 3 Edit the contact information or tap Add another field to add more contact information. 4 Tap Save. Deleting a contact Select a contact to delete and tap . Sharing a contact Select a contact to share, tap → Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method. Contacts 63 Managing groups On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Groups. Creating a new group Tap , enter a group name, and then tap Save. Adding contacts to a group Select a group, and then tap → Add member. Select contacts to add, and then tap Done. Deleting a group Tap → Delete groups, select user-added groups, and then tap Done. Sending an email to group members Select a group, tap → Send email, select members, tap Done, enter a message, and then tap the send button. Merging contacts with accounts Merge contacts that are saved in the device with your accounts. On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Tap → Merge accounts → Merge with Google or Merge with Samsung. Importing and exporting contacts Import contacts from storage services to your device or export contacts from the device to storage services. On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Tap → Settings → Import/Export, and then select an import or export option. Contacts 64 Searching for contacts On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Drag a finger along the index at the left side of the contacts list to scroll through it quickly. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • : Compose an email. Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Classic Home screen Add shortcuts to contacts that you frequently communicate with on the Classic Home screen. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Select a contact. 3 Tap → Add shortcut to home. 65 Camera Basic shooting Taking photos or recording videos 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in focus, the focus frame turns green. 3 Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . • To change the focus while recording a video, tap where you want to focus. To focus on the centre of the screen, tap . Change the shooting mode. Start recording a video. Take a photo. View photos and videos you have captured. Display current mode. Switch between the front and rear cameras. Camera shortcuts Change camera settings. Camera 66 • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. • The front camera lens is suitable for taking wide-angle photos. Minor distortion may occur in wide-angle photos and does not indicate device performance problems. Reorganising camera shortcuts You can reorganise camera shortcuts for fast and easy access on the preview screen. Tap on the preview screen. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a slot at the left of the screen. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or record videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or record videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or record videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Camera 67 Remote viewfinder Use your device as a viewfinder for another device. You can control the other device remotely to take photos or videos from a distance. Your device displays the same image that is displayed on the connected device. 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Remote viewfinder. 3 Tap Wi-Fi Direct settings to connect to another device. 4 Tap the image on the preview screen where the device should focus. 5 Tap to take the photo displayed on the connected device’s viewfinder. Ensure that the device you want to connect to supports the remote viewfinder mode. Camera 68 Shooting modes Auto Use this mode to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Auto. Beauty face Use this mode to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Beauty face. Shot & more Use this mode to take a series of photos and modify them by applying various effects using the shooting modes. The device identifies the photos with in Gallery. The zoom function is not available while taking photos in this mode. 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap MODE → Shot & more. 3 Tap . The device takes a series of photos and displays the available shooting modes. 4 Select a shooting mode and apply an effect to the photos. • Best photo: Take a series of photos and save the best one. To view other photos in the series, scroll left or right. The device recommends the best photo and identifies it with . Camera 69 • Best face: Take multiple group shots at the same time and combine them to create the best possible image. Tap the white frame on each face and choose the best individual pose for each subject from the poses that appear at the bottom of the screen. Then, merge the images into a single photo. The device recommends the best photo and identifies it with . • Drama shot: Take a series of photos and combine them to create an image that shows motion trails. Extend the motion trail in the image by selecting more photos from the bottom of the screen. To edit the motion trails of selected photos, tap and select a photo. Tap Restore to display subject’s motion trails or tap Remove to erase the motion trails. Edit the photo as desired and tap Done. • Eraser: Erase unwanted moving objects. Tap to erase unwanted moving objects. Tap to restore the original photo. • Panning shot: Apply an effect to the subject’s background that makes the subject appear to be moving fast. Tap Objects to select a subject. Tap Motion blur to change the angle of blurring to apply to the background. Tap Angle → and draw a circle with your finger around the large circle to adjust the angle of blurring. To adjust the level of background blurring, tap Motion blur and drag the adjustment bar. 5 When you are finished editing photos, tap Save. Panorama Use this mode to take a photo composed of many photos strung together. The device identifies the photo with in Gallery. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Panorama. To get the best shot, follow these tips: • Move the camera slowly in one direction. • Keep the image within the frame on the camera’s viewfinder. • Avoid taking photos of indistinct backgrounds, such as an empty sky or a plain wall. Camera 70 HDR (Rich tone) Use this mode to take photos with rich colours and reproduce details even in bright and dark areas. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → HDR (Rich tone). Without effect With effect Dual Camera When you take a landscape photo with the rear camera, the photo or video captured by the front camera appears in an inset window, or vice versa. Use this feature to take a beautiful landscape photo and a self-portrait simultaneously. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Dual Camera to switch to dual camera mode. Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video. Select among various styles that are available. Tap to resize it or move the location. Switch between the front and rear cameras. Camera 71 • You can record videos in dual camera mode for up to 5 minutes in Full HD and up to 10 minutes in HD or VGA. • While recording videos in this mode, sound is recorded by the internal microphone. Managing shooting modes Select the shooting modes to appear on the mode selection screen. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Manage modes. Downloading shooting modes Download more shooting modes from Samsung Apps. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → MODE → Download. Camera settings On the Apps screen, tap Camera → . Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. • Picture size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Burst shots: Take a series of photos of moving subjects. • Picture stabilisation: Set the device to automatically detect darker conditions and adjust the brightness of the photo without the flash. This option is not available when you record videos. Camera 72 • Face detection: Set the device to recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of them. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. • Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Tap to take pics: Tap the image on the preview screen to take photos. • Save as: Set the device to save both the rich tone photo and original photo, or only the rich tone photo. • Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Recording mode: Change the recording mode. • Video stabilisation: Activate or deactivate anti-shake. Anti-shake helps focus when the camera is moving. • Effects: Select a filter effect to use when taking photos or recording videos. To download more effects, tap Download. To change the order of effects or hide effects from the list, tap Manage effects. • Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • View mode: Change the aspect ratio of the preview screen. • Location tags: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. Camera 73 • Storage location: Select the memory location for storage. • Review pics/videos: Set the device to show photos or videos after capturing them. • Remote viewfinder: Set the device to use as a viewfinder and control the other device to take photos or record videos. Refer to Remote viewfinder for more information. • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • Grid lines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Voice control: Set the device to take photos with voice commands. • Help: View help information for using the camera. • Reset settings: Reset the camera settings. The available options vary depending on the mode used. 74 Gallery Viewing photos or videos Viewing content on the device On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video. Video files show the icon on the preview thumbnail. To hide or show the menu bar and the preview thumbnails, tap the screen. Access additional options. Delete the image. Send the image to others. Modify the image. Search for other devices to view the image. Move to the previous screen. Viewing content stored on other devices Search for photos and videos that are stored on other devices and view it on your device. Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. Gallery 75 Accessing content on a nearby device Tap and select a device in NEARBY DEVICES to access content. You can view the photos and videos on the devices that have the content sharing feature activated. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Nearby devices, and then tap the Nearby devices switch to activate it. Refer to Nearby devices for more settings. Selecting a sorting option The images or videos on your device can be sorted by time or album. You can also filter images and videos by category, such as people or event. On the Apps screen, tap Gallery → , and then select a sorting option. Accessing additional options On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video. Tap and use the following options. • More info: View more information about the file. • Copy to clipboard: Copy the file to the clipboard. • Studio: Edit images or videos in studio mode. Refer to Editing photos or videos for more information. • Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise. • Rotate right: Rotate clockwise. • Crop: Crop the image. • Rename: Rename the file. • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder. • Set as: Set the image as wallpaper or a contact image. • Print: Print the image by connecting the device to a printer. Refer to Mobile printing for more information. • Settings: Change the Gallery settings. The available options may differ depending on the selected file. To select multiple files from the file list, tap and hold a file, and then tap the other files. When the files are selected, you can share or delete them at the same time or tap to access additional options. Gallery 76 Editing photos or videos Photo studio Edit images by applying various effects. 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Studio → Photo studio. 3 Select an image to edit. 4 Edit the image by applying various effects. Draw on the image. Apply effects to the image. Decorate the image by adding stickers. Insert a frame on the image. Rotate the image. Crop the image. Adjust the saturation or brightness of the image. 5 When you are finished editing the image, tap → Save as. 6 Enter a filename and tap OK. The edited photo is saved in the Studio folder. To open the folder, tap Gallery → → Album → Studio. Gallery 77 Collage studio Combine several images together to create a collage. 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Studio → Collage studio. 3 Select images to combine and tap Done. 4 Edit the image by applying various effects. Delete the image. Change the collage style. Add images. Delete the image. Hide the image panel. Change the split layout. 5 When you are finished editing the images, tap Save. The edited image is saved in the Studio folder. To open the folder, tap Gallery → → Album → Studio. Gallery 78 Shot & more Apply various effects to the images you have taken. Only photos taken in shot & more mode can be selected. 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Studio → Shot & more. 3 Select an image to edit. 4 Edit the image by applying various effects. Erase moving objects from the background. Make the subject appear to be moving quickly. Create the best possible image. Create an image that shows motion trails. Save the best photo. 5 When you are finished editing the image, tap Save. The edited image is saved in the Studio folder. To open the folder, tap Gallery → → Album → Studio. Gallery 79 Video editor Edit or create videos with multiple images and videos. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Studio → Video editor. 3 Select a theme to apply and tap Done. 4 Select videos to edit. You can also select images to create a video. 5 Edit the video by applying various effects. Add more images. Record a video. Split or trim the videos, or change order of videos. Add more videos. Access additional options. Play the video clip. Save the video clip. Edit the video clip automatically. Undo or redo the last action. Add background music or apply sound effects to the video clip. 6 When you are finished editing the video, tap Export. 7 Select a save option and tap OK. The edited video is saved in the Export folder. To open the folder, tap Gallery → → Album → Export. Gallery 80 Video trimmer Trim video segments. 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Studio → Video trimmer. 3 Select a video to edit. 4 Move the start bracket to the desired starting point, move the end bracket to the desired ending point, tap Done. End bracket Current position Start bracket 5 Enter a filename, and then tap OK to save the video. Gallery 81 Gallery settings 1 Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Settings. 3 Use the following options: • Tag buddy: Tag photos with information, such as date and location. To edit tags, tap the information on an image, tap , edit the details, and then tap Done. • Face tag: Assign tags to faces in an image. A yellow frame appears around a face when it is detected. Select the face, tap Add name, and then select a contact to identify the face tag. When the face tag appears on an image, tap it and access various options, such as sending a message to the person. When you use Face tag, face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. 82 Multimedia Music Playing music Tap Music on the Apps screen. Select a music category, and then select a song to play. Add the song to a playlist. View a list of recommended songs based on the song that is currently playing. Skip to the next song. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Pause and resume playback. Access additional options. Adjust the volume. Change the repeat mode. Skip to the previous song. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Turn on shuffle. Open the playlist. Search for other devices to play the file. Set the file as your favourite song. Multimedia 83 To listen to songs at equal volume levels, tap → Settings → Advanced, and then tick Smart volume. When Smart volume is activated, the volume may end up louder than the device volume level. Use caution to avoid long-term exposure to loud sounds to prevent damage to your hearing. Smart volume may not be activated for some files. To set a personalised sound while listening to songs with a headset, tap → Settings → Advanced → Adapt Sound → On. When you activate this option for the first time, tap Start to adjust the sound. The device starts a series of sound tests to adjust the sound level and starts to beep. Tap Yes if you can hear the beep or No if you cannot. Repeat this step for each test until the sound adjustment is finished. Then, tick Music sound and tap Done to apply the option when you listen to music. When you turn the volume up to level 14 or higher, the adapt sound option is not applied to music playback. If you turn the volume down to level 13 or lower, the option is reapplied. Setting a song as alarm tone To use the currently-playing song as an alarm tone, tap → Set as → From the beginning or Auto recommendation, select an option, and then tap Done. Creating playlists Make an own selection of songs. Tap Music on the Apps screen. Tap Playlists → → Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Tap , select songs to include, and then tap Done. To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap and select the playlist. Multimedia 84 Playing music by mood Use this feature to play music that suits your mood. Tap Music on the Apps screen. Tap Music square. Songs are automatically categorised by mood. Tap a mood cell or drag multiple cells to listen to the music in the cells. Song categories are based on available information about the song. Some songs may not be categorised in mood cells. Playing music stored on other devices Search for music that is stored on other devices and play it on your device. Tap Music on the Apps screen. Accessing music on a nearby device Tap Nearby devices and select a device to access and play music. You can play the song on the devices with the content sharing feature activated. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Nearby devices, and then tap the Nearby devices switch to activate it. Refer to Nearby devices for more settings. Multimedia 85 Video Playing videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Select a video to play. Move the control panel to the left. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Switch to the pop-up video player. Search for other devices to play the file. Make the display tone more vivid. Skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Access additional options. Move the control panel to the right. Pause and resume playback. Adjust the volume. Open the playlist. Change screen ratio. Multimedia 86 Using the pop-up video player Use this feature to use other apps without closing the video player. While watching videos, tap to use the pop-up video player. Spread two fingers apart on the screen to enlarge the player or pinch to reduce it. To move the player, drag the player to another location. Capturing images To use this feature, during playback, tap → Settings, tick Capture, and then tap Close. Tap to capture an image from the video during playback. Sharing or deleting videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Tap and hold a video, tap , and then select a sharing method. Tap → Delete, select videos, and then tap Done. Editing videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Select a video, tap → Edit → Studio → Video trimmer. Move the start bracket to the desired starting point, move the end bracket to the desired ending point, tap Done, enter a filename, and then tap OK to save the video. To edit videos using a video editor app, select a video and tap → Edit → Video Editor. Multimedia 87 Playing videos stored on other devices Search for videos that are stored in other devices and play them on your device. Tap Video on the Apps screen. Accessing a video on a nearby device Tap Nearby devices and select a device to access and play the video. You can play the video on devices that have the content sharing feature activated. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Nearby devices, and then tap the Nearby devices switch to activate it. Refer to Nearby devices for more settings. 88 Useful apps and features Kids Mode Starting Kids Mode Use this widget to provide a fun and safe environment for children by restricting children’s access to certain apps or content. Before you use this widget, you need to download and install it. On the Classic Home screen, tap Kids Mode → Install. To start kids mode, tap Kids Mode on the Classic Home or Apps screen. When it is installed, the widget appears on the Classic Home and App screens. When you launch this widget for the first time, tap Set PIN at the bottom of the screen. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. If the Kids Mode widget is accidentally uninstalled, you can reinstall it. On the Classic Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and hold the Kids Mode widget. Drag the widget to the Classic Home screen and tap Kids Mode to reinstall it. Kids mode home screen The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of apps in kids mode. Kids Drawing Kids Media Exit kids mode. Access parental controls. Newly added apps Kids Voice Recorder Kids Camera Kids Gallery Useful apps and features 89 Use this app to play videos. Before you use this app, add videos that are saved on the device to the app. Refer to Parental control for more information. Use this app to create a drawing with a pen, a brush, and more. Use this app to view saved images, drawings, voice recordings, and media files that you allow your child to access. Use this app to record or play voice recordings. Use this app to take photos or record videos. Useful apps and features 90 Kids mode play area Scroll right on the Home screen to open kids mode play area. You can interact with characters, background objects, and more. Parental control Use this feature to set restrictions for kids mode to control access to content and apps. You can change kids mode settings, usage time limits, and more. On the Home screen, tap and enter the PIN. To exit parental control, press the Home button. • Children’s name: View and edit children’s profile. • Activity: View information about how your children use the device, such as playing duration and frequently-used apps. • Daily playtime limit: Set a time limit to manage your children’s usage. • Applications: View and add apps that are allowed to be used in kids mode. • Media: Allow your children to access certain images and videos saved on the device. • General: Configure kids mode settings. • Kids Store: Download apps for kids from Samsung Apps. Useful apps and features 91 S Finder Use this app to search for content on the device. You can apply various filters and view the search history. Open the notifications panel and tap S Finder. Searching for content Tap the search field and enter a keyword, or tap and say a keyword. To get more refined results, tap filters under the search field. To update the list of search results, tap → Refresh. To set the search parameters using the available filters, tap → Settings → Filter → Select filters. To select search categories, tap → Settings → Search → Select search category. Managing the search history You can view or delete your past searches. Select a previous search item to item to perform the search again. To delete the history, tap → Settings → Search → Delete history, select search keywords, and then tap Done. To set the device to not save the search history, tap → Settings → Search, and deselect Save search history. Useful apps and features 92 S Planner Starting S Planner Use this app to manage events and tasks. Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. Access additional options. Search for events or tasks. Create events or tasks. Go to today's date. Change the view mode. Tap and use the following: • Go to: Move to a specific date. • Delete: Delete events or tasks. • Sync: Sync events and tasks with your accounts. • Calendars: Select the calendars to display. • Settings: Change settings for S Planner. Useful apps and features 93 Creating events or tasks 1 Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . Alternatively, select a date with no events or tasks in it and tap the date again. If the date already has saved events or tasks in it, tap the date and tap . 3 Select either event or task and enter details. • Event: Set a start and end date for an event. You can set an optional repeat setting. • Task: Add a task to do on a specific date. You can set an optional priority setting. Attach a map showing the location of the event. Add more details. Set a start and end date for the event. Enter a title. Select a calendar to use or sync with. Select an item. 4 Tap Done to save the event or task. Useful apps and features 94 Syncing events and tasks with your accounts Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To sync events and tasks with your accounts, tap → Sync. To add accounts to sync with, tap → Calendars → Add account. Then, select an account to sync with and sign in. When an account is added, a green circle is displayed next to the account name. To change an account’s syncing option, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Accounts, and then select an account service. Deleting events or tasks Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To delete events or tasks, tap → Delete, select the events or tasks, and then tap Done → OK. To delete an event or task while viewing it, tap → Delete → OK. To mark tasks as completed, tap a date that has tasks in it and tick completed tasks. Sharing events or tasks Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To share an event or task while viewing it, tap → Share via, and then select a sharing method. Useful apps and features 95 S Voice About S Voice Use this app to command the device by voice to perform various features. Tap S Voice on the Apps screen. Alternatively, press the Home button twice. To deactivate the access by pressing the Home button, tap → Settings → Wake-up, and then deselect Open via the home key. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Setting the language Tap → Settings → General → Language, and then select a language. The selected language is applied to S Voice only, not to the language displayed on the device. Using S Voice When you launch S Voice, the device starts voice recognition and the microphone icon turns red. Say a voice command. If you say a command and the device recognises it, the microphone icon at the bottom of the screen flashes green. Then, the device performs the command. Useful apps and features 96 Tips for better voice recognition: • Speak clearly. • Speak in quiet places. • Do not use offensive or slang words. • Avoid speaking in dialectal accents. The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands depending on your surroundings or how you speak. Waking up S Voice in standby mode If S Voice is not used for a certain period, it automatically switches to standby mode. Tap the microphone icon or say “Hi Galaxy” to the device to resume voice recognition. Changing the wake-up command You can change the wake-up command from “Hi Galaxy”. The wake-up command is used to launch S Voice when the device is in standby mode. Tap → Settings → Wake-up → Voice wake-up → Set wake-up command. Disabling voice feedback Tap → Disable Voice feedback. The device stops providing voice feedback when you say commands. Correcting unwanted voice commands You can edit the voice commands if the device does not recognise them correctly. To correct a voice command, tap the last speech bubble that contains your spoken text and edit the text with the keyboard. Useful apps and features 97 Email Setting up email accounts Tap Email on the Apps screen. Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Add account. If you have more than two email accounts, you can set one as the default account. Tap → Settings, select an account, and then tap Default account. Sending messages Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap at the top of the screen to compose a message. Enter a message. Insert files into the message, or use editing options. Add a CC or BCC. Add yourself as a recipient. Add recipients. Discard the message. Attach images, videos and others. Save the message for later delivery. Access additional options. Send the message. Add recipients from the contacts list. Enter a subject. Useful apps and features 98 Accessing additional options While composing a message, tap and access additional options. • Schedule sending: Send the message at a scheduled time. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. Messages may be sent at an incorrect time if you move across time zones or the network does not update the information. • Priority: Select a message’s priority level. • Security options: Set security options for the message. Reading messages Tap Email on the Apps screen. Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Open attachments. Reply to the message. Change the screen layout. Compose a message. Add this email address to the contacts list or view other options. Mark the message as a reminder. Forward the message. Access additional options. Delete the message. Useful apps and features 99 Calculator Use this app for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Apps screen. You can see the calculation history on the left side of the screen. To clear the history, tap . Clock Alarm On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Alarm. Setting alarms Tap in the alarms list, set an alarm time, select the days on which the alarm will repeat, set other various alarm options, and then tap Save. To activate or deactivate alarms, tap next to the alarm in the alarms list. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time and tone for the smart alarm. A smart alarm starts at a low volume a few minutes before a preset alarm is scheduled to sound. The volume of the smart alarm increases gradually until you turn it off or the preset alarm sounds. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. If you have previously enabled the snooze option, drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap → Delete, select alarms, and then tap Done. Useful apps and features 100 World clock On the Apps screen, tap Clock → World clock. Creating clocks Tap and enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap . Deleting clocks Tap → Delete, select clocks, and then tap Done. WatchON About WatchON Use this app to connect to a TV and use the device as a remote control. You can search for and select TV programmes and control channels with your device. Tap WatchON on the Apps screen. Useful apps and features 101 Connecting to a TV 1 Tap WatchON on the Apps screen. 2 Select a region and the broadcast service, and then follow the on-screen instructions. The available TV programmes appear. Using the device as a remote control You can turn the TV on or off, browse channels, or adjust the volume level on the TV using the device as a remote control. 1 Tap WatchON on the Apps screen. 2 Tap → Setup. 3 Select the TV brand. 4 Ensure that the device’s infrared port is facing the TV and tap Turn on your TV. Then, tap OK if the device turns on the TV. If the device does not turn on the TV, tap Retry, and then repeat this until the TV recognises the signal. 5 Select a channel source. Useful apps and features 102 6 When the setup is completed, tap . Additional functions Turn the TV on or off. TV control menus Watching TV using the device Select a TV programme from the list of available programmes to watch on the connected TV. Ensure that the device’s infrared port is facing the TV. 1 Tap WatchON on the Apps screen. 2 Select a category at the bottom of the screen. 3 Select a TV programme and tap Watch on TV. The selected programme will be shown on the connected TV. 4 Tap to change channels or adjust the volume. The remote control panel appears on the screen. Useful apps and features 103 Setting programme reminders 1 Select a TV programme to watch. 2 Tap , set an alarm to remind you of the TV programme’s start time, and then tap OK. The alarm goes off at the preset time. WebEx About WebEx Use this app to host and attend teleconferences. You can use various features, such as content sharing and HD video meeting. Before using this app • Ensure that the device is connected to a Wi-Fi network. • Ensure that you have a WebEx account. • This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This app may not work properly depending on firewall and network status. Useful apps and features 104 Signing up for an account 1 Tap WebEx on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Create an account on the sign in screen. 3 The webpage for joining WebEx will appear on the screen. You cannot use this app if a pop-up window appears on the screen informing that WebEx is not available in the region. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the account. Some features are not available when the trial period expires. Switch to a paid account to use all WebEx features. Refer to the WebEx website for more information. Useful apps and features 105 Creating a meeting session 1 Tap WebEx on the Apps screen and tap Sign in. 2 Enter the password and tap Sign in. 3 The WebEx screen appears on the device. Create a meeting session. Refresh the meeting list. Close the app. Join a meeting session by entering a session number. 4 Tap to create a meeting session. 5 Enter a topic for the meeting, set a password, and then tap Start now. Useful apps and features 106 6 Tap → Connect using Internet. 7 The microphone will be turned on and appears at the top right of the screen. You can have an audio meeting with others. View the session number. Share the screen. Invite people or remind invitees about the meeting. Turn the microphone on or off. Start or end a video meeting. Start or end an audio meeting. Check the meeting information. View the participants and chat with them. End the meeting session. Inviting people to a meeting Invite others to a meeting by sending an invitation email. You can also share a session number or the session’s phone number with others to invite them to a meeting. Inviting people by email 1 Tap → Invite by email. 2 Enter an email address and tap Send invitation. Inviting people by sending a session phone number You can invite others to a meeting by sharing the session phone number. A session phone number is created when you create a meeting session. It is provided in the invitation email along with other meeting information. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Useful apps and features 107 Joining a meeting session To join a meeting, use one of the following methods. Joining a meeting by session number 1 Tap WebEx on the Apps screen. 2 Sign in to your WebEx account. 3 Tap → Join by number. 4 Enter a session number to join and tap Join. A session number is created when a host creates a meeting session. If you do not know the number, contact the host. Useful apps and features 108 5 Tap → Connect using Internet. 6 The microphone will be turned on and appears at the top right of the screen. You can have an audio meeting with others. Joining a meeting by selecting one in My Meetings 1 Tap WebEx on the Apps screen. 2 Sign in to your WebEx account. 3 Select a meeting in My Meetings and tap Join. 4 Tap → Connect using Internet. 5 The microphone will be turned on and appears at the top right of the screen. You can join the audio meeting. Joining a meeting from an invitation email When someone invites you to a meeting, you will receive an invitation email. 1 Open the invitation email and tap the link in the email. 2 WebEx launches and the sign in screen appears. Useful apps and features 109 3 Sign in to your WebEx account. If you are already signed in to your account, a meeting screen will appear on the screen. 4 Tap → Connect using Internet. 5 The microphone will be turned on and appears at the top right of the screen. You can have an audio meeting with others. Joining a meeting by calling a session phone number You can join a meeting by calling the session’s phone number on a smartphone. Call the session phone number provided in the invitation email. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Running a meeting Running a video meeting 1 Tap → Start my video. 2 Your image is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. To stop the video meeting, tap → Stop my video. Running an audio meeting 1 Tap → Connect using Internet. 2 The microphone will be turned on and appears at the top right of the screen. To mute your sound, tap . The icon changes to . To stop the audio meeting, tap → Leave audio conference. Useful apps and features 110 Chatting with participants 1 Tap to view the participants list. 2 Select an account name and tap Chat. 3 Chatting window appears on the screen. To chat with all participants, tap Chat with everyone. Sharing the screen Share the current screen on your device with participants. Only the person designated as the presenter can share one’s screen. The person who creates a meeting is designated as the presenter at the beginning of a meeting. 1 Tap Share screen at the top of the screen if you are the presenter. 2 If you are using this feature for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions. 3 Tap Share screen in the pop-up window. 4 When the screen sharing feature is activated, will appear at the top right of the screen. The content on the screen of the presenter’s device will be displayed on the screens of the participants’ devices. Stopping the screen sharing feature Tap → Stop sharing. The device stops sharing the screen and displays the meeting screen. Useful apps and features 111 Changing the presenter The meeting host and the current presenter can change the presenter. 1 Tap and select a participant to designate as the presenter. 2 Tap Make presenter. 3 will appear next to the presenter’s account name. Closing or exiting the meeting Tap → End meeting or Leave meeting. When the network connection fails during a meeting If the meeting is still running, reconnect to the meeting. If the meeting has ended, restart the meeting. Useful apps and features 112 Businessweek+ Use this app to get the latest news about finance, business, market data, and more. Tap Businessweek+ on the Apps screen. When opening this app for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Downloading an article 1 Flick through issues by date and preview the cover images. On the Businessweek+ main screen, you can use one of the following options: • : Change the view mode. • : Access the downloaded issues list. • : Access the saved articles by category. • : View the detailed information about the app or change the settings. 2 Tap Download. An image appears and shows the download status. Flick through covers to download more articles. Opening and viewing articles When the download has completed, tap the cover of the issue and flick through pages. While viewing an article, you can use one of the following options: • : Access the downloaded issues list. • : Play the available video or audio clip. • : Access the saved articles by category. • : View and search for the index of various companies. Useful apps and features 113 • : View headlines or articles by category. • Related: View the related financial information in detail. • : Save the article to the clippings list. • : Change the font size. • : Send the current page to others. The available options may vary depending on the article you are viewing. Dropbox Use this app to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other devices that have Dropbox installed. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Tap Dropbox on the Apps screen. When you launch this app for the first time or restart it after performing a data reset, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the setup. Use the following functions: • : Upload or open files. Tap → Upload here to upload files. • : View the uploaded photos or videos. Tap to share or delete files, or create albums. • : Open files in the favourites list. • : View notifications. Useful apps and features 114 Evernote Use this app to create, sync, and share multimedia notes. You can add tags to the notes, or sort the notes into a notebook so that you can efficiently manage your ideas. Tap Evernote on the Apps screen. Sign in to your Evernote account. If you do not have one, create an Evernote account. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Sync notes with your account or change the settings. View the storage and account information. Search for notes. View the updated announcements on tips using the app and other features. Compose notes with various options. View notes in various modes. Useful apps and features 115 Composing notes You can create a note using images, voice recordings, and other attachments. Select an option for composing a note. While composing a note, use the following options: • : Set a reminder to the note. • : Attach files or use additional options. • : Take a photo and attach it to the note. • → Save: Save the note. • → Notebook: Select a save location. • → Tags: Add tags to the note. • → Set location: Add location to the note. • → Settings: Access additional options. Deleting notes Tap and hold a note, and then tap Delete. Flipboard Use this app to view live social network updates and news in a personalised magazine format. Tap Flipboard on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When you launch this app for the first time or restart it after performing a data reset, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the setup. On the Flipboard main screen, select from various news articles and subscriptions. Useful apps and features 116 Editing subscriptions On the Flipboard main screen, tap → My Flipboard to view your subscriptions. To delete subscriptions or to change their location, tap and hold an item. Then, drag the item to the rubbish bin or to a new location. To add more subscriptions, tap , select a subscription under DISCOVER MORE, and then tap . Creating personalised magazines Save various content by creating your own magazine to read later or to share with others. While you are reading content, tap to create a magazine. You can create a new magazine or save the selected content to an existing magazine. To view your magazines, tap → My Flipboard. To view help information, tap → My Flipboard → → Help. You can visit the Flipboard website for more information. Hancom Office Viewer About Hancom Office Viewer Use this app to view documents in various formats, including spreadsheets and presentations. Tap Hancom Office Viewer on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Useful apps and features 117 Searching documents Tap Hancom Office Viewer on the Apps screen. Tap Open to browse a document. Select documents or folders. Retrieve new documents and folders. Create a folder. Change the view mode. Sort documents and folders. To search for recently-used documents, tap Recent Documents. Reading documents Tap Hancom Office Viewer on the Apps screen. Tap a document in Recent Documents or in a folder. Tap or , and then use one of the following functions: Word processor • Find: Search for text. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Document Info: View document details such as title, date, and author. • Show/Hide Comments: Hide or show comments on the document. Useful apps and features 118 • Print: Print the document by connecting the device to a printer. Refer to Mobile printing for more information. • Send: Send the document to others or share it. • Edit: Edit the document. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. • Help: View information about Hancom Office Viewer. Presentation • Find: Search for text. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Document Info: View document details such as title, date, and author. • Slide Show: Start a slideshow from the first page. • From Current Slide: Start a slideshow from the current page. • Show Presenter View: Display presentation tools on the device when it is connected to an external monitor. • Print: Print the document by connecting the device to a printer. Refer to Mobile printing for more information. • Send: Send the document to others or share it. • Edit: Edit the document. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. • Help: View information about Hancom Office Viewer. Spreadsheet • Find: Search for text. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Document Info: View document details such as title, date, and author. • Sort: Sort cells by specific criteria. • Show Formulas: View the formulas inside cells instead of their calculated results. Useful apps and features 119 • Freeze Panes: Keep the selected row in place. • Gridlines: Hide or show gridlines. • Show All Comments: Hide or show memos on the document. • Print Area: Select an area to print. • Print: Print the document by connecting the device to a printer. Refer to Mobile printing for more information. • Send: Send the document to others or share it. • Edit: Edit the document. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. • Help: View information about Hancom Office Viewer. PDF • Search: Search for text. • Send: Send the document to others or share it. • Properties: View document details such as title, date, and author. • Zoom: Change the view size. • Hide comments / Show comments: Hide or show comments on the document. • Vertical page scrolling / Continuous view / Horizontal page scrolling: Change the view mode. • Reading view: View the document contents only, without margins. • Go to page: Move to a specified page. • Bookmarks: View bookmarks on the document. • Print: Print the document by connecting the device to a printer. Refer to Mobile printing for more information. The available functions may differ depending on the selected file. Useful apps and features 120 Managing documents Tap Hancom Office Viewer on the Apps screen. While browsing a document, tap , select documents or folders, and then use one of the following options. • : Rename a document or a folder. • : Copy documents or folders to another folder. • : Move documents or folders to another folder. • : Delete the documents or folders. • : Send documents to others or share them. NYTimes Use this app to browse and navigate articles and more. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. 1 Tap NYTimes on the Apps screen. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. When the NYTimes main screen appears, use one of the following options: • : Refresh the article list. • : Search for articles. • : Access additional options or change the settings. 3 Tap an article to read. While viewing an article, you can use one of the following options: • : View other users’ comments on the article. • : Send the current page to others. • : Save the article to your list. • : Add your own annotations to the article. • : Access additional options or change the settings. Useful apps and features 121 Google apps Google provides entertainment, social network, and business apps. You may require a Google account to access some apps. Refer to Setting up accounts for more information. To view more app information, open the app’s main screen, tap → Help. Some apps may not be available or may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Chrome Search for information and browse webpages. Google Mail Send or receive emails via the Google Mail service. Google+ Share your news and follow updates that your family, friends, and others share. You can also back up your photos and videos, and more. Maps Find your location on the map, search for locations, and view location information for various places. Play Music Discover, listen to, and share music on your device. Play Movies & TV Watch videos stored on your device and download various content to watch from the Play Store. Useful apps and features 122 Play Books Download various books from Play Store and read them. Play Newsstand Read news and magazines that interest you in one convenient location. Play Games Download games from Play Store and play them with others. Drive Store your content on the cloud, access it from anywhere, and share it with others. YouTube Watch or create videos and share them with others. Photos Manage photos, albums, and videos that you have saved on the device and uploaded to Google+. Hangouts Chat with your friends individually or in groups and use images, emoticons, and video calls while you are chatting. Google Search quickly for items on the Internet or your device. Voice Search Search quickly for items by saying a keyword or phrase. Google Settings Configure settings for some features provided by Google. 123 Connecting with other devices Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via Bluetooth. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. Connecting with other devices 124 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Bluetooth, tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it, and then tap Scan. The detected devices are listed. To set the device as visible to other devices, tap the device name. 2 Select a device to pair with. If your device has paired with the device before, tap the device name without confirming the auto-generated passkey. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. 3 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many apps support data transfer via Bluetooth. You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other Bluetooth devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Bluetooth, and then select a device to transfer the image to. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. Or, set your device as visible to other devices. 4 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device. Connecting with other devices 125 Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → → Album → Download folder. Unpairing Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Bluetooth. The device displays the paired devices on the list. 2 Tap next to the device’s name to unpair. 3 Tap Unpair. Wi-Fi Direct About Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Connecting to other devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct. The detected devices are listed. 3 Select a device to connect to. To connect to multiple devices, tap Multi-connect. To change the device name, tap → Rename device. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device to confirm. Connecting with other devices 126 Sending and receiving data You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct, and then select a device to transfer the image to. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device. Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → → Album → Download folder. Ending the device connection 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Wi-Fi. 2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct. The device displays the connected devices in the list. 3 Tap End connection → OK to disconnect the devices. Connecting with other devices 127 Quick Connect About Quick Connect Use this feature to easily search and connect to nearby devices. You can use the device as a remote control by connecting it to a TV. • Connection methods may vary depending on the type of connected devices or the shared content. • Device name may vary depending on the Bluetooth devices to pair with. For example, the device name can be shown as BT MAC. Before using this feature • When connecting to a device that supports the Quick Connect feature, turn on the device’s screen to make it detectable. • When connecting to a device that does not support the Quick Connect feature, ensure that Wi-Fi Direct or the Bluetooth feature is activated. Connecting to other devices 1 Open the notifications panel and tap Quick Connect. When the panel opens, the Bluetooth feature is activated automatically and the device searches for nearby devices. 2 Select a device to connect to. The next steps may vary depending on the connected device. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection between the devices. To allow nearby devices to search for your device and connect to it, tap → Always ready to connect, and then tap the Always ready to connect switch to activate it. Connecting with other devices 128 Re-searching for devices If the desired device does not appear in the list, search for the device. Tap and select the device from the list of detected devices. Disconnecting devices To deactivate the Quick Connect feature, tap at the top of the screen. Alternatively, tap . Sharing content Share content with the connected devices. 1 Open the notifications panel and tap Quick Connect. 2 Select a device from the list of detected devices. 3 Select a media category. 4 Select the content to share and tap Done. Your device sends the content to the connected device. Connecting to a TV Connect the device to a TV and control the TV by using the device as a remote control. 1 Open the notifications panel and tap Quick Connect. 2 Select a TV from the list of detected devices. When the device is connected to the TV, a remote control layout appears on the screen. When you connect the device to a TV for the first time, tap Set up Remote control. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete connecting the devices. 3 Control the connected TV using the remote control. Connecting with other devices 129 SideSync 3.0 About SideSync 3.0 Use this app to control a smartphone’s screen with a virtual smartphone screen on your tablet. • On your tablet, view messages or use the smartphone’s chat room. • On your tablet, watch a video playing on the smartphone on a larger display. • Easily transfer files between your tablet and smartphone by dragging and dropping the files. Before using this app • Your tablet and smartphone must support Wi-Fi Direct. Otherwise, both devices must be connected to the same access point. • SideSync 3.0 must be installed on both your tablet and smartphone. If it is not installed on any device, download and install it from Samsung Apps or Play Store. • SideSync 3.0 operates only on devices with Android version 4.4 or higher. Connecting your tablet and a smartphone 1 On your tablet, tap SideSync 3.0 on the Apps screen. 2 Launch SideSync 3.0 on a smartphone. Connecting with other devices 130 3 The tablet searches for available smartphones automatically. Select one of the detected smartphones. 4 Tap OK on the smartphone screen. 5 The smartphone’s virtual screen is displayed on your tablet and the smartphone’s screen is turned off. Connecting with other devices 131 Using the virtual smartphone screen Browse the screen and use apps in the virtual smartphone screen. You can send or receive messages, or chat with others. • Some features, such as Camera and Screen Mirroring, may not work in the virtual smartphone screen. • The smartphone’s virtual screen may differ depending on the smartphone. Close SideSync 3.0. Virtual smartphone screen Back button Home button Recent apps button Screen rotation Access additional options. Screen capture Open the same webpage in the web browser of your tablet. Minimise the screen. Maximise the screen to fit your tablet's screen. Connecting with other devices 132 Moving the virtual smartphone screen Tap and drag the top edge of the virtual smartphone screen to move it to another location. Adjusting the size of the virtual smartphone screen 1 Tap and hold at the bottom right of the virtual smartphone screen. 2 When the frame appears, drag the frame to adjust the size. Entering text When you enter text in the virtual smartphone screen, the tablet’s keyboard appears. Enter text using the keyboard. Connecting with other devices 133 Switching between the smartphone screen and the virtual smartphone screen It is not possible to use the smartphone screen and the virtual smartphone screen at the same time. When you are using the virtual smartphone screen on the tablet, the smartphone screen turns off. Using the smartphone screen Press the Home button on the smartphone to turn on the smartphone screen and turn off the virtual smartphone screen on the tablet. Using the virtual smartphone screen Tap Switch to tablet on the tablet’s screen to turn on the virtual smartphone screen and turn off the smartphone screen. Playing music or videos on the tablet Play music or videos stored in the smartphone via the screen and speaker of the tablet. 1 Open a music or video file in the virtual smartphone screen on the tablet. 2 The selected file is played using the tablet’s screen and speaker. Adjust the volume on the virtual smartphone screen or the tablet during playback. Connecting with other devices 134 Copying files between devices Copying files from the smartphone to the tablet 1 Tap and hold a file on the virtual smartphone screen. 2 Select the files to copy, tap and hold any selected file, and then drag it to the tablet’s screen. 3 My Files is launched on the tablet’s screen. Select a folder to save the file in and tap Done. Copying files from the tablet to the smartphone 1 Tap and hold a file on the tablet’s screen. 2 Select the files to copy, tap and hold any selected file, and then drag it to the virtual smartphone screen. 3 My Files is launched on the virtual smartphone screen. Select a folder to save the file in and tap Done. Using call functions with the tablet You can use your smartphone’s call functions with the speaker and the microphone of the tablet. Receive an incoming call or make a call using virtual smartphone screen. For more information about the call functions, refer to the smartphone’s user manual. Connecting with other devices 135 Remote PC Starting Remote PC Use this app to view and control your computer’s screen on your device by connecting your device and computer via a Wi-Fi or local area network. You can also easily view and transfer files between your device and computer. Before using this app • Ensure that you have a registered Samsung account. • Ensure that the computer is turned on. • Ensure that the Agent is installed on your computer. • To use this feature, perform the following in numerical order: 1. Register the device with your Samsung account. 2. Register the computer with your Samsung account. 3. Remotely connect the device and the computer. Registering the device 1 On your device, tap Remote PC on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Next on the greeting page. Start the app. Connecting with other devices 136 3 Tap Sign in, enter your Samsung account and password, and then tap Sign in again. If a Samsung account is not registered, follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung account. Registering a computer 1 On your computer, launch the web browser and visit remotepc.rview.com. 2 Sign in to your Samsung account. You must sign in to the same Samsung account that you use on your device. 3 Install the Agent if it is not installed on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to enter a display name for the computer, proxy settings, and password. For more information about proxy server settings, contact your network administrator. will appear on the task bar when the installation is completed. 4 Tap Check Connection (Refresh). Connecting with other devices 137 Connecting the device and a computer remotely 1 Tap Remote PC on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Check Connection (Refresh). View the name of the computer. Connect the device and the computer remotely. 3 Tap ON computer. 4 Enter the password for the connection and tap OK. Tap Forgotten your password? if you do not remember the password. 5 The connection is made and you can control the computer remotely on the device. Connecting with other devices 138 Controlling the computer on the device After connecting the devices, you can view and control your computer’s screen on the device. You can also open or edit files in the computer and transfer them to the device. Scroll through the screen. Access additional options. Connection status Tap the screen and tap at the bottom of the screen to use one of the following: • Mouse: Display the mouse pointer on the device’s screen. • Keyboard: Open the keyboard to enter text in the selected text field. • Remote Explorer: Open the file manager to search for files and transfer files between the connected devices. • Switch Window: Switch between two monitors when the computer is connected to dual monitors. • Close: Close the currently-running app. • More: – Screen lock: Lock the device’s screen to disable the zoom and scroll functions. – Settings: Change the connection settings. – Ctrl + Alt + Delete: Open the task manager on your computer. – Disconnect: Close the connection between the device and the computer. Connecting with other devices 139 Transferring files between your device and the computer 1 Tap → Remote Explorer. 2 Tap and hold a file on the computer’s file manager panel. Then, drag it to the device’s file manager panel. You can also move a file vice versa. The computer's file manager The device's file manager Disconnecting the device and a computer On your device, tap → OK. On your computer, right click on the task bar and exit the Agent programme. Connecting with other devices 140 Screen Mirroring About Screen Mirroring Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature. Screen Mirroring -enabled devices (AllShare Cast dongle, HomeSync, and Wi-Fi Miracast devices) • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP 2.X) may not be compatible with this feature. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be detected or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience. Connecting with other devices 141 Viewing content on a TV Before you connect a TV to your device, connect the TV and the screen mirroring-enabled device. To set up the connection, refer to the device’s user manual. The following actions are an example of viewing content on a TV connected via an AllShare Cast dongle. 1 Connect the screen mirroring-enabled device to the TV using an HDMI cable. 2 On the TV, select a connection mode, such as HDMI mode, to connect an external device. 3 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Screen Mirroring. The detected devices are listed. 4 Select a device to connect to. Your device’s screen appears on the TV screen. If you connect the device for the first time, tap and hold the dongle’s name in the list and enter the PIN shown on the TV screen. 5 Open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. Stopping viewing the content On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Screen Mirroring, and then tap the Screen Mirroring switch to deactivate it. Connecting with other devices 142 Mobile printing Connect the device to a printer via Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct, and print image or documents. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. Connecting to a printer On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Connections → Printing, select a printer type, and then tap the switch at the top right of the screen to activate it. The device searches for printers that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your device. Select a printer to use as the default printer. To add printers manually, tap → Add printer → , enter details, and then tap OK. To change printing settings, tap → Printing settings. Printing content While viewing content, such as images or documents, tap → Print, and then select a printer. 143 Device & data manager Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → About device → Software update → Update now. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information about how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Device & data manager 144 Transferring files between the device and a computer Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the device when you are transferring files. Doing so may cause data loss or device damage. • Do not disconnect the device from the computer when you play files saved in the device on the connected computer. After you finish playing the file, disconnect the device from the computer. • The devices may not connect properly if they are connected via a USB hub. Directly connect the device to the computer’s USB port. Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Device & data manager 145 Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer app that manages media contents and personal information with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Backing up and restoring data Keep your personal information, app data, and settings safe on your device. You can back up your sensitive information to a backup account and access it later. Using a Google account 1 Tap Settings on the Apps screen. 2 Tap General → Backup and reset and tick Back up my data. 3 Tap Backup account and select an account as the backup account. To restore data, you must sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard. You can launch and open the setup wizard by performing a factory data reset on the device. If you do not sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard, you cannot restore the backup data. Device & data manager 146 Using a Samsung account 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Accounts → Add account → Samsung account, and then sign in to your Samsung account. 2 Tap Settings on the Apps screen. 3 Tap General → Cloud → Backup, tick the items to back up, and then tap Back up now → Back up. To restore data, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Cloud → Restore, select the items, and then tap Restore now. Performing a data reset Delete all settings and data on the device. Before performing a factory data reset, ensure you back up all important data stored on the device. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. The device automatically restarts. 147 Settings About Settings Use this app to configure the device, set app options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Apps screen. To search for settings by entering keywords, tap . Connections Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. To use options, tap . • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. • Help: View help information for Wi-Fi. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy Tap → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. Setting Network notification The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify when available. Tap → Advanced and tick Network notification to activate this feature. Settings 148 Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Bluetooth, and then tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via Bluetooth. • Rename device: Change the device name. • Help: View help information for Bluetooth. Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Flight mode. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Data usage. • Data usage cycle: Set a monthly reset date to monitor data usage between periods. To use more options, tap . • Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email. You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → General → Accounts. • Mobile hotspots: Select mobile hotspots to prevent apps that are running in the background from using them. Settings 149 Location Change settings for location information permissions. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Location, and then tap the Location switch to activate it. • Mode: Select a method to collect your location data. • RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS: View which apps request your current location information and their battery usage. • LOCATION SERVICES: View the location services your device is using. • My places: Set up profiles that will be used for specific locations when you use GPS, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth features to find your current location. More networks Customise settings to control networks. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → More networks. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). Ethernet The Ethernet option is available when an Ethernet adaptor is connected to the device. Use this option to activate the Ethernet feature and configure network settings. Settings 150 Nearby devices Change settings for sharing content when you connect the device to nearby devices. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Nearby devices, and then tap the Nearby devices switch to activate it. • DEVICE NAME: View the media server name for your device. • Content to share: Set the device to share your content with other devices. • Allowed devices: View the list of devices that can access your device. • Denied devices: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. • Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files. • Download from other devices: Set the device to accept uploads from other devices. Printing Configure settings for printer plug-ins installed on the device. You can search for available printers or add one manually to print files via Wi-Fi or cloud services. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Printing. Screen Mirroring Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others. On the Settings screen, tap Connections → Screen Mirroring. Settings 151 Device Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Sound. • Sound mode: Set the device to use sound mode or silent mode. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Vibration intensity: Adjust the force of the vibration notification. • Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an app or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen. • Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when you tap keys. • SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS: Change the notification settings for each app. • Sound when tapped: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Vibrate when tapped: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched. Display Change the display settings. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Display. • Font: – Font style: Change the font type for display text. – Font size: Change the font size. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. Settings 152 • Screen rotation: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. – Smart rotation: Set the interface not to rotate according to the orientation of your face. • Smart stay: Set the device to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Screen mode: – Adaptive display: Use this mode for optimising the display according to the display settings. – AMOLED cinema: Use this mode to make the display tone more vivid. – AMOLED photo: Use this mode to make the display tone look like real colours. – Basic: Use this mode for dim surroundings, such as in a dark room. • Reading mode: Select which apps will use reading mode. In reading mode, the device helps protect your eyes when reading at night. • Auto adjust screen tone: Set the device to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is charging or connected to a desktop dock. • Touch key light duration: Set the duration that the Recent apps button and the Back button’s backlight remains on. • Increase touch sensitivity: Set the device to allow use of the touch screen with gloves on. Depending on the type of material you wear while touching the device, some commands may not be recognised. Settings 153 Wallpaper Change the wallpaper settings. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Wallpaper. • Home screen: Select a background image for the Classic Home screen. • Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. • Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Classic Home screen and the locked screen. Lock screen Change the settings for the locked screen. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Lock screen. • Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock method selected. • Lock screen card: Set the device to display cards on the locked screen that show the current weather, news updates, your schedule, and more. Change the settings for the cards. • Clock widget options: Configure settings for the clock widget. – Clock size: Change the clock size. – Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. • Shortcuts: Set the device to show and edit app shortcuts on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. • Unlock effect: Select an effect that you see when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. Settings 154 Multi window Set the device to use Multi window. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Multi window, and then tap the Multi window switch to activate it. • Open in multi window view: Set the device to activate the Multi window feature when you open files from My Files or Video. Also, the device activates this feature when you view attachments in messages. Notification panel Customise the items that appear on the notifications panel. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Notification panel. • Brightness and volume: Set the device to display the brightness and volume adjustment bars on the notifications panel. • Recommended apps: Set the device to display a list of recommended apps on the notifications panel based on your actions, such as connecting a headset to the device. • Set quick setting buttons: Rearrange the quick setting buttons displayed on the notifications panel. Toolbox Set the device to use the toolbox. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Toolbox, and then tap the Toolbox switch to activate it. View the apps list to display in the toolbox. To edit the apps list, tap . Settings 155 Motions Activate the motion recognition feature and change the settings that control motion recognition on your device. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Motions. • Mute/Pause: – Covering screen with hand: Set the device to pause media playback when you touch the screen with your palm. – Smart pause: Set the device to pause video playback when you look away from the screen. • Palm swipe to capture: Set the device to capture a screenshot when you sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen. Accessibility Use this feature to improve accessibility to the device. Refer to About Accessibility for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Accessibility. Blocking mode Select which notifications will be blocked and how long to block them. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Blocking mode, and then tap the Blocking mode switch to activate it. Users Set up and manage user profiles for personalised settings. Refer to Multiple users for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Users. Settings 156 Private mode Set the device to prevent others from accessing your personal content by activating private mode. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Private mode, and then tap the Private mode switch to activate it. • Unlock method: Set or change the unlock method to activate private mode. Finger Scanner Register your fingerprint to the device to secure the device or sign in to your Samsung account. On the Settings screen, tap Device → Finger Scanner. • Fingerprint manager: Register or delete fingerprint information. • Change alternative password: Change the alternative password to use if the device does not recognise the fingerprint. • Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. • Verify Samsung account: Set the device to verify your Samsung account with fingerprints. • Pay with PayPal: Set the device to verify your PayPal account and to authorise purchases using your fingerprints. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. General Accounts Add email or SNS accounts. On the Settings screen, tap General → Accounts. Settings 157 Cloud Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud storage. On the Settings screen, tap General → Cloud. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. On the Settings screen, tap General → Backup and reset. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and app data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and app data when the apps are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. On the Settings screen, tap General → Language and input. Language Select a display language for all menus and apps. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Settings 158 Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • Select input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by tapping the space bar. • Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. • Keyboard swipe: – None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature. – Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. – Cursor control: Enable the smart keyboard navigation feature to move the cursor by scrolling the keyboard. – Flick input: Enable or disable the keyboard to enter numbers or symbols when you tap a key and then flick your finger upwards. • Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Vibration: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched. • Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Settings 159 Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Voice search • Language: Select a language for voice recognition. • “Ok Google” hotword detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the wake-up command while using the search app. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Personalised recognition: Set the device to use information from your Google dashboard to improve speech recognition accuracy. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow voice input of search keywords via the Bluetooth headset microphone when a Bluetooth headset is connected. Text-to-speech options • PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech feature. Settings 160 Mouseover Activate the Mouseover feature. Perform various functions while the pointer of the mouse or trackpad connected to your device is moving over the screen. • Preview and icon labels: Set the device to display a preview of the content or pop-up information when the pointer points at an item. • List scrolling: Set the device to scroll through lists by moving the pointer to an edge of the screen. Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. On the Settings screen, tap General → Date and time. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Accessories Change the accessory settings. On the Settings screen, tap General → Accessories. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting. • Automatic unlock: Set the device to unlock automatically when the cover is flipped open. Settings 161 Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. On the Settings screen, tap General → Battery. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. Power saving Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode. Refer to Power saving feature for more information. On the Settings screen, tap General → Power saving. • Power saving mode: Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for powersaving mode. – Restrict performance: Set the device to limit various options, such as turning off the Recent apps button and the Back button’s backlight. – Greyscale mode: Set the device to display colours on the screen as grey tones. • Ultra power saving mode: Extend standby time and reduce battery consumption by displaying a simpler layout and allowing limited access to an app. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Settings 162 Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. On the Settings screen, tap General → Storage. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default apps occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device. Security Change settings for securing the device. On the Settings screen, tap General → Security. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. – ACCOUNT REGISTRATION: Add or view your Samsung account. – Use wireless networks: Set the device to allow location data collection or to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi. • Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device from the Find my mobile website. Settings 163 • Make passwords visible: Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Set the device to allow the installation of apps from unknown sources. • Verify apps: Set the device to allow Google to check the apps for harmful content before installing them. • Security policy updates: Set the device to check and download security updates. • Send security reports: Set the device to automatically send the updated security reports to Samsung. • Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various apps. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. About device Access device information, edit the device name, or update device software. On the Settings screen, tap General → About device. Applications Application manager View and manage the apps on your device. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Application manager. Default applications Select a default setting for using apps. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Default applications. Settings 164 Contacts Change settings for using contacts. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Contacts. • Import/Export: Import or export contacts. • Contacts to display: Select which contacts to display. • Only contacts with phones: Set the device to display contacts that only have a phone number. • Sort by: Select an option for sorting contacts. • Display contacts by: Select an option for displaying contact names. • Send contact information: Select a method to share contacts. • Accounts: Add or edit accounts to sync contacts with. Email Change settings for managing and sending emails. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Email. • General settings: – Display: Change the settings for displaying emails. – Composing and sending: Default image size: Select the size of attachment when you attach an image. Delay email sending: Set the time the device waits before sending emails after you tap the send button. – Default display: Set the device to open a specific screen after you delete emails. – Confirm deletions: Set the device to request a confirmation before deleting messages. – Priority senders: Change settings for priority senders. – Spam addresses: Add email addresses to block. • ACCOUNT SETTINGS: Manage existing email accounts or add new accounts. Settings 165 Gallery Change settings for using Gallery. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Gallery. • Tags: – Tag buddy: Set the device to display contextual tags. – Face tag: Register the faces in the image as face tags. Internet Change settings for using Internet. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → Internet. • Account: Sign in to a Samsung account. • Set homepage: Set a default homepage. • Auto fill forms: Set the device to automatically enter user information, such as names or phone numbers when you fill out forms on webpages. • Privacy: Manage personal data when visiting webpages. • Screen and text: Change the settings, adjust the font size, and more when viewing webpages. • Content settings: Change the settings for managing cookies from visiting webpages or set whether or not to display pop-up windows, and more. • Bandwidth management: Change the bandwidth settings. Settings 166 S Planner Change settings for using S Planner. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → S Planner. • View settings: – First day of week: Select the first day of a week. – Hide declined events: Set the device to hide expired events. – Show week number: Set the device to display the number of weeks in a year. – Hide completed task: Set the device to hide completed tasks. – Weather: Set the device to display the weather forecast. • Time zone: – Lock time zone: Set the device to leave the time zone setting unchanged when moving across time zones. – Select time zone: Select the time zone. – View today according to: Set the calendar to use your home time zone or a selected time zone. • Event notification: – Select alert type: Select the notification settings for events. – Select ringtone: Select a ringtone for events or tasks. – Vibration: Set the device to vibrate to alert you to events or tasks. – Quick responses: Select or create templates for sending messages to event participants. Settings 167 S Voice Change settings for voice recognition. On the Settings screen, tap Applications → S Voice. • General: – Language: Select a language for voice recognition. – Hide offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. – About: View version information. • Wake-up: – Open via the home key: Set the device to launch S Voice when you press the Home button twice. – Voice wake-up: Set the device to start voice recognition by saying a wake-up command while using S Voice. • Advanced: – Check missed events: Set the device to launch S Voice and alert you to missed notifications when a headset is connected and you press the headset button. – Personal briefing: Set the device to display events saved in S Planner while using S Voice. – Erase S Voice data: Delete the data used by S Voice from the S Voice server. – Home address: Enter your home address to use location information with the voice command feature. – Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information to use Facebook with S Voice. – Sign in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information to use Twitter with S Voice. 168 Accessibility About Accessibility Accessibility menus are special features for those with certain physical disabilities, such as poor eyesight or hearing impairment. You can use the following features: • TalkBack • Changing the font size • Magnifying the screen • Notification reminders • Reversing the display colours • Colour adjustment • Turning off all sounds • Flash notification • Adjusting the sound balance • Mono audio mode • Customising caption settings • Assistive menus • Setting tap and hold delay options • Interaction control mode • Single tap mode • Managing accessibility settings To use accessibility menus, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility. Accessibility 169 Using the Home button to open accessibility menus You can access the following accessibility menus by pressing the Home button three times quickly. • Accessibility • TalkBack • Negative colours • Interaction control On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility, and then tap the Direct access switch to activate it. Then, select an accessibility menu to open when you press the Home button three times quickly. If you select more than one menu, the device displays a pop-up window asking which menu to use each time you press the Home button three times quickly. To enable Interaction control on the accessibility menus, activate the feature. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction, and then tap the Interaction control switch to activate it. Voice feedback (TalkBack) Activating or deactivating TalkBack When you activate TalkBack, the device reads aloud the text on the screen or selected features. This feature is useful if you have difficulty viewing the screen. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack. 2 Tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. To deactivate TalkBack, tap the switch at the top of the screen and tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. 3 Tap OK. To deactivate TalkBack, tap OK and tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. Accessibility 170 When you activate TalkBack, the device provides voice feedback and reads aloud the features you select. Also, the device provides voice feedback when the screen turns off, when you have new notifications, and more. When you activate Explore by touch while using TalkBack, the device reads selected items aloud. Firstly, the device reads aloud items on the screen when you tap them. Then, the device will perform the function or open the app if you tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. If Explore by touch is deactivated, the device cannot perform various features that require finger gestures. To activate Explore by touch, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings, and then tick Explore by touch. Some features are not available while you are using TalkBack. Controlling the screen with finger gestures You can use various finger gestures to control the screen while you are using TalkBack. If Explore by touch is deactivated, the device cannot perform some of the features that require finger gestures. To activate Explore by touch, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings, and then tick Explore by touch. • Exploring the screen: Place a finger on the screen and move your finger to explore the screen. Select and hold on an item and the device reads aloud the item. When you release your finger, the item under your finger is selected. • Selecting items: Tap an item to select it. Or, select and hold on an item while exploring the screen, and then release your finger. • Opening the selected item: While selected items are read aloud, when you hear the item you want, release your finger from the item. Then, tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. • Selecting the previous item: Scroll quickly upwards or to the left on the screen with one finger. Accessibility 171 • Selecting the next item: Scroll quickly downwards or to the right on the screen with one finger. • Scrolling the lists: Scroll the screen upwards or downwards with two fingers. • Returning to the previous page: Scroll the screen to the right with two fingers. • Moving to the next page: Scroll the screen to the left with two fingers. • Unlocking the screen: Scroll the screen in any direction within the locked screen area with two fingers. • Opening the notifications panel: Drag the top of the screen downwards with two fingers. • Opening the quick setting panel: Drag the top of the screen downwards with three fingers. You can configure finger gesture settings for TalkBack in Manage gestures. Refer to Configuring finger gesture settings for more information. Configuring finger gesture settings When you use TalkBack, you can perform actions using finger gestures. You can perform actions such as, returning to the previous screen, opening the Home screen, and more. Configure finger gestures before using them. Configuring settings for vertical gestures You can use two-part vertical gestures by dragging your finger upwards and downwards from the bottom of the screen, or vice versa. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings → Manage gestures → Two-part vertical gestures. Then, select one of the following features: • Move to the first and last items on screen: When you drag your finger upwards and then downwards on the screen, the first item at the top of the screen is selected. When you drag your finger downwards and then upwards on the screen, the last item at the bottom of the screen is selected. • Cycle through reading granularities: When you drag your finger upwards and then downwards on the screen, the reading unit changes. The reading unit changes to page, paragraph, line, word, character, and default. When you drag your finger downwards and then upwards on the screen, the reading units change in reverse order. Accessibility 172 Configuring settings for shortcut gestures Use this feature to configure eight shortcut gestures. You can configure gestures such as, dragging your finger upwards and then to the right without releasing it, and more. You can change shortcut gestures or assign features to empty shortcuts. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings → Manage gestures. Select a gesture, and then assign a feature to it. The following features are available: • Back button: Return to the previous screen. • Home button: Open the Home screen. • Recent apps button: Open the list of recently-used apps. • Open notifications: Open the notifications panel. • Open global context menu: Open the global contextual menu. Tap and hold the screen to open the circular global contextual menu. You can use features, such as Quick navigation, Read from top, Spell last utterance, and Read from next item. Then, explore menus by drawing a circle with your finger without releasing it. When you find the menu you want, release your finger from the menu to select it. Tap Pause feedback at the top left of the screen to pause voice feedback. Tap TalkBack Settings at the top right of the screen to access the TalkBack settings. Refer to Configuring settings for TalkBack for more information. • Open local context menu: Open the local contextual menu. You can select a unit for reading text on the screen. When you use this feature while entering text, contextual menus, such as the cursor control menu, are available. Tap and hold the screen to open the circular contextual menu. Then, explore menus by drawing a circle with your finger without releasing it. When you find the menu you want, release your finger from the menu to select it. • Read from top: Read items aloud from the first item to the last item in order. • Read from next item: Read items aloud starting from the item next to the selected item in order. Accessibility 173 Changing reading units When you use TalkBack, you can listen to the text on the screen. You can drag your finger up, down, left, or right to select the text you want. By default, the device reads text aloud in the selected area. Or, you can set the device to read text in other reading units, such as lines or paragraphs. Changing reading units by using the local contextual menu 1 Select some text to read. 2 Drag your finger upwards, and then to the right without releasing it to open the local contextual menu. 3 Tap and hold the screen and draw a circle with your finger to explore menus. Then, release your finger when you hear Change granularity. 4 Tap and hold the screen again and draw a circle with your finger to explore menus. Then, release your finger when you hear the reading unit you want. To change the shortcut gesture to open the local contextual menu, refer to Configuring settings for shortcut gestures. Changing reading units using two-part vertical gestures When you drag your finger upwards and then downwards on the screen, the reading unit changes. The reading unit changes to page, paragraph, line, word, character, and then default. When you drag your finger downwards and then upwards on the screen, the reading units change in reverse order. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings → Manage gestures → Two-part vertical gestures → Cycle through reading granularities. You can listen to the text next to the currently-selected text using the current reading unit. To listen to the next section of text, drag your finger downwards or to the right on the screen. Also, you can listen to the text before the currently-selected text using the current reading unit. To listen to the previous section of text, drag your finger upwards or to the left on the screen. Accessibility 174 Pausing TalkBack Open the global contextual menu by dragging your finger downwards and then to the right on the screen without releasing it. When you select Pause feedback at the top left of the screen, TalkBack pauses. When TalkBack is paused, you can resume it by turning on the screen or other methods. To change the method of resuming TalkBack, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings → Resume from suspend. Then, select an option. To change the shortcut gesture to open the global contextual menu, refer to Configuring settings for shortcut gestures. Using the quick navigation feature With the quick navigation feature, you can access menus by drawing a circle on the screen without scrolling up or down to select an item. Open the global contextual menu by dragging your finger downwards and then to the right on the screen without releasing it. Tap and hold the screen and draw a circle around the menu with your finger to explore the menus. Then, release your finger when you hear Quick navigation. Tap the screen again and draw a circle around the menu with your finger to explore the menus. Then, release your finger when you hear the menu you want. Adding and managing image labels You can assign labels to images on the screen. The device reads aloud the labels when the images are selected. Add labels to unlabelled images by using the local contextual menu. Open the local contextual menu by dragging your finger upwards and then to the right on the screen without releasing it. Tap and hold the screen and a draw a circle around the menu with your finger to explore the menus. When you hear the add label menu, release your finger to add labels. To view the labels, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings → Manage customised labels. Accessibility 175 Configuring settings for TalkBack Configure settings for TalkBack for your convenience. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → TalkBack → Settings. Alternatively, open the global contextual menu by dragging your finger downwards and then to the right on the screen without releasing it. Then, drag your finger to the top right of the screen and release it when you hear TalkBack Settings. • Speech volume: Adjust the volume level for voice feedback. Voice feedback volume can vary depending on the media volume. To adjust the media volume, press the Volume button left or right while listening to voice feedback. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Sound → Volume, and then drag the volume adjustment bar for the media content to the left or right. • Use pitch changes: Set the device to read aloud text at a low pitch when it is entered using a keyboard. • Keyboard echo: Set the device to read aloud text or symbols entered using a keyboard. You can also set the type of keyboard to apply this feature to. • Speak when screen is off: Set the device to provide voice feedback when the screen is turned off. • Shake to start continuous reading: Set the device to read aloud the text displayed on the screen when you shake the device. You can select from various shaking speeds. • Vibration feedback: Set the device to vibrate when you explore the screen. • Sound feedback: Set the device to emit a sound when you control the screen, such as scrolling the screen, and more. Accessibility 176 • Focus speech audio: Set the device to turn the media volume down when the device reads an item aloud. • Sound volume: Adjust the volume that sound is played when you touch the screen to control it. This feature is available when Sound feedback is selected. • Explore by touch: Set the device to read aloud the items under your finger. Move your finger anywhere on the screen to find the item you want. When you hear the item you want, release your finger from it and tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly to open it. You can move to the page you want by scrolling the screen left or right with two fingers. To learn about controlling the screen using the explore by touch feature, refer to Controlling the screen with finger gestures for more information. • Automatically scroll lists: Set the device to automatically scroll through the rest of the list not displayed on the screen and read the items aloud. • Single-tap selection: Set the device to open the selected item by tapping it once. • Launch “Explore by touch” tutorial: View the tutorial about using the Explore by touch feature. • Manage gestures: Assign actions to perform using finger gestures. Refer to Configuring finger gesture settings for more information. • Manage customised labels: View the labels you added. • Resume from suspend: Select a method to resume voice feedback. • Developer settings: Set options for app development. Using the device with the screen turned off Set the device to turn the screen off at all times to keep the content on your screen private. The screen does not turn on when you press external buttons or tap the screen. Also, currently-activated features do not turn off. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision, and then tick Dark screen. You can activate or deactivate this feature by pressing the Power button twice. Accessibility 177 Using the rapid key input feature Set the device to enter a character when you release your finger from the character on the keyboard. You can use this feature to enter characters instead of releasing your finger and double-tapping on the screen. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision, and then tick Rapid key input. Reading passwords aloud Set the device to read the password aloud when you enter the password while TalkBack is activated. Use this feature to make sure that you are entering the right password. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision, and then tick Speak passwords. Setting text-to-speech features Change the settings for text-to-speech features used when TalkBack is activated, such as languages, speed, and more. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → Text-to-speech options, and then use the following functions: • Samsung text-to-speech engine / Google Text-to-speech engine: Select an engine for the text-to-speech feature. • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. If the device cannot read examples aloud, tap → Install voice data to download and install voice data for the text-to-speech feature. • Default language status: View the status of the current language set for the text-to speech feature. Accessibility 178 Entering text using the keyboard To display the keyboard, tap the text input field, and then tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. When you touch the keyboard with your finger, the device reads aloud the character buttons under your finger. When you hear the character you want, release your finger from the screen to select it. The character is entered and the device reads the text aloud. If Rapid key input is not activated, release your finger from the character you want, and then tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. To activate the rapid input feature, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision, and then tick Rapid key input. Entering additional characters Tap and hold a button on the keyboard. If additional characters are available via the button, a pop-up window appears above the keyboard showing the characters. To select a character, drag your finger on the screen until you hear the character you want, and then release it. Changing the input language To add input languages, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Language and input. Then, tap next to Samsung keyboard → Select input languages, and select the languages to use. To change the input language, tap , and then tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. Editing text Use the local contextual menu to move the cursor or copy and paste text. Open the local contextual menu by dragging your finger upwards and then to the right on the screen without releasing it. Tap and hold the screen and draw a circle around the menu with your finger to explore the menu. Then, release your finger when you hear Change granularity. Tap the screen again and draw a circle around the menu to explore the menus. Then release your finger when you hear the reading unit you want. When you edit text, set the reading unit to either word or character for your convenience. In selection mode, the device selects text according to the reading unit you selected. Accessibility 179 Drag your finger up, down, left, or right to listen to the text. When the text you want to edit is read aloud, use the following actions: • Deleting text: Tap the delete button on the keyboard. • Selecting text using selection mode: Activate selection mode to select and listen to the text. To activate selection mode, open the local contextual menu and select Cursor control → Start selection mode. Scroll to the left or right to listen to the text before or next to the currently-selected text. To deactivate selection mode, open the local contextual menu and select Cursor control → End selection mode. • Selecting entire text: Open the local contextual menu and select Cursor control → Select all. All text in the document will be selected. • Copying or cropping text: Select text using the local contextual menu. Then, open the local contextual menu and select Cursor control. Select Copy to copy the selected text or select Cut to cut the selected text. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. • Pasting text: Place the cursor at the point where the text should be inserted, open the local contextual menu, and then select Cursor control → Paste. Entering text by voice You can enter text by voice. To display the keyboard, tap the text input field, and then tap anywhere on the screen twice quickly. When you tap and hold , the device displays a pop-up window showing the keyboard options. Drag your finger on the screen without releasing it. When is selected, release your finger. Then, say the words that you want to enter in the text field. The spoken words appear as text on the screen and the device reads them aloud. To enter additional text, select the microphone button and say the words. Changing the input language While entering text by voice, select English (UK) and select a language to change the input language. To add languages to the list, select English (UK) → Add more languages, deselect Automatic, and then select languages to use. Accessibility 180 Changing the font size Use this feature to change the font size. The device provides various font sizes to make the device more convenient for visually impaired users. Setting the font size to Huge may not be available in some apps. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → Font size. Magnifying the screen Use this feature to magnify the screen and to zoom in on a specific area. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → Magnification gestures, and then tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. • Zooming in and out: Tap the screen three times quickly to zoom in on a specific area. Tap the screen three times quickly again to return. • Exploring the screen by scrolling: Use two fingers to scroll through the magnified screen. • Adjusting zoom ratio: Tap the screen with two fingers on the magnified screen. Then, spread two fingers apart or pinch them together to adjust the ratio. • Keyboards on the screen cannot be magnified. • When this feature is activated, the performance of some apps, such as Calculator, may be affected. Setting notification reminders Use this feature to alert you to notifications that you have not checked at the interval. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision → Notification reminder, and then tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. To set an interval between alerts, tap Reminder interval. Accessibility 181 Reversing the display colours Use this feature to improve screen visibility and to help users recognise text on the screen more easily. When this feature is activated, the device displays a negative image that reverses the colours on the screen. Reversing the colours increases the contrast between black and white. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision, and then tick Negative colours. Colour adjustment Use this feature to adjust how colours are displayed on the screen if you have difficulty in distinguishing colours. The device changes the colours into more recognisable colours. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Vision. 2 Tap the Colour adjustment switch to activate it. 3 Tap Start. 4 Arrange the colour tiles in order of similarity, starting from the base colour. 5 When you are finished adjusting the colours, tap Done. If you can distinguish the colours, no more adjustment is required. 6 If the colours cannot be distinguished, tap Camera or Image. 7 Drag the colour adjustment bar to the left or right and tap Done. To readjust the colour, tap → Readjust colour. Accessibility 182 Setting flash notification Set the flash to blink when you have new messages or notifications. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing, and then tick Flash notification. Turning off all sounds Set the device to mute all device sounds, such as media sounds. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing, and then tick Turn off all sounds. Caption settings Samsung caption On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing → Samsung subtitle (CC), and then tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. Use the following options: • Alignment: Change the position of the caption. • Font: Change the font type. • Size: Change the font size. • Edge: Change the edge of the subtitle text. • Font: Change the colour and transparency of the text. • Background: Change the colour and transparency of the caption box background. • Caption window: Change the colour and transparency of the caption window. Accessibility 183 Google caption On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing → Google subtitles (CC), and then tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. Use the following options: • Language: Select a display language for the caption. • Text size: Change the font size. • Caption style: Change the caption style. Adjusting the sound balance Set the device to adjust the sound balance when using a headset. To adjust the sound balance, connect a headset to the device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing → Sound balance. Drag the adjustment bar to the left or right and adjust the sound balance, and then tap Set. Mono audio Set the device to switch the sound output from stereo to mono when a headset is connected. Mono output combines stereo sound into one signal that is played through all headset speakers. Use this if you have a hearing impairment or if a single earbud is more convenient. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Hearing, and then tick Mono audio. Accessibility 184 Assistant menu Displaying the assistive shortcut icon Set the device to display the assistive shortcut icon. You can use the icon to access apps, features, and settings by tapping assistive menus in the icon. Control the device by tapping the assistive menus in the icon without exploring the screen. When this feature is launched, Single tap mode is activated. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction. 2 Tap the Assistant menu switch to activate it. The assistive shortcut icon appears at the bottom right of the screen. 3 Tap Assistant menu → Dominant hand to move the assistive shortcut icon to a convenient location. Accessing assistive menus The assistive shortcut icon appears as a floating icon for easy access to the assistive menus from any screen. When you tap the assistive shortcut icon, the icon expands slightly and the assistive menus appear on the icon. Tap the up or down arrow to move to other panels or scroll the screen up or down to select other menus. Accessibility 185 Using the cursor On the assistive menu, tap Cursor. A cursor and a touch area where the cursor can be controlled are displayed on the screen. You can control the screen using small finger movements on the touch area. Drag your finger on the touch area to move the cursor. Also, tap the screen to select items under the cursor. Use the following options: • / : Select an item or scroll left or right on the screen. • / : Scroll up or down the screen. • : Move the touch area to another location. • : Close the touch area. To change the cursor settings, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction, tap the Assistant menu switch to activate it, tap Assistant menu, and then use options under TOUCHPAD AND CURSOR SETTINGS. Using enhanced assistive menus Set the device to display enhanced assistive menus for selected apps. For example, when you launch Gallery, searching and composing functions appear on the assistive menu. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction → Assistant menu → Assistant Plus, tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it, and then select apps. Editing the assistive menus You can use this feature to edit menus in the assistive shortcut icon. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction, tap the Assistant menu switch to activate it, tap Assistant menu, and then tap Edit. To add or delete menus, tap or . Accessibility 186 Setting tap and hold delay options Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction → Tap and hold delay, and then select an option. Interaction control Activate interaction control mode to restrict the device’s reaction to inputs while using apps. Use this mode when you want to allow others only limited access to and control of your media or data. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Dexterity and interaction → Interaction control. 2 Tap the switch at the top of the screen to activate it. 3 Press and hold the Home button and the Volume button left simultaneously while using an app. 4 Adjust the size of the frame or draw a line around an area that you want to restrict. 5 Tap Done. The device displays the restricted area. If you tap the screen or press buttons, such as the Home button, they will not work in this area. To deactivate interaction control mode, press and hold the Home button and the Volume button left simultaneously. Accessibility 187 Using single tap mode Set the device to control notifications by tapping the button instead of dragging it. When an alarm sounds, tap the button to stop the alarm instead of dragging the button. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility, and then tick Single tap mode. Managing accessibility settings Saving accessibility settings in a file Export the current accessibility settings in a file. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Manage accessibility → Import/Export, select an export option, and then tap OK. The accessibility settings file is saved to the selected storage location. Importing an accessibility settings file Import an accessibility settings file and update the current settings. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Manage accessibility → Import/Export, and then select an import option. Select a file to import and tap Done → OK. The accessibility settings will be updated according to the imported file. Sharing accessibility settings files Share accessibility settings files with others via email, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, and more. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility → Manage accessibility → Share via. Then, select accessibility files and tap Done. Select a sharing method and follow the on-screen instructions to share the files. Accessibility 188 Viewing accessibility services View accessibility services installed on the device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Device → Accessibility, and view the list of accessibility services available in SERVICES. Using other useful features • Using S Voice: You can use S Voice to perform various functions using voice commands. Launch S Voice, send messages and view tasks. • Searching by voice: Use voice commands to search for webpage content. Use this feature when you are on the move and cannot use your hands to enter text. Refer to Voice Search for more information. • Using the notifications panel: Drag the status bar downwards to open the notifications panel. You can view new messages, adjust the screen brightness, and more. Refer to Notifications and quick setting panels for more information. • Using control motions: Control the device with palm motions or gestures. Refer to Motions for more information. • Using the finger scanner: Register your fingerprints to the device to unlock the screen or verify the Samsung account password. Refer to Finger Scanner for more information. • Using shortcuts to contacts: Add shortcuts to contacts on the Classic Home screen to send messages more conveniently. Refer to Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Classic Home screen for more information. 189 Troubleshooting Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some situations may not apply to your device. When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device does not turn on • When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Fully charge the battery before turning on the device. • The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again. • Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again. Troubleshooting 190 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly • If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch screen may not function properly. • If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen, or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may malfunction. • The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or reinsert the battery and turn on the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button and the Volume button left simultaneously for more than 7 seconds to restart it. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → General → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Calls are not connected • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Troubleshooting 191 Sound echoes during a call Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area. A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station. Move to another area and try again. • When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to issues with the service provider’s network. The battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery. The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved chargers) • Ensure that the charger is connected properly. • If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again. • The batteries in some devices are not user-replaceable. To have the battery replaced, visit a Samsung Service Centre. The battery depletes faster than when first purchased • When you expose the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the useful charge may be reduced. • Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some apps, such as games or the Internet. • The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time. Troubleshooting 192 Your device is hot to the touch When you use apps that require more power or use apps on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera app. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera app after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Photo quality is poorer than the preview • The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the photography techniques you use. • If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images may be out of focus. Error messages appear when opening multimedia files If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported, such as DivX or AC3, install an app that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your device supports, visit www.samsung.com. Troubleshooting 193 • Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos captured by other devices may not work properly. • Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet, such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly. Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Your device cannot find your current location GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations. Troubleshooting 194 Data stored in the device has been lost Always make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. Otherwise, you cannot restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored in the device. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. Copyright Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Passpoint™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T800 French. 07/2014. Rev.1.1 2 Table des matières À lire avant utilisation Démarrage 7 Contenu du coffret 8 Présentation de l’appareil 10 Charger la batterie 12 Utiliser une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Fonctions de base 16 Utiliser l’écran tactile 19 Disposition de l’écran d’accueil 22 Volets des raccourcis et de paramétrage rapide 25 Ouvrir des applications 25 Installer ou désinstaller des applications 27 Saisir du texte 30 Capture d’écran 30 Mes fichiers 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie 33 Afficher les informations d’aide Connectivité réseau 34 Wi-Fi 35 Internet Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 37 Mouvements 39 Fenêtres multiples 44 Boîte à outils 44 Augmenter la sensibilité de l’écran tactile Personnaliser 45 Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications 50 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries 51 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran 52 Lecteur d’empreintes 55 Mode Privé 57 Fonction multi-utilisateur 59 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil 60 Paramétrer un compte Contacts 61 Ajouter des contacts 62 Gérer les contacts Table des matières 3 116 Hancom Office Viewer 120 NYTimes 121 Google apps Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 123 Bluetooth 125 Wi-Fi Direct 127 Connexion rapide 129 SideSync 3.0 135 Remote PC 140 Screen Mirroring 142 Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 143 Mettre l’appareil à jour 144 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et un ordinateur 145 Sauvegarder et restaurer des données 146 Réinitialiser les données Paramètres 147 À propos des paramètres 147 Connexions 151 Appareil 156 Général 163 Applications Appareil photo 65 Prises de vue de base 68 Modes de prise de vue 71 Paramètres de l’appareil photo Galerie 74 Afficher des photos ou lire des vidéos 76 Retoucher des photos ou des vidéos 81 Paramètres de la galerie Multimédia 82 Musique 85 Vidéo Fonctions et applications utiles 88 Mode Enfant 91 S Finder 92 S Planner 95 S Voice 97 Email 99 Calculatrice 99 Horloge 100 WatchON 103 WebEx 112 Businessweek+ 113 Dropbox 114 Evernote 115 Flipboard Table des matières 4 Accessibilité 168 À propos des menus Accessibilité 169 Utiliser la touche Accueil pour ouvrir les menus d’accessibilité 169 Informations orales (TalkBack) 180 Modifier la taille de police 180 Grossir l’écran 180 Configurer des rappels de notification 181 Inverser les couleurs d’affichage 181 Régler les couleurs 182 Configurer une notification par flash 182 Couper tous les sons 182 Paramètres des sous-titres 183 Régler la balance audio 183 Mode mono-audio 184 Menu assistant 186 Configurer la durée de l’appui prolongé 186 Contrôle des interactions 187 Utiliser le mode à appui unique 187 Gérer les paramètres d’accessibilité 188 Utiliser d’autres fonctions utiles Dépannage 5 À lire avant utilisation Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • En fonction de votre zone géographique, de votre opérateur ou de la version logicielle, certains contenus peuvent différer par rapport à votre appareil. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des prestataires autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. À lire avant utilisation 6 Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. 7 Démarrage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 8 Présentation de l’appareil Touche Retour Touche Applications récentes Touche Accueil Témoin lumineux Écran tactile Objectif avant Haut-parleur Capteur de luminosité Connecteur à fonctions multiples Compartiment pour carte mémoire Touche de volume Touche Marche/Arrêt Prise audio 3,5 mm Objectif arrière Flash Point de fixation pour coque de protection Antenne GPS Point de fixation pour coque de protection Haut-parleur Microphone • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Démarrage 9 Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour allumer ou verrouiller l’écran. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour accéder à des options complémentaires dans l'écran actuel. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour allumer l’écran lorsqu’il est verrouillé. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour lancer l’application S Voice. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l'application de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 10 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. Démarrage 11 • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Démarrage 12 Utiliser une carte mémoire Installer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 128 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier Mes fichiers → SD card. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Démarrage 13 Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment. 3 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Démarrage 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois ou après la réinitialisation de ses données, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. Démarrage 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l'appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran dans le sens de votre choix. Vous pouvez changer le code permettant de déverrouiller l’écran. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran. 16 Fonctions de base Utiliser l’écran tactile • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser l’écran tactile avec les doigts. Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une touche à l’écran ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier à l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 17 Maintenir appuyé Pour accéder aux options disponibles, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément à l’écran pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé et faites-le glisser vers son nouvel emplacement. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Réappuyez deux fois sur l’écran pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 18 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Écarter et rapprocher les doigts Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 19 Disposition de l’écran d’accueil Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. L’écran d’accueil présente deux sortes de volets. Le volet de l’écran d’accueil Classique affiche des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications et bien plus encore, et le volet de l’écran d’accueil Contenu affiche les widgets du Contenu. Les widgets sont petits outils qui permettent d'obtenir des informations comme la météo ou l'actualité par exemple. Pour afficher d’autres volets, faites défiler l'écran vers la gauche ou la droite, ou appuyez sur le point d'un volet en bas de l’écran. Pour en savoir plus sur la personnalisation de l’écran d’accueil, reportezvous à la section Gérer l’écran d’accueil Classique ou Gérer l’écran d’accueil Contenu. <Écran d’accueil Classique> <Écran d’accueil Contenu> Fonctions de base 20 Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher d’autres volets, faites défiler l'écran vers la gauche ou la droite ou appuyez sur le point d'un volet en bas de l’écran. Pour en savoir plus sur la personnalisation de la liste des applications, reportez-vous à la section Gérer la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Application Volets d'applications Fonctions de base 21 Icônes d’informations Des icônes d’informations apparaissent dans la barre d’état en haut de l’écran. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Il se peut que la barre d’état ne s’affiche pas en haut de l’écran dans certaines applications. Pour afficher la barre d’état, faites glisser le doigt du haut de l’écran vers le bas. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Fonction Smart Stay ou Smart Pause activée. Synchronisation avec le Web Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Vibreur activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 22 Volets des raccourcis et de paramétrage rapide Utiliser le volet des raccourcis Lorsque vous recevez de nouvelles notifications, telles que des messages, des icônes d’information apparaissent dans la barre d’état. Pour en savoir plus sur les icônes, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et consultez les détails. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glissser vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glissser de bas en haut. Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrir les Paramètres. Lancer S Finder. Régler le volume. Appuyer sur une notification et exécuter différentes actions. Effacer toutes les notifications. Régler la luminosité. Afficher toutes les touches de paramétrage rapide. Activer ou désactiver des options. Maintenir le doigt appuyé sur les options pour afficher les paramètres détaillés. Lancer Connex. rapide. Fonctions de base 23 Réorganiser les touches de paramétrage rapide Pour réorganiser les touches de paramétrage rapide dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → , puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Utiliser le volet de paramétrage rapide Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver certaines fonctions depuis le volet des raccourcis. Pour ce faire, ouvrez le volet de paramétrage rapide. Pour ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas en vous servant de deux doigts. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer sur dans le volet des raccourcis. Pour fermer le volet de paramétrage rapide, faites glisser le volet des raccourcis de bas en haut. Appuyez sur les options suivantes pour les activer ou désactiver. Vous pouvez afficher davantage de paramètres en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur une option. • Wi-Fi : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Wi-Fi. • Position : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Position. • Son / Vibreur / Muet : activer ou désactiver le son de votre appareil ou le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. Fonctions de base 24 • Bluetooth : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Bluetooth. • Adapt Display : activer cette fonction permet d'optimiser l'écran en fonction des applications. • Ultra éco énergie : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Mode Ultra économie d’énergie. • Fenêtres multiples : en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Fenêtres multiples. • Boîte à outils : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Boîte à outils. • Screen Mirroring : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Screen Mirroring. • Synchro. : activer cette fonction permet à l'appareil de synchroniser automatiquement les applications, comme le calendrier ou les e-mails. • Mode lecture : activer cette fonction permet de protéger vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. • Smart Stay : activer cette fonction permet à l'écran de rester allumé tant que vous le regardez. • Smart Pause : activer cette fonction permet à l'appareil de mettre la lecture en pause lorsque vous détournez les yeux de l’écran. • Éco. énergie : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie. • Mode blocage : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Mode Blocage. • Mode Hors-ligne : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Mode Hors-ligne. • Mode Privé : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Mode Privé. • Sensib. tactile : pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Augmenter la sensibilité de l’écran tactile. Fonctions de base 25 Ouvrir des applications Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez l’icône d’une application à ouvrir. Fermer une application Appuyez sur → Gest. tâches, puis sur Fin près de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur → Tout fermer. Installer ou désinstaller des applications Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps) Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps) depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application par motclé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur Gratuit. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur la touche qui indique le prix de l’application. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Mettre à jour les applications automatiquement, puis sélectionnez une option. Fonctions de base 26 Play Store Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application par motclé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → PARAMÈTRES → Mise à jour automatique des applis, puis sélectionnez une option. Télécharger les applications suggérées Vous pouvez afficher et télécharger des applications spécialement conçues pour votre appareil Galaxy. Depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique, appuyez sur le widget Les indispensables GALAXY ou sur le widget Les offres GALAXY, puis appuyez sur près d’une application. Pour télécharger toutes les applications de la liste, appuyez sur Tout télécharger. Gérer les applications Désinstaller ou désactiver des applications Pour désactiver des applications par défaut, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications. apparaît sur les applications qu’il est possible de désactiver. Sélectionnez une application, puis appuyez sur Désactiver l’application. Pour désinstaller des applications téléchargées, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur → Applications téléchargées → Désinstaller. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer, depuis la liste des applications, sur Paramètres → Applications → Gestionnaire d’applications, à sélectionner une application, puis à appuyer sur Désinstaller. Fonctions de base 27 Activer les applications désactivées Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Afficher les applications désactivées, sélectionnez des applications à activer de nouveau, puis appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications, appuyer sur Paramètres → Applications → Gestionnaire d’applications, sélectionner l'onglet DÉSACTIVÉ, une application, puis appuyer sur Activer. • Masquer des applications : masquer des applications uniquement dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez continuer à utiliser les applications masquées. • Désactiver des applications : désactiver les applications fournies par défaut et ne pouvant pas être désinstallées de l’appareil. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les applications désactivées. • Désinstaller des applications : désinstaller des applications téléchargées. Saisir du texte Présentation du clavier Un clavier apparaît automatiquement lorsque vous saisissez du texte pour envoyer des messages, créer des mémos, etc. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Passer à la ligne suivante. Mots-clés suggérés Supprimer le caractère précédent. Modifier les paramètres du clavier. Saisir des majuscules. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Déplacer le curseur. Insérer un espace. Fonctions de base 28 Modifier la langue de saisie Appuyez sur → Sélectionner langue de saisie, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Si vous sélectionnez au moins deux langues, vous pouvez passer de l’une à l’autre en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la touche espace vers la gauche ou la droite. Utiliser les fonctions supplémentaires du clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche pour utiliser diverses fonctions. Suivant la dernière fonction utilisée, d’autres icônes peuvent apparaître à la place de l’icône . •  : saisir du texte en le dictant. Changer de langue. Ouvrir le clavier. Démarrer ou interrompre la saisie orale de texte. •  : basculer en mode de saisie manuscrite. Basculer entre le mode Numérique ou le mode Lettres. Revenir au clavier standard. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Fonctions de base 29 •  : ajouter un élément du presse-papiers. •  : modifier les paramètres du clavier. •  : modifier le type de clavier. Vous pouvez déplacer le clavier en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur . Passer au clavier standard. Copier et coller du texte 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte. 2 Faites glisser l'icône ou pour sélectionner le texte voulu, ou appuyez sur Sélectionner tous pour sélectionner l’intégralité du texte. 3 Appuyez sur Copier ou sur Couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. 4 Placez le curseur à l’endroit où le texte doit être inséré, puis appuyez sur → Coller. Pour coller le texte préalablement copié, appuyez sur → Presse-papiers, puis sélectionnez le texte. Fonctions de base 30 Capture d’écran Vous pouvez effectuer une copie d’écran tout en utilisant l’appareil. Maintenez simultanément les touches Accueil et Marche/Arrêt enfoncées. L’image est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → → Album → Screenshots. Après la capture d’une copie d’écran, vous pouvez modifier l’image et la partager avec d’autres personnes. Il existe également d’autres méthodes pour effectuer une copie d’écran. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Balayer pour capturer. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Mes fichiers À propos de Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à divers fichiers stockés sur l’appareil ou par exemple, sur des services de stockage cloud. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer sur depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Afficher les fichiers regroupés par date. Afficher les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil. Modifier le mode d’affichage. Afficher les informations de stockage. Rechercher des fichiers ou des dossiers. Afficher l’historique de téléchargement. Afficher les raccourcis vers les dossiers. Afficher les fichiers par catégorie. Fonctions de base 31 Appuyez sur et utilisez les options suivantes : • Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers auxquels appliquer des options. • Supprimer : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans DOSSIERS. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers. Visionner des fichiers Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Sélectionnez un dossier, appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers auxquels appliquer des options. • Trier par : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. • Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers un dossier dans DOSSIERS FAVORIS. • Supprimer : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci vers un fichier ou un dossier sur l’écran d’accueil Classique. • Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans DOSSIERS. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier ou un dossier, puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : •  : partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes. • : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers un dossier dans DOSSIERS FAVORIS. • → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci vers un fichier ou un dossier sur l’écran d’accueil Classique. • → Zip : compresser des fichiers ou des dossiers pour créer un fichier zip. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Fonctions de base 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie Économie d’énergie Préservez l'autonomie de la batterie en limitant les fonctions de l’appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Économie d’énergie, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Éco. d’énergie vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Éco. énergie pour activer la fonction. Sélectionnez parmi les options suivantes : • Limiter les performances : limiter diverses options, par exemple en désactivant le rétroéclairage des touches Applications récentes et Retour. • Mode Échelle de gris : afficher les couleurs à l’écran en nuances de gris. Mode Ultra économie d’énergie Utilisez cette fonction pour prolonger l’autonomie de la batterie. En mode Ultra économie d’énergie, l’appareil se comporte comme suit : • Il affiche les couleurs à l’écran en nuances de gris. • Il limite le nombre d’applications disponibles à l’essentiel et affiche uniquement les applications sélectionnées. • Il désactive les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Fonctions de base 33 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Économie d’énergie, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Ultra économie d’énergie vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur l'option Ultra éco énergie pour activer la fonction. Ajouter des applications à utiliser en mode Ultra économie d’énergie. Niveau de charge de la batterie. Applications essentielles. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Temps de veille maximum estimé. Pour ajouter une application à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une application. Pour supprimer une application de l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Supprimer, supprimez l'application à l’aide de l'icône , puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier les paramètres du mode Ultra économie d’énergie, comme la connectivité réseau ou le son, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Pour désactiver le mode Ultra économie d’énergie, appuyez sur → Désact. Ultra économie énergie. Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. Afficher les informations d’aide Pour accéder à des informations d’aide afin de savoir comment utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Aide. Pour accéder aux informations d’aide relatives à une application que vous l’utilisez, appuyez sur → Aide. Il est possible que certaines applications ne comportent aucune information d’aide. 34 Connectivité réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils. Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section Wi-Fi. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite pour activer la fonction. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône en forme de verrou. 3 Appuyez sur Connexion. Une fois que l’appareil s’est connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, il se reconnecte à ce réseau chaque fois que ce dernier est disponible sans réclamer de mot de passe. Pour empêcher l’appareil de se connecter automatiquement au réseau, sélectionnez-le dans la liste des réseaux et appuyer sur Oublier. Connectivité réseau 35 Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste de réseaux Wi-Fi, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez le mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Activer la fonction Wi-Fi Passpoint La fonction Wi-Fi Passpoint permet à l’appareil de rechercher un réseau Wi-Fi certifié et de s’y connecter. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Passpoint pour vous connecter à des réseaux Wi-Fi publics prenant en charge l’authentification automatisée. Lorsque vous vous rendez sur un autre lieu, la fonction recherche un autre réseau Wi-Fi certifié et s’y connecte. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique. Appuyez sur → Paramètres avancés, puis cochez la case Passpoint. Internet Parcourir des pages Web 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près du champ d’adresse Web. 3 Saisissez une adresse Web ou un mot-clé, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Pour effectuer oralement une recherche sur le Web, appuyez sur . Connectivité réseau 36 Pour afficher les barres d’outils, faites légèrement glisser le doigt vers le bas de l’écran. Ouvrir la page d’accueil. Fermer l’onglet. Revenir à la page précédente. Enregistrer la page  Web en cours dans les favoris. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet. Lire un article en mode Lecture. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Afficher les favoris, les pages enregistrées et l’historique Internet récent. Réactualiser la page  Web en cours. Définir une page d’accueil Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Définir page d’accueil, puis sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Page par défaut : définir la page Web par défaut comme page d’accueil. • Page en cours : définir la page Web affichée comme page d’accueil. • Sites les plus visités : définir la liste des pages Web les plus fréquemment consultées comme page d’accueil. • Autre : définir une page Web prédéfinie comme page d’accueil. En mode affichage d’une page Web, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la page d’accueil. Gérer l’historique des pages Web Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet. Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur Modifier → . Pour supprimer des pages Web, appuyez sur Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une page Web, sélectionnez les pages à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . 37 Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité Mouvements Si l’appareil est soumis à des secousses ou à des chocs excessifs, cela peut entraîner un comportement imprévu. Veillez à contrôler vos gestes. Muet/pause Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mouvements, puis faites glisser le curseur Muet/pause vers la droite. Couvrir l’écran de la main Recouvrez l'écran avec votre paume pour désactiver les alarmes ou pour interrompre la lecture des fichiers multimédia. Appuyez sur Muet/pause → Couvrir écran avec main. Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 38 Smart Pause La lecture se met en pause lorsque vous détournez les yeux de l’écran. Elle reprendra lorsque vous regarderez à nouveau l’écran. Appuyez sur Muet/pause → Smart Pause. Balayer pour capturer Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mouvements, puis faites glisser le curseur Balayer pour capturer vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Placez le côté de votre main sur l’écran et faites-la glisser de droite à gauche ou inversement pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → → Album → dossier Screenshots. Après la capture d’une copie d’écran, vous pouvez modifier l’image et la partager avec d’autres personnes. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 39 Fenêtres multiples À propos de la fonction Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter simultanément deux applications sur le même écran. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour afficher des e-mails ou utiliser Internet tout en lisant une vidéo. Lancer la fonction Multi-fenêtres 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Fenêtres multiples pour activer la fonction. 2 Faites glisser le doigt du bord droit vers le milieu de l’écran afin d’ouvrir la barre Fenêtres multiples. Vous pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur . Barre Fenêtres multiples Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 40 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans la barre Fenêtres multiples, puis faites-la glisser vers l’écran. Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu. 4 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans la barre Fenêtres multiples, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Les icônes d’application caractérisées par le symbole peuvent être lancées simultanément dans des fenêtres distinctes de l’écran. Créer une combinaison Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour enregistrer la combinaison de fenêtres que vous utilisez actuellement. 1 Lancez deux applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. 2 Ouvrez la barre Fenêtres multiples et appuyez sur → Créer. La combinaison Multi-fenêtres est ajoutée en haut du volet Multi-fenêtres. Pour supprimer une combinaison, ouvrez la barre Multi-fenêtres, appuyez sur → Modifier, sélectionnez une combinaison Multi-fenêtres, puis appuyez sur OK. Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 41 Régler la taille des fenêtres Faites glisser le cercle situé entre les fenêtres d'applications vers la gauche ou la droite pour régler la taille des fenêtres. Utiliser les options Multi-fenêtres Lorsque vous utilisez des applications Multi-fenêtres, sélectionnez la fenêtre d’une application ; un cadre bleu apparaît autour de celle-ci. Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les fenêtres d'applications pour accéder aux options suivantes : Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 42 •  : ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées dans la fenêtre sélectionnée. •  : passer d’une application Multi-fenêtres à l’autre. •  : glisser et déposer du texte ou des images d’une fenêtre à l’autre. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre sélectionnée et faites-le glisser vers l'autre fenêtre. Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction. • : agrandir la fenêtre. •  : fermer l’application. Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 43 Réorganiser les applications du volet Multi-fenêtres Vous pouvez réorganiser les applications du volet Multi-fenêtres. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, puis à appuyer sur Fenêtres multiples pour activer la fonction. 2 Ouvrez le volet Multi-fenêtres et appuyez sur → Modifier. L’appareil affiche les applications disponibles que vous pouvez utiliser dans le volet Multifenêtres. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers la barre Fenêtres multiples. 4 Appuyez sur OK. Reconnaissance des mouvements et maniabilité 44 Boîte à outils Vous pouvez facilement lancer différentes applications depuis la boîte à outils tout en utilisant d’autres applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Boîte à outils, puis faites glisser le curseur Boîte à outils vers la droite. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Boîte à outils pour activer la fonction. L'icône apparaît à l’écran. Pour lancer une application, appuyez sur et sélectionnez l’application en question. Pour déplacer la boîte à outils, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis faites glisser l'icône sur son nouvel emplacement. Pour modifier les applications présentes dans la boîte à outils, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône , puis faites-la glisser vers l’option Modifier. Pour masquer l’icône de boîte à outils, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis faites-la glisser vers l’option Supprimer. Augmenter la sensibilité de l’écran tactile Utilisez cette fonction pour pouvoir manipuler l’écran lorsque vous portez des gants. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Affichage, puis cochez la case Augmenter sensib. tactile. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Sensib. tactile pour activer la fonction. • Pour une meilleure reconnaissance tactile, utilisez plutôt des gants en cuir. Certaines autres matières peuvent ne pas être reconnues. • Pour un résultat optimal, appuyez fermement sur l’écran lorsque vous portez des gants. 45 Personnaliser Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications Gérer l’écran d’accueil Classique Ajouter des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application ou un dossier, puis faites glisser l'icône vers l’écran d’accueil Classique. Pour ajouter des widgets, ouvrez l’écran d’accueil Classique, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide, appuyez sur Widgets, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran d’accueil Classique. Déplacer et supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique, puis faites-le glisser vers l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Vous pouvez également déplacer les applications fréquemment utilisées vers la zone de raccourcis située en bas de l’écran d’accueil Classique. Pour supprimer un élément, maintenez le doigt appuyé dessus. Faites-le ensuite glisser vers l’option Supprimer qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Créer un dossier 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’option Créer dossier qui apparaît en haut de l’écran. 2 Saisissez un nom de dossier. 3 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les applications à déplacer vers le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser 46 Gérer les dossiers Pour renommer un dossier, sélectionnez-le, puis appuyez sur son nom actuel. Renommez le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier la couleur d’un dossier, sélectionnez un dossier, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une couleur. Pour mettre une application dans un dossier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’application, puis faitesla glisser vers le dossier. Pour retirer une application d’un dossier, sélectionnez un dossier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’application, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Gérer les volets Sur l’écran d’accueil Classique, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide pour ajouter, déplacer ou supprimer un volet. Pour ajouter un volet, faites glisser l'icône l’écran vers la gauche jusqu’au dernier volet, puis appuyez sur . Pour déplacer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser vers l’option Supprimer en haut de l’écran. Pour définir un volet comme écran d’accueil Classique principal, appuyez sur . Gérer l’écran d’accueil Contenu L’écran d’accueil Contenu affiche les widgets du Contenu. Vous pouvez accéder directement à une application en sélectionnant un widget de Contenu sur l’écran d’accueil Contenu. Personnaliser 47 Ajouter un widget ou un volet 1 Resserrez les doigts sur l’écran d’accueil Contenu. 2 Depuis l’écran Widgets, sélectionnez un volet à modifier ou appuyez sur pour créer un nouveau volet ( 1 ). Sélectionnez des widgets à ajouter au volet depuis le panneau inférieur de l’écran ( 2 ). Pour afficher davantage de widgets, faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite le panneau inférieur de l’écran. 3 Appuyez sur OK. Régler la taille des widgets 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil Contenu, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le widget que vous souhaitez redimensionner. 2 Réglez la taille du widget en faisant glisser le cadre autour de lui. 3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer la modification. Personnaliser 48 Déplacer un widget 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil Contenu, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget. 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget, puis faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Pour disposer de manière aléatoire les widgets du volet en cours, appuyez sur Modifier l’affichage. Supprimer un volet 1 Resserrez les doigts sur l’écran d’accueil Contenu. 2 Depuis l’écran des Widgets, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le volet à supprimer. 3 Faites-le ensuite glisser vers l’option Supprimer qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Il doit rester au moins un volet sur l’écran d’accueil Contenu. Gérer la liste des applications Changer de mode d’affichage Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Type d’affichage et sélectionnez un mode d'affichage. Masquer des applications Vous pouvez masquer les applications que vous ne voulez pas retrouver dans la liste des applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Masquer les applications, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour afficher les applications masquées, appuyez sur → Afficher les applications masquées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser 49 Déplacer des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Modifier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Pour déplacer un élément vers un tout nouveau volet, faites-le glisser vers l’option Créer une page qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Vous pouvez déplacer des dossiers uniquement dans le volet des dossiers. Créer un dossier 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Créer dossier. 2 Saisissez un nom de dossier. 3 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les applications à déplacer vers le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Le nouveau dossier est ajouté au volet des dossiers de la liste des applications. Gérer les dossiers Pour renommer un dossier, sélectionnez-le, puis appuyez sur son nom actuel. Renommez le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier la couleur d’un dossier, sélectionnez un dossier, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une couleur. Pour mettre une application dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’application, puis faites-la glisser vers le dossier. Pour retirer une application d’un dossier, appuyez sur → Modifier, sélectionnez un dossier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’application, puis faites-la glisser vers un volet d’applications. Si vous déplacez l’application d’un dossier vers le volet des dossiers, un nouveau dossier est créé. Personnaliser 50 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond de l’écran d’accueil Classique ou l'écran de verrouillage. 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil Classique, puis appuyez sur Fonds d’écran. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications, appuyer sur Paramètres → Appareil → Fond d’écran. 2 Sélectionnez un écran à modifier ou auquel appliquer un fond d’écran. 3 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite, puis sélectionnez une image parmi celles affichées en bas de l’écran. Pour sélectionner les photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou d’autres images, appuyez sur Plus d’images. 4 Appuyez sur Définir fond d’écran ou sur Terminé. Modifier les sonneries Vous pouvez modifier les sonneries des notifications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Son → Notifications, puis sélectionnez une sonnerie et appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser 51 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran Vous pouvez définir une méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran pour empêcher l’accès à vos informations personnelles par autrui. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran, puis sélectionnez une méthode de verrouillage. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Modèle Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Empreinte Enregistrez vos empreintes digitales pour pouvoir déverrouiller l’écran. Pour en savoir plus, reportezvous à la section Lecteur d’empreintes. Code PIN Un code PIN se compose uniquement de chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Personnaliser 52 Mot de passe Un mot de passe comprend des caractères et des chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Lecteur d’empreintes Pour une meilleure reconnaissance des empreintes Lorsque vous scannez vos empreintes sur l’appareil, sachez que les conditions suivantes risquent d’affecter les performances de cette fonction : • La touche Accueil est munie d’un capteur de reconnaissance des empreintes. Assurez-vous que la touche Accueil n'a pas été rayée ni endommagée par des objets métalliques comme des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou un collier. • La protection d’écran fournie avec l’appareil peut altérer le fonctionnement du capteur d’empreintes. Pour améliorer la sensibilité de reconnaissance des empreintes, retirez la protection de l’écran. • Assurez-vous que la zone de reconnaissance des empreintes et vos doigts sont propres et secs. • L’appareil peut ne pas reconnaître les empreintes digitales présentant des ridules ou des cicatrices. • L’appareil peut ne pas reconnaître l’empreinte d’un petit doigt ou d’un doigt fin. • Pour améliorer les performances de reconnaissance, enregistrez les empreintes de la main que vous utilisez le plus fréquemment lorsque vous manipulez l’appareil. • Ne faites pas glisser le doigt trop rapidement ni trop lentement. Faites glisser le doigt à une vitesse modérée afin de donner le temps à l’appareil de le reconnaître. • Dans les environnements secs, de l’électricité statique peut s’accumuler dans l’appareil. Évitez d’utiliser cette fonction dans des environnements secs ou, avant d’utiliser la fonction, déchargez l’électricité statique accumulée en touchant un objet métallique. Personnaliser 53 Enregistrer des empreintes 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Gestionnaire d’empreintes. 2 Si vous enregistrez plusieurs empreintes, une fenêtre de reconnaissance d’empreintes apparaît. Scannez une empreinte enregistrée à l’aide de l’appareil et appuyez sur . 3 Placez le doigt sur la zone de reconnaissance d’empreintes en bas et au centre de l’écran. 4 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran dans la zone de reconnaissance d’empreintes, puis faitesle glisser vers le bas sur la touche Accueil. Répétez cette opération avec le même doigt jusqu’à ce que l’empreinte soit enregistrée. Si vous pliez le doigt ou si vous utilisez le bout du doigt, l’appareil risque de ne pas reconnaître l’empreinte. 5 Si une fenêtre contextuelle vous demandant de saisir un mot de passe de secours apparaît, appuyez sur Continuer, saisissez à nouveau le mot de passe de secours pour le confirmer, puis appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez utiliser le mot de passe de secours à la place de l’empreinte. 6 Si la fenêtre contextuelle de verrouillage par empreintes apparaît, appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez utiliser vos empreintes pour déverrouiller l’écran. Personnaliser 54 Gérer les empreintes enregistrées Vous pouvez supprimer ou renommer vos empreintes enregistrées. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Gestionnaire d’empreintes. Pour supprimer des empreintes, appuyez sur → Annuler l’enregistrement, sélectionnez les empreintes, puis appuyez sur → OK. Pour renommer une empreinte, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le nom de l'empreinte, appuyez sur , saisissez un nouveau nom, puis appuyez sur OK. Modifier le mot de passe de secours Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe de secours utilisé en cas de problème de reconnaissance de vos empreintes. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Modifier MDP de secours. 2 Scannez une empreinte enregistrée ou appuyez sur MDP de secours. 3 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe et appuyez sur Continuer. 4 Saisissez de nouveau le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. Déverrouiller l’écran à l’aide des empreintes digitales Vous pouvez déverrouiller l’écran à l’aide des empreintes enregistrées. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Empreinte. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications, appuyer sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l’écran → Empreinte. Vérifier le mot de passe du compte Samsung Utilisez vos empreintes digitales pour vérifier le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung. Vous pouvez recourir à une empreinte au lieu de saisir un mot de passe, par exemple lors de l’achat de contenus sur Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps). Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Vérifier le compte Samsung, puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l'écran vers la droite. Saisissez le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung et appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser 55 Utiliser votre empreinte pour effectuer des achats via PayPal Vous pouvez effectuer des achats en numérisant vos empreintes. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes → Payer avec PayPal. 2 Appuyez sur Installer sous l’option Prise en charge FIDO Ready™. 3 Appuyez sur Associer sous l’option Compte PayPal. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour vous connecter au site Web PayPal et enregistrer vos empreintes digitales. Mode Privé À propos du mode Privé Utilisez ce mode pour empêcher d’autres personnes d’utiliser ou d’accéder à des contenus spécifiques, tels que des images ou des documents enregistrés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez enregistrer du contenu à un emplacement spécifique, puis activer le mode Privé pour masquer ces éléments. Masquer du contenu 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Privé, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Privé vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Mode Privé. Lorsque vous activez le mode Privé pour la première fois, définissez un code de déverrouillage et un code PIN de secours. 2 Saisissez le code de déverrouillage du mode Privé. Une fois ce mode activé, l'icôn apparaît en haut de l’écran. Personnaliser 56 3 Pour sélectionner les éléments à masquer, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément de la liste, cochez-le pour le sélectionner, puis appuyez sur → Déplacer dans Privé. Les éléments du mode Privé sont caractérisés par le symbole . 4 Une fois les éléments à masquer sélectionnés, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Privé, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Privé vers la gauche pour désactiver la fonction. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Mode Privé. Les éléments sélectionnés disparaissent de l’écran. Vérifiez que les fichiers ont bien été enregistrés et déplacés avant de désactiver le mode Privé. Afficher du contenu masqué Vous pouvez afficher le contenu masqué uniquement si le mode Privé est activé. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Privé, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Privé vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide, puis à appuyer sur Mode Privé. 2 Saisissez le code de déverrouillage du mode Privé. 3 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mes fichiers → Privé. Tous les éléments du mode Privé s’affichent à l’écran. Personnaliser 57 Fonction multi-utilisateur Configurez des comptes utilisateurs supplémentaires afin que d’autres personnes puissent utiliser votre appareil avec leurs propres paramètres, comme les réglages de messagerie électronique, les préférences de fond d’écran, et bien plus encore. Vous avez le choix entre les différents types de comptes utilisateurs suivants. • Propriétaire : le compte Propriétaire est créé lors de la configuration initiale de l’appareil, et ne peut pas être dupliqué. Ce compte offre un contrôle complet de l’appareil, y compris la gestion du compte utilisateur. • Utilisateur : ce compte permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder à leurs propres applications et contenus, et de personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil qui affectent tous les comptes. • Profil limité : ce compte permet d’accéder uniquement aux applications et contenus autorisés par le compte Propriétaire, et ne peut pas utiliser les services qui nécessitent une ouverture de session. Ajouter des utilisateurs 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Utilisateurs. 2 Appuyez sur → Utilisateur → OK → Config. maint. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Ajouter des profils limités 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Utilisateurs. 2 Appuyez sur → Profil limité. 3 Définissez un code de déverrouillage, puis sélectionnez les applications et les contenus que les utilisateurs limités sont autorisés à utiliser. Personnaliser 58 Passer d’un compte utilisateur à l’autre Appuyez sur en haut de l’écran verrouillé. Sélectionnez le compte sur lequel vous souhaitez basculer, puis déverrouillez l’appareil. Un compte utilisateur Gérer les utilisateurs Avec le compte Propriétaire, vous pouvez supprimer des comptes ou modifier leurs paramètres. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Utilisateurs. 2 Sélectionnez un compte sous AUTRES UTILISATEURS. Ensuite, sélectionnez ou désélectionnez des applications et contenus afin d’en autoriser ou interdire l’accès. Pour supprimer le compte, appuyez sur . Personnaliser 59 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil Utiliser les comptes de sauvegarde Vous pouvez transférer vos données de sauvegarde depuis votre ancien appareil vers votre nouveau appareil à l’aide votre compte Google ou Samsung. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Sauvegarder et restaurer des données. Utiliser Samsung Smart Switch Vous pouvez transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel appareil via Smart Switch (pour mobiles et ordinateurs). Pour en savoir plus, rendez-vous sur le site : www.samsung.com/smartswitch. Samsung Smart Switch n’est pas pris en charge sur certains appareils ou ordinateurs. Utiliser Smart Switch Mobile Utilisez cette application pour transférer des données de votre ancien appareil iPhone ou Android vers votre nouvel appareil. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps) ou Play Store. 1 Depuis votre appareil, appuyez sur Smart Switch Mobile. 2 Depuis votre appareil, sélectionnez une option en fonction du type de votre ancien appareil et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Si l’ancien appareil est un appareil Android, assurez-vous que l’application Smart Switch Mobile y est installée. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide. Personnaliser 60 Utiliser Smart Switch avec des ordinateurs Utilisez cette fonction pour importer une sauvegarde de vos données (depuis des appareils mobiles d’un fabricant sélectionné) depuis un ordinateur vers votre appareil. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Sauvegardez les données d’un ancien appareil sur un ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, contactez le fabricant de l’appareil. 2 Sur l’ordinateur, lancez Smart Switch. 3 Connectez votre ancien appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez le fabricant de l’appareil antérieur, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour transférer les données sur votre appareil. Utiliser Samsung Kies Importez un fichier de sauvegarde de vos données depuis votre ordinateur via Samsung Kies pour restaurer les données sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez également sauvegarder les données sur l’ordinateur via Samsung Kies. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies. Paramétrer un compte Ajouter des comptes Certaines applications utilisées sur l’appareil nécessitent un compte enregistré. Afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil, créez des comptes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte et sélectionnez un service de compte. Ensuite, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour synchroniser du contenu avec vos comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez les éléments à synchroniser. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis appuyez sur Supprimer le compte. 61 Contacts Ajouter des contacts Transférer des contacts depuis d'autres appareils Vous pouvez transférer des contacts depuis d'autres appareils sur votre appareil. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil. Créer manuellement des contacts 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations du contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. 3 Appuyez sur Enreg. Créer des contacts à partir de cartes de visite Prenez une photo d’une carte de visite et extrayez-en les informations. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur → Cartes de visite → . Pour sélectionner ou ajouter les langues à reconnaître, appuyez sur → Langue cible. Contacts 62 3 Placez la carte de visite sur une surface plate. 4 Réglez l’appareil de sorte que la carte tienne dans le cadre de l’écran. Une fois que le cadre devient vert, l’appareil prend automatiquement une photo. L’appareil lit également les coordonnées figurant sur la carte de visite et les convertit en entrée de contact. • Si l’appareil ne prend pas automatiquement de photo, appuyez sur . • Pour prendre manuellement des photos de cartes de visite, appuyez sur → Capture automatique → Désactivé. • Pour extraire le texte d’une image enregistrée, appuyez sur → Charger une image. 5 Modifiez les informations ou ajoutez-en, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Gérer les contacts Modifier un contact 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . 3 Modifiez les coordonnées du contact ou appuyez sur Aj. un autre champ pour ajouter plus d’informations sur le contact. 4 Appuyez sur Enreg. Supprimer un contact Sélectionnez un contact à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Partager un contact Sélectionnez un contact à partager, appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via, puis sélectionnez le mode de partage. Contacts 63 Gérer les groupes Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Groupes. Créer un nouveau groupe Appuyez sur , saisissez un nom de groupe, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Dans l’onglet des groupes, sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Supprimer un groupe Appuyez sur → Supprimer des groupes, sélectionnez des groupes auxquels vous avez ajouté des contacts, puis appuyez sur OK. Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez les membres, appuyez sur OK, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur la touche d'envoi du message. Fusionner les contacts avec les comptes Fusionnez les contacts enregistrés sur l’appareil avec vos comptes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google ou Fusionner avec Samsung. Importer et exporter des contacts Importez des contacts depuis des services de stockage ou exportez-les vers ces services. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation ou d’exportation. Contacts 64 Rechercher des contacts Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Faites glisser un doigt le long de l’index à gauche de la liste des contacts pour la faire défiler rapidement. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Ajouter des raccourcis vers des contacts à l’écran d’accueil Classique Ajoutez des raccourcis vers les contacts avec lesquels vous communiquez fréquemment à l’écran d’accueil Classique. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Appuyez sur → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil. 65 Appareil photo Prises de vue de base Prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point. Une fois la mise au point terminée, le cadre de mise au point devient vert. 3 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo ou sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. • Pour capturer une image de la vidéo en cours d'enregistrement, appuyez sur . • Pour modifier la mise au point en cours d'enregistrement d'une vidéo, appuyez sur l’endroit souhaité pour la mise au point. Pour faire la mise au point au centre de l’écran, appuyez sur . Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Démarrer l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Prendre une photo. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Afficher le mode en cours. Basculer entre l’appareil photo avant et arrière. Raccourcis de l’appareil photo Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Appareil photo 66 • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. • L’objectif avant est adapté à la prise de photos grand-angle. Il se peut qu’une distorsion mineure se produise dans les photos grand-angle ; cela ne traduit pas un problème de performances de l’appareil. Réorganiser les raccourcis de l’appareil photo Vous pouvez réorganiser les raccourcis de l’appareil photo pour y avoir facilement et rapidement accès depuis l’écran d’aperçu. Appuyez sur sur l’écran d’aperçu. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un emplacement libre à gauche de l’écran. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Appareil photo 67 Objectif à distance Utilisez l’appareil comme viseur d’un autre appareil. Vous pouvez ainsi contrôler l’autre appareil à distance pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Votre appareil affiche la même image que celle affichée sur l’appareil connecté. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur → Viseur à distance. 3 Appuyez sur Paramètres Wi-Fi Direct pour établir une connexion avec un autre appareil. 4 Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil doit faire la mise au point. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre la photo affichée dans le viseur de l’appareil connecté. Assurez-vous que l’appareil à connecter prend en charge le mode viseur distant. Appareil photo 68 Modes de prise de vue Auto. Utilisez ce mode pour autoriser l’appareil photo à évaluer l’environnement et à déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Auto. Beauté Utilisez ce mode pour photographier des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d’obtenir des images plus douces. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Beauté. Cliché & plus Utilisez ce mode pour prendre une série de photos et les modifier en leur appliquant différents effets à l’aide des modes de prise de vue. L’appareil identifie les photos à l’aide de l’icône dans la Galerie. Si vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, la fonction zoom n’est pas disponible. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur MODE → Cliché & plus. 3 Appuyez sur . L’appareil prend une série de photos et affiche les modes de prise de vue disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez un mode de prise de vue et appliquez un effet aux photos. • Meilleures poses : prendre une série de photos et conserver la meilleure. Pour afficher d’autres photos de la série, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou vers la droite. L’appareil recommande la meilleure photo et l’identifie à l’aide de l'icône . Appareil photo 69 • Meilleure photo : prendre plusieurs photos d’un groupe en même temps et les combiner pour créer la meilleure photo de groupe possible. Appuyez sur le cadre blanc sur chaque visage, puis choisissez la meilleure pose pour chaque sujet parmi celles qui apparaissent en bas de l’écran. Ensuite, fusionnez les poses en une seule photo. L’appareil recommande la meilleure photo et l’identifie à l’aide de l'icône . • Chronophoto : prendre une série de photos et les combiner pour créer une image reflétant la trace des mouvements. Accentuez les traces de mouvements dans l’image en sélectionnant davantage de photos au bas de l’écran. Pour modifier les traces de mouvements des photos sélectionnées, appuyez sur et sélectionnez une photo. Appuyez sur Restaurer pour afficher les mouvements du sujet ou sur Supprimer pour les effacer. Modifiez la photo comme vous le souhaitez, puis appuyez sur OK. • Gomme : effacer les sujets en mouvement non souhaités. Appuyez sur pour effacer les sujets en mouvement non souhaités. Appuyez sur pour restaurer la photo d’origine. • Effet filé : appliquer un effet à l’arrière-plan du sujet de sorte que ce dernier semble se déplacer rapidement. Appuyez sur Objets pour sélectionner un sujet. Appuyez sur Effet flou pour modifier l’angle de floutage à appliquer en arrière-plan. Appuyez sur Angle → et réglez l’angle du flou en traçant un cercle autour du grand cercle à l’aide du doigt. Pour régler le niveau de flou de l’arrière-plan, appuyez sur Effet flou, puis faites glisser la barre de réglage. 5 Une fois la retouche des photos terminée, appuyez sur Enreg. Panorama Utilisez ce mode pour prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. L’appareil identifie la photo à l’aide de l’icône dans la Galerie. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Panorama. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : • Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. • Maintenez l’image à l’intérieur du cadre du viseur de l’appareil photo. • Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. Appareil photo 70 HDR (Ton riche) Utilisez ce mode pour prendre des photos riches en couleurs et reproduire chacun des détails, même dans des conditions de luminosité extrêmes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → HDR (Ton riche). Sans effet Avec effet Dual Camera Lorsque vous prenez la photo d’un paysage avec l’objectif arrière, la photo ou la vidéo capturée avec l’objectif avant apparaît dans un encart, et inversement. Utilisez cette fonction pour photographier simultanément un magnifique paysage et votre autoportrait. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Dual Camera pour passer en mode Dual Camera. Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo ou sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. Sélectionner un des divers styles disponibles. Appuyer pour redimensionner ou déplacer l’encart. Basculer entre l’appareil photo avant et arrière. Appareil photo 71 • En mode Dual Camera, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos d’une durée maximale de 5 minutes en qualité Full HD et d’une durée maximale de 10 minutes en qualité HD ou VGA. • Lorsque vous enregistrez des vidéos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. Gérer les modes de prise de vue Sélectionnez les modes de prise de vue à afficher dans l’écran de sélection de mode. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Gérer modes. Télécharger des modes de prise de vue Téléchargez d’autres modes de prise de vue depuis Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps). Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → MODE → Télécharger. Paramètres de l’appareil photo Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). • Taille de l’image : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Rafales : prendre une série de photos de sujets en mouvement. • Stabilisation photo : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il détecte automatiquement les conditions de faible luminosité et règle la luminosité de la photo sans le flash. Si vous enregistrez des vidéos, cette option n’est pas disponible. Appareil photo 72 • Détection visages : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse les visages des personnes et vous aide à les prendre en photo. • ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés. • Modes de mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Photo par appui : appuyer sur l’écran d’aperçu pour prendre des photos. • Enregistrer : paramétrer l’appareil pour enregistrer la photo d’origine et la photo aux contrastes soutenus, ou uniquement cette dernière. • Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mode enregistr. : modifier le mode d’enregistrement. • Stabilis. vidéo : activer ou désactiver le stabilisateur. Le stabilisateur permet d’effectuer la mise au point de l’appareil photo quand il bouge. • Effets : sélectionner un effet de filtre à utiliser lorsque vous prenez des photos ou enregistrez des vidéos. Pour télécharger davantage d’effets, appuyez sur Télécharger. Pour modifier l’ordre des effets ou masquer des effets de la liste, appuyez sur Gérer effets. • Flash : activer ou désactiver le flash. • Minuteur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Mode d’affichage : modifier le format d’affichage de l’écran d’aperçu. • Tags de localis. : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. Appareil photo 73 • Emplac. de stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Aperçu photo/vidéo : paramétrer l’appareil pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos après leur capture. • Viseur à distance : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il utilise un viseur et contrôler l’autre appareil pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Objectif à distance. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Valeur d’expos. : modifier la valeur d’exposition. Cela détermine la quantité de lumière reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus élevée. • Grille : afficher le guide d’affichage du viseur pour aider à la composition de la photo. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes vocales. • Aide : afficher les informations d’aide pour utiliser l’appareil photo. • Réinit. les paramètres : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode utilisé. 74 Galerie Afficher des photos ou lire des vidéos Afficher le contenu de l’appareil Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie et sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo. Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône sur la miniature. Pour masquer ou afficher la barre de menus et les miniatures, appuyez sur l’écran. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Supprimer l’image. Envoyer l’image à d’autres personnes. Modifier la photo. Rechercher d’autres appareils pour afficher la photo. Revenir à l’écran précédent. Afficher les contenus stockés sur d’autres appareils Recherchez des photos et des vidéos stockées sur d’autres appareils pour les reproduire sur votre appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. Galerie 75 Accéder à des contenus sur un appareil à proximité Appuyez sur et sélectionnez un appareil dans la liste APPAREILS À PROXIMITÉ pour accéder aux contenus. Vous pouvez visionner les photos et les vidéos sur les appareils où la fonction de partage de contenu est activée. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Appareils à proximité, puis faites glisser le curseur Appareils à proximité vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour accéder aux paramètres supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section Appareils à proximité. Sélectionner une option de tri Vous pouvez trier les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur votre appareil en fonction de la date ou de l’album. Elles peuvent également être triées par catégorie, telle que les portraits ou les événements. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie → , puis sélectionnez une option de tri. Accéder à des options supplémentaires Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie et sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo. Appuyez sur et utilisez les options suivantes. • Plus d’infos : afficher davantage d’informations à propos du fichier. • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier le fichier dans le presse-papiers. • Studio : modifier des photos ou des vidéos en mode studio. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Retoucher des photos ou des vidéos. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : rogner l’image. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le fichier sélectionné. Pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers depuis la liste des fichiers, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier, puis appuyez sur les autres. Une fois les fichiers sélectionnés, vous pouvez tous les partager ou le supprimer, ou appuyer sur pour accéder à des options supplémentaires. Galerie 76 Retoucher des photos ou des vidéos Studio photo Modifiez vos images en leur appliquant divers effets. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Studio → Studio photo. 3 Sélectionnez une image à modifier. 4 Modifiez la photo en lui appliquant différents effets. Dessiner sur l’image. Appliquer des effets à l’image. Décorer l’image en y ajoutant des stickers. Ajouter un cadre à l’image. Pivoter l’image. Rogner l’image. Ajuster la saturation ou la luminosité de l’image. 5 Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur → Enregistrer sous. 6 Nommez le fichier, puis appuyez sur OK. La photo retouchée est enregistrée dans le dossier Studio. Pour ouvrir le dossier, appuyez sur Galerie → → Album → Studio. Galerie 77 Studio de collage Combinez plusieurs images pour créer un collage. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Studio → Studio de collage. 3 Sélectionnez des images à combiner, puis appuyez sur Terminé. 4 Modifiez la photo en lui appliquant différents effets. Supprimer l’image. Modifier le style du collage. Ajouter des images. Supprimer l’image. Masquer le volet de l’image. Modifier le fractionnement de l’écran. 5 Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur Sauveg. L’image retouchée est enregistrée dans le dossier Studio. Pour ouvrir le dossier, appuyez sur Galerie → → Album → Studio. Galerie 78 Prise & plus Appliquez différents effets aux photos que vous avez prises. Seules les photos prises en mode Rafale et effets peuvent être sélectionnées. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Studio → Prise & plus. 3 Sélectionnez une image à modifier. 4 Modifiez la photo en lui appliquant différents effets. Effacer les sujets en mouvement en arrière-plan. Donner l’impression que le sujet se déplace rapidement. Créer la plus belle image possible. Créer une image affichant des traces de mouvement. Enregistrer la meilleure photo. 5 Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur Enreg. L’image retouchée est enregistrée dans le dossier Studio. Pour ouvrir le dossier, appuyez sur Galerie → → Album → Studio. Galerie 79 Éditeur de vidéos Modifiez ou créez des vidéos avec différentes images et vidéos. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Studio → Editeur de vidéos. 3 Sélectionnez un thème à appliquer, puis appuyez sur Terminé. 4 Sélectionnez des vidéos à modifier. Vous pouvez également sélectionner des photos pour créer une vidéo. 5 Modifiez la vidéo en lui appliquant différents effets. Ajouter des images. Enregistrer une vidéo. Fractionner ou rogner les vidéos, ou modifier leur ordre. Ajouter des vidéos. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Lire le clip vidéo. Enregistrer le clip vidéo. Modifier automatiquement le clip vidéo. Annuler ou répéter la dernière action. Ajouter une musique d’ambiance ou appliquer des effets sonores au clip vidéo. 6 Une fois la vidéo modifiée, appuyez sur Export de film. 7 Saisissez un nom de fichier, puis appuyez sur OK. La vidéo modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Export. Pour ouvrir le dossier, appuyez sur Galerie → → Album → Export. Galerie 80 Éditeur de vidéos Retouchez des segments vidéo. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Studio → Éditeur de vidéos. 3 Sélectionnez une vidéo à modifier. 4 Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis appuyez sur Effectué. Crochet de fermeture Position actuelle Crochet d’ouverture 5 Nommez le fichier, puis appuyez sur OK pour enregistrer la vidéo. Galerie 81 Paramètres de la galerie 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Appuyez sur → Paramètres. 3 Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes : • Tag contextuel : ajouter des informations aux photos, telles que la date et la localisation. Pour modifier les balises, sélectionnez les informations d’une image, appuyez sur , modifiez les détails, puis appuyez sur Terminé. • Libellé de portrait : affecter des balises aux visages d’une image. Dès qu’un visage est détecté, un cadre jaune apparaît autour. Sélectionnez le visage, appuyez sur Ajouter un nom, puis sélectionnez le contact à associer à la balise. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez dessus et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Lorsque vous utilisez l’option Libellé de portrait, la reconnaissance faciale peut échouer, selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, la couleur de la peau, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne. 82 Multimédia Musique Écouter de la musique Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Musique. Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Ajouter le morceau de musique à une liste de lecture. Afficher une liste des morceaux de musique recommandés en fonction de l’écoute en cours. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Régler le volume. Modifier le mode de répétition. Revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Rechercher d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Multimédia 83 Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Paramètres avancés, puis cochez la case Volume intelligent. Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives. Volume intelligent peut ne pas être activée pour certains fichiers. Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lorsque vous écoutez de la musique avec un casque ou des écouteurs, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Paramètres avancés → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous activez cette option pour la première fois, appuyez sur Démarrer pour régler le son. L’appareil démarre une série de tests audio pour régler le niveau sonore et commence à bipper. Appuyez sur Oui si vous entendez le bip ou sur Non si vous ne l’entendez pas. Répétez cette étape pour chaque test jusqu’à ce que le réglage du son soit terminé. Appuyez ensuite sur Musique et sur OK afin de bénéficier de cette option quand vous écoutez de la musique. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée. Définir un morceau de musique comme sonnerie d’alarme Pour utiliser le morceau en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur → Définir comme → Depuis le début ou sur Recommandations auto, sélectionnez une option, puis appuyez sur OK. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Musique. Appuyez sur Listes lect. → → Créer une liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les morceaux à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur et sélectionnez une liste de lecture. Multimédia 84 Écouter de la musique par catégorie Utilisez cette fonction pour écouter de la musique suivant votre humeur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Musique. Appuyez sur Coin musique. Les morceaux sont automatiquement classés par catégorie en fonction de l'atmosphère qu’ils dégagent. Appuyez sur une atmosphère ou faites glisser votre doigt sur plusieurs atmosphères pour écouter la musique. Les catégories de morceau sont basées sur les informations disponibles. Il se peut que certains morceaux ne soient pas catégorisés dans des cellules d’humeur. Lire des morceaux stockés sur d’autres appareils Recherchez des morceaux stockés sur d’autres appareils pour les écouter sur votre appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Musique. Accéder à des morceaux sur un appareil à proximité Appuyez sur Appareils à proximité et sélectionnez un appareil pour accéder aux morceaux et les lire. Vous pouvez lire le morceau sur les appareils où la fonction de partage de contenu est activée. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Appareils à proximité, puis faites glisser le curseur Appareils à proximité vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour connaître les paramètres supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section Appareils à proximité. Multimédia 85 Vidéo Lire des vidéos Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Déplacer le panneau de configuration vers la gauche. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Basculer sur le lecteur vidéo contextuel. Rechercher d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Accentuer les tonalité de l’affichage. Revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Déplacer le panneau de configuration vers la droite. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Modifier le format d’écran. Multimédia 86 Utiliser le lecteur vidéo contextuel Utilisez cette fonction pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur vidéo contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochez-les. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Capturer des images Pour utiliser cette fonction, en cours de lecture, appuyez sur → Paramètres, cochez la case Capturer, puis appuyez sur Fermer. Appuyez sur pour capturer une image de la vidéo pendant la lecture. Partager ou supprimer des vidéos Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la vidéo, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur OK. Modifier des vidéos Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Sélectionnez une vidéo, appuyez sur → Modifier → Studio → Éditeur de vidéos. Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, appuyez sur Effectué, saisissez un nom de fichier, puis appuyez sur OK pour enregistrer la vidéo. Pour retoucher des vidéo à l’aide de l’application Studio vidéo, sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur → Modifier → Editeur de vidéos. Multimédia 87 Lire des vidéos stockées sur d’autres appareils Recherchez des vidéos stockées sur d’autres appareils pour les reproduire sur votre appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Accéder à une vidéo sur un appareil à proximité Appuyez sur Appareils à proximité et sélectionnez un appareil pour accéder à la vidéo et la lire. Vous pouvez lire la vidéo sur les appareils dont la fonction de partage de contenu est activée. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Appareils à proximité, puis faites glisser le curseur Appareils à proximité vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour connaître les paramètres supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section Appareils à proximité. 88 Fonctions et applications utiles Mode Enfant Démarrer le mode Enfant Utilisez ce widget pour offrir à vos enfants un environnement ludique et sécurisé en les empêchant d’accéder à certaines applications ou certains contenus de votre appareil. Avant d’utiliser ce widget, vous devez le télécharger et l’installer. Depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique, appuyez sur Mode Enfant → Installer. Pour démarrer le mode Enfant, appuyez sur Mode Enfant depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique ou la liste des applications. Une fois installé, le widget apparaît sur l’écran d’accueil Classique et dans la liste des applications. Lorsque vous démarrez ce widget pour la première fois, appuyez sur Définir un code PIN au bas de l’écran. Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l’écran. Si le widget Mode Enfant est accidentellement désinstallé, vous pouvez le réinstaller. Depuis l’écran d’accueil Classique, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide, appuyez sur Widgets, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le widget Mode Enfant. Faites glisser le widget sur l’écran d’accueil Classique et appuyez sur Mode Enfant pour le réinstaller. Écran d’accueil du mode Enfant L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les applications du mode Enfant. Mode Dessin Lecteru média Quitter le mode Enfant. Accéder au contrôle parental. Applications récemment ajoutées Enregistreur vocal Appareil photo Galerie Fonctions et applications utiles 89 Utilisez cette application pour lire des vidéos. Avant d’utiliser cette application, ajoutez-lui les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Contrôle parental. Utilisez cette application pour créer un dessin à l’aide d’un crayon, d’un pinceau, etc. Utilisez cette application pour visualiser les images, dessins, enregistrements vocaux et fichiers multimédia enregistrés dont vous autorisez l’accès à vos enfants. Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer ou écouter des enregistrements vocaux. Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Fonctions et applications utiles 90 Zone de jeux du mode Enfant Faites défiler l’écran d’accueil vers la droite pour ouvrir la zone de jeux du mode Enfant. Vous pouvez interagir avec les personnages, les objets du décor, et bien plus encore. Contrôle parental Utilisez cette fonction pour définir des restrictions concernant le mode Enfant et contrôler l’accès aux contenus et applications. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du mode Enfant, la durée limite d’utilisation, et bien plus encore. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour saisir le code PIN. Pour quitter le contrôle parental, appuyez sur la touche Accueil. • Nom des enfants : afficher et modifier le profil des enfants. • Activité : afficher des informations sur la manière dont vos enfants utilisent l’appareil, comme la durée de jeu et les applications fréquemment utilisées. • Durée d’utilisation : définir une durée limite d'utilisation journalière. • Applications : afficher et ajouter des applications qui peuvent être utilisées en mode Enfant. • Média : autoriser vos enfants à accéder à certaines photos et vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. • Général : configurer les paramètres du mode Enfant. • Boutique des enfants : télécharger des applications pour enfants avec Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps). Fonctions et applications utiles 91 S Finder Utilisez cette application pour rechercher du contenu sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez appliquer divers filtres et afficher l’historique de recherche. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur S Finder. Rechercher du contenu Appuyez sur le champ de recherche et saisissez un mot-clé, ou appuyez sur et prononcez un motclé. Pour obtenir des résultats plus précis, sélectionnez des filtres sous le champ de recherche. Pour mettre à jour la liste des résultats de recherche, appuyez sur → Actualiser. Pour définir les paramètres de recherches à l’aide des filtres disponibles, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Filtre → Sélectionnez des filtres. Pour sélectionner des critères de recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Rechercher → Sélect. cat. de recherche. Gérer l’historique de recherche Vous pouvez afficher ou supprimer vos anciennes recherches. Sélectionnez une recherche précédente afin de la relancer. Pour supprimer l’historique, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Rechercher → Supprimer l’historique, sélectionnez des mots-clés, puis appuyez OK. Pour paramétrer l’appareil afin qu’il n’enregistre pas l’historique de recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Rechercher, puis décochez la case Enreg. historique rech. Fonctions et applications utiles 92 S Planner Démarrer S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Rechercher des événements ou des tâches. Créer un événement ou une tâche. Aller à la date d’aujourd’hui. Modifier le mode d’affichage. Appuyez sur et utilisez les options suivantes : • Aller à : accéder à une date spécifique. • Supprimer : supprimer des événements ou des tâches. • Synchroniser : synchroniser les événements et les tâches avec vos comptes. • Calendriers : sélectionner les calendriers à afficher. • Paramètres : configurer les paramètres de S Planner. Fonctions et applications utiles 93 Créer un événement ou une tâche 1 Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur . Vous pouvez également sélectionner une date ne comportant aucun événement ou tâche, et appuyer à deux reprise dessus. Si la date comporte déjà des événements ou tâches enregistrés, appuyez sur la date et sur . 3 Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, et saisissez les détails. • Événement : définir la date de début et de fin d’un événement. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de répétition. • Tâche : ajouter une tâche à réaliser à une date spécifique. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de priorité. Joindre une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Ajouter des détails. Définir une date de début et de fin pour l’événement. Saisir un titre. Sélectionner un calendrier à utiliser ou à synchroniser. Sélectionner un élément. 4 Appuyez sur OK pour sauvegarder l’événement ou la tâche. Fonctions et applications utiles 94 Synchroniser les événements et les tâches avec vos comptes Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Pour synchroniser des événements et des tâches avec vos comptes, appuyez sur → Synchroniser. Pour ajouter des comptes avec lesquels effectuer la synchronisation, appuyez sur → Calendriers → Ajouter compte. Sélectionnez ensuite un compte avec lequel effectuer la synchronisation et ouvrez une session. Une fois le compte ajouté, un cercle vert apparaît près du nom du compte. Pour modifier l’option de synchronisation du compte, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, puis sélectionnez un service de compte. Supprimer des événements ou des tâches Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Pour supprimer des événements ou des tâches, appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des événements ou des tâches, puis appuyez sur OK → OK. Pour supprimer un événement ou une tâche en cours d'affichage, appuyez sur → Supprimer → OK. Pour indiquer que les tâches sont terminées, appuyez sur une date comportant des tâches et cochez celles qui sont terminées. Partager des événements ou des tâches Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Pour partager un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Fonctions et applications utiles 95 S Voice À propos de S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander vocalement l’appareil et qu’il exécute différentes fonctions. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur S Voice. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. Vous pouvez désactiver l’accès via la touche Accueil en appuyant sur → Paramètres → Réveil, puis en décochant la case Ouvrir via touche accueil. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Définir la langue Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Langue, puis sélectionnez une langue. La langue sélectionnée est appliquée à S Voice uniquement, et non à la langue d’affichage de l’appareil. Utiliser S Voice Lorsque vous lancez S Voice, l’appareil démarre la reconnaissance vocale et l’icône de microphone devient rouge. Prononcez une commande vocale. Si vous prononcez une commande et que l’appareil la reconnaît, l’icône de microphone au bas de l’écran clignote en vert. Ensuite, l’appareil exécute la commande. Fonctions et applications utiles 96 Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale : • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits calmes. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Activer S Voice en mode veille Si vous n’utilisez pas S Voice pendant un certain temps, l’application passe automatiquement en mode veille. Pour reprendre la commande vocale, appuyez sur l’icône de microphone ou dites « Bonjour Galaxy » à l’appareil. Changer de commande pour le réveil Vous pouvez changer la commande de réveil qui correspond par défaut à « Bonjour Galaxy ». La commande de réveil sert à lancer S Voice lorsque l’appareil est en mode veille. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Réveil → Réveil vocal → Définir commande réveil. Désactiver la synthèse vocale Appuyez sur → Désactiver Retour vocal. L’appareil arrête toute synthèse vocale lorsque vous dites les commandes. Corriger les commandes vocales indésirables Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement des commandes vocales, vous pouvez les modifier. Pour corriger une commande vocale, appuyez sur la dernière bulle de dialogue contenant le texte que vous avez prononcé et modifiez le texte à l’aide du clavier. Fonctions et applications utiles 97 Email Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur Suivant pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes de messagerie électronique, vous pouvez en définir un comme compte par défaut. Appuyez sur → Paramètres, sélectionnez un compte puis appuyez sur Compte par défaut. Envoyer des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Pour rédiger un message, appuyez sur l’icône en haut de l’écran. Saisir un message. Insérer des fichiers au message ou utiliser des options d’édition. Ajouter un contact en copie ou copie masquée. S’ajouter comme destinataire. Ajouter des destinataires. Ignorer le message. Joindre des images, des vidéos, etc. Enregistrer le message pour un envoi ultérieur. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Envoyer le message. Ajouter des destinataires à partir de la liste de contacts. Saisir un objet. Fonctions et applications utiles 98 Accéder à des options supplémentaires Lorsque vous rédigez un message, appuyez sur pour accéder à des options supplémentaires. • Envoi programmé : envoyez un message à une heure définie. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, les messages peuvent être envoyés à la mauvaise heure. • Priorité : sélectionner le niveau de priorité d’un message. • Options de sécurité : définir les options de sécurité du message. Lire des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Répondre au message. Modifier la disposition de l’écran. Rédiger un message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à la liste de contacts ou afficher d’autres options. Identifier le message comme favori. Transférer le message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Supprimer le message. Fonctions et applications utiles 99 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Calculatrice. Vous pouvez afficher l’historique des calculs à gauche de l’écran. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur . Horloge Alarme Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Alarme. Créer une alarme Appuyez sur réglez l’heure de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l'alarme, paramétrez diverses autres options si besoin, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Pour activer ou désactiver les alarmes, appuyez sur près de l’alarme concernée. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : définir la tonalité de l’alarme intelligente et combien de temps avant l'alarme principe elle doit sonner. Une alarme intelligente démarre à faible volume quelques minutes avant l’heure prédéfinie de l’alarme. Le volume de l’alarme intelligente augmente graduellement jusqu’à ce que vous l’éteigniez ou que vous désactiviez l'alarme prédéfinie. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Si l’option de répétition est activée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône pour répéter l'alarme après une période de répétition prédéfinie. Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK. Fonctions et applications utiles 100 Horloge mondiale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Horloge mondiale. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK. WatchON À propos de WatchON Utilisez cette application pour vous connecter à un téléviseur et utiliser l’appareil comme une télécommande. Vous pouvez rechercher et sélectionner des programmes de télévision et changer de chaîne avec l’appareil. Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. Fonctions et applications utiles 101 Établir une connexion avec un téléviseur 1 Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. 2 Sélectionnez une région et le service de diffusion, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Les programmes de télévision disponibles s’affichent. Utiliser l’appareil comme télécommande Vous pouvez allumer et éteindre le téléviseur, parcourir les chaînes ou régler le volume du téléviseur en utilisant l’appareil comme une télécommande. 1 Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur → Configuration. 3 Sélectionnez la marque du téléviseur. 4 Assurez-vous que le port infrarouge de l’appareil est orienté vers le téléviseur et appuyez sur Allumez votre TV. Appuyez ensuite sur OK si l’appareil réussit à allumer le téléviseur. Si l’appareil ne réussit pas à allumer le téléviseur, appuyez sur Réessayer et recommencez cette opération jusqu’à ce que le téléviseur reconnaisse le signal. 5 Sélectionnez une source de chaînes. Fonctions et applications utiles 102 6 Une fois la configuration terminée, appuyez sur . Fonctions supplémentaires Allumer ou éteindre le téléviseur. Menus de commande du téléviseur Regarder la télévision à l’aide de l’appareil Sélectionnez un programme TV dans la liste des programmes disponibles pour le regarder sur le téléviseur connecté. Assurez-vous que le port infrarouge de l’appareil est orienté vers le téléviseur. 1 Appuyez sur WatchON depuis la liste des applications. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie au bas de l’écran. 3 Sélectionnez un programme TV, puis appuyez sur Regarder. Le programme sélectionné apparaît sur le téléviseur connecté. 4 Appuyez sur pour changer de chaîne ou régler le volume. Le volet de télécommande apparaît à l’écran. Fonctions et applications utiles 103 Définir un rappel de programme 1 Sélectionnez un programme TV à regarder. 2 Appuyez sur , configurez une alarme pour vous rappeler l’heure de début du programme TV, puis appuyez sur OK. L’alarme se déclenche à l’heure prédéfinie. WebEx À propos de WebEx Utilisez cette application pour héberger ou participer à des téléconférences. Vous pouvez utiliser différentes fonctions telles que le partage de contenus et les réunions vidéo HD. Avant d’utiliser cette application • Vérifiez que l’appareil est connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’un compte WebEx. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Selon le pare-feu utilisé ou l’état du réseau, cette application peut ne pas fonctionner correctement. Fonctions et applications utiles 104 Ouvrir un compte 1 Appuyez sur WebEx depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur Créer un compte sur l’écran de connexion. 3 La page Web d’accès à WebEx apparaît à l’écran. Si une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît à l’écran, vous informant que WebEx n’est pas disponible dans votre région, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette application. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer le compte. Certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles à l’issue de l’expiration de la période d’essai. Pour utiliser toutes les fonctions de WebEx, passez à un compte payant. Pour en savoir plus, rendez-vous sur le site WebEx. Fonctions et applications utiles 105 Créer une session de réunion 1 Appuyez sur WebEx depuis la liste des applications, puis sur Se connecter. 2 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur Se connecter. 3 L’écran WebEx apparaît sur l’appareil. Créer une session de réunion. Actualiser la liste de réunions. Fermer l’application. Rejoindre une session de réunion en saisissant un numéro de session. 4 Appuyez sur pour créer une session de réunion. 5 Saisissez le thème de la réunion, définissez un mot de passe, puis appuyez sur Démarrer maintenant. Fonctions et applications utiles 106 6 Appuyez sur → Connectez-vous via Internet. 7 Le microphone s’allume et apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Vous pouvez avoir une réunion audio avec d’autres personnes. Afficher le numéro de session. Partager l’écran. Inviter des personnes ou envoyer un rapport aux participants pour la réunion. Allumer ou éteindre le microphone. Commencer ou terminer une réunion vidéo. Commencer ou terminer une réunion audio. Vérifier les informations sur la réunion. Afficher les participants et bavarder en ligne avec eux. Terminer la session de réunion. Inviter des personnes à une réunion Invitez d’autres personnes à une réunion en leur envoyant un e-mail d’invitation. Vous pouvez également partager un numéro de session ou le numéro de téléphone de la session avec d’autres personnes pour les inviter à une réunion. Inviter des personnes par e-mail 1 Appuyez sur → Inviter par courrier électronique. 2 Saisissez une adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur Envoyer une invitation. Lancer un invitation en envoyant un numéro de téléphone de session Vous pouvez inviter d’autres participants à une réunion en partageant le numéro de téléphone de la session. Un numéro de téléphone de session est créé lorsque vous créez une session de réunion. Il est fourni dans l’e-mail d’invitation en même temps que d’autres informations sur la réunion. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Fonctions et applications utiles 107 Rejoindre une session de réunion Pour participer à une réunion, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes. Rejoindre une réunion par numéro de session 1 Appuyez sur WebEx depuis la liste des applications. 2 Connectez-vous à votre compte WebEx. 3 Appuyez sur → Rejoindre avec un numéro. 4 Saisissez un numéro de session à rejoindre, puis appuyez sur Rejoindre. Un numéro de session est créé lors de la création d’une session de réunion. Si vous ne connaissez pas le numéro, contactez l’organisateur. Fonctions et applications utiles 108 5 Appuyez sur → Connectez-vous via Internet. 6 Le microphone s’allume et apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Vous pouvez avoir une réunion audio avec d’autres personnes. Rejoignez une réunion en sélectionnant une dans Mes Réunions 1 Appuyez sur WebEx depuis la liste des applications. 2 Connectez-vous à votre compte WebEx. 3 Sélectionnez une réunion dans Mes Réunions, puis appuyez sur Rejoindre. 4 Appuyez sur → Connectez-vous via Internet. 5 Le microphone s’allume et apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Vous pouvez rejoindre la réunion audio. Rejoindre une réunion via un e-mail d’invitation Lorsqu’une personne vous invite à une réunion, vous recevez un e-mail d’invitation. 1 Ouvrez l’e-mail d’invitation, puis appuyez sur le lien contenu dans l’e-mail. 2 WebEx démarre et l’écran de connexion apparaît. Fonctions et applications utiles 109 3 Connectez-vous à votre compte WebEx. Si vous êtes déjà connecté à votre compte, un écran de réunion apparaît à l’écran. 4 Appuyez sur → Connectez-vous via Internet. 5 Le microphone s’allume et apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Vous pouvez avoir une réunion audio avec d’autres personnes. Rejoindre une réunion en appelant un numéro de téléphone de session Vous pouvez rejoindre une réunion en appelant le numéro de téléphone d’une session sur un smartphone. Appelez le numéro de téléphone d’une session fourni dans l’e-mail d’invitation. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Lancer une réunion Lancer une réunion vidéo 1 Appuyez sur → Démarrer ma vidéo. 2 Votre image apparaît au coin inférieur gauche de l’écran. Pour mettre fin à la réunion vidéo, appuyez sur → Arrêter ma vidéo. Lancer une réunion audio 1 Appuyez sur → Connectez-vous via Internet. 2 Le microphone s’allume et apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Pour couper le son, appuyez sur . L’icône devient . Pour mettre fin à la réunion audio, appuyez sur → Quitter la conférence audio. Fonctions et applications utiles 110 Bavarder en ligne avec des participants 1 Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste de participants. 2 Sélectionnez un nom de compte et appuyez sur Coversation instantanée. 3 La fenêtre de bavardage en ligne apparaît à l’écran. Pour bavarder en ligne avec tous les participants, appuyez sur Tchatez avec tout le monde. Partager l’écran Partagez l’écran affiché sur votre appareil avec des participants. Seule la personne désignée comme le présentateur peut partager l’écran d’une autre. La personne qui crée une réunion est désignée comme le présentateur au début d’une réunion. 1 Si vous êtes le présentateur, appuyez sur Partager l’écran en haut de l’écran. 2 Si vous utilisez cette fonction pour la première fois, suivez les instructions à l’écran. 3 Appuyez sur Partager l’écran dans la fenêtre contextuelle. 4 Lorsque la fonction de partage d’écran est activée, apparaît au coin supérieur droit de l’écran. Le contenu de l’écran de l’appareil du présentateur est affiché sur les écrans des appareils des participants. Arrêter la fonction de partage d’écran Appuyez sur → Arrêter le partage. L’appareil met fin au partage de l’écran et affiche l’écran de la réunion. Fonctions et applications utiles 111 Changer de présentateur L’organisateur de la réunion et le présentateur en cours peuvent changer le présentateur. 1 Appuyez sur et sélectionnez un participant à désigner comme présentateur. 2 Appuyez sur Donner le rôle d'animateur. 3 apparaît près du nom de compte du présentateur. Fermer ou quitter la réunion Appuyez sur → Terminer la réunion ou Quitter la réunion. En cas d’échec de connexion réseau lors d’une réunion Si la réunion se poursuit, vous pouvez vous y reconnecter. Si la réunion est terminée, redémarrez-la. Fonctions et applications utiles 112 Businessweek+ Utilisez cette application pour accéder aux actualités les plus récentes sur la finance, les entreprises, les informations de la bourse, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Businessweek+ depuis la liste des applications. Si vous ouvrez cette application pour la première fois, suivez les instructions à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Télécharger un article 1 Parcourez les numéros en fonction de la date et affichez les images à la une. Depuis l’écran principal Businessweek+, utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : modifiez le mode d’affichage. •  : accéder à la liste des numéros téléchargés. •  : accéder aux articles enregistrés par catégorie. •  : afficher des informations détaillées à propos de l’application ou modifier les paramètres. 2 Appuyez sur Download. Une image apparaît et affiche l’état du téléchargement. Parcourez les titres à la une pour télécharger davantage d’articles. Ouvrir et afficher des articles Une fois le téléchargement terminé, appuyez sur la une du numéro et parcourez les pages. Lors de la consultation d’un article, vous pouvez utiliser l’une des options suivantes : •  : accéder à la liste des numéros téléchargés. •  : regarder la vidéo ou écouter le clip audio inclus. •  : accéder aux articles enregistrés par catégorie. •  : afficher et rechercher l’indice de diverses entreprises. Fonctions et applications utiles 113 •  : afficher les manchettes ou les articles par catégorie. • Related : afficher le détail des informations financières connexes. •  : enregistrer l’article dans la liste des coupures de presse. •  : modifier la taille de la police. •  : envoyez la page en cours à d’autres personnes. La disponibilité des options dépend de l’article consulté. Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le service de stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre appareil sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Dropbox. Si vous démarrez cette application pour la première fois ou après la réinitialisation de vos données, suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Utilisez les fonctions suivantes : •  : charger ou ouvrir des fichiers. Appuyez sur → Transférer ici pour télécharger les fichiers. •  : afficher/lire les photos/vidéos chargées. Appuyez sur pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums. •  : ouvrir des fichiers de la liste des favoris. •  : afficher des notifications. Fonctions et applications utiles 114 Evernote Utilisez cette application pour créer, synchroniser et partager des notes multimédia. Vous pouvez ajouter des tags aux notes ou trier les notes dans un carnet et gérer ainsi efficacement vos idées. Appuyez sur Evernote depuis la liste des applications. Connectez-vous à votre compte Evernote. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Evernote. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser les notes avec votre compte ou modifier les paramètres. Afficher les informations sur le stockage et le compte. Rechercher des notes. Afficher les nouveaux conseils pour utiliser l’application et d’autres fonctions. Rédiger des notes à l’aide de diverses options. Afficher les notes sous divers modes. Fonctions et applications utiles 115 Composer des notes Vous pouvez créer une note à l’aide d’images, d’enregistrements vocaux et autres pièces jointes. Sélectionnez une option pour rédiger une note. Lorsque vous rédigez une note, utilisez les options suivantes : •  : définir un rappel pour la note. •  : joindre des fichiers ou utiliser des options supplémentaires. •  : prendre une photo et la joindre à la note. • → Enregistrer : enregistrez la note. • → Carnet de notes : sélectionner un emplacement d’enregistrement. • → Étiquettes : ajouter des balises à la note. • → Définir un emplacement : ajouter des adresses à la note. • → Paramètres : accédez à des options supplémentaires. Supprimer des notes Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une note, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Flipboard Utilisez cette application pour afficher en direct les actualisations des réseaux sociaux et les actualités à un format de magazine personnalisé. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Flipboard. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Si vous démarrez cette application pour la première fois ou après la réinitialisation de vos données, suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Depuis l’écran principal Flipboard, sélectionnez des articles d’actualités et des abonnements. Fonctions et applications utiles 116 Modifier les abonnements Depuis l’écran principal Flipboard, appuyez sur → Mon Flipboard pour afficher vos abonnements. Pour supprimer des abonnements ou modifier leur emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément. Faites ensuite glisser cet élément dans la corbeille ou vers un nouvel emplacement. Pour ajouter des abonnements, appuyez sur , sélectionnez un abonnement dans la liste EN DÉCOUVRIR PLUS, puis appuyez sur . Créer des magazines personnalisés Enregistrez divers contenus en créant votre propre magazine que vous pouvez consulter à tout moment ou partager avec d’autres personnes. Lorsque vous lisez un contenu intéressant, appuyez sur pour créer un magazine. Vous pouvez créer un nouveau magazine ou enregistrer le contenu sélectionné dans un magazine existant. Pour afficher vos magazines, appuyez sur → Mon Flipboard. Pour afficher des informations d’aide, appuyez sur → Mon Flipboard → → Aide. Pour en savoir plus, rendez-vous sur le site Web Flipboard. Hancom Office Viewer À propos de Hancom Office Viewer Utilisez cette application pour consulter des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Fonctions et applications utiles 117 Rechercher des documents Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. Appuyez sur Ouvrir pour parcourir un document. Sélectionner des documents ou des dossiers. Récupérer des nouveaux documents et dossiers. Créer un dossier. Modifier le mode d’affichage. Trier des documents et des dossiers. Pour rechercher des documents récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Documents récents. Lire des documents Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. Appuyez sur un document dans Documents récents ou dans un dossier. Appuyez sur ou sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Traitement de texte • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Afficher/Masquer les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document. Fonctions et applications utiles 118 • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Présentation • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la première page. • À partir de la diapositive active : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la page en cours. • Mode Présentateur : afficher les outils de présentation sur l’appareil lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un moniteur externe. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Feuille de calcul • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques. • Afficher les formules : afficher les formules à l’intérieur des cellules au lieu de leurs résultats calculés. Fonctions et applications utiles 119 • Figer les volets : garder la ligne sélectionnée en place. • Quadrillage : afficher ou masquer les grilles de ligne. • Afficher tous les commentaires : afficher ou masquer des mémos sur le document. • Zone d’impression : sélectionner une zone à imprimer. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. PDF • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Propriétés : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Masquer les commentaires / Afficher les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document. • Défilement vertical / Affichage en continu / Défilement horizontal : modifier le mode d’affichage. • Mode lecture : afficher le contenu du document uniquement, sans les marges. • Atteindre la page : accéder à une page indiquée. • Signets : afficher des signets sur le document. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile. Les fonctions disponibles peuvent varier selon le fichier sélectionné. Fonctions et applications utiles 120 Gérer des documents Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. Lors de la consultation d’un document, appuyez sur , sélectionnez des documents ou des dossiers, et utilisez l’une des options suivantes. •  : renommer un document ou un dossier. •  : copier des documents ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. •  : déplacer des documents ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. •  : supprimer des documents ou dossiers. •  : envoyer des documents à d’autres contacts ou les partager. NYTimes Utilisez cette application pour parcourir et rechercher des articles, et plus encore. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Appuyez sur NYTimes depuis la liste des applications. 2 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Depuis l’écran principal NYTimes, utilisez l’une des options suivantes : •  : actualiser la liste des articles. •  : rechercher des articles. •  : accéder à des options supplémentaires ou modifier des paramètres. 3 Appuyez sur un article pour le lire. Lors de la consultation d’un article, vous pouvez utiliser l’une des options suivantes : •  : afficher les commentaires des autres personnes sur l’article. •  : envoyez la page en cours à d’autres personnes. •  : enregistrer l’article dans votre liste. •  : annoter l’article. •  : accéder à des options supplémentaires ou modifier des paramètres. Fonctions et applications utiles 121 Google apps Google fournit des applications de divertissement, de réseaux sociaux et professionnelles. Vous aurez éventuellement besoin d’un compte Google pour accéder à certaines applications. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Paramétrer un compte. Pour afficher des informations sur une application, ouvrez son écran principal, puis appuyez sur → Aide. Certaines applications peuvent ne pas être disponibles ou s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Chrome Recherchez des information et naviguez dans des pages Web. Google Mail Envoyez et recevez des e-mails via le service Google Mail. Google+ Communiquez et partagez des contenus avec votre famille, vos amis et bien plus de personnes. Cet espace vous permet également de sauvegarder vos photos, vidéos, etc. Maps Localisez votre position sur une carte, recherchez des adresses et affichez des informations de localisation. Play Musique Découvrez, écoutez et partagez des morceaux de musique à l’aide de votre appareil. Play Films Regardez des vidéos enregistrées sur votre appareil et téléchargez divers contenus sur Play Store. Fonctions et applications utiles 122 Play Livres Téléchargez des livres sur Play Store et lisez-les. Play Kiosque Consultez les actualités et les magazines qui vous intéressent. Play Jeux Téléchargez des jeux sur Play Store et jouez avec d’autres participants. Google Drive Stockez vos données sur le cloud, accédez-y où que vous soyez et partagez-les avec d’autres personnes. YouTube Regardez ou créez des vidéos et partagez-les avec d’autres personnes. Google+ Photos Gérez vos photos, albums et vidéos enregistré(e)s sur l’appareil et téléchargé(e)s sur Google+. Hangouts Discutez avec vos amis, séparément ou en groupe, et ajoutez des images, émoticônes et vidéos. Recherche Google Recherchez rapidement des informations sur Internet ou sur votre appareil. Recherche vocale Recherchez rapidement des informations en énonçant un mot-clé ou une phrase. Paramètres Google Configurez certaines fonctions proposées par Google. 123 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth À propos de Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour le piratage de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 124 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth, faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite pour activer la fonction, puis appuyez sur Analyser. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. Pour définir l’appareil comme visible aux autres appareils, appuyez sur son nom. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous associer. Si votre appareil a été appairé par le passé avec un appareil, appuyez sur son nom sans confirmer le mot de passe. Si l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous associer ne figure pas dans la liste, demandez à ce que l’option de visibilité soit activée sur l’appareil. 3 Pour confirmer, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur les deux appareils. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. Vous pouvez partager des données, comme des contacts ou des fichiers multimédia, avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth. Vous pouvez, par exemple, envoyer une image à un autre appareil. Envoyer une image 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil sur lequel transférer l’image. Si l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous associer ne figure pas dans la liste, demandez à ce que l’option de visibilité soit activée sur l'appareil ou définissez votre appareil comme visible aux autres appareils. 4 Acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 125 Recevoir une image Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie une image, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth. L’image reçue est enregistrée dans Galerie → → Album → dossier Download. Dissocier des appareils Bluetooth 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth. L’appareil affiche la liste des appareils associés. 2 Appuyez sur près du nom de l’appareil à dissocier. 3 Appuyez sur Dissocier. Wi-Fi Direct À propos de Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre des appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Établir une connexion à d’autres appareils 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur Wi-Fi pour l’activer. 2 Appuyez sur Wi-Fi Direct. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous connecter. Pour raccorder plusieurs appareils, appuyez sur Connexion multiple. Pour modifier le nom de l’appareil, appuyez sur → Renommer le périphérique. 4 Acceptez la demande d’autorisation Wi-Fi Direct sur l’autre appareil pour confirmer. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 126 Envoyer et recevoir des données Vous pouvez partager des données, comme des contacts ou des fichiers multimédia, avec d’autres appareils. Vous pouvez, par exemple, envoyer une image à un autre appareil comme suit. Envoyer une image 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur → Wi-Fi Direct, puis sélectionnez un appareil sur lequel transférer l’image. 4 Acceptez la demande d’autorisation Wi-Fi Direct sur l’autre appareil. Recevoir une image Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie une image, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Wi-Fi Direct. L’image reçue est enregistrée dans Galerie → → Album → dossier Download. Interrompre la connexion à l’appareil 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi. 2 Appuyez sur Wi-Fi Direct. L’appareil affiche la liste des appareils connectés. 3 Appuyez sur Terminer la connexion → OK pour déconnecter les appareils. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 127 Connexion rapide À propos de la fonction Connexion rapide Utilisez cette fonction pour rechercher et vous connecter facilement aux appareils à proximité. Vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil comme télécommande en le connectant à un téléviseur. • Les modes de connexion peuvent varier selon le type des appareils connectés ou du contenu partagé. • Le nom de l’appareil peut varier selon les appareils Bluetooth avec lesquels il est appairé. Par exemple, le nom de l’appareil peut s’afficher comme BT MAC. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction • Assurez-vous que les appareils à connecter prennent en charge la fonction Connexion rapide et que leur écran est allumé. • Assurez-vous que la fonction Wi-Fi Direct ou Bluetooth est activée sur les appareils ne prenant pas en charge la fonction Connexion rapide. Établir une connexion à d’autres appareils 1 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Connex. rapide. À l’ouverture du volet, la fonction Bluetooth est automatiquement activée et l’appareil recherche les appareils à proximité. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous connecter. Les étapes suivantes peuvent varier en fonction de l’appareil connecté. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la connexion entre les appareils. Pour permettre aux appareils situés à proximité de rechercher votre appareil et de s’y connecter, appuyez sur → Toujours prêt à se connecter, puis faites glisser le curseur Toujours prêt à se connecter vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 128 Relancer la recherche d’appareils Si l’appareil recherché n’apparaît pas dans la liste, recherchez-le. Appuyez sur et sélectionnez l’appareil dans la liste des appareils détectés. Déconnecter des appareils Pour désactiver la fonction Connexion rapide, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Sinon, appuyez sur . Partager du contenu Partagez du contenu avec les appareils connectés. 1 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Connex. rapide. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil dans la liste des appareils détectés. 3 Sélectionnez une catégorie de média. 4 Sélectionnez le contenu à partager, puis appuyez sur Terminé. Votre appareil envoie le contenu à l’appareil connecté. Établir une connexion avec un téléviseur Connectez l’appareil à un téléviseur et commandez le téléviseur en utilisant l’appareil comme télécommande. 1 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Connex. rapide. 2 Sélectionnez un téléviseur dans la liste des appareils détectés. Lorsque l’appareil est connecté au téléviseur, une télécommande apparaît à l’écran. Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à un téléviseur pour la première fois, appuyez sur Config. télécommande. Ensuite, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer la connexion des appareils. 3 Commandez le téléviseur à l’aide de la télécommande. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 129 SideSync 3.0 À propos de SideSync 3.0 Utilisez cette application pour commander l’écran d’un smartphone à l’aide d’un smartphone virtuel sur votre tablette. • Sur votre tablette, affichez des messages ou utilisez le forum de bavardage en ligne de votre smartphone. • Sur votre tablette, regardez une vidéo lue sur le smartphone sur un écran plus grand. • Transférez en toute simplicité des fichiers entre votre tablette et votre téléphone par un mouvement de glisser/déposer. Avant d’utiliser cette application • Votre tablette et votre smartphone doivent prendre en charge Wi-Fi Direct. Sinon, les deux appareils doivent être connectés au même point d’accès. • SideSync 3.0 doit être installé sur votre tablette et votre smartphone. Si l’application n’est installée sur aucun appareil, téléchargez-la et installez-la depuis Samsung Apps (GALAXY Apps) ou Play Store. • SideSync 3.0 fonctionne uniquement sur des appareils équipés d’Android 4.4 ou d’une version supérieure. Connecter votre tablette et un smartphone 1 Sur votre tablette, appuyez sur SideSync 3.0 depuis la liste des applications. 2 Démarrez SideSync 3.0 sur un smartphone. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 130 3 La tablette recherche automatiquement les smartphones disponibles. Sélectionnez l’un des smartphones détectés. 4 Appuyez sur OK depuis l’écran du smartphone. 5 L’écran virtuel du smartphone apparaît sur votre tablette et l’écran du smartphone s’éteint. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 131 Utiliser l'écran du smartphone virtuel Naviguez sur l'écran du smartphone virtuel et utilisez ses applications. Vous pouvez envoyer ou recevoir des messages ou bavarder en ligne avec d’autres personnes. • Il est possible que certaines fonctions, comme Appareil photo et Screen Mirroring ne fonctionnent pas sur l'écran du smartphone virtuel. • L’écran virtuel du smartphone peut varier en fonction du smartphone. Fermer SideSync 3.0. Écran du smartphone virtuel Touche Retour Touche Accueil Touche Applications récentes Rotation de l’écran Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Capture d’écran Ouvrir la même page Web dans le navigateur Web de votre tablette. Réduire l’écran. Agrandir l’écran à la taille de l’écran de votre tablette. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 132 Déplacer l'écran du smartphone virtuel Appuyez le bord supérieur de l'écran du smartphone virtuel et faites-le glisser pour le déplacer vers un autre emplacement. Régler la taille de l'écran du smartphone virtuel 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur en bas à droite de l’écran du smartphone virtuel. 2 Lorsque le cadre apparaît, faites-le glisser pour régler la taille. Saisir du texte Lorsque vous saisissez un texte sur l'écran du smartphone virtuel, le clavier de la tablette apparaît. Saisissez le texte à l’aide du clavier. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 133 Basculer d'un écran à l'autre Il n’est pas possible d’utiliser simultanément l’écran de votre smartphone et l'écran du smartphone virtuel. Lorsque vous utilisez l'écran du smartphone virtuel sur la tablette, l'écran du smartphone s’éteint. Utiliser l'écran du smartphone Appuyez sur la touche Accueil du smartphone pour activer son écran et éteindre l'écran du smartphone virtuel sur la tablette. Utiliser l'écran du smartphone virtuel Appuyez sur Basculer sur la tablette sur l’écran de la tablette pour activer l'écran du smartphone virtuel et éteindre l'écran du smartphone. Lire de la musique ou des vidéos sur la tablette Lisez de la musique ou des vidéos stockés sur le smartphone via l’écran et le haut-parleur de la tablette. 1 Ouvrez un fichier vidéo ou de musique sur l'écran du smartphone virtuel de la tablette. 2 Le fichier sélectionné est lu à l’aide de l’écran et du haut-parleur de la tablette. Pendant la lecture, réglez le volume de l’écran du smartphone virtuel ou de la tablette. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 134 Copier des fichier entre appareils Copier des fichiers du smartphone sur la tablette 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier sur l’écran du smartphone virtuel. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à copier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier sélectionné, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran de la tablette. 3 La fonction Mes fichiers démarre sur l’écran de la tablette. Sélectionnez un dossier où enregistrer le fichier, puis appuyez sur OK. Copier des fichiers de la tablette sur le smartphone 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier de l’écran de la tablette. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à copier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier sélectionné, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran du smartphone virtuel. 3 La fonction Mes fichiers démarre sur l’écran du smartphone virtuel. Sélectionnez un dossier où enregistrer le fichier, puis appuyez sur OK. Utiliser les fonctions d’appel avec la tablette Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre smartphone avec le haut-parleur et le microphone de la tablette. Recevez un appel ou passez un appel en utilisant l’écran virtuel du smartphone. Pour plus d’informations à propos des fonctions d’appel, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi du smartphone. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 135 Remote PC Démarrer Remote PC Utilisez cette application pour afficher et contrôler l’écran de votre ordinateur sur votre appareil en connectant les deux appareils à l’aide d’une connexion Wi-Fi ou d’un réseau local. Vous pouvez également facilement afficher des fichiers et les transférer entre votre appareil et votre ordinateur. Avant d’utiliser cette application • Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’un compte Samsung. • Assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est allumé. • Assurez-vous que l’Agent est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. • Pour utiliser cette fonction, procédez dans l’ordre chronologique suivant : 1. Enregistrez l’appareil sur votre compte Samsung. 2. Enregistrez l’ordinateur sur votre compte Samsung. 3. Connectez l’appareil et l’ordinateur à distance. Enregistrer l’appareil 1 Sur votre appareil, appuyez sur Remote PC depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur Suivant sur la page d’accueil. Démarrer l’application. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 136 3 Appuyez sur Connecxion, saisissez votre compte et mot de passe Samsung, puis appuyez de nouveau sur Connecx. Si vous n’avez pas de compte Samsung, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour en créer un. Enregistrer un ordinateur 1 Sur votre ordinateur, lancez le navigateur Web et accédez au site remotepc.rview.com. 2 Connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. Vous devez vous connecter au même compte Samsung que celui que vous utilisez sur votre appareil. 3 Installez l’Agent s’il n’est pas déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour saisir un nom d’affichage pour l’ordinateur, les paramètres proxy et le mot de passe. Pour savoir comment configurer votre serveur proxy, contactez votre administrateur réseau. apparaît dans la barre des tâches, une fois l’installation terminée. 4 Appuyez sur Vérifier la connexion (Actualiser). Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 137 Connecter l’appareil et un ordinateur à distance. 1 Appuyez sur Remote PC depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur Vérifier la connexion (Actualiser). Afficher le nom de l’ordinateur. Connecter l’appareil et l’ordinateur à distance. 3 Appuyez sur ON computer. 4 Saisissez le mot de passe de la connexion, puis appuyez sur OK. Si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, appuyez sur Mot de passe oublié ?. 5 La connexion est établie et vous pouvez commander l’ordinateur à distance depuis l’appareil. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 138 Commander l’ordinateur depuis l’appareil Après avoir connecté les appareils, vous pouvez afficher et commander l’écran de votre ordinateur depuis l’appareil. Vous pouvez également ouvrir ou modifier des fichiers sur l’ordinateur et les transférer à l’appareil. Parcourir l’écran. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. État de la connexion Appuyez sur l’écran, puis sur au bas de l’écran pour utiliser l’une des fonctions suivantes : • Souris : afficher le pointeur de la souris sur l’écran de l’appareil. • Clavier : ouvrir le clavier pour saisir du texte dans la zone de saisie sélectionnée. • Explorateur à distance : ouvrir le gestionnaire de fichiers pour rechercher des fichiers et les transférer entre les appareils connectés. • Changer de fenêtre : basculer entre deux moniteurs lorsque l’ordinateur est raccordé à deux écrans. • Fermer : fermer l’application en cours d’exécution. • Plus : – Verrouillage d’écran : verrouiller l’écran de l’appareil afin de désactiver le zoom et les fonctions de défilement. – Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la connexion. – Ctrl + Alt + Suppr : ouvrir le gestionnaire de tâches sur votre ordinateur. – Déconnecter : mettre fin à la connexion entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 139 Transférer des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur 1 Appuyez sur → Explorateur à distance. 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un fichier du volet du gestionnaire de fichiers de l’ordinateur. Faites-le ensuite glisser jusqu’au volet du gestionnaire de fichiers de l’appareil. Vous pouvez également déplacer un fichier dans le sens inverse. Gestionnaire de fichiers de l’ordinateur Gestionnaire de fichiers de l’appareil Déconnecter l’appareil de l’ordinateur Sur l’appareil, appuyez sur → OK. Sur l’ordinateur, cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur dans la barre des tâches et quittez le pilote. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 140 Screen Mirroring À propos de Screen Mirroring Utilisez cette fonction pour connecter votre appareil à un grand écran avec le routeur AllShare Cast ou HomeSync, puis partagez vos contenus. Vous pouvez également utiliser cette fonction avec d’autres appareils prenant en charge la fonction Miracast Wi-Fi. Appareils compatibles avec Screen Mirroring (appareils avec routeur AllShare Cast, HomeSync et Wi-Fi) • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette fonction peut ne pas fonctionner sur les appareils compatibles Miracast ne prenant pas en charge le protocole HDCP 2.X (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). • Selon la connexion réseau, certains fichiers peuvent être mis en mémoire tampon en cours de lecture. • Pour économiser votre batterie, désactivez cette fonction lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. • Si vous indiquez une bande de fréquence Wi-Fi, il se peut que les routeurs AllShare Cast ou HomeSync ne soient pas détectés. • Si vous lisez des vidéos ou jouez à des jeux sur un téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode TV approprié afin d’obtenir un résultat optimal. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 141 Afficher du contenu sur un téléviseur Connectez le téléviseur et l’appareil devant utiliser la fonction Screen Mirroring. Pour configurer la connexion, reportez-vous au mode d'emploi de l’appareil. Vous pouvez, par exemple, afficher du contenu sur un téléviseur connecté via un routeur AllShare Cast. 1 Connectez l’appareil compatible avec la fonction Screen Mirroring au téléviseur à l’aide d’un câble HDMI. 2 Sur le téléviseur, sélectionnez un mode de connexion, comme le mode HDMI, pour permettre la connexion à un appareil externe. 3 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Screen Mirroring. Une liste des appareils détectés apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez un appareil auquel vous connecter. L’écran de votre appareil apparaît sur l’écran du téléviseur. Si vous connectez l’appareil pour la première fois, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le nom du routeur figurant dans la liste et saisissez le code PIN indiqué sur l’écran du téléviseur. 5 Ouvrez ou lisez un fichier, puis commandez l’affichage à l’aide des touches de votre appareil. Arrêter le partage Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Screen Mirroring, puis faites glisser le curseur Screen Mirroring vers la gauche pour désactiver la fonction. Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 142 Utiliser la fonction d’impression mobile Connectez l’appareil à une imprimante à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi ou Wi-Fi Direct, puis imprimez des images ou des documents. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Connecter l’appareil à une imprimante Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Impression, sélectionnez un type d’imprimante, puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. L’appareil recherche les imprimantes connectées au même réseau Wi-Fi que lui. Sélectionnez une imprimante à utiliser comme imprimante par défaut. Pour ajouter des imprimantes manuellement, appuyez sur → Ajouter une imprimante → , saisissez les détails, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier les paramètres d’impression, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Imprimer du contenu En mode affichage d'une image ou d'un document par exemple, appuyez sur → Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 143 Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. Démarrez Samsung Kies et connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour en savoir plus sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble USB. • Ne connectez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 144 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et un ordinateur Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Ne débranchez pas le câble USB de l’appareil lorsqu’un transfert de fichiers est en cours. Cela risquerait d’entraîner une perte de données ou d’endommager l’appareil. • Ne débranchez pas l’appareil de l’ordinateur lorsque vous lisez des fichiers enregistrés sur l’appareil sur l’ordinateur raccordé. Une fois que vous avez terminé de lire le fichier, débranchez l’appareil de l’ordinateur. • Il se peut que les appareils ne se connectent pas correctement s’ils le sont via un concentrateur USB. Branchez directement l’appareil sur le port USB de l’ordinateur. Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 145 Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Sauvegarder et restaurer des données Conservez vos informations personnelles, données d’applications et paramètres en toute sécurité sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez effectuer une sauvegarde de vos informations importantes sur un compte de sauvegarde et y accéder ultérieurement. Utiliser un compte Google 1 Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser et cochez la case Sauvegarder mes données. 3 Appuyez sur Compte de sauvegarde et sélectionnez un compte de sauvegarde. Pour restaurer les données, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Google via l’assistant de configuration. Vous pouvez lancer et ouvrir l’assistant de configuration en effectuant une réinitialisation des données par défaut sur l’appareil. Si vous ne vous connectez pas à votre compte Google via l’assistant de configuration, vous ne pouvez pas restaurer les données de sauvegarde. Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 146 Utiliser un compte Samsung 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte → Samsung, puis connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. 2 Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. 3 Appuyez sur Général → Cloud → Sauvegarder, cochez les éléments à sauvegarder, puis appuyez sur Sauvegarder maintenant → Sauvegarder. Pour restaurer les données, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Cloud → Restaurer, sélectionnez les éléments, puis appuyez sur Restaurer maintenant. Réinitialiser les données Vous pouvez supprimer tous les paramètres et toutes les données de l’appareil. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut, assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données importantes stockées sur l’appareil. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Sauvegarder et restaurer des données. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. L’appareil redémarre automatiquement. 147 Paramètres À propos des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Pour rechercher des paramètres en saisissant des mots clés, appuyez sur . Connexions Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : affichez les informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Appuyez sur → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Appuyez sur → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonction. Paramètres 148 Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d’expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Renommer le périphérique : changez le nom de l’appareil. • Aide : affichez les informations d’aide sur la fonction Bluetooth. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Mode Hors ligne. Utilisation des données Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Utilisation des données. • Cycle utilisation données : indiquez la date de réinitialisation mensuelle à laquelle effectuer la vérification de l’utilisation des données entre deux périodes. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications, comme le calendrier ou les e-mails. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Général → Comptes. • Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Paramètres 149 Position Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Position, puis faites glisser le curseur Position vers la droite pour activer la fonction. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation. • DEMANDES DE LOCALISATION RÉCENTES : affichez les applications demandant votre position ainsi que leur consommation de batterie. • SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Plus de réseaux Personnalisez les paramètres réseaux. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Plus de réseaux. VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Ethernet L’option Ethernet est disponible lorsqu’un adaptateur Ethernet est connecté à l’appareil. Utilisez cette option pour activer la fonction Ethernet et configurer les paramètres réseau. Paramètres 150 Appareils à proximité Modifiez les paramètres de partage de contenu lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à des appareils avoisinants. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Appareils à proximité, puis faites glisser le curseur Appareils à proximité vers la droite pour activer la fonction. • NOM DE L’APPAREIL : affichez le nom de serveur multimédia de votre appareil. • Contenu à partager : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Recevoir fichiers d’autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Impression Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Impression. Screen Mirroring Activez cette fonction pour partager votre écran avec d’autres personnes. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Screen Mirroring. Paramètres 151 Appareil Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Son. • Mode son : configurez le mode sonore à utiliser (vibreur, son ou silencieux). • Volume : réglez le niveau sonore de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Intensité des vibrations : réglez l’intensité des vibrations émises par l’appareil lorsque vous appuyez sur l’écran. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les notifications, comme les messages entrants. • Sélections audibles : réglez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Retour tactile : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application. • Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Vibreur en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Affichage. • Police : – Style de police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. – Taille de police : modifier la taille de la police. • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. Paramètres 152 • Rotation de l’écran : indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que l’appareil. – Smart Rotation : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote selon l’orientation de votre visage. • Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir empêcher que le rétroéclairage se désactive lorsque vous consultez l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Mode d’écran : – Affichage adaptatif : utilisez ce mode pour optimiser l’affichage selon en fonction de la taille de l'écran. – Cinéma AMOLED : utilisez ce mode pour accentuer les tonalités de l’affichage. – Photo AMOLED : utilisez ce mode pour que les tons de l’écran ressemblent à de vraies couleurs. – Basique : utilisez ce mode pour obtenir un arrière-plan sombre, comme dans une pièce peu éclairée. • Mode lecture : sélectionnez les applications qui utiliseront le mode lecture. En mode lecture, l’appareil protège vos yeux lorsque vous lisez la nuit. • Tons écran auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir économiser de l’énergie en ajustant la luminosité de l’écran. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Durée de l’éclairage des touches : paramétrez la durée de rétroéclairage des touches Applications récentes et Retour. • Augmenter sensib. tactile : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser l’utilisation de l’écran tactile avec des gants. Selon la matière des gants que vous portez, certaines commandes peuvent ne pas être reconnues. Paramètres 153 Fond d’écran Modifiez les paramètres du fond d’écran. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Fond d’écran. • Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil Classique. • Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. • Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil Classique et de l’écran de verrouillage. Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : modifiez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la méthode de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Carte d’écran de verrouillage : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des cartes Magazine sur l’écran verrouillé indiquant la météo, les actualités mises à jour, votre calendrier, etc. Modifiez les paramètres des cartes. • Options du widget Horloge : configurez les paramètres pour le widget horloge. – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître avec l’horloge. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. Paramètres 154 Fenêtres multiples Paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite pour activer la fonction. • Ouvrir en vue Multi-fenêtre : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il active la fonction Fenêtres multiples lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers dans Mes fichiers ou Vidéo. De même, l’appareil désactive cette fonction lorsque vous affichez les pièces jointes des messages. Volet des raccourcis Personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Volet des raccourcis. • Luminosité et volume : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les barres de réglage de la luminosité et du volume dans le volet des raccourcis. • Applications recommandées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la liste des applications recommandées dans le volet des raccourcis en fonction de vos actions, par exemple lorsque vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil. • Définir les raccourcis : modifiez les touches de paramétrage rapide affichées dans le volet des raccourcis. Boîte à outils Paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la boîte à outils. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Boîte à outils, puis faites glisser le curseur Boîte à outils vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Affichez la liste des applications dans la boîte à outils. Pour modifier la liste des applications, appuyez sur . Paramètres 155 Mouvements Activez la fonction de détection des mouvements et modifiez les paramètres permettant de contrôler la détection des mouvements de votre appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Mouvements. • Muet/pause : – Couvrir écran avec main : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. – Smart Pause : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre la lecture vidéo en pause lorsque vous détournez les yeux de l’écran. • Balayer pour capturer : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Accessibilité Utilisez cette fonction pour améliorer l’accessibilité de l’appareil. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section À propos des menus Accessibilité. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Accessibilité. Mode Blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Mode Blocage, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Blocage vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Utilisateurs Paramétrez et gérez les profils utilisateurs pour des réglages personnalisés. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Fonction multi-utilisateur. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Utilisateurs. Paramètres 156 Mode Privé Paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher d’autres personnes d’accéder à votre contenu personnel en activant le mode Privé. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Mode Privé, puis faites glisser le curseur Mode Privé vers la droite pour activer la fonction. • Méthode de déverrouillage : configurez ou modifiez la méthode de déverrouillage pour activer le mode Privé. Lecteur d’empreintes Enregistrez votre empreinte sur l’appareil pour le sécuriser ou vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Appareil → Lecteur d’empreintes. • Gestionnaire d’empreintes : enregistrez ou supprimez des empreintes. • Modifier MDP de secours : modifiez le mot de passe de secours à utiliser si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas votre empreinte. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : modifiez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. • Vérifier le compte Samsung : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie votre compte Samsung à l’aide de vos empreintes digitales. • Payer avec PayPal : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie votre compte PayPal et autorise les achats en utilisant vos empreintes digitales. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Général Comptes Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Comptes. Paramètres 157 Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Cloud. Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Langue et saisie. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Paramètres 158 Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Glissement du clavier : – Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. – Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. – Contrôle du curseur : activez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. – Saisie glissée : activez ou désactivez le clavier pour saisir des chiffres ou des symboles quand vous appuyez sur une touche, puis que vous effleurez l’écran vers le haut avec le doigt. • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Vibreur : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Paramètres 159 Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Recherche vocale • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance vocale dès que vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez de l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour autoriser la saisie vocale de mots-clés via le microphone du casque et/ou de l’écouteur Bluetooth si celui-ci est connecté. Options synthèse vocale • MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. Paramètres 160 Fenêtres contextuelles Activez la fonction pointage souris. Exécutez différentes fonctions lorsque le pointeur de la souris ou le pavé tactile connecté à l’appareil se déplace sur l’écran. • Aperçu & intitulés icônes : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche un aperçu du contenu ou des informations contextuelles lorsque le pointeur pointe sur un élément. • Défilement de la liste : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir faire défiler les listes en déplaçant le pointeur vers le bord de l’écran. Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Date et heure. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Accessoires Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Accessoires. • Sortie audio : sélectionnez le format de sortie audio à utiliser lorsque vous connectez l’appareil à des périphériques HDMI. Certains appareils peuvent ne pas prendre en charge les paramètres de son Surround. • Déverrouillage automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le déverrouiller automatiquement lorsque vous l’ouvrez. Paramètres 161 Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Batterie. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Économie d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Économie d’énergie. • Mode Éco. d’énergie : activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. – Limiter les performances : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il limite les diverses options, par exemple en désactivant le rétroéclairage des touches Applications récentes et Retour. – Mode Échelle de gris : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les couleurs à l’écran en nuances de gris. • Mode Ultra économie d’énergie : paramétrez l’appareil pour prolonger le temps de veille et réduire la consommation de la batterie en affichant une présentation simplifiée et en autorisant un accès limité à une application. Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. Paramètres 162 Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Stockage. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → Sécurité. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez lorsque ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – ENREGISTREMENT DU COMPTE : enregistrez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. Paramètres 163 • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : paramétrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant de sources inconnues. • Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour permettre à Google de vérifier que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • MàJ de politique sécurité : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie et télécharge les mises à jour de sécurité. • Envoyer des rapports de sécurité : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il envoie automatiquement des rapports de sécurité à Samsung. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. À propos de l’appareil Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le logiciel de l’appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Général → À propos de l’appareil. Applications Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → Gestionnaire d’applications. Applications par défaut Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → Applications par défaut. Paramètres 164 Contacts Modifiez les paramètres d’utilisation des contacts. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → Contacts. • Importer/Exporter : importez ou exportez des contacts. • Contacts à afficher : sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle afficher les contacts. • Contacts avec n° tél. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche uniquement les contacts qui ont un numéro de téléphone répertorié. • Trier par : sélectionnez une option de tri des contacts. • Afficher les contacts par : sélectionnez une option d’affichage des contacts. • Envoyer les coordonnées : sélectionnez un mode de partage des contacts. • Comptes : ajoutez ou modifiez les comptes avec lesquels synchroniser les contacts. E-mail Modifiez les paramètres de gestion et d’envoi d’e-mails. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → E-mail. • Paramètres généraux : – Affichage : modifiez les paramètres d’affichage des e-mails. – Composition et envoi : Taille de l’image par défaut : sélectionnez la taille de l’image en pièce jointe. Retarder envoi e-mail : définissez le temps que l’appareil doit attendre avant d’envoyer des e-mails après que vous avez appuyé sur la touche d’envoi. – Affichage par défaut : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il ouvre un écran donné après la suppression d’e-mails. – Confirmer suppression(s) : paramétrez l’appareil afin qu’il demande une confirmation avant la suppression des messages. – Expéditeurs prioritaires : modifiez les paramètres des contacts prioritaires. – Adresses spam : ajoutez des adresses électroniques à bloquer. • PARAMÈTRES DU COMPTE : gérez des comptes de messagerie existants ou ajoutez de nouveaux comptes. Paramètres 165 Galerie Modifiez les paramètres d’utilisation de la Galerie. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → Galerie. • Tags : – Tag contextuel : paramétrez l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des tags contextuels. – Libellé de portrait : paramétrez l'appareil pour pouvoir enregistrer les visages de l’image comme libellé de portrait. Internet Modifiez les paramètres d’utilisation d’Internet. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → Internet. • Compte : connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. • Définir page d’accueil : définissez une page d’accueil par défaut. • Remplir autom. formul. : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il fournisse automatiquement des informations utilisateur, comme le nom ou le numéro de téléphone, lorsque vous renseignez des formulaires sur des pages Web. • Confidentialité : gérez vos données personnelles lorsque vous consultez des pages Web. • Ecran et texte : modifiez les paramètres, réglez la taille de police, etc., lors de l’affichage de pages Web. • Paramètres des contenus : modifiez les paramètres de gestion des cookies provenant de la consultation de pages Web ou choisissez d’afficher ou non des fenêtres contextuelles, etc. • Gestion bande passante : modifiez les paramètres de la bande passante. Paramètres 166 S Planner Modifiez les paramètres d’utilisation de S Planner. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → S Planner. • Affichage : – Premier jour de la semaine : sélectionnez le premier jour de la semaine. – Afficher le numéro de la semaine : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche numéro de semaine. – Masquer les événements refusés : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il masque les événements expirés. – Masquer les tâches terminées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il masque les tâches terminées. – Météo : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les prévisions météorologiques. • Fuseau horaire : – Verrouiller fuseau horaire : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il ne modifie pas les réglages de fuseau horaire lorsque vous changez de fuseau horaire. – Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire. – Aff. aujourd’hui selon : paramétrez le calendrier pour qu’il utilise votre fuseau horaire ou un autre fuseau horaire. • Notification d’événements : – Sélectionner un type d’alerte : sélectionnez les paramètres de notification des événements. – Sélectionner sonnerie : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements ou les tâches. – Vibreur : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre afin de vous avertir en cas d’événements ou de tâches. – Réponses rapides : sélectionnez ou créez des modèles d’envoi de messages aux participants à des événements. Paramètres 167 S Voice Modifiez les paramètres de reconnaissance vocale. Depuis l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Applications → S Voice. • Général : – Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. – Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. – A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Réveil : – Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. – Réveil vocal : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. • Avancé : – Evénements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il démarre S Voice et vous prévienne des notifications manquées lorsque qu’un casque ou un écouteur est connecté et que vous appuyez sur la touche du casque. – Résumé personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les événements dans S Planner lorsque vous utilisez S Voice. – Effacer données S Voice : effacez les données utilisées par S Voice depuis le serveur S Voice. – Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. – Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. – Se connecter à Twitter : saisissez les informations de votre compte Twitter pour l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice. 168 Accessibilité À propos des menus Accessibilité Les menus Accessibilité correspondent à des fonctions spéciales qui s’adressent aux personnes ayant certaines capacités réduites comme une mauvaise vue ou des troubles auditifs. Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes : • TalkBack • Modifier la taille de police • Grossir l’écran • Rappels de notification • Inverser les couleurs d’affichage • Réglage des couleurs • Couper tous les sons • Notification par flash • Régler la balance audio • Mode audio mono • Personnaliser les paramètres des sous-titres • Menus auxiliaires • Configurer la durée de l’appui prolongé • Mode commande des interactions • Mode appui unique • Gérer les paramètres d’accessibilité Pour utiliser les menus d’accessibilité, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité. Accessibilité 169 Utiliser la touche Accueil pour ouvrir les menus d’accessibilité Vous pouvez accéder aux menus d’accessibilité suivants en appuyant à trois reprises rapprochées sur la touche Accueil. • Accessibilité • TalkBack • Couleurs négatives • Contrôle des interactions Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité, puis faites glisser le curseur Accès direct vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Ensuite, sélectionnez un menu d’accessibilité à ouvrir lorsque vous appuyez à trois reprises rapprochées sur la touche Accueil. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs menus, l’appareil affiche une fenêtre contextuelle vous demandant quel menu utiliser lorsque vous appuyez à trois reprises rapprochées sur la touche Accueil. Pour activer le Contrôle par interaction des menus d’accessibilité, activez la fonction. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction, puis faites glisser le curseur Contrôle par interaction vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Informations orales (TalkBack) Activer ou désactiver TalkBack Lorsque vous activez TalkBack, l’appareil lit à haute voix le texte affiché à l’écran ou les fonctions sélectionnées. Cette fonction s’avère utile si vous rencontrez des difficultés à voir l’écran. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack. 2 Faites glisser le curseur en haut de l'écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour désactiver TalkBack, faites glisser le curseur en haut de l’écran vers la gauche et appuyez rapidement à deux reprises n’importe où sur l’écran. 3 Appuyez sur OK. Pour désactiver TalkBack, appuyez sur OK, puis appuyez rapidement à deux reprises n’importe où sur l’écran. Accessibilité 170 Lorsque vous activez TalkBack, l’appareil fournit des informations orales et lit à haute voix les fonctions que vous sélectionnez. L’appareil fournit également des informations orales lorsque l’écran est éteint, lorsque vous recevez de nouvelles notifications, etc. Lorsque vous activez la fonction Explorer au toucher lorsque vous utilisez TalkBack, l’appareil lit à haute voix les éléments sélectionnés. D’abord, l’appareil lit à haute voix les éléments à l’écran lorsque vous appuyez dessus. Ensuite, l’appareil exécute la fonction ou ouvre l’application si vous appuyez à deux reprises rapprochées n’importe où sur l’écran. Si la fonction Explorer au toucher est désactivée, l’appareil ne peut pas prendre en compte plusieurs fonctions qui requièrent des gestes des doigts. Pour activer la fonction Explorer au toucher, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres, puis cochez la case Explorer au toucher. Lorsque vous utilisez TalkBack, certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles : Commander l’écran à l’aide de geste des doigts Avec TalkBack, vous pouvez contrôler l’écran d’un simple geste des doigts. Si la fonction Explorer au toucher est désactivée, l’appareil ne peut pas prendre en compte certaines des fonctions qui requièrent des gestes des doigts. Pour activer la fonction Explorer au toucher, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres, puis cochez la case Explorer au toucher. • Parcourir l’écran : placez un doigt sur l’écran, puis déplacez-le pour parcourir l’écran. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément afin que l’appareil énonce son nom. Lorsque vous relâchez le doigt, l’élément sous le doigt est sélectionné. • Sélectionner des éléments : appuyez sur un élément pour le sélectionner. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un élément et maintenir le doigt appuyé dessus, puis relâcher le doigt. • Ouvrir l’élément sélectionné : lorsque les noms des éléments sélectionnés sont énoncés, relâchez le doigt dès que vous entendez le nom de l’élément souhaité. Appuyez ensuite à deux reprises rapprochées sur l’écran. • Sélectionner l’élément précédent : faites défiler rapidement l’écran du doigt vers le haut ou vers la gauche. Accessibilité 171 • Sélectionner l’élément suivant : faites défiler rapidement l’écran du doigt vers le bas ou vers la droite. • Parcourir les listes : faites défiler l’écran avec deux doigts vers le haut ou vers le bas. • Revenir à la page précédente : faites défiler l’écran avec deux doigts vers la droite. • Passer à la page suivante : faites défiler l’écran avec deux doigts vers la gauche. • Déverrouiller l’écran : faites défiler l’écran avec deux doigts dans n’importe quelle direction au sein de la zone de verrouillage de l’écran. • Ouvrir le volet des raccourcis : faites glisser le haut de l’écran vers le bas avec deux doigts. • Ouvrir le volet de paramétrage rapide : faites glisser le haut de l’écran vers le bas avec trois doigts. Vous pouvez configurer les paramètres des gestes des doigts de TalkBack dans Gérer les gestes. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Configurer les paramètres des gestes des doigts. Configurer les paramètres des gestes des doigts Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction TalkBack, vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations d’un simple geste des doigts. Vous pouvez effectuer des opérations, comme revenir à l’écran précédent, ouvrir l’écran d’accueil, etc. Configurez les gestes des doigts avant de les utiliser. Configurer les paramètres des gestes verticaux Vous pouvez utiliser des gestes verticaux décomposés en faisant glisser votre doigt vers le haut et vers le bas depuis le bas de l’écran, ou inversement. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres → Gérer les gestes → Gestes verticaux en deux parties. Sélectionnez ensuite l’une des fonctions suivantes : • Déplacement vers le premier et le dernier élément à l’écran : lorsque vous faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut, puis vers le bas de l’écran, le premier élément en haut de l’écran est sélectionné. Lorsque vous faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas, puis vers le haut de l’écran, le dernier élément en bas de l’écran est sélectionné. • Sélection du niveau de précision pour la lecture : lorsque vous faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut, puis vers le bas de l’écran, l’unité de lecture change. L’unité de lecture passe à la page, au paragraphe, à la ligne, au mot, au caractère, puis à une unité par défaut. Lorsque vous faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas, puis vers le haut de l’écran, l’unité de lecture est inversée. Accessibilité 172 Configurer les paramètres des gestes de raccourci Utilisez cette fonction pour configurer huit gestes de raccourci. Vous pouvez configurer des gestes, comme faire glisser le doigt vers le haut, puis vers la droite, sans le relâcher. Vous pouvez modifier les gestes de raccourci ou assigner des fonctions à des raccourcis vierges. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres → Gérer les gestes. Sélectionnez un geste, puis assignez-lui une fonction. Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles : • Bouton "Retour" : revenez à l’écran précédent. • Bouton "Accueil" : ouvrez l’écran d’accueil. • Bouton "Applications récentes" : ouvrez la liste des applications récemment utilisées. • Ouvrir les notifications : ouvrez le volet des raccourcis. • Ouvrir le menu contextuel général : ouvrez le menu contextuel général. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran pour ouvrir le menu contextuel général circulaire. Vous pouvez utiliser des fonctions, telles que Navigation rapide, Lire à partir du haut de la page, Épeler le dernier énoncé et Lire à partir de l’élément suivant. Ensuite, parcourez les menus en traçant un cercle du doigt sans le relâcher. Une fois que vous avez trouvé le menu que vous cherchez, relâchez le doigt du menu pour le sélectionner. Appuyez sur Mettre en pause les retours en haut à gauche de l’écran pour mettre en pause les informations orales. Appuyez sur Paramètres TalkBack en haut à droite de l’écran pour accéder aux paramètres TalkBack. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Configurer les paramètres de TalkBack. • Ouvrir le menu contextuel local : ouvrez le menu contextuel local. Vous pouvez sélectionner une unité pour lire le texte à l’écran. Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction tout en saisissant du texte, des menus contextuels, comme le menu de commande du curseur, sont disponibles. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran pour ouvrir le menu contextuel circulaire. Ensuite, parcourez les menus en traçant un cercle du doigt sans le relâcher. Une fois que vous avez trouvé le menu que vous cherchez, relâchez le doigt du menu pour le sélectionner. • Lire à partir du haut de la page : l’appareil énonce les éléments du premier au dernier. • Lire à partir de l’élément suivant : l’appareil énonce les éléments à partir de l’élément figurant après l’élément sélectionné. Accessibilité 173 Modifier les unités de lecture Lorsque vous utilisez TalkBack, vous pouvez écouter le texte affiché à l’écran. Vous pouvez faire glisser le doigt vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite afin de sélectionner le texte souhaité. Par défaut, l’appareil énonce le texte figurant dans la zone sélectionnée. Vous pouvez également paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il lise le texte d’autres unités, comme des lignes ou des paragraphes. Modifier les unités de lecture à l’aide du menu contextuel local 1 Sélectionnez un texte à lire. 2 Faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut, puis vers la droite sans le relâcher pour ouvrir le menu contextuel local. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt pour parcourir les menus. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez Modifier le niveau de lecture. 4 Maintenez à nouveau le doigt appuyé sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt pour parcourir les menus. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez l’unité de lecture souhaitée. Pour modifier le geste de raccourci permettant d’ouvrir le menu contextuel local, reportez-vous à la section Configurer les paramètres des gestes de raccourci. Modifier les unités de lecture à l’aide de gestes verticaux décomposés Lorsque vous faites glisser le doigt vers le haut, puis vers le bas de l’écran, l’unité de lecture change. L’unité de lecture passe à la page, au paragraphe, à la ligne, au mot, au caractère, puis à une unité par défaut. Lorsque vous faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas, puis vers le haut de l’écran, l’unité de lecture est inversée. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres → Gérer les gestes → Gestes verticaux en deux parties → Sélection du niveau de précision pour la lecture. Vous pouvez écouter le texte à la suite du texte actuellement sélectionné grâce à l’unité de lecture en cours. Pour écouter le texte de la prochaine unité de lecture, faites glisser le doigt vers le bas ou vers la droite de l’écran. Vous pouvez également écouter le texte avant le texte actuellement sélectionné grâce à l’unité de lecture en cours. Pour écouter le texte de la précédente unité de lecture, faites glisser le doigt vers le haut ou vers la gauche de l’écran. Accessibilité 174 Mettre TalkBack en pause Ouvrez le menu contextuel général en faisant glisser le doigt vers le bas, puis vers la droite de l’écran sans le relâcher. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Mettre en pause les retours en haut à gauche de l’écran, TalkBack est mis en pause. Lorsque TalkBack est mis en pause, vous pouvez le réactiver en allumant l’écran ou par d’autres méthodes. Pour modifier la méthode de réactivation de TalkBack, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres → Réactiver. Sélectionnez ensuite une option. Pour modifier le geste de raccourci permettant d’ouvrir le menu contextuel général, reportez-vous à la section Configurer les paramètres des gestes de raccourci. Utiliser la fonction de navigation rapide Avec la fonction de navigation rapide, vous pouvez accéder à des menus en traçant un cercle à l’écran sans faire défiler l’écran vers le haut ou vers le bas pour sélectionner un élément. Ouvrez le menu contextuel général en faisant glisser le doigt vers le bas, puis vers la droite de l’écran sans le relâcher. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt autour du menu pour parcourir les menus. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez Navigation rapide. Appuyez à nouveau sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt autour du menu pour parcourir les menus. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez le menu souhaité. Ajouter et gérer des libellés d’image Vous pouvez assigner des libellés aux images à l’écran. L’appareil énonce les libellés lorsque les éléments sont sélectionnés. Ajoutez des libellés aux images sans libellé à l’aide du menu contextuel local. Ouvrez le menu contextuel local en faisant glisser le doigt vers le haut, puis vers la droite de l’écran sans le relâcher. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt autour du menu pour parcourir les menus. Lorsque vous entendez le nom du menu d’ajout de libellé, relâchez le doigt pour ajouter des libellés. Pour afficher les libellés, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres → Gérer les libellés personnalisés. Accessibilité 175 Configurer les paramètres de TalkBack Configurez les paramètres de TalkBack selon vos préférences. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → TalkBack → Paramètres. Sinon, ouvrez le menu contextuel général en faisant glisser le doigt vers le bas, puis vers la droite de l’écran sans le relâcher. Ensuite, faites glisser le doigt jusque dans le coin supérieur droit de l’écran et relâchez-le lorsque vous entendez Paramètres TalkBack. • Volume de la voix : réglez le volume des informations orales. Le volume des informations orales peut varier en fonction du volume du média. Pour régler le volume du média, appuyez sur la touche de volume gauche/droite tout en écoutant des informations orales. Sinon, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Son → Volume, puis faites glisser la barre de réglage du volume du contenu multimédia vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Modification du ton : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il énonce le texte saisi à l’aide du clavier à basse tonalité. • Écho du clavier : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lise à haute voix le texte ou les symboles saisis à l’aide du clavier. Vous pouvez également définir le type de clavier à utiliser avec cette fonction. • Parler quand l’écran est éteint : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il fournisse des informations orales lorsque l’écran est éteint. • Secouer pour démarrer la lecture continue : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il énonce le texte affiché à l’écran lorsque vous secouez l’appareil. Vous pouvez sélectionner différentes options de vitesses de secousses. • Vibration : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous parcourez l’écran du doigt. • Retour audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous commandez l’écran, comme lorsque vous le parcourez, etc. Accessibilité 176 • Privilégier le volume de la voix : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il baisse le volume du média lorsqu’il lit un élément à haute voix. • Volume sonore : réglez le volume du son émis lorsque vous appuyez sur l’écran pour le contrôler. Cette fonction est disponible lorsque Retour audio est sélectionné. • Explorer au toucher : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lise à haute voix les éléments sur lesquels vous appuyez du doigt. Déplacez le doigt sur l’écran pour trouver l’élément souhaité. Lorsque le nom de l’élément recherché est prononcé, relâchez le doigt et appuyez rapidement à deux reprises à n’importe quel endroit de l’écran pour l’ouvrir. Vous pouvez aller à la page de votre choix en faisant défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite avec deux doigts. Pour savoir comment commander l’écran à l’aide de la fonction de navigation tactile, reportez-vous à la section Commander l’écran à l’aide de geste des doigts. • Faire défiler les listes automatiquement : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il parcoure automatiquement la partie de la liste non affichée à l’écran et qu’il énonce les éléments. • Appuyer une fois pour sélectionner : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il ouvre l’élément sélectionné lorsque vous appuyez une fois dessus. • Lancer le didacticiel "Explorer au toucher" : affichez le didacticiel sur l’utilisation de la fonction Navigation tactile. • Gérer les gestes : assignez les opérations à effectuer à l’aide des gestes des doigts. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Configurer les paramètres des gestes des doigts. • Gérer les libellés personnalisés : affichez les libellés que vous avez ajoutés. • Réactiver : sélectionnez une méthode de reprise des informations orales. • Paramètres du développeur : paramétrez les options de développement d’applications. Utiliser l’appareil avec l’écran éteint Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il laisse toujours l’écran éteint afin de préserver la confidentialité de vos données. L’écran ne s’allume pas lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches externes ou sur l’écran. En revanche, les fonctions activées restent activées. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue, puis cochez la case Ecran atténué. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver cette fonction en appuyant à deux reprises sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. Accessibilité 177 Utiliser la fonction de saisie par touches rapide Paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir saisir un caractère lorsque vous relâchez le doigt du caractère du clavier. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour saisir des caractères au lieu de relâcher le doigt et d’appuyer deux fois sur l’écran. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue, puis sur Saisie clavier rapide. Lire des mots de passe à haute voix Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lise le mot de passe à haute voix lorsque vous saisissez le mot de passe lorsque TalkBack est activé. Utilisez cette fonction pour vous assurer que vous saisissez le mot de passe correct. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue, puis cochez la case Énoncer mots de passe. Paramétrer les fonctions de diction de la synthèse vocale Modifiez les paramètres de diction de la synthèse vocale utilisés lorsque TalkBack est activé, comme les langues, la vitesse, etc. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → Options synthèse vocale, puis utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Moteur de synthèse vocale Samsung / Moteur de synthèse vocale Google : sélectionnez un moteur pour la fonction de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. Si l’appareil ne parvient pas à lire des exemples à haute voix, appuyez sur → Installer les données vocales pour télécharger et installer les données vocales de la fonction de diction de la synthèse vocale. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. Accessibilité 178 Saisir du texte à l’aide du clavier Pour afficher le clavier, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de texte, puis appuyez à deux reprises rapprochées n’importe où sur l’écran. Lorsque vous appuyez du doigt sur le clavier, l’appareil lit à haute voix les touches de caractères sous votre doigt. Lorsque vous entendez le caractère que vous recherchez, relâchez le doigt de l’écran pour le sélectionner. Le caractère est saisi et l’appareil lit le texte à haute voix. Si la fonction Saisie clavier rapide n’est pas activée, relâchez le doigt du caractère que vous souhaitez, puis appuyez à deux reprises rapprochées sur l’écran. Pour activer la fonction de saisie rapide, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue, puis cochez la case Saisie clavier rapide. Saisir des caractères supplémentaires Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une touche du clavier. Si des caractères supplémentaires sont disponibles via la touche, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît au-dessus du clavier, affichant les caractères. Pour sélectionner un caractère, faites glisser le doigt sur l’écran jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le nom du caractère souhaité, puis relâchez le doigt. Modifier la langue de saisie Pour ajouter des langues de saisie, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Langue et saisie. Appuyez ensuite sur près de Clavier Samsung → Sélectionner langue de saisie, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Pour modifier la langue de saisie, appuyez sur , puis appuyez rapidement deux fois à n’importe quel endroit de l’écran. Modifier du texte Utilisez le menu contextuel local pour déplacer le curseur ou copier et coller du texte. Ouvrez le menu contextuel local en faisant glisser le doigt vers le haut, puis vers la droite de l’écran sans le relâcher. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle du doigt autour du menu pour parcourir le menu. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez Modifier le niveau de lecture. Appuyez à nouveau sur l’écran, puis tracez un cercle autour du menu pour parcourir les menus. Relâchez ensuite le doigt quand vous entendez l’unité de lecture souhaitée. Lorsque vous modifiez du texte, pour plus de facilité, définissez l’unité de lecture sur mot ou caractère. En mode sélection, l’appareil sélectionne le texte en fonction de l’unité de lecture sélectionnée. Accessibilité 179 Faites glisser le doigt vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour écouter le texte. Lorsque le texte que vous souhaitez modifier est lu à haute voix, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Supprimer le texte : appuyez sur la touche Supprimer du clavier. • Sélectionner le texte à l’aide du mode sélection : activez le mode sélection pour sélectionner et écouter le texte. Pour activer le mode sélection, ouvrez le menu contextuel local, puis sélectionnez Contrôle du curseur → Commencer la sélection. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour écouter le texte avant ou après le texte sélectionné. Pour désactiver le mode sélection, ouvrez le menu contextuel local, puis sélectionnez Contrôle du curseur → Terminer la sélection. • Sélectionner le texte tout entier : ouvrez le menu contextuel local, puis sélectionnez Contrôle du curseur → Tout sélectionner. L’ensemble du texte du document est sélectionné. • Copier ou couper du texte : sélectionnez le texte à l’aide du menu contextuel local. Ensuite, ouvrez le menu contextuel local, puis sélectionnez Contrôle du curseur. Sélectionnez Copier pour copier le texte sélectionné, ou Couper pour couper le texte sélectionné. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. • Coller le texte : placez le curseur à l’endroit où le texte doit être inséré, ouvrez le menu contextuel local, puis sélectionnez Contrôle du curseur → Coller. Dicter du texte Vous pouvez saisir du texte en le dictant. Pour afficher le clavier, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de texte, puis appuyez à deux reprises rapprochées n’importe où sur l’écran. Lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , l’appareil affiche une fenêtre contextuelle indiquant les options du clavier. Faites glisser le doigt sur l’écran sans le soulever. Lorsque est sélectionné, relâchez le doigt. Prononcez ensuite les mots que vous souhaitez saisir dans le champ de saisie. Les mots prononcés apparaissent sous forme de texte à l’écran et l’appareil les lit à voix haute. Pour saisir plus de texte, sélectionnez la touche microphone et prononcez les mots. Modifier la langue de saisie Lorsque vous dictez un texte, sélectionnez Français (France), puis une langue pour modifier la langue de saisie. Pour ajouter des langues à la liste, sélectionnez Français (France) → Ajouter des langues, désélectionnez Automatique, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Accessibilité 180 Modifier la taille de police Utilisez cette fonction pour modifier la taille de police. Pour faciliter l’utilisation pour les malvoyants, l’appareil propose différentes tailles de police. Il se peut que, dans certaines applications, il ne soit pas possible de régler la taille de la police sur Enorme. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → Taille de police. Grossir l’écran Utilisez cette fonction pour grossir l’écran et effectuer un zoom avant sur une zone spécifique. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → Gestes d’agrandissement, puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. • Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière : appuyez à trois reprises rapprochées sur l’écran pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une zone spécifique. Appuyez de nouveau à trois reprises rapprochées sur l’écran pour annuler le zoom. • Parcourir l’écran en le faisant défiler : utilisez deux doigts pour faire défiler l’écran grossi. • Régler le niveau de zoom : appuyez sur l’écran grossi avec deux doigts. Ensuite, écartez deux doigts ou rapprochez-les pour régler le niveau de zoom. • Il n’est pas possible d’agrandir les claviers à l’écran. • Lorsque cette fonction est activée, les performances de certaines applications, comme Calculatrice, peuvent en être affectées. Configurer des rappels de notification Utilisez cette fonction pour vous rappeler des notifications que vous n’avez pas vérifiées selon l’intervalle défini. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue → Rappel de notification, puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Pour définir un intervalle entre les alertes, appuyez sur Fréquence de rappel. Accessibilité 181 Inverser les couleurs d’affichage Utilisez cette fonction pour améliorer la visibilité de l’écran et aider les utilisateurs à déchiffrer plus facilement le texte à l’écran. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil affiche une image négative qui inverse les couleurs à l’écran. L’inversion des couleurs augmente le contraste entre le noir et le blanc. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue, puis cochez la case Couleurs négatives. Régler les couleurs Utilisez cette fonction pour régler l’affichage des couleurs à l’écran si vous avez des difficultés à distinguer les couleurs. L’appareil remplace les couleurs par des couleurs plus faciles à reconnaître. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Vue. 2 Faites glisser le curseur Réglage des couleurs vers la droite pour activer la fonction. 3 Appuyez sur Démarrer. 4 Organisez les vignettes de couleurs par ordre de similarité, en commençant par la couleur de base. 5 Une fois les couleurs réglées, appuyez sur OK. Si vous pouvez distinguer les couleurs, aucun autre réglage n’est nécessaire. 6 Si les couleurs ne peuvent toujours pas être distinguées, appuyez sur Appareil photo ou sur Image. 7 Faites glisser la barre de réglage des couleurs vers la gauche ou vers la droite, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour réajuster la couleur, appuyez sur → Réajuster la couleur. Accessibilité 182 Configurer une notification par flash Configurez le flash pour qu’il clignote lorsque vous recevez de nouveaux messages ou des notifications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition, puis cochez la case Notification par flash. Couper tous les sons Configurez l’appareil pour qu’il coupe tous les sons, comme les sons multimédia. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition, puis cochez la case Désactiver tous les sons. Paramètres des sous-titres Sous-titres Samsung Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition → Sous-titres Samsung (CC), puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes : • Alignement : modifiez la position des sous-titres. • Police : modifiez le type de police. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de police. • Bordure : modifiez le bord du texte des sous-titres. • Police : modifiez la couleur et la transparence du texte. • Couleur d’arrière-plan : modifiez la couleur et la transparence du fond de la zone de sous-titres. • Fenêtre des sous-titres : modifiez la couleur et la transparence de la fenêtre de sous-titres. Accessibilité 183 Sous-titres Google Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition → Sous-titres Google (CC), puis faites glisser le curseur en haut à droite de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction. Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez une langue d’affichage. • Taille du texte : modifiez la taille de police. • Style des sous-titres : modifiez le style des sous-titres. Régler la balance audio Configurez l’appareil pour pouvoir régler la balance audio lorsque vous utilisez un casque ou un écouteur. Pour régler la balance audio, connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition → Balance audio. Faites glisser la barre de réglage vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour régler la balance audio, puis appuyez sur Définir. Mode mono-audio Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il passe de stéréo à mono lorsque vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur. La sortie mono combine le son stéréo en un seul signal qui est joué dans tous les hautparleurs des casques ou écouteurs. Utilisez ce mode en cas de troubles auditifs ou si une oreillette unique est plus pratique. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Audition, puis cochez la case Audio mono. Accessibilité 184 Menu assistant Afficher l’icône de raccourci auxiliaire Paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’icône de raccourci auxiliaire. Vous pouvez vous servir de cette icône pour accéder aux applications, fonctions et paramètres. Commandez l’appareil en appuyant sur les menus auxiliaires de l’icône sans parcourir l’écran. Lorsque cette fonction est lancée, le Mode une seule pression est activé. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction. 2 Faites glisser le curseur Menu assistant vers la droite pour activer la fonction. L’icône de raccourci auxiliaire apparaît au coin inférieur droit de l’écran. 3 Appuyez sur Menu assistant → Main dominante pour déplacer l’icône de raccourci auxiliaire vers un emplacement pratique. Accéder aux menus auxiliaires L’icône de raccourci auxiliaire apparaît sous forme d’icône flottante, ce qui vous permet d’accéder facilement aux menus auxiliaires depuis n’importe quel écran. Lorsque vous appuyez sur l’icône de raccourci auxiliaire, l’icône s’agrandit légèrement et les menus auxiliaires apparaissent sur l’icône. Appuyez sur la flèche haut ou bas pour accéder à d’autres volets ou faites défiler l’écran vers le haut ou vers le bas pour sélectionner d’autres menus. Accessibilité 185 Utiliser le curseur Depuis le menu auxiliaire, appuyez sur Curseur. Un curseur et une zone tactile où le curseur peut être commandé apparaissent à l’écran. Vous pouvez commander l’écran à l’aide de petits mouvements du doigt sur la zone tactile. Faites glisser le doigt sur la zone tactile afin de déplacer le curseur. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur l’écran afin de sélectionner les éléments situés sous le curseur. Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes : • /  : sélectionner un élément ou faire défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. • /  : faire défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. •  : déplacer la zone tactile vers un autre emplacement. •  : fermer la zone tactile. Pour modifier les paramètres du curseur, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction, faites glisser le curseur Menu assistant vers la droite pour activer la fonction, appuyez sur le Menu assistant puis utilisez les options sous PARAMÈTRES PAVÉ ET CURSEUR. Utiliser les menus auxiliaires avancés Configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des menus auxiliaires avancés pour les applications sélectionnées. Par exemple, lorsque vous lancez Galerie, les fonctions de recherche et de rédaction apparaissent sur le menu auxiliaire. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction → Menu assistant → Assistant plus, faites glisser le curseur en haut de l’écran vers la droite pour activer la fonction, puis sélectionnez des applications. Modifier les menus auxiliaires Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour modifier les menus de l’icône de raccourci auxiliaire. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction, faites glisser le curseur Menu assistant vers la droite pour activer la fonction, appuyez sur le Menu assistant puis sur Modif. Pour ajouter ou supprimer des menus, appuyez sur ou . Accessibilité 186 Configurer la durée de l’appui prolongé Définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction → Durée de l’appui prolongé, puis sélectionnez une option. Contrôle des interactions Activez le mode contrôle des interactions pour limiter les réactions de l’appareil aux saisies lorsque vous utilisez des applications. Utilisez ce mode si vous souhaitez limiter l’accès des autres personnes et commander vos médias ou vos données. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Dextérité et interaction → Contrôle par interaction. 2 Appuyez sur le commutateur en haut de l’écran pour l’activer. 3 Maintenez les touches Accueil et Volume gauche simultanément enfoncées tout en utilisant une application. 4 Réglez la taille du cadre ou tracez une ligne autour d’une zone que vous souhaitez limiter. 5 Appuyez sur OK. L’appareil affiche la zone limitée. Si vous appuyez sur l’écran ou sur des touches, comme la touche Accueil, l’opération de fonctionne pas dans cette zone. Pour désactiver le mode contrôle des interactions, maintenez les touches Accueil et Volume gauche simultanément enfoncées. Accessibilité 187 Utiliser le mode à appui unique Paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. Lorsqu’une alarme retentit, appuyez sur la touche pour arrêter l’alarme plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité, puis cochez la case Mode pression unique. Gérer les paramètres d’accessibilité Enregistrer les paramètres d’accessibilité dans un fichier Exportez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours dans un fichier. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Gérer l’accessibilité → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation et appuyez sur OK. Le fichier des paramètres d’accessibilité est enregistré dans l’emplacement de stockage sélectionné. Importer un fichier de paramètres d’accessibilité Importez un fichier de paramètres d’accessibilité et mettez à jour les paramètres actuels. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Gérer l’accessibilité → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation. Sélectionnez un fichier d’importation, puis appuyez sur OK → OK. Les paramètres d’accessibilité sont mis à jour conformément au fichier importé. Partager des fichiers de paramètres d’accessibilité Partagez des fichiers de paramètres d’accessibilité avec d’autres personnes par e-mail ou via les fonctions Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, etc. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité → Gérer l’accessibilité → Partager via. Sélectionnez ensuite des fichiers d’accessibilité, puis appuyez sur OK. Sélectionnez un mode de partage, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour partager les fichiers. Accessibilité 188 Afficher des services d’accessibilité Affichez les services d’accessibilité installés sur l’appareil. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Accessibilité, puis affichez la liste des services d’accessibilité dans SERVICES. Utiliser d’autres fonctions utiles • Utiliser S Voice : vous pouvez utiliser S Voice pour exécuter diverses fonctions à l’aide de commandes vocales. Lancez S Voice pour envoyer des messages et afficher des tâches. • Effectuer une recherche oralement : utilisez les commandes vocales pour rechercher un contenu de page Web. Utilisez cette fonction lorsque vous vous déplacez et que vous ne pouvez pas vous servir de vos mains pour saisir du texte. Pour en savoir plus, consultez Recherche vocale. • Utiliser le volet des raccourcis : faites glisser la barre d’état vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez afficher les nouveaux messages, régler la luminosité de l’écran, etc. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Volets des raccourcis et de paramétrage rapide. • Utiliser la reconnaissance des mouvements : commandez l’appareil avec des mouvements ou des gestes de la paume de la main. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Mouvements. • Utiliser le lecteur d’empreintes : enregistrez vos empreintes pour déverrouiller l’écran ou vérifier le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section Lecteur d’empreintes. • Utiliser les raccourcis vers les contacts : ajoutez des raccourcis vers les contacts sur l’écran d’accueil Classique pour envoyer plus facilement des messages. Pour en savoir plus, reportezvous à la section Ajouter des raccourcis vers des contacts à l’écran d’accueil Classique. 189 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Procédez au chargement complet de la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Il est possible que la batterie ne soit pas correctement installée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez la batterie. Dépannage 190 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications ou réinsérer la batterie et réinitialiser votre appareil pour qu’il retrouve un fonctionnement correct. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez simultanément la touche Marche/Arrêt et la touche Volume gauche enfoncées pendant plus de 7 secondes afin de redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 191 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez ou remplacez la batterie. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctions, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable dont la charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 192 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent avec l’appareil photo, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Si un format de fichier n’est pas pris en charge, tel que DivX ou AC3, installez une application le prenant en charge. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 193 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 194 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Passpoint™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. E-MANUAL Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model______________ Serial No.______________ Contents Quick Guide Using the Smart TV Using Voice Control Using Motion Control Using the Samsung Smart Control Using the Football Mode Using the Multi-Link Screen Editing channels Connecting Antenna and External devices Connecting - Aerial Video Device Connection 15 Connecting - HDMI 16 Connecting - Component 17 Connecting - External Input 18 Connecting - SCART TV Audio through the External Speakers 19 Connecting - HDMI (ARC) 20 Connecting - Digital Audio (Optical) 21 Connecting - Headphone 22 Connecting - Audio Output Connecting to a Computer 24 Connecting - HDMI Port 25 Connecting - HDMI (DVI) Port 26 Connecting - Samsung Link 26 Connecting - Home Network (DLNA) Connecting with a Mobile Device 28 Mobile Device Screen on TV (Screen Mirroring) 29 Connecting Mobile Devices without a Wireless Router (Wi-Fi Direct) 29 Connecting - Samsung Link 30 Connecting - Home Network (DLNA) 30 Connecting via Smart View 2.0 31 Name of TV on Network Input Signal Selection Using Remote and Peripheral Devices Inserting Batteries into Samsung Smart Control 32 When you see this alarm icon on the screen... Pairing Samsung Smart Control 33 Reconnecting Samsung Smart Control Using Samsung Smart Control 34 Button Functions 37 Using the TV by Moving the Samsung Smart Control 38 Using the TV with the Touchpad 40 Displaying the Remote Control on the Screen (virtual remote control) Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote (Universal Remote Setup) 42 Setting Up the Universal Remote Control 43 Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote Controlling the TV with a Keyboard 45 Connecting a Keyboard 46 Using the Keyboard Controlling the TV with a Mouse 47 Connecting a Mouse 48 Using the Mouse Entering Text Using QWERTY 49 Using Additional Functions Internet Connection Establishing a Wired Internet Connection 50 Connecting a LAN Cable 51 Connecting to a Wired Internet Network Automatically 51 Connecting to a Wired Internet Network Manually II Establishing a Wireless Internet Connection 53 Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network Automatically 54 Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network Manually 55 Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network with WPS Troubleshooting Internet Connectivity Issues 56 Troubleshooting Wired Internet Connectivity Issues 57 Troubleshooting Wireless Internet Connectivity Issues Mobile Network 58 Supported Telecom and Model Name Checking the Internet Connection Status Smart Features Multiple Functions on a Single Screen 60 Launching Multi-Link Screen 60 Using Multi-Link Screen 60 Selecting a Feature 60 Changing the Channel/Volume Smart Hub 61 Testing Smart Hub connections 62 Opening the Home Screen 63 Moving to the Panel Screen 63 Using the Smart Hub Tutorial 63 Resetting Smart Hub Using Smart Hub with Samsung Account 64 Creating a Samsung Account 66 Signing into Samsung Account 67 Linking My Samsung and App Accounts 68 Changing and Adding Information to Samsung Account 68 Deleting All Samsung Accounts from the TV Using the Games Panel 69 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions 69 Installing and Running a Game 71 Managing Downloaded or Purchased Games Using SAMSUNG APPS Panel 73 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions 74 Installing an App 75 Default Apps 75 Using Web Browser Web Browser 78 Rearranging Apps on the SAMSUNG APPS Screen 79 Removing an App from the TV 79 Rating/Reviewing an App 80 Updating an App 80 SAMSUNG APPS Features Using On TV Panel 84 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions 84 Viewing Detailed Programme Information 85 Configuring On TV Settings Using FILMS AND TV SHOWS Panel 87 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions 88 Watching a Movie/TV Programme 88 Restricting Purchased Content Viewing 89 Rating and Sharing a Purchased Content Playing Photos, Videos, and Music (MULTIMEDIA) 91 Playing Media Content from a USB Device 92 Playing Multimedia Content Saved in a Computer/Mobile Device 94 Playing Media Content from a Storage Service 95 Buttons and Functions Available while Viewing Photos 96 Buttons and Functions Available while Watching Video 98 Buttons and Functions Available while Playing Music 99 Functions on the Media Content List Screen TV Control using your Voice 100 Enabling Voice Control 102 Using the Voice Interaction function Interactively TV Control using Motions 103 Testing Ambient Illumination Using the TV Camera 104 Activating Motion Control 107 Motion Control Screen Layout Signing in with Face Recognition 110 Registering Your Face to Your Samsung Account 111 Changing Login Method to Face Recognition 111 Signing into Samsung Account with Your Face II III TV Viewing and Recording Features Digital Broadcast Information at a Glance 112 Using the Guide 113 Checking the Current Programme Info 113 Change the Broadcast Signal 113 Digital Signal Info and Strength Recording Programmes 114 Creating a USB Recording Device 116 Recording Programmes 117 Buttons and Functions Available While Recording a Programme 118 Managing the Schedule Recording List 119 Viewing Recorded Programmes 122 Managing Recorded Files Setting Up a Schedule Viewing 123 Setting Up Schedule Viewing 124 Managing the Schedule Viewing List Using Timeshift Using the Channel List Registering, Removing, and Editing Channels 127 Registering and Removing Channels 127 Editing Registered Channels 128 Enabling/Disabling Password Protection on Channels 128 Locking/ Unlocking Channels 128 Edit Channel Number Creating a Personal Favourites List 129 Registering a Channel as Favourites 130 Viewing Favourites List Channels Only 130 Editing a Favourites List Adding Realism to Sports 133 Enabling Football Mode 133 Extracting Highlights Automatically 134 Functions Available in Football Mode 135 Viewing a Sports Event Recorded in Football Mode TV-Viewing Support Features 136 Showing Subtitles 136 Subtitle Options 137 Changing Teletext Language 137 Digital Text 138 PIP Broadcast Viewing 139 Scanning for Available Channels 140 Selecting the Broadcast Audio Options 140 Audio Description 140 Genre Selection 140 Adult genre enabling Using the Channel Settings 141 Country (Area) 141 Manual Tuning 142 Fine-Tuning the Screen 143 Transfer Channel List 143 Delete CAM Operator Profile 143 Satellite System 145 Common Interface Picture and Sound Settings Changing the Picture Mode and Adjusting the Picture Quality 146 Choosing the Right Picture Mode for the Viewing Environment 147 Adjusting the Picture Quality for Each Picture Mode 148 Fine-Tuning Each Picture Mode (Advanced Settings) 150 Adjusting the Picture for Easier Viewing (Picture Options) Viewing in 3D 152 Starting 3D 153 Changing the 3D Mode 154 Adjusting the 3D Effect Picture Support Functions 155 PIP Broadcast Viewing 156 Changing the Picture Size and Position 157 Listening to Audio Only with the Screen Turned Off (Picture Off) IV 157 Resetting the Picture Mode Settings Changing the Sound Mode and Using Sound Effects 158 Choosing the Right Sound Mode for the Environment 159 Using Sound Effects Sound Support Functions 160 Selecting Speakers 160 Designating the TV's Installation Type 160 Listening to TV Sound through Samsung Bluetooth or Wi-Fi Audio 161 Listening to TV Sound through Samsung Multiroom Link compatible Speakers 162 Enabling the Sound (Additional Settings) 163 Listening to 3D Audio in 3D Mode 163 Resetting All Sound Settings General Setting the Time and Using the Timer 164 Setting the Current Time 165 Using the Timers Using the Screen Burn Protection and Energy Saving Features 167 Preventing Screen Burn 167 Using Energy Saving Features Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 168 Setting Up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 169 Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Using the e-Manual 170 Launching the e-Manual 170 Additional e-Manual Features 171 Updating the e-Manual to the Latest Version Updating the Software 172 Updating Software over the Internet 172 Updating Software using a USB connection 173 Enabling Automatic Software Updates 173 Software update via satellite channel Protecting the TV from Hacking and malicious code 174 Checking the TV and Connected Storage Media 174 Automatically Scanning when the TV is Powered On 174 Automatically Adding malicious code to the Blocked List Using Other Functions 175 Enabling Voice Guide for the Visually Impaired 176 Enabling the High Contrast 176 Adjusting the Menu Transparency 177 Expanding the Smart Hub's Focus Area 177 Changing the Menu Language 177 Checking Notifications 177 Setting Up a Password 178 Programme Rating Lock 178 Enabling Game Mode 178 Enjoying Rich Colours and Superior Picture Quality (BD Wise) 179 Enabling/Disabling Sound Feedback 179 Locking/Unlocking the Panel Keys 179 Showing/Hiding the Samsung Logo while Booting 179 Enabling the TV to Boot Faster 180 Registering the TV as a DivX-Certified Device (Watching Paid DivX Movies) 181 Restoring the TV to the Factory Settings 181 Turning the TV into a Display Model (for retail stores) Data Service 182 Auto Run Data Service 182 Using Data Service HbbTV Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot IV V 184 To connect the CI CARD, follow these steps: 185 To connect the CI CARD Adapter, follow these steps: Teletext Feature Troubleshooting Getting Support 189 Support through Remote Management 191 Finding the Information You Need for Service There is a problem with the screen 191 Testing the Picture I can't hear the sound clearly 194 Testing the Sound I can't see 3D images clearly. 195 Testing 3D Picture Quality There is a problem with the broadcast. The computer won't connect. I can't connect to the Internet. Data Service The Schedule Recording/Timeshift function isn't working. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) isn't working. I am having trouble launching/using apps. My file won't play. I want to reset the TV. Other Issues Notes and Precautions Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions 203 Before Using the Recording and Schedule Recording Functions 204 Before the Using Timeshift Function S-Recommendation Disclaimer 205 S Recommendation with Voice Interaction 205 S Recommendation Read Before Using 3D Viewing Mode 206 3D Precautions 209 Supported Resolutions for each 3D Mode Read Before Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition 211 Precautions for Voice, Motion and Face Recognition 213 Requirements for Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition Read Before Using SAMSUNG APPS Web Browser Restrictions Photo, Video, and Music File Limitations 218 Storage Device File Transfers 219 Supported External Subtitles 219 Supported Internal Subtitles 220 Supported Image Formats and Resolutions 220 Supported Music Formats and Codecs 221 Supported Video Codecs Restrictions 223 Restrictions to PIP (Picture-in-Picture) Read After Installing the TV 224 Picture Sizes and Input Signals 224 Installing an Anti-Theft Kensington Lock 225 Read Before Setting Up a Wireless Internet Connection Computer Connection Precautions 226 IBM 226 MAC 227 VESA DMT 228 LED 4500 series 228 IBM 228 MAC 228 VESA DMT Supported Video Resolutions Licence Glossary VI 1 Using the Smart TV " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Samsung Smart TV Smart TV can download applications and explore the internet. Connect to the internet to make full use of the TV. Connecting the TV to the internet 1. Connect the TV to the internet via wired or wireless connection. 2. Set up Network Settings via Network > Network Settings. Quick Guide 2 Setting up Smart Hub Smart TV services are available on the 5 Smart Hub panels. Before using the Smart Hub, set up the area, and service provider. You can enjoy various services that Samsung has got to offer by following the directions on the screen. Set Up Smart Hub Set Up Smart Hub Using Smart Hub Smart Hub is the heart of this Samsung Smart TV. It is divided into 5 panels which are shown at the top of the Smart Hub screen. You can access On TV, FILMS AND TV SHOWS, Games, MULTIMEDIA, and SAMSUNG APPS. Go to Smart Hub > Apps and download applications from the Samsung Smart TV. " For more information, refer to "Smart Hub". 2 3 Downloading applications Move the focus to an app and press and hold the touchpad. When a pop-up menu appears, select Download so that you can enjoy the application. 4 Using Voice Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Setting up Voice Control Some of the functions on this TV can be controlled using your voice. Activate Voice Control via System > Voice Control. System Accessibility Setup Football Mode Menu Language English Smart Control Settings Universal Remote Setup Voice Control Using Voice Control Press the VOICE button on the Samsung Smart Control, and say "Help" to display the complete list of voice commands. " For more information, refer to "TV Control using your Voice". 4 5 Using Motion Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Setting up Motion Control Some of the functions on this TV can be controlled using hand or finger motions. Activate Motion Control via System > Motion Control. System Setup Football Mode Menu Language English Smart Control Settings Universal Remote Setup Voice Control Motion Control On Using Motion Control 1. Raise a hand with the index finger pointing upwards until an arrow cursor appears on the screen. 2. Move the hand to control the pointer on the screen, and perform a mouse-click gesture to click a button. " A TV camera (sold separately) needs to be connected in order to use Motion Control. " For more information, refer to "TV Control using Motions". 6 Using the Samsung Smart Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Samsung Smart Control Use the Samsung Smart Control to access various functions via the SEARCH, KEYPAD, SOURCE, and VOICE buttons. In addition, you can move the pointer by pressing and holding the touchpad lightly. Setting the Samsung Smart Control Set up the Samsung Smart Control based on your preferences. Setting include the touch sensitivity and onscreen remote size. Set the Smart Control Settings via System > Smart Control Settings. System Accessibility Setup Football Mode Menu Language English Smart Control Settings Universal Remote Setup Voice Control 6 7 Using the Samsung Smart Control Use the buttons to perform actions. Move the Samsung Smart Control while touching the touchpad to move the focus. 8 Entering option menu using Samsung Smart Control Samsung Smart Controls may vary depending on the specific model. After Pressing and holding the MENU button, Menu appears automatically. After pressing and holding the } button, Info appears automatically. After Pressing and holding the b button, Menu appears automatically. After Pressing and holding the } button, Menu appears automatically. " For more information, refer to "Using Samsung Smart Control". 8 9 Using the Football Mode " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Activating Football Mode Football Mode enables optimal settings for picture and audio performance, making you feel as if you were on the ground of sporting events. To record the sports game, connect the USB(HDD) to the TV and go to System > Football Mode. Set Football Mode to On. System Accessibility Setup Football Mode Menu Language English Smart Control Settings Universal Remote Setup Voice Control Using Football Mode Press enter while watching a sports game and then press the desired button on the screen. Record, use social media, zoom, and save and view highlights. " For more information, refer to "Adding Realism to Sports". 10 Using the Multi-Link Screen " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Running Multi-Link Screen Press the M.SCREEN button. Using the Multi-Link Screen After selecting the desired screen using Samsung Smart Control, search the website or play an app while viewing the TV. If you press the M.SCREEN button, you can select a function that is supported on Multi-Link Screen. " For more information, refer to "Multiple Functions on a Single Screen". 10 11 Editing channels " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Running Editing Channel Run Edit Channel and go to Broadcasting > Edit Channel. Broadcasting Auto Tuning Aerial Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favourites Changing the channel number or name Select Change Number, and then change the channel's order in the list. To remove channels from the list, select the channels using the Samsung Smart Control's touchpad or directional buttons and then delete them. Change Number Change Number 12 Sorting the channel list 1. Select a digital channel in the list and then select Options > Sorting. 2. Select a desired method for sorting the list. Sorting Options Options 13 Connecting - Aerial " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before connecting any external devices and cables to the TV, first verify the model number. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. An aerial must be connected to the TV in order to receive broadcast signals. " An aerial connection is not necessary when a cable box or satellite receiver is used. Connect the correct aerial cable according to your viewing environment to the TV's aerial connector, as shown in the diagram. It is best to connect the both connectors using a Multi-Switch or Diseqc. Switch, etc and to set Aerial Connection Type to Dual. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Connecting Antenna and External devices 14 Video Device Connection " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Your TV has a variety of connectors for video input from external devices such as cable boxes, satellite receivers, Blu-ray players, DVD players, camcorders, and gaming consoles. Below is a list of featured connectors shown in descending order of picture quality. ● HDMI ● Component ● External Input Connect a video device to the TV via an HDMI connector for the best picture quality. If the device does not have an HDMI connector, try a component connector to get the next best picture quality. " The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. " Refer to the external device's operating manual when connecting it to the TV. The number of external device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer. 14 15 Connecting - HDMI Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. The following types of HDMI cables are recommended: ● High-Speed HDMI Cable ● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet HDMI cables have certain requirements: " Use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14 mm or less. " Using a non-certified HDMI cable may result in a blank screen or a connection error. " Some HDMI cables and devices may not be compatible with the TV due to different HDMI specifications. " This TV does not support HDMI Ethernet Channel. Ethernet is a LAN (Local Area Network) built with coaxial cables standardised by the IEEE. Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the video device's HDMI output connector and the TV's HDMI input connector. " The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. Once the connection has been made, you will be able to select the connected external device using the SOURCE button. 16 Connecting - Component Before connecting any external devices and cables to the TV, first verify the model number of the TV you purchased. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. Refer to the diagram and connect the Component cable to the TV's component input connectors and the device's component output connectors. Make sure the cable colours match the connector colours. Once the connection has been made, you will be able to select the connected external device using the SOURCE button. 16 17 Connecting - External Input Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. Refer to the diagram and connect the AV cable to the TV's AV input connectors and the device's AV output connectors. If you are using the TV's AV input connectors, connect the video cable to the Y connector. Some models feature a video connector as well. In this case, connect the cable to the video connector. Once the connection has been made, you will be able to select the connected external device using the SOURCE button. 18 Connecting - SCART " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before connecting any external devices and cables to the TV, first verify the model number of the TV you purchased. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. Connect the TV’s SCART input connector to the device’s SCART output connector using a SCART cable. An extra audio connection is not needed because SCART also carries audio. " SCART can only carry standard-definition video. 18 19 TV Audio through the External Speakers Your TV has a variety of connectors for audio input from devices such as Blu-ray players and DVD players and for audio output to such devices as amplifiers. The connectors are listed below. ● ARC (Audio Return Channel) ● Digital Audio (Optical) There are several issues to bear in mind when using audio input: ● For better audio quality, it is a good idea to use an AV receiver. ● The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. ● Refer to the external device's operating manual when connecting it to the TV. The number of external device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer. Connecting - HDMI (ARC) " Some models may not support ARC. Before connecting any external devices and cables to the TV, first verify the model number of the TV you purchased. A sticker showing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. ARC (Audio Return Channel) enables digital sound output using just an HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available through the HDMI (ARC) port and only when the TV is connected to an ARC-enabled AV receiver. " The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. Connect an HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI (ARC) connector and the device's HDMI output connector. 20 Connecting - Digital Audio (Optical) " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker showing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. Connecting an AV receiver to the TV via a digital audio (optical) connector lets you listen to digital audio. Connecting a device using an optical cable does not automatically turn off the TV speakers. To turn off the TV's speakers, set TV Sound Output (Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Sound Output) to something other than TV Speaker. Adjust the audio device's volume using its remote control. " An unusual noise coming from the audio device while you are using it may indicate a problem with the audio device itself. If this occurs, ask for assistance from the audio device manufacturer. " Digital audio is only available with 5.1-channel broadcasts. Refer to the diagram and connect the optical cable to the TV's digital audio output connector and the device's digital audio input connector. 20 21 Connecting - Headphone " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. Refer to the diagram and connect the headphones to the headphone output connector. Only use headphones with a 3-conductor TRS type jack. The headphone volume and the TV volume are adjusted independently of each other. While the headphone is connected, the TV speakers are muted and certain Sound options are deactivated. " The connectors may not be supported depending on the model. 22 Connecting - Audio Output " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. " The connectors names and locations may vary depending on the model. Refer to the diagram and connect the audio cable to the TV's audio output connector and the device's audio input connector. 22 23 Connecting to a Computer You can directly connect a computer to the TV or to the network to view the computer screen or content on the TV. Connect the computer to the TV as follows. ● Connecting via HDMI Port You can connect the computer to the TV using the HDMI cable to display the computer screen on the TV. ● Connecting with the HDMI (DVI) Port You can connect a computer to the TV by connecting the computer's DVI port to the TV's HDMI port with the DVI to HDMI cable to display the computer screen on the TV. ● Connecting via Samsung Link Quickly access the photo, video and music files saved on a computer on which Samsung Link software is installed, even if you do not connect the TV directly to the computer. ● Connecting via Home Network (DLNA) Quickly access the photo, video and music files saved on a computer by connecting the TV and the computer to the same router or AP. 24 Connecting - HDMI Port Before connecting any external device or cable to the TV, first verify the TV's model number. A sticker showing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. For HDMI connection, one of the following HDMI cable types is recommended: ● High-Speed HDMI Cable ● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet " Use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14 mm or less. Using a non-certified HDMI cable may result in a blank screen or a connection error. " Some HDMI cables and devices may not be compatible with the TV due to different HDMI specifications. " This TV does not support HDMI Ethernet Channel. Ethernet is a LAN (Local Area Network) built on coaxial cables standardised by the IEEE. " Some computers do not support HDMI interface, depending on its graphics adapter specifications. In this case, use a DVI-to-HDMI cable to connect the computer to the TV. Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the external video device's HDMI output connector and the TV's HDMI input connector. Once the connection has been made, you will be able to select the connected external device using the SOURCE button. 24 25 Connecting - HDMI (DVI) Port If the graphics adapter of your computer does not support HDMI interface, connect the computer to the TV with the DVI (Digital Visual Interactive) to HDMI cable. However, DVI-to-HDMI connection is supported by the HDMI port for DVI only and does not support audio signal transmission. To listen to the computer sound, connect the external speaker to the computer's audio output connector. " For information on resolutions supported by the TV, refer to "Computer Connection Precautions". Refer to the diagram and connect the DVI-to-HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port and the computer's DVI output port. Once the connection has been made, you will be able to select the connected external device using the SOURCE button. 26 Connecting - Samsung Link Quickly access photo, video and music files saved on a computer with Samsung Link software installed. Also, use Samsung Link to play and view the content of a computer that has been registered to Samsung Link under your Samsung account, even if the computer and the TV are not connected to the same router or AP. 11 Visit the Samsung content and service portal (http://link.samsung.com) on a computer and sign into your Samsung account. " To install Samsung Link desktop software, you will need to first sign into your Samsung account. If you don't have a Samsung account, create one first. 22 Install Samsung Link desktop software. When the installation is complete, the computer will be registered to Samsung Link. 33 Specify the folder you wish to link to the TV. You can view and play photo, video and music files contained in the specified folder on the TV screen. " For more information on using Samsung Link desktop software, refer to the software's Help section. Connecting - Home Network (DLNA) Quickly access and view/play photo, video and music files from a computer on the TV screen. 11 Connect the TV and the computer to the same router or AP. A home network will be configured once the two connections are established. " Home Network (DLNA) enables content-sharing between the TV, computers and mobile devices connected to the same wired or wireless router. 22 From the computer, select [Control Panel] > [Network and Internet] > [Network and Sharing Centre] > [Change advanced sharing settings] and select [Choose media streaming options...] to activate media streaming. 33 From the list, set TV to [Allowed]. 44 Launch Windows Media Player from the computer, select [Settings] > [Library Management] and then add the location where the photo, video and music files are saved to view/play the files on the TV screen. " It will be possible to view/play on the screen files moved to Windows Media Player's default folder. " As long as File Sharing is activated, unauthorised access may be allowed. Disable File Sharing if data access is not required. 26 27 Connecting with a Mobile Device Connect mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet to the TV directly or indirectly over a shared network and display the mobile device screen or content on the TV screen. Connect the mobile device to the TV as follows. ● Mobile Device Screen on TV (Screen Mirroring) Wirelessly connect the TV to the mobile device with the mirroring function to view the mobile device's screen on the TV. " This option is available only with mobile devices that support mirroring. ● Connecting Mobile Devices without a Wireless Router (Wi-Fi Direct) Wi-Fi Direct enables you to connect the TV to a mobile device without a router or AP. Quickly access and play photo, video and music files from a connected mobile device on the TV screen. " This option is available only with mobile devices that support Wi-Fi Direct. ● Connecting via Samsung Link Samsung Link enables you to play photo, video and music files from a Samsung Link-enabled mobile device without having to manually connect the device to the TV. ● Connecting via Home Network (DLNA) View/play on the TV photo, video and music files from a mobile device connected to the same router or AP as the TV. ● Connecting via Smart View 2.0 Install and run the Smart View 2.0 app on your mobile device, and connect it to the TV in the same network. 28 Mobile Device Screen on TV (Screen Mirroring) Network > Screen Mirroring Try Now Wirelessly connect a mirroring-enabled mobile device to the TV and play the video and audio files stored on the device on the TV. Mirroring refers to the function that plays the video and audio files located on a mobile device on a TV and on the mobile device simultaneously. " To use the Screen Mirroring function, the mobile device must support a mirroring function such as AllShare Cast or Screen Mirroring. To check whether your mobile device supports the mirroring function, please visit the mobile device manufacturer's website. " The video or audio may intermittently stop depending on network conditions. Connecting via a mobile device 11 On the mobile device, run Screen Mirroring. The mobile device searches for available devices to connect to. 22 From the search result list, select TV. The TV displays a pop-up window. 33 In the pop-up window, select Allow to connect the mobile device. " All previously allowed mobile devices will automatically connect without needing approval. " If you select Deny, the device won't appear and can't be activated in this way. Navigate to Network > Screen Mirroring > Device Manager to allow the previously denied mobile device. Not searching for the TV on mobile devices... 11 Navigate to Network > Screen Mirroring to run Screen Mirroring. Also, you can select Screen Mirroring on a list by pressing SOURCE. 22 Run mirroring on the mobile device. Display a list while automatically searching for mobile devices. 33 Select the TV and it connects automatically. " When the mobile devices cannot connect, try turning the TV off and on. Allow/Reject the connection via mobile devices " This is only available for watching when mobile devices allow the connection. 11 Navigate to Network > Screen Mirroring > Device Manager to activate Device Manager. This displays a list of required mobile devices connection. 22 You can allow access or deny connections with mobile devices. 28 29 Connecting Mobile Devices without a Wireless Router (Wi-Fi Direct) Network > Wi-Fi Direct Try Now Wi-Fi Direct lets you connect mobile devices directly to your TV using wireless technology. After connecting a device to the TV using Wi-Fi Direct, it will be possible to view/play video, photo, and music files from the device on the TV. " The mobile device must support Wi-Fi Direct. Make sure the mobile device you intend to use supports Wi-Fi Direct. 11 Enable Wi-Fi Direct on the mobile device and then launch Wi-Fi Direct. The TV automatically scans for and displays a list of available devices. The TV's name also appears on the mobile device. 22 Select the device from the list to initiate a connection. If a connection request is made by the TV, a permission message appears on the mobile device and vice versa. 33 Allow the connection. This completes the connection process. Connecting - Samsung Link Samsung Link enables you to view/play photo, video and music files from a Samsung Link-enabled mobile device with ease. Also use Samsung Link to play and view the content of a mobile device that has been registered to Samsung Link under your Samsung account, even if the mobile device and the TV are not connected to the same router or AP. 11 Run the Samsung Link app on the mobile device and then sign in with your Samsung account. " To use Samsung Link, you have to sign in with a Samsung account. If you don't have a Samsung account, create one first. 22 Quickly access and play photo, video and music files from the mobile device running Samsung Link app under your Samsung account. " For more information on using the Samsung Link app, refer to the Help section of the manual. 30 Connecting - Home Network (DLNA) View/play photo, video and music files from a mobile device on the TV. 11 Connect both the TV and the mobile device to the same router or AP. A home network will be configured once the connections are established. " Home Network (DLNA) enables content-sharing between the TV, computers and mobile devices connected to the same wired or wireless router. 22 Enable File Sharing on the mobile device. The mobile device's shared content can be viewed/ played on the TV. " As long as File Sharing is activated, unauthorised access may be allowed. Disable File Sharing if data access is not required. Connecting via Smart View 2.0 By installing and running the Smart View 2.0 app on the mobile device, you can view the device screen on the TV, or play the device's multimedia content (videos, photos, and music) on the TV. " Go to Google Play, and search for and install Smart View 2.0 on your mobile device. Smart View 2.0 is a cross-platform multi-screen app that enables you to load the TV screen on a mobile device, share multimedia contents between two devices, and control the TV remotely. For more information, refer to the Smart View 2.0 manual. 30 31 Name of TV on Network Network > Device Name Try Now Choose or enter a TV name to be displayed on the network. 11 Select Device Name from the Network menu. A list will appear. 22 Choose a name from the list. Alternatively, select User Input to enter a name manually. You can view the specified TV name on the network. Input Signal Selection You can select a connected external device using the SOURCE button. For example, to switch to a gaming console connected to the second HDMI connector, press SOURCE. From the Source list, select HDMI2 to change the input signal to HDMI mode. Connector names may vary depending on the model. The following options are available in the Source screen: ● TOOLS Button Select a port connected to an external device, and press and hold the Enter button. The following functions are available: " Available options for each connector may vary. – Edit Name: Rename devices connected to the TV for easier identification of external sources. For example, you can designate a computer connected to the TV via an HDMI-DVI cable as DVI PC. Alternatively, simply designate a computer connected to the TV via an HDMI cable as PC. You can also designate an AV device connected to the TV via an HDMI-DVI cable as DVI Devices. – Information: View detailed information about the connected devices. – Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): Displays a list of Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant devices that are connected to the TV. " This option is only available with Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) set to On. – Device Format: Formats USB recording devices connected to the TV. " This option is only available when a USB device has been selected. – Disconnect USB Device: Used to safely remove a USB device connected to the TV. " This option is only available when a USB device has been selected. ● Universal remote setup Select Universal remote setup on the screen to configure the universal remote function. By configuring a universal remote control, you can control cable boxes, Blu-ray players, home theatres, and other external devices using a single remote control. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 32 Inserting Batteries into Samsung Smart Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. To use Samsung Smart Control, first refer to the figure below and insert batteries into the unit. 11 Gently pull on the battery cover's notch and then remove the cover completely once it comes loose. 22 Insert 2 AA alkaline batteries, making sure to align the positive and negative polarities correctly. 33 Place the battery cover on the remote control and insert the top part of the cover into the remote control. 44 Press the catches on both sides of the battery cover in the order shown so that the cover is completely attached to the remote control. When you see this alarm icon on the screen... Following alarm icon indicates Samsung Smart Control's batteries are low. If the alarm icon pops up, replace the batteries. Samsung recommends using alkaline batteries for a longer operating life. Using Remote and Peripheral Devices 32 33 Pairing Samsung Smart Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. To control the TV with Samsung Smart Control, you need to pair Samsung Smart Control to the TV via Bluetooth. Pair Samsung Smart Control to the TV. " Samsung Smart Control can only be paired to a single TV. Point Samsung Smart Control at the remote control sensor of the TV and press the TV button to turn the TV on. " Remote control receiver’s location may vary depending on the model. Reconnecting Samsung Smart Control If the Samsung Smart Control stops operating or works abnormally, replace the batteries as this may be due to insufficient battery power. If the problem persists, the Samsung Smart Control restore pairing with the TV. 11 Press both the RETURN button and the Guide button simultaneously for more than 3 seconds. " You must place the Samsung Smart Control approximately 30cm ~ 40cm away from the TV and ensure it is pointing towards the remote control receiver. 22 Connection image is appeared on the screen. And then, Samsung Smart Control is connecting to TV automatically. 34 Using Samsung Smart Control " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Samsung Smart Control makes it even easier and more convenient to use the TV. Pressing the KEYPAD button displays a virtual remote control that allows you to easily enter digits, control content, and activate functions on the screen. " We recommend using Samsung Smart Control at a distance of less than 6m. A usable distance may differ depending on the wireless environmental conditions. Button Functions Refer to the detailed information about the provided remote control. " Samsung Smart Controls may vary depending on the specific model. 34 35 " Colours and shape may vary depending on the model. 36 Button Description TV Turns the TV on/off. SEARCH Press this button to use the search window. KEYPAD With the virtual remote control on the screen, you can easily enter digits, control content, and use functions. SOURCE Changes the source. w = v Changes the volume. VOICE Starts voice recognition. When the microphone icon appears on the screen, say a voice command into the microphone. Say "Help" to learn about basic usage and voice commands. " Say a voice command 10cm to 15cm from the microphone and at an appropriate volume. ¢(Mute) / AD Turns the sound on/off. < P > Changes the channel. <, >, ¡, £ Moves the pointer or focus. Touchpad Place a finger on the touch pad and move the Samsung Smart Control. The pointer on the screen moves in the direction and as much as the Samsung Smart Control is moved. Press the touchpad to run the focused item. †, ∂, ∑, … Controls for when viewing/playing a video, photo or music file or watching a recorded programme. You can also use the buttons to control content from an external device. a, b, {, } Use these colour buttons to access additional options specific to the feature in use. RETURN / EXIT Returns to the previous menu. Additionally, when you press this button while watching TV, you can return to the previous channel. SMART HUB Launches the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can search through favourite apps, channels or sources and quickly access previously run or frequently used functions. Also, when you move to the panel screen, you can use various service provided each service panel GUIDE / CH.LIST Displays the digital channel broadcasting schedule. INFO Shows the information about the current digital broadcast programme or content. ¥ Enable Football Mode for an optimal sports viewing experience. MENU Displays a menu on the screen. " Availability depends on the specific Samsung Smart Control. M.SCREEN You can split the TV screen and use various functions such as watching TV, surfing the web, watching video, and so on. " Availability depends on the specific Samsung Smart Control. 36 37 Additional Functions Press and hold the following buttons for 1 second to use additional functions. Button Description GUIDE / CH.LIST Press and hold to launch the CH.LIST. RETURN / EXIT Press and hold this button to exit all currently running applications ¢ / AD Press and hold this button to bring up the Accessibility Shortcuts panel. Select the options to turn them on or off. b Displays a menu on the screen. " Availability depends on the specific Samsung Smart Control. { Press and hold to record the broadcast. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. } Press and hold to view information about the current digital channel or media file. Using the TV by Moving the Samsung Smart Control The Samsung Smart Control has a motion sensor (gyro sensor) that allows you to easily control the TV by holding and moving the Samsung Smart Control. After placing a finger on the touchpad, a pointer appears on the screen. Hold and move the Samsung Smart Control. The pointer moves the same way the Samsung Smart Control is moved. It's also possible to scroll up and down on scrollable screens. " If you remove the finger from touchpad, the screen pointer disappears. " If the Voice Guide is set to On, the Samsung Smart Control's motion sensor(gyro sensor) does not work. To use the Samsung Smart Control's motion sensor, set the Voice Guide to Off. 38 Using the TV with the Touchpad " Navigate to the Support menu and select the Smart Control Tutorial option to learn how to use the touchpad, following the on screen instructions. Moving the Focus/Pointer Press the directional buttons (up, down, left, and right) to move the pointer or focus in the direction. Menu Access & Item Selection Press the touchpad. This lets you access a TV menu or select an item. 38 39 Displaying the Context-sensitive Menu on Smart Hub Press and hold on the touch pad from the Smart Hub screen. The Options menu available to the selected item appears. " The Options menu depends on the context. Moving to the Smart Hub panel On the Smart Hub screen, drag left or right on the touchpad. This will move the Smart hub panels left or right. Scrolling on the Web Browser Drag up/down or left/right on the touchpad in the web browser screen. This scrolls through the web screen. 40 Displaying the Remote Control on the Screen (virtual remote control) Press the KEYPAD button to display the virtual remote control on the screen. You can easily enter digits, control content, and use TV buttons with the virtual remote control. " The virtual remote control buttons may vary depending on the TV's current status. Button Description ● You can directly enter the channel number to switch to that channel. Select PreCH to return to the previous channel. ● TTX/MIX: Alternately selects Teletext ON Double, Mix or OFF. Controls the item when you are playing a video, photo or music file or watching a recorded programme. You can also use the buttons to control the content on an external device. TOOLS Use frequently used functions while watching TV. In addition, you can use additional functions that may vary depending on the currently running function. INFO Shows the information about the current digital broadcast programme or content. MENU Displays the menu on the screen. Speaker Settings Select the speakers which you want to use to listen to the TV's sound. To set this option, external speakers must be connected to the TV. PIP Display the video from an external device or computer on the main screen and the TV as a picture-in-picture. 3D Turn the 3D effect on or off. Schedule Manager Move to the Schedule Manager screen. AD/SUBT Displays the Accessibility Shortcuts. Select the options to turn them on or off. P.SIZE Change the picture size. 40 41 Button Description DUAL When you press the Dual I II button the first time, the current dual mode is displayed on the screen. Press the Dual I II button again to change the dual mode. Web Browser Launch the Web Browser. e-Manual Launch the e-Manual. Sign In Log in or out of 0your Samsung account. Move to the right / Move to the left: You can move the virtual remote control on the screen. Large size / Standard size: You can resize the virtual remote control on the screen. " Alternatively, navigate to the System > Smart Control Settings menu and select and set the Onscreen Remote Size option. Touch Sensitivity: You can change the touchpad sensitivity. " Alternatively, navigate to the System > Smart Control Settings menu and select and set the Touch Sensitivity option. Motion Sensitivity: Put a finger on the touchpad and move it to adjust the speed of the pointer on the screen. " Navigate to System > Smart Control Settings, and select Motion Sensitivity to enable this option. Universal Remote Setup: Moves to the Universal Remote Setup screen. Cancel: Close the pop-up menu. 42 Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote (Universal Remote Setup) System > Universal Remote Setup Try Now " Availability depends on the specific model and area. The universal remote control feature lets you control cable boxes, Blu-ray players, home theatres, and other external devices connected to the TV using the TV's remote control. In order to use the TV's remote control as a universal remote, you must first connect the IR extender cable (included). " You can also use the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function to operate some external Samsung devices with your TV's remote control without any additional setup. Refer to the "Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)" section for more information. " Certain external devices connected to the TV may not support the universal remote feature. Setting Up the Universal Remote Control Before connecting any external devices and cables to the TV, first verify the model number of the purchased TV. A sticker containing the model number is attached to the back of the TV. The connection method varies depending on the model. To use the TV remote as a universal remote, connect the IR extender cable (included) to the TV and position it within 10 cm of the external device's remote control receiver. " The colour and design of the IR extender cable may vary depending on the model. " When you connect the cable, you have to match the cable’s colour and socket’s colour. Connect the IR extender cable to the TV's IR output connector as shown in the diagram and place the transmitter end within 10 cm of the external device's receiver pointing in the direction of the remote receiver. However, there must be no obstacles between the IR extender cable and the external device. The presence of obstacles interferes with the transmission of the remote control signal. " When you use an external device registered with the Universal Remote Control on the Samsung Smart Control, you can use the external device without connecting an IR extender cable. However, if you want to use an external device using Motion Control or Voice Control, be sure to connect an IR extender cable. 42 43 Controlling External Devices with the TV Remote External Device Registration 11 Turn on the external device to set up the universal remote function for, and bring up the Source screen. 22 Select Universal remote setup from the top of the screen. This initiates the universal remote setup process. 33 Follow the on-screen instructions and register the external device. Using the TV Remote Registering an external device to the TV remote also registers the connector through which the device is connected. Accordingly, simply selecting the external device using the SOURCE button makes it possible to control the device using the TV's remote. 44 Universal Remote Features 11 Press SOURCE to bring up the Source screen. 22 Select Universal remote setup from the top of the screen. This initiates the universal remote setup process. 33 Select an external registered device on the Universal remote setup screen. The following options are available: ● Use External Speakers Listen to the audio from the external device through the connected home theater. " This is available only on the set-top box or Blu-ray player. ● Link Set-top Box Listen to the audio from the set-top box through the home theater that is connected to the TV. " This is available only on the home theater system. ● Link Blu-ray Player Listen to the audio from the Blu-ray player through the home theater that is connected to the TV. " This is available only on the home theater system. ● Source Setup Change the TV's input source to your selected external device. ● Sync with TV power Configure the set-top box to turn off when the TV is turned off " This is available only on the set-top box. ● Rename Rename the registered external device (up to 15 characters long) ● Delete Remove the registered external device. 44 45 Controlling the TV with a Keyboard System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings Try Now You can use a keyboard to control the TV. " Certain models do not support USB HID class keyboards. Connecting a Keyboard Connecting a USB Keyboard Plug the keyboard cable into the TV's USB port. A connection message appears on the screen. Connecting a Bluetooth Keyboard " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 11 Place the Bluetooth keyboard into the standby status. " Refer to the keyboard manual for information on putting the keyboard into the standby status. 22 Select System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings > Add Bluetooth Keyboard. The Add Bluetooth Keyboard screen will appear and automatically scan for available keyboards. " If your keyboard was not detected, position the keyboard close to the TV and then select Refresh. This initiates a scan for available keyboards again. 33 Select the Bluetooth keyboard from the scan list and then select Pair and connect. A number appears on the screen. 44 Enter the number on the Bluetooth keyboard. " Select Yes to change the keyboard's options or No to leave them as they are. 46 Using the Keyboard Use the following remote features with the USB or Bluetooth keyboard connected to the TV. ● Arrow Keys (moving the focus), Windows Key (MENU Button), Menu List Key (TOOLS Button), Enter Key (Select/run item), ESC (RETURN Button), Number Keys (Number Buttons) ● F1 (a), F2 (b), F3 ({), F4 (}), F5 ( ), F6 (SOURCE Button), F7 (CH.LIST Button), F8 (MUTE Button), F9/F10 (Volume Buttons), F11 / F12 (Channel Buttons) ● Page Up/Page Down: Scroll web browser pages up/down. ● Holding down the Enter key: On the Smart Hub screen, navigate to an item and hold down the Enter key to display the Options menu. " The Options menu depends on the context. Changing Keyboards Try Now " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Select System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings > Select Keyboard. Designate which keyboard to use. " Only one keyboard can be used at a time. Input Languages, Keyboard Type, and Switch Language Key Try Now Select System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings > Keyboard Options. The following options are available: ● Keyboard Language If the keyboard supports multiple languages, choose which language you want to use from the list. ● Keyboard type Specify the type of language selected under Keyboard Language. " The Keyboard type list varies depending on which language was selected under Keyboard Language. ● Switch Input Language If the keyboard supports multiple languages, choose from the list which key to use to switch between languages. 46 47 Controlling the TV with a Mouse System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings Try Now This TV can be operated with ease using a mouse instead of a remote control. " Certain models do not support USB HID class mice. Connecting a Mouse Connecting a USB Mouse Plug the mouse cable into the TV's USB port. A connection message appears on the screen. Connecting a Bluetooth Mouse " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 11 Place the Bluetooth mouse in standby status. " Refer to the mouse manual for information on putting the mouse in standby status. 22 Select System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings > Add Bluetooth Mouse. The Add Bluetooth Mouse screen will appear and automatically scan for available mice. 33 Select the Bluetooth mouse from the scanned list, and then select Pair and connect. This pairs the Bluetooth mouse with the TV. 48 Using the Mouse Once a USB or Bluetooth mouse is connected to the TV, a pointer will appear on the TV's screen. You can use this pointer to control the TV as you would a computer. ● Selecting and Running an Item Left-click on the mouse. ● Displaying the Volume, Mute, and Channel Buttons Select the volume/channel icon on the screen while watching TV. Use the onscreen buttons to adjust the volume or switch the channel. " Select the volume/channel icon again to hide the buttons. ● Showing Tools Buttons Right-clicking shows the Tools buttons on the screen so that you can easily use the TV functions. " The Tools buttons may vary depending on the function. ● Displaying the Context-sensitive Menu on Smart Hub On the Smart Hub screen, navigate to an item, and hold down the left mouse button for 1 second. The Options menu available to the selected item appears. " The Options menu depends on the context. ● Scrolling the TV Menu or Screen Move the mouse wheel up or down. This scrolls the TV menu or screen up/down. ● Exiting the TV Menu or Feature Click on the X button. This closes the menu. " The X button appears when a mouse is being used. Left-clicking once while using a feature displays the X button. Changing Mice Try Now Select System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings > Select Mouse. Designate which mouse to use. " Only one mouse may be used at a time. Changing Mouse Buttons and Pointer Speed Try Now Select System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings > Mouse Options. The following options are available: ● Primary Button Choose which (left or right) button to use to select and run items. ● Pointer Speed Adjust the movement speed of the pointer that appears on the screen. 48 49 Entering Text Using QWERTY A QWERTY keypad appears when you need to enter text (entering the network password, logging into your Samsung account, etc.), allowing you to enter text using your remote control. Using Additional Functions Select on the QWERTY keyboard screen. The following options are available: ● Recommend text Enable/disable the Recommended Text feature. Enabling the Recommend text feature allows you to quickly enter text starting with the characters you typed in by displaying recommended words. To enter the word "Internet," for example, all you have to do is enter "In" and select the word "Internet" from the list of recommended words. The word is memorised so that you can enter the same text again more easily. ● Reset recommended text data Delete both the recommended words and the memorised words to clear the list. ● Predict Next Letter Enable/disable the Text Prediction feature. Enabling the Text Prediction feature eliminates the need to find and select individual character keys. To enter the word "Internet," for example, select "I". A predicted word will then appear next to the I key. Simply select the predicted word to enter "Internet". " This feature is limited to words that have previously been added to the dictionary. ● Accented Character Preview Enable/disable the Show Accented Letters feature. An accented letter is a letter such as Ё or Й with a diacritical mark above it. Enable the Show Accented Letters feature to enter these kinds of letters. " This is available only with a language that uses diacritical letters. 50 Establishing a Wired Internet Connection Connecting the TV to the Internet gives you access to online services and SMART features, and lets you update the TV's software quickly and easily through the Internet. Connecting a LAN Cable Use a LAN cable. " The TV will not be able to connect to the Internet if the network speed is below 10Mbps. " Use Cat 7 LAN cables to link your TV to the Internet Access Points. There are three ways to connect the TV to the Internet. Refer to the diagrams and connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector on the back of the TV. ● External Modem ● ① IP Router + ② External Modem ● Wall-mounted LAN Outlet Internet Connection 50 51 Connecting to a Wired Internet Network Automatically Network > Network Settings Try Now Settings - Network Automatically connect to an available network. 11 Set the Network Type to Wired, and then select Connect. 22 The TV attempts to connect to an available network. Once successful, you will see a confirmation message. Select OK. If the attempt fails, try again, or connect manually. Connecting to a Wired Internet Network Manually Network > Network Settings With networks that require a static IP address, you will need to enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually to connect to the network. To get these values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). " Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" section for more information on dynamic IP and static IP addresses. 11 Set the Network Type to Wired, and then select Connect. Network Settings Select your network type. Network Type Wired Connect You can connect your TV to the internet. 52 22 Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has been interrupted, select IP Settings. Network Settings Connection verification cancelled. Wired network connection test stopped. Change Network IP Settings Retry Close 33 In the IP Settings screen, set the IP setting to Enter manually, enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values, and then select OK. ● Use one of the following methods to enter the numerical values. Set the numbers using the u and d buttons. Using Samsung Smart Control: Press KEYPAD button and enter the numbers directly. Using the remote control: Enter the numbers directly using numerical button. IP Settings IP setting Enter manually IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 DNS setting Enter manually DNS Server 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel 44 The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation message appears once a connection is established. Select OK. " The network connection speed may differ depending on the DNS server settings. " For details on the DNS server settings, contact your Internet service provider (ISP). 52 53 Establishing a Wireless Internet Connection Connecting the TV to the Internet gives you access to online services and SMART features, and lets you update the TV's software quickly and easily through the Internet. Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network Automatically Network > Network Settings Connect the TV to the Internet via a wireless router. Make sure you have the wireless router's SSID (name) and security key settings before attempting to connect. The security key can be found on the wireless router's configuration screen. 11 On the Network Settings screen, set Network Type to Wireless. The TV automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 22 Select a network (SSID). If the network you want doesn't appear in the list, select Add Network, and enter the network's SSID manually. 33 Enter the security key and select Done. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV attempts to connect right away. 44 A network connection will be attempted. Once a connection is established, the TV displays a confirmation message. Select OK. If the attempt fails, try again, or connect manually. 54 Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network Manually Network > Network Settings With networks that require a static IP address, you will need to enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values manually to connect to the network. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). " Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" section for more information on dynamic IP and static IP addresses. 11 Setting the Network Type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. Network Settings Select your network type. Network Type Wireless Wireless network AP0000 You can connect your TV to the internet. Please select which wireless network to use. AP0001 Add Network Refresh WPS(PBC) 22 Select the network (SSID) you want to connect to. If the wireless router doesn't appear in the list, select Add Network, and enter the network's SSID manually. 33 Enter the security key and select OK. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV attempts to connect right away. 44 Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has been interrupted, select IP Settings. Network Settings Connection verification cancelled. Wireless network connection test stopped. Change Network IP Settings Retry Close 54 55 55 In the IP Settings screen, set the IP setting to Enter manually, enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values, and then select OK. ● Use one of the following methods to enter the numerical values. Set the numbers using the u and d buttons. Using Samsung Smart Control: Press KEYPAD button and enter the numbers directly. Using the remote control: Enter the numbers directly using numerical button. IP Settings IP setting Enter manually IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 DNS setting Enter manually DNS Server 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel 66 The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation message appears once a connection is established. Select OK. " The network connection speed may differ depending on the DNS server settings. " For details on the DNS server settings, contact the Internet service provider (ISP). Connecting to a Wireless Internet Network with WPS Network > Network Settings With wireless routers that support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) or PBC (Push Button Configuration), it's possible to press a button on the router to connect the TV to the Internet. " This functionality is not available with wireless routers that do not support WPS. Check to see if your wireless router supports WPS. 11 Setting the Network Type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 22 Select WPS(PBC) and then press the WPS or PBC button located on the wireless router within two minutes. 33 The TV exchanges the network name (SSID) and security key automatically and then attempts to connect to the Internet. A confirmation message appears once a connection is established. Select OK. 56 Troubleshooting Internet Connectivity Issues If you are not able to connect the TV to the Internet, read the information below. Troubleshooting Wired Internet Connectivity Issues No network cable found Try Now Try Now Make sure the network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure the router is turned on. If it is on, try turning it off and on again. IP auto setting failed Try Now Do the following or configure the IP Settings manually. 11 Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and reset the router. 22 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Unable to connect to the network Try Now Do the following: 11 Check all IP Settings. 22 Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router. Then, unplug the router and plug it back in. 33 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now 11 Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 22 Check the DNS values in the IP Settings. 33 If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup is complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. 56 57 Troubleshooting Wireless Internet Connectivity Issues Wireless network connection failed, Try Now Try Now Selected wireless router not found. Go to Network Settings and select the correct router. Unable to connect to a wireless router Try Now Try Now Check the following: 11 Check if the router is turned on. If it is, turn it off and on again. 22 Enter the correct security key if required. IP auto setting failed Try Now Do the following or configure the IP Settings manually. 11 Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router. Then, unplug the router and plug it back in. 22 Enter the correct security key if required. 33 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Unable to connect to the network Try Now Do the following: 11 Check all IP Settings. 22 Enter the correct security key if required. 33 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now 11 Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 22 Check the DNS values in the IP Settings. 33 If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup is complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. 58 Mobile Network " Availability depends on the specific model and area. While connecting to the mobile network, some functions might be unavailable. Refer to the diagram and insert the Mobile Dongle (sold separately) into the USB port. The Mobile Dongle must be connected to the TV in order to connect to the mobile network. However, the Mobile Dongle is sold separately and is not available from Samsung. " If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet service provider. " Auto Ticker is not available when you set up mobile network. Supported Telecom and Model Name ● Vodacom (Model No: K4605) ● MTN (Model No: E3131S, E3251) ● Safaricom (Model No: E303) 58 59 Checking the Internet Connection Status Network > Network Status Try Now Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct Multimedia Device Settings Screen Mirroring Device Name [TV]Samsung LE... " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. View the current network and Internet status. 60 Multiple Functions on a Single Screen " Availability depends on the specific model and area. This allows you to search the Web, use apps, and much more while watching TV. " Before using Multi-Link Screen , make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. Using Multi-Link Screen requires an Internet connection. " Before using Smart Hub with Multi-Link Screen , go to the On TV Settings (Smart Hub > On TV Settings >Set Up Service Provider) and finish configuring Smart Hub. If the Multi-Link Screen launches while the TV did not configure the Smart Hub, a pop-up window appears. To use the Multi-Link Screen, you need to configure the Smart Hub first. On the pop-up window, select the Set Up Smart Hub to finish configuring the Smart Hub. Launching Multi-Link Screen Picture > Open Multi-Link Screen From the Picture menu, select Open Multi-Link Screen. " Press M.SCREEN on the Samsung Smart Control to launch Multi-Link Screen. Using Multi-Link Screen " UHD and FHD contents and channels cannot be viewed simultaneously. " Launching Smart Hub while using Multi-Link Screen automatically terminates Multi-Link Screen . " Certain TV features and apps may not be supported by Multi-Link Screen . If this is the case, exit from Multi-Link Screen and then use the feature. Selecting a Feature 11 Press the Samsung Smart Control's M.SCREEN button while Multi-Link Screen is running. The Options menu appears. 22 Select a feature from the Options menu. This initialises the selected feature. " Features supported by Multi-Link Screen vary depending on the country. Changing the Channel/Volume 11 Place the pointer or focus over the screen for which you want to change the channel or adjust the volume. 22 Use the channel buttons to change the channel or the volume buttons to adjust the volume. This changes the selected screen's channel/volume. Smart Features 60 61 Smart Hub Smart Hub > Open Smart Hub Try Now With Smart Hub, you can surf the web, download apps, and stay in touch with family and friends through social networking services. In addition, you can use photo, video, and music files stored on external storage devices. " Some Smart Hub services are paid services. To purchase such a service, the service provider account or Samsung Apps TV account (Samsung account) is required. " Make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. The TV must be connected to the Internet in order to use Smart Hub. " Some features of Smart Hub require an Internet connection and may not be available depending on the service provider, language, or region. " To use Smart Hub, you must agree to the end user agreement and privacy policy. Otherwise, you will not be able to access the features and services related to them. You can view the entire content of the Terms & Policy by navigating to Smart Hub > Terms & Policy. If you don't wish to use Smart Hub anymore, you can withdraw the agreement. " Smart Hub service outages can be caused by disruptions in your Internet service. Testing Smart Hub connections Support > Self Diagnosis > Smart Hub Connection Test " Availability depends on the specific model and area. If Smart Hub is not functioning, navigate to Support > Self Diagnosis > Smart Hub Connection Test. Diagnose the problem by checking the internet connection, your ISP, the Samsung server and the Samsung Apps panels. " After completing the test, if Smart Hub continues to have problems, contact your Internet Service Provider or a Samsung Contact Centre. 62 Opening the Home Screen Press while watching TV to open the Home Screen. On the Home Screen, search through favourites apps, channels or sources and access previously run or frequently used functions. " You can configure the TV to automatically open the Home Screen when it turns on. Navigate to Smart Hub > Home Screen Settings, and set Auto Start to On. Setting your favourite item 11 Press while watching TV to open the Home Screen, and move to a desired item. 22 Press and hold the touchpad. The Options menu appears. 33 In the Options menu, select Add to Favourites to add the selected item to the favourite list, which will move top of the list. " To delete a favourite item, select it and tap and hold the touchpad to display the context menu. Then, select Remove from Favourites. Deleting browsing history 11 Press while watching TV to open the Home Screen, and select Clear All. You will be asked to confirm your selection. 22 Select OK on the screen. Your browsing history is deleted completely. " However, the Favorites list items will not be deleted. " You can also delete your browsing history by selecting Clear All in the Smart Hub > Home Screen Settings menu. 62 63 Moving to the Panel Screen Press the button to open the Home Screen, and select the Panel icon. On the Panel screen for each service panel, the following are available: " Usability depends on the specific model and local region. ● Games Navigate to Smart Hub > Games to confirm the optimising game apps for Smart TV and detailed information on Smart hub. This makes it easier to download and play games. In addition, you can manage games that you have downloaded or purchased with your Samsung Account. ● SAMSUNG APPS You can enjoy variety of free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming apps on the TV as you would on a smart phone or tablet. ● On TV You can view the current programmes on TV at a glance and view the Programme Recommendations by Channel and Programme Recommendations by Time from the programmes that will be broadcasted. In addition, you can watch recorded videos. ● FILMS AND TV SHOWS You can directly purchase and view a movie or TV programme through the app provided by Smart Hub without connecting an external video source such as a DVD or Blu-ray player. ● MULTIMEDIA You can play back photo, video, and music files from an external storage device or watch recorded videos. Using the Smart Hub Tutorial Support > Smart Hub Tutorial From the Support menu, select Smart Hub Tutorial. This will familiarise yourself with the basics of Smart Hub and panels. Resetting Smart Hub Smart Hub > Reset Smart Hub Try Now Reset all saved information relating to Samsung accounts and linked service accounts, as well as Smart Hub service agreements and applications. 64 Using Smart Hub with Samsung Account Samsung Account Log In Edit profile Link Service Accounts Remove Accounts from TV Create Account Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. Creating a Samsung Account Smart Hub > Samsung Account Try Now Some Smart Hub services are paid services. To purchase such a service, the service provider account or Samsung Apps TV account (Samsung account) is required. You can create a Samsung Account using your email address. " To create a Samsung Account, you must agree to the Samsung Account end user agreement and privacy policy. Otherwise, you cannot create a Samsung Account. You can view the entire content of the agreement by navigating to Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy. " Alternatively, you can create a Samsung Account at http://content.samsung.com. You can use one ID for both the TV and the website. 64 65 Creating a Samsung Account using Sign Up Samsung Account Menu 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Create Account and select Create a Samsung account. Account - Create 22 Agree to use a Samsung Account and select Next. 33 Create a Samsung Account according to the instructions on the Create Account screen. Once a Samsung Account is created, you will be automatically logged in to Smart Hub. Creating a Samsung Account using a Facebook Account A Facebook user can easily obtain necessary information from Facebook and create a Samsung Account. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Log In. 22 Select + and select the Create with Facebook. 33 Enter your Facebook ID and password and select Sign In. 44 Agree to use a Samsung Account and select Next. 55 Create a Samsung Account according to the instructions on the Create Account screen. Once a Samsung Account is created, you will be automatically signed in. " If you create a Samsung Account using your Facebook account, they are automatically linked. 66 Signing into Samsung Account Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Log In Logging into and Saving a Samsung Account If you haven't logged into your Samsung Account on the TV, you must save your Samsung Account on the TV. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Log In. 22 Select + and select Sign In. 33 Enter your ID and password and then select Sign In. " Check the Sign me in automatically option if you wish to log into Smart Hub automatically. " If you forgot your password, select Reset password to receive password reset instructions via email. 44 Select an image to be used as the profile picture. The Samsung Account has been saved on the TV. 55 Select Done to log into your Samsung Account. Easily Logging Into Your Samsung Account Saved on the TV 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Log In. 22 Choose your Samsung Account and select Sign In. 33 Using the login method configured for the selected Samsung Account, log into your Samsung Account. 66 67 Linking My Samsung and App Accounts Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Link Service Accounts Linking your Samsung Account to accounts of apps installed on the TV lets you automatically log into your linked app accounts when you log into your Samsung Account. For example, you can download the Facebook app and link your Facebook account to your Samsung Account. In this case, logging into your Samsung Account then automatically logs you into your Facebook account as well. " To use Link Service Accounts, you must first log into your Samsung Account. Linking an App Account 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Link Service Accounts. A list of apps that can be linked to your Samsung Account is shown. 22 Select an app from the list. The Link to other accounts window appears on the screen. 33 Enter the current ID and password of the app to log in. When the login is complete, the app account is linked to the Samsung Account. Disconnecting a Linked Account 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account, select Link Service Accounts. Select an app to unlink. 22 A confirmation dialog box appears. Select Yes to unlink the app. 68 Changing and Adding Information to Samsung Account Smart Hub > Samsung Account Using the Samsung Account menu, you can manage your Samsung Account. " To change the account information, you must be logged into your Samsung Account. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Edit profile. 22 Enter the password and then select Done. The edit profile screen appears. The profile editing screen provides the following features. ● Changing Profile Image If you select Edit Profile Picture on the login screen, you can change the profile image. ● Registering Your Face to Samsung Account If you select Register face on the login screen, you can register your face to your Samsung Account. The registered face is used by the Sign-in Method. " This is available only if the optional TV camera is connected to the TV. ● Choosing a Samsung Account Login Method for TV Select Sign-in Method on the login screen and choose a login method. You can determine how to log into the TV with the saved Samsung Account. ● Setting Auto Login Check the Sign me in automatically option if you wish to log into Smart Hub automatically. ● Entering Basic User Information You can enter your given name, surname, and date of birth. ● Receiving e-mail about Samsung services You can determine whether to receive e-mail about Samsung services. Containing the latest information. Deleting All Samsung Accounts from the TV Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Remove Accounts from TV Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Remove Accounts from TV. The account and password information saved on the TV is deleted, and the account information of any linked apps are also deleted. " To delete your account information, you must be signed in with your Samsung Account. 68 69 Using the Games Panel Games Recommended My Page All Games " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. " This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region. Navigate to Smart Hub > Games to confirm the optimising game apps for Smart TV and detailed information on Smart hub. This makes it easier to download and play games. In addition, you can manage games that you have downloaded or purchased with your Samsung Account. " Before you use the Games panel, check if the TV is connected to the Internet. The TV must be connected to the Internet in order to use the Games panel. " To use the Games panel, you must log into your Samsung Account. Using Pop-Up Menu Functions In the Games panel, move the focus to a desired game and press and hold the Enter button. The following functions are available: ● Downloading/Deleting a Game Downloads or deletes the game from the TV. ● Viewing Detail Information of the Game Displays detailed information of the selected game. Installing and Running a Game " When the TV's internal memory is insufficient, you can install a game on a USB device. " You can play a game installed on a USB device only when the USB device is connected to the TV. If the USB device is disconnected during a game playing, the game is terminated. " The game installed on the USB device cannot be played on a different TV, or a PC. 70 Quickly Installing Games 11 Select All Games from the Games panel, navigate to a game from the list and press and hold the Enter button. " On the All Games screen, select the button to view the guide about the game controller. " On the All Games screen, select the button and select a desired sorting criterion. Then, the items in the list are accordingly rearranged. 22 In the pop-up menu, select Download. The selected game is installed on the TV. Installing an App in the Detailed Game Information Screen 11 On the Games panel screen, select a game you wish to install. If you cannot find a desired game, select All Games at the bottom of the screen. " On the All Games screen, select the button to view the guide about the game controller. " On the All Games screen, select the button and select a sorting criteria. The games are sorted according to the criteria. 22 On the detailed information page of the selected game, select Download. When installation is complete, the installation complete window appears. Launching a Game To run an installed game, select Play on the detailed game information screen. 70 71 Managing Downloaded or Purchased Games In Smart Hub, move to the Games panel and select My Page at the bottom of the screen. " On the My Page screen, select the button to view the game controller guide. " On the My Page screen, select the button and select a desired sorting criterion. This rearranges the list accordingly. Updating a Game Select Update Games at top of the My Page screen to update games installed on the TV. " The Update Games appears only when there is a game that needs to be updated. " To update games automatically, select the button at top of the My Page and set the Auto Update games to On. Games will then be updated automatically when an update becomes available. Removing a Game 11 Press the button at top of the My Page screen and select Delete. 22 Select all of the games you wish to remove. To select all games, select Select All. 33 When the selection is complete, select Delete. " Navigate the game you wish to remove and press and hold the Enter button. Then you can easily remove the game. Rating/Sharing/Reviewing a Game You can rate or share the game through a social network service or send a review to the developer on the detailed information screen. " You can rate / share / review a game only when the game has installed on the TV. 72 Using SAMSUNG APPS Panel SAMSUNG APPS RECOMMENDED MY APPS Most Popular What's New Categories " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. " This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region. Smart Hub offers a variety of free news, sports, weather, and gaming content you can install directly on your TV the same way as you would on a smartphone or tablet. " Before you use SAMSUNG APPS, make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. Your TV must be connected to the Internet in order to use SAMSUNG APPS. " Launching Smart Hub for the first time installs the default apps automatically. The default apps may differ depending on the region. 72 73 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions Move the focus to an app and press and hold the Enter button. You can use the following functions: ● Move Relocates the selected app. ● Delete Removes the selected app. ● Delete Multiple Removes multiple apps at once. ● View Details Move to the detailed information of the selected app. ● Change view You can change view mode sort by Custom view or Most Played. ● Lock/Unlock You can lock or unlock a selected app from the screen. ● Update Apps You can update the selected app. 74 Installing an App " When the TV's internal memory is insufficient, you can install an app on a USB device. " Only when the USB device is connected are the app icons installed on the USB viewable on the SAMSUNG APPS screen. You can use an app installed on a USB device only when the USB device is connected to the TV. If the USB device is disconnected while the app is running, the app is terminated. " The app installed on the USB device is not available on a different TV, or a PC. Quick Installation 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, select Most Popular, What's New, or Categories. " The Most Popular and What's New show the most popular and newest Samsung Apps. To view the entire app list, select Categories. You can view all Samsung Apps classified by genre. 22 Move the focus to an app and press and hold the Enter button. A pop-up menu appears. 33 On the pop-up menu on the screen, select Download. " While an app is being installed, the progress bar appears at the bottom of the app icon so that you can easily figure out the installation progress. 44 The selected app is installed on the TV. " You can view installed apps on the SAMSUNG APPS screen. Installing an App from the Detailed App Information Screen 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, select Most Popular, What's New, or Categories. " The Most Popular and What's New show the most popular and the newest Samsung apps. To view the entire app list, select Categories. You can view all Samsung Apps by category. 22 Select an app from the list. Detailed information about your selection appears on the screen. 33 Select Download on the detailed information screen to install the selected app on the TV. " When an app is being installed, a progress bar appears underneath the app icon. 44 When the installation is complete, the Download button turns to Open. " You can view installed apps on the SAMSUNG APPS screen. 74 75 Launching an App Select an app on the SAMSUNG APPS screen to launch it. The icons indicate the following: ● : The app supports motion control. ● : The app supports voice control. ● : The app is installed on a USB device. ● : The app supports a pointer that can move by the Samsung Smart Control. Default Apps e-Manual The embedded e-Manual contains information. Using Web Browser Web Browser Web Browser is an Internet browsing app. Using Web Browser, you can surf the Internet on the TV in the same manner as you would using a PC even while watching a TV programme on PIP. " Use a keyboard and mouse for a more convenient web browsing experience. " The browsing screen may differ from that on a PC. Browsing Methods Web Browser provides two browsing methods: Pointer Browsing and Link Browsing. Pointer Browsing enables you to move the pointer for selection while Link Browsing allows using the direction arrows to move the focus. The default browsing method of Web Browser is Pointer Browsing. To enable Link Browsing, select the Link Browsing icon. 76 Command and Status Bar at a Glance Open the Web Browser to display the command and status bar at the top of the screen. The following items are available: ● Back Move to the previous page. ● Forward Move to the next page. ● Bookmarks & History Move to the Bookmarks & History screen. On this screen, add the current page to Bookmarks, or move, edit, or delete a bookmarked page. Easily access visited pages by navigating the History screen. ● Home Page Move to the main screen. ● Address Bar Check the address of the current page, or enter a web page address to move to the page. ● Refresh / Stop Reload the current page or stop reloading the current page. 76 77 ● Add to Bookmark Add the current page to Bookmarks. ● Search Make a keyword search using the user-specified search engine. " To change the search engine, select the icon and then select a search engine in the Set Search Engine menu. ● Zoom Zoom in or out of the current web page. ● PIP Use Web Browser while watching a TV programme on the same screen. ● Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing Select one from two browsing methods supported by Web Browser. ● Settings Configure the Web Browser settings. ● Close Exit Web Browser. ● New Tab Open a new tab. Browsing Preferences Select the item on the screen. Configure the browsing settings to your needs or convenience. " Some items may not be available depending on the web page. Unavailable items are grayed out. ● Approved Sites To prevent children from accessing inappropriate web pages, limit access to pre-registered web pages. " You will be asked to enter a password when selecting Approved Sites. Enter the password. The default password is 0000. Approved Sites feature: Enable/disable the Approved Sites feature. Reset password for Approved Sites: Change the password. Add current site: Add the current web page to Approved Sites. Manage Approved Sites: Enter the address of the web page that you want to add to Approved Sites, or select one from the list and delete it. " Enabling the Approved Sites feature with no web page listed will restrict access to any web page. 78 ● Private browsing on / Private browsing off Enable/disable the Private Browsing feature. Enabling Private Browsing will not save the browsing history. " When enabling Private Browsing, the icon appears at the start of the address bar. ● PIP Settings Configure the PIP settings. " This is available only if watching TV in PIP mode. Position: Select the position of the sub picture. ● Set Search Engine Set the default search engine from the list. ● Web Browser Settings Configure the Web Browser Settings, such as browsing behaviors or security. Set as homepage: Select a web page and set it as the homepage. Pop-up Block: Block or unblock pop-up windows. Page Block: Block or unblock pages such as commercial pages. Manage a list of pages to block by entering the address of a web page. General: Delete browsing history or Internet usage information, or reset Web Browser. Set Security Mode to On to restrict access by malicious codes or phishing sites. Encoding: Set the Auto select to On, or select an encoding method from the list. Pointer: Adjust the pointer speed in Pointer Browsing mode, or change the link access method. Browser Information: Check the current version of Web Browser. ● Help This will familiarise yourself with the basics of Web Browser. Rearranging Apps on the SAMSUNG APPS Screen 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, move to the app you wish to change the order. 22 Press and hold the Enter button. A pop-up menu appears. 33 On the pop-up menu, select Move. 44 Move an app to a desired location and select the app again. 78 79 Removing an App from the TV " Note that if an app is removed, the data related to the app is also deleted. Removing an App 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, move to the app you wish to remove. 22 Press and hold the Enter button. A pop-up menu appears. 33 On the pop-up menu on the screen, select Delete. A removal confirmation window appears. Select Yes. The selected app is removed. Removing Multiple Apps 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, move to the app you wish to remove. 22 Press and hold the Enter button. A pop-up menu appears. 33 On the pop-up menu on the screen, select Delete Multiple. A check box appears on the app icons. 44 Select all the apps you wish to remove and then select Delete. A removal confirmation window appears. Select Yes. Selected apps are removed. Rating/Reviewing an App On the detailed app information screen, you can rate the app or send a review to the app developer. " To rate or review an app, you must log into your Samsung Account. You can only rate or review with a TV purchasing apps and games. 80 Updating an App 11 On the SAMSUNG APPS screen, move to the app you wish to update. 22 Press and hold the Enter button. A pop-up menu appears. 33 On the pop-up menu on the screen, select Update apps. A pop-up window appears. 44 Select all the apps you wish to update and then select Update. All the selected apps are updated to the latest versions. Setting Auto App Update Smart Hub > Apps Settings To update apps automatically, navigate to Smart Hub > Apps Settings and set Auto update to On. The apps installed on the TV are automatically updated as updates become available. SAMSUNG APPS Features Smart Hub > Apps Settings Try Now Settings - Apps You can configure the features related to the apps installed on your TV. Enabling Automatic Tickers You can configure selected tickers to display automatically when the TV is turned on. Ticker Service enables you to use other services while watching TV. You can receive news, stock, and weather information and more in real-time while watching TV. " To use this feature, make sure that an app supporting the Auto Ticker function is installed on the TV. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Apps Settings and select Auto Ticker. A list of installed apps that support Ticker Autorun appears. 22 From the list, select apps you wish to run automatically when the TV is turned on. 80 81 Setting Push Notification Push notification function enables apps installed on the TV to send alerts and messages to the user. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Apps Settings > Push Notification Settings and set the Push Notification to On. Settings - Push Notification 22 Set the Push Notification setting of apps you wish to receive push notifications from to On. Push notification function of the selected apps is activated. " The Push Notification app list only shows installed apps that support Push Notification Settings. Using an App while Watching TV If an app linked to a channel is installed on the TV, you can view programme information and use related services offered by the app while watching TV. Navigate to Smart Hub > Apps Settings and set Channel-Bound Apps to On. " This feature is only available with apps supporting Channel-Bound Apps installed on the TV. 82 Using On TV Panel On TV FOR YOU Guide Timeline View Trending Recorded TV " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. " This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region. " Availability of recommended content depends on the specific model and area. Smart Hub's On TV panel lets you view programme lists for recommended channels while watching TV. You can then switch to a programme in the recommendation list or set up Schedule Viewing / Schedule Recording for an upcoming programme. " Before you use On TV, check if the TV is connected to the Internet. The TV must be connected to the Internet in order to use On TV. " The channels or programmes recommended by On TV may differ from the actual ones depending on the broadcast information provider. Select a desired programme from the recommendation list. You can watch the selected programme immediately if it is currently on air or move to the detailed programme information screen if it hasn't aired yet. " Select from the screen to change the recommended content list. " For a programme being broadcasted, a progress bar appears. For an upcoming programme, the remaining time to broadcast appears. 82 83 Move to the navigation bar at the bottom of the screen to access the following options: ● Viewing the Programme Schedule of Digital Channels Select Guide at the bottom of the screen to view the programme schedule of each digital channel at a glance. You can check the programme schedule and even set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. " The Guide provides information only about digital channels. Analogue channels are not supported. ● Programme Recommendations by Time Select Timeline View at the bottom of the screen to view programme recommendations for different times of the day. ● Popular Videos Select Trending at the bottom of the screen to view the most trendy or popular content in Twitter and set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. ● Watching a Recorded Programme Select Recorded TV at the bottom of the screen to watch a recorded programme. 84 Using Pop-Up Menu Functions Move the focus to a desired programme and press and hold the Enter button. The following options are available: " Available functions may differ depending on the selected programme. ● Recording the Current Programme You can instantly record a programme that is being broadcast on a different channel. ● Viewing Detailed Information You can move to the detail information screen about the selected programme. ● Reserving You can set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording for the programme. Viewing Detailed Programme Information 11 Move the focus to a desired programme and press and hold the Enter button. The Options menu appears. 22 From the Options menu on the screen, select Detailed Information. The detailed information about the selected programme screen appears. You can find more information about the selected programme in the detailed information screen and you can easily use the following functions: ● Moving to a Channel Jump to the selected programme's channel. ● Record You can record the programme. " This function is only available for programmes that is being broadcasted. ● Reserving Set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording for the programme. " This function is only available for programmes that is being broadcasted. 84 85 ● Viewing Related Content View a list of content related to the programme. If you select an item from the list, the detailed screen of the selected item appears. ● Rate You can rate the programme. ● Sharing You can share detailed information about the programme on social networking services. Configuring On TV Settings " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Smart Hub > On TV Settings Settings - On TV You can set up the signal reception method, cable company, and other broadcast viewing environment settings for On TV. Navigate to Smart Hub > On TV Settings, select Set Up Service Provider settings and set up the broadcast viewing environment settings according to the onscreen instructions. Receiving Automatic Notifications You can configure the TV to display a notification when a frequently watched programme is broadcast. Navigate to Smart Hub > On TV Settings and set Automatic Notifications to On. Changing Recommendation Type You can choose between personally preferred programmes and programmes preferred by the general public as the type of recommendations you wish to receive. Navigate to Smart Hub > On TV Settings, select Recommendation Type and set it to a desired type. Removing Adult Content from the Recommended List You can configure this setting so that recommended programmes that are rated for adults are blocked automatically. Navigate to Smart Hub > On TV Settings and set Block Adult Content to On. 86 Using FILMS AND TV SHOWS Panel FILMS AND TV SHOWS NEWLY ADDED Featured Movies TV Shows Trending " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. " This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region. Use this feature to purchase and view movies and TV programmes recommended by FILMS AND TV SHOWS without having to use an external device such as a DVD player or a Blu-ray player. FILMS AND TV SHOWS provides an easy access to a collection of movies and TV programmes available in Smart Hub. " Not all the FILMS AND TV SHOWS options may be available depending on the content you are trying to access or your region. " Before you use FILMS AND TV SHOWS, make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. The TV must be connected to the Internet in order to use FILMS AND TV SHOWS. " Select from the screen to change the recommended content list. 86 87 Move to the navigation bar at the bottom of the screen to access the following options: " To sort the content items in each menu, select the button at top of the screen and choose a sorting criteria. However, depending on the selected menu, the button may not appear. " Press in each menu's contents list screen to display only movies or TV programmes in the list. The button may not be shown, depending on the selected menu. ● Enjoying Featured Movies and TV Programmes Select Featured to view movies or TV programmes selected according to various themes such as movies featuring an actor who went to Hollywood, completed TV series, and so on. ● Viewing a Movie Select Movies to view a movie from among the movies listed by new arrival, popularity, and genre. ● Viewing a TV Programme Select TV Shows to view a TV show from among the TV shows listed by new arrival, popularity, and genre. ● Viewing Hot Movies and TV Shows at a Glance in Real-time Select Trending to view movies and TV programmes that are the most trendy or popular. Using Pop-Up Menu Functions Move the focus to a desired movie or TV programme and press and hold the Enter button. The following options are available: " Available options may differ depending on the selected programme. ● Instant Content Playing Select an app for the selected content to play it right away. If the selected app is not installed, a pop-up window will appear. From the pop-up window, move to the detailed app information page or install the app. 88 Watching a Movie/TV Programme " If you are using FILMS AND TV SHOWS for the first time or have not logged into your Samsung Account, new and popular movies and TV shows will be shown in the FILMS AND TV SHOWS list. To view a customised recommendation list in FILMS AND TV SHOWS, first log into your Samsung Account. You can view a list of frequently played content on FILMS AND TV SHOWS screen in addition to the default recommended content list. 11 On FILMS AND TV SHOWS screen, select a movie or TV programme you wish to watch. Detailed information about your selection appears on the screen. 22 On the detailed information screen, select an app to play the content. This launches the selected app and displays detailed information about the content. " If the selected app is not installed, a pop-up window will appear. From the pop-up window, move to the detailed app information page or install the app. 33 You can play the content in the detailed information of the content. " If the selected content is free, you can instantly watch the content. If the content is a paid content, you must first purchase the content in the app (In-App Purchase). " The purchasing procedures on the app may differ depending on the app. You may need to log into the app or enter payment information. Restricting Purchased Content Viewing Smart Hub > VOD Rating Lock You can lock content rated as adult content so that children cannot access the content. Navigate to Smart Hub and set VOD Rating Lock to On. " To turn on or off the VOD Rating Lock, the password is required. 88 89 Rating and Sharing a Purchased Content Rating Content 11 Select content in FILMS AND TV SHOWS. Detailed information about your selection appears on the screen. 22 Select button on the detailed information screen. A pop-up window appears. 33 You can rate the item using the ¡ and £ buttons in the pop-up window. Sharing With SNS 11 Select content in the FILMS AND TV SHOWS. Detailed information about your selection appears on the screen. 22 Select either or button in the detailed information screen. The login page of the selected SNS appears. " If you have linked your Samsung Account to the SNS account, you were automatically logged into the SNS account when you logged into your Samsung Account. 33 On the SNS login screen, enter your SNS ID and password to log into the SNS. " If you have linked your Samsung Account to the SNS account, you can skip this step. 44 In the pop-up window, type the article you wish to post to the SNS and select Post. The article is posted to the SNS. 90 Playing Photos, Videos, and Music (MULTIMEDIA) MULTIMEDIA MOST POPULAR My Devices Connect a USB storage device Connect a Smartphone Connect a PC Connect to your cloud storage USB Drive Network Device Storage Service " Actual menu screen may differ depending on the TV model. " This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region. You can play media content saved on a USB device, smartphone, camera, computer, or Storage Service on the TV. " You cannot play media content if the content or the storage device are not supported by the TV. For more information, refer to "Photo, Video, and Music File Limitations". " Backup important files before connecting a USB device. Samsung shall not be held responsible for damaged or lost files. 90 91 Playing Media Content from a USB Device 11 Select USB Drive in the MULTIMEDIA panel. USB devices connected to the TV are listed. 22 Select the device you wish to access. Folders and files of the selected USB device are listed. 33 Select the media content you wish to play. This plays the selected content. " Alternatively, move to the media content to play and press the ∂ button to play the content. " If you connect a USB device to the TV while watching the TV, a pop-up window appears on the screen so that you can easily navigate the folders and files of the USB device. " Alternatively, if you select a USB device on the Source screen, a pop-up window appears on the screen so that you can easily navigate the folders and files of the USB device. Safely Removing a USB Device 11 Press the SOURCE button. The Source screen appears. 22 Navigate the USB device you wish to remove, and press and hold the Enter button. An options window appears. 33 Select Disconnect USB Device from the list. 92 Playing Multimedia Content Saved in a Computer/Mobile Device " To view a guide about the PC connection, select Connecting to PC under Network Device. " To view a guide about a Smartphone or tablet connection, select Connect to a Phone under Network Device. Allowing Connection with a Computer/Mobile Device To play multimedia content in a computer or mobile device on the TV, you need to allow the connection with the computer on the TV. " You can connect to a computer or mobile device on any DLNA DMC device. DLNA DMC function enables users to connect a mobile device to the TV, search for multimedia content and control play operations on the TV. 11 Select Network Device in the MULTIMEDIA panel. Devices connected to the TV are listed. 22 Select Options and then Multimedia device settings. Devices connected to the TV are listed. " Alternatively, select Multimedia Device Settings from the Network menu to see the list of the devices connected to the TV. Try Now 33 Allow connection with the desired device you wish to connect to the TV. You can only play media files from devices that have been allowed to connect to the TV. " If a computer or mobile device requests the multimedia content play, the connection allowance confirmation window appears on the TV so that you can easily connect the computer or mobile device. 92 93 When Connected through Home Network (DLNA) " To connect a computer through home network (DLNA). " To connect a mobile device through home network (DLNA). " You may experience compatibility issues when attempting to play media files via a third-party DLNA server. " However, the content shared by a computer of a mobile device may not play depending on the encoding type and file format of the content. In addition, some functions may not be available. " The multimedia content may not smoothly play depending on the network status. If this is the case, use a USB storage device. 11 Select Network Device in the MULTIMEDIA panel. Devices connected to the TV are listed. 22 Select a device connected via the home network (DLNA). Folders and files shared by the selected device will be listed. 33 Select a media content you wish to play from the list. This plays the selected content. " Alternatively, move to the media content and press ∂ to play. When Connected through Samsung Link " To connect a computer through Samsung Link. " To connect a mobile device through Samsung Link. " However, the content shared by a computer of a mobile device may not play depending on the encoding type and file format of the content. In addition, some functions may not be available. " The multimedia content may not smoothly play depending on the network status. If this is the case, use a USB storage device. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account menu and select Log In to sign in with your the Samsung Account. 22 Select Network Device in the MULTIMEDIA panel. Devices connected to the TV are listed. 33 Select a device connected via Samsung Link. Folders and files shared by the selected device will be listed. 44 Select a media content you wish to play from the list. This plays the selected content. " Alternatively, move to the media content and press ∂ to play. 94 Playing Media Content from a Storage Service Storage Services store user content such as photo, video, and music files on a server so that they can be viewed/played on the TV over the Internet. It's also possible to view your media content saved on Storage Services such as Dropbox and SkyDrive from the TV. " To play content from a Storage Service, you must log into your Samsung Account and link it to the Storage Service account. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account menu and select Log In to sign into your Samsung Account. 22 Select Storage Service in the MULTIMEDIA panel. Storage Services linked to your Samsung Account appears. 33 Select a Storage Service. Folders and files found in the selected Storage Service are listed. 44 Select the media content you wish to play from the list. This plays the selected content. " Alternatively, move to the media content and press ∂ to play. 94 95 Buttons and Functions Available while Viewing Photos Press enter to access the following buttons. Pressing RETURN hides the playback buttons. ● Pause / Play Start or stop the slide show. The slide show feature displays all the photos contained in the selected folder, one photo at a time. ● Previous / Next View the previous/next photo in the queue. ● Settings Function Description Slideshow Settings Speed: Set the slide show speed. Effects: Apply transition effects to the slide show. Rotate Rotate the photo. Zoom Zoom in by up to a factor of 4. Picture Mode Change Picture Mode. Background Music Listen to background music while viewing photos. " The music file must be located on the same device as the photo files. " A mini player appears on the screen when background music is played. Use the mini player to pause the music or play a different music file. Sound Mode Change Sound Mode. " This option is supported only when background music is playing. Select Speakers Choose speakers for the background music. Send This function is the same as the "Copy" function of a computer. Use this function to send the current photo to another storage device. " For information on storage devices supported by this feature, refer to "Storage Device File Transfers". Information View detailed information about the current photo. 96 Buttons and Functions Available while Watching Video Press enter to access the following buttons. Pressing RETURN hides the playback buttons. ● Pause / Play Pause or play the video. When the video is paused, you can use the following functions. However, audio will not be heard while the video is paused. – Step: Press ∑ to scan the paused video one frame at a time. – Slow Motion: Select the … button to play the video at reduced speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2). ● Rewind / Fast Forward Rewind or Fast Forward the video. Repeatedly select the button to make the rewind/fast forward speed faster by up to 3 times. To restore normal playback speed, select ∂. ● Previous / Next Select € twice to play the previous video. Selecting € once reloads the current video from the beginning. To play the next video, select the ‚ button. 96 97 ● Settings Function Description Select Scene Thumbnails: Select a scene and play the video from the scene. " Thumbnails is not available when 1) the thumbnail of the video is not extracted yet, 2) the video contains audio only or 3) the video play time is shorter than 60 seconds. Chapter Titles: Select and play another video in the same folder. Time Bar: You can use the ¡, £ buttons to scan through the video in 10 seconds intervals or enter a specific time value to jump to that point in the video. Subtitles Control the subtitle of the video. Language: Turn the subtitles on or off. Sync: When the video and the subtitles are not synchronised, you can adjust the synchronisation. Reset Sync: Reset the subtitle synchronisation adjustment to 0. Size: Choose the font size for the subtitles. Encoding: If the subtitles are broken, you can change the encoding language. Repeat Set the repeat mode. Repeat One repeats the current programme only. Repeat All repeats all programmes contained in the folder. Rotate Rotate the video. Picture Size Change the picture size. However, the supported picture size is determined by the video content. Picture Mode Change the Picture Mode setting. Sound Mode Change the Sound Mode setting. Select Speakers Choose a speaker to play the audio. Audio Language Choose a desired audio language. This option works only when the video supports multi-track sound. Information View detailed information about the video. 98 Buttons and Functions Available while Playing Music Press enter to access the following buttons. Pressing RETURN hides the playback buttons. ● Pause / Play Pause or resume the music. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Rewind or fast forward the music. To restore normal playback speed, select ∂. ● Previous / Next Select € twice to play the previous music file. Selecting € once reloads the current music file from the beginning. To play the next music file, select the ‚ button. ● Repeat Set the repeat mode. Repeat One repeats the current music file only. Repeat All repeats all music files contained in the folder. ● Shuffle Play the music files in order or randomly. ● Select Speakers Choose a speaker to play the audio. ● Sound Mode Change the Sound Mode setting. 98 99 Functions on the Media Content List Screen The media content screen for the selected storage device includes the following functions. ● Filter Use this option to filter the list to see only the photo, video, or music files contained in the storage device. ● Sort by Sort the list by content type. " This function is not available when Filter is set to All. ● Options " This function is not available when Filter is set to All. Function Description Slide Show Start the slide show. " This option is available for photo files. This option is not available with Sort by set to Folder. Play Selected Play only the selected content. Send This function is the same as the "Copy" function of a computer. Use this function to send the media content to another storage device. " For information on storage devices supported by this feature, refer to "Storage Device File Transfers". Encoding If the media content's title is being displayed incorrectly, you can change the encoding method. " This function is available only for music files. Rename Playlist Rename your playlist. " This function is available only when the media content is music. Delete Playlist Delete a playlist that you have created. " This function is available only for music files. Add to Playlist Add a file to an existing playlist or create a new playlist. " This function is available only for music files. Index If the content list is too long to navigate efficiently, select a letter to quickly skip to that section of the list. " This is not available when Sort by is set to Folder. 100 TV Control using your Voice " Availability depends on the specific model and area. System > Voice Control You can access and select certain menu options and functions using voice commands. For more effective voice recognition, speak slowly and clearly in the language specified in the System > Voice Control > Language option. " Voice Control is classified into two: interactive voice control that enables conversational instructions, and imperative voice control where only pre-defined instructions are used. Smart Hub setup, and time settings, as well as the user's agreement on the use terms. Trying the interactive voice control without completing any of these requirements will display a notification pop-up. Follow the onscreen instructions and complete the necessary settings. The imperative voice control is available regardless of the interactive voice control settings. Use only "pre-defined commands" in the imperative voice control mode. " Please read through the instructions before using Voice Control. For more information, refer to "Read Before Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition". " If you use the Voice Control function interactively at least once, the TV will change the on-screen menu name from Voice Control to Voice Interaction. Enabling Voice Control 11 Press the VOICE button on the Samsung Smart Control. The microphone icon appears on the screen when Voice Control is enabled. 22 Say a command. You can use Voice Control to operate the TV when you are watching the TV or other videos. " Say the command from 10cm to 15cm away from the microphone on the Samsung Smart Control. Voice commands may not be recognised properly if you speak too softly or loudly. The optimal volume for voice commands is between 75 dB and 80dB. Using the Voice Recognition Tutorial Support > Voice Recognition Tutorial This lets you familiarise yourself with the basics of using Voice Control. Run Voice Recognition Tutorial from the Support menu, or run Voice Control and say "Tutorial". 100 101 Learning Voice Control Basics ● Moving the focus Say "Focus left", "Focus right", "Focus up", or "Focus down" to move the focus. However, these commands can only be used in situations when the focus can be moved. ● Selecting an item Say "Select" to confirm the selection. ● All Voice Commands Say "Help" to display the complete list of voice commands, organised by category. ● Deactivating Voice Control Press VOICE button. This terminates Voice Control. " The TV recognises predefined voice commands only, and the voice commands may differ from the manual depending on the version. Changing Voice Control Language System > Voice Control > Language Navigate to System > Voice Control > Language, and select a preferred language from the list. Now you can use Voice Control in the specified language. " Interactive Voice Control is not available in some languages. If this is the case, choose a different language. 102 Using the Voice Interaction function Interactively " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Voice Control allows you to set up Schedule Recording/Schedule Viewing, access VODs, search and launch applications, and execute various other commands using voice commands and without having to remember specific commands or keywords. Saying "Turn off the TV in 30 minutes", for example, instructs the TV to turn off after 30 minutes (Sleep Timer). " If you use the Voice Control function interactively at least once, the TV will change the on-screen menu name from Voice Control to Voice Interaction. Activate Voice Interaction and say a command. See the examples below: ● When you don't know which channel a specific programme is on: “Watch **** (Title)”. / “Play **** (Title)”. / “Run **** (Title)” ● When you want to find a specific programme or content item: "*** (Title)" / "Find *** (Title)." ● When you want to reserve and record a programme: "Remind me to watch *** (Title)." / "Set up a timer to record *** (Title).” / "Record *** (Title)." ● When you want to know various daily information: "What's the weather in *** (place name)." / "What is the *** (company) stock price?" ● When you want programme recommendations: "Recommend something to me." / "Are there any popular drama (genre) out?" ● When you want to operate the TV: "Volume ** (level)" / "Channel ** (Number) / ** (channel name)" ● When you play an app for the camera, such as skype, or for fitness: "Camera" / "Fitness" / "Skype" ● When you log in or out of the Samsung Account: "Sign In *** (User name)" / "Sign Out *** (User name)" Enabling/Disabling TV Voice Enable/disable the TV's voice responses to your Voice Control commands. Navigate to System > Voice Control menu and select Use TV Voice. Enabling TV Voice in Selected Voice Gender Navigate to System > Voice Control > Voice Gender, and select a voice gender. Enjoy the TV voice in the selected voice gender. 102 103 TV Control using Motions " Availability depends on the specific model and area. System > Motion Control It’s possible to use motion commands to change channels, adjust the volume, and control the pointer while searching the web using Smart Hub. A TV camera (sold separately) needs to be connected in order to use Motion Control. [ The optional TV camera must be connected to the dedicated USB port at the back of the TV. No other USB port is available for this purpose. " Please note, that not all apps support Motion Control. " Please read through the instructions before using Motion Control. For more information, refer to "Read Before Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition". " Motion Control is not available while Voice Control is activated. " You can view supported TV camera model at http://www.samsung.com. Testing Ambient Illumination Using the TV Camera System > Motion Control > Motion Control Environment Test Run this test before using Motion Control to ensure proper functionality. 11 Initiate the Motion Control Environment Test, and select Start 1.5m to 3.5m away from the TV. If the light is reflected onto the TV's screen, or there are moving objects in the background, the motion may not be properly recognised by the TV. 22 Face the TV camera, and follow the onscreen instructions to raise your hand from a comfortable position with the index finger spreading upwards, and move it left or right slowly. A pointer appears on the screen when the TV recognises the action. If the recognition fails, change the hand position and try again. Checking Illumination (Motion Control Environment Check) Support > Self Diagnosis > Motion Control Environment Check Navigate to Support > Self Diagnosis menu and select Motion Control Environment Check. This measures the illumination level around the TV to check if it is suitable for voice and motion control use. 104 Activating Motion Control System > Motion Control > Motion Control To enable Motion Control, face the TV camera and raise your hand from a comfortable position with the index finger spreading upwards, and move it left or right slowly. When your hand is successfully recognised by the TV camera, Motion Control is activated and a pointer appears on the screen. " If Motion Control is activated, a pop-up window appears and guides you through basic use of Motion Control. " Moving your hand out of the range of the TV camera deactivates Motion Control. To reactivate Motion Control, simply raise your hand towards the TV camera within 3 seconds. " The recognition may be terminated if the index finger does not fully spread out or is moved too fast. Using Motion Control Tutorial Support > Motion Control Tutorial This lets you familiarise yourself with the basics of using Motion Control. From the Support menu, run Motion Control Tutorial. " If Motion Control is activated, a pop-up window appears and guides you through basic use of Motion Control. Learning Motion Control Basics The following basic motion control commands are available: ● Moving the pointer Moving your hand moves the pointer accordingly. 104 105 ● Selecting an item Fold and then spread your index finger as if clicking on a mouse. You can select a TV menu or run a function. Keeping your index finger folded is like holding down the remote control button. ● Returning to the previous menu Make a large counterclockwise circle with your hand to return to the previous menu. " A small circle may not be recognised by the TV. ● Moving to the Smart Hub panel Move your hand from left to right or from right to left as you would turn a book page. You can directly move from Smart Hub to another panel screen. (Example: SAMSUNG APPS panel→ On TV panel) 106 ● Displaying Smart Hub's context menu On the Smart Hub screen, fold your index finger for more than 1 second and spread it out. This displays the selected item's context menu. " The screen's option menu differs depending on the selected lists. Showing and Hiding Animated Motion Guide Navigate to System > Motion Control, and select Animated Motion Guide from the menu. Now you can display an animated guide when Motion Control is activated. Adjusting Pointer Speed Navigate to System > Motion Control > Pointer Speed, and select a pointer speed. 106 107 Motion Control Screen Layout Motion Control Layout on the TV Screen Activating Motion Control while watching the TV displays the following icons on the screen: " Icons appearing on the screen may vary depending on the model. Icon Description / Adjusts the volume. Mutes or unmutes the TV. / Changes the channel. Launches Smart Hub. You can split the TV screen and use variable functions such as watching the TV, surfing the web and watching the video and so on. " Availability depends on the model. Press this button to search for information through the search window in various services. The virtual remote control appears. Changes the source. Turns the TV off. 108 Motion Control Layout on the Smart Hub Screen Activating Motion Control while using Smart Hub displays the following icons on the screen: Icon Description / Adjusts the volume. However, this is only available for On TV. Mutes or unmutes the TV. However, this is only available for On TV. / Changes the channel. However, this is only available for On TV. Returns to the previous menu. Press this button to search for information through the search window in various services. The virtual remote control appears. Changes the source. Turns the TV off. 108 109 Displaying Hidden Icons When Using Smart Hub When using Motion Control with Smart Hub, the icons will disappear automatically after 2 seconds of inactivity. To display the hidden icons, move the pointer to one of the three edges shown below (marked in blue) and then hold it there for 1 second. The icons will reappear on the screen. Icon Description ① / / / / ② / / ③ / 110 Signing in with Face Recognition " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Users can register their faces using the TV camera, and sign in with their Samsung accounts through Face Recognition. One face may be registered per account. Depending on the ambient illumination level and/or shadows over the face, the TV may have difficulty recognising the user's face. " Please read through the instructions before using Face Recognition. For more information, refer to "Read Before Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition". To enable Face Recognition, first connect the optional TV camera to the TV. [ The optional TV camera must be connected to the dedicated USB port at the back of the TV. No other USB port is available for this purpose. Registering Your Face to Your Samsung Account Register your face to your Samsung Account to allow the TV to recognise you by your face. Create a new account if you do not already have one. " First, you must sign in with your Samsung Account. 11 Navigate to Edit profile (Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Edit profile) and select Register face in the account information screen. " To register your face using the Virtual Remote panel, press KEYPAD to select your active Samsung Account and then select Edit profile. " To register your face using the Games panel of Smart Hub, select the currently signed-in Samsung Account on the screen and then select Edit profile. 22 Read the information displayed in the pop-up window, select OK, and then enter the account password. 33 On the face registration screen, select Take picture and then align your face with the dotted red line displayed on the screen. The dotted line will turn green once your face is recognised. " Your entire face must be visible to the camera. Make sure the face is brightly lit. Shadows prevent the camera from recognising your face accurately. " Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. " Check the box to add password entry to the sign-in process using Facial Recognition for additional security. Select Try Again to try again. 44 On the Samsung Account information screen, select Save. This completes the face registration process. 110 111 Changing Login Method to Face Recognition To sign in with your Samsung Account using face recognition, navigate to Edit profile (Smart Hub > Samsung Account > Edit profile) and change the login method. " First, you must sign in with your Samsung Account. 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Edit profile. " To register your face using the Virtual Remote panel, press KEYPAD to select your active Samsung Account and then select Edit profile. " To register your face using the Games panel of Smart Hub, select the currently signed-in Samsung Account on the screen and then select Edit profile. 22 Enter the password in the password input box and then select Done. The edit profile screen appears. 33 Select Sign-in Method and change the login method to Face Recognition. 44 Select Done. Signing into Samsung Account with Your Face 11 Navigate to Smart Hub > Samsung Account and select Log In. " Press KEYPAD on Samsung Smart Control, and select Sign In to access the Sign In screen. " From the Games panel of Smart Hub, select Sign In. 22 Choose your Samsung Account. 33 Face towards the TV camera. If you have set the login method to face recognition, the TV will automatically match your face with your Samsung Account. If recognition fails, try again. " Password entry is required when logging into accounts that have been configured to require password entry during face registration. " The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Make sure the face is brightly lit. Shadows prevent the camera from recognising your face accurately. " Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. " Even if more than one registered face matches your face, the TV signs you in with the matching face's account. 112 Digital Broadcast Information at a Glance Broadcasting > Guide Try Now EPG The Guide provides an overview of each digital channel's programme lineup. You can check the programme schedules and set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. Press GUIDE to launch the guide. " The information in the Guide is for digital channels only. Analogue channels are not supported. Using the Guide Move to the programme schedule and then press and hold the Enter button. The following options are available: ● Changing the Channel List If you select Channel Filter, you can change the channels displayed in the channel lists. ● Navigating the Programme Schedule Press to the †, … button to navigate the programme schedule by 24 hours. You can only view the future programme schedule. It is available for moving the page using the <, > button. ● Moving to the Schedule Manager You can move to the Schedule Manager screen. ● Adding Favourites Click Edit Favourite Channels to add the selected programme to the Favourites. ● Viewing Detailed Information Programme Information View detailed information about the selected programme. The programme information may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. – Select a current programme on another channel and select View Details to Watch or Record the programme. – Select an upcoming programme and select View Details for Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. TV Viewing and Recording Features 112 113 Checking the Current Programme Info While watching TV, select INFO to view information about the current programme. " In order to view the programme info, you must first set the TV's clock. Set the Clock (System > Time > Clock). " The programme information may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. In addition, select right button to view information about the next programme, and press enter, to set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording for the upcoming programme. Change the Broadcast Signal Broadcasting > Aerial Try Now Choose your preferred method of receiving digital broadcasts. Digital Signal Info and Strength Support > Self Diagnosis > Signal Information Try Now Select Support > Self Diagnosis > Signal Information. Displays the digital channel's signal information and strength. " If your TV is attached to a separate, over-the-air antenna, you can use the signal strength information to adjust the antenna for increased signal strength and improved HD channel reception. " This is only available for digital channels. 114 Recording Programmes " Availability depends on the specific model and area. You can record current and upcoming programmes using a USB device instead of a video recorder. However, this is only available for digital channels. The icon appears next to programmes and channels for which a Schedule Recording has been set. " We recommend a USB hard disk drive with a minimum speed of 5,400rpm for TV recording. USB memory sticks are not supported. " Read all precautions before using recording. Creating a USB Recording Device > On TV > Recorded TV or > MULTIMEDIA > USB Drive In order to record programmes on a USB device connected to the TV, the device must first be formatted for the TV. Use the Format Device option to prepare the USB device. " Formatting a USB device erases all data contained on the device. Back up the data before proceeding. Samsung will not be held responsible for damaged or lost files. 11 Run the Smart Hub and then choose Recorded TV from the bottom of the On TV screen. 22 Select Format, and then select Format Device. This will bring up the Format Device screen and allow you to format the device for TV recordings. 33 Once formatting is complete, the USB device is tested to see if it has been properly formatted. You will be able to start using the device after the test is completed. If the device fails the test, it means that this device cannot be used to record TV. 114 115 Managing USB Recording Devices You can use the following to manage USB recording devices. 11 Run the Smart Hub and then choose Recorded TV from the bottom of the On TV screen or USB Drive from the bottom of the MULTIMEDIA screen. A list of connected devices appears. A list of connected devices appears. 22 Select a USB recording device from the list. The list of recordings contained on the device appears. 33 Select Options from the top of the screen and then Manage Devices. The Manage Devices screen appears. The following options are available from the Manage Devices screen: ● Format Device: Formats the USB device for TV recordings. ● Check Device: Check the malfunctions of USB device. If the USB have a problem, try to recover. ● Device Performance Test: Tests the performance of the USB device. This test tells you whether the USB device can be used for TV recordings. ● Default Recording Device: If there are multiple USB recording devices connected to the TV, use this option to specify the default device. 116 Recording Programmes You can record current and upcoming programmes. Instant Recording Press the REC button to begin recording the current programme right away. The Instant and Schedule Recording options from the Guide Select a current programme from the Guide and then select INFO. You can instantly start recording the programme. Alternatively, select a programme that will air in the future. The Instant and Schedule Recording options from the Programme Info Select INFO to display information about the current programme. In the information screen, select a programme that is currently airing to start recording it right away. Alternatively, press ¡, £ button and select a programme that will air in the future to record it. The Schedule Recording option on a Specified Date and Time 11 Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select Schedule from the Schedule Manager to bring up a pop-up menu. Select Schedule Recording. 33 Specify the Aerial, Channel, Repeat, Start Time, and End Time options for the programme you want to record, and then select OK to finish. 116 117 Buttons and Functions Available While Recording a Programme Press enter while recording a programme. The following buttons will appear as well as the recording progress bar. ● Information This displays detailed information about the programme being recorded. " The programme information may differ depending on the broadcasting signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. ● Recording Time You can select the recording time. ● Stop Recording / Go to Live TV You can stop recording. / You can watch the live TV while watching a recorded programme. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Pressing these buttons decreases or increases playback by up to max 5 steps. To restore normal playback speed, select Play. ● Pause / Play Pause/resume video. ● Channel List You can view the channel list. ● Tools You can launch the Tools menu. The Tools menu provides functions that you can use while watching a recorded programme. 118 Managing the Schedule Recording List Broadcasting > Schedule Manager You can change the settings of scheduled recording sessions or cancel scheduled sessions altogether. Deleting Schedule Recording Sessions You can delete scheduled recording sessions. 11 Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select a session from the Schedule Manager. A pop-up window appears. 33 Select Delete. This cancels the selected recording session. Editing Schedule Recording Sessions You can change the settings of scheduled recording sessions. 11 Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select a session from the Schedule Manager. A pop-up window appears. 33 Select Edit and change the settings of the selected session. 44 Once finished, select OK. This applies the changes you made to the selected recording session. 118 119 Viewing Recorded Programmes " Availability depends on the specific model and area. > On TV > Recorded TV or > MULTIMEDIA > USB Drive Recorded broadcasts can be viewed using the Recorded TV option at the bottom of the On TV screen or the USB Drive option at the bottom of the MULTIMEDIA screen. 11 Run the Smart Hub and then choose Recorded TV from the bottom of the On TV screen or USB Drive from the bottom of the MULTIMEDIA screen. 22 Select a USB recording device. A list of recordings appears. 33 Select a recording file from the list or select ∂ to play the selected file. Available Buttons and Features while Playing Recordings Press enter. Playback controls will appear. To hide the controls, press Return. " Buttons that appear are different depending on the file being played. ● Zoom You can pause the current file (recorded programme) and zoom in on one of 9 different sections of the screen. " You can only use this function for programmes recorded in Football Mode. ● Stop Stop the playing files(recorded programme) and then, move the storage files(recorded programme). ● Pause / Play Pause the file (recorded broadcast) or resume if already paused. When the video is paused, you can use the following functions. However, audio will not be heard while the video is paused. – Step: Press ∑ to scan the paused video one frame at a time. – Slow Motion: The … button plays the video back at 1/4 the normal speed. 120 ● Rewind / Fast Forward Rewind or Fast Forward the recording file (recorded programme). Repeatedly select the button to make the rewind/fast forward speed faster by up to max 5 steps. To restore normal playback speed, press the ∂ button. ● Previous / Next To play the previous file (recorded programme), press € twice. Selecting € once reloads the current video from the beginning. To play the next file (recorded programme), press ‚. " This function is not available when the Programme is recorded in Football Mode. ● Highlights Player Select Highlights Player to view highlights from the current recording. " This feature is only available for programmes that were recorded in Football Mode and along with highlight data have been saved. ● Live TV This function enables the PIP feature so that you can watch a live programme through PIP. " Channels cannot be changed. " You can only use this function for programmes recorded in Football Mode. 120 121 ● Tools Function Description Search Search Scene: This will take you to a scene in the video. Search Scene cannot be used if 1) the extraction of the thumbnails from the file (Recorded broadcast) being played back is not finished, 2) playing back a file with audio only (recorded broadcast), or 3) the duration of the recorded file (recorded broadcast) is less than 60 seconds. Search Titles: Select and play a different file located in the same folder. Search Time Bar: Press ¡, £ button to scan through the file in 1-minute increments or enter a specific time value to jump to that point in the video. Subtitle Settings Subtitle: Turn the subtitles On or Off. Subtitle Language: Used to change the language. Repeat Mode This changes the repeat mode. Choose Repeat One to repeat playing the current file and Repeat All to repeat playing all files contained in the same folder. Picture Size Used to change the size of the screen. The supported picture sizes vary depending on the video. Picture Mode Change the Picture Mode setting. Sound Mode Used to change the Sound Mode. Select Speakers Choose a speaker to play the audio. Audio Language Choose a desired audio language. This option works only when the video supports multi-track sound. Information Displays detailed information about the current file. 122 Managing Recorded Files " Availability depends on the specific model and area. > On TV > Recorded TV or > MULTIMEDIA > USB Drive Select Recorded TV at the bottom of the On TV screen or USB Drive at the bottom of the MULTIMEDIA screen to lock/unlock, rename, delete, and generally manage the recording files. 11 Run the Smart Hub and then choose Recorded TV from the On TV screen or USB Drive from the bottom of the MULTIMEDIA screen. 22 Select a USB recording device. A list of recordings appears. Saved File List Features ● Sorting the Saved File List Sorting with Sort by: Select Sort by at the top of the screen and then select a viewing mode. The list is sorted based on the selected viewing mode. Sorting with Filter: Select Filter at the top of the screen and then select a filter. The list is refreshed to only show files that match the selected filter. ● Options Function Description Play Selected Select files from the file list and then select Play. You can create a playlist. Lock To prevent to delete the files (recorded program), you can lock the files (recorded program). This locks all the selected files. Unlock Use this option to unlock any locked files. Select the files and then select Unlock. This unlocks all selected files. Delete Deletes recording files. Select the files and then select Delete. This deletes all selected files. Rename Renames the file. Enter the new name using the keypad and then select Done to finish. The new name can be up to 29 characters long. Index When navigating a large number of media items, select a character. Media items starting with that character appear. Manage Devices Used to manage USB recording devices connected to the TV. 122 123 Setting Up a Schedule Viewing Configure the TV to show a specific channel or programme at a specific time and date. The icon appears next to programmes that have been configured for a Schedule Viewing. " To set up a Schedule Viewing, you must first set the TV's clock. Go to Clock (System > Time > Clock). Setting Up Schedule Viewing Digital Channel Schedule Viewing You can set up Schedule Viewing for programmes on digital channels on the following screens: ● The Guide Screen Select an upcoming programme from the Guide to set up a Schedule Viewing for it. ● The Programme Info Screen Select INFO to display information about the current programme. From the programme information screen, select right button to view information about the next programme, and press enter, to set up a Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording for the upcoming programme. Analogue Channel Schedule Viewing Broadcasting > Schedule Manager Try Now The Schedule Viewing function for programmes on analogue channels can be set up by specifying the time and date. 11 Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select Schedule from the Schedule Manager to bring up a pop-up menu. Select Schedule Viewing. 33 Specify the Aerial, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time options for the programme you want to watch and then select OK to finish. 124 Managing the Schedule Viewing List Broadcasting > Schedule Manager You can change the settings of Schedule Viewing sessions or cancel scheduled sessions altogether. Deleting Schedule Viewing Sessions You can delete Schedule Viewing sessions. 11 Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select a session from the Schedule Manager. A pop-up window appears. 33 Select Delete. This cancels the selected viewing session. Editing Schedule Viewing Sessions 11 You can change the settings of Schedule Viewing sessions. Select Broadcasting > Schedule Manager. 22 Select a session from the Schedule Manager. A pop-up window appears. 33 Select Edit and change the settings of the selected session. 44 Once finished, select OK. This applies the changes you made to the selected viewing session. 124 125 Using Timeshift " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Timeshift lets you pause and rewind live TV as you would a DVD. Timeshift is only available for digital channels and activating Timeshift disables the Broadcasting option. Timeshift requirements: – A USB recording device must be connected to the TV in order to use Timeshift. – We recommend a USB hard disk drive with a minimum speed of 5,400rpm for use with the TV's Timeshift feature. USB memory sticks are not supported. – Read all precautions before using the Timeshift function. Press ∂ while watching TV to activate the Timeshift function. This activates Timeshift and displays a progress bar and the following buttons at the top of the screen: ● Information Displays detailed information about the current programme. " The programme information may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programmes. " This button is only available while watching a live programme. ● Go to Live TV / Stop Timeshift Watches the live TV or Exits the Timeshift. / You can watch the current programme by selecting this button while watching a recorded programme. ● Pause Pauses the screen. The following features are available while paused. However, audio is not supported while the video is paused. – Step: ∑ Scans the paused video one frame at a time. – Slow Playback: Select † / … to play the video back at 1/4 the normal speed. ● Rewind / Fast Forward Slows down or speeds up playback by a factor of up to 5. To restore the normal playback speed, press ∂. " Fast Forward cannot be used while watching the Current Programme. ● Channel List Displays the channel list. ● Tools You can launch the Tools menu. Open the Tools menu to access the context menus available in Timeshift mode. 126 Using the Channel List Broadcasting > Channel List Try Now Launch the Channel List while watching TV to change channels or to see what's on other channels. Select a channel from the Channel List to jump to it right away. To quickly scroll through the list, use the channel up/down buttons. This moves the focus one page at a time. The Channel List screen contains the following icons: – : An analogue channel – : A favourites channel – : A locked channel ● Using Options Press ¡ button to select Options. The following options are available: Function Description Aerial Choose between Terrestrial, Cable, and Satellite. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Category If you select a Category, its channels appear in the list among the TV's channels. Sorting Sort the list by Channel Number or by Name (Digital channels only). Genre Sort the list to include channels of the selected genre only. However, Genre can only be used channels contain the genre information. Check the network and make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. Your TV needs to be connected to the Internet in order to receive the channel's genre information. Edit Favourites Designate favourites channels. ● Changing to Favourites Press £ button to select Favourites 1 through Favourites 5. This shows the selected list's channels. However, a Favourites list can only be selected if it contains at least one favourites channel. If you haven't created a Favourites list yet, you need to create one first. 126 127 Registering, Removing, and Editing Channels Broadcasting > Edit Channel Try Now Channel - Edit Remove channels from the index of channel restore removed channels, and rename analogue channels. The Edit Channel screen icons indicate the following: ● : An analogue channel ● : A favourites channel ● : A locked channel Registering and Removing Channels Broadcasting > Edit Channel Removing Registered Channels Remove registered channels from the index. 11 Select the channels you want to remove. Unselect channels by choosing them again. To select all the channels, select Options from the bottom of the screen and then select Select All from the list. 22 Once you have made your selection, select Delete from the bottom of the screen to remove the selected channels. Editing Registered Channels Broadcasting > Edit Channel Select Options at the bottom of the screen to access the following options. However, the available options may vary depending on the broadcast signal. ● Select All Selects all channels displayed in the Edit Channel screen. ● Sorting (Digital channels only) Change the list ordered by Channel Name or Number. ● Aerial Choose between Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. ● Category If you select a Category, its channels appear in the list among the TV's channels. ● Edit Favourites Organise favourites lists to find favourite channels and switch between channels more easily. 128 ● Rename channel Rename Analogue Channels. The new name can be up to 5 characters long. ● Channel Info Check the information of the channel. ● Information View detailed information about the current programme. Enabling/Disabling Password Protection on Channels Broadcasting > Edit Channel You can lock channels you don't want your children to view. " To enable password protection, set Channel Lock to On. First, navigate to Broadcasting > Channel Lock and set it to On. Try Now Locking/ Unlocking Channels Select channels from the Edit Channel screen and then select Lock or Unlock at the bottom of the screen. When the password entry window appears, enter the password. This locks or unlocks the selected channels. Edit Channel Number " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Broadcasting > Edit Channel Number Use this to change channel number. When channel number is changed, channel information is not updated automatically. 128 129 Creating a Personal Favourites List Broadcasting > Edit Favourites Try Now You can designate frequently watched channels as favourites. Favourites channels are highlighted in the Edit Channel and Channel List screens with the symbol. You can create up to 5 favourites channel lists. Registering a Channel as Favourites Broadcasting > Edit Favourites Registering the Current Channel as a Favourites Add the current channel to a Favourites list. 11 Select TOOLS while watching TV to display a list of options. Select Edit Favourites from the list. 22 From the pop-up window, select all the Favourites lists you want to add the current channel to and then select OK. 33 This adds the current channel to the selected Favourites list(s). Select OK. Registering Multiple Channels as Favourites It's possible to register multiple channels as favourites at the same time. 11 Select Broadcasting > Edit Favourites. 22 Select Category from the bottom of the screen to change the channel list to the one containing that channels you want to register. 33 Select the channels from the list in the middle of the screen. 44 Select Change Fav. and then change the Favourites 1 to the Favourites 5 you want to use. 55 Select Add. 130 Viewing Favourites List Channels Only It's possible to flip through Favourites list channels using only the channel up/down buttons. " A Favourites list can only be selected if it contains at least one favourites channel. 11 Run Channel List. (Broadcasting > Channel List). 22 Press £ button to select Favourites 1 through Favourites 5. 33 Choose a channel from the selected Favourites list. This changes the channels and Channel List changes to the selected Favourites channel. Editing a Favourites List Broadcasting > Edit Favourites You can rename and edit Favourites lists. Edit Favourites Features Select Options from the bottom of the Edit Favourites screen to access the following options: ● Copy to Favourites Copy channels from one favourites channels list to another. " This can only be used when the focus has selected a channel registered to a Favourites list. ● Rename Favourites Rename an existing favourites channels list. " This can only be used when the focus has selected a channel registered to a Favourites list. ● Sorting Change the list ordered by Channel Name or Number. This function is not available on analogue channel. ● Aerial Choose between Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. ● Edit Channel You can manage the channels saved on the TV. ● Information View detailed information about the current programme. 130 131 Removing Registered Channels from a Favourites List Remove channels from a favourites channels list. 11 Select Change Fav. at the bottom of the screen and then change the Favourites list to the Favourites list you want to use. 22 Select the channels you want to remove from the selected Favourites list. 33 Select Delete. Rearranging a Favourites List Rearrange the order of the channels in a Favourites Channels List. 11 Select Change Fav. at the bottom of the screen and then change the Favourites list to the Favourites list you want to use. 22 From the selected Favourites list, select the channels you want to rearrange. 33 Select Change order from the bottom of the screen and then rearrange the selected channels. Press enter to finish. 132 Renaming a Favourites List Rename an existing favourites channels list. 11 Select Change Fav. at the bottom of the screen and then change the Favourites list to the Favourites list you want to use. 22 Select Options. A list appears. 33 Select Rename Favourites from the list. A pop-up window appears. Rename the list in the popup window. The new name can be up to 20 characters long. Copying a Favourites List to a Different Favourites List Copy channels from one favourites channels list to another. 11 Select Change Fav. and then change the Favourites list on the side of the screen to the Favourites list you want to use. 22 From the Favourites list displayed on the side of the screen, select all the channels you want to copy. 33 Select Options. A list appears. 44 Select Copy to Favourites from the list. A pop-up window appears. 55 From the pop-up window that appears on the screen, select the Favourites lists you want to copy the selected channels to. This copies the selected channels to the selected Favourites lists. " Copy to Favourites is only available when there are channels in the Favourites list. 132 133 Adding Realism to Sports " Availability depends on the specific model and area. System > Football Mode Try Now Football Mode enables optimal picture and sound settings for sports events, making them appear and sound as if you were actually there. In addition, it will be possible to use video recording and time shift functions at the same time while watching a sports event and manually or automatically designated highlight scenes if a recording device is connected to the TV when you are using Football Mode. " For more information about recording a programme and using a recording device, refer to the "Recording Programmes" section. " For more information about the "Time Shift" feature, refer to the "Using Timeshift" section. " Whether Football Mode or Soccer Mode is displayed depends on the area. " Using the colour buttons may be restricted in Soccer Mode while using the Data Service. Enabling Football Mode System > Football Mode > Football Mode Select System > Football Mode and then set Football Mode to On. Picture and sound settings of the TV are automatically optimised for sports events. " Enabling Football Mode changes the Picture Mode to Stadium and the Sound Mode to Stadium, and disables some Picture and Sound menus. " Press ¥ while watching TV to activate/deactivate Football Mode. If ¥ is not available, then use TOOLS to activate/deactivate Football Mode. Extracting Highlights Automatically System > Football Mode > Auto Highlights Select System > Football Mode and set the Auto Highlights to On. You can set the TV to automatically save highlights without user intervention. However, Auto Highlights is not available with these TV operations: ● Recording two channels simultaneously ● When Audio Description is set to On ● Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button ● When 3D mode is active " The Auto Highlights performance depends on the signal characteristics. " It is advisable to use Auto Highlights only while watching a soccer game. Using this for other sporting events may display irrelevant picture frames. 134 Functions Available in Football Mode Press enter. The following buttons will appear. ● Zoom You can pause the current video and zoom in on one of 9 different sections of the screen. Pan the zoomed-in image using <, >, ¡, £ buttons. " You cannot use this function when watching a 3D channel or when PIP or MULTIMEDIA is active. " When the Data Service is running, the Zoom is not available. ● Manual Highlight Pressing this button saves 10 seconds of video leading up to that point and 10 seconds of video that follows as a highlight. " This function can also be accessed using the b button. " Available only while recording is in progress. " Also possible to configure the TV to automatically save highlights without user intervention. Select System > Football Mode and then set Auto Highlights to On. ● Stop Recording / Go to Live TV Use this button while watching a live programme to stop recording it. Use while watching a recorded programme to watch a live programme. " Available only when recording is in progress. ● Record Start recording the sports event being watched. " Available only with the recording function supported. ● Rewind Rewind the current video. Select repeatedly to increase the rewind speed by up to max 5 steps. " Available only when recording is in progress. 134 135 ● Pause / Play Pause/resume video. " Available only when recording is in progress. ● Fast Forward Fast forward the current video. Select repeatedly to increase the fast forward speed by up to max 5 steps. " Available only when recording is in progress. ● Highlights Player Use Highlights Player to view manually or automatically saved highlight segments of the recording. However, Highlights Player is not available with these TV operations: ● Recording two channels simultaneously ● When Audio Description is set to On ● Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button ● When 3D mode is active " Available only when recording is in progress. ● Watch Live TV at the same time Select while viewing a recorded programme to watch live TV on a PIP window. Press once more to exit PIP mode. However, Watch Live TV at the same time is not available with these TV operations: ● Recording two channels simultaneously ● When Audio Description is set to On ● Switching the input signal using the SOURCE button ● When 3D mode is active " Available only when recording is in progress. " Available only while watching a recorded programme. ● Information Displays detailed information about the current programme. " Available only when recording is in progress. ● Go to Social TV / SOCIAL TV Used to launch an SNS app. Viewing a Sports Event Recorded in Football Mode View recorded sports events using the Recorded TV option in the On TV screen or the USB Drive option in the MULTIMEDIA screen. 136 TV-Viewing Support Features Showing Subtitles System > Accessibility > Subtitle Try Now Show subtitles. Subtitles will be displayed when watching a broadcast that supports subtitles. Switches subtitles On or Off. " Press and hold the ¢ button on the Samsung Smart Control to turn on or off Subtitle. " DVD subtitles are only available if the DVD player is connected to an external input connector. ● Subtitle Mode Set the subtitle mode. ● Subtitle Language Set the subtitle language. " The TV cannot control or modify DVD or Blu-ray subtitles. To control DVD or Blu-ray subtitles, use the subtitle feature of the DVD or Blu-ray player and the player's remote control. Subtitle Options System > Accessibility > Subtitle Select a subtitle mode. The list of modes may vary depending on the broadcast. ● Primary Subtitle Set the primary subtitle language. ● Secondary Subtitle Set the secondary subtitle language. 136 137 Changing Teletext Language Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Teletext Language " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Use this to set the teletext language. ● Primary Teletext Set the primary teletext language. ● Secondary Teletext Set the secondary teletext language. Digital Text This function is only available in UK. Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Digital Text " Availability depends on the specific model and area. If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled. " MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele education, teleconferencing, digital libraries and network games. 138 PIP Broadcast Viewing Picture > PIP Try Now Use the PIP (Picture-In-Picture) function to watch TV in a small window while also watching images from an external source such as a DVD player, a Blu-ray player, or a computer in the background. Select Picture > PIP to display the PIP settings window. This settings window contains the following options: ● PIP Activates/deactivates PIP. ● Aerial Select the PIP sub-picture broadcast signal. ● Channel Select the PIP sub-picture channel. ● Size Select the PIP sub-picture size. ● Position Select the PIP sub-picture position. ● Sound Select Select the audio source. 138 139 Scanning for Available Channels " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Broadcasting > Auto Tuning Try Now Channel - Auto Tuning Automatically scans and indexes all channels received through the TV's antenna input connector. " If there are saved channels, this feature deletes the existing list and then saves the newly scanned channels. If the TV is connected to a cable box or satellite receiver, you do not need to do this. 11 Select Broadcasting > Auto Tuning. 22 Select Start when prompted. This initiates the Auto Programme function. The process can take up to 30 minutes to complete. ● Auto Tuning Scans for channels automatically and stores them in the TV’s memory. ● Cable Search Option (when the aerial was set to Cable) " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable network search. ● Standby Auto Tuning " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Auto-tune channels while your TV is in standby mode. ● Wake-up Timer " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Schedule timer to turn the TV on and scan channels automatically. 140 Selecting the Broadcast Audio Options Broadcasting > Audio Options Try Now ● Audio Language (Digital channels only) Change the default value for audio languages. Primary Audio: Set the primary audio language. Secondary Audio: Set the secondary audio language. " The available language may differ depending on the broadcast. ● Audio Format (Digital channels only) Change a desired audio format. The supported audio format may vary depending on the broadcast programme. Audio Description System > Accessibility > Audio Description (Not available in all locations) (Digital channels only) This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. " Audio Description: Turn the audio description function on or off. " Volume: Adjust the audio description volume. Genre Selection Broadcasting > Genre Selection " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Turn the channel genre selection feature on or off when using the guide. Adult genre enabling Broadcasting > Adult genre enabling " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Enables or disables all adult services. When disables, adult services will not be available. 140 141 Using the Channel Settings Broadcasting > Channel Settings Settings - Channel Country (Area) Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Country (Area) Try Now Select your country so that the TV can correctly auto-tune the broadcasting channels. This depends on the country or region. When the PIN input screen appears,enter your 4 digit PIN number. ● Digital Channel Change the country for digital channels. ● Analogue Channel Change the country for analogue channels. Manual Tuning Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Manual Tuning Try Now Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV. If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the PIN input window appears. This function depends on the country and region. 142 When Aerial Source is set to Terrestrial or Cable ● Digital Channel Tuning Scans for a digital channel. 11 Select the New. " When selecting Aerial → Terrestrial: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth " When selecting Aerial → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol Rate 22 Select the Search. When scanning has finished, a channel is updated in the channel list. ● Analogue Channel Tuning Scans for an analogue channel. 11 Select the New. 22 Set the Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel and Search. 33 Select the Store. When scanning has finished, a channel is updated in the channel list. Channel mode ● P (programme mode) When tuning is complete, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P0 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. ● C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable channel mode) These two modes allow you to select a channel by entering the assigned number for each aerial broadcasting station or cable channel. Fine-Tuning the Screen Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Fine Tune Try Now " Available for analogue broadcasts only. Analogue pictures can become shaky and full of noise. If this happens, you can fine-tune the signal and/or reduce noise to clear up the picture. 11 Select Channel Settings > Fine Tune. An adjustment bar appears on the screen. 22 Make adjustments using the Samsung Smart Control until the picture clears up and then select Save or Close. Select Reset to reset the Fine-Tune operation. 142 143 Transfer Channel List Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Transfer Channel List Try Now Imports or exports the channel map. When the PIN input screen appears, enter the PIN. You should connect a USB storage device to use this function. ● Import from USB: Import channel list from USB. ● Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. This function is available when USB is connected. Delete CAM Operator Profile " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Delete CAM Operator Profile Select the CAM operator to delete. Satellite System " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Satellite System A set of satellite dish settings must be configured for each wanted satellite before performing a channel scan. Satellite System is available when Aerial is set to Satellite. When the PIN input screen appears, enter the PIN. ● Satellite Selection: You can choose the satellites for this TV. ● LNB Power: Enables or disables the power supply for the LNB. ● LNB Settings: Configures the outdoor equipment. Satellite: Selects the satellite for receiving digital broadcasts. Transponder: Selects a transponder from the list or adds a new transponder. DiSEqC Mode: Selects DiSEqC mode for the selected LNB. Lower LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a lower frequency. Upper LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a higher frequency. Tone 22 kHz: Selects the Tone 22 kHz depending on the LNB type. For a universal LNB it should be Auto. 144 ● Positioner Settings: Configures the aerial positioner. Settings - Positioner Positioner: Enables or disables the positioned control. Positioner Type: Sets the positioned type between DiSEqC 1.2 and USALS (Universal Satellite Automatic Location System). – My Longitude: Sets the longitude for my location. – My Latitude: Sets the latitude for my location. – Satellite Longitude Settings: Sets the longitude of user defined satellites. User Mode: Sets the position of satellite aerial according to each satellite. If you store the current position of satellite aerial according to a certain satellite, when the signal of that satellite is needed, the satellite aerial can be moved to pre-populated position. – Satellite: Selects the satellite to set the position for. – Transponder: Selects a transponder from the list for signal reception. – Moving Mode: Selects the movement mode between discrete and continuous movement. – Step Size: Adjusts the step size degrees for the aerial rotation. Step Size is available when Moving Mode is set to Step. – Go To Stored Position: Rotates the aerial to the stored satellite position. – Aerial Position: Adjusts and stores the aerial position for the selected satellite. – Store Current Position: Stores current position as the selected positioner limit. Installer Mode: Sets limits to the scope of movement of satellite aerial or reset the position. Generally, installation guide uses this function. – Limit Position: Selects the direction of the positioner Limit. – Aerial Position: Adjusts and stores the aerial position for the selected satellite. – Store Current Position: Stores the current position as the selected positioner Limit. – Go to zero: Moves the aerial to the reference position. – Reset positioner limit: Allows the aerial to rotate over the full arc. ● Reset all settings: All satellite settings will be reset to the initial values. 144 145 Common Interface " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Broadcasting > Common Interface ● CI Menu Enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI menu based on the menu PC Card. ● CAM video transcoding You can configure the setting to transcode the video codec from the CAM automatically. Turn it Off if you do not want to use it. " You must use a CAM that supports video codec transcoding. ● Application Info View information about the CAM inserted into the CI slot and about the “CI or CI+ CARD” inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM any time, with or without the TV turned on. 11 Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone. 22 Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow. 33 Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot. 44 Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. ● CICAM PIN Manager Manage CICAM (Common Interface Common Access Module) PIN. Save PIN or change stored PIN and then set other PIN options. 146 Changing the Picture Mode and Adjusting the Picture Quality Choosing the Right Picture Mode for the Viewing Environment Picture > Picture Mode Try Now The following picture modes utilise different contrast and brightness settings to provide the best viewing experience for the environment. " When connected to a PC via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Standard and Entertain modes can be chosen. ● Dynamic If the ambient lighting is too bright and makes the screen blurry, use this mode to make the picture clearer. ● Standard This is the default mode suitable for most environments. ● Natural This mode is useful for reducing eye strain. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. ● Movie Appropriate for darkened rooms, for watching movies, and when experiencing eye fatigue. Darkens the screen and reduces glare. ● Entertain Sharpens images for a more dynamic viewing experience. " This mode is only available when connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable. Picture and Sound Settings 146 147 Adjusting the Picture Quality for Each Picture Mode Picture > Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint (G/R) Select one of the settings to display its slide bar. Change the adjustment value using ¡, £. Change the item using <, >. Adjusted values are applied to the current source and picture mode. " The Colour and Tint (G/R) settings cannot be adjusted when the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI to DVI cable. Choose a Picture Mode and then adjust the settings. ● Backlight Try Now Adjusts the brightness of individual pixels. Decreasing the brightness reduces power consumption. ● Contrast Try Now Adjusts the screen contrast. ● Brightness Try Now Adjusts the overall brightness. ● Sharpness Try Now Sharpens or dulls the edges of objects. ● Colour Try Now Adjusts the overall colour saturation. ● Tint (G/R) Try Now Adjusts the ratio of green to red. Increase the green value to saturate the greens and the red value to saturate the reds. " Adjusted values are saved by the TV for the current source and picture mode, and remain in effect each time the source and picture mode are selected. Consequently, the TV can have different picture settings for each external source. Applying the Current Picture Settings to Other Input Sources Picture > Apply Picture Mode Try Now You can apply the picture quality setting that you configured for the TV to all external devices connected to the TV or to the current source only. To apply the setting to all external devices connected to the TV, select All Sources. To apply the setting to the current input only, select Current Source. 148 Fine-Tuning Each Picture Mode (Advanced Settings) Picture > Advanced Settings Try Now Settings - Advanced Select Picture > Advanced Settings to fine-tune how images are displayed on the TV screen for each Picture Mode. " Advanced Settings is only available when the Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie. " When the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI-DVI cable, only White Balance and Gamma can be adjusted. Choose a Picture Mode and then adjust the settings. ● Dynamic Contrast Try Now Automatically adjusts the screen contrast. Use this option to achieve the optimal contrast setting. ● Black Tone Try Now Adjusts the black colour depth. ● Flesh Tone Try Now Darkens or lightens skin tones. ● RGB Only Mode Try Now Adjusts the red, green, and blue levels individually. ● Colour Space Try Now Adjusts the range of colours that can be displayed on screen. Auto automatically adjusts the colour space depending on the input signal. Native applies a range that is wider than the input signal. Custom allows you to adjust the colour space manually. " The availability of Custom depends on the specific model and area. 148 149 ● White Balance Try Now Adjusts the colour temperature of the picture to make white objects look white and the overall picture appear natural. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 2 Point: Adjust each of the 3 colour's luminosity with the offset menu and the brightness with the gain menu. To restore the default values, select Reset. 10 Point: Adjust the white balance by adjusting the brightness of each of the 10 sections of red, green, and blue colours of the input signal. To choose a section, select a desired section in Level field. " You can use the 10 Point function only when the Picture Mode is set to Movie. Some external devices may not support this. Adjust each colour's luminosity with the offset menu and the brightness with the gain menu. To restore the default values, select Reset. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness. ● Gamma Try Now Adjusts the primary colour intensity. ● Motion Lighting Try Now Adjusts the brightness in response to on-screen movements to reduce power consumption. " This feature is only available when the Picture Mode is set to Standard and is not available in 3D mode. " Adjusting the Contrast, Brightness, and other picture quality settings deactivates the feature. 150 Adjusting the Picture for Easier Viewing (Picture Options) Picture > Picture Options Try Now Select Picture > Picture Options to make additional adjustments for an easier viewing experience. " When the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI-DVI cable, only Colour Tone can be adjusted. Choose a Picture Mode and then adjust the settings. ● Colour Tone Try Now Adjusts the colour tone. The setting is applied on an individual Picture Mode basis. When a Picture Mode is changed, the corresponding setting will be applied automatically. " If the Picture Mode is set to Dynamic, you will only be able to choose Cool or Standard. ● Digital Clean View Try Now Reduces static and ghosting caused by a weak signal. Selecting Auto Visualisation displays the signal strength at the bottom the screen. Green indicates the best possible signal. " Available for analogue channels only. ● MPEG Noise Filter Try Now Reduces MPEG noise and improves video quality. ● HDMI Black Level Try Now Some external devices connected to the TV via an HDMI cable can have issues, such as low black level, low contrast, and dull colours. Use HDMI Black Level to adjust the black level to compensate. " This is only available when using an external device connected to the TV via an HDMI connector. 150 151 ● Film Mode Try Now Optimises the picture quality for movies. Select this mode for watching movies. " This feature is only available when watching TV or when the input signal is AV, Component (480i, 1080i), or HDMI (1080i). ● Motion Plus Try Now " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Removes blurring and judder from scenes with rapid movement. If you select Custom, you can configure Blur Reduction and Judder Reduction manually and set LED Clear Motion on for a sharper LED image. " The Info screen on your TV displays the resolution and frequency of the incoming signal (60Hz), but not the frequency the TV is generating for the image it is displaying by using Motion Plus function. " If noise occurs on the screen, please set up the Motion Plus to Off. If Motion Plus is Custom, you can set up the Blur Reduction, Judder Reduction, LED Clear Motion and Reset manually. " If LED Clear Motion is On at 60Hz video signal, the screen may flicker. Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources. Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films. LED Clear Motion: Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. Reset: Reset the custom settings to the factory defaults. " If you have Motion Plus on, and then bring up the INFO screen, the INFO screen displays the resolution and frequency of the incoming video signal (60Hz). This frequency is not the same as the frequency of the picture the TV is displaying when Motion Plus is on. ● LED Clear Motion " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. " If LED Clear Motion is On at 60Hz video signal, the screen may flicker. ● Cinema Black In Movie mode, this feature dims the top and bottom areas of the video image to provide a more immersive viewing experience. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 152 Viewing in 3D " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Picture > 3D The 3D option lets you view 3D media content and broadcasts. You will need to wear Samsung 3D Active Glasses to play 3D content. IR-type Samsung 3D Active Glasses and third-party 3D glasses are not supported. " Carefully read the health and safety information concerning 3D viewing before viewing 3D content. Refer to the "3D Precautions" section for more information. " Whether 3D video is displayed in true HD is usually determined by the quality of the content. Starting 3D 11 Play 3D content or turn on a channel that's showing a 3D broadcast. 22 Put the Samsung 3D glasses on and then select 3D. 3D viewing is enabled. The ideal viewing distance is three times the height of the screen or more. 3D images may not appear if you do not adhere to the recommended viewing angle or distance. The 3D feature may not work properly if there is another 3D product or an electronic device running nearby. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. The left and right 3D images may initially overlap when the TV is turned on. It takes a moment for the display to optimise for the overlapping to go away. There are several restrictions when using 3D TV: ● Launching Smart Hub automatically disables 3D mode. ● PIP cannot be used. ● Certain Picture options are disabled. 152 153 Changing the 3D Mode Picture > 3D > 3D Mode 11 Launch 3D and then select 3D Mode under Picture > 3D. 22 Choose from the 3D modes that appear on the screen. Supported 3D Mode may vary depending on the 3D content. " 3D Mode is automatically configured for most 3D content. The following 3D Mode is available. However, mode availability may vary depending on the 3D content's format. " The supported resolutions vary for each mode. Refer to the "Supported Resolutions for each 3D Mode" section for more information. ● (Off) Deactivates 3D viewing. ● (Normal) Converts normal images to 3D images. " Some formats do not support this mode. ● (L/R) Splits a single image into left and right overlapping images to create the 3D effect. ● (T/B) Splits a single image into top and bottom overlapping images to create the 3D effect. 154 Adjusting the 3D Effect Picture > 3D Configure the viewpoint, depth, and other 3D settings for a custom viewing experience. ● Adjusting the 3D perspective Select Picture > 3D > 3D Perspective. Use the adjustment bar shown on the screen to adjust the perspective. ● Adjusting the 3D Depth Select Picture > 3D > Depth. Use the adjustment bar shown on the screen to adjust the depth. " This option cannot be used if 3D mode is set to (L/R) or (T/B). ● Reversing the Left/Right 3D Images Select Picture > 3D > L/R Change. This option is used to reverse the left and right images. ● Displaying 3D Content in 2D Select Picture > 3D > 3D → 2D. This option is used to enable 2D viewing of 3D content. " This function is not available if 3D mode is set to (Normal) or (Off). 154 155 Picture Support Functions PIP Broadcast Viewing Picture > PIP Use the PIP ("Picture-In-Picture") function to watch TV in a small window while also watching content from a DVD player, Blu-ray player, computer, or a different external device in the background. Select Picture > PIP to display the PIP settings window. This settings window contains the following options: ● PIP Activates/deactivates PIP. ● Aerial Select the PIP sub-picture broadcast signal. ● Channel Select the PIP sub-picture channel. ● Size Select the PIP sub-picture size. ● Position Select the PIP sub-picture position. ● Sound Select Select the audio source. 156 Changing the Picture Size and Position Choosing the Right Screen Size Picture > Picture Size > Picture Size Try Now Most TV programmes and videos are displayed in full screen, but some programmes and videos are larger or smaller. Change the screen size for such programmes and videos so that the picture fits the screen better. " Supported screen sizes vary depending on the input signal. Refer to the "Picture Sizes and Input Signals" section for more information about supported screen sizes. ● Auto Wide Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratios. ● 16:9 Picture Size - 16:9 Set the picture to the 16:9 wide-screen format. ● Wide Zoom Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3. A magnified picture can be moved up and down. ● Zoom Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size. A magnified picture can be moved up and down. " Zoom is not available when Picture Size set to Wide Zoom. ● 4:3 Picture Size - 4:3 Sets the picture to basic 4:3 mode. [ Do not leave the TV in 4:3 mode for an extended period. The dark borders displayed on the left and right / top and bottom of the screen may cause image retention. This phenomenon can appear on LED and PDP TVs. (Screen burn - this phenomenon can appear on PDP TVs.) This is not covered by the warranty. ● Screen Fit Displays the full image without any cutoff. ● Smart View 1 Reduces a 16:9 picture by 50%. ● Smart View 2 Reduces a 16:9 picture by 25%. 156 157 Adjusting the Screen Position Picture > Picture Size > Zoom/Position or Position Adjusts the screen position. This option is only available with Picture Size set to Wide Zoom, Zoom, or Screen Fit. When the TV is tuned to a digital channel, the screen position cannot be adjusted if the Picture Size is set to Screen Fit. 11 To adjust the screen's position, select Picture > Picture Size > Zoom/Position or Position. A popup window appears. 22 Select Zoom or Position again from the pop-up window. 33 Adjust the screen. Once done, select Zoom or Position and then Close. Select Reset to reset the screen position. Adjusting the 4:3 Screen Size Picture > Picture Size > 4:3 Screen Size Try Now Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country requires different picture size. " Not available in Component or HDMI mode. Listening to Audio Only with the Screen Turned Off (Picture Off) Picture > Picture Off Try Now Turns off the screen and plays audio through the speakers only. To turn the screen back on, press any button other than the TV and VOLUME buttons. Resetting the Picture Mode Settings Picture > Reset Picture Try Now Use this option to reset the current Picture Mode to its factory settings. This does not affect the settings of other Picture Modes. 158 Changing the Sound Mode and Using Sound Effects Choosing the Right Sound Mode for the Environment Sound > Sound Mode Try Now Sound modes apply preset adjustments to the sound output, optimised for different viewing and listening circumstances. " The sound modes cannot be used when you are listening to audio through external speakers. ● Standard This is the normal sound mode. ● Music This mode emphasises normal music instead of voice. ● Movie This mode is calibrated to provide the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice This mode emphasises voice. ● Amplify This mode increases the overall intensity of high-frequency sounds for a better listening experience. It is designed for hearing-impaired listeners. ● Stadium Setting Football Mode (System > Football Mode) to On automatically configures Sound Mode to Stadium for a more realistic viewing experience. " Stadium cannot be selected by the user. 158 159 Using Sound Effects Sound > Sound Effect Try Now Use sound effects to alter how the TV projects sound. Restrictions: ● Sound effects can only be used with the Sound Mode set to Standard. ● Sound effects cannot be used when you are listening to audio through external speakers. Choose a Sound Effect and then adjust the settings. ● DTS TruSurround HD Try Now Produces sound that will make you feel like you are sitting in a movie theatre or concert hall. ● DTS TruDialog Try Now Increases voice intensity to make dialog clearer. ● Equaliser Try Now Lets you adjust the speaker balance and make bandwidth adjustments. Select Reset to reset the settings. 160 Sound Support Functions Selecting Speakers Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Sound Output Try Now This lets you choose which speakers the TV uses for audio output. To listen to the audio through the speakers of a connected receiver or home theatre only, select Receiver or Audio Out. To listen to audio through the TV's speakers and the speakers of a connected AV receiver or home theatre simultaneously, select TV Speaker. If this causes an echo effect, choose any speaker option other than TV Speaker to mute the TV speakers, or turn off the receiver or home theatre. " Using external speakers alone disables the volume button and the mute function. In addition, certain Sound options will also be disabled. Designating the TV's Installation Type Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Speaker > TV Installation Type Specify the TV's installation type. Choose between Wall Mount and Stand to optimise the TV's sound automatically. Listening to TV Sound through Samsung Bluetooth or Wi-Fi Audio Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Speaker > SoundShare Settings Settings - SoundShare Connect the TV to a Samsung audio device for a richer, clearer sound. " This option is only available for Samsung audio devices that support SoundShare. " You can't use Bluetooth headphones, SoundShare Settings and Surround features simultaneously. Pair the Samsung audio device using the TV's Bluetooth function. Refer to the Samsung audio device's operating manual for more information on pairing. ● SoundShare Settings Samsung Audio Device List Displays a list of paired Samsung audio devices. Select a device to display its menu options. You can activate/deactivate the audio device or remove it from the list. Add New Device Enables/disables SoundShare. The connection signals from new devices are ignored if Add New Device is set to Off. " When listening to TV audio through a Samsung audio device, certain types of content may produce video-to-audio synching issues. 160 161 Listening to TV Sound through Samsung Multiroom Link compatible Speakers Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Speaker > Multiroom Link Configure this product for connection to a Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker and enjoy rich sound. " To use this feature, at least one Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker must be connected. " Sound quality may be affected by the condition of the wireless network. " Network connection status can be negatively influenced and even can be lost, if the network environment getting worse by time. " Activating Screen Mirroring disables Multiroom Link. " For further details, refer to the Multiroom Link manual from the web site. (www.samsung.com > SUPPORT > Firmware Manuals & Downloads) " The audio from each device may lag behind the video and audio of the device which is playing the source contents. " While playing the Multi-Link Screen, you can hear the selected audio. ● Settings Set the configuration of Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker(s) you connected to the TV. – Multiroom Link Surround: Set numbers of Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker(s) in a space and enjoy surround system. Multiroom: Configure the Samsung Multiroom Link compatible speaker so that all play the same, combined audio. Channels are ignored. SoundBar+Surround: If you have connected a Sound Bar, set SoundBar+Surround to rear speakers. The Sound Bar already includes the Center and Front Left and Right channels. – Volume Level Adjust the volume of each speaker individually or all speakers at once. – Speaker Test Send a test sound to each speaker to make sure your system is working properly. – Edit Name You can give each speaker a name. 162 Enabling the Sound (Additional Settings) Sound > Additional Settings Try Now Settings - Additional Configure additional settings for optimum audio output. ● DTV Audio Level Try Now (Digital channels only) The TV cannot freely control the volume of the digital audio that it sends to the AV receiver. Use this to set the digital audio volume at a comfortable level. " According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB. " To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10 respectively. ● Audio Format, Audio Delay This Smart TV is SPDIF-enabled. The Sony Philips Digital Interface (SPDIF) provides digital audio output to speakers and various digital devices, including A/V Receivers and home theatres. Audio Format Try Now Selects the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) formats may vary depending on the input source. Audio Delay Try Now This setting helps correct timing mismatches between the audio and video tracks when you are watching TV and listening to audio through a digital audio device. Enabling the feature displays a slide bar that you can use to adjust the delay by up to 250ms. ● Dolby Digital Comp Try Now Some digital TV programmes provide 5.1-channel Dolby audio. This TV converts Dolby audio to stereo audio so that it can play the sound through the TV’s speakers. There are two methods to choose from. RF is for better sound at lower volumes, and Line is for higher volumes. 162 163 ● Auto Volume Try Now When you change channels, video sources, or content, Auto Volume automatically adjusts the TV's volume level so that the volume level remains the same for all sources. For example, if you switch from a streaming video application to a Blu-ray player or a favourite TV channel, Auto Volume can modify the volume up to 12db to equalise the sound. The Auto Volume function has two settings: Normal and Night. Normal applies a normal level of volume adjustment. Night applies a slightly lower volume level and is ideal for late-night TV viewing. If you want to use the volume control of a connected source device to control the sound, deactivate the Auto Volume function. When you use the Auto Volume function with a source device, the device's volume control may not function properly. Listening to 3D Audio in 3D Mode " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Sound > 3D Audio Try Now 3D audio technology provides immersive sound that matches the pop-up effect of 3D video by using perspective in the audio depth control. " Only available in 3D mode. Resetting All Sound Settings Sound > Reset Sound Try Now Use to reset all sound settings to the factory defaults. 164 Setting the Time and Using the Timer Setting the Current Time System > Time > Clock Try Now Set the clock manually or automatically. Once the clock has been set, you can select the INFO button to check the current time. " The clock must be reset every time the power is disconnected. Setting the Clock using Digital Broadcast Info System > Time > Clock > Clock Mode Try Now Set Clock Mode to Auto. The TV automatically downloads the correct time from a digital channel. To enable this option, the TV's Antenna jack must be connected to either an antenna or a cable output and must be receiving digital broadcasts. The accuracy of the time information received may vary depending on the channel and signal. If your TV is connected to a set-top-box or satellite box using HDMI or Component connections, you must set the time manually. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. If the Clock is Wrong in Auto Mode... System > Time > Clock > Time Offset Try Now If the time set automatically is incorrect, you can offset the clock in 1-hour increments by as much as -/+ 12 hours. Select System > Time > Clock > Time Offset and offset the clock to the correct time. " Time Offset adjusts the time through network connections and is only available if the Clock Mode is set to Auto and the TV is connected to the Internet though a local area network. " Time Offset will adjust the time if the TV fails to receive time information through normal digital broadcast signals. Setting the Clock Manually Manually enter the time. Set Clock Mode to Manual and then select Clock Set to enter the current time and date. Clock Set: Set the current Date and Time. Time Zone: Select your time zone. " This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. DST: Switches the DST (Daylight Saving Time) function on or off. " This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. GMT: Selects your time zone. " When Country is set to others, you can use this function. General 164 165 Using the Timers Using the Sleep Timer System > Time > Sleep Timer Try Now This automatically shuts off the TV after a preconfigured period of time. Select System > Time > Sleep Timer. You can set the timer up to 180 minutes in 30-minute increments. Turning On the TV using On Timer System > Time > On Timer Try Now Timer - On Set the On Timer so that the TV turns on automatically at a chosen time. Select System > Time > On Timer. The timer configuration window appears. Configure the following settings: " The On Timer is only available if the Clock has been set. ● Setup Specify the dates and the duration. Use Manual to specify the days of the week. ● Time Set the time that the TV turns on automatically. ● Volume Specify the volume when the TV turns on. ● Source Select the signal source from the list. Specify the channel or source to be displayed when the TV turns on. To specify a USB device, a USB device must first be connected to the TV. To play media from an HDMI or Component source such as a DVD player or Blu-ray player, the device must already be turned on, and playing the media when the TV is turned on. 166 ● Aerial Set the Source to TV to select a broadcast signal. ● Channel Set the Source to TV to select a channel. ● Music / Photo Set the Source to USB to choose a USB folder that contains music or photo files. Selecting both music and image files plays the music files and displays the images at the same time. Restrictions: ● This feature will not function properly if the selected USB device does not contain media files or a folder has not been specified. ● The slideshow will not start if there is only one image file on the USB device. ● Folders with long names cannot be selected. ● Always use different folder names for multiple USB devices. ● Use a USB memory stick or multi-card reader. The On Timer may not work with certain batterypowered USB devices, MP3 players, or PMPs because the TV may take too long to recognise the device. Turning Off the TV Using Off Timer System > Time > Off Timer Try Now Timer - Off Set the Off Timer to turn the TV off automatically at a specific time. Select System > Time > Off Timer. The timer configuration window appears. Configure the following settings: " The Off Timer is only available if the Clock has been set. ● Setup Specify the dates and the duration. Use Manual to specify the days of the week. ● Time Set the time that the TV turns off automatically. 166 167 Using the Screen Burn Protection and Energy Saving Features Preventing Screen Burn System > Auto Protection Time Try Now Still images can leave burned-in after-images on the screen if left for a long time. Use Screen Burn Protection to protect the screen. Select System > Auto Protection Time and then choose a time setting from the list. If a still image is shown on the screen for longer than the time you selected, the TV will automatically activate Screen Burn Protection to prevent burned-in after- images that may damage the screen. Using Energy Saving Features System > Eco Solution Try Now Eco Solution adjusts the TV's brightness level and prevents overheating to reduce overall power consumption. ● Energy Saving Try Now Select a brightness setting from the list to reduce the TV's power consumption. ● Eco Sensor " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Automatically adjusts the TV's brightness level based on the ambient light level to reduce the TV's power consumption. If the Eco Sensor has adjusted the screen's brightness level, you can manually adjust the screen's minimum brightness level by adjusting the Min. Backlight. Changing the Picture menu's Backlight setting while Eco Sensor is running automatically disables Eco Sensor. ● No Signal Power Off Try Now Select a time from the list. If no signal is received for the specified duration, the TV automatically cuts off the power to reduce power consumption. ● Auto Power Off Try Now If the TV remains turned on for four hours without any user input, the TV will automatically turn off to prevent overheating. 168 Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Use Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to control all external devices that support HDMI-CEC using just the TV's remote control. Note that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with the TV's remote control and not with the panel keys. You can configure the TV's universal remote function to control third-party cable boxes, Blu-ray players, and home theatres that do not support HDMI-CEC using the TV's remote control. Anynet+ Requirements: ● Anynet+ cannot be used to control external devices that do not support HDMI-CEC. ● Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). In this case, you will need to replace the HDMI cable. ● The TV remote control may not function under certain circumstances. If this occurs select the Anynet+ device again. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with external devices that support HDMI-CEC and only when those devices are either in standby mode or turned on. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) can control up to 12 compatible external devices (up to 3 of the same type). With home theatre systems, however, the number of systems that can be controlled is limited to one. ● To listen to 5.1-channel audio from an external device, connect the device to the TV via an HDMI cable and the device's digital audio output connector directly to the home theatre system. ● A home theatre system that has been connected to the TV using an HDMI cable and an optical cable supports 2-channel audio only. 5.1-channel audio is, however, available for digital broadcasts with 5.1-channel audio. Setting Up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) System > Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now Enables/disables Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Set to Off to disable all Anynet+ related features. Set to On to enable all Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) related features. ● Auto Turn Off Try Now When set to Yes. turns off Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) compatible external devices when the TV is turned off. " Some Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) compatible devices do not support this feature. ● Search for Devices Try Now Search for Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) compatible devices. 168 169 Using Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Selecting an External Device 11 Select TOOLS. The Tools list appears. 22 Select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) from the list. The Select Device screen appears. 33 Select a device and wait for the switch to take place. This process may take up to 2 minutes to complete and cannot be cancelled once started. Accessing the External Device's Menu Once the TV has switched over to the selected device, you can access the device's menu using the TV's remote control. Select TOOLS. The following list appears, though it may differ based on the external device: ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Displays a list of HDMI-CEC-compliant devices connected to the TV. Select View TV to exit Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), and start watching TV. To switch to the screen of an external device, simply select that respective device. ● (Connected Device) Menu Display the menu of the connected device. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD menu is shown. ● (Connected Device) Tools Displays a list of frequently-used functions available for the device. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD playback menu is shown. " Some external devices may not support this option. ● (Connected Device) Title Menu Display the connected device's title menu. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD title menu is shown. " Some external devices may not support this option. 170 Using the e-Manual Launching the e-Manual Support > e-Manual The embedded e-Manual contains information. " You can also download a copy of the e-Manual from Samsung's website, and read it on your computer or print it out. " Yellow words indicate a menu item; white bold words indicate remote control buttons. Arrows are used to indicate the menu path. (Example: Picture > Picture Mode) 11 Select e-Manual. The e-Manual loads. 22 Select a category from the side of the screen. Once a selection has been made, the contents of the selected category appear. 33 Select an item from the list. This opens the e-Manual on the corresponding page. If a description doesn't fit on a single screen... You can scroll pages in one of the following ways. ● Position the focus on the page to display / on the screen. Press <, > button. Additional e-Manual Features Loading Pages using Keywords Select Search from the side of the screen to bring up the search screen. Enter a search term and then select Done. Select an item from the search results to load the corresponding page. 170 171 Loading Pages from the Index Page Select Index from the side of the screen to bring up the index screen. Select a keyword from the list to navigate to the relevant page. Using History to Load Previously Read Pages Select Recent pages from the side of the screen. A list of previously read pages is shown. Select a page. The e-Manual jumps to the selected page. Accessing the Menu from the e-Manual (Try Now) Select (Try Now) on a feature-description to directly move to the corresponding menu and try out the feature. If you want to read an e-Manual entry on a specific screen menu feature, Using Samsung Smart Control: press the KEYPAD button and select e-Manual. Using the remote control: Press the E-MANUAL button. " Certain menu options cannot be used. Loading Reference Pages Select (Link) from the side of a feature-description page to access the corresponding reference page. Updating the e-Manual to the Latest Version You can update the e-Manual in the same way as updating apps. 11 Select the e-Manual item in the SAMSUNG APPS screen. 22 Press and hold the Enter button. The Options menu appears. 33 From the Options menu on the screen, select Update apps. A pop-up window appears. " Update apps is shown on the screen only when an update is required. 44 Select e-Manual in the pop-up window and then select Update. You can update the e-Manual to the latest version. 172 Updating the Software Support > Software Update Try Now Check your TV's software version and upgrade it if necessary. If the TV is connected to the Internet, TV is set to update software automatically. If you don’t want to update it automatically, set Auto update (Software Update > Auto update) to Off. Updating Software over the Internet Support > Software Update > Update now Update now - Software Select Support > Software Update > Update now. An online upgrade downloads and installs the upgrade software directly from the Internet. " This option requires an Internet connection. [ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. All video and audio settings return to the default settings after a software upgrade. Updating Software using a USB connection Support > Software Update > Update now 11 Visit Samsung's website on a computer and download the update package to a USB device. " Save the update package in the USB device's top-level folder. Otherwise, the TV will not be able to locate the update package. 22 Connect the USB device with the update package to the TV. 33 Select Support > Software Update > Update now. The software is updated using the update package on the USB device. [ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. All video and audio settings return to the default settings after a software upgrade. 172 173 Enabling Automatic Software Updates Support > Software Update > Auto update Try Now If the TV is connected to the Internet, the Auto update option upgrades the TV’s software while it is in Standby Mode. In Standby Mode, the TV appears to be turned off, but still has access to the Internet. This allows the TV to upgrade itself automatically while it is not in use. " This option requires an Internet connection. Because the TV’s internal processes are operating, the screen may emit a faint glow, and this may continue for more than 1 hour until the software download is complete. If you agree to the Smart Hub terms and conditions, Auto update will be set to On, If you don't want the TV's software updated automatically, set Auto update (Support > Software Update > Auto update) to Off. 11 Select Support > Software Update > Auto update. 22 Specify when you want the upgrade to take place. The TV will connect to the server at the specified time, download the update package, and upgrade its own software. Software update via satellite channel " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Support > Software Update > Manage Satellite Channels (When the Aerial was set to Satellite) Manage software downloads via a satellite channel. 174 Protecting the TV from Hacking and malicious code System > Smart Security Try Now When the TV is connected to the Internet, it is vulnerable to hacks and malicious code. Smart Security protects the TV and storage media connected to the TV from such threats. Navigate to System > Smart Security and set Smart Security to On. Try Now Checking the TV and Connected Storage Media System > Smart Security > Scan Navigate to System > Smart Security and select Scan. This scans the TV and connected media for the presence of malicious code. If no malicious code is detected, a notification window appears on the screen. If malicious code is detected... If malicious code was found, the results of the scan will appear on the screen. This result window displays all malicious code found, and provides options to either quarantine the code or allow them to continue. 11 Select all malicious code to quarantine or allow. 22 Select Block or Allow. This moves the selected malicious code to the Isolated List or Allowed List. " The Isolated List displays all blocked malicious code. You can also relocate codes from this list to the Allowed List. " The Allowed List displays all allowed malicious code. You can also relocate codes from this list to the Isolated List. Automatically Scanning when the TV is Powered On System > Smart Security > Settings > Auto Scan Navigate to System > Smart Security > Settings and then set Auto Scan to On. This automatically scans the TV and connected storage media when the TV is powered on. Automatically Adding malicious code to the Blocked List System > Smart Security > Settings > Move to Isolated List automatically Navigate to System > Smart Security > Settings and set Move to Isolated List automatically to On. Malicious code found during the scanning process is automatically added to the Blocked List. 174 175 Using Other Functions Enabling Voice Guide for the Visually Impaired " Availability depends on the specific model, area and language. System > Accessibility > Voice Guide Voice Guide provides guiding information in voice to aid the visually impaired to use the TV more conveniently. Enabling this option provides voice guide regarding focus change, channel change, volume change, and various other TV statues. Navigate to System > Accessibility > Voice Guide and set Voice Guide to On. " Press and hold the ¢ button on the Samsung Smart Control to turn on or off the Voice Guide. " The Voice Guide is only provided in the language set in the Menu Language(System > Menu Language). However, some of the languages are not supported by Voice Guide even though they are listed in the Voice Guide screen. If this is the case, choose a different language. " To change the speaker's gender for the Voice Guide option, navigate to System > Voice Control > Use TV Voice and change the Voice Gender option. " If the Voice Guide is set to On, the Samsung Smart Control's motion sensor(gyro sensor) does not work. To use the Samsung Smart Control's motion sensor, set the Voice Guide to Off. The Voice Guide will give information for the following functions on the TV. " Some sub-functions or function menus may not provide Voice Guide. In this case, the TV will tell you that Voice Guide is not provided. ● Change Channels ● Changing TV Volume ● Programme Info Window (Information) ● Channel List ● Source ● Guide ● On TV ● Voice Control ● TV' menu 176 Changing the volume, speed, pitch and Description Level of the Voice Guide Navigate to System > Accessibility and then select Voice Guide. This changes the volume, speed, pitch and description level of the Voice Guide. ● Volume Change the Voice Guide option's volume level. " The Voice Guide volume may vary depending on the TV volume setting. ● Speed Change the Voice Guide option's tempo. ● Pitch Adjust the pitch of the Voice Guide. ● Description Level Adjust the Voice Guide option to better suit the user's description Level. Enabling the High Contrast System > Accessibility > High Contrast Try Now Navigate to System > Accessibility and set the High Contrast option to On. This option changes major service screens to white text on black background or change the transparent TV menus to opaque so that text can be more easily read. " Press and hold the ¢ button on the Samsung Smart Control to turn on or off High Contrast. Adjusting the Menu Transparency System > Accessibility > Menu Transparency Try Now Navigate to System > Accessibility and adjust the opacity level. Adjust the menu's transparency. " When the High Contrast (System > Accessibility > High Contrast) setting is set to On, menu display is automatically set to opaque and you cannot change the Menu Transparency settings. 176 177 Expanding the Smart Hub's Focus Area System > Accessibility > Enlarge Try Now Navigate to System > Accessibility and set Enlarge to On. This zooms in the focused item when you use Smart Hub. " Press and hold the ¢ button on the Samsung Smart Control to turn on or off Enlarge. Changing the Menu Language System > Menu Language Try Now Select System > Menu Language and then choose a language from the list. Use this option to change the menu language. Checking Notifications System > Notifications Try Now Select Notifications from the System menu to view the list of event messages generated by the TV. Notifications appear on the screen when events such as an update release for an app or Samsung Account login/logout occurs. " Select Delete All to delete all notifications. " Select Service Notice to check the SMART TV service notifications in a web browser. Setting Up a Password System > Change PIN Try Now Set a PIN (Personal Identification Number) to lock channels, reset the TV, and change the TV settings. 11 Select System > Change PIN. The PIN input window appears. 22 Enter a PIN. The default PIN is 0000. (For France, Italy: “1-1-1-1”) 33 Enter a new PIN and then enter it again to confirm it. The PIN change is complete. " If you forget your PIN, you can reset it using the Samsung Smart Control. With the TV turned on, press the following buttons on the remote to reset the PIN to 0000: ¢ → w → RETURN → v → RETURN → w → RETURN. w is the Volume Up button. v is the Volume Down button. The ¢ button is on the left side of the remote. 178 Programme Rating Lock Broadcasting > Programme Rating Lock Try Now " Availability depends on the specific model and area. The Programme Rating Lock blocks programmes with ratings higher than those desired. This is useful for controlling what children watch on TV. This will not function for programmes originating from external sources, such as DVD players or USB files. This PIN is required to watch a blocked programme. The Programme Rating Lock is not available in HDMI or Component mode. Enabling Game Mode System > General > Game Mode Try Now Game Mode optimises the TV's settings for playing video games on a gaming console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™. Requirements: ● Game Mode cannot be used for normal TV viewing. ● Connect the gaming console before enabling Game Mode. Otherwise, the picture quality may suffer. ● The screen may shake a little. ● Enabling Game Mode automatically sets the Picture Mode to Standard and the Sound Mode to Movie. ● To use a different external device, first disconnect the game console and disable Game Mode. Enjoying Rich Colours and Superior Picture Quality (BD Wise) " Availability depends on the specific model and area. System > General > BD Wise Try Now Connecting a Samsung DVD player, Blu-ray player, or home theatre system that supports BD Wise enables the richest colours and best possible picture quality. Enabling BD Wise automatically optimises the TV's resolution. " This feature is only available when the external device is connected via an HDMI cable. 178 179 Enabling/Disabling Sound Feedback System > General > Sound Feedback Try Now Sound Feedback provides audio cues as you navigate through menus and select menu options. Locking/Unlocking the Panel Keys System > General > Panel Lock Try Now Use to lock and unlock the TV's front panel buttons. Showing/Hiding the Samsung Logo while Booting System > General > Boot Logo Try Now Use to enable or disable the Samsung logo display that appears when the TV starts up. Enabling the TV to Boot Faster System > General > Samsung Instant On " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Enable or disable the functionality that enables your TV to turn on quickly. 180 Registering the TV as a DivX-Certified Device (Watching Paid DivX Movies) System > DivX® Video On Demand Try Now Viewing DivX® DRM-protected DivX movies on the TV first requires registration of the TV as a DivXcertified device. " DRM ("Digital rights management") Digital Rights Management is a digital security measure designed to protect copyright. " You can watch personally-created and free DivX content without registering the TV. " Visit the DivX website (http://www.divx.com) and log into your user account before registering the TV as a DivX-certified device. If you do not have an account, please create one. 11 Select System > DivX® Video On Demand. A window with a registration code appears on the screen. 22 Visit the DivX website on a computer and click [Register Your Device] under [Support] from the top menu. 33 Enter the registration code shown on the TV's screen in the [Enter your registration code] field. 44 Enter the TV's name in the [Name your device] field and then select [NEXT]. 55 Click [DOWNLOAD] and save the [device_name.divx] file. 66 Transfer the [device_name.divx] file from the computer onto a USB device and then plug the USB device into the TV. 77 Play the [device_name.divx] file on the TV to register the TV as a DivX-certified device. 180 181 Restoring the TV to the Factory Settings Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset Try Now This option restores all TV settings (excluding the Internet) to the factory defaults. 11 Select Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset. The Security PIN entry window appears on the screen. 22 Enter the Security PIN and then select Yes. All settings are then reset. The TV turns off and on again automatically, and then displays the Setup screen. " For more information on Setup, refer to the user manual that came with the TV. Turning the TV into a Display Model (for retail stores) Support > Use Mode Try Now Select Support > Use Mode > Store Demo. This turns the TV into a display model for use in a retail environment. " For all other uses, select Home Use. " Store Demo should be used in retail environments only. With Store Demo, certain functions are disabled and the TV automatically resets itself after a certain amount of time. 182 Data Service This function may not be available, depending on the country. Allows the user to use information (text, still images, graphics, documents, software, etc.) transmitted via broadcast media. Auto Run Data Service Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Auto Run Data Service Sets whether or not to automatically run data service. Auto Run Data Service automatically runs data service without user intervention. " If any other secondary function is under way, Auto Run Data Service may not work. Using Data Service If the channel you are currently watching provides data service, you can enjoy a variety of data services by selecting a. " Provided Data Service information may vary depending on broadcast. " While using data services, changing the channel using numeric keys may not be possible, depending on the service. 11 Select a and then select a desired service. " If Auto Run Data Service is On, the data service will automatically run with loading banner. In this case, the a function does not work. 22 Select a to display the data service screen. 33 Move to a desired option on the data service screen and then select OK. The selected service starts. 44 If you select EXIT, data service closes. 182 183 HbbTV This function may not be available, depending on the country. Access services from entertainment providers, online providers and CE manufactures through HbbTV. " In some countries, HbbTV is a data service. " This service may be supported in other countries. " Some broadcasting may not support the HbbTV. HbbTV is turned off by default. To use HbbTV, go to System > Data Service and set it Enable. (Depending on the country) ● HbbTV is not available when Timeshift is running or when a recorded video is being played back. ● An application on HbbTV may malfunction temporarily depending on the circumstances of the broadcast station or application provider. ● An application is only available for use on HbbTV when the TV network is connected to an external network. The application may malfunction depending on the network conditions. ● If the current channel is compatible with both the HbbTV and non-HbbTV text input modes, activate TTX by select TTX key twice. Using HbbTV: ● When the screen indicates (with the a, etc.) that HbbTV is being accessed. ● Select TTX using the remote once to enter the HbbTV text-input mode. ● Select TTX using the remote twice to enter the non-HbbTV text-input mode. 184 Connecting to a TV Viewing Card slot To connect the CI CARD, follow these steps: Using the “CI or CI+ CARD” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. " Turn the TV off to connect or disconnect a CI card. ● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. ● The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message appears please contact your service provider. ● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. Requirements: ● You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. ● When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. ● The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. ● “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorised dealer. ● If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current aerial settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. 184 185 To connect the CI CARD Adapter, follow these steps: " We recommend attaching the adapter before installing the wall mount, or inserting the “CI or CI+ CARD”. " Turn the TV off to connect or disconnect a CI card adapter. 11 Insert the CI CARD Adapter into the two holes on the product 1. " Please find two holes on the rear of the TV. Two holes are beside the COMMON INTERFACE port. 22 Connect the CI CARD Adapter into the COMMON INTERFACE port on the product 2. 33 Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” [ We recommend that you insert the CI card before you mount the TV on a wall. It may be difficult to insert after the mounting. Insert the card after attaching the CI-Module on TV. It is difficult to attach the module if you insert the card before attaching. 186 Using the “CI or CI+ CARD” To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. ● If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. ● The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message appears please contact your service provider. ● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. Requirements: ● You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. ● When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. ● The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. 186 187 Teletext Feature " Availability depends on the specific model and area. The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the Service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. " You can change Teletext pages by select numeric using your remote control. / Teletext on / mix / off: Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press twice to overlap the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit teletext. 8 Store: Stores the Teletext pages. 4 Size: Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. 9 Hold: Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automatically. To undo, press it again. Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colour coded page appears. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, select corresponding coloured button. 0 Mode: Selects the Teletext mode (LIST / FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8 (store) button. 1 Sub-page: Displays the available sub-page. 2 Page up: Displays the next Teletext page. 3 Page down: Displays the previous Teletext page. 6 Index: Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. 5 Reveal: Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. 7 Cancel: Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. 188 Typical Teletext page Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. 189 Getting Support The TV has several built-in systems designed for user and TV system support. Support through Remote Management Support > Remote Management Try Now If you need assistance with your TV, you can use this feature to let Samsung Electronics diagnose your TV remotely. You will need to read and agree to the service agreement before using this feature. A Samsung Electronics technician will then diagnose, repair, and update your TV remotely. " This option requires an Internet connection. What Does Remote Service Do? Samsung Remote Support service offers you one-on-one support with a Samsung Technician who can remotely. ● Diagnose your TV ● Adjust the TV settings for you ● Perform a factory reset your TV ● Install recommended firmware updates Troubleshooting 190 How Does it Work? Having a Samsung Tech remotely service your TV is easy. Call the Samsung Contact Centre and ask for remote support. Open the menu on your TV and go to the Support section. Select Remote Management, and then read and agree to the service agreements. When the PIN screen appears, provide the PIN number to the agent. The agent accesses your TV. 190 191 Finding the Information You Need for Service Support > Contact Samsung Try Now Use this option to find the support service website's address and contact number, your TV's model number, your TV's software version, the Smart Hub info, and other information you need to receive the service support. " Press a to view the open source licence. There is a problem with the screen Testing the Picture Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test Try Now Before you review the list of problems and solutions below, run the Picture Test to determine if the problem is caused by the TV. The Picture Test displays a high definition picture you can examine for flaws or faults. If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem with an external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, check the signal strength or refer to the external device’s user manual. " If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. " If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, check the signal strength or refer to the external device’s user manual. 192 The Problem Try this! Flickering and Dimming If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need to disable some of the energy efficiency features. Disable Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution > Energy Saving) or Eco Sensor (System > Eco Solution > Eco Sensor). Component Connections/Screen Colour If the colour on your Samsung television screen is not correct or the black and white colours are off, run Picture Test (Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test). If the test results indicate that the problem is not caused by the TV, do the following: ● Confirm that the TV's video input connectors are connected to the correct external device video output connectors. ● Check the other connections as well. If the TV is connected to an external device via a component cable, confirm that the Pb, Pr, and Y jacks are plugged into their proper connectors. Screen Brightness If the colours on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark or bright, try adjusting the following settings first. ● Go to the Picture menu and adjust the Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour, and Tint (G/R) settings. Motion Plus/Blur If you notice ghosting or blurring on the screen, use the Motion Plus option (Picture > Picture Options > Motion Plus) to resolve the issue. Unwanted Powering Off If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, try disabling some of the TV's energy efficiency features. See if Sleep Timer (System > Time > Sleep Timer) has been enabled. The Sleep Timer automatically turns the TV off after a specified period of time. If the Sleep Timer has not been enabled, see if No Signal Power Off (System > Eco Solution > No Signal Power Off) or Auto Power Off (System > Eco Solution > Auto Power Off) has been enabled and disable them. Problems Powering On When the TV is turned on, the remote control receiver flashes 5 times before the screen turns on. If you are having problems powering on your Samsung television, there are a number of things to check before calling the service department. Confirm that the TV's power cord is connected correctly at both ends and that the remote control is operating normally. Make sure that the antenna cable or cable TV cable is firmly connected. If you have a cable/satellite box confirm that it is plugged in and turned on. Unable to find a Channel Launch Setup (System > Setup) or Auto Tuning (Broadcasting > Auto Tuning). If your TV is not connected to a cable box or satellite box, run Setup (System > Setup) or Auto Tuning (Broadcasting > Auto Tuning). 192 193 The Problem Try this! The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels. If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) content. Look for a channel that is broadcasting true HD content. ● Cable/Satellite Subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel lineup. ● Terrestrial/Cable Aerial Connection: Try HD channels after running the Auto Tuning function. Adjust the cable/satellite box's video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. The picture is distorted. The compression of video content may cause picture distortions, especially in fast moving pictures from sports programmes and action movies. A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortions. This is not an issue with the TV. Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 1 m) may cause noise in analogue and digital channels. The colour is wrong or missing. If you’re using a Component connection, make sure that the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. The colour is poor or the picture is not bright enough. Go to the Picture menu and then adjust the Picture Mode, Brightness, Sharpness, and Colour settings. See if Energy Saving (System > Eco Sensor > Energy Saving) has been enabled. Try resetting the picture. (Picture > Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. If the Picture Size has been set to Screen Fit, change the setting to 16:9. Change the cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the TV's green component jack. The colour is wrong or missing. If you are using a Component connection, make sure that the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. If the TV is connected to a cable box, try to reset the box. (Disconnect and then reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.) Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p. 194 I can't hear the sound clearly Testing the Sound Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test Try Now Before you review the list of problems and solutions below, make sure that the Speaker Select menu item is set to TV Speaker, and then listen to the speakers again. If the TV still does not play audio, run the Sound Test. The Sound Test uses a built-in melody to check for sound problems. If the TV does not play sound during the Sound Test, or the sound is distorted, there may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. If the TV plays the Sound Test melody without distortion, there may be a problem with an external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. " If you can't hear the melody or there is a problem, make sure Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Sound Output is set to TV Speaker and then try again. If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. " If the melody is played, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. The Problem Try this! There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. Check the volume control of the device (cable/satellite box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. Set Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Sound Output to TV Speaker. If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (For example, you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if the box connected to your TV is using an HDMI cable.) To listen to the computer sound, connect the external speaker to the computer's audio output connector. If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. Reboot the connected device by disconnecting and then reconnecting the device’ s power cable. The speakers are making an odd sound. Make sure that the audio cable is connected to the correct audio output connector on the external device. For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal level may cause sound distortions. Run Sound Test (Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test). 194 195 I can't see 3D images clearly. Testing 3D Picture Quality " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Support > Self Diagnosis > 3D Picture Test " If you have not paired your 3D glasses with the TV, pair them first. To test 3D picture quality, the TV and the 3D glasses must have been paired. Put on the 3D glasses, navigate to Support > Self Diagnosis and select 3D Picture Test. The 3D Picture Test displays a high definition picture to examine the 3D screen for flaws or faults. If the test fails to identify a problem, there may be a problem with an external device or the signal strength. " If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for assistance. " If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, check the signal strength or refer to the external device’s user manual. The Problem Try this! The 3D glasses are not working correctly. Make sure the glasses are powered on. The 3D feature may not work properly if there is another 3D product or an electronic device running nearby. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. I can't see 3D images clearly. The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend watching 3D content with your eyes level with the screen. The batteries in the 3D glasses are flat. Turn off the 3D glasses when they are not in use. If you leave the 3D glasses on, the battery lifespan is shortened. 196 There is a problem with the broadcast. The Problem Try this! The TV is not receiving all channels. If your TV is not connected to a cable box or satellite box: ● Confirm that the coaxial cable is securely connected to the TV. ● If you are using an antenna, verify it is positioned correctly and the all the connections are secure. ● Run Setup (System > Setup) or Auto Tuning (Broadcasting > Auto Tuning). There are no captions with digital channels. Go to Subtitle (System > Accessibility > Subtitle) and change the Subtitle Mode. Some channels may not have caption data. The picture is distorted. The compression of the video content may cause picture distortions. This is especially true with fast moving pictures from sports programmes and action movies. A weak signal can cause picture distortions. This is not a problem with the TV. The computer won't connect. The Problem Try this! The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV. The video is OK but there is no audio. If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC. If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. I can't connect to the Internet. The Problem Try this! The wireless network connection failed. Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP router. The software update over the Internet has failed. Check the network connection status. If the TV is not connected to a network, connect to a network. The upgrade stops if you already have the latest software version. 196 197 Data Service The Problem Try this! Why am I getting onscreen messages when I haven't selected the Data Service option? If Auto Run Data Service is set to On, messages will automatically appear on the screen when you watch a broadcast that supports the Data Service. If the broadcast doesn't support the Data Service, no messages will appear on the screen. If you do not wish to receive Data Service messages, disable Auto Run Data Service. How do I hide Data Service messages? Press EXIT button to hide the messages. If you do not wish to receive Data Service messages, disable Auto Run Data Service. How do I use the Data Service? Enabling the Auto Run Data Service option automatically displays messages on the screen whenever you watch a broadcast that supports the Data Service. You can press the corresponding buttons shown on the screen to access additional features and functions offered by that broadcast. What is an interactive service and how does it work? Interactive services include viewer surveys, quizzes, ticket requests, product purchases, and other interactions between the viewer and the TV station. Generally, you will need to set up an account with the broadcaster and log in to the account in order to enjoy the interactive services they offer. Note that interactive services are only available when your TV is connected to the Internet. In addition, T-Commerce requires that you have a certificate. Copy your certificate from the computer to a USB device and connect that device to the TV. (Interactive services are not being offered yet. The actual service launch date varies depending on the broadcaster.) A message displays "Receiving" but no change happens. This indicates an error has occurred while receiving data. An execution error message will also appear on the screen. If this happens, try again. Nothing appears on the screen after the Data Service is launched. The Data Service may be initialising or the signal may have been severed by the broadcaster. 198 The Schedule Recording/Timeshift function isn't working. The Problem Try this! The TV cannot recognise the USB device or the Format Device, Check Device and Device Performance Test functions fail. Refer to the USB device's manual and see if data can be stored on it. Check if the USB device is in a locked state. Check if the USB device was formatted when it was connected to a computer. Formatting a USB device after connecting it to the TV may result in a formatting failure. If Device Performance Test or Format Device has failed, there may be a problem with the USB device or its specifications. Try using a different USB device. There is a message saying I need to format the USB Drive. Check if the USB device is in a locked state. Use the USB recovery function to recover the USB device. Schedule Recording cannot be used. Check if there is a USB device connected to the TV. Check if the channel is a digital channel that can be recorded. Recording will automatically stop if the signal becomes too weak. The Timeshift function will not work if there isn't enough storage space on the USB device. I get a performance test failure message and then Schedule Recording and the Timeshift operation stops working. This problem can occur when using a low-performance USB Drive that does not support recording. A USB hard drive with a speed of 5,400rpm or above is recommended. A USB memory stick is not supported. 198 199 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) isn't working. The Problem Try this! Anynet+ does not work. Confirm that the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. Check if the power cord of the Anynet+ device is properly connected. Check the cable connections of the Anynet+ device. Go to System and see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) has been set to On. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. Anynet+ may not function when certain functions are operational. (Channel Search, Smart Hub, set up, etc.) If you have disconnected and then reconnected the HDMI cable, scan for devices again or turn your TV off and on. I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and then navigate to the System menu to see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. Once verified, select TOOLS button. A list appears. Select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) from the list and then a device. I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV from the Anynet+ menu. Select a non-Anynet+ device from the Source list. The message "Connecting to Anynet+ device..." or "Disconnecting from Anynet+ device" appears on the screen. You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a viewing mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed the Anynet+ configuration or has switched to a viewing mode. The Anynet+ device won't play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. Check whether the device supports Anynet+. Check whether the HDMI cable is properly connected. Go to System and see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) has been set to On. Scan for Anynet+ devices again. Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+. If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please scan for the device again. The TV audio is not being played through the receiver. Connect an optical cable to the TV and the receiver. ARC enables digital sound to be outputted via the HDMI (ARC) port. However, ARC is only available when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports ARC. 200 I am having trouble launching/using apps. The Problem Try this! I launched an app, but it's in English. How can I change the language? Languages supported by the app may be different from the user interface language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider. My application is not working. Check with the service provider. Refer to the help section on the application service provider's website. My file won't play. The Problem Try this! Some files can't be played. This problem may occur with high-bitrate files. Most files can be played back, but you might experience problems with high-bitrate files. I want to reset the TV. Reset Path Description Reset Settings Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset Reset Picture, Sound, Channel, Smart Hub, and all other settings except for the network settings to their factory default settings. Resetting Smart Hub Smart Hub > Reset Smart Hub Reset all saved information relating to Samsung accounts and linked service accounts, as well as Smart Hub service agreements and applications. 200 201 Other Issues The Problem Try this! The TV is hot. Watching TV for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat. The heat from the panel is dissipated through internal vents running along the top of the TV. The bottom, however, may feel hot to the touch after extended use. Children watching TV need constant adult supervision to prevent them from touching the TV. This heat, however, is not a defect and does not affect the TV's functionality. The picture won’t display in full screen. HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) content. Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen when you watch movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on your external device or set the TV to full screen. The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. The output resolution of the attached device is not supported by the TV. Check the supported resolutions of the TV and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. The Subtitle item in the TV menu is grayed out. You cannot select the Subtitle menu if you have selected a source connected to the TV via HDMI or Component connections. To view subtitle, turn on the external device's subtitle function. The TV smells of plastic. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The Signal Information option under Self Diagnosis isn't activated. Verify that the current channel is a digital channel. The Signal Information is only available for digital channels. The TV is tilted to the side. Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. The Broadcasting option has been deactivated. Broadcasting is only available when the Source is set to TV. The Broadcasting menu cannot be accessed while watching TV using a cable box or satellite receiver. Certain Broadcasting menus cannot be accessed while recording or while the TimeShift operation is in progress. The settings are lost after 5 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. If the Use Mode is set to Store Demo, the TV's audio and video settings are automatically reset every 5 minutes. Change the Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use. There is an intermittent loss of audio or video. Check the cable connections and reconnect them. Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If you are mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90-degree connectors. There are small particles on the TV's bezel. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available. PIP functionality is only available when you are using an HDMI or Component source. 202 The Problem Try this! A POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on the screen. Change the Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use. The TV is making a popping noise. The expansion and contraction of the TV's outer casing may cause a popping noise. This does not indicate a product malfunction. The TV is safe to use. The TV is making a humming noise. Your TV utilises high-speed switching circuits and high levels of electrical current. Depending on the TV's brightness level, the TV may seem slightly noisier than a conventional TV. Your TV has undergone strict quality control procedures that meet our demanding performance and reliability requirements. Some noise coming from the TV is considered normal and is not an acceptable cause for an exchange or refund. 203 Before Using the Recording and Timeshift Functions " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Before Using the Recording and Schedule Recording Functions ● To set up a Schedule Recording, you must first set the TV's clock. Set the Clock (System > Time > Clock). ● Recordings are DRM-protected and therefore cannot be played back on a computer or on a different TV. In addition, these files cannot be played back on your TV if its video circuit has been replaced. ● A USB hard drive with a speed of 5,400rpm or above is recommended. However, RAID-type USB hard drives are not supported. ● USB memory sticks are not supported. ● The total recording capacity may vary depending on the amount of available hard drive space and the recording quality level. ● Schedule Recording requires at least 100MB of free space on the USB storage device. Recording will stop if the available storage space falls below 50MB while recording is in progress. ● If the available storage space falls below 500MB while both the Schedule Recording and Timeshift functions are in progress, only the recording will stop. ● The maximum recording time is 360 minutes. ● A video is played according to the TV settings. ● If the input signal is changed while recording is in progress, the screen will go blank until the change is made. In this case, recording will resume, but will not be available. ● Device Performance Test must be performed on the USB storage device connected to the TV before a recording can be made. To perform the Device Performance Test, select Recorded TV in the On TV panel or USB Drive in the MULTIMEDIA panel and then select the recording device. When you make a recording on the Guide or Programme Info screen, if the USB storage device has failed in the Device Performance Test, the Format Device and Device Performance Test are performed again. ● When using the Record or Schedule Recording function, the actual recording may start a second or two later than the specified time. ● If the Schedule Recording function is operating while a recording is being made on an HDMI-CEC external device, the priority is given to the Schedule Recording. ● Connecting a recording device to the TV automatically deletes abnormally saved recording files. ● If the Off Timer or Auto Power Off has been set, the TV will overide these settings, continue to record, and turn off after the recording has ended. Notes and Precautions 204 Before the Using Timeshift Function ● A USB hard drive with a speed of 5,400rpm or above is recommended. However, RAID-type USB hard drives are not supported. ● USB memory sticks or flash drives are not supported. ● The total recording capacity may vary depending on the amount of available hard drive space and the recording quality level. ● If the available storage space falls below 500MB while both the Schedule Recording and Timeshift functions are in progress, only the recording will stop. ● The maximum amount of time available for the Timeshift function is 90 minutes. ● The Timeshift function is not available for locked channels. ● A time-shifted video is played according to the TV settings. ● Before the Timeshift function can be used, the Device Performance Test must be performed on the USB storage device connected to the TV. To perform the Device Performance Test, select Recorded TV in the On TV panel or USB Drive in the MULTIMEDIA panel and then select the recording device. ● The Timeshift function may be terminated automatically once it reaches its maximum capacity. ● The Timeshift function requires at least 1.5GB of free space available on the USB storage device. ● Launching an app, switching to an Analogue channel, or changing the TV to a mode that does not support the Timeshift function automatically terminates the Timeshift function. The Timeshift operation will resume if the TV is changed back to a digital channel again. 204 205 S-Recommendation Disclaimer " Availability depends on the specific model and area. S Recommendation with Voice Interaction Recommendation given to common speech commands Voice Interaction limited to the official language of the country of purchase. Performance may vary based on content availability, clarity and volume of your voice, and ambient noise levels. Strong regional accents may not be recognised. Certain Samsung Smart TV features may not be available without express consent to the collection and use of personal information. Certain features within S Recommendation require internet access and may not be available based on service provider, language, dialect and region. Visit www.samsung.com for more information about service operator compatibility. Actual remote control may differ from image shown. S Recommendation Content recommendations to fit your TV viewing preferences Certain Samsung Smart TV features may not be available without express consent to the collection and use of personal information. Certain features within S Recommendation require internet access and may not be available based on service provider, language, dialect and region. Visit www.samsung.com for more information about service operator compatibility. Actual remote control may differ from image shown. 206 Read Before Using 3D Viewing Mode " Availability depends on the specific model. 3D Precautions [ Warning ● When viewing a 3D video under a fluorescent lamp (50 Hz – 60 Hz) or 3-wavelength lamp, you may notice a small amount of screen flickering. " If this occurs, dim or turn off the light. ● Switching the input mode while watching a 3D movie may disable the 3D function on the TV. " As a result, the 3D glasses may not function and the movie may not be displayed properly. ● Ensure you are within the working distance of the glasses when you view a 3D video. " The images may not be viewable in 3D if you move outside of the working distance for 3 seconds. " If the 3D glasses are moved outside of their working distance, the signal from the TV will disconnect and the glasses’ 3D function will turn off after several seconds. When this happens, the red LED will turn on for 3 seconds. ● If you lie on your side while watching TV with 3D active glasses, the picture may appear dark or may not be visible. The actual 3D effect may be experienced differently depending on the viewer. The 3D effect may not be visible if the visual ability of your left eye differs greatly from the visual ability of your right eye. ● If a part of the 3D glasses or lenses is defective or damaged, it cannot be repaired and the glasses should be replaced. If the glasses stop working within the warranty period, the glasses can be repaired or replaced for free. If the glasses have been damaged due to the fault of the customer or the warranty period has expired, a new pair of glasses will have to be purchased. ● The 3D glasses may not work properly due to interference from other 3D products or electronic devices that operate on the 2.4GHz frequency such as a microwave oven or Internet AP. If the 3D function malfunctions due to interference, please move all other electronic or wireless communication devices as far away from the glasses and the TV as possible. ● The 3D glasses may not work properly due to interference from other 3D products or electronic devices that operate on the 2.4GHz frequency such as a microwave oven or Internet AP. If the 3D function malfunctions due to interference, please move all other electronic or wireless communication devices as far away from the glasses and the TV as possible. ● The vividness of the image may appear degraded if you view 3D video in a place that is exposed to direct sunlight or illumination. ● The 3D glasses may malfunction if there is an electric field or metallic object such as a steel plate nearby. Keep the glasses as far away as possible from electric fields and metallic objects. ● With SSG-3570 model glasses, the glasses may power off if you remain stationary while viewing 3D video for an extended period of time. ● With SSG-3570 model glasses, if the 3D glasses do not function immediately after you put them on when the TV is in 3D mode, take them off and then put them back on. 206 207 [ Caution IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D IMAGES. READ THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS BEFORE YOU OR YOUR CHILD USE THE 3D FUNCTION. ● Adults should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any complaints of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or nausea, stop the child from viewing the 3D TV and ensure that they rest. ● Do not use the 3D glasses for other purposes such as general wear, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc. ● Some viewers may experience discomfort such as dizziness, nausea, and headaches while viewing 3D TV. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop viewing the 3D TV, remove the 3D glasses, and rest for awhile. ● Watching 3D pictures for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If you experience any eye strain, stop viewing the 3D TV, remove the 3D glasses, and rest for a while. ● Do not use the 3D function or 3D glasses while walking or moving around. Using the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while moving around may result in injury from running into objects, tripping, and/or falling. ● Do not sleep with the 3D glasses on. You can damage or break the temples. ● The temples on your 3D glasses are not foldable. Forcing the temples to fold will damage the 3D glasses. ● With SSG-3570 model glasses, do not shake your 3D glasses repeatedly. Shaking the glasses will power them on and can cause the battery to discharge faster than it would normally. ● With SSG-5100GB model glasses, there is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. ● With SSG-5100GB model glasses, make sure to replace the battery with the same type. 208 [ Safety Precautions The following safety instructions are to ensure your personal safety and prevent property damage. Please read the following to ensure the proper use of the product. ● Do not place the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight, heat, fire, or water. Exposure may result in a product malfunction or fire. ● Do not apply force to the lenses of the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the product. Applying force, dropping, or bending may result in a 3D glasses malfunction. ● Keep the components of the 3D glasses out of reach of children. Especially, ensure children do not swallow any of the components. If your child swallows a component, consult your doctor immediately. ● When cleaning the product, do not spray water or cleaner directly onto the surface of the product. Spraying water or cleaner directly onto the glasses may result in fire or electric shock, damage to the product’s surface, or cause the indicator labels on the product’s surface to come loose. ● Do not apply chemicals containing alcohol, solvent, or surfactant such as wax, benzene, thinner, pesticide, air freshener, lubricant, or cleaner to the product. These chemicals may cause the product’s exterior to be discolored or cracked, or labels or instructions to be removed. Use only a soft cloth such as superfine fibers or cotton flannels for cleaning the product as the surface or the lenses easily crack. Because the product can be easily scratched with foreign substances, make sure to dust off the cloth before using. ● Do not disassemble, or attempt to repair or modify your 3D active glasses by yourself. ● Be careful not to let the temple ends of the 3D active glasses harm your eye. ● Do not sleep with the 3D glasses on. You can break the arms. ● Use your hands to put on or remove the 3D glasses. ● Use only the specified standard batteries. When replacing the battery, insert the battery so that its polarity (+, –) is correct. Failing to do so may damage the battery or result in fire, personal injury or environmental damage caused by liquid leaking from the battery. (applicable to the SSG- 5100 only). ● Keep the used battery out of the reach of children so that they do not accidently swallow the battery. If your child has swallowed the battery, consult your doctor immediately. (applicable to the SSG-5100 only). ● Swallowing the cylindrical (button type) battery can cause serious damage to your internal organs. If this happens, contact a doctor immediately. 208 209 Supported Resolutions for each 3D Mode These specifications apply to the 16:9 display ratio only. HDMI ● 3D Mode: (L/R), (T/B) Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 210 Component Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Digital Channel Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 25 Videos/Photos Refer to the "Photo, Video, and Music File Limitations" section. Computer via HDMI Cable. The optimal resolution for computers connected to the TV via an HDMI cable is 1920 x 1080. If you select another resolution, the TV may not display 3D images correctly and may not be able to display the computer video in full screen. 210 211 Read Before Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition " Availability depends on the specific model and area. Precautions for Voice, Motion and Face Recognition Face Recognition ● This product saves thumbnail images of users' faces for use during the Face Login. ● Logging into the Smart Hub via Face Recognition may be less secure than logging in using an ID and password. Using the TV Camera ● Under some circumstances and under certain legal conditions, the use/misuse of the TV camera may result in illegal actions. There may be obligations under local privacy laws regarding the protection of individuals concerning personal data and on the free movement of such data, and possibly other laws including criminal laws regulating camera surveillance both in the workplace and elsewhere. ● By using the TV camera, users agree that it will not be used (i) in locations where cameras are generally prohibited (such as bathrooms, locker rooms or changing rooms), (ii) in any manner that will result in an invasion of a person’s privacy, or (iii) in violation of any applicable laws, regulations or statutes. 212 Motion Control ● Motion Control uses the camera. For Motion Control to work, you must be within the camera's recognition range. The camera's recognition range varies depending on the ambient light level and other factors. ● Run the Motion Control Environment Test before using Motion Control to determine the camera's recognition range. ● You may experience physical fatigue when using Motion Control for extended periods Voice Control ● Voice Control does not support signs such as the minus (-) symbol and special characters, neither a word nor sentence that contains numbers or signs. It may be not available for certain languages or dialects, or in some areas. It also differs in performance depending on the selected language, pronunciation, voice sound level, and ambient noise. ● Voice Text Input requires that you agree to any third-party app’s voice privacy policy and that you provide Samsung with the your MAC address and other private information. ● Voice Text Input lets you enter text using voice commands instead of a mouse, keyboard, or remote control. This feature is particularly useful for searching, browsing the web, and using applications. ● You must agree to the following privacy notices before using Interactive Voice Control: – Voice Recognition Privacy Notice and Nuance Privacy Notice 212 213 Requirements for Using Voice, Motion, or Face Recognition Requirements for Using Voice Recognition ● The voice recognition rate varies depending on the volume/tone, pronunciation, and ambient sound environment (TV sound and ambient noise). Requirements for Using Motion Recognition ● Before using motion recognition, make sure the TV's camera has been turned on. ● You should be located between 1.5m and 3.5m from the camera. The actual recognition range may vary depending on the camera angle and other factors. ● Motion Control relies on the TV camera and therefore will not function if the camera is pointed up or down. Adjust the camera's angle using the wheel on the back of the camera. Do not point the camera directly at the sun or any other light source or obstruct its view. ● For the camera to recognise movement, you have to stand out from the background. ● The appropriate ambient brightness is 50 to 500 lux. (100 Lux: Bathroom, 400 Lux: Living Room) ● Avoid direct sunlight when using Motion Control. ● Run the Motion Control Environment Test to assess the camera's recognition range before using Motion Control. 214 Requirements for using Face Recognition ● You should be located between 1.5m and 4.0m from the camera. The actual recognition range may vary depending on the camera angle and other factors. ● The appropriate ambient brightness is 50 to 500 lux. (100 Lux: Bathroom, 400 Lux: Living Room) ● Face Recognition can recognise up to 5 different users at a time. ● The TV may have difficulty recognising twins and people with similar faces as two different individuals. ● Note the following when using Face Recognition: – Do not cover your face with a hat, a pair of sunglasses, or your hair. – Your entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the camera from recognising your face accurately. – Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed and as neutral as possible. – When you log into your Samsung account, your facial expression must be the same as the facial expression you had when you registered. Facial expression you had during the registration process. 214 215 Read Before Using SAMSUNG APPS ● Due to the product characteristics featured on the Samsung Smart Hub, as well as limitations in available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some Smart Hub features may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees. Visit http://www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. Services and content availability are subject to change without prior notice. ● Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility whatsoever for any interruption of app services caused by the service provider for any reason. ● Application services may be provided in English only and available content may vary depending on the area. ● For more information about applications, visit the applicable service provider's website. ● An unstable Internet connection may cause delays or interruptions. In addition, applications may terminate automatically depending on the network environment. If this occurs, check your Internet connection and try again. ● Application services and updates may become unavailable. ● Application content is subject to change by the service provider without prior notice. ● Specific services may vary depending on the version of the application installed on the TV. ● An application's functionality may change in future versions of the application. If this occurs, run the application's tutorial or visit the service provider's website. ● Depending on the service provider's policies, certain applications may not support multitasking. 216 Web Browser Restrictions ● Select Web Browser. The browsing screen may differ from the one on your computer. ● The web browser is not compatible with Java applications. ● You cannot download files. If you attempt to download a file, you will receive an error message instead. ● The web browser may not be able to access certain websites. ● Playing Flash videos may be restricted. ● E-commerce for online purchases is not supported. ● With websites that have scrollable windows, scrolling a window can result in corrupted characters. ● ActiveX is not supported. ● Certain options are not accessible in Link Browsing mode. (Switch to Pointer Browsing to activate those options.) ● Only a limited number of fonts are supported. Certain symbols and characters may not be displayed properly. ● The response to remote commands and the resulting on-screen display may be delayed while a webpage is loading. ● Loading a webpage may be delayed or suspended completely with certain operating systems. ● The copy and paste operations are not supported. ● When composing an email or a simple message, certain functions such as the font size and colour selection may not be available. ● There is a limit to the number of bookmarks and the size of the log file that can be saved. ● The number of windows that can be opened concurrently varies depending on the search conditions and the TV model. 216 217 ● The web browsing speed will vary depending on the network environment. ● Playing embedded video automatically disables PIP. Video playback may not commence after PIP is disabled. In this case, you will have to reload the page. ● The web browser supports .mp3 audio files only. ● The web browser supports a specific file format for importing and exporting bookmarks. (Compatible Format: Netscape-bookmark file- 1) ● The folder tree information is not included when importing and exporting bookmarks. ● Exporting bookmarks to a USB device connected to the TV saves the bookmarks under a folder named "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark". ● If the Clock (System > Time > Clock) has not been set, the browsing history will not be saved. ● The browsing history is saved from latest to oldest, with the oldest entries being overwritten first. ● Depending on the types of video/audio codecs supported, it might not be possible to play certain video and audio files while playing Flash content. ● Video sources from PC-optimised streaming service providers may not play properly on our proprietary web browser. ● Using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard automatically disables PIP. (Except when entering a URL.) 218 Photo, Video, and Music File Limitations ● The TV supports MSC (Mass Storage Class) USB devices only. MSC is a class designation for mass USB Drives. Types of MSC devices include external hard drives, flash card readers, and digital cameras. (USB hubs are not supported.) These kinds of devices must be connected directly to the TV's USB port. The TV may not be able to recognise the USB device or read the files on the device if it is connected to the TV via a USB extension cable. Do not disconnect the USB device while transferring files. USB ● When connecting an external hard drive, use the USB (HDD) port. We recommend that you use an external hard drive with its own power adapter. HDD ● Certain digital cameras and audio devices may not be compatible with the TV. ● If there are multiple USB devices connected to the TV, the TV might not be able to recognise some or all the devices. USB devices that use high-power input should be connect the USB [5V, 1A] port. ● The TV supports the FAT, exFAT, and NTFS file systems. ● After sorting files in the Folder view mode, the TV can display up to 1000 files per folder. If the USB device contains more than 8,000 files and folders, however, some files and folders might not be accessible. ● The PTP (pier to pier) connection mode is available only for digital cameras. If you connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV using PTP mode, the TV will not recognise it. Storage Device File Transfers Storage device containing media content Target device USB Device DLNA Device, SugarSync, Dropbox, SkyDrive, Mobile Device Camera DLNA Device DLNA Device USB Device SugarSync, Dropbox, SkyDrive USB Device Mobile Device USB Device 218 219 Supported External Subtitles " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. Name Format MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub or .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb SMPTE-TT Text .xml Supported Internal Subtitles " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. Name Container Xsub AVI SubStation Alpha MKV Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV SubRip MKV VobSub MKV MPEG-4 Timed text MP4 TTML in smooth streaming MP4 SMPTE-TT TEXT MP4 SMPTE-TT PNG MP4 220 Supported Image Formats and Resolutions " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. File Extension Format Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640 *.png PNG 4096x4096 *.bmp BMP 4096x4096 *.mpo MPO 15360x8640 Supported Music Formats and Codecs " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. File Extension Format Codec Note *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to 2 channels *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channels *.wma WMA WMA Supports up to 10 Pro 5.1 channels WMA lossless audio is not supported Supports up to the M2 profile *.wav wav wav *.mid *.midi midi midi Supports type 0 and type 1 "Seek" not supported Available only on USB storage devices *.ape ape ape NonSmart not supported *.aif *.aiff AIFF AIFF *.m4a ALAC ALAC 220 221 Supported Video Codecs " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. File Format Container Video Codecs Resolution Frame Rate (fps) Bitrate (Mbps) Audio Codec Motion JPEG 1280x720 30 HEVC(H.265) *.avi *.mkv H.264 BP / MP / HP *.asf *.wmv AVI MKV DivX 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6 Dolby Digital LPCM *.mp4 *.mov ASF MP4 MPEG4 SP/ASP ADPCM(IMA, MS) AAC *.3gp *.vro 3GP MOV Window Media Video v9(VC1) 1920x1080 FHD: MAX 30 HD: MAX 60 30 HE-AAC WMA *.mpg *.mpeg FLV VRO MVC Dolby Digital Plus MPEG(MP3) *.ts *.tp VOB PS MPEG2 DTS(Core, LBR) G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) *.trp *.mov TS SVAF MPEG1 *.flv *.vob Microsoft MPEG-4 v1, v2, v3 *.svi *.m2ts H.263 Sorrenson 1280x720 MAX 30 *.mts *.divx Window Media Video v7(WMV1) ,v8(WMV2) VP6 *.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis 222 Other Restrictions ● Codecs may not function properly if there is a problem with the content data. ● Video content does not play or does not play correctly if there is an error in the content or container. ● Sound or video may not work if they have standard bit rates/frame rates above the TV’s compatibility ratings. ● If the Index Table is wrong, the Seek (Jump) function does not work. ● When playing video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly because of data transmission speeds. ● Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player. ● HEVC codec is only available in MKV /MP4 / TS containers. Video Decoders ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 (does not support FMO/ASO/RS) ● VC1 AP L4 is not supported. ● All video codecs excluding WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, and VP6: Below 1280x720: 60 frame max Above 1280x720: 30 frame max ● GMC 2 or above is not supported. ● SVAF supports Top/Bottom, Side by side, and Left/Right view sequence types (2 ES). ● This can only support the BD MVC specifications. Audio Decoders ● WMA is supported up to 10 Pro 5.1 channels. Supports up to the M2 profile. ● This does not support WMA 10Pro M3. ● WMA lossless audio is not supported. ● QCELP and AMR NB/WB are not supported. ● Vorbis is supported for up to 2 channels. ● Dolby Digital Plus is supported for up to 5.1 channels. ● The DTS LBR codec is only available for MKV / MP4 /TS containers. 222 223 Restrictions Restrictions to PIP (Picture-in-Picture) ● PIP cannot be used while Smart Hub or 3D is active. ● Turning off the TV automatically disables PIP. ● Playing a game or using the karaoke feature on the main screen can result in lower PIP picture quality. ● To watch TV as a picture-in-picture, the main screen's source must be set to Component or HDMI. The PIP window supports TV signals only. " Availability depends on the specific model and area. 224 Read After Installing the TV Picture Sizes and Input Signals Picture Size Input Signal Auto Wide ATV, EXT, AV, DTV (576i/p, 720p), DTV (1080i, 1080p) 16:9 ATV, EXT, AV, DTV (576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), Component (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), HDMI (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p) Wide Zoom, Zoom ATV, EXT, AV, DTV (576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), Component (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), HDMI (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p) 4:3 ATV, EXT, AV, DTV (576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), Component (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), HDMI (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p) Smart View 1 HDMI (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p) Smart View 2 DTV (576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p), HDMI (480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p) Screen Fit DTV (1080i, 1080p), Component (1080i, 1080p), HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) The Picture Size setting is applied to the current source. The applied Picture Size will remain in effect whenever you select that source unless you change it. Installing an Anti-Theft Kensington Lock A Kensington Lock is a physical device that can be used to protect the TV against theft. Look for the Kensington slot on the back of the TV. The slot has a K icon next to it. To use the lock, wrap the lock cable around an object that is too heavy to carry and then thread it through the TV's Kensington slot. The lock is sold separately. The method of using a Kensington Lock may differ for each TV model. Refer to the Kensington Lock manual for more information. 224 225 Read Before Setting Up a Wireless Internet Connection Wireless Internet Precautions ● This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g /n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. Video files stored on a device connected to the TV via DLNA may not play back smoothly. ● To use wireless Internet, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or a communications failure. ● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security system, you need to create a security key using characters and numbers. This security key is then needed to connect to a security-enabled AP. Wireless Security Protocols The TV only supports the following wireless network security protocols and is unable to connect to non-certified wireless routers: ● Authentication Modes: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK ● Encryption Types: WEP, TKIP, AES In compliance with the newest Wi-Fi certification specifications, Samsung TVs do not support WEP or TKIP security encryption in networks running in the 802.11n mode. If the wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect the TV to your network using PBC (Push Button Configuration) or a PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS automatically configures the SSID and WPA key settings. 226 Computer Connection Precautions When you connect your TV to a computer, set the computer's video card to one of the standard resolutions listed in the tables below or on the next page. The TV will automatically adjust to the resolution you choose. Note that the optimal and recommended resolution is 1920 x1080. Choosing a resolution not included in the tables can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator turning on. Refer to the user manual of your graphics card for compatible resolutions. IBM Resolution (DotsxLines) Display Format Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal/ Vertical) 720x400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ MAC Resolution (DotsxLines) Display Format Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal/ Vertical) 640x480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- 832x624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- 1152x870 75Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/- 226 227 VESA DMT Resolution (DotsxLines) Display Format Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal/ Vertical) 640x480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- 640x480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- 640x480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- 800x600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ 800x600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ 800x600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ 1024x768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- 1024x768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- 1024x768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ 1152x864 75Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+ 1280x720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1280x800 60Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+ 1280x1024 60Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+ 1280x1024 75Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+ 1366x768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+ 1440x900 60Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+ 1600x900RB 60Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+ 1680x1050 60Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+ 1920x1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+ 228 LED 4500 series After connecting a computer to the TV, set the screen resolution for the TV on the computer. The optimal resolution is 1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz. If it is set to any other than in the table below, the TV may display nothing. Set the resolution properly, referring to the user guide of the computer or its graphic card. IBM Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 720x400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ MAC Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 640x480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- 832x624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- VESA DMT Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 640x480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- 640x480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- 640x480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- 800x600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ 800x600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ 800x600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ 1024x768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- 1024x768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- 1024x768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ 1280x720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1366x768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+ 228 229 Supported Video Resolutions Resolution (DotsxLines) Display Format Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal/ Vertical) 720(1440)x480i 60Hz 15.734 59.940 27.000 -/- 720(1440)x576i 50Hz 15.625 50.000 27.000 -/- 720x480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 27.000 -/- 720x576 50Hz 31.250 50.000 27.000 -/- 1280x720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1280x720 50Hz 37.500 50.000 74.250 +/+ 1920x1080i 60Hz 33.750 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1920x1080i 50Hz 28.125 50.000 74.250 +/+ 1920x1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+ 1920x1080 50Hz 56.250 50.000 148.500 +/+ 1920x1080 30Hz 33.750 30.000 74.250 +/+ 1920x1080 25Hz 28.125 25.000 74.250 +/+ 1920x1080 24Hz 27.000 24.000 74.250 +/+ 230 Licence DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit divx. com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and 7,548,853. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Premium Sound | 5.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 6,285,767, 8,027,477, 5,319,713, 5,333,201, 5,638,452, 5,771,295, 5,970,152, 5,912,976, 7,200,236, 7,492,907, 8,050,434, 7,720,240, 7,031,474, 7,907,736 and 7,764,802. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Studio Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 230 231 The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Trademark: Rovi and Rovi Guide are trademarks of Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Licence: The Rovi Guide system is manufactured under licence from Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Patent: The Rovi Guide system is protected by patents and patent applications filed in the US, Europe, and other countries including one or more of the United States patents 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 issued to Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries. Disclaimer: Rovi Corporation and/or its subsidiaries and related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the programme schedule information or other data in the Rovi Guide system and cannot guarantee service availability in your area. In no event shall Rovi Corporation and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection with the accuracy or availability of the programme schedule information or other data in the Rovi Guide system. Open Source Licence Notice Open Source used in this product can be found on the following webpage. (http://opensource.samsung.com) Open Source Licence Notice is written only English. 232 Glossary ● 480i/480p/720p/1080i/1080p Generally refers to the number of effective scanning lines that determines the screen's resolution. There are two scanning methods: interlaced and progressive. – Scanning Sequential projection of pixels to form images. The higher the number of pixels, the clearer and more vivid the images. – Progressive A sequential scanning method that scans every line, one after another. – Interlaced A staggered scanning method that scans every other line until the end of the screen and then fills in the remaining lines. Example) If the number of horizontal scan lines is 480i Scans 240 lines from start to finish and then scans the remaining 240 lines for a total of 480 lines. * General differences between 480i and 480p are as follows: 480i 480p Horizontal Frequency 15.75Khz 31.5Khz FPS 30 60 Lines on Screen 480 480 ● ARC (Audio Return Channel) Generally, a separate RCA or optical cable needs to be connected in order for the TV audio to be heard through an AV receiver. With receivers that support ARC, however, digital audio can be transmitted via the HDMI cable only. ● DVI (Digital Visual Interface) Connecting the TV's DVI connector to a computer's DVI connector via an HDMI-to-DVI cable lets you use the TV as a computer monitor. However, HDMI-to-DVI cables deliver video signals only. You must connect a set of speakers to the computer using a separate cable to hear the computer's audio. ● HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI is a method of transmitting both video and audio signals via a single cable. 232 233 ● Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses If the network requires a dynamic IP address, use an ADSL modem or router that supports the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values the TV needs to access the Internet, so they do not have to be entered manually. Most home networks use a dynamic IP address. If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually when setting up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If the network requires a static IP address, use an ADSL modem that supports DHCP. ADSL modems that support DHCP also allow static IP addresses. ● Ethernet Ethernet is a LAN (Local Area Network) that uses coaxial cables standardised by the IEEE. ● Component Connection Component connections are mostly used for game consoles and transmit the video signal by splitting it into a luminance signal (Y) and two colour signals (Pb and Pr). The connector is marked as [Component IN]_(Pr, Pb, Y) on the back of the TV. On some devices, it is sometimes marked as Cr, Cb, Y. Cb and Cr are the digital conversions of the Pb and Pr signals. The connectors are normally colour-coded red (R), blue (B), and green (G) and offer the best picture quality possible for an analogue connection. manuel d’utilisation Multiroom Link imaginez les possibilités Nous vous remercions d’avoir choisi ce produit Samsung. Pour avoir accès à d’avantage de services, veuillez enregistrer votre produit sur le site www.samsung.com/register • Périphériques pris en charge : La fonction est disponible pour tous les modèles 2014 qui prennent en charge Multiroom Link. • La qualité du son peut être détériorée par les conditions du réseau sans fil. • La connexion réseau peut être détériorée et peut même être perdue si l'environnement du réseau se dégrade avec le temps. A Connexion à votre réseau 1 Tous les périphériques doivent être connectés au même routeur. 2 L'application Multiroom peut uniquement être utilisée avec des solutions Multiroom audio sans fil ou une barre audio qui possède la fonction Multiroom Link. ❚ Connexion à un réseau si vous ne possédez pas de HUB • Si vous possédez un HUB, la connexion est plus facile. Si vous souhaitez utiliser un HUB pour votre connexion, veuillez vous reporter au manuel de chaque périphérique. 2 44 Wireless Router Internet TV Système de divertissement à domicile Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Périphériques intelligents (Android ou iOS) Lecteur de disque Link Mate Blu-ray ❚ Connexion à un réseau si vous possédez un HUB • Si vous possédez un HUB, la connexion est plus facile. Si vous souhaitez utiliser un HUB pour votre connexion, veuillez vous reporter au manuel de chaque périphérique. • Des HUB peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays et certaines régions. Si vous souhaitez acheter un HUB, contactez le revendeur auprès de qui vous avez acheté votre Multiroom audio sans fil ou contactez le service après-vente de Samsung. 3 44 Wireless Router Concentrateur Internet TV Système de divertissement à domicile Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Périphériques intelligents (Android ou iOS) Lecteur de disque Link Mate Blu-ray A Regroupement ❚ Regroupement des périphériques pour écouter le même son depuis chaque périphérique • Grâce au regroupement, vous pouvez écouter la même musique ou le même son depuis plusieurs périphériques. ` Configuration du regroupement avec l'application Multiroom A Mode Multiroom contre mode Surround Mode Multiroom Mode Surround Remarque Utilisation spécifique Vous pouvez écouter le même son depuis plusieurs enceintes dans chaque espace séparé. Placez plusieurs enceintes Multiroom dans le même espace et écoutez du son ambiophonique. Restrictions Le son de chaque périphérique peut être en retard sur la vidéo et le son du périphérique lisant le contenu source. Ne peut pas être utilisé avec plusieurs unités situées dans différentes pièces ou différents espaces. 4 44 Système de divertissement à domicile Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Même son Multiroom Audio 1 + [Samsung] Group To create a new group. choose some speakers. Aucune musique Multiroom Audio 1 Multiroom Audio 1 + [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Soundbar 2 Source Editer Dissocier Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music No Music Source Source Surround Surround Group Groupe Sélectionner tout Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 Aucune musique Choisissez des haut-parleurs. [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Annuler Terminé A Écouter du son ou de la musique en mode Multiroom ❚ Écouter du son TV depuis des périphériques situés dans différentes pièces • Vous pouvez écouter le son de votre téléviseur via un Home cinéma, une barre de son ou un Multiroom audio sans fil. • Le son de chaque périphérique peut être en retard sur la vidéo et le son de la télévision. • Vous pouvez configurer du son TV Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ou du menu de votre téléviseur. ` Configuration du son TV Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ` Configuration du son TV Multiroom à l'aide du menu de votre téléviseur • Paramètres ; Son ; Paramètres haut-parleur ; Multiroom Link ; Multiroom 5 44 Paramètres haut-parleur Sortie son TV Multiroom Link XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX Multiroom Link ~ Paramètres Surround OK Multiroom Link Multiroom [HTS]Model Name 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [HTS]Model Name 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 [Samsung] M* 1 Multiroom Link Multiroom [HTS]Model Name 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [HTS]Model Name 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 [Samsung] M* 1 Multiroom Link Multiroom [HTS]Model Name 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [HTS]Model Name 2 [Samsung] M* 3 Utiliser Ne pas utiliser [Samsung] M* 1 Paramètres Paramètres Paramètres w q TV Wireless Router Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Système de divertissement à domicile [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music No Music Source Source Surround Surround Group Groupe Source Wi-Fi Écoutez la musique stockée depuis d'autres périphériques et flux en ligne. [HTS]Model Name 1 [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 TV soundbar Bluetooth AUX Annuler OK ❚ Écouter du son Home Cinéma depuis des périphériques situés dans différentes pièces • Vous pouvez écouter du son depuis votre Home Cinéma via un autre Home cinéma, une barre de son ou un Multiroom audio sans fil. • Vous pouvez configurer du son Home Cinéma Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ou du menu de votre Home Cinéma. Reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous. ` Configuration du son Home Cinéma Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ` Configuration du son Home Cinéma Multiroom à l'aide du menu de votre Home Cinéma • Paramètres ; Son ; Paramètres haut-parleu ; Multiroom Link 6 44 Système de divertissement à domicile Wireless Router Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Système de divertissement à domicile Multiroom Link Multiroom [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Multiroom Link Multiroom [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Multiroom Link Sélectionnez un haut-parleur à utiliser. [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Ne pas utiliser [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Ne pas utiliser Modif. Nom Fermer Multiroom Link Sélectionnez un haut-parleur à utiliser. [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Utiliser [HTS]Model Name 2 Ne pas utiliser Modif. Nom Fermer [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music No Music Source Source Surround Surround Group Groupe Source Wi-Fi Écoutez la musique stockée depuis d'autres périphériques et flux en ligne. [HTS]Model Name 1 [HTS]Model Name 2 TV soundbar Bluetooth AUX Annuler OK ❚ Écouter du son du lecteur de disques Blu-ray depuis des périphériques situés dans différentes pièces • Vous pouvez écouter du son de votre lecteur de disques Blu-ray via un Home cinéma, une barre de son ou un Multiroom audio sans fil. • Vous pouvez configurer du son Blu-ray Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ou du menu de votre lecteur de disques Blu-ray. Reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous. ` Configuration du son Blu-ray Multiroom à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ` Configuration du son Blu-ray Multiroom à l'aide du menu de votre lecteur de disques Blu-ray • Paramètres ; Son ; Paramètres haut-parleu ; Multiroom Link 7 44 Lecteur de disque Blu-ray Wireless Router Multiroom audio sans fil Barre audio Système de divertissement à domicile Multiroom Link Multiroom [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Multiroom Link Multiroom [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Multiroom Link Multiroom [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Utiliser Ne pas utiliser [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music No Music Source Source Surround Surround Group Groupe Source Wi-Fi Écoutez la musique stockée depuis d'autres périphériques et flux en ligne. [BD]Model Name 1 [BD]Model Name 2 TV soundbar Bluetooth AUX Annuler OK A Écouter du son ou de la musique en mode Surround Sound • Le mode Surround Sound sera mis à jour prochainement. • Si la source audio est en format 2 canaux, le son est produit uniquement via les enceintes qui correspondent aux côtés avant gauche et avant droit. • Si la connexion réseau est instable, le mode Surround Sound peut être annulé automatiquement. • Lors du réglage du mode Surround Sound, il est recommandé de régler les enceintes avant gauche et avant droite sur une puissance de sortie égale. ❚ Écouter du son ambiophonique (Surround Sound) à l'aide de plusieurs périphériques audio • Vous pouvez configurer le mode Surround Sound à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ou du menu de votre téléviseur. Reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous. ` Configuration du son ambiophonique TV à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ` Configuration du son ambiophonique TV à l'aide du menu de votre téléviseur • Paramètres ; Son ; Paramètres haut-parleu ; Multiroom Link ; Surround 8 44 Multiroom Link Paramètres Surround Avant gauche 2CH Avant droite Paramètres haut-parleur Sortie son TV Multiroom Link XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX ~ XX XXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX Multiroom Link ~ Paramètres Surround OK Multiroom Link Paramètres Surround Avant gauche Avant droite [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 2CH Multiroom Link Paramètres Surround Avant gauche Avant droite [Samsung] M* 1 2CH w q [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M*2 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M*2 [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music Source Surround Group Source Wi-Fi [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 Connectez vos haut-parleurs et [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 via Wi-Fi pour bénéficier d'un son surround. TV soundConnect Bluetooth AUX Annuler OK Multiroom Audio 1 Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Source Surround Group Stéréo et surround : Configuration 2CH 1. Sélectionnez le nombre de chaînes que vous souhaitez configurer. [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] M* 4 Avant G Avant D 2. Placez les haut-parleurs selon la disposition qui vous convient. Annuler Suivant Stéréo et surround : Configuration 2CH 1. Sélectionnez le nombre de chaînes que vous souhaitez configurer. [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] M* 4 [Samsung] M* 5 Avant G Avant D 2. Placez les haut-parleurs selon la disposition qui vous convient. Annuler Suivant Multiroom Audio 1 Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 Source Surround Group Stéréo et surround : Configuration 2CH 1. Sélectionnez le nombre de chaînes que vous souhaitez configurer. [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] M* 4 Avant G Avant D 2. Placez les haut-parleurs selon la disposition qui vous convient. Annuler Suivant ❚ Écouter du son ambiophonique (Surround Sound) à l'aide d'une barre de son ou des périphériques audio Multiroom • Vous pouvez configurer le mode Surround+SoundBar à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ou du menu de votre téléviseur. Reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous. • Si la source audio transférée à la barre de son est encodée au format DTS, le son est produit uniquement via les enceintes qui correspondent aux côtés avant gauche et avant droit. ` Configuration du mode Surround+SoundBar à l'aide de l'application Multiroom ` Configuration du mode TV Surround +SoundBar à l'aide du menu de votre téléviseur • Paramètres ; Paramètres haut-parleu ; Multiroom Link ; Soundbar+Surround 9 44 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 Aucune musique Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe [Samsung] Soundbar 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 2 [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 Aucune musique Source Source Surround Surround Groupe Groupe Multiroom Audio 1 [Samsung] Soundbar 1 No Music Source Surround Group Source Wi-Fi [TV] Samsung Model Name 1 Connectez vos haut-parleurs et [TV] Samsung Model Name via 1 Wi-Fi pour bénéficier d'un son surround. TV soundConnect Bluetooth AUX Annuler OK Stéréo et surround : Configuration [Samsung] Soundbar [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung]... Avant G+D Surround G Surround D Déplacez le haut-parleur en le faisant glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité. Annuler Suivant Avant G+D Stéréo et surround : Configuration [Samsung] Soundbar [Samsung] M* 1 [Samsung] M* 2 [Samsung] M* 3 [Samsung] M* 4 Surround G Surround D Déplacez le haut-parleur en le faisant glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité. Annuler Suivant Paramètres Multiroom Link OK Test haut-parleurs Soundbar+Surround Niveau du volume Surround gauche Surround droite Paramètres haut-parleur OK Sortie son TV Multiroom Link XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Multiroom Link ~ XXXXXXXX ~ Paramètres Surround ~ XXXXXXXX ~ XXXXXXXX w q E-MANUAL Merci d'avoir acheté ce produit Samsung. Afin de bénéficier d'un service plus complet, veuillez enregistrer votre produit à l'adresse www.samsung.com/register Modèle______________ N° de série______________ Contenu Guide de démarrage Utilisation de la Smart TV Utilisation de la Commande vocale Utilisation de la Commande par mouv. Utilisation du Samsung Smart Control Utilisation du Mode Foot Utilisation du mode Multi-Link Screen Modification de chaînes Connexion de l'antenne et de périphériques externes Connexion - Avec antenne Connexion de périphériques vidéo 15 Connexion - HDMI 16 Connexion - Composant 17 Connexion - Entrée externe 18 Connexion - SCART Utilisation des haut-parleurs externes pour écouter la télévision 19 Connexion - HDMI (ARC) 20 Connexion - Audio numérique (Optique) 21 Connexion - Casque 22 Connexion - Sortie audio Connexion à un ordinateur 24 Connexion - Port HDMI 25 Connexion - Port HDMI (DVI) 26 Connexion - Samsung Link 26 Connexion - Réseau domestique (DLNA) Connexion à l'aide d'un périphérique mobile 28 Ecran du périphérique mobile sur le téléviseur (Réplication de l'écran) 29 Connexion de périphériques mobiles sans routeur sans fil (Wi-Fi Direct) 29 Connexion - Samsung Link 30 Connexion - Réseau domestique (DLNA) 30 Connexion via Smart View 2.0 31 Nom du téléviseur sur le réseau Sélection du signal d'entrée Utilisation d'une télécommande et de périphériques Insertion des piles dans le Samsung Smart Control 32 Lorsque cette icône d'alarme s'affiche à l'écran... Pairage du Samsung Smart Control 33 Reconnexion du Samsung Smart Control Utilisation du Samsung Smart Control 34 Fonctions des boutons 37 Utilisation du téléviseur en déplaçant le Samsung Smart Control 38 Utilisation du téléviseur avec le Touchpad 40 Affichage de la télécommande à l'écran (télécommande virtuelle) Commande des périphériques externes à l'aide de la télécommande du téléviseur (Config. télécommande universelle) 42 Configuration de la télécommande universelle 43 Commande des périphériques externes à l'aide de la télécommande du téléviseur Commande du téléviseur à l'aide d'un clavier 45 Connexion d'un clavier 46 Utilisation du clavier Commande du téléviseur à l'aide d'une souris 47 Connexion d'une souris 48 Utilisation de la souris Saisie de texte à l'aide d'un clavier QWERTY 49 Utilisation des autres fonctions II Connexion Internet Mise en place d'une connexion câblée à Internet 50 Connexion d'un câble LAN 51 Connexion automatique à un réseau Internet câblé 51 Connexion manuelle à un réseau Internet câblé Mise en place d'une connexion sans fil à Internet 53 Connexion automatique à un réseau Internet sans fil 54 Connexion manuelle à un réseau Internet sans fil 55 Connexion à un réseau Internet sans fil avec WPS Résolution des problèmes de connectivité Internet 56 Résolution des problèmes de connectivité Internet câblé 57 Résolution des problèmes de connectivité Internet sans fil Réseau mobile 58 Nom de modèle et services de télécommunications pris en charge Vérification de l'état de la connexion Internet Fonctions Smart Plusieurs fonctions sur un seul écran 60 Lancement du mode Multi-Link Screen 60 Utilisation du mode Multi-Link Screen 60 Sélection d'une fonctionnalité 60 Changement de chaîne/Réglage du volume Smart Hub 61 Test des connexions Smart Hub 62 Ouverture de Barre d'accès rapide 63 Accès à l'écran Panneau 63 Utilisation du Didacticiel Smart Hub 63 Réinitialisation de Smart Hub Utilisation de Smart Hub avec Compte Samsung 64 Création d'un Compte Samsung 66 Connexion au Compte Samsung 67 Liaison de mes comptes Samsung et d'application 68 Modification et ajout d'informations à un Compte Samsung 68 Suppression de tous les comptes Samsung du téléviseur Utilisation du panneau Jeux 69 Utilisation des fonctions du menu contextuel 69 Installation et exécution d'un jeu 71 Gestion des jeux téléchargés ou achetés Utilisation du panneau SAMSUNG APPS 73 Utilisation des fonctions du menu contextuel 74 Installation d'une application 75 Applications par défaut 75 Utilisation de Web Browser 78 Réorganisation des applications dans l'écran SAMSUNG APPS 79 Suppression d'une application du téléviseur 79 Notation/évaluation d'une application 80 Mise à jour d'une application 80 Fonctionnalités SAMSUNG APPS Utilisation du panneau Mes Programmes 84 Utilisation des fonctions du menu contextuel 84 Affichage d'informations détaillées sur le programme 85 Configuration des Param. Sur la TV Utilisation du panneau MON VIDEO CLUB 87 Utilisation des fonctions du menu contextuel 88 Visionnage d'un film/programme télévisé 88 Restriction du visionnage du contenu acheté 89 Notation et partage d'un contenu acheté Lecture de vidéos, de photos et de musique (MULTIMEDIA) 91 Lecture de contenu multimédia à partir d'un périphérique USB 92 Lecture de contenu multimédia enregistré sur un ordinateur/ périphérique mobile 94 Lecture de contenu multimédia à partir d'un Storage Service 95 Boutons et fonctions disponibles pendant le visionnage de photos 96 Boutons et fonctions disponibles pendant le visionnage de vidéos 98 Boutons et fonctions disponibles pendant la lecture de musique 99 Fonctions de l'écran Liste de contenu multimédia Commande du téléviseur par la voix 100 Activation du Commande vocale 102 Utilisation interactive de la fonction Interaction vocale Commande du téléviseur à l'aide de gestes 103 Test de la luminosité ambiante à l'aide de la caméra du téléviseur 104 Activation de la fonction Commande par mouv. 107 Présentation de l'écran Commande par mouv. Connexion à l'aide de la Reconnaissance faciale 110 Enregistrement de votre visage sur votre Compte Samsung 111 Définition de la méthode de connexion sur Reconnaissance II III faciale 111 Connexion au Compte Samsung par reconnaissance faciale Fonctions Regarder la télévision et Enregistrer Informations sur les diffusions numériques en bref 112 Utilisation du mode Guide 113 Consultation des informations sur les programmes actuels 113 Changement de signal de diffusion 113 Informations relatives au signal numérique et intensité Enregistrement de programmes 114 Création d'un périphérique USB d'enregistrement 116 Enregistrement de programmes 117 Boutons et fonctions disponibles pendant l'enregistrement d'un programme 118 Gestion de la liste Programmer enregistrement 119 Visionnage de programmes enregistrés 122 Gestion des fichiers enregistrés Configuration d'un Programmer visionnage 123 Configuration d'un Programmer visionnage 124 Gestion de la liste Programmer visionnage Utilisation du Timeshift Utilisation de la Liste des chaînes Enregistrement, suppression et modification de chaînes 127 Enregistrement et suppression de chaînes 127 Modification de chaînes enregistrées 128 Activation/désactivation de la protection par mot de passe sur des chaînes 128 Verrouillage/Déverrouillage de chaînes 128 Modif. num. chaîne Création d'une Liste des favoris personnelle 129 Enregistrement d'une chaîne comme Favoris 130 Affichage des chaînes de la Liste des favoris uniquement 130 Modification d'une Liste des favoris Accentuation du réalisme des manifestations sportives 133 Activation du Mode Foot 133 Extraction automatique des moments forts 134 Fonctions disponibles en Mode Foot 135 Visionnage d'un événement sportif enregistré en Mode Foot Fonctions de prise en charge du visionnage de programmes télévisés 136 Affichage des sous-titres 136 Options de sous-titre 137 Modification de la Langue du télétexte 137 Texte numérique 138 Visionnage de programmes en mode PIP 139 Recherche des chaînes disponibles 140 Sélection des options audio du programme 140 Description audio Utilisation des Paramètres chaînes 141 Pays (zone) 141 Recherche manuelle 142 Réglage précis de l'écran 143 Transf. liste chaînes 143 Supprimer profil opérateur CAM 143 Système satellite 145 Interface commune Réglages de l'image et du son Changement du mode d'image et réglage de la qualité d'image 146 Choix du mode d'image le mieux adapté à l'environnement télévisuel 147 Réglage de la qualité de l'image de chaque mode d'image 148 Réglage précis de chaque mode d'image (Paramètres avancés) 150 Réglage de l'image pour faciliter le visionnage (Options d'image) Affichage en 3D 152 Démarrage de la 3D 153 Changement du Mode 3D 154 Réglage de l'Effet 3D Fonctions de prise en charge des images 155 Visionnage de programmes en mode PIP 156 Changement des options Format de l'image et Position 157 Diffusion du son seulement avec écran éteint (Image désactivée) 157 Réinitialisation des paramètres Mode Image IV Changement de Mode Son et utilisation d'effets sonores 158 Choix du Mode Son le mieux adapté à l'environnement 159 Utilisation d'effets sonores Fonctions de prise en charge du son 160 Choix des haut-parleurs 160 Désignation du type d'installation du téléviseur 160 Écoute du son du téléviseur via un périphérique audio Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth Samsung 161 Écoute du son du téléviseur via des haut-parleurs compatibles Samsung Multiroom Link 162 Activation du son (Paramètres supplém.) 163 Écoute d'un son audio 3D en mode Mode 3D 163 Réinitialisation de tous les paramètres sonores Général Réglage de l'heure et utilisation de la minuterie 164 Réglage de l'heure 165 Utilisation des minuteries Utilisation des fonctions de protection de brûlage d'écran et d'économie d'énergie 167 Prévention de brûlage d'écran 167 Utilisation des fonctions Energy Saving (Écon. Énergie) Utilisation du Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 168 Configuration d'Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 169 Utilisation de Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Utilisation du e-Manual 170 Lancement du e-Manual 170 Fonctionnalités supplémentaires du e-Manual 171 Mise à jour du e-Manual vers la dernière version Mise à jour du logiciel 172 Mise à jour du logiciel par Internet 172 Mise à jour du logiciel à l'aide d'une connexion USB 173 Activation des mises à jour logicielles automatiques 173 Mise à jour du logiciel via une chaîne satellite Protection du téléviseur contre le piratage et les programmes malveillants 174 Vérification du téléviseur et des supports de mémorisation connectés 174 Recherche automatique lorsque le téléviseur est sous tension 174 Ajout automatique d'un programme malveillant à Blocked List (Liste bloquée) Utilisation d'autres fonctions 175 Activation du Guide vocal pour les personnes malvoyantes 176 Activation des Contraste élevé 176 Réglage de la Transparence menu 177 Étendue de la zone de sélection de Smart Hub 177 Changement du Langue des menus 177 Vérification des Notifications 177 Configuration d'un Mot de passe 178 Contrôle Parental 178 Activation du Mode Jeu 178 Couleurs riches et qualité d'image supérieure (BD Wise) 179 Activation/désactivation de Retour son. 179 Verrouillage/déverrouillage des touches du panneau 179 Affichage/masquage du logo Samsung au démarrage 179 Activation du démarrage plus rapide du téléviseur 180 Enregistrement du téléviseur comme appareil certifié DivX (visionnage de films DivX payants) 181 Rétablissement des paramètres d'usine du téléviseur 181 Conversion du téléviseur en un modèle de présentation (réservé aux magasins de détail) Service de diffusion de données 182 Service de diffusion de données auto 182 Utilisation du service de diffusion de données HbbTV Connexion à une fente de carte de visionnage TV 184 Pour connecter la carte d'interface commune (CI CARD, CARTE CI), procédez comme suit : 185 Pour connecter l'adaptateur de CARTE CI, procédez comme suit : Fonction Télétexte IV V Résolution des problèmes Obtention de Assistance 189 Support technique via Gestion à distance 191 Recherche des informations dont vous avez besoin pour le service Vous rencontrez un problème d'écran 191 Test de l'image Le son n'est pas clairement perceptible 194 Test du son Les images 3D ne sont pas clairement visibles. 195 Test de la qualité de l'image 3D Vous rencontrez un problème d'émission L'ordinateur ne se connecte pas. Impossible de me connecter à Internet. Service de diffusion de données La fonction Programmer enregistrement/Timeshift ne s'exécute pas. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ne fonctionne pas. Le lancement/l'utilisation des applications est compliqué. Impossible de lire mon fichier. Je veux réinitialiser le téléviseur. Autres problèmes Notes et précautions Avant d'utiliser les fonctions Enregistrement et Timeshift 203 Avant d'utiliser les fonctions Enregistrement et Programmer enregistrement 204 Avant d'utiliser la fonction Timeshift Déni de responsabilité S Recommandation 205 S Recommandation avec interaction vocale 205 S Recommandation A lire avant d'utiliser le mode d'affichage en 3D 206 Précautions relatives à la fonction 3D 209 Résolutions prises en charge pour chaque mode 3D À lire avant d'utiliser les fonctions Voix, Mouvement ou Reconnaissance faciale 211 Précautions relatives à la reconnaissance vocale, gestuelle et faciale 213 Spécifications relatives à l'utilisation des fonctions Voix, Mouvement, ou Reconnaissance faciale À lire avant d'utiliser les SAMSUNG APPS Web Browser Restrictions Restrictions concernant les fichiers Photo, Vidéo et Musique 218 Transferts de fichiers de périphériques de stockage 219 Sous-titres externes pris en charge 219 Sous-titres internes pris en charge 220 Formats d'image et résolutions pris en charge 220 Formats musicaux et codecs pris en charge 221 Codecs vidéo pris en charge Restrictions 223 Restrictions des fonctions PIP (Picture-in-Picture) À lire après l'installation du téléviseur 224 Tailles de l'image et signaux d'entrée 224 Installation d'un verrou antivol Kensington 225 À lire avant la configuration d'une connexion à Internet sans fil Précautions d'usage pour la connexion d'un ordinateur 226 IBM 226 MAC 227 VESA DMT 228 Série LED 4500 228 IBM 228 MAC 228 VESA DMT Résolutions vidéo prises en charge Licence Glossaire VI 1 Utilisation de la Smart TV " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Samsung Smart TV Le téléviseur Smart TV permet de télécharger des applications et de surfer sur Internet. Connectez le téléviseur à Internet pour pouvoir en profiter pleinement. Connexion du téléviseur à Internet 1. Connectez le téléviseur à Internet via une connexion avec ou sans fil. 2. Configurez lesParamètres réseau via Réseau > Paramètres réseau. Guide de démarrage 2 Configuration de Smart Hub de configuration du téléviseur Smart TV sont disponibles sur les 5 panneaux du Smart Hub. Avant d'utiliser le Smart Hub, définissez la région et le fournisseur de services. Vous pouvez profiter de plusieurs services proposés par Samsung en suivant les instructions à l'écran. Configurer Smart Hub Configurer Smart Hub L'utilisation du Smart Hub Smart Hub est l'élément principal de cette Samsung Smart TV. Il est divisé en 5 panneaux, qui s'affichent dans la partie supérieure de l'écranSmart Hub. Vous pouvez accéder à Mes Programmes, MON VIDEO CLUB, Jeux, MULTIMEDIA et SAMSUNG APPS. Accédez àSmart Hub > Mes Applications et téléchargez les applications depuis le téléviseur Samsung Smart TV. " Consultez la section "Smart Hub" pour plus d'informations. 2 3 Téléchargement d'applications Déplacez la zone de surbrillance sur une application et appuyez de manière prolongée sur le Touch Pad. Lorsqu'un menu contextuel s'affiche, sélectionnez Téléch. pour pouvoir profiter de l'application. 4 Utilisation de la Commande vocale " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Configuration de Commande vocale Certaines des fonctions de ce téléviseur peuvent être commandées par la voix. Activez Commande vocale via Système > Commande vocale. Système Accessibilité Configuration Mode Foot Langue des menus Français Paramètres Smart Control Config. télécommande universelle Commande vocale L'utilisation du Commande vocale Appuyez sur la toucheVOICE duSamsung Smart Controlet prononcez « Aide » pour afficher la liste complète des commandes vocales. " Consultez la section "Commande du téléviseur par la voix" pour plus d'informations. 4 5 Utilisation de la Commande par mouv. " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Configuration de Commande par mouv. Certaines des fonctions de ce téléviseur peuvent être commandées par les mouvements des mains et des doigts. ActivezCommande par mouv. via Système > Commande par mouv.. Système Configuration Mode Foot Langue des menus Français Paramètres Smart Control Config. télécommande universelle Commande vocale Commande par mouv. Activé L'utilisation du Commande par mouv. 1. Levez une main et tendez l'index, jusqu'à ce qu'un curseur en forme de flèche apparaisse à l'écran. 2. Bougez la main pour déplacer le pointeur sur l'écran, puis cliquez sur un bouton en mimant un clic avec une souris. " Pour utiliser la fonctionnalité Commande par mouv., il est nécessaire de connecter une caméra TV (vendue séparément). " Consultez la section "Commande du téléviseur à l'aide de gestes" pour plus d'informations. 6 Utilisation du Samsung Smart Control " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Samsung Smart Control Le Samsung Smart Control vous permet d'accéder à diverses fonctions via les boutons SEARCH, KEYPAD, SOURCE, et VOICE. Vous pouvez également déplacer le pointeur en appuyant délicatement et de manière prolongée sur le Touch Pad. Configuration de Samsung Smart Control Configurez le Samsung Smart Control en fonction de vos préférences. La configuration comprend la sensibilité du Touch Pad et la taille des commandes à l'écran. Configurez lesParamètres Smart Control via Système > Paramètres Smart Control. Système Accessibilité Configuration Mode Foot Langue des menus Français Paramètres Smart Control Config. télécommande universelle Commande vocale 6 7 Utilisation de Samsung Smart Control Les touches vous permettent d'effectuer les opérations souhaitées. Déplacez la Samsung Smart Control tout en appuyant sur le Touch Pad pour déplacer la sélection. 8 Accès au menu d'options à l'aide de Samsung Smart Control L'angle d'inclinaison du Samsung Smart Control peut varier en fonction du modèle concerné. Après avoir appuyé de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU, le menu s'affiche automatiquement. Après avoir appuyé de manière prolongée sur la touche }, « Info » s'affiche automatiquement. Après avoir appuyé de manière prolongée sur la touche b, le menu s'affiche automatiquement. Après avoir appuyé de manière prolongée sur la touche }, « Info » s'affiche automatiquement. " Consultez la section "Utilisation du Samsung Smart Control" pour plus d'informations. 8 9 Utilisation du Mode Foot " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Activation du Mode Foot Mode Foot active les paramètres de son et d'image optimaux, ce qui vous donne l'impression de vivre les événements sportifs en direct. Pour enregistrer un événement sportif, connectez le périphérique USB(HDD) au téléviseur, puis accédez à Système > Mode Foot. Définissez Mode Foot sur Activé. Système Accessibilité Configuration Mode Foot Langue des menus Français Paramètres Smart Control Config. télécommande universelle Commande vocale L'utilisation du Mode Foot Lorsque vous regardez un événement sportif, appuyez sur Enter (Entrée), puis sur le bouton souhaité à l'écran. Enregistrez, utilisez les réseaux sociaux, zoomez, sauvegardez et regardez les moments forts. " Consultez la section "Accentuation du réalisme des manifestations sportives" pour plus d'informations. 10 Utilisation du mode Multi-Link Screen " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Exécution de Multi-Link Screen Appuyez sur la touche M.SCREEN. Utilisation de Multi-Link Screen Après avoir sélectionné l'écran souhaité à l'aide duSamsung Smart Control, parcourez un site Web ou exécutez une application tout en regardant la TV. Si vous appuyez sur la touche M.SCREEN, vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction prise en charge parMulti-Link Screen. " Consultez la section "Plusieurs fonctions sur un seul écran" pour plus d'informations. 10 11 Modification de chaînes " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Activation de la fonction de modification de chaînes ExécutezModifier la chaîne, puis accédez à Diffusion > Modifier la chaîne. Diffusion Recherche automatique Antenne Câble Liste des chaînes Guide Gestionnaire prog. Modifier la chaîne Modif. favoris Modification du numéro ou du nom d'une chaîne Sélectionnez Changer numéro, puis modifiez l'ordre de la chaîne dans la liste. Pour supprimer des chaînes de la liste, sélectionnez les chaînes à l'aide du Touch Pad ou des touches de direction du Samsung Smart Control. Changer numéro Changer numéro 12 Tri de la liste des chaînes 1. Sélectionnez une chaîne numérique dans la liste, puis Options > Tri. 2. Sélectionnez la méthode de tri souhaitée. Tri Options Options 13 Connexion - Avec antenne " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Pour recevoir les signaux diffusés, une antenne doit être connectée au téléviseur. " Il n'est pas nécessaire de connecter une antenne en cas d'utilisation d'un décodeur câble ou d'un récepteur satellite. En fonction de votre environnement télévisuel, connectez le câble d'antenne approprié au connecteur pour antenne du téléviseur comme illustré sur le schéma. Il est préférable de relier les deux connecteurs à l'aide d'un commutateur multiple ou d'un commutateur Diseqc. etc., et de régler Type de connexion d'antenne sur Double. " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Connexion de l'antenne et de périphériques externes 14 Connexion de périphériques vidéo " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Votre téléviseur est pourvu de plusieurs connecteurs d'entrée vidéo destinés à la connexion de périphériques externes tels que des décodeurs câble, des récepteurs satellite, des lecteurs Blu-ray, des lecteurs de DVD, des caméscopes et des consoles de jeux. Ci-dessous figure une liste de connecteurs spécifiques, classés par ordre décroissant de qualité d'image. ● HDMI ● Composant ● Entrée externe Pour obtenir une qualité d'image optimale, connectez le périphérique vidéo via un connecteur HDMI. Si le périphérique est dépourvu de connecteur HDMI, essayez de le connecter via un connecteur Composant pour obtenir la deuxième meilleure qualité d'image. " Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. " Consultez le manuel d'utilisation du périphérique externe pour le connecter au téléviseur. Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs de périphériques externes peuvent varier en fonction du fabricant. 14 15 Connexion - HDMI Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Nous recommandons les types de câbles HDMI suivants : ● Câble HDMI haute vitesse ● Câble HDMI haute vitesse avec Ethernet Les câbles HDMI présentent certaines exigences : " Utilisez un câble HDMI de 14 mm de diamètre maximum. " L'utilisation d'un câble HDMI non certifié peut entraîner l'affichage d'un écran vide ou une erreur de connexion. " Il se peut que certains périphériques et câbles HDMI ne soient pas compatibles avec le téléviseur en raison de spécifications HDMI différentes. " Ce téléviseur ne prend pas en charge la fonctionnalité HDMI Ethernet Channel. Ethernet est un réseau local (LAN, Local Area Network) intégrant des câbles coaxiaux normalisés par l'IEEE. Suivez les indications du schéma pour connecter à l'aide du câble HDMI le connecteur de sortie HDMI du périphérique vidéo au connecteur d'entrée HDMI du téléviseur. " Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pourrez sélectionner le périphérique externe connecté à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 16 Connexion - Composant Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur que vous avez acheté. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Suivez les indications du schéma pour connecter, à l'aide du câble Composant, les connecteurs d'entrée Composant du téléviseur aux connecteurs de sortie Composant du périphérique. Assurez-vous que les couleurs des câbles correspondent à celles des connecteurs. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pourrez sélectionner le périphérique externe connecté à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 16 17 Connexion - Entrée externe Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Suivez les indications du schéma pour connecter à l'aide du câble AV les connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur aux connecteurs de sortie AV du périphérique. Si vous utilisez les connecteurs d'entrée AV du téléviseur, connectez le câble vidéo au connecteur Y. Certains modèles sont également équipés d'un connecteur vidéo. Dans ce cas, connectez le câble sur le connecteur vidéo. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pourrez sélectionner le périphérique externe connecté à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 18 Connexion - SCART " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur que vous avez acheté. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Connectez le connecteur d'entrée Péritel du téléviseur au connecteur de sortie Péritel du périphérique à l'aide d'un câble Péritel. Une connexion audio supplémentaire n'est pas nécessaire, dans la mesure où le câble Péritel véhicule également les signaux audio. " La norme SCART (Péritel) permet uniquement le transfert de vidéo en définition standard. 18 19 Utilisation des haut-parleurs externes pour écouter la télévision Votre téléviseur est pourvu de plusieurs connecteurs d'entrée audio destinés à la connexion de périphériques tels que des lecteurs Blu-ray ou des lecteurs de DVD, mais aussi de sortie audio tels que des amplificateurs. Les connecteurs figurent dans la liste suivante. ● ARC (canal de retour audio) ● Audio numérique (Optique) Vous devez tenir compte de plusieurs éléments lors de l'utilisation de l'entrée audio : ● Pour bénéficier d'une meilleure qualité audio, il est conseillé d'utiliser un récepteur AV. ● Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. ● Consultez le manuel d'utilisation du périphérique externe pour le connecter au téléviseur. Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs de périphériques externes peuvent varier en fonction du fabricant. Connexion - HDMI (ARC) " Il se peut que certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge la fonction ARC. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur que vous avez acheté. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. La fonction ARC (canal de retour audio) permet la sortie de son numérique en utilisant uniquement un câble HDMI. Elle n'est cependant disponible que via le port HDMI (ARC), et uniquement quand le téléviseur est connecté à un récepteur AV compatible ARC. " Le nombre, les noms et les emplacements des connecteurs peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Connectez un câble HDMI sur le connecteur HDMI (ARC) du téléviseur et sur le connecteur de sortie HDMI du périphérique. 20 Connexion - Audio numérique (Optique) " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. La connexion d'un récepteur AV au téléviseur via un connecteur audio numérique (optique) vous permet d'écouter des sons numériques. La connexion d'un périphérique à l'aide d'un câble optique ne désactive pas automatiquement les haut-parleurs du téléviseur. Pour désactiver les haut-parleurs du téléviseur, définissez Sortie son TV (Son > Paramètres hautparleur > Sortie son TV) sur une fonction autre que Haut-parleur TV. Réglez le volume du périphérique audio à l'aide de sa télécommande. " L'émission d'un bruit inhabituel par le périphérique audio en cours d'utilisation peut indiquer un problème au niveau de ce dernier. Dans ce cas, demandez l'assistance du fabricant du périphérique audio. " Le son numérique est disponible uniquement avec les programmes prenant en charge la norme canal 5.1. Suivez les indications du schéma pour connecter à l'aide du câble optique le connecteur de sortie audio numérique du téléviseur au connecteur d'entrée audio numérique du périphérique. 20 21 Connexion - Casque " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Suivez les indications du schéma pour connecter un casque au connecteur de sortie adéquat. Utilisez uniquement un casque équipé d'une prise de type TRS à 3 conducteurs. Les volumes du casque et du téléviseur se règlent indépendamment l'un de l'autre. Lorsque le casque est connecté, les haut-parleurs du téléviseur sont muets, et certaines options de Son désactivées. " De même, selon le modèle, il est possible que certains connecteurs ne soient pas pris en charge. 22 Connexion - Sortie audio " La disponibilité dépend du modèle et de la région concernés. Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. " Les noms des connecteurs et leurs emplacements peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Suivez les indications du schéma pour raccorder, à l'aide du câble audio, le connecteur de sortie audio du téléviseur au connecteur d'entrée audio du périphérique. 22 23 Connexion à un ordinateur Vous pouvez connecter directement un ordinateur au téléviseur ou au réseau afin d'afficher l'écran ou le contenu de l'ordinateur sur le téléviseur. Pour cela, procédez comme suit : ● Connexion via le port HDMI Vous pouvez connecter l'ordinateur au téléviseur à l'aide du câble HDMI afin d'afficher l'écran de l'ordinateur sur le téléviseur. ● Connexion au port HDMI (DVI) Vous pouvez connecter un ordinateur au téléviseur en reliant le port DVI de l'ordinateur au port HDMI du téléviseur à l'aide du câble DVI vers HDMI afin d'afficher l'écran de l'ordinateur sur le téléviseur. ● Connexion via Samsung Link Vous pouvez accéder rapidement aux fichiers audio, vidéo et photo enregistrés sur un ordinateur équipé du logiciel Samsung Link, même sans connecter directement le téléviseur à l'ordinateur. ● Connexion via le réseau domestique (DLNA) Vous pouvez accéder rapidement aux fichiers audio, vidéo et photo enregistrés sur un ordinateur en connectant ce dernier et le téléviseur au même routeur ou point d'accès. 24 Connexion - Port HDMI Avant de connecter un périphérique externe ou un câble au téléviseur, commencez par vérifier le numéro du modèle du téléviseur. Un autocollant avec le numéro du modèle figure au dos du téléviseur. Le mode de connexion varie selon le modèle. Dans le cas d'une connexion HDMI, il est recommandé d'utiliser l'un des types de câbles HDMI suivants : ● Câble HDMI haute vitesse ● Câble HDMI haute vitesse avec Ethernet " Utilisez un câble HDMI de 14 mm de diamètre maximum. L'utilisation d'un câble HDMI non certifié peut entraîner l'affichage d'un écran vide ou une erreur de connexion. " Il se peut que certains périphériques et câbles HDMI ne soient pas compatibles avec le téléviseur en raison de spécifications HDMI différentes. " Ce téléviseur ne prend pas en charge la fonctionnalité HDMI Ethernet Channel. Ethernet est un réseau local (LAN, Local Area Network) basé sur des câbles coaxiaux normalisés par l'IEEE. " Certains ordinateurs ne prennent pas en charge l'interface HDMI en raison des spécifications de l'adaptateur graphique. Si c'est le cas pour votre ordinateur, utilisez un câble DVI vers HDMI pour connecter l'ordinateur au téléviseur. Suivez les indications du schéma pour raccorder le connecteur de sortie HDMI du périphérique vidéo externe au connecteur d'entrée HDMI du téléviseur à l'aide du câble HDMI. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pourrez sélectionner le périphérique externe connecté à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 24 25 Connexion - Port HDMI (DVI) Si l'adaptateur graphique dont votre ordinateur est équipé ne prend pas en charge l'interface HDMI, connectez ce dernier au téléviseur à l'aide du câble DVI (Digital Visual Interactive) vers HDMI. Notez toutefois que la connexion DVI vers HDMI est prise en charge uniquement par le port HDMI et qu'elle ne prend pas en charge la transmission des signaux audio. Pour diffuser le son de l'ordinateur, raccordez le haut-parleur externe au connecteur de sortie audio de l'ordinateur. " Pour plus d'informations sur les résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur, consultez la section "Précautions d'usage pour la connexion d'un ordinateur". Suivez les indications du schéma pour raccorder le port HDMI (DVI) du téléviseur au port de sortie DVI de l'ordinateur à l'aide du câble DVI vers HDMI. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pourrez sélectionner le périphérique externe connecté à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 26 Connexion - Samsung Link Vous pouvez accéder rapidement aux fichiers audio, vidéo et photo enregistrés sur un ordinateur équipé du logiciel Samsung Link. Vous pouvez également utiliser Samsung Link pour lire et afficher le contenu d'un ordinateur qui a été enregistré sur Samsung Link sous votre compte Samsung, même si l'ordinateur et le téléviseur ne sont pas connectés au même routeur ou point d'accès. 11 Accédez au portail de service et contenu de Samsung (http://link.samsung.com) via un ordinateur et connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. " Pour installer le logiciel de bureau Samsung Link, vous devez d'abord vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. Si vous n'en avez pas, créez-en un. 22 Installez le logiciel de bureau Samsung Link. Une fois l’installation terminée, l’ordinateur est enregistré sur Samsung Link.